Computer Science - McGraw

Transcription

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Computer Science ~ Contents
Network Security ............................................................ 46
Neural Networks ............................................................ 48
Numerical Methods & Analysis....................................... 50
Analysis of Algorithms .................................................... 34
Object-Oriented Software Engineering ............................ 55
Artificial Intelligence....................................................... 49
Operating Systems .......................................................... 42
Assembly Languages ....................................................... 40
Other Languages ............................................................ 32
Business Data Communications ...................................... 44
Parallel Computing/Processing........................................ 42
C .................................................................................... 18
C++ .............................................................................. 19
C# .................................................................................. 31
Cobol ............................................................................. 24
Coding and Information Theory ...................................... 59
Computer Organization and Architecture ....................... 41
Pascal ............................................................................. 24
Professional References .................................................. 59
Programming Languages and Program Design ................ 36
Robotics ......................................................................... 49
Simulation ...................................................................... 52
Computer/Machine Vision .............................................. 50
Software Engineering ...................................................... 54
Data Communications .................................................... 44
SQL ................................................................................ 40
Data Structures in C ........................................................ 34
Data Structures in C++ ................................................. 33
Data Structures/CS2/ Data Structures in Java ................... 32
Database Systems ........................................................... 39
Database Systems and Design......................................... 39
Digital Logic/Logic Design .............................................. 37
Software Project Management ........................................ 57
TCP/IP ............................................................................ 48
Theory of Computation................................................... 37
UML ............................................................................... 57
Unix ............................................................................... 28
Distributed Database ...................................................... 40
Visual Basic .................................................................... 21
Distributed Systems ........................................................ 44
Visual Studio.Net............................................................ 31
Discrete Mathematics ..................................................... 35
DreamWeaver ................................................................ 31
XHTML........................................................................... 30
XML ............................................................................... 30
Fortran............................................................................ 23
Graphics ......................................................................... 48
HTML ............................................................................. 29
Internet Literacy .............................................................. 58
Introduction to Computer Science/CS1 ........................... 17
Java ................................................................................ 24
LAN................................................................................ 46
Multimedia ..................................................................... 58
.NET Programming ......................................................... 31
1
Main Content & New Titles page.i1 1
11/15/06 3:06:13 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CIT-Application Software ~
Contents
Web Programming/Design -HTML .................................. 80
Web Programming/Design - Java .................................... 80
Word Brief...................................................................... 66
Word Complete .............................................................. 67
APPLICATION SOFTWARE:
Word Intro...................................................................... 66
Access Brief .................................................................... 70
Access Complete ............................................................ 70
Access Intro .................................................................... 70
Excel Brief ...................................................................... 67
Excel Complete .............................................................. 68
Excel Intro ...................................................................... 68
Internet / World Wide Web ............................................ 75
Multimedia ..................................................................... 76
Networking - Essentials ................................................... 79
Networking - Wireless Networking ................................. 80
Office Complete ............................................................. 64
CERTIFICATION:
Certification - Career Skills/Certification .......................... 79
Certification - CISCO ...................................................... 78
Certification - CISSP ........................................................ 78
Certification - CWAP ...................................................... 78
Certification - MCDBA .................................................... 78
CompTIA Certification - A+ ........................................... 76
Oracle - Database ........................................................... 84
Oracle - SQL .................................................................. 83
Sun Microsystem Certification ........................................ 83
Office Intro ..................................................................... 63
Operating Systems - Windows XP ................................... 85
Operating Systems - Mac OS X ....................................... 85
Other Databases ............................................................. 71
Other Programming ........................................................ 75
Other Spreadsheets......................................................... 69
PowerPoint Complete ..................................................... 72
PowerPoint Intro............................................................. 71
Programming - Java......................................................... 74
Programming - Visual Basic ........................................... 72
Security - Information Security ........................................ 81
Security - Network Security ............................................ 81
Training & Assessment.................................................... 72
2
11/15/06 3:06:13 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CIT - Computer Concepts ~
Contents
E-Commerce ~ Contents
Business Process & Re-Engineering ............................... 113
Brief Computer Concepts................................................ 88
Comprehensive Computer Concepts............................... 90
Software ......................................................................... 91
Customer Relations Management.................................. 119
Cyberlaw and Ethics ..................................................... 114
Cyberpreneurship ......................................................... 115
E-Commerce Cases Book .............................................. 116
Internet Marketing ........................................................ 114
Introduction to E-Commerce ......................................... 112
Knowledge Management .............................................. 116
Professional E-Commerce ............................................. 120
Management Information
Risk Management ......................................................... 115
Systems ~ Contents
Supply Chain Management ........................................... 117
Strategy ........................................................................ 115
Technology / Infrastructure ........................................... 112
Advanced MIS .............................................................. 106
Computers in Society / Computer Ethics ....................... 107
Database Management ................................................... 99
Database Management (Professional References) .......... 109
Data Communications / Telecommunications /
Office Systems ............................................................ 103
Data Mining ................................................................. 109
Decision Support Systems............................................. 104
Enterprise Resource Planning ........................................ 108
Information & Society ..................................................... 98
Introduction to Information Systems ............................... 95
Management Information Systems .................................. 96
Object-Oriented System Analysis & Design .................. 102
Project Management ..................................................... 104
System Analysis & Design............................................. 100
3
11/15/06 3:06:14 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Electrical Engineering ~ Contents General Engineering ~ Contents
Advanced Electronics ................................................... 134
Advanced Systems ........................................................ 136
Analog Integrated Circuits............................................. 129
Analog OP Amps .......................................................... 133
Circuits ......................................................................... 123
Coding and Information Theory .................................... 149
Communications .......................................................... 145
Communications IV: Advanced .................................... 148
Communications IV: Signals & Systems ........................ 148
Computer Architecture/Microprocessors ....................... 153
Computer Engineering: Advanced ................................ 154
Control Systems ............................................................ 135
Digital Communications ............................................... 147
Digital Control.............................................................. 135
Digital Integrated Circuits ............................................. 130
Digital Logic Design ..................................................... 150
Digital Signal Processing............................................... 143
Digital Signal Processing Laboratory ............................. 144
Electricity & Electronics ................................................ 137
Electromagnetics........................................................... 140
Electromagnetics (Advanced) ........................................ 141
Electronics I: Analog/Digital.......................................... 126
Electronics II: Solid-State ............................................... 130
Electronics III: Optics .................................................... 134
Electronics III: Solid-State (Advanced) ........................... 134
High Voltage Engineering ............................................. 140
Introduction to Electrical Engg for Non
EE Majors ................................................................. 123
Machinery .................................................................... 136
Microwaves & Antennas ............................................... 141
Neural Networks/Fuzzy Logic ....................................... 152
Power Electronic .......................................................... 139
Power Systems.............................................................. 139
Probability & Random Processes................................... 149
Professional References ................................................ 157
Robotics/Intelligent Systems.......................................... 153
Signals & Systems ......................................................... 142
Systems/Controls (Robotics) .......................................... 136
Telecommunications .................................................... 155
VLSI Digital .................................................................. 133
B.E.S.T .......................................................................... 172
Computer/Programming ............................................... 165
Engineering Design....................................................... 162
Engineering Ethics ........................................................ 168
Engineering Graphics & Drawing.................................. 164
Engineering Math/Statistics ........................................... 170
Entrepreneurship .......................................................... 176
Environmental Engineering ........................................... 167
Finite Element Methods ................................................ 171
Internet ......................................................................... 175
Introduction/Problem Solving ....................................... 163
Numerical Methods ...................................................... 169
Project Management: Engineering................................. 175
Technical Writing ......................................................... 168
4
11/15/06 3:06:15 PM
2007-2008
NEW
Economics
Titles
2007-2008
NEW
Computer
Science
Titles
Java ................................................................................ 24
LAN................................................................................ 46
C .................................................................................... 18
C++ .............................................................................. 19
C# .................................................................................. 31
Cobol ............................................................................. 24
Multimedia ..................................................................... 58
.NET Programming ......................................................... 31
Neural Networks ............................................................ 48
Other Languages ............................................................ 32
Pascal ............................................................................. 24
Robotics ......................................................................... 49
Simulation ...................................................................... 52
SQL ................................................................................ 40
TCP/IP ............................................................................ 48
DreamWeaver ................................................................ 31
UML ............................................................................... 57
Fortran............................................................................ 23
Unix ............................................................................... 28
Graphics ......................................................................... 48
Visual Basic .................................................................... 21
HTML ............................................................................. 29
XHTML........................................................................... 30
XML ............................................................................... 30
5
11/15/06 3:06:15 PM
2007-2008
NEW
Computer
Science
Titles
2007-2008
NEW
Economics
Titles
2007 New Titles

BATES
Principles of Voice and Data Communications .......44
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225732-8 / MHID: 0-07-225732-6

BRADLEY
Advanced Programming Using Visual
Basic.Net, 3e ...........................................................21
2008 New Titles

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319157-7 / MHID: 0-07-319157-4

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351717-9 / MHID: 0-07-351717-8

CHARATAN
Java in Two Semesters, 2e .......................................25
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710889-2 / MHID: 0-07-710889-2
(McGraw-Hill UK title)

DASGUPTA
Introduction to Algorithms ......................................34
FOROUZAN
Data Communications Networking, 4e ...................44

KELTON
Simulation with Arena, 4e .......................................52
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325989-5 / MHID: 0-07-325989-6

LAW
Simulation Modeling and Analysis, 4e .....................52
FOROUZAN
Network Security ....................................................46
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332753-2 / MHID: 0-07-332753-0

PATT
Introduction to Computing Systems, 3e ..................17
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299465-0 / MHID: 0-07-299465-7

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325032-8 / MHID: 0-07-325032-5

CHAPRA
Applied Numerical Methods with Mathlab
for Engineers and Scientists, 2e ...............................50
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313290-7 / MHID: 0-07-313290-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352340-8 / MHID: 0-07-352340-2

CHAPMAN
Fortran 95/2003 for Scientists & Engineers, 3e ........23
VAN DE VEER
Human Computer Interaction .................................50
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-709996-1 / MHID: 0-07-709996-6

WU
A Comprehensive Introduction to
Object-Oriented Programming with Java ................24
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331708-1 / MHID: 0-07-331708-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329441-4 / MHID: 0-07-329441-1

ROSEN
Discrete Mathematics and Its Applications, 6e........35
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322972-0 / MHID: 0-07-322972-5

SCHACH
Object-Oriented and Classical Software
Engineering, 7e .................................................. 54,55
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319126-3 / MHID: 0-07-319126-4

SCHOU
Information Assurance for the Enterprise: A
Roadmap to Information Security ...........................47
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225524-9 / MHID: 0-07-225524-2

TUCKER
Programming Languages, 2e ....................................36
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286609-4 / MHID: 0-07-286609-8

TYMANN
Schaum's Outline of Principles of Computer
Science ....................................................................17
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-146051-4 / MHID: 0-07-146051-9
6
11/15/06 3:06:16 PM
2007-2008
NEW CIT-Application
2007-2008
NEW EconomicsSoftware
Titles Titles
Contents
Word Brief...................................................................... 66
Word Complete .............................................................. 67
Word Intro...................................................................... 66
Access Brief .................................................................... 70
Access Complete ............................................................ 70
Access Intro .................................................................... 70
Excel Brief ...................................................................... 67
Excel Complete .............................................................. 68
CERTIFICATION:
Excel Intro ...................................................................... 68
Multimedia ..................................................................... 76
Office Complete ............................................................. 64
Office Intro ..................................................................... 63
Oracle - Database ........................................................... 84
Oracle - SQL .................................................................. 83
Other Databases ............................................................. 71
7
11/15/06 3:06:17 PM
2007-2008
NEW EconomicsSoftware
Titles Titles
2007-2008
NEW CIT-Application
2007 New Titles

BATES
Principles of Voice & Data Communications...........79
2008 New Titles

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351718-6 / MHID: 0-07-351718-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225732-8 / MHID: 0-07-225732-6

BRADLEY
Basic.Net, 3e ...........................................................73
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351717-9 / MHID: 0-07-351717-8



GILSTER
Fundamentals of Wireless Networking ....................80
SCHOU
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225524-9 / MHID: 0-07-225524-2
COULTHARD
Advantage Series: Microsoft Office 2007 ................64
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351922-7 / MHID: 0-07-351922-7
GRAVES
Microsoft Powerpoint 2007: A Professional
Approach.................................................................72
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351918-0 / MHID: 0-07-351918-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225668-0 / MHID: 0-07-225668-0

BRADLEY
Programming in Visual C# 2005, 2e ........................72

HINKLE
Microsoft Word 2007: A Professional Approach .....67
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351919-7 / MHID: 0-07-351919-7

JUAREZ
Microsoft Access 2007: A Professional Approach.....70
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351920-3 / MHID: 0-07-351920-0

O'LEARY
O'Leary Series: Microsoft Office 2007 ....................64
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351916-6 / MHID: 0-07-351916-2

O'LEARY
O'Leary Series: Microsoft Office Access 2007
Brief ........................................................................70
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329454-4 / MHID: 0-07-329454-3

O'LEARY
O'Leary Series: Microsoft Office Excel 2007
Brief ........................................................................67
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329451-3 / MHID: 0-07-329451-9

O'LEARY
Introduction ............................................................68
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329451-3 / MHID: 0-07-329451-9

O'LEARY
O'Leary Series: Microsoft Office Word 2007
Brief ........................................................................66
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329452-0 / MHID: 0-07-329452-7

O'LEARY
Introductory ............................................................66
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329450-6 / MHID: 0-07-329450-0

STEWART
Microsoft Excel 2007: A Professional Approach ......68
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351921-0 / MHID: 0-07-351921-9
8
11/15/06 3:06:17 PM
2007-2008
NEW NEW
CIT - Computer
Concepts
2007-2008
Economics
Titles Titles
Contents
2007 New Titles

WILLIAMS
Using Information Technology, 7e ..........................88
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226071-7 / MHID: 0-07-226071-8
Brief Computer Concepts................................................ 88
Comprehensive Computer Concepts............................... 90
2008 New Titles
Software ......................................................................... 91

O'LEARY
Computing Essentials 2008 Complete, 19e ..............90
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110153-0 / MHID: 0-07-110153-5

O'LEARY
Computing Essentials 2008 Introductory, 19e .........88
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329468-1 / MHID: 0-07-329468-3
9
11/15/06 3:06:18 PM
2007-20082007-2008
NEW Management
Information
Systems Titles
NEW Economics
Titles
Systems ~ Contents
2007 New Titles

Advanced MIS .............................................................. 106
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294775-5 / MHID: 0-07-294775-6




CARR
Data Communications and Network
Security ...................................................................103
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297604-5 / MHID: 0-07-297604-7
BATES
Principles of Voice and Data
Communications .....................................................103
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225732-8 / MHID: 0-07-225732-6
Data Mining ................................................................. 109
AVISON
Information Systems Development, 4e ....................101
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711417-6 / MHID: 0-07-711417-5
[MH UK Title]
Office Systems ............................................................ 103
APPLEGATE
Corporate Information Strategy and
Management: Text and Cases, 7e ............................106
DePALMA
Annual Editions: Computers in Society
06/07, 13e ...............................................................107
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352832-8 / MHID: 0-07-352832-3
HAAG
Management Information Systems for the
Information Age with CD and MiSource, 6e ...........97
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323062-7 / MHID: 0-07-323062-6


HAYEN
SAP R/3 Enterprise Software ....................................108
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299067-6 / MHID: 0-07-299067-8

MANNINO
Database Design, Application Development,
and Administration, 3e ............................................99
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294220-0 / MHID: 0-07-294220-7

O’BRIEN
Introduction to Information Systems, 13e ...............96
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110710-5 / MHID: 0-07-110710-X

OLSON
Introduction to Business Data Mining .....................109
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-295971-0 / MHID: 0-07-295971-1

WHITTEN
Systems Analysis and Design Methods, 7e ...............100
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110766-2 / MHID: 0-07-110766-5
10
11/15/06 3:06:19 PM
2007-20082007-2008
NEW Management
Information
System Titles
NEW Economics
Titles
2008 New Titles

HAAG
Business Driven Technology, 2e ..............................95
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312368-4 / MHID: 0-07-312368-4

HAAG
Information Systems Essentials, 2e ..........................95
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351152-8 / MHID: 0-07-351152-8

O’BRIEN
Management Information Systems, 8e.....................96
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351154-2 / MHID: 0-07-351154-4

WHITTEN
Introduction to Systems Analysis and Design ..........100
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340294-9 / MHID: 0-07-340294-X
11
11/15/06 3:06:19 PM
2007-2008
NEW E-Commerce/Electrical
Engineering
2007-2008
NEW Economics
Titles Titles
Risk Management ......................................................... 115
Strategy ........................................................................ 115
2007 New Titles

BENTON
Purchasing and Supply Management .......................117
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352514-3 / MHID: 0-07-352514-6

BOWERSOX
Supply Chain Logistics Management, 2e..................117
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294788-5 / MHID: 0-07-294788-8

SIMCHI-LEVI
Designing and Managing the Supply Chain, 3e........118
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298239-8 / MHID: 0-07-298239-X
Electrical Engineering ~
Contents
Advanced Electronics ................................................... 134
Advanced Systems ........................................................ 136
Analog Integrated Circuits............................................. 129
Analog OP Amps .......................................................... 133
Circuits ......................................................................... 123
Coding and Information Theory .................................... 149
Communications .......................................................... 145
Communications IV: Advanced .................................... 148
Communications IV: Signals & Systems ........................ 148
Computer Architecture/Microprocessors ....................... 153
Computer Engineering: Advanced ................................ 154
Control Systems ............................................................ 135
Digital Communications ............................................... 147
Digital Control.............................................................. 135
Digital Integrated Circuits ............................................. 130
Digital Logic Design ..................................................... 150
Digital Signal Processing............................................... 143
Digital Signal Processing Laboratory ............................. 144
Electricity & Electronics ................................................ 137
Electromagnetics........................................................... 140
Electromagnetics (Advanced) ........................................ 141
Electronics I: Analog/Digital.......................................... 126
Electronics II: Solid-State ............................................... 130
Electronics III: Optics .................................................... 134
Electronics III: Solid-State (Advanced) ........................... 134
High Voltage Engineering ............................................. 140
EE Majors ................................................................. 123
Machinery .................................................................... 136
Microwaves & Antennas ............................................... 141
Neural Networks/Fuzzy Logic ....................................... 152
Power Electronic .......................................................... 139
Power Systems.............................................................. 139
Probability & Random Processes................................... 149
Robotics/Intelligent Systems.......................................... 153
Signals & Systems ......................................................... 142
Systems/Controls (Robotics) .......................................... 136
Telecommunications .................................................... 155
VLSI Digital .................................................................. 133
12
11/15/06 3:06:20 PM
2007-2008
NEWNEW
Electrical
Engineering
2007-2008
Economics
Titles Titles
2008 New Titles
2007 New Titles
ALCIATORE
Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement
Systems, 3e ..............................................................130


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322279-0 / MHID: 0-07-322279-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296305-2 / MHID: 0-07-296305-0

ALEXANDER
Fundamentals of Electric Circuits, 3e ...................... 123

FOROUZAN

HAYT
Engineering Circuit Analysis, 7e ..............................124

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326318-2 / MHID: 0-07-326318-4
MALVINO
Electronics Principles, 7e ........................................128

NEAMEN
Microelectronic Circuit Analysis and Design, 3e .....128

RIZZONI
Principles and Applications of Electrical
Engineering, 5e ........................................................123
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322033-8 / MHID: 0-07-322033-7

ROBERTS
Fundamentals Signals Systems .................................142
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330950-7 / MHID: 0-07-330950-8

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328596-2 / MHID: 0-07-328596-X

MARCOVITZ
Introduction to Logic and Computer Design
with CD ...................................................................150
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331417-4 / MHID: 0-07-331417-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322277-6 / MHID: 0-07-322277-1

JAEGER
Microelectronic Circuit Design, 3e .........................127
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330948-4 / MHID: 0-07-330948-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325032-8 / MHID: 0-07-325032-5

FRENZEL
Principles of Electronic Communication
Systems, 3e ..............................................................145
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322278-3 / MHID: 0-07-322278-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325643-6 / MHID: 0-07-325643-9

FOWLER
Electricity: Principles and Applications, 7e..............137
SCHULER
Electronics: Principles and Applications, 7e ............126
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331651-2 / MHID: 0-07-331651-2

TOKHEIM
Digital Electronics: Principles and
Applications, 7e.......................................................126
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322275-2 / MHID: 0-07-322275-5
SCHULTZ
Basic Electronics, 10e ..............................................127
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322276-9 / MHID: 0-07-322276-3

TRONT
PSpice for Basic Circuit Analysis, 2e .......................124
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326319-9 / MHID: 0-07-326319-2

TRONT
PSpice for Basic Microelectronics ...........................125
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326320-5 / MHID: 0-07-326320-6
13
11/15/06 3:06:20 PM
2007-2008
2007-2008
NEW
NEW
General
Economics
Engineering
TitlesTitles
General Engineering ~ Contents
2007 New Titles

B.E.S.T .......................................................................... 172
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297184-2 / MHID: 0-07-297184-3
GOTTFRIED
Spreadsheet Tools for Engineers Using Excel, 3e .....173

SMITH
Teamwork and Project Management, 3e ............ 173,175
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310367-9 / MHID: 0-07-310367-5
2008 New Titles
Internet ......................................................................... 175

CHAPMAN
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319157-7 / MHID: 0-07-319157-4

CHAPRA
Applied Numerical Methods with Matlab for
Engineers and Scientists, 2e .....................................169
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313290-7 / MHID: 0-07-313290-X

DORF
Technology Ventures: From Idea to
Enterprise, 2e ..........................................................176
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329442-1 / MHID: 0-07-329442-X

EIDE
Engineering Fundamentals and Problem
Solving, 5e ...............................................................163
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319158-4 / MHID: 0-07-319158-2

FINKLESTEIN
Pocket Book of Technical Writing for Engineers
& Scientists, 3e ........................................................168
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319159-1 / MHID: 0-07-319159-0

FORD
Design for Electrical and Computer Engineers ........162
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338035-3 / MHID: 0-07-338035-0

HOLTZAPPLE
Concepts in Engineering, 2e ....................................163
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319162-1 / MHID: 0-07-319162-0

PRITCHARD
Mathcad: A Tool for Engineers and Scientists
(BEST Series), 2e ................................................. 165,172
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319185-0 / MHID: 0-07-319185-X
14
11/15/06 3:06:21 PM
2007-2008 NEW Computer Science Titles
.NET Programming ......................................................... 31
Neural Networks ............................................................ 48
C .................................................................................... 18
C++ .............................................................................. 19
C# .................................................................................. 31
Cobol ............................................................................. 24
Other Languages ............................................................ 32
Pascal ............................................................................. 24
Robotics ......................................................................... 49
Simulation ...................................................................... 52
SQL ................................................................................ 40
TCP/IP ............................................................................ 48
UML ............................................................................... 57
Unix ............................................................................... 28
Visual Basic .................................................................... 21
DreamWeaver ................................................................ 31
XHTML........................................................................... 30
Fortran............................................................................ 23
XML ............................................................................... 30
Graphics ......................................................................... 48
HTML ............................................................................. 29
Java ................................................................................ 24
LAN................................................................................ 46
Multimedia ..................................................................... 58
15
15-60_CompSc.indd 15
11/15/06 5:05:06 PM
2007-2008 NEW Computer Science Titles
2007 New Titles

2008 New Titles
BATES
Principles of Voice and Data Communications .......44

BRADLEY
Basic.Net, 3e ...........................................................21

CHARATAN
Java in Two Semesters, 2e .......................................25

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225732-8 / MHID: 0-07-225732-6

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319157-7 / MHID: 0-07-319157-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351717-9 / MHID: 0-07-351717-8

DASGUPTA
Introduction to Algorithms ......................................34
FOROUZAN

KELTON
Simulation with Arena, 4e .......................................52
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325989-5 / MHID: 0-07-325989-6
PATT
Introduction to Computing Systems, 3e ..................17
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299465-0 / MHID: 0-07-299465-7

VAN DE VEER
Human Computer Interaction .................................50
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-709996-1 / MHID: 0-07-709996-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325032-8 / MHID: 0-07-325032-5

FOROUZAN
Network Security ....................................................46
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332753-2 / MHID: 0-07-332753-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352340-8 / MHID: 0-07-352340-2

CHAPRA
Applied Numerical Methods with Mathlab
for Engineers and Scientists, 2e ...............................50
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313290-7 / MHID: 0-07-313290-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710889-2 / MHID: 0-07-710889-2
(McGraw-Hill UK title)

CHAPMAN

WU.....................................................................
A Comprehensive Introduction to Object-Oriented
Programming with Java ...........................................24
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331708-1 / MHID: 0-07-331708-X
LAW
Simulation Modeling and Analysis, 4e .....................52

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329441-4 / MHID: 0-07-329441-1
ROSEN
Discrete Mathematics and Its Applications, 6e........35

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322972-0 / MHID: 0-07-322972-5
SCHACH
Object-Oriented and Classical Software
Engineering, 7e ........................................................54,55

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319126-3 / MHID: 0-07-319126-4
SCHOU

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225524-9 / MHID: 0-07-225524-2
TUCKER
Programming Languages, 2e ....................................36

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286609-4 / MHID: 0-07-286609-8
TYMANN
Schaum's Outline of Principles of Computer
Science ....................................................................17

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-146051-4 / MHID: 0-07-146051-9
16
16
11/15/06 5:05:07 PM
Computer
2007-2008 NEW Computer Science
Titles Science
Introduction To Computer
Science/CSI
International Edition
NEW
INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTING SYSTEMS:
From Bits & Gates to Programming & Beyond
Third Edition
by Yale N. Patt, University Of Texas At Austin, and Sanjay J. Patel,
University Of Illinois-Champaign
2009 (January 2008) / 640 pages / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299465-0 / MHID: 0-07-299465-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110716-7 / MHID: 0-07-110716-9 [IE]
An expanded website for the text, www.mhhe.com/patt3, includes
for instructors: the complete Solutions Manual, Source Code of the
examples, JPEGs of all of the figures, and Test Questions for Efficient
Grading. For instructors and students, the site has: the LC-3 Simulator
(Windows and UNIX versions), lab manuals for both versions of the
LC-3, PowerPoint presentations created by instructors using the book
in their course, selected solutions (Appendix F), Appendices A, D & E
(for easy reference) and a Message Board. (Browse http://www.mhhe.
com/patt3)
Published ahead of its time, this trendsetting textbook was first
introduced to electrical engineering, computer engineering
and computer science instructors in 1999. Since then, Patt and
Patel’s Introduction to Computing Systems: From bits & gates
to programming & beyond has changed the curriculum. In
some cases it has even created new introductory courses, while
in others it has enhanced existing courses from introductory
programming to computer organization, fulfilling the authors’
vision for a modern approach.
The Third Edition maintains the “motivated” bottom-up
approach, showing students how a computer works through
access to a simulator and by giving them hands-on programming
experience with the C language. The authors first introduce
the underlying structure of a computer, and then build on that
foundation to present programming methodology, as stated,
using the C language. Every step of the way, students learn
new things, building on what they already know. The authors
feel that this approach encourages deeper understanding
and downplays the need for memorizing. Students develop
a greater breadth of understanding, since they see how the
various parts of the computer fit together.
In an effort to further serve different course needs, teaching
flexibility has been added to the Third Edition through additional
examples and exercises, as well as new supplementary material
related to topics such as C++ and computer organization.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
LC-3), machine language programming and assembly language
programming of the LC-3, the high level language C, recursion, and
finally elementary data structures.
• Debugging: Because students are taught debugging techniques
from the first program they write and are required to use the LC-3
Simulator’s debugging tools from the start, they are better able to
master the art of programming and can complete their programming
assignments with a lot less help from the TA.
• The LC-3 Simulator: Central to the student’s learning is hands-on
access to the LC-3 Simulator, which has been created specifically to
aid the student’s mastery of the concepts. (Students can download
the LC-3 Simulator from the book’s website at no cost).
• Programming Methodology: Students are provided with numerous
meaningful, simple examples on how to take a problem and
transform it into a computer program via systematic decomposition.
Students are exposed to the fundamental similarities in programming,
whether it be in the LC-3 or in C, which provides the student with the
useful ability to quickly understand other programming languages.
• Website: An expanded website for the text, www.mhhe.com/
patt3, includes for instructors: the complete Solutions Manual, Source
Code of the examples, JPEGs of all of the figures, and Test Questions
for Efficient Grading. For instructors and students, the site has: the
LC-3 Simulator (Windows and UNIX versions), lab manuals for both
versions of the LC-3, PowerPoint presentations created by instructors
using the book in their course, selected solutions (Appendix F),
Appendices A, D & E (for easy reference) and a Message Board.
CONTENTS
1 Welcome Aboard. 2 Bits, Data Types, and Operations. 3 Digital Logic
Structures. 4 The Von Neumann Model. 5 The LC-3. 6 Programming. 7 Assembly
Language 8 I/O. 9 TRAP Routines and Subroutines. 10 And, Finally...The Stack.
11 Introduction to Programming in C. 12 Variables and Operators. 13 Control
Structures. 14 Functions. 15 Testing and Debugging. 16 Pointers and Arrays. 17
Recursion. 18 I/O in C. 19 Data Structures. Appendix A The LC-3 ISA. Appendix
B From LC-3 to x86. Appendix C The Microarchitecture of the LC-3. Appendix D
The C Programming Language. Appendix E Useful Tables. Appendix F Selected
Solutions (available at website).
NEW
SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF PRINCIPLES OF
COMPUTER SCIENCE
by Paul Tymann, Rochester Inst Of Technology, Carl Reynolds,
Rochester Inst Of Technology
2007 (December 2006) / Softcover / 384 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-146051-4 / MHID: 0-07-146051-9
Schaum's Publication
Schaum’s Outline of Principles of Computer Science provides
a concise overview of the theoretical foundation of computer
science. It also includes focused review of object-oriented
programming using Java.
• NEW! Privilege: Based on market feedback, the coverage of
privilege will be augmented in this edition.
• NEW! Computer Organization Topics: Optional, supplemental
material on topics such as virtual memory, cache and pipelining will
be provided at the book’s website.
• NEW! C++: Optional, supplemental material highlighting key
features for the usage of the C++ language will also be provided at
the book’s website.
FEATURES
• Bottom-Up Organization: For Patt and Patel, the bottom level
abstraction is the switch level representation of a MOS transistor.
From there, they quickly move to logic gates, latches, logic structures
(MUX, decoder, full adder, and gated latches), finally culminating
in an implementation of memory. Then the book moves on to
finite state control, its implementation as a sequential circuit,
the von Neumann model of execution, a simple computer (the
Introduction to Computer Science/CSI
17
11/15/06 5:05:07 PM
Computer Science
INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTING SYSTEMS:
From Bits and Gates to C and Beyond
Second Edition
by Yale N Patt, University of Texas at Austin and Sanjay J Patel,
University of Illinois, Champaign
2004 / 656 pages / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246750-5 / MHID: 0-07-246750-9
(with CD-ROM)
ISBN-13: 978-0-0-07-124501-2 / MHID: 0-0-07-124501-4
[IE - 2 Color]
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF INTRODUCTION TO
COMPUTER SCIENCE
by Ramon Mata-Toledo and Pauline K Cushman, James Madison
University in Harrisonburg, Virginia
2000 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-134554-5 / MHID: 0-07-134554-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116596-9 / MHID: 0-07-116596-7 [IE]
(International Edition is not for sale in Japan.)
The website contains updated versions of the solutions manual, a
message board, LC-2 Simulator [to LC-3], lab manuals for LC-3,
PowerPoint presentations, source code of the examples, and figures.
Browse http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0072467509
This book is based on the premise that starting with a high
level programming language is not the best approach. The
reason most students are unsuccessful using a programming
language when they encounter it in their first course is because
they are forced to memorize a lot of technical details without
having any idea why these details are necessary. That is, they
do not understand the basic underpinnings of how a computer
works. From this basic notion evolves the motivated bottomup approach found in Patt/Patel’s Introduction To Computing
Systems, now in a second edition. The text starts with the logic
structures and architecture of a computer and moves up to
the application software that runs on it. Every treatment that
purports to start at the bottom and work up begins with some
abstraction. For Patt/Patel, that abstraction is the switch level
behavior of an MOS transistor. From a very short treatment of
that abstraction, the book covers in turn: Logic Gates, latches,
logic structures (MUX, Decoder, Adder, gated latches), finally
culminating in an implementation of memory. From there, the
book moves on to the Von Neumann model of execution, then
a simple computer (the LC-3), machine language programming,
assembly language and how an assembler works, and then
assembly language programming of the LC-3. The LC-3
treatment concludes with a substantial treatment of Physical
I/O, including both polling and interrupt-driven I/O, the nature
of traps and subroutine calls/returns. The book then moves
to the high level language C, covering recursion, pointers,
and finally elementary data structures. The book establishes
a foundation that every subsequent course in the computer
science or computer engineering curriculum can benefit from
and build on.
CONTENTS
Part I: 1 Welcome Aboard! 2 Bits, Data Types, and Operations. 3 Digital Logic
Structures. 4 The Von Neumann Model. 5 The LC-3. 6 Programming. 7 Assembly
Language. 8 I/O. 9 TRAP Routines and Subroutines. 10 And, Finally...Part II:
11 Introduction to Programming in C. 12 Variables and Operators. 13 Control
Structures. 14 Functions. 15 Debugging. 16 Recursion. 17 Pointers and Arrays.
18 I/O in C. 19 Data Structures. Appendix A The LC-3 ISA. Appendix B From
LC-3 to x86. Appendix C The Microarchitecture of the LC-3. Appendix D The C
Programming Language. Appendix E Extending C to C++. Appendix F Useful
Tables
C
APPLIED C
An Introduction and More
by Alice Fischer and Stephen M Ross, both of the University of New
Haven
2000 / 1136 pages / softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-021748-5 / MHID: 0-07-021748-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118459-5 / MHID: 0-07-118459-7 [IE]
CONTENTS
I Introduction. Chapter 1: Computers and Systems. Chapter 2: Programs and
Programming. Chapter 3: Fundamental Concepts. II Computation. Chapter 4:
Writing Sentences in C. Chapter 5: Using Functions and Libraries. Chapter 6: More
Repetition and Decisions. III Basic Data Types. Chapter 7: Integers and Integer
Operations. Chapter 8: Real Numbers and Computation. Chapter 9: Program
Design. Chapter 10: An Introduction to Arrays. Chapter 11: Character Data and
Enumerations. Chapter 12: An Introduction to Pointers. IV Structured Data Types.
Chapter 13: Strings. Chapter 14: Structured Types. Chapter 15: Streams and Files.
Chapter 16: Simple Array AlgorithmsChapter 17: Two Dimensional Arrays. Chapter
18: Calculating with Bits. V Advanced Techniques. Chapter 19: Dynamic Arrays.
Chapter 20: Working With Pointers. Chapter 21: Recursion. Chapter 22: Making
Programs General. Chapter 23: Modular Organization. VI Appendix. Appendix A:
The ASCII Code. Appendix B: The Precedence of Operators in C. Appendix C: The
Tools Library. Appendix D: A Simple Makefile For the Tools Library. Appendix E:
Advanced Aspects of C Operators. Appendix F: Glossary and Alphabet Soup.
C PROGRAMMING FOR ENGINEERING AND
COMPUTER SCIENCE
(B.E.S.T SERIES)
by H H Tan, Morrison Knudsen Corporation, and T.B. D’Orazio
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-913678-7 / MHID: 0-07-913678-8
(with 3.5” disk)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116788-8 / MHID: 0-07-116788-9
[IE with 3.5” Disk]
Browse http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0079136788
CONTENTS
1 Computers and Computing Fundamentals. 2 Getting Started with C. 3 The
Basics of C. 4 Beginning Decision Making and Looping. 5 Functions. 6 Arrays
and Index Variables. 7 Character Arrays and Strings. 8 Pointers, Addresses, and
Special Variable Types. 9 Introduction to C++
18
11/15/06 5:05:08 PM
Computer Science
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PROGRAMMING WITH C
Second Edition
PROGRAMMING IN C++: LESSONS AND
APPLICATIONS
(International Edition is not for sale in Japan)
http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0072424125
by Byron Gottfried, University of Pittsburgh
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-024035-3 / MHID: 0-07-024035-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114259-5 / MHID: 0-07-114259-2 [IE]
CONTENTS
Introductory Concepts. C Fundamentals. Operators and Expressions. Data Input
and Output. Preparing and Running a Complete C Program. Control Statements.
Functions. Program Structure. Arrays. Pointers. Structure and Unions. Data Files.
Low-Level Programming. Some Additional Features of C. Appendices: A: Number
Systems. B: Escape Sequences. C: Operator Summary. D: Data Types and Data
Conversation Rules. E: The ASCII Character Set. F: Control Statement Summary.
G: Commonly used scanf and printf Conversion Characters.
C++
OBJECT-ORIENTED PROGRAMMING WITH C++
Third Edition
by E Balagurusamy, Director, Mahaveer Academy of Sciences and
Technology, Bangalore
ISBN-13: 978-0-07- 059362-6 / MHID: 0-07- 059362-0
by Tim B. D’Orazio, San Francisco State University
2004 / 976 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-242412-6 / MHID: 0-07-242412-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119453-2 / MHID: 0-07-119453-3 [IE]
D’Orazio’s C++ Programming for Engineers and Scientists
provides an accessible introduction to programming in C++.
It teaches the C++ language and object-oriented design to
students with no previous programming experience. The focus
is on developing programs for solving a variety of engineering
and science problems. Each chapter of the book is divided into
two parts - Lessons and Application Examples. The Lessons
teach C++ language elements and simple programming
techniques, and the Application Programs teach engineering
program design. A step-by-step methodology for program
development is presented early in the text and reinforced
throughout with the help of the application examples and over
thirty engineering case studies.
CONTENTS
1 Computers and Computing Fundamentals. 2 Getting Started - Program
Structure, Printing, and Comments. 3 The Basics of C++ - Variables, Arithmetic
Operations, Math Functions, Input/Output, Characters, Objects, and Classes. 4
Decision Making. 5 Loops. 6 Functions. 7 One-Dimensional Numeric Arrays. 8
Multi-Dimensional Numeric Arrays, Arrays as Data Members, Arrays of Objects.
9 Strings. 10 The C++ Sring Class. 11 More About Classes, Objects, and ObjectOriented Design. 12 Inheritance, Virtual Functions, and Polymorphism. 13 Data
Structures, Recursion, and Other Topics. 14 Templates and the C++ Standard
Template Library
(Tata McGraw-Hill Title)
Written by the most well known face of India’s IT literacy
movement, this book is designed for the first course in C++
taken by undergraduate students in Computers and Information
Technology. It explores C++ in the light of Object Oriented
Programming Concepts and makes it simpler for novice
programmers. Key Features : Detailed coverage of Object
Oriented Systems Development. Model C++ Proficiency Test
included which strengthen the concepts learnt in the book. New
in this Edition Inclusion of new material on Pointers. Addition
of separate Debugging exercises at the end of each chapter. 2
full-fledged projects for implementation. Step-by-step guide to
implementation of the projects. GEN SUPPLEMENT - For the
Instructor Solutions to the debugging exercises For the Student
(accessible through Unique Access Code) Chapter-wise selftest quiz with solutions. Exclusive Project for implementation
with code, step-by-step description and user manual. Chapter
on differences between ANSI C, C++ and ANSI C++.
CONTENTS
1.Principles of Object-Oriented Programming. 2.Beginning With C++. 3.Tokens,
Expressions and Control Structures. 4.Functions in C++. 5.Classes and Objects.
6.Constructors and Destructors. 7.Operator Overloading and Type Conversions.
8.Inheritance: Extending Classes. 9.Pointers, Virtual Functions and Polymorphism.
10.Managing Console I/O Operations. 11.Working With Files. 12.Templates.
13.Exception Handling. 14.Introduction to the Standard Template Library.
15.Manipulating String. 16.New Features of ANSI C++ Standard. 17.ObjectOriented Systems Development. Appendix A : Design and Implementation of a
Memory Game. Appendix B : Executing Turbo C++. Appendix C : Executing
C++ Under Keywords. Appendix D : Glossary of ANSI C++ Keywords. Appendix
E : C++ Operator Precedence. Appendix F : Points to Remember. Appendix G
: Glossary of Important C++ and OOP Terms. Appendix H : C++ Proficiency
Test. Bibliography. Index.
C++ PROGRAM DESIGN
An Introduction to Programming and Object-Oriented
Design with CD-ROM
Third Edition
by James Cohoon and Jack Davidson, both of University of Virginia,
Charlottesville
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-249889-9 / MHID: 0-07-249889-7
(with CD-ROM) (Out-of-Print)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122649-3 / MHID: 0-07-122649-4
[IE with CD-ROM]
http://www.cs.virginia.edu/c++programdesign
CONTENTS
1 Computing & The Object-Oriented Design Methodolgy. 2 C++: The
Fundamentals. 3 Modifying Objects. 4 Control Constructs. 5 Function Basics. 6
Program Defined Function. 7 The Class Construct and Object-Oriented Design.
8 Implementing Abstract Data Types. 9 Lists. 10 The EzWindows API: A Detailed
Examination. 11 Pointers and Dynamic Memory. 12 Inheritance. 13 Templates
and Polymorphism. 14 Testing and Debugging. 15 Software Project - Bug Hunt!
Appendixes. Appendix A Tables. Appendix B Standard Libraries. Appendix C
Standard Classes. Appendix D Advanced Topics. Appendix E EzWindows API
Reference Manual. Appendix F Projects and Makefiles
19
11/15/06 5:05:09 PM
Computer Science
A COMPUTER SCIENCE TAPESTRY
Second Edition
by Owen Astrachan, Duke University
2000 / 880 pages / softcover /
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246536-5 / MHID: 0-07-246536-0
(with Microsoft Compiler and E-Text) (Out-of-Print)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116178-7 / MHID: 0-07-116178-3 [IE]
http://www.cs.duke.edu/csed/tapestry/
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Computer Science and Programming/Chapter 2: C++ Programs:
Form and Function/Chapter 3: Design and Implementation of Simple Programs/
Chapter 4: Control, Functions, and Classes/Chapter 5: Iteration with Programs
and Classes/Chapter 6: Streams, Iterators, and Operators/Chapter 7: Abstraction
and Information Hiding/Chapter 8: Arrays, Data, and Random Access/Chapter 9:
Class Design and Implementation/Chapter 10: Matrices and Recursion/Chapter
11: Sorting, Searching, and Templates/Chapter 12: Dynamic Data and Pointers/
Chapter 13: Inheritance for Object-Oriented Design and Programming/Chapter
14: Advanced Topics: Sets, Trees and Maps
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF FUNDAMENTALS OF
COMPUTING WITH C++
by John Hubbard, University of Richmond, Virginia
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-030868-8 / MHID: 0-07-030868-3
CONTENTS
Introduction to Computing. Logic. Control Structures. Algorithms. Text Processing.
Arrays. Data Abstraction. Inheritance. Polymorphism. Containers. Recursion.
Mathematical Induction. Sorting. Complexity Analysis. Hash Tables. Linked
Lists. Trees. External Structures. Graphs. Simultation. Appendices: A: C++
Syntax. B: Standard C++ Libraries. C: C++ Syntax. D: Logarithms. E: Factorials,
Permutations, and Combinations. F: Stirling’s Formula. G: Catalan Numbers. H:
Counting Principles. I: Recurrence Relations. J: References.
A C++ PRIMER FOR ENGINEERS
An Object-Oriented Approach
SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINES OF PROGRAMMING
WITH C++
by John R Hubbard, University of Richmond, Virginia
2000 / 160 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-052713-3 / MHID: 0-07-052713-X
CONTENTS
Introduction to C++ Programming. Conditionals and Type. Conversion.
Iteration. Functions. Arrays. Pointers and References. Strings. Classes. Overloading
Operators. A String Class. Composition and Inheritance. Stream I/O. Appendix
A C++ Keywords. Appendix B C++ Operators. Appendix C C++ Pre-defined
Functions. Index
by Kumaraswamy Ponnambalam, University of Waterloo; and Tivley
Algvindigve, Chief Software Engineer for Engsoft
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115807-7 / MHID: 0-07-115807-3 [IE with 3.5”
disk]
CONTENTS
1 Problem Solving Using Computers/2 C++ Programming Basics/3 Selections
and Repetitions/4 Functions to Aid Modularity/5 Arrays for Grouping Data
of Same Type/6 Struc tures to Group Data/7 Encapsulation of Data and
Functions in Classes/8 Inheritance to Aid Reusability/9 Pointers to Aid Efficient
Implementation/10 Miscellaneous Topics/11 Java for C++ Programmers
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PROGRAMMING WITH
C++
Second Edition
2000 / 422 pages
ISBN-978-0-07-135346-5 / MHID: 0-07-135346-1
ISBN-978-0-07-118372-7 / MHID: 0-07-118372-8 [IE]
C++ PRIMER FOR NON C PROGRAMMERS
by S Zamir
1995 / 331 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113398-2 / MHID: 0-07-113398-4 [IE]
Professional Book
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Elementary C++ Programming. Chapter 2: Fundamental Types.
Chapter 3: Selection. Chapter 4: Iteration. Chapter 5: Functions. Chapter 6: Arrays.
Chapter 7: Pointers and References. Chapter 8: C-Strings. Chapter 9: Standard
C++ Strings. Chapter 10: Classes. Chapter 11: Overloading Operators. Chapter
12: Composition and Inheritance. Chapter 13: Templates and Iterators. Chapter 14:
Standard C++ Vectors. Chapter 15: Container Classes. Appendices: A: Character
Codes. B: Standard C++ Keywords. C: Standard C++ Operators. D: Standard
C++ Container Classes. E: Standard C++ Generic Algorithms. F: The Standard
C Library. G: Hexadecimal Numbers. H: References.
LEARNING C++
by Neill Graham
1991 / 304 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-100849-5 / MHID: 0-07-100849-7 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Elements of C++. 2 Classes and Objects. 3 Arrays, Pointers, and References.
4 Operators and Friends. 5 Inheritance: Derived Classes. 6 Polymorphism:
Virtual Functions. 7 Case Study: Event-Driven Simulation. 8 More about C++.
Appendixes
20
11/15/06 5:05:09 PM
Computer Science
Visual Basic
PROGRAMMING IN VISUAL BASIC.NET
2005 Edition
NEW
ADVANCED PROGRAMMING USING VISUAL
BASIC.NET
Third Edition
By Julia Case Bradley, and Anita C. Millspaugh, both of Mt San
Antonio College
2007 (May 2006) / 608 pages / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351717-9 / MHID: 0-07-351717-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110295-7 / MHID: 0-07-110295-7 [IE]
The author team of Julia Bradley and Anita Millspaugh remain
the guiding light in programming with Visual Basic .NET for
countless students around the world. How better to master the
most popular programming language than to use the bestselling
textbook? To be at the cutting edge of technology start with
specific Learning Objectives in themed Case Studies and
move on to practice with Programming Skills, Exercises, and
Examples. Combine screen captures, step-by-step exercises,
and thorough appendices and you can ensure that Programming
Excellence Begins Here. This textbook is intended for use in
an introductory programming course, which assumes no prior
knowledge of computer programming. The later chapters
are also appropriate for professional programmers who are
learning a new language to upgrade their skills.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hands-On Programming Examples
Learning Objectives
Feedback Questions
Case Studies
Tips
Programming Exercises
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction to Visual Basic .NET. Chapter 2: User Interface Design.
Chapter 3: Variables, Constants, and Calculations Chapter 4: Decisions and
Conditions Chapter 5: Menus, Common Dialog Boxes, Sub Procedures, and
Function Procedures Chapter 6: Multiform Projects Chapter 7: Lists, Loops, and
Printing Chapter 8: Arrays. Chapter 9: Programming with Visual Web Developer.
Chapter 10: Accessing Database Files. Chapter 11: Saving Data in Files.
Chapter 12: OOP: Creating Object-Oriented Programs. Chapter 13: Graphics,
Animation, Sound, and Drag-and-Drop. Chapter 14:Additional Topics in Visual
Basic Appendix A: Answers to Feedback Questions Appendix B: Methods and
Functions for ¿Working with Dates, Financial Calculations, Mathematics, and
String Operations Appendix C: Tips and Shortcuts for Mastering the Environment
Appendix D: .NET Security Glossary Index.
by Julia Case Bradley, and Anita C. Millspaugh, both of Mt San
Antonio College
2006 / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321588-4 / MHID: 0-07-321588-0
(with Student CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125689-6 / MHID: 0-07-125689-X [IE]
The author team of Julia Bradley and Anita Millspaugh remain
the guiding light in programming with Visual Basic .NET for
countless students around the world. How better to master the
most popular programming language than to use the bestselling
textbook? To be at the cutting edge of technology start with
specific Learning Objectives in themed Case Studies and
move on to practice with Programming Skills, Exercises, and
Examples. Combine screen captures, step-by-step exercises,
and thorough appendices and you can ensure that Programming
Excellence Begins Here. This textbook is intended for use in
an introductory programming course, which assumes no prior
knowledge of computer programming. The later chapters
are also appropriate for professional programmers who are
learning a new language to upgrade their skills.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
•
•
•
•
•
•
Learning Objectives
Feedback Questions
Case Studies
Tips
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction to Visual Basic .NET. Chapter 2: User Interface Design.
Chapter 3: Variables, Constants, and Calculations. Chapter 4: Decisions and
Conditions. Chapter 5: Menus, Common Dialog Boxes, Sub Procedures, and
Function Procedures. Chapter 6: Multiform Projects Chapter 7: Lists, Loops,
and Printing. Chapter 8: Arrays. Chapter 9: Programming with Visual Web
Developer. Chapter 10: Accessing Database Files. Chapter 11: Saving Data in Files.
Appendix D: .NET Security Glossary Index
INVITATION TO PUBLISH
McGraw-Hill is interested
in reviewing manuscript
for publication. Please
contact your local
McGraw-Hill office or email to
[email protected]
Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)
Website: www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg
21
11/15/06 5:05:10 PM
Computer Science
PROGRAMMING IN VISUAL BASIC.NET:
Update Edition for VB.NET 2003 with 5-CD VB.Net
2003 Software Set
by Julia Case Bradley, Mt. San Antonio College and Anita C
Millspaugh, Mt. San Antonio College
2005 / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225671-0 / MHID: 0-07-225671-0
(with CD) (Out-of-Print)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111447-9 / MHID: 0-07-111447-5
[IE with CD]
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Reorganized and expanded
• New appendix on security. Information Assurance has become
an extremely important topic in information systems curriculum. In
addition, security problems cause students many frustrations. We
have added an appendix that addresses securing an application, as
well as getting around security restrictions for testing and moving
applications.
• The narrative, step-by-step exercises, screen captures, and
appendices have all been updated to VB .NET 2003. The screen
captures are all based on Windows XP.
• All code updated. All programs in the text are modified to
conform to the new standards. Changes to coding conventions
include declaring all module level variables using the Private
keyword, taking advantage of the feature to declare multiple variables
on one statement, and reducing the number of end-line comments.
Program comments are now more readable and complete.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction to Visual Basic.NET. Chapter 2 More Controls. Chapter
3 Variables, Constants, and Calculations. Chapter 4 Decisions and Conditions.
Chapter 5 Menus, Sub Procedures, and Sub Functions. Chapter 6 OOP:Creating
Object-Oriented Programs. Chapter 7 Lists, Loops, and Printing. Chapter 8 Arrays.
Chapter 9 Programming With Web Forms. Chapter 10 Accessing DataBase Files.
Chapter 11 Saving Data and Objects in Files. Chapter 12 Graphics in Windows
and the Web. Chapter 13 Advanced Topics in Visual Basic. Appendix A Answers to
Feedback Questions. Appendix B Methods and Functions for Working with Dates,
Financial Calculations, Mathematics, and String Operations. Appendix C Tips and
Shortcuts for Mastering the Environment. Appendix D Security. Glossary. Index
LEARNING PROGRAMMING USING VISUAL
BASIC .NET
Fourth Edition
by William E Burrows, University of Washington
2003
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293871-5 / MHID: 0-07-293871-4
(with 4-CD Set)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111350-2 / MHID: 0-07-111350-9
[IE with CD and VB.Net Software, 4 CD set)
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/it/burrowsvbnet
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Problem Solving and the Object-Oriented Paradigm. Chapter 2 Creating
Simple Visual Basic .NET Windows Applications. Chapter 3 Representing Data
– Constants and Variables. Chapter 4 Performing Calculations and Manipulating
Data. Chapter 5 Specifying Alternative Courses of Action: Selection Statements.
Chapter 6 Reducing Program Complexity: Programmer-Defined Procedures and
Functions. Chapter 7 Repeating Processing Tasks: Loop Structures. Chapter 8
Accessing Data: Relational Database Processing. Chapter 9 Accessing Data: Using
XML. Chapter 10 Working with Collections. Chapter 11 Using Visual Basic .NET
to Create Web Applications. Comprehensive Projects: CP.1 Multiple Forms,
Menus, and Logical Decision-Making. CP.2 Economic Order Quantity Calculator.
CP.3 Order Policy Simulation. CP.4 Product/Supplier Database Application. CP.5
Order Entry Application Revisited. CP.6 Real Estate Listings Database Application
Revisited. Appendix A: Debugging. Appendix B: Configuring and Using Internet
Information Server (IIS). Appendix C: Configuring and Using MS SQL Server.
Appendix D: Answers to Selected Exercises
PROGRAMMING IN VISUAL BASIC 6.0 UPDATE
EDITION WITH CD
by Julia Case Bradley and Anita C. Millspaugh, Mt. San Antonio
College
2002
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-251874-0 / MHID: 0-07-251874-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120481-1 / MHID: 0-07-120481-4 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/cit/program/bradley6
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Visual Basic. 2. More Controls. 3. Variables, Constants, and
Calculations. 4. Decisions and Conditions. 5. Menus, Sub Procedures, and Sub
Functions. 6. Multiple Forms. 7. Lists, Loops, and Printing. 8. Arrays. 9. OOPCreating Object-Oriented Programs. 10. Data Files. 11. Accessing Database
Files. 12. Data Handling-Grids, Validation, Selection, and Sorting. 13. Dragand-Drop. 14. Graphics. 15. Advanced Topics in Visual Basic. Appendix A
Answers to Feedback Questions. Appendix B Functions for Working with Dates,
Financial Calculations, Mathematics, and String Operations. Appendix C Tips
and Shortcuts for Mastering the VB Environment. Appendix D A Preview of
Microsoft’s VB.NET
COMPLIMENTARY
COPIES
Complimentary desk copies are available
for course adoption only. Kindly contact your
local McGraw-Hill Representative or fax the
Examination Copy Request Form available
on the back pages of this catalog.
Visit McGraw-Hill Education
Website: www.mheducation.com
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF VISUAL BASIC
by Byron S Gottfried, University of Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh
2001 / 325 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-135671-8 / MHID: 0-07-135671-1
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introducing Visual Basic. Chapter 2: Visual Basic Fundamentals. Chapter
3: Branching and Looping. Chapter 4: Visual Basic Control Fundamentals. Chapter
5: Menus and Dialog Boxes. Chapter 6. Executing and Debugging a New Project.
Chapter 7: Procedures. Chapter 8: Arrays. Chapter 9: Data Files. Appendix A:
The ASCII Character Set. Appendix B: Incompatibilities with Visual Basic.NET.
Answers to Selected Problems.
22
11/15/06 5:05:11 PM
Computer Science
Fortran
NEW
FORTRAN 95/2003 FOR SCIENTISTS & ENGINEERS
Third Edition
By Stephen J. Chapman, BAE Systems Australia
2008 (January 2007) / Softcover / 864 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319157-7 / MHID: 0-07-319157-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128578-0 / MHID: 0-07-128578-4 [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/chapman3e
Chapman's Fortran fo r Scientists and Engineers is intended for
both first year engineering students and practicing engineers.
It simultaneously teaches the Fortran 95/2003 programming
language, structured programming techniques, and good
programming practice. Among its strengths are its concise, clear
explanations of Fortran syntax and programming procedures,
the inclusion of a wealth of examples and exercises to help
students grasp difficult concepts, and its explanations about
how to understand code written for older versions of Fortran.
We are the most current Fortran book in the market.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Text has been revised to include the latest updates in response to
the release of FORTRAN 2003.
• A new chapter, Object-Oriented Programming in Fortran has been
added.
FEATURES
• Clear explanations of FORTRAN syntax and programming
procedures
• Discusses changes that have been implemented since FORTRAN
77
• Top-Down design methodology and procedures
• Good programming practice summaries and FORTRAN statement
summaries at the end of each chapter
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Computers and the Fortran Language. 2 Basic Elements of Fortran.
3 Program Design and Branching Structures. 4 Loops and Character Manipulation.
5 Basic I/O Concepts. 6 Introduction to Arrays. 7 Introduction to Procedures. 8
Additional Features of Arrays. 9 Additional Features of Procedures. 10 More about
Character Variables. 11 Additional Intrinsic Data Types. 12 Derived Data Types.
13 Advanced Features of Procedures and Modules. 14 Advanced I/O Concepts.
15 Pointers and Dynamic Data Structures. 16 Object-Oriented Programming in
Fortran. 17 Redundant, Obsolescent, and Deleted Fortran Features. Appendix
A ASCII and EBCDIC Coding Systems. Appendix B Fortran 95/2003 Intrinsic
Procedures. Appendix C Order of Statements in a Fortran 95/2003 Program.
Appendix D Glossary. Appendix E Answers to Quizzes.
FORTRAN 90/95 FOR SCIENTISTS AND ENGINEERS
Second Edition
by Stephen J. Chapman, Bae Systems Australia
2004 / 700 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282575-6 / MHID: 0-07-282575-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123233-3 / MHID: 07-123233-8 [IE]
The website contains links to Solutions, PowerPoints, Student tips,
a Glossary (by chapter and complete), Fortran Code Files , Fortran
Library Files, Fortran Utilities, and Fortran Code Help. (Browse http://
www.mhhe.com/engcs/general/best/)
Chapman’s Fortran for Scientists and Engineers is intended for
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Computers and the Fortran Language. 2 Basic Elements of
Fortran. 3 Control Structures and Program Design. 4 Basic I/O Concepts. 5
Arrays. 6 Procedures and Structured Programming. 7 More About Character
Variables. 8 Additional Data Types. 9 Advanced Features of Procedures and
Morals. 10 Advanced I/O Concepts. 11 Pointers and Dynamic Data Structures. 12
Redundant, Obsolescent, and Deleted Fortran Features. Appendixes. A ASCII and
EBCDIC Coding Systems. B Fortran 95 Intrinsic Procedures. B1 Classes of Intrinsic
Procedures. B2 Alphabetical List of Intrinsic Procedures. B3 Mathematical and
Type Conversion Intrinsic Procedures. B4 Kind and Numeric Processor Intrinsic
Functions. B5 Date and Time Intrinsic Subroutines. B6 Bit Intrinsic Procedures.
B7 Character Intrinsic Functions. B8 Array and Pointer Intrinsic Functions. B9
Miscellaneous Inquiry Functions. C Order of Statements in a Fortran 95 Program.
D Towards Fortran 200x. D1 Objects and Object-oriented Programming. D2 Other
Features. E Glossary. F Answers to Quizzes
INTRODUCTION TO FORTRAN 90/95
by Stephen Chapman, British Aerospace
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115896-1 / MHID: 0-07-115896-0 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Computers and the Fortran Language/2 Basic Elements of
Fortran/3 Control Structures and Program Design/4 Basic I/O Concepts/5 Arrays/6
Procedures and Structured Programming/7 Additional Data Types/8 Advanced
Features of Procedures and Modules/9 Dynamic Memory Allocation and Pointers/
Appendixes/A ASCII and EBCDIC Coding Systems/B Fortran 90/95 Intrinsic
Procedures/C Order of Statements in a Fortran 90/95 Program/D Summary of
Format Descriptors and I/O Statements/E Glossary/F Answers to Quizzes
FORTRAN 77
by William Mayo and Martin Cwiakala, Rutgers University
1995 / 352 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-041155-5 / MHID: 0-07-041155-7
23
11/15/06 5:05:12 PM
Computer Science
Java
PASCAL
PASCAL
Second Edition
by Byron S Gottfried, University of Pittsburgh
1994 / 448 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-023924-1 / MHID: 0-07-023924-X
CONTENTS
Introductory Concepts. Pascal Fundamentals. Simple-Type Data. Data Input and
Output. Preparing and Running a Complete Pascal Program. Control Structures.
Procedures and Functions. User-Defined Simple-Type Data. Arrays. Records. Files.
Sets. Lists and Pointers. Appendices: A: Reserved Words. B: Standard Identifiers.
C: Standard Procedures. D: Standard Functions. E: Operators. F: Syntax Diagrams.
G: The ASCII Character Set. Answers to Selected Problems.
COBOL
COMPREHENSIVE COBOL, VOL II
Advanced COBOL Programming
Fourth Edition
by A S Philippakis and L J Kazmier
1991 / 485 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112768-4 / MHID: 0-07-112768-2 [IE]
NEW
A COMPREHENSIVE INTRODUCTION TO OBJECTORIENTED PROGRAMMING WITH JAVA
by C. Thomas Wu (Otani), Naval Postgraduate School
2008 (February 2007) / Softcover / 256 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331708-1 / MHID: 0-07-331708-X
(with ARIS Bind-in card)
An Introduction to Object-Oriented Programming with Java
provides an accessible and technically thorough introduction
to the basics of programming using java. The text takes a
truly object-oriented approach. Objects are used early so that
students think in objects right from the beginning.
FEATURES
• The Comprehensive Edition of Wu includes chapters on Memory
Allocation Schemes and Linked Data Structures, Generics, Lists,
Queues, and Stacks.
• New Java 5.0 features are incorporated into the text including
two new classes, the Scanner Class for input and the Formatter class.
Revisions for the Comprehensive edition include introducing the
Scanner Class at the outset rather starting students off with JOption
Pane as Wu did in the 4th edition.
• The fundamentals of incremental program design are emphasized
by taking students through large Sample Development Programs that
reinforce software engineering principles. CONSISTENT PROBLEM
SOLVING APPROACH AT THE END OF EVERY CHAPTER
FOLLOWS: Problem Statement; Overall Plan; Design; Code; Test.
• Wu presents concepts visually. His diagrams representing objects
and classes make these concepts easier for students to understand.
WU HAS MORE DIAGRAMS THAN ANY OTHER TEXT.
• The accompanying ARIS site contains solutions for instructors,
Anitmated PowerPoint Slides, Labs, Source Code, an Example Bank,
Compiler HowTos and more.
• A Testbank is available to instructors, with questions that can be
assigned as exam questions or homework.
CONTENTS
0 Introduction to Computers and Programming Languages. 1 Introduction to
Object-Oriented Programming and Software Development. 2 Getting Started
with Java. 3 Numerical Data. 4 Defining Your Own Classes--Part 1. 5 Selection
Statements. 6 Repetition Statements. 7 Defining Your Own Classes--Part 2. 8
Exceptions and Assertions. 9 Characters and Strings. 10 Arrays. 11 Sorting and
Searching. 12 File Input and Output. 13 Inheritance and Polymorphism. 14 GUI
and Event-Driven Programming. 15 Recursion. 16 Memory Allocation Schemes
and Linked Data Structures. 17 Generics. 18 List ADT. 19 Queue ADT. 20 Stack
ADT
COMPLIMENTARY
COPIES
24
11/15/06 5:05:12 PM
Computer Science
JAVA 5.0 PROGRAM DESIGN
NEW
JAVA IN TWO SEMESTERS
Second Edition
by Quentin Charatan, and Aaron Kans, University of East London
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710889-2 / MHID: 0-07-710889-2
(McGraw-Hill UK Title)
This second edition of the successful textbook, Java in Two
Semesters, provides a comprehensive treatment of objectoriented programming, covering both introductory material
and the more advanced topics of a second level course.
Thoroughly revised and updated to reflect the latest release
of the Java language, the new edition covers the most recent
developments in Java programming. Part One presents the
key concepts of object-orientation and takes the student from
simple programming concepts through to inheritance and
HCI. The second part of the book introduces topics such as
advanced graphics programming, exceptions, threads, file
handling and network programming, and culminates in a
final chapter on Java in the context of the current software
development environment. Based upon Java 1.5, the book
includes topics such as generics, autoboxing and unboxing,
a new chapter on network programming as well as a chapter
covering the recently updated Java Collections Framework.
Program control is covered by two separate chapters, and
there is an entire chapter devoted to the implementation of
methods. In addition to new technical developments, the
book retains frequent examples, extensive end of chapter
exercises, unique case study chapters, and offers a free student
CD-ROM containing a Java IDE and all essential Java classes
from the text.
CONTENTS
Chapter One: The first step. Chapter Two: Selection. Chapter Three: Iteration.
Chapter Four: Implementing methods. Chapter Five: Arrays. Chapter Six: Classes
and objects. Chapter Seven: Implementing classes. Chapter Eight: Extending
classes with inheritance. Chapter Nine: Software quality. Chapter Ten: Graphics
and event-driven programmes. Chapter Eleven: Case study--part 1. Chapter Twelve:
Case study--part 2. Chapter Thirteen: Packages. Chapter Fourteen: Abstraction,
inheritance and interfaces. Chapter Fifteen: Exceptions. Chapter Sixteen: Twodimensional arrays. Chapter Seventeen: The Java collections framework. Chapter
Eighteen: Advanced graphics programming. Chapter Nineteen: Enhancing the user
interface. Chapter Twenty: Working with files. Chapter Twenty-One: Advanced
case study. Chapter Twenty-Two: Multi-threaded programs. Chapter Twenty-Three:
Java in a network environment. Chapter Twenty-Four: Java in context.
By James P. Cohoon, and Jack W. Davidson, both of University Of
VA-Charlottesville
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325030-4 / MHID: 0-07-325030-9
This site includes solutions, powerpoints, labs, source code, and more.
(Browse http://www.mhhe.com/cohoon)
Java 5.-0 Program Design is about the fundamentals of
programming and software development using Java. It is
targeted for a first programming course and has been designed
to be appropriate for people from all disciplines. The authors
assume no prior programming skills and use mathematics and
science at a level appropriate to first-year college students.
The breadth of coverage and the arrangement of the chapters
provide flexibility for the instructor in what and when topics are
introduced. Key to Java 5.0 Program Design is an introduction
to problem solving. The basics of problem-solving techniques
are introduced in chapter one and then reinforced during the
explanations of Java programming and design. In addition,
software engineering design concepts are introduced via
problem studies and software projects. This updated version
of Java Program Design takes advantage of the improvements
to the language introduced with Java 5.0. The additions are
especially important for beginning programmers because they
help make program design and development a clearer and
more straightforward process.
Key Handles: • Good Problem Solving Techniques • Wide
Variety of Examples • Placement of Objects first—Aids
students in Problem Solving • 5.0 update is included in this
revision
FEATURES
• Java is given broad coverage. The authors provide in-depth
coverage of all materials that an introductory course would need,
introduce much of the remaining material, and give pointers to the
rest.
• Introduction to problem solving. The basics of problem-solving
techniques are presented in chapter one, and each successive chapter
contains a self-check section, an exercise section offering a variety
of problems requiring a wide array of efforts, and one or more
interesting case studies presented in a manner that makes it suitable
as a class assignment.
• Classes are introduced early. Chapter one includes a gentle
introduction to the object-oriented paradigm, and the next several
chapters introduce standard Java classes and packages, and a limited
number of objects. After this solid introduction, over 50 classes are
demonstrated in the remaining chapters.
• Software-engineering design concepts are introduced via problem
studies and software projects.
• Coverage of testing and debugging. Students learn various
testing techniques (such as unit testing, integration testing, and code
inspections), and sections on debugging teach students how to use
the scientific method to find bugs.
• Programming and style tips are presented in boxes that clearly
delineate this material from the main text. There are important tips
on such things as avoiding common programming errors, writing
readable code, performance, and software engineering.
CONTENTS
1 Background 2 Java Basics 3 Using Objects 4 Being Classy 5 Decisions 6
Iteration. Graphics Interlude 1: GUI-Based Programming 7 Programming with
Methods and Classes 8 Arrays and Collections 9 Inheritance and Polymorphism
Graphics Interlude 2: GUI-Based Programming 10 Exceptions 11 Recursive
Problem Solving 12 Threads 13 Testing and Debugging. Appendix A: Tables
and Operators. Appendix B: Number Representation. Appendix C: Formatted
I/O. Appendix D: Applets. Appendix E: Standard Java Packages
25
11/15/06 5:05:13 PM
Computer Science
AN INTRODUCTION TO OBJECT-ORIENTED
PROGRAMMING WITH JAVA
Fourth Edition
by C Thomas Wu (Otani), Naval Postgraduate School
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294652-9 / MHID: 0-07-294652-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111680-0 / MHID: 0-07-111680-X
[IE, Mandatory package)
http://www.mhhe.com/wu
An Introduction to Object-Oriented Programming with Java
provides an accessible and technically thorough introduction
to the basics of programming using java. The fourth edition
continues to take a truly object-oriented approach. Objects
are used early so that students think in objects right from the
beginning. In the fourth edition, the coverage on defining
classes has been made more accessible. The material has been
broken down into smaller chunks and spread over two chapters,
making it more student-friendly. Also, new to this edition is
the incorporation of Java 1.5 features, including use of the
Scanner Class and the Formatter Class. The hallmark feature
of the book, Sample Development Programs, are continued
in this edition. These provide students with an opportunity
to incrementally, step by step, walk through program design,
learning the fundamentals of software engineering. Object
diagrams, using a subset of UML, also continue to be an
important element of Wu’s approach. The consistent, visual
approach assists students in understanding concepts.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The fourth edition takes a gentler approach to teaching students to
build their own classes, which makes the difficult topic accessible to
students.
• The fourth edition contains many new examples geared toward
being student-motivating and accessible.
• New Java 1.5 features are in corporated including two new
classes, the Scanner Class for input and the Formatter class.
• A Testbank is available to instructors, with questions that can be
assigned as exam questions or homework.
Features
• Objects are emphasized from the start, training students to think
about programming in an object-oriented way.
• The fundamentals of incremental program design are emphasized
by taking students through large Sample Development Programs that
reinforce software engineering principles.
• Wu presents concepts visually. His diagrams representing objects
and classes make these concepts easier for students to understand.
• An Online Learning Center (OLC) containing solutions for
instructors, PowerPoint Slides, Labs, Source Code, an Example Bank,
Compiler HowTos and more is available with this book at www.
mhhe.com/wu.
• Small complete programs are used the book throughout to provide
students with small and digestible examples, making material easier
to comprehend.
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Object-Oriented Programming and Software Development. 2
Getting Started with Java. 3 Numerical Data. 4 Defining Your Own Classes-Part 1.
5 Selection Statements. 6 Repetition Statements. 7 Defining Your Own Classes-Part
2. 8 Exceptions and Assertions. 9 Characters and Strings. 10 Arrays. 11 Sorting
and Searching. 12 File Input and Output. 13 Inheritance and Polymorphism. 14
GUI and Event-Driven Programming. 15 Recursive Algorithms
JAVA 1.5 PROGRAM DESIGN
by James P Cohoon, University of Virginia, Charlottesville and Jack
W Davidson, University of Virginia, Charlottesville
2004
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121841-2 / MHID: 0-07-121841-6
[IE with Bind-In Card]
http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/007235447x
Java 1.5 Program Design is about the fundamentals of
programming and software development using Java. It is
targeted for a first programming course and has been designed
to be appropriate for people from all disciplines. The authors
assume no prior programming skills and use mathematics and
science at a level appropriate to first-year college students.
The breadth of coverage and the arrangement of the chapters
provide flexibility for the instructor in what and when topics are
introduced. Key to Java 1.5 Program Design is an introduction
to problem solving. The basics of problem-solving techniques
are introduced in chapter one and then reinforced during the
explanations of Java programming and design. In addition,
software engineering design concepts are introduced via
problem studies and software projects. This updated version
of Java Program Design takes advantage of the improvements
to the language introduced with Java 1.5. The additions are
especially important for beginning programmers because they
help make program design and development a clearer and
more straightforward process.
CONTENTS
1 Background. 2 Java Basics. 3 Using Objects. 4 Being Classy. 5 Decisions. 6
Iteration. Graphics Interlude I: GUI-Based Programming. 7 Programming with
Methods and Classes. 8 Arrays and Collections. 9 Inheritance and Polymorphism.
Graphics Interlude II: GUI-Based Programming. 10 Exceptions. 11 Recursive
Problem Solving. 12 Threads. 13 Testing and Debugging. Appendix A Tables and
Operators. Appendix B Number Representation. Appendix C Applets. Appendix
D Standard Java Packages. Appendix E Standard Java Graphical Packages
JAVA
Second Edition
by John R Hubbard, University of Richmond
2004 / Softcover / 352 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-142040-2 / MHID: 0-07-142040-1
Since its inception in 1995, Java has transformed the way
people use the internet. Built by Sun Microsystems over a
5-year period, Java moved the Internet from its infancy into
early childhood by enabling web pages to do more than just
sit there on the screen like a computerized brochure. Java
enabled users to view media, listen to the radio, interact with
other users, bid on products on EBay, virtually tour a home
for sale, and check stock prices in real time. Sun has now
released Java 1.4, a version that includes many updates for
programmers that make creating web pages even easier. With
version 1.4 there are new data structures, new additions to the
Java language, and more applications that can use Java, not to
mention the advancements in applet technology which uses
Java as its programming language. Java has emerged as the
software developer’s clear choice for web development, and
Java users today far outnumber those of all other programming
languages, such as C++ or Visual Basic. The AP course
in Computer Science will reflect these changes as its focus
changes from C++ to Java 1.4 beginning with the Spring 2004
Exam. This second edition of the successful Schaum’s Outline
Programming with Java will address these advances in the Java
programming language since 1999. It will include updated
and expanded examples and solved problems, a feature that
no other competitive books on the subject have, which will
also appeal to students of Computer Science at the AP level in
High School. New chapters and additions to chapters from the
26
11/15/06 5:05:14 PM
Computer Science
first edition will cover the new data structures and language
additions with version 1.4. The book will support the major
Computer Science textbooks used in first year computer
science classrooms in colleges across the country.
PROGRAMMING WITH JAVA WITH CD-ROM
by Julia Case Bradley and Anita C Millspaugh, Mt. San Antonio
College
2002 / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-251244-1 / MHID: 0-07-251244-X
(with Student CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112478-2 / MHID: 0-07-112478-0
[IE with Student CD]
http://www.mhhe.com/cit/program/bradleyjava
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introducing Java. Chapter 2: Using Variables and Constants. Chapter 3:
Designing the Interface with Layout Managers. Chapter 4: Performing Calculations
and Formatting Numbers. Chapter 5: Creating Classes. Chapter 6: Decisions and
Conditions. Chapter 7: Making Selections with Check Boxes and Option Buttons.
Chapter 8: Using Lists, Choices, And Looping. Chapter 9: Arrays. Chapter 10:
Applications, Frames, Menus, And Dialogs. Chapter 11: Multimedia In Java:
Images, Sounds, Animations And Video. Chapter 12: More OOP, Interfaces,
And Inner Classes. Chapter 13: Storing Information, Object Serialization, and
JDBC. Chapter 14: Javascript. Chapter 15: Advanced Features of Java . Appendix
A: Using an IDE. Appendix B: Conventions and Standards. Appendix C: Java 1.0
Event Handling And Depreciated Methods. Appendix D: Solutions to Feedback
Questions. Appendix E: Creating Jar Files. Appendix F: Math Functions. Appendix
G: Debugging.
AN INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER SCIENCE
USING JAVA
Second Edition
by Samuel N Kamin, and Dennis Mickunas, both of the University of
Illinois, Champaign
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112232-0 / MHID: 0-07-112232-X [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/kamin
CONTENTS
1 What Is Programming? 2 Classes and Methods I. 3 Fundamental Data Types of
Java. 4 Decision Making. 5 Classes and Objects II: Classes with Multiple Methods.
6 Iteration. 7 Classes and Methods III: Working with Objects. 8 One-Dimensional
Arrays. 9 Nested Loops and Two-Dimensional Arrays. 10 Classes and Methods IV:
Static Methods and Variables. 11 The Java AWT Part I: Mouse Events (Optional).
12 Inheritance and Exceptions. 13 Java AWT Part II (Optional). 14 Recursion.
15 Text Processing and File Input/Output. 16 Case Study: The Game of Reversi.
Appendix A Other Java Features. Appendix B Precedence Rules. Appendix C
Classes in the Java API. Appendix D Class Diagrams
OBJECTS HAVE CLASS
An Introduction to Programming with Java with
CD-ROM and OLC
by David A. Poplawski, Michigan Technological University
2002
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112406-5 / MHID: 0-07-112406-3 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/poplawski
CONTENTS
1 Computers, Programs, and Java. 2 Writing Programs. 3 Getting Started. 4
Variables, Expressions, and Assignment. 5 Defining and Creating Multiple Objects.
6 Interacting Objects and Events. 7 Making Decisions. 8 Program Testing. 9 Simple
Class Extension. 10 Repetition, 11 Arrays. 12 Application Programs. 13 Input and
Output. 14 Graphical User Interface Classes. 15 Class Hierarchies. 16 Abstract
Data Types and Linked Data Structures. 17 Introduction to Recursion. Appendix
A Java Reserved Words. Appendix B Java Primitive Types. Appendix C The Java
Development Kit. Appendix D The Animator
JAVA ELEMENTS
Principles of Programming in Java
by Duane Bailey, Williams College
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116353-8 / MHID: 0-07-116353-0 [IE]
CONTENTS
Preface. Welcome. Chapter 1: Values, Variables, and Expressions. Chapter 2: The
Element Package. Chapter 3: Conditions and Loops. Chapter 4: Methods. Chapter
5: Strings. Chapter 6: Recursion. Chapter 7: Arrays and Vectors. Chapter 8: Classes.
Chapter 9: Recursive Structures. Chapter 10: Threads. Chapter 11: Machines. A:
Selected Answers. B: Basics. C: Contest Problems. D: Documentation of Selected
Classes. E: The Element Package. Index.
JAVA
AN OBJECT-ORIENTED LANGUAGE
by Michael Smith, University of Brighton
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116914-1 / MHID: 0-07-116914-8 [IE]
CONTENTS
Introduction to Programming. Introductory Concept. Fundamentals of Program
Instructions. Solving a Simple Problem Using Java. The Full Language: Introduction
to Design Using an OO Methodology. Introduction - Part 1 Introduction - Part 2
The Class: Class Variables and Methods. Wrapper Classes. Parameters to Methods.
Windowed Programming. Arrays. Inheritance. Polymorphism. The Game of
Checkers. Exceptions. Clonable Objects. File I/O. Object Serialization
27
11/15/06 5:05:15 PM
Computer Science
UNIX
JUST ENOUGH UNIX
Fifth Edition
by K Paul Andersen, New Mexico State University - Las Cruces
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-295297-1 / MHID: 0-07-295297-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124418-3 / MHID: 0-07-124418-2 [IE]
This site contains Answers to Excercises, PowerPoint slides, and some
sample code. (Browse http://www.mhhe.com/andersen)
Just Enough UNIX provides a quick and gentle introduction
to the UNIX operating system. The fifth edition of this highly
successful text reflects changes and updates to the UNIX
curriculum that have taken place since the publication of the
fourth edition. The book is written in a clear, straightforward
style that avoids unnecessary jargon. This short, yet
comprehensive text covers the basics of UNIX. It can be used
in both a freshman engineering course or to supplement other
courses where the student needs to learn UNIX for the first
time. The book is enhanced by strong pedagogical tools that
will be very useful to those in the classroom, as well as those
engaged in self-study.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Key New Topics. The following topics are new in the fifth edition:
computer and network security; Secure Shell (ssh) for remote
computing; practical cryptography; sciripting in awk; and scripting
in Perl.
• New and revised chapters. There are several completely new
chapters in the book—chapters 24 (Computer Security), 25 (Remote
Computing Using SSH-1), 26 (Remote Computing Using SSH-2), 27
(Protecting Privacy with PGP), 32 (Scripting Languages), 33 (Creating
Shell Scripts), 34 (Scripting with awk), and 35 (Scripting with Perl).
• Website. The expanded book website includes answers to
exercises for instructors only, as well as PowerPoint slides and data
files.
• Security. The fifth edition features expanded coverage of security
issues, including the use of Secure Shell as a secure alternative to the
traditional Unix “r-commands.”
FEATURES
• Organization. The book is divided into the following sections:
Introduction to UNIX, UNIX File System, UNIX Shells, Text Editors,
UNIX Networking, Startup Files, Secure Computing, Scripting and
Programming under UNIX. Each section opens with a descriptive
concepts chapter followed by several tutorials that guide the new
user step-by-step toward learning how UNIX works.
• Graphical Interfaces. The fifth edition maintains coverage of
the CDE interface. The book continues the concept that the typical
student is using the most current engineering workstation running the
most current graphical user interface, including both one based on
the X Window system and CDE.
• Text Editors. The reader will learn to create or modify UNIX files
using a utility program called an editor. In addition to the vi editor,
the book includes coverage of the emacs, pico and CDE editors.
At some schools, the vi editor may be too difficult or outdated.
Including these other editors gives instructors a wider range of
distribution packages to choose from for their course.
• Networking. The book has coverage of popular Internet and Web
tools like ftp and CDE Mailer, including how to process E-mail.
• Pedagogy. The book offers a number of helpful pedagogical
features: descriptive chapters, tutorials, marginal notes, sidebars,
command summaries and exercises.
CONTENTS
Part I: Introduction to UNIX: 1 Introduction to UNIX. 2 Your UNIX Account. 3
Getting Started. 4 Tutorial: Getting Started (X/Motif). 5 Tutorial: Getting Started
(CDE). Part II: UNIX File System: 6 The UNIX File System. 7 Tutorial: Working
with Files. 8 Tutorial: Working with Directories. 9 Tutorial: Using File Manager.
Part III: UNIX Shells: 10 UNIX Shells. 11 Tutorial: Working with the Shell. 12
Tutorial: Using Additional Shell Features. Part IV: Text Editors: 13 Text Editors. 14
Tutorial: Editing with vi. 15 Tutorial: Editing with emacs. 16 Tutorial: Editing with
pico. 17 Tutorial: Editing with Text Editor. Part V: UNIX Networking: 18 UNIX
Networking. 19 Tutorial: Using mail and mailx. 20 Tutorial: Processing Mail with
pine. 21 Tutorial: Processing Mail with Mailer. 22 Tutorial: Logging in Remotely.
23 Tutorial: Transferring Files. Part VI: Secure Computing: 24 Computer Security.
25 Tutorial: Remote Computing Using SSH-1. 26 Tutorial: Remote Computing
Using SSH-2. 27 Tutorial: Protecting Privacy with PGP. Part VII: Startup Files: 28
Startup Files. 29 Tutorial: Using sh and ksh Startup Files. 30 Tutorial: Using csh
and tcsh Startup Files. 31 Tutorial: Using bash Startup Files. Part VIII: Scripting:
32 Scripting Languages. 33 Tutorial: Creating Shell Scripts. 34 Tutorial: Scripting
with awk. 35 Tutorial: Scripting with Perl. Part VIX: Programming Under UNIX:
36 Programming Under UNIX. 37 Tutorial: Programming in C. 38 Tutorial:
Programming in C++. 39 Tutorial: Programming in Fortran. 40 Tutorial:
Programming in Java. Appendices: Appendix A: Taming Your Terminal. Appendix
B: The UNIX Manual. Appendix C: Regular Expressions. Appendix D: write and
talk. Appendix E: Using dbx. Appendix F: Using make
YOUR UNIX: THE ULTIMATE GUIDE
Second Edition
by Sumitabha Das, Softman Services, Inc
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252042-2 / MHID: 0-07-252042-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124434-3 / MHID: 0-07-124434-4 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/das
Your UNIX: The Ultimate Guide is both an outstanding
pedagogical tool and an exhaustive reference. It is the
ideal text for any Unix course. It can also be used for any
introductory programming course that includes Unix and for
advanced courses such as those on Operating Systems and
System Administration. Excellent pedagogy is implemented
throughout. Real-world examples make it easier for students to
grasp concepts while chapters on advanced material take more
experienced students beyond the basics. Over nine hundred
exercises and self-test questions allow students to test and
reinforce their understanding of material at different levels.
This book also features coverage of Linux, where Linux differs
from UNIX.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The number of chapters has been reduced from 24 to 19 to allow
for a more intense focus on core UNIX topics.
• Coverage is logically divided between essential(chapters 1-13) and
advanced (chpaters 14-19) material.
• Three new chapters on programming tools and systems
programming benefit the serious programmer and make the book
suitable for a course on systems programming.
• Coverage of encryption and the Secure Shell has been added.
• Discussion of vi and emacs editors uses snippets of code to
illustrate the benefits to programmers of knowing the editor well.
• The requirements of the POSIX standard have been highlighted
throughout.
• A single comprehensive index replaces the multiple specialized
indices from the previous edition.
FEATURES
• Notes, Tips, and Caution boxes provide on-the-spot assistance to
students.
• Linux coverage supplements generic coverage of UNIX in cases
where Linux behaves differently.
• Coverage of the Korn, bash, and C shells is featured in
appendices.
• Scores of tables, diagrams, and screen shots make the
fundamentals of the Unix operating system more accessible to
students.
• Over nine hundred self-test questions and exercises allow students
to test and reinforce their understanding of key concepts.
• Scores of real-life examples prompt the reader to envision
the practical application of UNIX in situations they are likely to
encounter.
28
11/15/06 5:05:15 PM
Computer Science
CONTENTS
1 Introducing UNIX 2 Becoming Familiar with UNIX Commands 3 The File System
4 File Attributes 5 The vi/vim Editor 6 The GNU emacs Editor 7 The Shell 8 The
Process 9 The Shell—Customizing the Environment 10 Simple Filters 11 Filters
Using Regular Expressions—grep and sed 12 Filtering and Programming with awk
13 Shell Programming 14 Networking Tools 15 perl—The Master Manipulator
16 Program Development Tools 17 Systems Programming I—Files 18 Systems
Programming II—Process Control 19 System Administration Appendix A The C
Shell—Programming Constructs. Appendix B The Korn and Bash Shells—Exclusive
Programming Constructs Appendix C vi/vim and emacs Command Reference
Appendix D The Regular Expression Superset Appendix E The HOWTO Appendix
F The ASCII Character Set Appendix G Glossary Appendix H Solutions to SelfTest Questions
INTRODUCTION TO UNIX
by Kate Wrightson and Joe Merlino
2003 / 424 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283620-2 / MHID: 0-07-283620-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121918-1 / MHID: 0-07-121918-8 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/cit/wrightson
CONTENTS
Part I – UNIX Basics: Chapter 1 – What is UNIX? Chapter 2 – Basic UNIX Concepts.
Chapter 3 – Understanding UNIX Commands. Chapter 4 – The File System.
Chapter 5 – Jobs and Processes. Chapter 6 – Using the Shell. Part II – Working
with UNIX: Chapter 7 – The vi Editor. Chapter 8 – Other Text Editors. Chapter
9 – Internet Applications. Chapter 10 – Networking I. Chapter 11 – Networking
II. Part III – Shell Programming: Chapter 12 – Shell Programming I. Chapter 13
– Shell Programming II. Chapter 14 – Shell Programming III. Chapter 15 – Shell
Programming IV. Part IV – System Administration: Chapter 16 – Basic System
Administration I. Chapter 17 – Basic System Administration II. Chapter 18 – X
Windows. Chapter 19 – Running Servers. Part V—Appendices: Appendix A:
UNIX Command Compendium. Appendix B: Glossary. Appendix C: Common
Configuration Files. Appendix D: Internet Resources
HTML
SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE HTML
by David Mercer, AFC Computer Services
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-142242-0 / MHID: 0-07-142242-0
EVEN MORE EXCELLENT HTML WITH HTML
REFERENCE GUIDE
Second Edition
by Timothy T. Gottleber, North Lake College and Timothy Trainor,
Muskegon County Community College
2003
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-256178-4 / MHID: 0-07-256178-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121285-4 / MHID: 0-07-121285-X [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/it/eme
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 An HTML Overview. Chapter 2 Your First Web Page. Chapter 3 Links
- Let’s Get Hyper. Chapter 4 Lists - Bringing Order to the Chaos. Chapter 5
Formatting - Is What You See What You Get? Chapter 6 Images A Picture is Worth
a 1,000 Words. Chapter 7 Tables - Data in Rows and Columns. Chapter 8 Styles
- Some Have It and Some Don’t. Chapter 9 Multimedia Beyond Static Web Pages.
Chapter 10 Frames - Divide and Conquer. Chapter 11 Forms - Handling User
Input. Chapter 12 Jazzing Up Your HTML. Chapter 13 JavaScript Programs for
HTML. Chapter 14 Images Maps and Dynamic HTML. Chapter 15 XML Overview
(New). Chapter 16 Pragmatic Hypertext - It Ain’t All Pictures! Appendix A Style
Guides. Appendix B Using File Transfer Protocol. Appendix C History of the
Internet (New) HTML Reference Guide Contents. Section A Summary of HTML
4.0 Elements (New). Section B Summary of XML Elements (New). Section C Style
Properties and Values (old Appendix B). Section D Common Character Sets (old
Appendix C). Section E Color blow-in/bind in page
INLINE/ONLINE: FUNDAMENTALS OF THE
INTERNET AND THE WORLD WIDE WEB
Second Edition
by Raymond Greenlaw, Armstrong Atlantic State University
2002
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-251715-6 / MHID: 0-07-251715-8
(with Passcode Card)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113113-1 / MHID: 0-07-113113-2
[IE with Passcode Card]
http://www.mhhe.com/greenlaw
CONTENTS
1 Fundamentals of Electronic Mail. 2 Jump Start: Browsing and Publishing. 3 The
Internet. 4 The World Wide Web. 5 Searching the World Wide Web. 6 Telnet
and FTP. 7 Basic HTML. 8 Web Graphics. 9 Advanced HTML. 10 Newsgroups
and Mailing Lists, Chat Rooms, and MUDs. 11 Electronic Publishing. 12 Web
Programming Material. 13 Multimedia. 14 Privacy and Security Topics. Appendix
A Internet Service Providers. Appendix B Text Editing. Appendix C Pine Mail
Program. Appendix D Basic UNIX. Appendix E HTML Tags. Appendix F Acronyms.
Appendix G My URLs
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF HTML
2002 / 360 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121034-8 / MHID: 0-07-121034-2 [IE]
29
11/15/06 5:05:16 PM
Computer Science
XML
WORLD WIDE WEB DESIGN WITH HTML
by C Xavier
1999 / 272 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-463971-9 / MHID: 0-07-463971-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118998-9 / MHID: 0-07-118998-X [IE]
PROGRAMMING THE WEB USING XML
by Ellen Pearlman and James Keogh
2004 / 448 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-284550-1 / MHID: 0-07-284550-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121504-6 / MHID: 0-07-121504-2 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/pearlman
XHTML
PROGRAMMING THE WEB USING XHTML AND
JAVASCRIPT
by Larry Randles Lagerstrom
2003 / 624 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-256031-2 / MHID: 0-07-256031-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119997-1 / MHID: 0-07-119997-7 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/webdev/lagerstrom
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction to the Internet. Chapter 2 Creating a Basic Web Page.
Chapter 3 Cascading Style Sheets. Chapter 4 Attributes, Lists and Tables. Chapter
5 Images, Links and Multimedia. Chapter 6 Web Page Design and Layout. Chapter
7 Introduction to Programming and JavaScript. Chapter 8 Objects and Variables.
Chapter 9 Functions and Parameters. Chapter 10 Forms and Interactive Server.
Chapter 11 Performing Calculations. Chapter 12 Increasing the Interactivity.
Chapter 13 Putting It All Together: Online Quizzes and Slide Shows. Chapter
14 Loops and Arrays. Chapter 15 Strings, Dates and Cookies. Chapter 16 Custom
Objects: Creating and Searching a Database. Chapter 17 JavaScript with Frames
and Windows. Appendices: A. Sitebuilding Exercises. B. HTML and XHTML
Elements. C. Converting HTML into XHTML. D. Basic Style and Properties and
Values. E. Color and Character Codes. F. JavaScript Versions, Objects and Reserved
Words. G. Common HTML and JavaScript Errors. H. Publishing a Web Page on
the Internet. I. Tools and Resources
Programming the Web Using XML by Ellen Pearlman and
Eileen Mullin, part of our Web Developer Series, is designed
to help those who have a background in HTML make the
transition to XML, is designed to ensure that those who are
new to Web design get the best introduction possible into
developing sites in XML. The book begins with a comparison
of HTML, XHTML, and XML, and includes real-life examples
of how XML is being used today to help readers appreciate
the power of XML. It also provides comprehensive coverage
of the rules and standards for XML, which is very critical in
programming XML. After completing this book, users will
receive a comprehensive foundation to the rules and standards
of XML syntax, complete with a series of lessons that walk
he/she through the process of creating XML documents and
related files.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 XML An Introduction. Chapter 2 Comparing HTML, XHTML, and XML.
Chapter 3 Understanding How XML Works: The Fundamentals. Chapter 4 Creating
Document Type Definitions (DTDs). Chapter 5 Schemas. Chapter 6 Using XML
Parsers and Unicode. Chapter 7 Applying Cascading Style Sheets. Chapter 8
Applying Extensible Style Sheets. Chapter 9 Linking XML Documents. Chapter 10
DOM. Chapter 11 Using Scalable Vector Graphics. Chapter 12 Adding Multimedia
With SMIL. Chapter 13 Databases. Chapter 14 Web Services. Appendix A: Online
Resources. Appendix B: Unicode. Appendix C: Color in CSS
SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF XML
by Ed Tittel
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-142245-1 / MHID: 0-07-142245-5
What could be better than the bestselling Schaum’s Outline
series? For students looking for a quick nuts-and-bolts overview,
there’s no series that does it better. Each book is a pared-down,
simplified, and tightly focused version of its predecessor. With
an emphasis on clarity and brevity, these new titles feature a
streamlined, updated format and the absolute essence of the
subject, presented in a concise and readily understandable
form. Graphic elements such as sidebars, reader-alert icons,
and boxed highlights stress selected points from the text,
illuminate keys to learning, and give students quick pointers to
the essentials. Each book:
• Designed to appeal to underprepared students and readers turned
off by dense text
• Cartoons, sidebars, icons, and other graphic pointers get the
material across fast
• Concise text focuses on the essence of the subject
• Deliver expert help from teachers who are authorities in their
fields
• Perfect for last-minute test preparation
• So small and light that they fit in a backpack!
30
11/15/06 5:05:17 PM
Computer Science
Dreamweaver
WEB DESIGN USING DREAMWEAVER
by Marc D Miller, Augusta State University and Thomas C Padgett,
State University of West Georgia
2003 / 256 pages /
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119999-5 / MHID: 0-07-119999-3 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Working in Dreamweaver. Chapter 2: Site Definition. Chapter 3: Setting
Up A Document. Chapter 4: Page Layout -Tables. Chapter 5: Page Layout – Layers
and Layout View. Chapter 6: Frames. Chapter 7: Images in Dreamweaver. Chapter
8: Linking and Navigation. Chapter 9: Dreamweaver Assets. Chapter 10: Cascading
Style Sheets (CSS). Chapter 11: Forms. Chapter 12: Using Behaviors
Visual Studio.Net
.Net Programming
PROGRAMMING THE WEB USING ASP.NET
by Dave Mercer
2004
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294938-4 / MHID: 0-07-294938-4
(with Student CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124159-5 / MHID: 0-07-124159-0
[IE with CD - 2 Color Text]
ASP.Net has made the building of real world Web applications
dramatically easier, by allowing great web pages to be built
with far less code than the classic ASP program. David
Mercer’s: Programming The Web Using ASP.NET has been
tailored for instructors at either a 2 year or 4 year institutions,
who are teaching a full term course on ASP.NET. This textbook
has been written by an expert in the field with the sole purpose
of being used as a textbook not a trade book.
CONTENTS
Programming the Web Using ASP.NET 1 2004. Chapter 1. ASP.NET. Chapter
2. The ASP.Net Template. Chapter 3. The .Net and ASP.Net Classes. Chapter
4. ASP.NET and Languages. Chapter 5. ASP.Net Applications and Sessions.
Chapter 6. The User Interface (UI). Chapter 7. Databases and ASP.Net. Chapter
8. Introduction to ADO.NET. Chapter 9. XML Web Services. Chapter 10. ASP.
NET Optimizing and Debugging
PROGRAMMING THE WEB USING VISUAL STUDIO
.NET
2003
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-284452-8 / MHID: 0-07-284452-3 (with CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123611-9 / MHID: 0-07-123611-2 [IE with CD]
C#
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Integrated Development Environ-ments. Chapter 2 Programming Basics.
Chapter 3 Markup Languages and XML. Chapter 4 Database Design. Chapter 5
Business Processes and Information. Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface.
Chapter 7 VB .NET, ADO .NET. Chapter 8 VS .NET Templates. Chapter 9 Web
Applications. Chapter 10 Web Services. Chapter 11 Project Management with
VS .NET. Appendices
PROGRAMMING IN C# .NET
by Julia Case Bradley, and Anita C Millspaugh, Mt. San Antonio
College
2004 / 704 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-288625-2 / MHID: 0-07-288625-0
(with Student CD and 4-CD Set)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121803-0 / MHID: 0-07-121803-3
[IE with Student CD and 4-CDSet]
http://www.mhhe.com/cit/program/bradley/csharp
With Microsoft’s recent release of their Visual Development
Studio (Visual Studio .Net), a new programming language has
been introduced. The new language is C# .Net. Programming
in C# .NET has been written by the successful author team of
Bradley and Millspaugh, who write our Visual Basic books.
Therefore, the book maintains the strong pedagogy that has
been used to teach students how to program. This book assumes
no prior knowledge of programming and it incorporates basic
concepts of programming, problem solving, and programming
logic and design techniques to teach students a mastery of C
#.Net at an introductory level.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction to Programming and C#. Chapter 2 More Controls. Chapter
3 Variables, Constants, and Calculations. Chapter 4 Decisions and Conditions.
Chapter 5 Menus and Methods. Chapter 6 OOP Creating Object-Oriented
Programs. Chapter 7 Lists, Loops, and Printing. Chapter 8 Arrays. Chapter 9
Programming With Web Forms. Chapter 10 Accessing Database Files. Chapter 11
Saving Data and Objects in Files. Chapter 12 Graphics in Windows and the Web.
Chapter 13 Advanced Topics in C#. Appendix A Answers to Feedback Questions.
Appendix B Methods for Working with Dates, Strings, and Mathematics. Appendix
C Tips and Shortcuts for Mastering the Environment. Glossary. Index
31
11/15/06 5:05:17 PM
Computer Science
Other Languages
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MATHEMATICA
by Eugene Don, Queens College of the City University of New York
2000 / 368 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-135719-7 / MHID: 0-07-135719-X
Schaum's Publications
CONTENTS
Getting Acquainted. Basic Concepts. Lists. Two-Dimensional Graphics. ThreeDimensional Graphics. Equations. Algebra and Trignometry. Differential Calculus.
Integral Calculus. Multivariate Calculus. Ordinary Differential Equations. Linear
Algebra.
Data Structures/CS2
Data Structures In Java
DATA STRUCTURES AND THE JAVA COLLECTIONS
FRAMEWORK
Second Edition
by William Collins, Lafayette College
2005 / 768 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-302265-9 / MHID: 0-07-302265-9
(with OLC/Bind-In Card)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111407-3 / MHID: 0-07-111407-6
[IE with OLC]
PowerPoints, Labs, Solutions (Browse http://www.mhhe.com/collins)
Data Structures and the Java Collections Framework, 2/e by
William Collins teaches the fundamentals of data structures
using java. This student-friendly book focuses on teaching
students how to apply the concepts presented. To that end
many applications and examples are included throughout the
book. Collins also provides programming projects at the end
of each chapter, which get students hands on with code. In the
second edition, Collins has increased his coverage on teaching
students to build data structures from scratch. He also continues
to use the Java Collections Framework where appropriate.
His goal is give students an excellent background in creating
data structures themselves, as well as make them comfortable
using the standard library. On-line Labs accompany this book
and make it easy to have students start practice what they are
learning. These labs can be used as open-labs, closed labs,
or homework assignments and are designed to give students
hands-on experience in programming.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
opportunity for hands on learning that reinforces concepts.
• More extensive java review has been added in the first two
chapters of the book, preparing students to study data structures.
• Incorporates Java 2 Standard Edition, Version 1.5, making use of
the newest features of the java language including generics, boxing
and unboxing and the enhanced for statement.
• UML (Unified Modeling Language) and javadoc notation are
introduced in Chapter 1 and utilized throughout the text-over 30
UML diagrams are included.
• Includes generics-now part of the Java Collections Framework.
CONTENTS
1 Important Features of Java. 2 Interfaces and Collection Classes. 3 Introduction
to Software Engineering. 4 Recursion. 5 Array Lists. 6 Linked Lists. 7 Queues and
Stacks. 8 Binary Trees and Binary Search Trees. 9 Balanced Binary Search Trees.
10 Tree maps and Tree sets. 11 Priority Queues. 12 Sorting. 13 Searching and
The Hash Classes. 14 Graphs, Trees, and Networks. Appendix 1 Mathematical
Background. Appendix 3 The Java Collections Framework
JAVA STRUCTURES
Data Structures in Java for the Principled Programmer
Second Edition
by Duane Bailey, Williams College
2003 / 400 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112163-7 / MHID: 0-07-112163-3 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/javastructures
CONTENTS
Chapter 0 Introduction. Chapter 1 The Object-Oriented Method. Chpater 2
Comments, Conditions, and Assertions. Chapter 3 Vectors. Chapter 4 Design
Fundamentals. Chapter 5 Sorting. Chapter 6 The Design Method. Chapter 7
Iterators. Chapter 8 Lists. Chapter 9 Linear Structures. Chapter 10 Ordered
Structures. Chapter 11 Binary Trees. Chapter 12 Priority Queues. Chapter 13
Search Trees. Chapter 14 Maps. Chapter 15 Graphs. Appendix A Selected Answers.
Appendix B A Sip of Java. Appendix C Collections. Appendix D Documentation.
Appendix E Environments. Appendix F Further Reading. Appendix G Glossary.
Index
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF DATA STRUCTURES WITH
JAVA
by John R. Hubbard, University of Richmond
2001 / 369 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-136128-6 / MHID: 0-07-136128-6
CONTENTS
Review of Java. Review of Arrays. Advanced Java. Recursion. Collections. Stacks.
Queues. Lists. Trees. Binary Trees. Search Trees. Heaps and Priority Queues.
Sorting. Tables. Sets. Graphs. Essential Mathematics. From C++ to Java. Java
Development Environments. References.
• This text is extremely student-friendly. Throughout the book,
there are examples, hints, notes, and marginal notes to help students
navigate through the concepts. Collins also motivates by providing
many applications throughout.
• Collins uses the Java Collections Framework, as well as presenting
other implementations. This allows students to get comfortable using
an industry standard java library, which they will be able to use even
after they finish the course.
• An extensive suite of accompanying labs can be found at www.
mhhe.com/collins. Labs allow students to get hands-on with material
they are learning. Icons in the book let readers know when they are
prepared to complete the next lab.
• The new edition has given added emphasis to buidling data
structures from scratch.
• Programming projects at the end of chapters give students an
32
11/15/06 5:05:18 PM
Computer Science
DATA STRUCTURES, ALGORITHMS, AND
APPLICATIONS IN JAVA WITH COMPILER CD
by Sartaj Sahni, University of Florida
2001 / 872 pages / hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116900-4 / MHID: 0-07-116900-8 [IE]
CONTENTS
Preface1 Java Review. 2 Performance Analysis of Programs. 3 Asymptotic Notation.
4 Performance Measurement of Programs. 5 Linear Lists-Array Representation.
6 Linear Lists-Linked Repre-sentation. 7 Linear Lists-Simulated Pointers. 8 Arrays
and Matrices. 9 Stacks. 10 Queues. 11 Skip Lists and Hashing. 12 Binary and
Other Trees. 13 Priority Queues. 14 Tournament Trees. 15 Binary Search Trees.
16 Balanced Search Trees. 17 Graphs. 18 The Greedy Method. 19 Divide and
Conquer. 20 Dynamic Programming. 21 Backtracking (ON WEBSITE). 22 Branch
and Bound (ON WEBSITE)
Data Structures In C++
C++
Second Edition
2000 / 422 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-135346-5 / MHID: 0-07-135346-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118372-7 / MHID: 0-07-118372-8 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Elementary C++ Programming. Chapter 2: Fundamental Types.
Chapter 3: Selection. Chapter 4: Iteration. Chapter 5: Functions. Chapter 6: Arrays.
Chapter 7: Pointers and References. Chapter 8: C-Strings. Chapter 9: Standard
C++ Strings. Chapter 10: Classes. Chapter 11: Overloading Operators. Chapter
12: Composition and Inheritance. Chapter 13: Templates and Iterators. Chapter 14:
Standard C++ Vectors. Chapter 15: Container Classes. Appendices: A: Character
Codes. B: Standard C++ Keywords. C: Standard C++ Operators. D: Standard
C++ Container Classes. E: Standard C++ Generic Algorithms. F: The Standard
C Library. G: Hexadecimal Numbers. H: References.
DATA STRUCTURES AND THE STANDARD
TEMPLATE LIBRARY
by William Collins, Lafayette College
2003 / 688 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115097-2 / MHID: 0-07-115097-8 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Important Features in C++. 2 Storage Structures for Container Classes. 3
Introduction to Software Engineering. 4 Introduction to Recursion. 5 Vectors and
Deques. 6 Lists. 7 Queues and Stacks. 8 Binary Trees and Binary Search Trees.
9 AVL Trees. 10 Red-Black Trees. 11 Priority Queues. 12 Sorting. 13 Searching
and the Hash Classes. 14 Graphs, Trees, and Networks. Appendix 1 Mathematical
Background. Appendix 2 The String Class. Appendix 3 Polymorphism
DATA STRUCTURES, ALGORITHMS AND OBJECTORIENTED PROGRAMMING
by Gregory L Heileman, University of New Mexico
1996 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114322-6 / MHID: 0-07-114322-X [IE]
CONTENTS
Part 1•Fundamentals/1 Background/2 Algorithmics/3 Data Structures and
C Programs/4 Object Oriented Programming and C++/Part II•Basic Data
Structures/5 Lists/6 Stacks and Queues/7 Binary Search Trees/8 Hashing/9 Priority
Queues/Part III•Advanced Data Structures/10 Amortized Analysis/11 Balanced
Search Trees/12 Heaps/13 Dynamic Sets with Special Operations/14 Graphs/
Appendixes/A Mathematical Review Sums and Recurrences/B Mathematical
Review Sets, Counting, and Graphs.
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF DATA STRUCTURES WITH
C++
by John R Hubbard, University of Richmond
2000 / 407 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118358-1 / MHID: 0-07-118358-2 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Review of C++. Chapter 2: Pointers and Arrays. Chapter 3: Class.
Chapter 4: Recursion. Chapter 5: Stacks. Chapter 6: Queuses. Chapter 7: Lists.
Chapters 8: Tables. Chapter 9: Trees. Chapter 10: Binary Trees. Chapter 11: Search
Tree. Chapter 12: Heaps and Priority Queues. Appendices. Index.
33
11/15/06 5:05:19 PM
Computer Science
Data Structures In C
STRUCTURING DATA AND BUILDING
ALGORITHMS
by Ian Chai, and Jonathon David White
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125726-8 / MHID: 0-07-125726-8
(Asian Publication)
The famous mathematician, physicist, theologian, and
philosopher Sir Isaac Newton (1642–1727) once wrote, “If I
have seen further [than certain other people], it is by standing
on the shoulders of giants.” This is very true in computer
programming as well. Imagine if all programmers had to
rediscover for themselves by trial and error how to solve
common problems in programming! It is much better to learn
the solutions that other programmers have already discovered
and build upon that foundation.
This book is about those foundational solutions. It describes
how to structure data and build algorithms to solve common
programming tasks. Some of these techniques have names
that come from ordinary non-computer life – e.g. stacks,
queues and sorting – and others have names that might be
completely unfamiliar to a new student of programming – e.g.
recursion, backtracking and arrays – but they are all standards
in the programmer’s tool chest. Occasionally, a new tool is
discovered – or at least, refined – and we include one which
was just discovered in 1999 – introspective sort. But most of
them have been part of the standard programmer’s tool chest
for decades. Unlike the majority of textbooks in this field, this
book takes a “code first” approach. After a brief introduction
of the concepts, a short complete ANSI-C program is presented
for students to analyse. A number of questions arising from the
code are then posed and answered in the Socratic format. In
this way, we hope that the reader will not only become fluent
in the concepts but also in the “nuts and bolts” of translating
these concepts into functioning, efficient standard C code.
Variable pointer diagrams are developed and used extensively
to aid understanding of the more complex data structures and
their manipulation.
CONTENTS
Preface. About the Authors. Part 1: Structuring Data. 1 Structuring Data: Variables
and Pointers. 2 Structuring Data: Arrays and Records. 3 Structuring Data:
Linked Lists. 4
Structuring Data: Trees. 5 Structuring Data: Graphs and
Sets. Part 2: Building Algorithms. 6 Building Algorithms: Basic Techniques.
7 Building. Algorithms: Key Concepts. Part 3: Algorithms and Data Structures in
Action. 8
Searching. 9 Sorting. 10 NP-hard Problems. Part 4: Theory of
Computing. 11 Finite State Automata. 12 Turing Machines. Appendix: Annotated
Bibliography. Answers to Problems. Index.
Analysis Of Algorithms
NEW
INTRODUCTION TO ALGORITHMS
by Sanjoy Dasgupta, University of California–San Diego, Christos
H. Papadimitriou, University of California–Berkeley, and Umesh
Vazirani, University of California–Berkeley
2007 (September 2006) / Softcover / 320 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352340-8 / MHID: 0-07-352340-2
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/dasgupta
FEATURES
• SPRINKLED WITH interesting stories about the development of
important
algorithms AS WELL AS ABOUT THEIR CURRENT USES IN THE
GLOBAL INFORMATION ENVIRONMENT.
• The book is concise and realistic; with key Design Issues and
rationales that clearly outline the problems to be solveD and show
how
to develop the algorithm...
• Self contained chapters that provide a variety of perspectives on
the implementation of algorithms
The authors cover THE essential algorithms that students need to
know,
but are also thorough and rigorous; including coverage of linear
programming and quantum computing (BOTH optional, BUT
COVERED IN NO OTHER BOOK).
• This is a highly flexible text with self contained chapters: some
simple and others high level; that provide a variety of perspectives on
the analysis and design of algorithms.
Carefully class tested at UCSD and UC Berkeley OVER 10 YEARS.
• The book uses a unique approach for proofs and is intuitive and
accessible.
CONTENTS
0 Prologue. 1 Algorithms with Numbers. 2 Divide-and-conquer algorithms. 3
Decompositions of graphs. 4 Paths in graphs. 5 Greedy algorithms. 6 Dynamic
Programming. 7 Linear Programming and Reductions. 8 NP-complete Problems
9 Coping with NP-completeness. 10 Quantum Algorithms.
STRUCTURING DATA AND BUILDING
ALGORITHMS
by Ian Chai, and Jonathon David White
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125726-8 / MHID: 0-07-125726-8
(Asian Publication)
The famous mathematician, physicist, theologian, and
philosopher Sir Isaac Newton (1642–1727) once wrote, “If I
have seen further [than certain other people], it is by standing
on the shoulders of giants.” This is very true in computer
programming as well. Imagine if all programmers had to
rediscover for themselves by trial and error how to solve
common problems in programming! It is much better to learn
the solutions that other programmers have already discovered
and build upon that foundation.
This book is about those foundational solutions. It describes
how to structure data and build algorithms to solve common
programming tasks. Some of these techniques have names
that come from ordinary non-computer life – e.g. stacks,
queues and sorting – and others have names that might be
completely unfamiliar to a new student of programming – e.g.
recursion, backtracking and arrays – but they are all standards
in the programmer’s tool chest. Occasionally, a new tool is
discovered – or at least, refined – and we include one which
was just discovered in 1999 – introspective sort. But most of
them have been part of the standard programmer’s tool chest
for decades. Unlike the majority of textbooks in this field, this
34
11/15/06 5:05:19 PM
Computer Science
book takes a “code first” approach. After a brief introduction
of the concepts, a short complete ANSI-C program is presented
for students to analyse. A number of questions arising from the
code are then posed and answered in the Socratic format. In
this way, we hope that the reader will not only become fluent
in the concepts but also in the “nuts and bolts” of translating
these concepts into functioning, efficient standard C code.
Variable pointer diagrams are developed and used extensively
to aid understanding of the more complex data structures and
their manipulation.
CONTENTS
Preface. About the Authors. Part 1: Structuring Data. 1 Structuring Data: Variables
and Pointers. 2 Structuring Data: Arrays and Records. 3 Structuring Data:
Linked Lists. 4
Structuring Data: Trees. 5 Structuring Data: Graphs and
Sets. Part 2: Building Algorithms. 6 Building Algorithms: Basic Techniques.
7 Building. Algorithms: Key Concepts. Part 3: Algorithms and Data Structures in
Action. 8
Searching. 9 Sorting. 10 NP-hard Problems. Part 4: Theory of
Computing. 11 Finite State Automata. 12 Turing Machines. Appendix: Annotated
Bibliography. Answers to Problems. Index.
DATA STRUCTURES, ALGORITHMS, AND
APPLICATIONS IN JAVA WITH COMPILER CD
by Sartaj Sahni, University of Florida
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116900-4 / MHID: 0-07-116900-8 [IE]
CONTENTS
Preface1 Java Review/2 Performance Analysis of Programs/3 Asymptotic
Notation/4 Performance Measurement of Programs/5 Linear Lists-Array
Representation/6 Linear Lists-Linked Representation /7 Linear Lists-Simulated
Pointers/8 Arrays and Matrices/9 Stacks/10 Queues/11 Skip Lists and Hashing/12
Binary and Other Trees/13 Priority Queues/14 Tournament Trees/15 Binary Search
Trees/16 Balanced Search Trees/17 Graphs/18 The Greedy Method/19 Divide and
Conquer/20 Dynamic Programming/21 Backtracking (ON WEBSITE)/22 Branch
and Bound (ON WEBSITE)
INTRODUCTION TO THE DESIGN AND ANALYSIS
OF ALGORITHMS
by R. C. T. Lee, Shian-Shyong Tseng, Ruei-Chuan Chang, and Y. T.
Tsai
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124346-9 / MHID: 0-07-124346-1
(Asian Publication)
Communication network design, VLSI layout and DNA
sequence analysis are important and challenging problems
that cannot be solved by naïve and straightforward algorithms.
Thus, it is critical for a computer scientist to have a good
knowledge of algorithm design and analysis.
This book presents algorithm design from the viewpoint of
strategies. Each strategy is introduced with many algorithms
designed under the strategy. Each algorithm is presented with
many examples and each example with many figures. In recent
years, many approximation algorithms have been developed.
Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithms presents
two important concepts clearly: PTAS and NPO-complete. This
book also discusses the concept of NP-completeness before
introducing approximation algorithms. Again, this is explained
through examples which make sure that the students have a
definite idea about this very abstract concept.
This book can be used as a textbook by senior undergraduate
students or master level graduate students in computer
science.
CONTENTS
Preface. 1 Introduction. 2 The complexity of algorithms and the lower bounds
of problems. 3 The greedy method. 4 The divide-and-conquer strategy. 5 Tree
searching strategies. 6 Prune-and-search. 7 Dynamic programming. 8 The theory
of NP-completeness. 9 Approximation algorithms. 10 Amortized analysis. 11
Randomized algorithms. 12 On-line algorithms. Bibliography. Author index.
Subject index.
Discrete Mathematics
NEW
DISCRETE MATHEMATICS AND ITS APPLICATIONS
Sixth Edition
by Kenneth H. Rosen, AT&T Bell Laboratories
2007 (June 2006) / 896 pages / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322972-0 / MHID: 0-07-322972-5
(with Mathzone)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124474-9 / MHID: 0-07-124474-3 [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/rosen
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Expanded and gentler introduction to logic and proofs
• Earlier coverage and integration of proof methods and proof
strategies in the new Chapter 1, with simpler examples of proof
strategy than in section 3.1 of the 5th edition
• Worked Examples – Over 700 examples are used to illustrate
concepts, relate different topics, and introduce applications.
New for this edition--The Sixth Edition adds many new examples, as
well as a focused expansion of key examples.
• Exercises – Rosen contains over 3500 exercises, from
straightforward problems that develop basic skills to a large number
of intermediate and challenging exercises. Exercise sets also contain
special discussions that develop new concepts not covered in
the text, enabling students to discover new ideas through their
own work. Each chapter is followed by a rich and varied set of
Supplementary Exercises that reinforce the concepts of the chapter
and integrate different topics more effectively, and a set of Writing
Projects designed to tie together mathematical concepts and the
writing process to expose students to possible areas for further study.
For courses that utilize programming, sets of Computer Projects tie
concepts in discrete math together what students may have learned
about computing, and Computation and Exploration exercises allow
students to uncover new facts and ideas about discrete math using
mathematical computation software such as MAPLE or Mathematica.
New for this edition--The Sixth Edition adds many new exercises to
this comprehensive mix.
• NEW MathZone Website – The Sixth Edition substantially expands
the capabilities of Rosen’s highly-regarded online companion site by
bringing the power of MathZone to discrete mathematics. MathZone
is McGraw-Hill’s robust online tutorial and course management
system, and is now included free with each new copy of Rosen. The
Sixth Edition MathZone site includes a bevy of new and enhanced
features: new online testing, improved site navigation, more Extra
Examples and Extra Exercises, more Additional Steps to help
students understand difficult topics in the text, an updated MAPLE
Programming Supplement, a substantially expanded Applications
of Discrete Math supplement containing in-depth applications and
projects, and an updated Web Resources Guide containing links to
hundreds of external websites relevant to the text material. These
enhancements--along with existing features like Interactive Demo
applets, lecture notes and transparencies, sample syllabi and teaching
suggestions, NetTutor live tutorial help, and student guides for
writing proofs and avoiding common mistakes in discrete math—
make the Sixth Edition MathZone site a valuable companion to your
discrete math course.
35
11/15/06 5:05:20 PM
Computer Science
FEATURES
• Clarity and Precision – Rosen’s writing style is direct and
pragmatic. Care has been taken to balance the mix of notation and
words in mathematical statements. All definitions and theorems in
this text are stated extremely carefully so that students will appreciate
the precision of language and rigor needed in discrete mathematics.
Proofs are motivated and developed slowly; their steps are all
carefully justified. Recursive definitions are explained and used
extensively.
CONTENTS
Preface. The MathZone Companion Website To the Student. 1 The Foundations:
Logic and Proofs. 1.1 Propositional Logic 1.2 Propositional Equivalences
1.3 Predicates and Quantifiers 1.4 Nested Quantifiers
1.5 Rules of Inference 1.6 Introduction to Proofs 1.7 Proof Methods and Strategy
End-of-Chapter Material 2 Basic Structures: Sets, Functions, Sequences and Sums
2.1 Sets 2.2 Set Operations 2.3 Functions 2.4 Sequences and Summations End-ofChapter Material 3 The Fundamentals: Algorithms, the Integers, and Matrices 3.1
Algorithms 3.2 The Growth of Functions 3.3 Complexity of Algorithms 3.4 The
Integers and Division 3.5 Integers and Algorithms 3.6 Applications of Number
Theory 3.7 Matrices End-of-Chapter Material 4 Induction and Recursion 4.1
Mathematical Induction 4.2 Strong Induction and Well-Ordering 4.3 Recursive
Definitions and Structural Induction 4.4 Recursive Algorithms 4.5 Program
Correctness End-of-Chapter Material 5 Counting 5.1 The Basics of Counting
5.2 The Pigeonhole Principle 5.3 Permutations and Combinations 5.4 Binomial
Coefficients 5.5 Generalized Permutations and Combinations 5.6 Generating
Permutations and Combinations End-of-Chapter Material 6 Discrete Probability
6.1 An Introduction to Discrete Probability 6.2 Probability Theory 6.3 Bayes’
Theorem 6.4 Expected Value and Variance End-of-Chapter Material 7 Advanced
Counting Techniques 7.1 Recurrence Relations 7.2 Solving Recurrence Relations
7.3 Divide-and-Conquer Algorithms and Recurrence Relations 7.4 Generating
Functions 7.5 Inclusion-Exclusion 7.6 Applications of Inclusion-Exclusion End-ofChapter Material 8 Relations 8.1 Relations and Their Properties 8.2 n-ary Relations
and Their Applications 8.3 Representing Relations 8.4 Closures of Relations 8.5
Equivalence Relations 8.6 Partial Orderings End-of-Chapter Material 9 Graphs 9.1
Graph Terminology and Models 9.2 Special Graphs 9.3 Representing Graphs and
Graph Isomorphism 9.4 Connectivity 9.5 Euler and Hamilton Paths 9.6 ShortestPath Problems 9.7 Planar Graphs 9.8 Graph Coloring End-of-Chapter Material 10
Trees 10.1 Introduction to Trees 10.2 Applications of Trees 10.3 Tree Traversal
10.4 Spanning Trees 10.5 Minimum Spanning Trees End-of-Chapter Material
11 Boolean Algebra 11.1 Boolean Functions 11.2 Representing Boolean
Functions 11.3 Logic Gates 11.4 Minimization of Circuits End-of-Chapter Material
12 Modeling Computation. 12.1 Languages and Grammars. 12.2 Finite-State
Machines with Output. 12.3 Finite-State Machines with No Output. 12.4 Language
Recognition. 12.5 Turing Machines. End-of-Chapter Material. Appendixes.
A.1 Axioms for Real Numbers and Integers. A.2 Exponential and Logarithmic
Functions. A.3 Pseudocode. Suggested Readings. Answers to Odd-Numbered
Exercises. Photo Credits. Index of Biographies. Index
DISCRETE MATHEMATICS BY EXAMPLE
by Andrew Simpson, Oxford Brookes
2002 / 450pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-709840-7 / MHID: 0-07-709840-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122914-2 / MHID: 0-07-122914-0 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Numbers. 3 Propositional logic. 4 Set theory. 5 Boolean algebra.
6 Typed set theory. 7 Predicate logic. 8 Relations. 9 Functions. 10 Sequences. 11
Induction. 12 Graph theory. 13 Combinatorics. 14 Modelling. 15 Analysis
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ESSENTIAL COMPUTER
MATHEMATICS
by Seymour Lipschutz, Temple University
1982 / 256 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-037990-9 / MHID: 0-07-037990-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-099132-3 / MHID: 0-07-099132-4 [IE]
CONTENTS
Binary Number System. Computer Codes. Computer Arithmetic. Logic. Flowcharts.
Sets and Relations. Boolean Algebra, Logic Gates. Simplifying Logic Circuits,
Karnaugh Maps. Vectors, Matrices, Subscripted Variables. Linear Equations.
Combinatorics. Probability. Statistics, Random Variables. Graph Theory. Trees,
Directed Graphs, Machines.
Programming Languages and
Program Design
NEW
PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES
Second Edition
by Allen B. Tucker, Bowdoin College, and Robert Noonan, College
of William and Mary
2007 (August 2006) / Hardcover / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286609-4 / MHID: 0-07-286609-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125439-7 / MHID: 0-07-125439-0 [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/tucker
Tucker and Noonan's new approach emphasizes a thorough,
hands-on treatment of key issues in programming language
design, providing a balanced mix of explanation and
experimentation. Opening chapters present the fundamental
principals of programming languages, while optional
companion chapters provide implementation-based, hands-on
experience that delves even deeper. This edition also includes
a greatly expanded treatment of the four major programming
paradigms, incorporating a number of the most current
languages such as Perl and Python. Special topics presented
include event-handling, concurrency, and an all-new chapter
on correctness. Overall, this edition provides both broad and
deep coverage of language design principles and the major
paradigms, allowing users the flexibility of choosing what
topics to emphasize.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Depth of coverage & currency: in-depth coverage of core topics
includes both modern and historical example languages, including C,
Ada, Perl, Java, Smalltalk, Python, Scheme, Haskell, and Prolog
• The authors' approach offers unique coverage of event-handling,
concurrent programming and program correctness, with special
chapters on each of these topics.
• The authors emphasize a hands-on approach for implementationbased problems and exercises and include expanded coverage of
language design principles and trade-offs.
• Introduces Clite (C Lite), a subset of the language C, as a basis for
illustrating the principles of language design.
FEATURES
• Flexibile organization and coverage gives instructors the option of
adding implementation-based coverage to the principles chapters via
optional companion chapters.
36
11/15/06 5:05:21 PM
Computer Science
CONTENTS
1 Overview. 2 Syntax. 3 Lexical and Syntactic Analysis. 4 Names. 5 Types. 6
Type Systems. 7 Semantics. 8 Semantic Interpretation. 9 Functions. 10 Function
Implementation. 11 Memory Management. 12 Imperative Programming.
13 Object-Oriented Programming. 14 Functional Programming. 15 Logic
Programming. 16 Event-Driven Programming. 17 Concurrent Programming. 18
Program Correctness. A. Definition of Clite. B. Discrete Math Review. Glossary
Bibliography.
Theory Of Computation
INTRODUCTION TO LANGUAGES AND THE
THEORY OF COMPUTATION
Third Edition
by John C. Martin, North Dakota State University
2003 / 480 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-232200-2 / MHID: 0-07-232200-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124018-5 / MHID: 0-07-124018-7 [IE]
CONTENTS
I Mathematical Notation and Techniques: 1 Basic Mathematical Objects. 2
Mathematical Induction and Recursive Definitions. II Regular Languages and
Finite Automata: 3 Regular Languages and Finie Automata. 4 Nondeterminism
and Kleene’s Theorem. 5 Regular and Nonregular Languages. III Context-Free
Languages and Pushdown Automata: 6 Context-Free Grammars. 7 Pushdown
Automata. 8 Context-Free and Non-Context-Free Languages. IV Turing Machines
and Their Languages: 9 Turing Machines. 10 Recursively Enumerable Languages.
V Unsolvable Problems and Computable Func-tions: 11 Unsolvable Problems.
12 Computable Functions. VI Introduction to Computational Complexity: 13
Measuring and Classifying Complexity. 14 Tractable and Intractable Problems
techniques • Number representation and arithmetic circuits •
Combinational-circuit building blocks, such as multiplexers,
decoders, encoders, and code converters • Sequential-circuit
building blocks, such as flip-flops, registers, and counters •
Design of synchronous sequential circuits • Use of the basic
building blocks in designing larger systems. It also includes
chapters that deal with important, but more advanced topics:
• Design of asynchronous sequential circuits • Testing of
logic circuits. For students who have had no exposure to basic
electronics, but are interested in learning a few key concepts,
there is a chapter that presents the most basic aspects of
electronic implementation of digital circuits. Major changes
in the second edition of the book include • new examples
to clarify the presentation of fundamental concepts • over
50 new examples of solved problems provided at the end of
chapters • NAND and NOR gates now introduced in Chapter
2 • more complete discussion of techniques for minimization
of logic functions in Chapter 4 (including the tabular method)
• a new chapter explaining the CAD flow for synthesis of logic
circuits • Altera’s Quartus II CAD software provided on a
CD-ROM • three appendices that give tutorials on the use of
Quartus II software
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The book emphasizes CAD through the use of Altera’s Quartus
II CAD software, a state of the art digital circuit design package.
This software provides automatic mapping of designs written in
VHDL into Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs) and Complex
Programmable Logic Devices (CPLDs). The user will be able to enter
a design into the CAD system, compile the design into a selected
device, simulate the functionality and timing of the resulting circuit,
and implement the designs in actual devices (using the school’s
laboratory facilities).
• A chapter is included that illustrates the most basic aspects of
electronic implementation of digital circuits for students who have
had no exposure to basic electronics.
• New examples have been added to the second edition to help
clarify the presentation of fundamental concepts.
• Over 50 new examples of solved problems appear at the end of
chapters in the second edition.
• The second edition features a new chapter explaining CAD flow
for synthesis of logic circuits.
• Three new appendices give tutorials on the use of Quartus II
software.
FEATURES
Digital Logic/Logic Design
FUNDAMENTALS OF DIGITAL LOGIC WITH VHDL
DESIGN WITH CD-ROM
Second Edition
by Stephen Brown, University of Toronto, Canada and Zvonko
Vranesic, University of Toronto, Canada
2005 / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-249938-4 / MHID: 0-07-249938-9 (with CD)
This website contains: PowerPoint Slides, Solutions Manual, and
PageOut (Browse http://www.highered.mcgraw-hill.com/TBD)
Fundamentals of Digital Logic With VHDL Design teaches
the basic design techniques for logic circuits. It emphasizes
the synthesis of circuits and explains how circuits are
implemented in real chips. Fundamental concepts are
illustrated by using small examples, which are easy to
understand. Then, a modular approach is used to show how
larger circuits are designed. VHDL is used to demonstrate how
the basic building blocks and larger systems are defined in a
hardware description language, producing designs that can be
implemented with modern CAD tools. The book emphasizes
the concepts that should be covered in an introductory course
on logic design, focusing on: • Logic functions, gates, and
rules of Boolean algebra • Circuit synthesis and optimization
• The book teaches the basic design techniques for logic circuits,
emphasizing the synthesis of circuits and explaining how circuits are
implemented in real chips.
• Small, easy-to-understand examples illustrate fundamental
concepts.
• A modular approach is used to show how larger circuits are
designed.
• VHDL is used to demonstrate how the basic building blocks
and larger systems are defined in a hardware description language,
producing designs that can be implemented with modern CAD tools.
CONTENTS
1 Design Concepts. 2 Introduction to Logic Circuits. 3 Implementation Technology.
4 Optimized Implementation of Logic Functions. 5 Number Representation
and Arithmetic Circuits. 6 Combinational-Circuit Building Blocks. 7 Flip-Flops,
Registers, Counters, and a Simple Processor. 8 Synchronous Sequential Circuits.
9 Asynchronous Sequential Circuits. 10 Digital System Design. 11 Testing of
Logic Circuits. 12 Computer Aided Design Tools. Appendix A VHDL Reference.
Appendix B Tutorial 1—Using Quartus II CAD Software. Appendix C Tutorial
2—Implementing Circuits in Altera Devices. Appendix D Tutorial 3—Physical
Implementations in a PLD. Appendix D Commercial Devices
37
11/15/06 5:05:22 PM
Computer Science
INTRODUCTION TO LOGIC DESIGN WITH
CD-ROM
Second Edition
by Alan B Marcovitz, Florida Atlantic University—Boca Raton
2005 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-295176-9 / MHID: 0-07-295176-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124249-3 / MHID: 0-07-124249-X [IE with CD
- 2 Color Text]
www.mhhe.com/marcovitz — A robust web site complements the text
and assists the instructor by providing solutions, Powerpoint slides of
most figures and key material, sets of examinations from the course, and
alternate parallel examples, so that the instructor can do a different
example in class from the one given in the book. (Browse http://www.
highered.mcgraw-hill.com/TBD)
Introduction to Logic Design by Alan Marcovitz is intended
for the first course in logic design, taken by computer science,
computer engineering, and electrical engineering students.
As with the first edition, the new edition is distinguised by
a clear presentation of fundamentals and an exceptional
collection of examples, solved problems, and exercises.
Changes found in the new edition reflect reviewer feedback
from both users and nonusers of the first edition and primarily
involve improvements in organization and topic coverage.
The text integrates laboratory experiences, both hardware and
computer simulation, while not making them mandatory for
following the main flow of the chapters. Design is emphasized
throughout, and switching algebra is developed as a tool for
analyzing and implementing digital systems. The presentation
includes excellent coverage of minimization of combinational
circuits, including multiple output ones, using the Karnaugh
map and iterated consensus. There are a number of examples
of the design of larger systems, both combinational and
sequential, using medium scale integrated circuits and
programmable logic devices.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• A separate chapter on Iterated Consensus and Quine-McCluskey
has been added for the second edition.
• The second edition features two chapters on sequential systems.
The first chapter covers analysis of sequential systems and the second
covers design. Complete coverage of the analysis and design of
synchronous sequential systems adds to the comprehensive nature of
the text.
• “Test Yourself” sections, designed to help students measure their
comprehension of key material, have been added to the end of
chapters for the second edition.
• Answers to selected exercises are included in an easy-to-reference
appendix for the second edition.
FEATURES
• A clear and well-paced writing style makes this text especially
well-suited for students who might otherwise find this course area
particularly challenging.
• An extensive set of examples, well integrated into the body of
the text as well as at the end of each chapter in sections of solved
problems, gives students multiple opportunities to understand the
topics being presented.
• The text integrates practical circuits with theory by presenting
two types of laboratory experiments. Traditional hands-on hardware
experiments as well as simulation laboratory exercises using popular
software packages are tied closely to the text material to allow
students to implement the concepts they are learning.
• Use of the Karnaugh Map helps students understand the principles
of switching algebra.
• A thorough discussion of the minimization of switching functions
using Karnaugh maps, including 6-variable maps and multiple output
problems, gives students something to sink their teeth into and
doesn’t leave them wondering about the unusual or boundary case.
• Coupling of gate implementation with the algebra helps extend
the students’ range of understanding.
• Color is used as a pedagogical aid.
• The derivation of state tables from word problems further
emphasizes the practical implementation of the material being
presented.
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Switching Algebra and Logic Circuits. 3 The Karnaugh Map. 4
Function Minimization Algorithms. 5 Solving Larger Combinational Problems. 6
Analysis of Sequential Systems. 7 Design of Sequential Systems. 8 Solving Larger
Sequential. 9 Simplification of Sequential Systems. Appendix A: Laboratory
Experiments. Appendix B: Answers to Selected Exercises. Appendix C: Answers
to Chapter Tests
FUNDAMENTALS OF DIGITAL LOGIC WITH
VERILOG DESIGN WITH CD-ROM
by Stephen Brown, University of Toronto and Zvonko Vranesic,
University of Toronto, Canada
2003
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283878-7 / MHID: 0-07-283878-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124276-9 / MHID: 0-07-124276-7 [IE]
The website will contain: solutions manual for instructors only, web
links, and PowerPoint slides. (Browse http://highered.mcgraw-hill.
com/sites/0072823151)
CONTENTS
and Arithmetic Circuits. 6 Combinational Circuit Building Blocks. 7 Flip-Flops,
Registers, and Counters. 8 Synchronous Sequential Circuits. 9 Asynchronous
Sequential Circuits. 10 Digital System Design. 11 Testing of Logic Circuits.
A Verilog Reference. B Tutorial 1. C Tutorial 2. D Tutorial 3. E Commercial
Devices
DIGITAL PRINCIPLES AND DESIGN WITH CD-ROM
by Donald Givone, SUNY- Buffalo
2003 / 832 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-255132-7 / MHID: 0-07-255132-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123005-6 / MHID: 0-07-123005-X [IE]
www.mhhe.com/givone
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Number Systems, Arithmetic, and Codes. 3 Boolean Algebra
and Combinational Networks. 4 Simplification of Boolean Expressions. 5 Logic
Design with MSI Components and Programmable Logic Devices. 6 Flip-Flops and
Simple Flip-Flop Applications. 7 Synchronous Sequential Networks. 8 Algorithmic
State Machines. 9 Asnynchronous Sequential Networks. Appendix A: Digital
Circuits. Appendix B: TBD
COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND LOGIC DESIGN
by Thomas C. Bartee, IDA
1991 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112554-3 / MHID: 0-07-112554-X [IE]
38
11/15/06 5:05:22 PM
Computer Science
Database Systems And Design
Database Systems
DATABASE SYSTEM CONCEPTS
Fifth Edition
by Abraham Silberschatz, Yale University and Henry F Korth, Lehigh
University and S Sudarshan
2006 / Hardcover / 1,024 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-295886-7 / MHID: 0-07-295886-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124476-3 / MHID: 0-07-124476-X [IE]
Online solutions for practical exercises, detailed slides for all chapters,
teaching supplements, and online appendices. (Browse http://www.mhhe.
com/silberschatz)
Database System Concepts, 5/e, is intended for a first course
in databases at the junior or senior undergraduate, or firstyear graduate, level. In addition to basic material for a first
course, the text contains advanced material that can be used
for course supplements, or as introductory material for an
advanced course. The authors assume only a familiarity with
basic data structures, computer organization, and a high-level
programming language such as Java, C, or Pascal. Concepts
are presented as intuitive descriptions, and many are based
on the running example of a bank enterprise. Important
theoretical results are covered, but formal proofs are omitted.
In place of proofs, figures and examples are used to suggest
why a result is true. The fundamental concepts and algorithms
covered in the book are often based on those used in existing
commercial or experimental database systems. The aim is to
present these concepts and algorithms in a general setting
that is not tied to one particular database system. Details of
particular commercial database systems are discussed in the
case studies which constitute Part 8 of the book. The fifth
edition of Database System Concepts retains the overall style
of prior editions while evolving the content and organization
to reflect the changes that are occurring in the way databases
are designed, managed, and used.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Earlier coverage of SQL.
• A new Part devoted to database design.
• Increased coverae of XML.
• Expanded treatment of data mining and data analysis.
• New case study covering PostgresQL.
• Increased emphasis on practical applications and implementation
in both the examples and the assignments.
• Enhanced pedagogy.
• Web page and teaching supplements.
• Online appendices.
FEATURES
• Thoroughly revised and updated coverage of object-relational
databases.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction. Part 1: Relational Databases: Chapter 2 Relational Model.
Chapter 3 SQL. Chapter 4 Advanced SQL. Chapter 5 Other Relational Languages.
Part 2: Database Design: Chapter 6 The Database Design Process. Chapter 7
Design Using the Entity-Relationship Approach. Chapter 8 Relational-Database
Design. Chapter 9 Application Design and Development. Part 3: ObjectBased and
Semi-Structured Databases: Chapter 10 Object-Relational Databases. Chapter 11
XML. Part 4: Data Storage and Querying: Chapter 12 Storage and File Structures.
Chapter 13 Indexing and Hashing. Chapter 14 Query Processing. Chapter 15
Query Optimization. Chapter 16 Data Mining. Chapter 17 Data Analysis and
Information Retrieval. Part 5: Transaction Management: Chapter 18 Transactions.
Chapter 19 Concurrency Control. Chapter 20 Recovery System. Part 6: Parallel
and Distributed Database Systems: Chapter 21 Database System Architectures.
Chapter 22 Distributed Databases. Chapter 23 Parallel Databases. Part 7: Other
Topics: Chapter 24 Performance Benchmarks and Tuning. Chapter 25 Advanced
Data Types and Applications. Chapter 26 Advanced Transaction Processing. Part
8: Case Studies: Chapter 27 Oracle. Chapter 28 SQL Server. Chapter 29 DB2.
Chapter 30 PostgresSQL. Appendix A Network Model. Appendix B Hierarchical
Model. Appendix C Advanced Normalization
INTRODUCTION TO DATABASE SYSTEMS
by Stephane Bressan, and Barbara Catania
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124650-7 / MHID: 0-07-124650-9
(Asian Publication)
Most books on databases have the size and content of a book
of magic written in the ancient language of Tolkien’s Ents. To
counter this trend, Introduction to Database Systems is small
and concise by design. It aims to provide students, academics
and professionals with a rigorous, convenient and economical
reference. The book describes the essential concepts pertaining
to the design and programming of database applications with
relational database management systems. It covers conceptual
modelling with the entity-relationship model and logical
modelling with the relational model. It also presents the
techniques for the normalisation of logical designs based on
functional dependencies, i.e. the decomposition into BoyceCodd and third normal forms.
Also covered are t-upple and domain relational calculi, as
well as relational algebra. This book illustrates the main SQL
data definition and data manipulation statements and looks
at contemporary approaches to coupling SQL with general
purpose programming languages.
CONTENTS
Preface. About the Authors. 1 What’s in a Database? 2 Relational Model. 3
Relational Calculus. 4 Relational Algebra. 5 SQL. 6 SQL and Programming
Languages. 7 Entity-Relationship Model. 8 Normalisation. 9 Conclusion.
References. Index.
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
Third Edition
by Raghu Ramakrishnan, University of Wisconsin - Madison and
Johannes Gehrke, University of Wisconsin - Madison
2003 / 928 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246563-1 / MHID: 0-07-246563-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123057-5 / MHID: 0-07-123057-2 [IE]
CONTENTS
Foundations. Chapter 1 Introduction to Database Systems. Chapter 2 The EntityRelationship Model. Chapter 3 The Relational Model. Chapter 4 Relational Algebra
and Calculus. Chapter 5 SQL: Queries, Programming, Triggers. Storage and
Indexing. Chapter 6 Overview of File Organizations and Indexes. Chapter 7 Storing
Data: Disks and Files. Chapter 8 Tree-Structured Indexing. Chapter 9 Hash-Based
Indexing. Query Evaluation. Chapter 10 Overview of Query Evaluation. Chapter
11 External Sorting. Chapter 12 Evaluation of Relational Operators. Chapter 13
A Typical Relational Query Optimizer. Application Development. Chapter 14
Schema Refinement and Normal Forms. Chapter 15 Physical Database Design
and Tuning. Chapter 16 Security. Chapter 17 Database Applications and the
Internet: Concepts. Chapter 18 Database Applications and the Internet: Practice.
Transaction Management. Chapter 19 Overview of Transaction Management.
Chapter 20 Concurrency. Chapter 21 Crash Recovery. Advanced Topics. Chapter
22 Parallel and Distributed Databases. Chapter 23 Data on the Web: XML and
XQuery. Chapter 24 Information Retrieval and Database Systems. Chapter 25
Decision Support. Chapter 26 Data Mining. Chapter 27 Object-Database Systems.
Chapter 28 Additional Reading
39
11/15/06 5:05:23 PM
Computer Science
SQL
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF FUNDAMENTALS OF
RELATIONAL DATABASES
by Ramon Mata-Toledo and Pauline Cushman
2001 / 249 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-136188-0 / MHID: 0-07-136188-X
CONTENTS
An Overview of DBMS and DB Systems Architecture. Relational Database
Concepts. An Introduction to SQL. Functional Dependencies. The Normalization
Process. Basic Security Issues. The Entity-Relationship Model.
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF FUNDAMENTALS OF SQL
PROGRAMMING
by Ramon Mata-Toledo and Pauline Cushman
2001 / 314 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-135953-5 / MHID: 0-07-135953-2
CONTENTS
An Introduction to SQL and Relational Databawe Concepts. Implementation
of the Relational Operators in SQL. Boolean Operators and Pattern Matching.
Arithmetic Operations and Built-In Functions. Group Functions. Processing Date
and Time Information. Complex Queries and Set Operators. Basic Security Issues
Using SQL. Appendices.
DATABASE SYSTEMS
by Paolo Atzeni, Universita’ di Roma Tre, Stefano Ceri, and Stefano
Paraboschi, Politecnico di Milano, and Riccardo Torlone, Universita’
di Roma Tre
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-709500-0 / MHID: 0-07-709500-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123435-1 / MHID: 0-07-123435-7 [IE]
Distributed Database
CONTENTS
Introduction: Part 1: Relational Databases: The Model and Its Languages. The
Relational Model. The Structure of the Relational Model. Integrity Constraints.
Discussion. Relational Algebra and Calculus. Relational Algebra. Relational
Cal cu lus. Datalog. SQL. Data Definition in SQL. Queries in SQL. Data
Manipulation in SQL. Additional Data Definition Features. Access Privileges. SQL
and Programming Languages. Part 2: Database Design: Design Methodologies
and Models. The Database Design Process. The Entity-Relationship Model.
Documentation of E-R Schemes. Conceptual Design. Requirements Collection
and Analysis. General Representation Criteria. Design Strategies. Qualities of
a Conceptual Schema. A General Methodology for Database Design. A Design
Example: The Conceptual Phase. CASE Tools for Database Design. Logical
Design. Performance Analysis on Conceptual Schemas. Restructuring E-R
Schemas. Translation Towards the Relational Model. A Design Example: The
Logical Phase. Logical Design with Database Design Tools. Normalization.
Redundancies and Anomalies. Functional Dependencies. Boyce-Codd Normal
Form. Qualities of Decompositions. Third Normal Form. Normalization and the
Design Process. Part 3: Database Technology. Technology of a Database Server.
Transactions. Concurrency Control. Buffer Management. Reliability Control.
Physical Structures. Query Processing and Optimization. Physical Design.
Distributed Architectures. Client-Server Architecture. Distributed Databases.
Distributed Database Technology. Two-Phase Commit Protocol. Interoperability.
Parallelism. Replication Management. Part 4: Evolution of Databases. Object
Databases. Object-Oriented Database Systems (OODBMS). OMG Standard
Languages: ODL and OQL. Object-Relational Database Systems (ORDBMS).
Multimedia Database Systems. Technology Extensions for Object Databases.
Active databases. Triggers in Relational Systems. Definitions and Use of Triggers
in Oracle. Definitions and Use of Triggers in DB. Advanced Features of Active
Rules. Properties of Active Rules. Active Database Applications. Data Warehouses.
Architecture. Multi-dimensional Model and Languages. Data Mining. Databases
and the World-Wide-Web. Internet and the World-Wide-Web: Basic Concepts.
Databases in the World-Wide-Web. CGI and Gateways. Database Tools for Web
Applications. Design of Web Sites. Appendices: DB. ORACLE. ACCESS.
DISTRIBUTED DATABASES
Principles and Systems
by Stefano Ceri and Guiseppe Pelagatti, both of Politecnico di Milano
1984 / 416 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-066215-5 / MHID: 0-07-066215-0 [IE]
Assembly Languages
ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING AND
ORGANIZATION OF THE IBM PC
by Ytha Yu and Charles Marut, both of California State University,
Hayward
1992 / 512 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112896-4 / MHID: 0-07-112896-4 [IE]
CONTENTS
PART ONE: ELEMENTS OF ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING: CHAPTER 1: Microcomputer Systems. CHAPTER 2: Representation of Numbers and
Characters. CHAPTER 3: Organization of the IBM Personal Computers. CHAPTER
4: Introduction to IBM PC Assembly Language. CHAPTER 5: The Processor Status
and the Flags Register. CHAPTER 6: Flow Control Instructions. CHAPTER 7:
Logic, Shift, and Rotate Instructions. CHAPTER 8: The Stack and Introduction to
Procedures. CHAPTER 9: Multiplication and Division Instructions. CHAPTER 10:
Arrays and Addressing Modes The String Instructions. PART TWO: ADVANCED
TOPICS CHAPTER: 11: Text Display and Keyboard Programming. CHAPTER
12: Macros. CHAPTER 13: Memory Management. CHAPTER 14: Bios and DOS
Interrupts. CHAPTER 15: Color Graphics. CHAPTER 16: Recursion. CHAPTER
17: Advanced Arithmetic. CHAPTER 18: Disk Operations. CHAPTER 19:
80286/80386/80486 Microprocessors and OS/2
40
11/15/06 5:05:24 PM
Computer Science
Computer Organization &
Architecture
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS ARCHITECTURE,
PROGRAMMING AND DESIGN
by Raj Kamal, Devi Ahilya University, Indore
2003 / 649 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-049470-1 / MHID: 0-07-049470-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123735-2 / MHID: 0-07-123735-6 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction To Embedded Systems. 2 Processor And Memory Organization.
3 Devices And Buses For Devices Network. 4 Device Drivers And Interrupts
Servicing Mechanism. 5 Programming Concepts And Embedded Programming
In C And C++. 6 Program Modelling Concepts In Single And Multiprocessor
Systems Software-Development Process. 7 Software Engineering Practices In
Embedded Software Development Process. 8 Inter Process Communication And
Synchronization Of Processes, Task And Threads. 9 Real Time Operating Systems.
10 Real Time Operating System Programming Tools: Micro C/OS-II and VxWorks.
11 Case Studies Of Programming With RTOS. 12 Hardware-Software Co-Design
in an Embedded System. Appendices. Index
COMPUTER ORGANIZATION
Fifth Edition
by V. Carl Hamacher, Queens University; Zvonko Vranesic,
University of Toronto; and Safwat Zaky, University of Toronto
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-232086-2 / MHID: 0-07-232086-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122624-0 / MHID: 0-07-122624-9 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/hamacher
CONTENTS
1 Basic Structure of Computers. 2 Machine Instructions and Programs. 3 ARM,
Motorola, and Intel Instruction Sets. 4 Input/Output Organization. 5 The Memory
System. 6 Arithmetic. 7 Basic Processing Unit. 8 Pipelining. 9 Embedded Systems.
10 Computer Peripherals. 11 Processor Families. 12 Large Computer Systems.
Appendix A Logic Circuits. Appendix B ARM Instruction Set. Appendix C Motorola
68000Instruction Set. Appendix D Intel IA-32 Instruction Set. Appendix E Character
Codes and Number Conversion
COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND ORGANIZATION
Third Edition
by John P Hayes, University of Michigan
1998 / 624 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115997-5 / MHID: 0-07-115997-5 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Computation and Computers. 2 Design Methodology. 3 Processor Design.
4 Datapath Design. 5 Control Design. 6 Memory Organization. 7 System
Organization
MODERN PROCESSOR DESIGN
Fundamentals of Superscalar Processors, Beta Edition
by John P. Shen, Carnegie Mellon University, Mikko Lipasti,
University of Wisconsin — Madison
2003 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282968-6 / MHID: 0-07-282968-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124487-9 / MHID: 0-07-124487-5 IE]
www.mhhe.com/shen
CONTENTS
1 Processor Design. 2 Pipelined Processors. 3 Superscalar Organization. 4
Superscalar Techniques. 5 PowerPC 620 Case Study. 6 Intel P6 Micro-architecture.
7 Survey of Superscalar Processors. 8 Advanced Register Dataflow Techniques.
9 Executing Multiple Threads
1991 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112554-3 / MHID: 0-07-112554-X [IE]
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF COMPUTER
ARCHITECTURE
by Nick Carter, University of Illinois - Champaign
2002 / 304 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-136207-8 / MHID: 0-07-136207-X
41
11/15/06 5:05:24 PM
Computer Science
Parallel Computing/Processing
PARALLEL PROGRAMMING IN C WITH MPI AND
OPEN MP
by Michael J. Quinn, Oregon State University
2004 / 480 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282256-4 / MHID: 0-07-282256-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123265-4 / MHID: 0-07-123265-6 [IE]
The book website will contain a downloadable version of the solutions
manual (password protected for instructor use only). It will also have
PowerPoint slides for each chapter that contain outlines of the material
covered in the chapters.
Much more than a simple reference manual, Parallel
Programming in C with MPI and OpenMP combines a parallel
programming tutorial with an introduction to the design,
analysis, implementation, debugging and benchmarking of
parallel programs. It is targeted to upper-division undergraduate
students and those who are learning this material on their own.
All programs are developed in C using the MPI (Message Passing
Interface) library, the prevailing message-passing standard, and
the OpenMP application programming interface, the emerging
shared-memory standard.
CONTENTS
Part I: Introduction to Parallel Computing: 1 Motivation and History. 2
Parallel Architectures. 3 Parallel Algorithm Design. 4 Performance Analysis.
Part II: Introduction to MPI: 5 Message-passing Programming. 6 The Sieve of
Eratosthenes. 7 Floyd’s Algorithm. 8 Matrix-vector Multiplication I. 9 Matrixvector Multiplication II. 10 Document Classification. Part III: Parallel Algorithms:
11 Monte Carlo Methods. 12 Matrix Multipli-cation. 13 Solving Linear Systems.
14 Finite Difference Methods. 15 Sorting. 16 The Fast Fourier Transform. 17
Exhaustive Search. Part IV: Programming Multiprocessor Clusters: 18 Getting
Started with OpenMP. 19 Combining MPI and OpenMP
Operating Systems
JUST ENOUGH UNIX
Fifth Edition
by K Paul Andersen, New Mexico State University - Las Cruces
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-295297-1 / MHID: 0-07-295297-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124418-3 / MHID: 0-07-124418-2 [IE]
This site contains Answers to Excercises, PowerPoint slides, and some
sample code. (Browse http://www.mhhe.com/andersen)
Just Enough UNIX provides a quick and gentle introduction
to the UNIX operating system. The fifth edition of this highly
successful text reflects changes and updates to the UNIX
curriculum that have taken place since the publication of the
fourth edition. The book is written in a clear, straightforward
style that avoids unnecessary jargon. This short, yet
comprehensive text covers the basics of UNIX. It can be used
in both a freshman engineering course or to supplement other
courses where the student needs to learn UNIX for the first
time. The book is enhanced by strong pedagogical tools that
will be very useful to those in the classroom, as well as those
engaged in self-study.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Key New Topics. The following topics are new in the fifth edition:
computer and network security; Secure Shell (ssh) for remote
computing; practical cryptography; sciripting in awk; and scripting
in Perl.
• New and revised chapters. There are several completely new
chapters in the book—chapters 24 (Computer Security), 25 (Remote
Computing Using SSH-1), 26 (Remote Computing Using SSH-2), 27
(Protecting Privacy with PGP), 32 (Scripting Languages), 33 (Creating
Shell Scripts), 34 (Scripting with awk), and 35 (Scripting with Perl).
• Website. The expanded book website includes answers to
exercises for instructors only, as well as PowerPoint slides and data
files.
• Security. The fifth edition features expanded coverage of security
issues, including the use of Secure Shell as a secure alternative to the
traditional Unix “r-commands.”
FEATURES
ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE
Parallelism, Scalability, Programmability
by Kai Hwang, University of Southern California
1993 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124713-9 / MHID: 0-07-124713-0 [IE]
CONTENTS
Part One•Theory of Parallelism/1 Parallel Computer Models/2 Pro gram
and Network Prop er ties/3 Principles of Per for mance and Scalability/Part
Two•Hardware Technologies/4 Processors and Memory Hierarchy/5 Bus/Cache
and Shared-Memory/6 Pipelining and Superscalar Techniques/Part Three•Parallel
and Scalable Architectures/7 Multiprocessors and Multi-computers/8 Multivector
and SIMD Supercomputers/9 Scalable, Multi-threaded, and Dataflow Architectures/
Part Four•Software for Parallel Programming/10 Parallel Models, Languages and
Compilers/11 Development of Parallel Programs/12 Unix Extensions for Parallel
Computers/Bibliography
• Organization. The book is divided into the following sections:
Introduction to UNIX, UNIX File System, UNIX Shells, Text Editors,
UNIX Networking, Startup Files, Secure Computing, Scripting and
Programming under UNIX. Each section opens with a descriptive
concepts chapter followed by several tutorials that guide the new
user step-by-step toward learning how UNIX works.
• Graphical Interfaces. The fifth edition maintains coverage of
the CDE interface. The book continues the concept that the typical
student is using the most current engineering workstation running the
most current graphical user interface, including both one based on
the X Window system and CDE.
• Text Editors. The reader will learn to create or modify UNIX files
using a utility program called an editor. In addition to the vi editor,
the book includes coverage of the emacs, pico and CDE editors.
At some schools, the vi editor may be too difficult or outdated.
Including these other editors gives instructors a wider range of
distribution packages to choose from for their course.
• Networking. The book has coverage of popular Internet and Web
tools like ftp and CDE Mailer, including how to process E-mail.
• Pedagogy. The book offers a number of helpful pedagogical
features: descriptive chapters, tutorials, marginal notes, sidebars,
command summaries and exercises.
CONTENTS
Part I: Introduction to UNIX: 1 Introduction to UNIX. 2 Your UNIX Account. 3
Getting Started. 4 Tutorial: Getting Started (X/Motif). 5 Tutorial: Getting Started
(CDE). Part II: UNIX File System: 6 The UNIX File System. 7 Tutorial: Working
with Files. 8 Tutorial: Working with Directories. 9 Tutorial: Using File Manager.
Part III: UNIX Shells: 10 UNIX Shells. 11 Tutorial: Working with the Shell. 12
Tutorial: Using Additional Shell Features. Part IV: Text Editors: 13 Text Editors. 14
Tutorial: Editing with vi. 15 Tutorial: Editing with emacs. 16 Tutorial: Editing with
pico. 17 Tutorial: Editing with Text Editor. Part V: UNIX Networking: 18 UNIX
42
11/15/06 5:05:25 PM
Computer Science
Networking. 19 Tutorial: Using mail and mailx. 20 Tutorial: Processing Mail with
pine. 21 Tutorial: Processing Mail with Mailer. 22 Tutorial: Logging in Remotely.
23 Tutorial: Transferring Files. Part VI: Secure Computing: 24 Computer Security.
25 Tutorial: Remote Computing Using SSH-1. 26 Tutorial: Remote Computing
Using SSH-2. 27 Tutorial: Protecting Privacy with PGP. Part VII: Startup Files: 28
Startup Files. 29 Tutorial: Using sh and ksh Startup Files. 30 Tutorial: Using csh
and tcsh Startup Files. 31 Tutorial: Using bash Startup Files. Part VIII: Scripting:
32 Scripting Languages. 33 Tutorial: Creating Shell Scripts. 34 Tutorial: Scripting
with awk. 35 Tutorial: Scripting with Perl. Part VIX: Programming Under UNIX:
36 Programming Under UNIX. 37 Tutorial: Programming in C. 38 Tutorial:
Programming in C++. 39 Tutorial: Programming in Fortran. 40 Tutorial:
Programming in Java. Appendices: Appendix A: Taming Your Terminal. Appendix
B: The UNIX Manual. Appendix C: Regular Expressions. Appendix D: write and
talk. Appendix E: Using dbx. Appendix F: Using make
YOUR UNIX: THE ULTIMATE GUIDE
Second Edition
by Sumitabha Das, Softman Services, Inc
2006 / 864 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124434-3 / MHID: 0-07-124434-4 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/das
Your UNIX: The Ultimate Guide is both an outstanding
pedagogical tool and an exhaustive reference. It is the
ideal text for any Unix course. It can also be used for any
introductory programming course that includes Unix and for
advanced courses such as those on Operating Systems and
System Administration. Excellent pedagogy is implemented
throughout. Real-world examples make it easier for students to
grasp concepts while chapters on advanced material take more
experienced students beyond the basics. Over nine hundred
exercises and self-test questions allow students to test and
reinforce their understanding of material at different levels.
This book also features coverage of Linux, where Linux differs
from UNIX.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The number of chapters has been reduced from 24 to 19 to allow
for a more intense focus on core UNIX topics.
• Coverage is logically divided between essential(chapters 1-13) and
advanced (chpaters 14-19) material.
• Three new chapters on programming tools and systems
programming benefit the serious programmer and make the book
suitable for a course on systems programming.
• Coverage of encryption and the Secure Shell has been added.
• Discussion of vi and emacs editors uses snippets of code to
illustrate the benefits to programmers of knowing the editor well.
• The requirements of the POSIX standard have been highlighted
throughout.
• A single comprehensive index replaces the multiple specialized
indices from the previous edition.
FEATURES
• Notes, Tips, and Caution boxes provide on-the-spot assistance to
students.
• Linux coverage supplements generic coverage of UNIX in cases
where Linux behaves differently.
• Coverage of the Korn, bash, and C shells is featured in
appendices.
• Scores of tables, diagrams, and screen shots make the
fundamentals of the Unix operating system more accessible to
students.
• Over nine hundred self-test questions and exercises allow students
to test and reinforce their understanding of key concepts.
• Scores of real-life examples prompt the reader to envision
the practical application of UNIX in situations they are likely to
encounter.
CONTENTS
1 Introducing UNIX 2 Becoming Familiar with UNIX Commands 3 The File System
4 File Attributes 5 The vi/vim Editor 6 The GNU emacs Editor 7 The Shell 8 The
Process 9 The Shell—Customizing the Environment 10 Simple Filters 11 Filters
Using Regular Expressions—grep and sed 12 Filtering and Programming with awk
13 Shell Programming 14 Networking Tools 15 perl—The Master Manipulator.
16 Program Development Tools 17 Systems Programming I—Files 18 Systems
Programming II—Process Control 19 System Administration Appendix A The C
Shell—Programming Constructs. Appendix B The Korn and Bash Shells—Exclusive
Programming Constructs Appendix C vi/vim and emacs Command Reference
Appendix D The Regular Expression Superset Appendix E The HOWTO Appendix
F The ASCII Character Set Appendix G Glossary Appendix H Solutions to SelfTest Questions
INTRODUCTION TO UNIX
by Kate Wrightson and Joe Merlino
2003 / 424 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283620-2 / MHID: 0-07-283620-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121918-1 / MHID: 0-07-121918-8 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/cit/wrightson
CONTENTS
Part I – UNIX Basics: Chapter 1 – What is UNIX? Chapter 2 – Basic UNIX Concepts.
Chapter 3 – Understanding UNIX Commands. Chapter 4 – The File System.
Chapter 5 – Jobs and Processes. Chapter 6 – Using the Shell. Part II – Working
with UNIX: Chapter 7 – The vi Editor. Chapter 8 – Other Text Editors. Chapter
9 – Internet Applications. Chapter 10 – Networking I. Chapter 11 – Networking
II. Part III – Shell Programming: Chapter 12 – Shell Programming I. Chapter 13
– Shell Programming II. Chapter 14 – Shell Programming III. Chapter 15 – Shell
Programming IV. Part IV – System Administration: Chapter 16 – Basic System
Administration I. Chapter 17 – Basic System Administration II. Chapter 18 – X
Windows. Chapter 19 – Running Servers. Part V—Appendices: Appendix A:
UNIX Command Compendium. Appendix B: Glossary. Appendix C: Common
Configuration Files. Appendix D: Internet Resources
OPERATING SYSTEMS
by D M Dhamdhere, Indian Institute of Technology, Mumbai
2002 / 800 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-048294-4 / MHID: 0-07-048294-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123056-8 / MHID: 0-07-123056-4 [IE]
http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/digital_solutions/dhamdhere
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Overview of Operating Systems. 3 Structure of Operating
Systems. 4 Processes. 5 Memory Management. 6 Virtual Memory. 7 File Systems.
8 Scheduling. 9 Interprocess Messages. 10 Deadlocks. 11 Process Synchronization.
12 Advanced Concepts in IOCS and File Systems. 13 Protection. 14 Distributed
Systems. 15 Theoretical Issues in Distributed Systems. 16 Operating Systems for
Multiprocessor and Distributed Architectures. 17 Distributed Control Algorithms.
18 Recovery & Fault Tolerance. 19 Distributed File Systems. 20 Distributed
Systems Security. Index
43
11/15/06 5:05:26 PM
Computer Science
Distributed Systems
DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS AND NETWORKS
by William Buchanan, School of Computer, Napier University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-709583-3 / MHID: 0-07-709583-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122702-5 / MHID: 0-07-122702-4 [IE]
http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/buchanan
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Distributed System Elements. 3 Distributed Processing. 4
Distributed File Systems. 5 Networking Elements. 6 Ethernet Networks. 7 TCP/
IP. 8 HTTP. 9 Electronic Mail. 10 World Wide Web. 11 Intranets. 12 Internet
Routing Protocols. 13 SNMP, Wins and DHCP. 14 Data Encryption Principles.
15 Security. 16 Proxies, Firewalls and Routers. 17 Authentication. 18 Internet
Security. 19 LANs/WANs. 20 Network Modelling. 21 Operating Systems. 22
CORBA/DCOM.
Business Data Communications
BUSINESS DATA COMMUNICATIONS
Data Communications
NEW
PRINCIPLES OF VOICE AND DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
By Regis “Bud” J. Bates, TC International Consulting, Inc. and Marcus
Bates
2007 (March 2006) / 720 pages / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225732-8 / MHID: 0-07-225732-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125767-1 / MHID: 0-07-125767-5 [IE]
This textbook surveys data transmission systems, communication
lines, data sets, and network modes of transmission, protocols
and interfacing. Emphasizes network structure and operation.
Focuses on application of telecommunications to realworld problems, and provides students with a conceptual
background for effectively using and managing data and voice
communications resources.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Principles of Voice and Data Communications-An Introduction. Chapter
2 The Evolution of the Telephone Set. Chapter 3 Introduction of the Carriers and
Regulation in the Industry. Chapter 4 Signaling System 7, Intelligent Networks and
Number Portability. Chapter 5 Analog versus Digital Communications. Chapter
6 Integrated Services Digital Network and SONET. Chapter 7 Data standards
in Use. Chapter 8 Data Communications. Chapter 9 The Internet. Chapter 10
Local Area Networks (LANs). Chapter 11 Packets, Frames and Cell Switching
Concepts. Chapter 12 xDSL. Chapter 13 Cable Modem Systems and Technology.
Chapter 14 Overview of Cellular communications. Chapter 15 Security and
Virtual Private Networks (VPN.
by Behrouz A. Forouzan, De Anza College
2003 / 736 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123018-6 / MHID: 0-07-123018-1 [IE with OLC]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction. Chapter 2 Basics. Chapter 3 Data Communication
Models. Chapter 4 Data Transmission. Chapter 5 Transmission Media and
Channels. Chapter 6 Data Link Control. Chapter 7 Traditional LANs. Chapter 8
High-Speed LANs. Chapter 9 Wireless LANs. Chapter 10 Switching. Chapter 11
Traditional WANs. Chapter 12 High-Speed WANs. Chapter 13 Networking and
Internetworking Devices. Chapter 14 TCP/IP Protocol Suite. Chapter 15 Internet
Applications
NEW
DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKING
Fourth Edition
By Behrouz A. Forouzan, Deanza College
2007 (January 2006) / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325032-8 / MHID: 0-07-325032-5
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/forouzan
As one of the fastest growing technologies in our culture today,
data communications and networking presents a unique
challenge for instructors. As both the number and types of
students are increasing, it is essential to have a textbook that
provides coverage of the latest advances, while presenting
the material in a way that is accessible to students with little
or no background in the field. Using a bottom-up approach,
Data Communications and Networking presents this highly
technical subject matter without relying on complex formulas
by using a strong pedagogical approach supported by more
than 700 figures. Now in its Fourth Edition, this textbook
brings the beginning student right the forefront of the latest
advances in the field, while presenting the fundamentals
in a clear, straightforward manner. Students will find better
coverage, improved figures and better explanations on cuttingedge material. The “bottom-up” approach allows instructors to
cover the material in one course, rather than having separate
courses on data communications and networking.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Visual approach is supported with hundreds of figures and
animations on the text website
• Strong in-text pedagogy is designed for the beginning student and
includes numerous figures, highlighted points, examples and real
life applications, key terms, chapter summaries, practice sets and an
extensive glossary and list of acronyms.
44
11/15/06 5:05:26 PM
Computer Science
• Text uses a bottom-up approach where students learn about data
communications before learning about networking. This approach
allows instructors to cover the material in one course, rather than
having separate courses on data communications and networking.
• An On-line Learning Center is available to provide extra material
to both students and instructors. Some features of the on-line learning
center include: PowerPoint Slides, Solutions, and Animated Figures
from the text and solutions of odd-numbered problems for students.
(even-numbered solutions for instructor are password protected)
• Added coverage of TCP/IP
FEATURES
• Text lets students learn about data communications before
learning about networking.
• More than 700 figures provide complete, visual presentation of
the material.
Figures replace the need for students to rely on complex formulas.
center include: PowerPoint Slides, Solutions, and Animated Figures.
• The practice set includes and extensive number of review
questions, multiple choice questions, and extended exercises.
includes numerous figures, highlighted points, examples and real-life
applications, key terms, chapter summaries, practice sets and an
• Using a bottom-up approach, students learn about data
communications (lower layers) before learning about networking
(upper layers). This approach allows instructors cover the material
in one course, rather than having separate courses on data
communications and networking.
• Summaries at the end of each chapter emphasize the key points.
• Many examples have been developed in each chapter to
demonstrate the concepts.
COMMUNICATION NETWORK
Second Edition
by Alberto Leon-Garcia, University of Toronto and Indra Widjaja
2004 / 848 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246352-1 / MHID: 0-07-246352-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119848-6 / MHID: 0-07-119848-2 [IE]
This website will contain: Solutions Manual for selected problems,
Power Point Slides, figures & lecture notes. (Browse http://highered.
mcgraw-hill.com/sites/007246352X)
This book is designed for introductory one-semester or oneyear courses in communications networks in upper-level
undergraduate programs. The second half of the book can
be used in more advanced courses. As pre-requisites the
book assumes a general knowledge of computer systems and
programming, and elementary calculus.
CONTENTS
Preface. 1 Communication Networks and Services. 2 Application and Layered
Architectures. 3 Digital Transmission Fundamentals. 4 Transmission Systems and
Circuit Switching Networks. 5 ARQ and Flow Control. 6 Local Area Networks
and Medium Access Control. 7 Packet-Switching Networks. 8 TCP/IP. 9 ATM
Networks. 10 Advanced Network Architectures. 11 Network Security. 12 MultiMedia Information and Networking. Epilogue. Appendixes. A Delay and Loss
Performance. B Network Management
CONTENTS
Part 1 Overview of Data Communications and Networking. 1 Introduction 2
Network Models Part 2 Physical Layer 3 Signals 4 Digital Transmission 5
Analog Transmission 6 Multiplexing 7 Transmission Media 8 Circuit Switching
and Telephone Network 9 High-Speed Digital Access: DSL, Cable Modems,
and SONET Part 3 Data Link Layer 10 Error Detection and Correction 11 Data
Link Control and Protocols 12 Point-to-Point Access: PPP 13 Multiple Access
14 Local Area Networks: Ethernet 15 Wireless LANs 16 Connecting LANs,
Backbone Networks, and Virtual LANs 17 Cellular Telephone and Satellite
Networks 18 Virtual Circuit Switching: Frame Relay and ATM Part 4 Network
Layer 19 Host-to-Host Delivery: Internetworking, Addressing, and Routing 20
Network Layer Protocols: ARP, IPv4, ICMP, IPv6, and ICMPv6 21 Unicast and
Multicast Routing: Routing Protocols Part 5 Transport Layer. 22 Process-to-Process
Delivery: UDP and TCP 23 Congestion Control and Quality of Service. Part 6
Application Layer 24 Client-Server Model: Socket Interface 25 Domain Name
System (DNS) 26 Electronic Mail (SMTP) and File Transfer (FTP) 27 HTTP and
WWW 28 Multimedia Part 7 Security 29 Cryptography 30 Message Security,
User Authentication, and Key Management 31 Security Protocols in the Internet
Appendix A ASCII Code. Appendix B Numbering Systems and Transformation.
Appendix C The OSI Model Appendix D 8B/6T Code. Appendix E Checksum
Calculation. Appendix F Structure of a Router. Appendix G ATM LANs. Appendix
H Client-Server Programs. Appendix I RFCs. Appendix J UDP and TCP Ports.
Appendix K Contact Addresses
DATA COMMUNICATIONS AND NETWORKING
by Achyut S Godbole, CEO of Apar Technologies, Mumbai
2002 / 720 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-047297-6 / MHID: 0-07-047297-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123110-7 / MHID: 0-07-123110-2 [IE]
http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/digital_solutions/godbole/dcn/
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Data Communication and Networking. 2. Information Encoding.
3. Analog and Digital Transmission Methods. 4. Modes of Data Transmission
and Multiplexing. 5. Transmission Errors: Detection and Correction. 6. Data
Compression and Encryption. 7. Transmission Media. 8. Network Topologies,
Switching and Routing Algorithms. 9. Networking Protocols and OSI Model. 10.
Area Networks (MAN) and Wide Area Networks (WAN). 11. Integrated Services
Digital Network (ISDN). 12. X.25 Protocol. 13. Frame Relay. 14. Asynchronous
Transfer Mode (ATM). 15. Internetworking Concepts, Devices, Internet Basics,
History and Architecture. 16. Ways of Accessing the Internet. 17. TCP/IP Part I:
An Introduction to TCP/IP, IP, ARP, RARP, ICMP. 18. TCP/IP Part II (TCP, UDP).
19. TCP-IP Part III (DNS, Email, FTP, TFTP). 20. TCP-IP Part IV (WWW, HTTP,
TELNET). 21. Multimedia Communications. Appendix A. Appendix B. Appendix
C. Appendix D. Glossary. References
NETWORKING
by Ed Tittel
2002 / 304 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-136285-6 / MHID: 0-07-136285-1
45
11/15/06 5:05:27 PM
Computer Science
Network Security
LAN
LOCAL AREA NETWORKS
2002 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115080-4 / MHID: 0-07-115080-3 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/forouzan
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction. Chapter 2 Data Communication Models. Chapter 3 Data
Transmission. Chapter 4 Transmission Media. Chapter 5 Error Detection. Chapter
6 LAN Topologies. Chapter 7 Flow & Error Control. Chapter 8 Medium Access
Methods. Chapter 9 Logical Link Control (LLC). Chapter 10 Ethernet: 10 Mbps.
Chapter 11 Ethernet Evolution: Fast and Gigabit Ethernet. Chapter 12 Token
Bus. Chapter 13 Token Ring. Chapter 14 ATM LANs. Chapter 15 Wireless LANs.
Chapter 16 LAN Performance. Chapter 17 Connecting LANs. Chapter 18 TCP/IP.
Chapter 19 Data Encryption. Chapter 20 Network Management. Appendix A
ASCII Code. Appendix B Numbering Systems & Transformation. Appendix C
Spanning Tree. Appendix D Information Theory. Appendix E ATM. Appendix F
DQDB. Appendix G FDDI. Appendix H Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs).
Appendix I Virtual Private Networks (VPNs). Appendix J Probability. Glossary.
Solutions. Index
LOCAL AREA NETWORKS
Second Edition
by Gerd Keiser, PhotonicsComm Solutions, Inc.
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122650-9 / MHID: 0-07-122650-8
[IE with CD-ROM]
www.mhhe.com/engcs/electrical/keiser2
CONTENTS
1 Overview of LANs. 2 Network Architectures and Protocols. 3 Data
Communication Concepts. 4 LAN Access Techniques. 5 Ethernet. 6 TokenPassing LANs. 7 ATM LANs. 8 Wireless LANs. 9 Fibre Channel and SANSs. 10
Internetworking. 11 Network Management. 12 Network Security
NEW
NETWORK SECURITY
2008 (March 2007) / Hardcover / 480 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332753-2 / MHID: 0-07-332753-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110223-0 / MHID: 0-07-110223-X [IE]
In this new first edition, well-known author Behrouz Forouzan
uses his accessible writing style and visual approach to
simplify the difficult concepts of cryptography and network
security. Forouzan presents difficult security topics from the
ground up. A gentle introduction to the fundamentals of
number theory is provided in the opening chapters, paving the
way for the student to move on to more complex security and
cryptography topics. Difficult math concepts are organized in
appendices at the end of each chapter so that students can
first learn the principles, then apply the technical background.
Hundreds of examples, as well as fully coded programs, round
out a practical, hands-on approach which encourages students
to test the material they are learning.
FEATURES
• Hundreds of figures are used to visually illustrate concepts,
making technical material easier to understand.
• Usuable programs, so students can do hands on activities.
• Up-to-date coverage of all of the latest networking technologies.
• Extensive practice sets at the end of each chapter help students
reinforce what they have learned and give them an opportunity to
work through some more challenging exercises.
• Student-friendly approach moves math to the ends of chapters for
an easier explanation of concepts.
• An accompanying website that provides both colorful PowerPoints
and solutions.
CONTENTS
Cryptography and Network Security. Part I: Introduction. Chapter 1: Introduction.
Part II: Number Theory. Chapter 2: Modular Arithmetic, Divisibility, and
Inverses. Chapter 3: Prime Numbers and Factorization. Chapter 4: Number Sets
and Algebraic Constructs. Chapter 5: Equations in Modular Arithmetic. Part III:
Cryptography. Chapter 6: Traditional Symmetric-Key Ciphers. Chapter 7: Modern
Ciphers. Chapter 8: Modern Symmetric-Key Block Ciphers. Chapter 9: PublicKey Cryptosystem: Part I. Chapter 10: Public-Key Cryptosystem: Part II. Part IV:
Network Security. Chapter 11: Message Integrity and Authentication. Chapter 12:
Hash Algorithms. Chapter 13: Digital Signature. Chapter 14: Entity Authentication.
Chapter 15: Key Management. Part V: Internet Security. Chapter 16: Security at
Network Layer: IPSec. Chapter 17: Security at Transport Layer: SSL and TLS
Chapter 18: Security at Application Layer: PGP
46
11/15/06 5:05:28 PM
Computer Science
NEW
INFORMATION ASSURANCE FOR THE ENTERPRISE:
A Roadmap to Information Security
by Corey Schou, Idaho State University and Daniel Paul Shoemaker,
University of Detroit Mercy
2007 (March 2006) / Softcover / 652 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225524-9 / MHID: 0-07-225524-2
FEATURES
• Written by the most authoritative voice on information security in
both academia and industry.
• Introduces the concepts of information security, the security
assessment and the implementation of security via minimal technical
terminology and acronyms to appeal to a broader audience
• Real world examples and case studies for illustrations.
• End-of-chapter review includes summaries, key terms list,
vocabulary quiz, multiple-choice test, true/false questions, and
perhaps research projects as hands-on projects.
• Instructor support includes instructor manual, test bank software
with hundreds of questions, PowerPoint® slides.
CONTENTS
Part I: The Organizational/Policy Domain: Ch. 1: Organizational Security Policy
and Planning. Ch. 2: Defined and Documented Infrastructure. Ch. 3: Education
and Awareness. Ch. 4: Asset Management. Ch. 5: Business Continuity. Ch. 6:
Legal and Regulatory Compliance. Part II: The Managerial/Administrative Domain:
Ch. 7: Building Security Functions Into Development. Ch. 8: Personnel Security.
Ch. 9: Physical Security. Part III: The Operational/Technical Domain: Ch. 10:
Access Control. Ch. 11: Operations Security. Ch. 12: Network Security. Ch. 13:
Application and System Software Security. Ch. 14: Operational Risk Assessment
and Audit. Part IV: The Community/Contextual Domain: Ch. 15: Ethics. Ch. 16:
A Standard Implementation Model. Glossary. Index
PRINCIPLES OF COMPUTER SECURITY
Security+ and Beyond
organized by exam objective, key term list, vocabulary building
exercises, multiple-choice questions, case-study questions, and lab
projects.
• Student CD-ROM will include self-assessment engine with
practice exams and 1-hour of LearnKey online video training.
CONTENTS
1: Introduction and Security Trends. 2: General Security Concepts. 3: Operational/
Organizational Security. 4: The Role of People in Security. 5: Cryptography. 6:
Public Key Infrastructure. 7: Standards and Protocols. 8: The Impact of Physical
Security on Network Security. 9: Network Fundamentals. 10: Infrastructure
Security. 11: Remote Access. 12: Wireless and Instant Messaging. 13: Intrusion
Detection Systems. 14: Security Baselines. 15: Attacks and Malware. 16: E-mail.
17: Web Components. 18: Software Development. 19: Disaster Recovery, Business
Continuity, and Organizational Policies. 20: Risk Management. 21: Change
Management. 22: Privilege Management. 23: Computer Forensics. 24: Security
and Law. A: About the CD-ROM. B: About the Security+ Exam
CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY
by Atul Kahate, Project Leader, i-flex Solutions, Pune
2003 / 460 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-049483-1 / MHID: 0-07-049483-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123477-1 / MHID: 0-07-123477-2 [IE]
http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/digital_solutions/kahate
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to the Concepts of Security. 2 Cryptographic Techniques. 3
Computer-based Symmetric Key Cryptographic Algorithms. 4 Computer-based
Asymmetric Key Cryptographic Algorithms. 5 Public Key Infrastructure (PKI).
6 Internet Security Protocols. 7 User Authentication Mechanisms. 8 Practical
Implementations of Cryptography/Security. 9 Network Security. 10 Case Studies
on Cryptography and Security. Appendix A -Mathematical Background. Appendix
B -Number Systems. Appendix C -Information Theory. Appendix D -Real-life
Tools. Appendix E -Web Resources. Appendix F -A Brief Introduction to ASN,
BER, DER. Appendix G -Modern Security Trends. Answers to Multiple-choice
Questions. Glossary. References. Index.
by Wm. Arthur Conklin, University of Texas at San Antonio; Gregory
B White, Center for Infrastructure Assurance and Security, University
of Texas San Antonio; Chuck Cothren, University of Texas at San
Antonio; Dwayne Williams, University of Texas at San Antonio and
Roger L. Davis
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225509-9 / MHID: 0-07-225509-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124500-6 / MHID: 0-07-124500-6 [IE]
http://mhteched.com/security/conklin
Learn the essentials of computer and network security while
getting complete coverage of all the objectives for CompTIA’s
Security+ certification exam, plus coverage of the (ISC)2
SSCP certification, which focuses on best practices, roles, and
responsibilities of security experts. Written and edited by leaders
in the IT security field, this text explains the fundamentals of
communication, infrastructure, and operational security. You’ll
also get details on methods to defend your computer systems
and networks and how to prevent attacks.
FEATURES
• 100% coverage of all exam objectives for the Security+
Certification.
• NWCET Reviewed: The National Workforce Center for Emerging
Technologies (NWCET) will review the book, create a crosswalk to
the NWCET IT Skills Standards, and provide additional exercises that
will help teachers and students meet those standards.
• Well illustrated
• Informative sidebars that help students check their knowledge,
reinforce key concepts
• Exam Tip, Caution, and Note icons highlight key topics, end of
chapter quizzes test retention and exam readiness, and Exam Tips
guide the reader through tough technical topics.
• Chapter Review section includes bulleted chapter summary
47
11/15/06 5:05:28 PM
Computer Science
Neural Networks
TCP/IP
TCP/IP PROTOCOL SUITE
Third Edition
2006 / Hardcover / 992 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296772-2 / MHID: 0-07-296772-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111583-4 / MHID: 0-07-111583-8 [IE]
This website contains: four-color PowerPoint slides and solutions-odds
for students and a complete password protected set for instructors.
(Browse http://www.mhhe.com/forouzan)
Networking technologies have become an integral part of
everyday life, which has led to a dramatic increase in the number
of professions where it is important to understand network
technologies. TCP/IP Protocol Suite teaches students and
professionals, with no prior knowledge of TCP/IP, everything
they need to know about the subject. This comprehensive
book uses hundreds of figures to make technical concepts easy
to grasp, as well as many examples, which help tie the material
to the real-world. The second edition of TCP/IP Protocol Suite
has been fully updated to include all of the recent technology
changes in the field. Many new chapters have been added
such as one on Mobile IP, Multimedia and Internet, Network
Security, and IP over ATM. Additionally, out-of-date material
has been overhauled to reflect recent changes in technology.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Six new chapters are included in the second edition:
Chapter 14 Multicasting Routing Protocols
Chapter 26 IP over ATM
Chapter 27 Mobile IP
Chapter 28 Real Time Traffic over the Internet
Chapter 29 Internet Security
Chapter 30 Private Networks
FEATURES
• Extensive Practice Sets in each chapter include multiple choice
questions and exercises, giving students and professors ample
opportunity to check understanding of concepts.
• Summary sections at the end of chapters list major concepts
learned in the chapter.
• Hundreds of excellent figures, now enhanced with a second color,
present technical concepts in a visual and intuitive manner.
NEURAL NETWORKS: A CLASSROOM APPROACH
by Satish Kumar, Dayalbagh Educational Institute, India
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-048292-0 / MHID: 0-07-048292-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124672-9 / MHID: 0-07-124672-X [IE]
Neural Networks is an integral component of the ubiquitous soft
computing paradigm. An in-depth understanding of this field
requires some background of the principles of neuroscience,
mathematics and computer programming. Neural Networks: A
Classroom Approach, achieves a balanced blend of these areas
to weave an appropriate fabric for the exposition of the diversity
of neural network models. This book is unique, in the sense
that it stresses on an intuitive and geometric understanding of
the subject and on the heuristic explanation of the theoretical
results. This book is intended for a first course on Neural
Networks and can also serve as a supporting text for courses
on soft computing, artificial intelligence, machine learning
and neuron modeling. Key Features : Unique and distinctive
chapters on neuroscience, statistical pattern recognition,
support vector machines, pulsed neural networks, fuzzy
systems, soft computing, and dynamical systems; Stresses on
heuristic explanations of theoretical results.
CONTENTS
I. Traces of History and A Neuroscience Briefer: 1 Brain Style Computing: Origins
and Issues. 2 Lessons from Neuroscience. II. Feedforward Neural Networks and
Supervised Learning: 3 Artificial Neurons, Neural Networks and Architectures.
4 Geometry of Binary Threshold Neurons and Their Networks. 5 Supervised
Learning I: Perceptrons and LMS. 6 Supervised Learning. II: Backpropagation
and Beyond: 7 Neural Network: A Statistical Pattern Recognition Perspective. 8
Focussing on Generalization: Support Vector Machines and Radial Basis Function
Networks. III. Recurrent Neurodynamical Systems. 9 Dynamical Systems Review.
10 Attractor Neural Networks. 11 Adaptive Resonance Theory 12 Towards the Self
Organizing Feature Map. IV. Contemporary Topics: 13 Pulsed Neuron Models:
The New Generation. 14 Fuzzy Sets, Fuzzy Systems and Applications. 15 Neural
Networks and the Soft Computing Paradigm
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 The OSI Model and the TCP/IP Protocol Suite. 3 Underlying
Technologies. 4 IP Addresses: Classful Addressing. 5 Subnetting/Supernetting and
Classless Addressing. 6 Delivery and Routing of IP Packets. 7 ARP and RARP. 8
Internet Protocol (IP). 9 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). 10 Internet
Group Management Protocol (IGMP). 11 User Datagram Protocol (UDP). 12
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). 13 Unicast Routing Protocols (RIP, OSPF,
and BGP). 14 Multicasting Routing Protocols. 15 Application Layer and ClientServer Model. 16 Socket Interface. 17 BOOTP and DHCP. 18 Domain Name
System (DNS). 19 TELNET and Rlogin. 20 File Transfer Protocol (FTP). 21 Trivial
File Transfer Protocol (TFTP). 22 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). 23 Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP). 24 Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP).
25 World Wide Web. 26 IP over ATM. 27 Mobile IP. 28 Real-Time Traffic over
the Internet. 29 Internet Security. 30 Private Networks. 31 Next Generation:
IPv6 and ICMPv6 Appendix A ASCII Code Appendix B Numbering Systems and
Transformation Appendix C Checksum Calculation Appendix D Error Detection
Appendix E Encryption Methods Appendix F Project 802 Appendix G Contact
Addresses Appendix H RFCs Appendix I UDP and TCP Ports Glossary References
Index
Graphics
INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER GRAPHICS
by N Krishnamurthy, Software Consultant, Singapore
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-043536-0 / MHID: 0-07-043536-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120704-1 / MHID: 0-07-120704-X [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Applications. 3 Graphics Mathematics. 4 Input Hardware.
5 Output Hardware. 6 Output Characteristics. 7 Line Drawing Algorithms. 8
Programming. 9 Business and Scientific Graphics. 10 Window and Viewport.
11 Clipping. 12 Modeling Transformations. 13 Transformation Applications. 14
Tools and Techniques. 15 3D Input and Processing. 16 3D Realism and Output.
17 Conclusion. Appendices: A: Coordinate Systems. B: Lines and Curves in 2D.
C: Matrix Algebra. D: Lines and Surfaces in 3D. E : References and Resources. F:
Captions and Notes on Colour Plates. Index
48
11/15/06 5:05:29 PM
Computer Science
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF COMPUTER GRAPHICS
Second Edition
by Roy A Plastock and Zhigang Xiang, New Jersey Institute of
Technology
2001 / 347 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-135781-4 / MHID: 0-07-135781-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118885-2 / MHID: 07-118885-1 [IE] (Out-ofPrint)
ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
Second Edition
by Elaine Rich, Microelectronics and Computer Research Center and
Kevin Knight, Carnegie-Mellon University
1991 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-100894-5 / MHID: 0-07-100894-2 [IE]
CONTENTS
Introduction. Image Represenation. Scan Conversion. Two-Dimensional Transformations. Two-Di men sion al Viewing and Clipping. Three-Di men sion al
Transformations. Mathematics of Projection. Three-Dimensional viewing and
Clipping. Geometric Represenation. Hidden Surfaces. Color and Shading Models.
Ray Tracing. Mathematics for Two-Dimensional Computer Graphics. Mathematics
for Three-Dimensional Computer Graphics.
Robotics
ROBOTICS
Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence
by the late K.S. Fu, and C.S.G. Lee, both of Purdue University; and
Ralph Gonzalez, University of Tennessee
1987 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-100421-3 / MHID: 0-07-100421-1 [IE]
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
Second Edition
by Steven Harrington, Xerox Corporation, Rochester
1987 / 466 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-100472-5 / MHID: 0-07-100472-6 [IE]
INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS
Technology, Programming and Application
Artificial Intelligence
by Mikell Groover, Lehigh University; Mitchell Weiss, United States
Robots, Inc.; Roger Nagel and Nicholas Odrey, both of Lehigh
University
1986 / 480 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-100442-8 / MHID: 0-07-100442-4 [IE]
REAL-TIME SYSTEMS
by C.M. Krishna, University of Massachusetts; and K.G. Shin,
University of Michigan
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114243-4 / MHID: 0-07-114243-6 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction/2 Characterizing Real-Time Systems and Tasks/3 Task Assignment
and Scheduling/4 Programming Languages and Tools/5 Real-Time Databases/6
Real-Time Com mu ni ca tion/7 Fault-Tolerance Techniques/8 Reliability
Evaluation Techniques/9 Clock Synchronization/Appendix: Review of Modeling
Techniques
MACHINE LEARNING
by Tom M Mitchell, Carnegie Mellon University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-042807-2 / MHID: 0-07-042807-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115467-3 / MHID: 0-07-115467-1 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction/2 Concept Learning and the General-to-Specific Ordering/3
Decision Tree Learning/4 Artificial Neural Networks/5 Evaluating Hypotheses/6
Bayesian Learning/7 Computational Learning Theory/8 Instance-Based Learning/9
Genetic Algorithms/10 Learning Sets of Rules/11 Analytical Learning/12 Combining
Inductive and Analytical Learning/13 Reinforcement Learning
49
11/15/06 5:05:30 PM
Computer Science
Computer/Machine Vision
NEW
HUMAN COMPUTER INTERACTION
Multi-Disciplinary Approach
by Gerrit van der Veer
2008 (July 2007) / Softcover / 750 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-709996-1 / MHID: 0-07-709996-6
This book provides a systematic account of all that is needed for
designing complex interactive systems. It provides a multidisciplinary
content, from a user-centred and pragmatic point of view. The book
aims to provide the theory students need to understand the various
techniques and provides illustrations, examples and exercises to
prepare students for collaborating with design teams in industrial
practice.
CONTENTS
Part 1: Introduction: Chapter 1: Preface. Chapter 2: Introduction to HCI. Part 2:
Human users in context: Chapter 3: Introduction to the sciences of humanity.
Chapter 4: Basic cognitive processes. Chapter 5: Complex processes. Chapter 6:
Applications of cognitive psychology in ergonomy. Chapter 7: Mental models
of complex systems. Chapter 8:"Working" in context. Part 3: Design approach:
Chapter 9: DUTCH: Designing for users and tasks, from concepts to handles
Chapter 10: Formal models. Chapter 11: Task analysis. Chapter 12: Detail
design. Chapter 13: Evaluation. Chapter 14: User centred design patterns. Part
4: Application domains: Chapter 15: Designing persuasive web sites. Chapter
16: Design of experiences--virtual reality. Chapter 17: Introducing user centred
design in practise. Chapter 18: Designing for knowledge intensive business
systems. Chapter 19: Design as an industry. Chapter 20: Multimedia applications
for cultural domains.
MACHINE VISION
by Ramesh C. Jain, University of California - San Diego and
Rangacher Kasturi, Penn State University, Brian G. Schunck
1995 / 549 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113407-1 / MHID: 0-07-113407-7 [IE]
CONTENTS
1. Introduction. 2. Binary Image Processing. 3. Regions. 4. Image Filtering. 5. Edge
Detection. 6. Contours. 7. Texture. 8. Optics. 9. Shading. 10. Color. 11. Depth.
12. Calibration. 13. Surfaces. 14. Volumetric Representations. 15. Motion. 16.
Object Recognition
Numerical Methods & Analysis
NEW
APPLIED NUMERICAL METHODS WITH MATLAB
FOR ENGINEERS AND SCIENTISTS
Second Edition
by Steven C. Chapra, Tufts University
2008 (November 2006) / Hardcover / 544 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313290-7 / MHID: 0-07-313290-X
The web site features student and instructor resources such as an image
bank, lecture slides, helpful web links, study objectives, and more!
(Browse http://www.mhhe.com/chapra)
Steven Chapra’s second edition, Applied Numerical Methods
with MATLAB for Engineers and Scientists, is written for
engineers and scientists who want to learn numerical problem
solving. This text focuses on problem-solving (applications)
rather than theory, using MATLAB, and is intended for
Numerical Methods users; hence theory is included only to
inform key concepts. The second edition feature new material
such as Numerical Differentiation and ODE's: Boundary-Value
Problems.
For those who require a more theoretical approach, see
Chapra's best-selling Numerical Methods for Engineers, 5/e
(2006), also by McGraw-Hill.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Based on response from users and reviewers, 4 New Chapters
have been added to the second edition to provide a more accessible
presentation, while maintaining its student-friendly flavor.
~Optimization
~Numerical Differentiation
~ODES: Boundary-Value Problems
~Fast Fourier Transform. This appendix chapter is presented in an
introductory fashion to illustrate the power of MATLAB and to let
students go away recognizing that although they have just scratched
the surface, they might want to pursue the topic in greater depth in
future courses.
• 50% new or revised chapter and homework problems
FEATURES
• Explanations are straight-forward and practically oriented. The
math level is considered, just to be at the right level--not too easy or
rigorous, just right.
• Extensive use of engineering examples, case studies, and
applications are given throughout the text.
• Each chapter is well integrated with MATLAB M-files. In addition,
relevant MATLAB functions are introduced in each chapter.
• MATLAB is used as the primary computing environment. All
algorithms are presented as m-files.
• A text Web site is available at http://www.mhhe.com/chapra
CONTENTS
Part One Modeling, Computers, and Error Analysis. 1. Mathematical Modeling
Numerical Methods and Problem Solving. 2. MATLAB Fundamentals. 3.
Programming with MATLAB. 4. Roundoff and Trunication Errors. Part Two Roots
and Optimization. 5. Roots: Bracketing Methods. 6. Roots: Open Methods. 7.
Optimization. Part Three Linear Systems. 8. Linear Algebraic Equations and
Matrices. 9. Gauss Elimination. 10. LU Factorization. 11. Matrix Inverse and
Condition. 12. Iterative Methods. Part Four Curve Fitting. 13. Linear Regression.
14. General Linear Least-Squares and Non-Linear Regression. 15. Polynomial
Interpolation. 16. Splines and Piecewise Interpolation. Part Five Integration and
Differentiation. 17. Numerical Integration Formulas. 18. Numerical Integration of
Functions. 19. Numerical Differentiation. Part Six Ordinary Differential Equations.
20. Initial-Value Problems. 21. Adaptive Methods and Stiff Systems. 22. BoundaryValue Problems Appendix A: Eigenvalues Appendix B: MATLAB Built-in Functions
Appendix C: MATLAB M-File Functions Bibliography Index
50
11/15/06 5:05:31 PM
Computer Science
NUMERICAL METHODS FOR ENGINEERS
Fifth Edition
by Steven C. Chapra, Tufts University, Raymond Canale
2006 / 960 pages / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310156-9 / MHID: 0-07-310156-7
(with Engg Sub Card)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124429-9 / MHID: 0-07-124429-8 [IE]
The Online Learning Center will contain general textbook information,
helpful Web links, MATLAB resources, and more! (Browse http://www.
mhhe.com/chapra)
The fifth edition of Numerical Methods for Engineers with
Software and Programming Applications continues its
tradition of excellence. Instructors love this text because it is a
comprehensive text that is easy to teach from. Students love it
because it is written for them—with great pedagogy and clear
explanations and examples throughout. The text features a broad
array of applications, including all engineering disciplines.
The revision retains the successful pedagogy of the prior
editions. Chapra and Canale’s unique approach opens each
part of the text with sections called Motivation, Mathematical
Background, and Orientation, preparing the student for what
is to come in a motivating and engaging manner. Each part
closes with an Epilogue containing sections called Trade-Offs,
Important Relationships and Formulas, and Advanced Methods
and Additional References. Much more than a summary, the
Epilogue deepens understanding of what has been learned
and provides a peek into more advanced methods. Users will
find use of software packages, specifically MATLAB and Excel
with VBA. This includes material on developing MATLAB mfiles and VBA macros. Also, many, many more challenging
problems are included. The expanded breadth of engineering
disciplines covered is especially evident in the problems,
which now cover such areas as biotechnology and biomedical
engineering.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
SCIENTIFIC COMPUTING
Second Edition
by Michael T Heath, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-239910-3 / MHID: 0-07-239910-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124489-3 / MHID: 0-07-124489-1 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/engcs/compsci/heath
CONTENTS
1 Scientific Computing. 2 Systems of Linear Equations. 3 Linear Least Squares. 4
Eigenvalues Problems. 5 Nonlinear Equations. 6 Optimization. 7 Interpolation.
8 Numerical Integration and Differentiation. 9 Initial Value Problems for ODEs.
10 Boundary Value Problems for ODEs. 11 Partial Differential Equations. 12 Fast
Fourier Transform. 13 Random Numbers and Simulation
ELEMENTARY NUMERICAL ANALYSIS
An Algorithmic Approach
Third Edition
by Samuel D. Conte, Purdue University, and Carl deBoor, University
of Wisconsin, Madison
1980 / 408 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-066228-5 / MHID: 0-07-066228-2 [IE]
• Approximately 150 new, challenging problems drawn from all
engineering disciplines.
• The higher level material has been streamlined and some has
been eliminated completely.
• Completely new sections on a number of topics including
multiple integrals and the modified false position method.
Features
• Challenging problems drawn from all engineering disciplines are
included in the text.
• Chapra is know for his clear explanations and elegantly rendered
examples.
• The text includes a helpful appendix chapter, Getting Started with
MATLAB.
CONTENTS
Part 1 Modeling, Computers, and Error Analysis: 1 Mathematical Modeling and
Engineering Problem Solving. 2 Programming and Software. 3 Approximations
and Round-Off Errors. 4 Truncation Errors and the Taylor Series. Part 2 Roots of
Equations: 5 Bracketing Methods. 6 Open Methods. 8 Engineering Applications:
Roots of Equations. Part 3 Linear Algebraic Equations: 9 Gauss Elimination. 10
LU Decomposition and Matrix Inversion. 11 Special Matrices and Gauss-Seidel.
12 Engineering Applications: Linear Algebraic Equations. Part 4 Optimization:
13 One-Dimensional Un con strained Optimization. 14 Multidimensional
Unconstrained Optimization. 15 Constrained Optimization. 16 Engineering
Applications: Optimization. Part 5 Curve Fitting: 17 Least-Squares Regression.
18 Interpolation. 19 Fourier Approximation. 20 Engineering Applications: Curve
Fitting. Part 6 Numerical Differentiation and Integration: 21 Newton-Cotes
Integration Formulas. 22 Integration of Equations. 23 Numerical Differentiation.
24 Engineering Applications: Numerical Integration and Differentiation. Part
7 Ordinary Differential Equations: 25 Runge-Kutta Methods. 26 Stiffness and
Multistep Methods. 27 Boundary-Value and Eigenvalue Problems. 28 Engineering
Applications: Ordinary Differential Equa tions. Part 8 Partial Differential
Equations: 29 Finite Difference: Elliptic Equations. 30 Finite Difference: Parabolic
Equations. 31 Finite-Element Method. 32 Engineering Applications: Partial
Differential Equations. Appendix A The Fourier Series. Appendix B Getting Started
with Matlab. Bibliography. Index
contact your local
[email protected]
51
11/15/06 5:05:31 PM
Computer Science
Simulation
NEW
SIMULATION MODELING AND ANALYSIS
Fourth Edition
by Averill Law, Averill M. Law & Associates
2007 (July 2006) / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329441-4 / MHID: 0-07-329441-1
(with Expertfit Software)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298843-7 / MHID: 0-07-298843-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125519-6 / MHID: 0-07-125519-2 [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/law
Since the publication of the first edition in 1982, the goal of
Simulation Modeling and Analysis has always been to provide
a comprehensive, state-of-the-art, and technically correct
treatment of all important aspects of a simulation study. The
book strives to make this material understandable by the use
of intuition and numerous figures, examples, and problems. It
is equally well suited for use in university courses, simulation
practice, and self study. The book is widely regarded as the
“bible” of simulation and now has more than 100,000 copies
in print. The book can serve as the primary text for a variety of
courses; for example:
• A first course in simulation at the junior, senior, or beginninggraduate-student level in engineering, manufacturing, business, or
computer science (Chaps. 1 through 4, and parts of Chaps. 5 through
9). At the end of such a course, the students will be prepared to carry
out complete and effective simulation studies, and to take advanced
simulation courses.
• A second course in simulation for graduate students in any of the
above disciplines (most of Chaps. 5 through 12). After completing
this course, the student should be familiar with the more advanced
methodological issues involved in a simulation study, and should be
prepared to understand and conduct simulation research.
• An introduction to simulation as part of a general course in
operations research or management science (part of Chaps. 1, 3, 5,
6, and 9).
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• A CD-ROM containing the Student Version of the ExpertFit
distribution-fitting software will be included and will tie to the book
• Up-to-date treatment of the latest simulation software, including a
common example in four of the leading products
• All of the software used in the book has been upgraded to
FORTRAN and C.
• 20% new problems and examples
• More comprehensive and practical discussion of how to validate a
simulation model
• New and improved random-number generators
• Latest statistical techniques for estimating the performance
measures of a simulated system, both for terminating and steady-state
simulations
• Ranking-and-selection procedures for choosing the best system
configuration, which allow the use of common random numbers for
increased efficiency
• More detailed discussion of how to use the method of common
random numbers in practice
• Greatly expanded and self-contained discussion of classical design
of experiments, with a particular emphasis on how to correctly
implement these techniques in the context of simulation modeling
• Several detailed examples on the use of simulation-based
optimization
CONTENTS
1 Basic Simulation Modeling. 2 Modeling Complex Systems. 3 Simulation
Software. 4 Review of Basic Probability and Statistics. 5 Building Valid, Credible,
and Appropriately Detailed Simulation Models. 6 Selecting Input Probability
Distributions. 7 Random-Number Generators. 8 Generating Random Variates.
9 Output Data Analysis for a Single System. 10 Comparing Alternative System
Configurations. 11 Variance-Reduction Techniques. 12 Experimental Design,
Sensitivity Analysis, and Optimization. 13 Simulation of Manufacturing Systems
NEW
SIMULATION WITH ARENA
Fourth Edition
by W. David Kelton, University Of Cincinnati-Cincinnati
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325989-5 / MHID: 0-07-325989-6 (with CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128604-6 / MHID: 0-07-128604-7 [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/kelton4e
This fourth edition of Simulation with Arena has the same
goal as the first three editions: to provide a comprehensive
treatment of simulation concepts in general and the Arena
simulation software in particular. It starts by having the reader
develop simple, well-animated, high-level models, and then
progresses to advanced modeling and analysis. Statistical
design and analysis of simulation experiments is integrated
with the modeling chapters, reflecting the joint nature of
these activities in good simulation studies. The objective is
to help the reader carry out effective simulation modeling,
analysis, and projects using the Arena simulation system. An
informal, tutorial writing style is used to aid the beginner in
fully understanding the ideas and topics presented. Included
is a CD containing the current version of the Arena academic
software and the examples referenced throughout the text.
Starting with an introduction to simulation concepts, the book
progresses through an overview of the Arena software, basic
model development, input analysis, additional modeling
constructs, output analysis, and advanced modeling. It also
includes chapters on integrating Arena simulation models with
other applications, specialized statistical issues, continuous
simulation, and conducting a successful simulation study.
It is intended primarily to be a text in a first course on
simulation or for self-study. However, the later chapters could
be incorporated into an advanced or graduate-level course.
Building on the success of the first three editions, published
in 1998, 2002, and 2004, this edition retains the basic outline
and tutorial style, built around a sequence of successively
more complicated examples. All the examples and discussion,
however, have been modified and updated to be consistent
with the current version of the Arena software, and additional
examples have been developed, along with more exercises.
As before, a password-protected website for instructors
provides support in terms of downloadable lecture slides and
solutions to end-of-chapter exercises. The book draws heavily
on the experience and expertise of the authors, a professor
at the University of Cincinnati specializing in simulation,
and two seasoned members of Rockwell Software (formerly
Systems Modeling), the developers of Arena, who are active
in product design and development, training, consulting, and
applications.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Update throughout to move to the new current version of the
Arena software, which will be version 10,
• Added a new model at the end of Chapt. 3 to illustrate the basic
concepts that can lead to an interesting operational analysis. This
model is already well formulated, addressing the classic problem
in business-process re-engineering of whether it’s better to have
specialized single-task staff or generalized multi-purpose staff, and
provides a “quick victory” on a meaningful issue using only the most
basic of modeling constructs and tools.
• Replaced the car-repair model in Chapt. 5 with a more
approachable model, possibly a call center as in the first and second
editions, that illustrates the points, but is easier to teach (will be
developed in two or three stages) and is better suited as a vehicle to
illustrate analysis and further modeling points in subsequent chapters.
• Addition of other new models to illustrate logistics and supplychain management,
• Enhancements as needed in later chapters to illustrate new
software capabilities.
• Add new Exercises in all the chapters, updated with solutions in
the new software.
52
11/15/06 5:05:32 PM
Computer Science
CONTENTS
1. What is Simulation? 2. Fundamental Simulation Concepts. 3. A Guided Tour
Through Arena. 4. Modeling Basic Operations and Inputs. 5. Modeling Detailed
Operations. 6. Statistical Design and Analysis of Terminating Simulations. 7. Intermediate
Modeling and Steady-State Statistical Analysis. 8. Entity Transfer. 9. A Sampler of
Further Modeling Issues and Techniques. 10. Arena Integration and Customization. 11.
Continuous and Combined Discrete/Continuous Models. 12. Further Statistical Issues. 13.
Conducting Simulation Studies Appendix A: A Functional Specification for The Washington
Post Appendix B: IIE/RS Contest Problems Appendix C: A Refresher or Probability and
Statistics Appendix D: Arena’s Probability Distributions Appendix E: Academic Software
Installation. Instructions. References. Index. CD with current academic version of Arena
and all examples used in the book
SIMULATION USING PROMODEL
Second Edition
by Charles R Harrell, Brigham Young University, Provo, Biman K
Ghosh, California State Polytechnic University, Pomona and Royce
Bowden, Mississippi State University, Mississippi State
2004 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-291980-6 / MHID: 0-07-291980-9 (with CD)
Sample chapter, Overview, TOC, Author bio, Preface, Whatʼs new,
Feature summary, Supplement list, Reviewer notes, Cover graphic,
Instructors manual, Pageout, Rep locator, Review/feedback form, Order
a copy, Solutions manual (Browse http://www.mhhe.com/007248263x)
Simulation Using Promodel covers the art and science of
simulation in general and the use of Promodel simulation
software in particular. The text blends theory with practice
presenting actual applications in business, services and
manufacturing. This second edition reflects the most recent
version of the Promodel software available.
CONTENTS
SIMULATION WITH ARENA
Third Edition
by W David Kelton, University of Cincinnati - Cincinnati; Randall P
Sadowski, Systems Modeling Corporation, Rockwell Software and
David T Sturrock, Systems Modeling Corporation, Rockwell Software
2004 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-291981-3 / MHID: 0-07-291981-7 (with CD)
http://www.arenasimulation.com/40academic/SWA3e.htm
The first edition of this book was the first text to be written
on the Arena software, which is a very popular simulation
modeling software. What makes this text the authoritative
source on Arena is that it was written by the creators of Arena
themselves. The new third edition follows in the tradition of
the successful first and second editions in its tutorial style (via
a sequence of carefully crafted examples) and an accessible
writing style. The updates include thorough coverage of the
new version of the Arena software (Arena 7.01), enhanced
support for Excel and Access, and updated examples to reflect
the new version of software. The CD-ROM that accompanies
the book contains the Academic version of the Arena software.
The software features new capabilities such as model
documentation, enhanced plots, file reading and writing,
printing and animation symbols.
CONTENTS
1 What is Simulation? 2 Fundamental Simulation Concepts. 3 A Guided Tour
Through Arena. 4 Modeling Basic Operations and Inputs. 5 Modeling Detail
ed Operations. 6 Statistical Analysis of Output from Terminating Simulations.
7 Intermediate Modeling and Steady-State Statistical Analysis. 8 Entity Transfer.
9 A Sampler of Further Modeling Issues and Techniques. 10 Arena Integration
and Customization. 11 Continuous and Combined Discrete/Continuous Models.
12 Further Statistical Issues. 13 Conducting Simulation Studies. Appendix A A
Functional Specification for the Washington Post. Appendix B IIE/RS Contest
Problems. Appendix C A Refresher on Probability and Statistics. Appendix D
Arena’s Probability Distributions. Appendix E Academic Software Installation
Instructions
I Study Chapters: 1 Introduction to Simulation. 2 System Dynamics. 3 Simulation
Basics. 4 Discrete-Event Simulation. 5 Getting Started. 6 Data Collection and
Analysis. 7 Model Building. 8 Model Verification and Validation. 9 Simulation
Output Analysis. 10 Comparing Systems. 11 Optimization. 12 Modeling
Manufacturing Systems. 13 Modeling Material Handling Systems. 14 Modeling
Service Systems. II Labs: 1 Introduction to ProModel 2002. 2 ProModel World
View, Menu and Tutorial. 3 Running a ProModel Simulation. 4 A Quick Look
at ProModel. 5 ProModel’s Output Module. 6 Fitting Statistical Distribution to
Input Data. 7 Basic Modeling Concepts. 8 Model Verification and Validation. 9
Output Analysis. 10 Comparing Alternative Systems. 11 Simulation Optimization
with SimRunner. 12 Intermediate Modeling Concepts. 13 Material Handling
Concepts. 14 Additional Modeling Concepts. III Case Study Assignments: Case 1
Toy Airplane Manufacturing. Case 2 Jai Hind Cycles Inc. Plans New Production
Facility. Case 3 The FSB Coin System. Case 4 Automated Warehousing at Athletic
Shoe Company. Case 5 Concentrate Line at Florida Citrus Company. Case 6
Balancing the Production Line at Southern California Door Company. Case 7
Material Handling at California Steel Industries, Inc. Appendixes: A Common
Continuous and Discrete Distributions. B Critical Values for Students t Distribution
(ta). C F Distribution for a=0.05
53
11/15/06 5:05:33 PM
Computer Science
Software Engineering
Case Study. Appendix G Design Workflow: The MSG Foundation Case Study.
Appendix H Implementation Workflow: The MSG Foundation Case Study (C++
Version). Appendix I Implementation Workflow: The MSG Foundation Case Study
(Java Version). Appendix J Test Workflow: The MSG Foundation Case Study
NEW
OBJECT-ORIENTED AND CLASSICAL SOFTWARE
ENGINEERING
Seventh Edition
by Stephen R. Schach, Vanderbilt University–Nashville
2007 (June 2006) / Hardcover / 608 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319126-3 / MHID: 0-07-319126-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110303-3 / MHID: 0-07-110303-1 [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/schach
Classical and Object-Oriented Software Engineering, 7/e
presents an excellent introduction to software engineering
fundamentals, covering both traditional and object-oriented
techniques. The coverage of both Agile processes and
Open Source Software has been considerably expanded. In
addition, the Osbert Oglesby running case study has been
replaced with a new case study on the Martha Stockton
Greengage Foundation. The new study highlights even more
aspects of the Unified Process. New to this Edition:. • Allnew coverage of agile processes. eXtreme Programming (XP)
is now presented within the larger context of agile processes.
• Expanded material on open-source software. Additional
coverage on open-source software development is included
throughout the manuscript, particularly Chapters 2 and 4. •
More problems. New problems have been added to every
chapter. • Brand new Case Study. Based on feedback from
reviewers and users, a new case study on the Martha Stockton
Greengage Foundation illustrates techniques of software
development in Chapters 10-15. The case study deals with a
real-world situation that students will be likely to encounter in
real life: home mortgages. This case study replaces the Osbert
Oglesby case study from previous editions. • New Online
Content. This text is available with a website that contains
PowerPoints, solutions, and C++ and Java code for the Term
Project and Case Studies. The book’s unique organization
remains in place, with Part I covering underlying software
engineering theory, and Part II presenting the more practical
life cycle. Complementing this well-balanced approach is the
straightforward, student-friendly writing style, through which
difficult concepts are presented in a clear, understandable
manner. The new seventh edition provides an extensive
updating of this classic software engineering text!
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Expanded material on agile processes
• New Case Study--Martha Stockton Greengage Foundation Case
Study.
• Updated and expanded material on Open-Source software
• 30% new problems
• Many new references have been added to Schach's extensive
collection of over 600 references that help students access relevant
reading in the field.
FEATURES
• This book is accompanied by a website that contains PowerPoints,
solutions, and C++ and Java code for the Term Project and Case
Studies.
CONTENTS
Part One Introduction to Software Engineering. 1 The Scope of Software
Engineering. 2 Software Life-Cycle Models. 3 The Software Process. 4 Teams. 5
The Tools of the Trade. 6 Testing. 7 From Modules to Objects. 8 Reusability and
Portability. 9 Planning and Estimating. Part Two The Workflows of the Software
Life Cycle. 10 Requirements. 11 Classical Analysis. 12 Object-Oriented Analysis.
13 Design. 14 Implementation. 15 Postdelivery Maintenance. 16 More on UML.
Appendix A Term Project: Osric's Office Appliances and Decor. Appendix B
Software Engineering Resources. Appendix C Requirements Workflow: The MSG
Foundation Case Study. Appendix D Structured Systems Analysis: The MSG
Foundation Case Study. Appendix E Analysis Workflow: The MSG Foundation
Case Study. Appendix F Software Project Management Plan: The MSG Foundation
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING: A PRACTITIONER’S
APPROACH
Sixth Edition
by Roger S Pressman, R.S. Pressman & Associates
2005 / 896 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-301933-8 / MHID: 0-07-301933-X
(with OLC Bi-Card)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123840-3 / MHID: 0-07-123840-9 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/pressman
For over 20 years, Software Engineering: A Practitioner’s
Approach has been the best selling guide to software
engineering for students and industry professionals alike.
The sixth edition continues to lead the way in software
engineering. A new Part 4 on Web Engineering presents a
complete engineering approach for the analysis, design, and
testing of Web Applications, increasingly important for today’s
students. Additionally, the UML coverage has been enhanced
and signficantly increased in this new edition. The pedagogy
has also been improved in the new edition to include sidebars.
They provide information on relevant softare tools, specific work
flow for specific kinds of projects, and additional information
on various topics. Additionally, Pressman provides a running
case study called “Safe Home” throughout the book, which
provides the application of software engineering to an industry
project. New additions to the book also include chapters on
the Agile Process Models, Requirements Engineering, and
Design Engineering. The book has been completely updated
and contains hundreds of new references to software tools that
address all important topics in the book. The ancillary material
for the book includes an expansion of the case study, which
illustrates it with UML diagrams. The On-Line Learning Center
includes resources for both instructors and students such as
checklists, 700 categorized web references, Powerpoints, a
test bank, and a software engineering library-containing over
500 software engineering papers.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Five new chapters on Web Engineering (Part 3) present methods
for formulation, planning, analysis, design and testing of Web
applications.
• The new modular organization allows instructors to use the book
in a variety of different course formats. Options include a “design
course,” a “survey course,” “management course,” and a “web
engineering course.”
• The SafeHome case study has been enhanced and extended
to illustrate important topics and to allow the student to better
understand the inner workings of a project team as software is
engineered and built.
• New sidebars are used extensively to present complimentary
software engineering topics, suggest relevant tools, and define
workflow for various technical and management activities.
• A new chapter on design engineering emphasizes important
design concepts and principles and lays the foundation for the four
design chapter that follow.
• The coverage on UML(Unified Modeling Language)has been
significantly enhanced for the sixth edition.
• A new chapter on agile development considers Extreme
Programming and other agile methods.
• A new chapter on requirements engineering that emphasizes
technique that emphasizes techniques for requirements inception,
elicitation, elaboration, negotiation, specification, validation, and
management.
• Object-oriented design has been integrated throughout the text in
this edition.
54
11/15/06 5:05:33 PM
Computer Science
FEATURES
• The book is geared toward both the practitioner and the student,
giving it added value for sudents even after they graduate.
• A robust On-line Learning Center accompanies this book and
provides: PowerPoints, testbank, reference library (over 500) software
engineering papers, study guides, and over 700 web references.
• Comprehensive and up-to-date coverage of all important Software
Engineering topics.
• Customize this book through Primis Online! This title is part of the
Primis Online Database: www.mhhe.com/primis/online
CONTENTS
1 Software and Software Engineering. Part 1 The Software Process: 2 Process:
A Generic View. 3 Prescriptive Process Models. 4 Agile Development. Part 2
Software Engineering Practice: 5 Practice: A Generic View. 6 System Engineering.
7 Requirements Engineering. 8 Analysis Modeling. 9 Design Engineering. 10
Architectural Design. 11 Component-Level Design. 12 User Interface Design.
13 Software Testing Strategies. 14 Software Testing Techniques. 15 Product
Metrics for Software. Part 3 Applying Web Engineering: 16 Web Engineering.
17 Formulation and Planning for Web Engineering. 18 Analysis Modeling
for Web Applications. 19 Design Modeling for Web Applications. 20 Testing
Web Applications. Part 4 Managing Software Projects: 21 Project Management
Concepts. 22 Process and Project Metrics. 23 Estimation for Software Projects.
24 Software Project Scheduling. 25 Risk Management. 26 Quality Management.
27 Change Management. Part 5 Advanced Topics in Software Engineering: 28
Formal Methods. 29 Cleanroom Software Engineering. 30 Component-Based
Software Engineering. 31 Reengineering. 32 The Road Ahead
Object-Oriented Software
Engineering
remains in place, with Part I covering underlying software
engineering theory, and Part II presenting the more practical
life cycle. Complementing this well-balanced approach is the
straightforward, student-friendly writing style, through which
difficult concepts are presented in a clear, understandable
manner. The new seventh edition provides an extensive
updating of this classic software engineering text!
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Expanded material on agile processes
• New Case Study--Martha Stockton Greengage Foundation Case
Study.
• Updated and expanded material on Open-Source software
• 30% new problems
• Many new references have been added to Schach's extensive
collection of over 600 references that help students access relevant
reading in the field.
FEATURES
• This book is accompanied by a website that contains PowerPoints,
solutions, and C++ and Java code for the Term Project and Case
Studies.
CONTENTS
Part One Introduction to Software Engineering. 1 The Scope of Software
Engineering. 2 Software Life-Cycle Models. 3 The Software Process. 4 Teams. 5
The Tools of the Trade. 6 Testing. 7 From Modules to Objects. 8 Reusability and
Portability. 9 Planning and Estimating. Part Two The Workflows of the Software
Life Cycle. 10 Requirements. 11 Classical Analysis. 12 Object-Oriented Analysis.
13 Design. 14 Implementation. 15 Postdelivery Maintenance. 16 More on UML.
Appendix A Term Project: Osric's Office Appliances and Decor. Appendix B
Software Engineering Resources. Appendix C Requirements Workflow: The MSG
Foundation Case Study. Appendix D Structured Systems Analysis: The MSG
Foundation Case Study. Appendix E Analysis Workflow: The MSG Foundation
Case Study. Appendix F Software Project Management Plan: The MSG Foundation
Case Study. Appendix G Design Workflow: The MSG Foundation Case Study.
Appendix H Implementation Workflow: The MSG Foundation Case Study (C++
Version). Appendix I Implementation Workflow: The MSG Foundation Case Study
(Java Version). Appendix J Test Workflow: The MSG Foundation Case Study
NEW
OBJECT-ORIENTED AND CLASSICAL SOFTWARE
ENGINEERING
Seventh Edition
by Stephen R. Schach, Vanderbilt University–Nashville
2007 (June 2006) / Hardcover / 608 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319126-3 / MHID: 0-07-319126-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110303-3 / MHID: 0-07-110303-1 [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/schach
Classical and Object-Oriented Software Engineering, 7/e
presents an excellent introduction to software engineering
fundamentals, covering both traditional and object-oriented
techniques. The coverage of both Agile processes and
Open Source Software has been considerably expanded. In
addition, the Osbert Oglesby running case study has been
replaced with a new case study on the Martha Stockton
Greengage Foundation. The new study highlights even more
aspects of the Unified Process. New to this Edition:. • Allnew coverage of agile processes. eXtreme Programming (XP)
is now presented within the larger context of agile processes.
• Expanded material on open-source software. Additional
coverage on open-source software development is included
throughout the manuscript, particularly Chapters 2 and 4. •
More problems. New problems have been added to every
chapter. • Brand new Case Study. Based on feedback from
reviewers and users, a new case study on the Martha Stockton
Greengage Foundation illustrates techniques of software
development in Chapters 10-15. The case study deals with a
real-world situation that students will be likely to encounter in
real life: home mortgages. This case study replaces the Osbert
Oglesby case study from previous editions. • New Online
Content. This text is available with a website that contains
PowerPoints, solutions, and C++ and Java code for the Term
Project and Case Studies. The book’s unique organization
OBJECT-ORIENTED SOFTWARE ENGINEERING:
Practical Software Development Using UML and Java
Second Edition
by Timothy Lethbridge, and Robert Laganiere
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710908-0 / MHID: 0-07-710908-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124770-2 / MHID: 0-07-124770-X [IE]
www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/lethbridge
The authors’ focus in this book is to deliver software engineering
knowledge and skills that readers can put into immediate
practical use. The book provides the essential topic coverage
required by students of software engineering, from the nuts
and bolts of objects to software architecture, from writing code
to testing, from software development processes to project
management. Working through nine contemporary themes in
Software Engineering, students are given an awareness of key
issues from understanding the customer and user, evaluating
alternative requirements and design, to developing quantitative
and logical thinking and effective communication. The book
is designed to be used primarily in second-year software
engineering courses, but is also widely use in its first edition
as an introductory software engineering text at all levels.
It will also be valuable to programming practitioners who
want to develop a better understanding of modern software
engineering.
FEATURES
• To reflect the development of software engineering and changes
in practice, the book aims to provide students with the most
current coverage of UML, a practical grasp of key techniques, and
55
11/15/06 5:05:34 PM
Computer Science
an understanding of contemporary issues surrounding software
engineering. The new edition features:
• Updated to reflect the new UML 2.0 standard- offering the most
up-to-date and relevant coverage of UML available
• Features nine contemporary themes in software engineering,
such as understanding the user, iterative and agile modeling, and
risk management. The themes encourage students to engage with
basic considerations that are fundamental to contemporary software
engineering. Each of these themes is revisited in many chapters, and
is taught in the context of concrete examples and exercises.
• New section on model driven development
• New coverage of web-based software architectures and
middleware
• Integrates discussion of agile approaches, and techniques made
popular by those approaches including refactoring and test-driven
development.
• Improvements to the new edition include moving all discussion
of use cases to Chapter 4 for more focused treatment, and more
coverage of the essentials of measurement and metrics.
• A wide variety of examples and exercises throughout to provide
students with practice in tackling software engineering projects,
including many new and changed exercises for the new edition.
to ensure high quality 10.1 Basic definitions 10.2 Effective and efficient testing
10.3 Defects in ordinary algorithms 10.4 Defects in numerical algorithms 10.5
Defects in teiming and co-ordination: deadlocks, livelocks and critical races 10.6
Defects in handling stress and unusual situations 10.7 Documents defects 10.8
Writing formal test cases and text plans 10.9 Strategies for testing large systems
10.10 Inspections 10.11 Quality assurance in general 10.12 Detailed example:
test case for phase 2 of the SimpleChat instant messaging system 10.13 Difficulties
and risks in quality assurance 11: Managing the software process 11.1 What is
project management? 11.2 Software process models 11.3 Cost estimation 11.4
Building software engineering teams 11.5 Project scheduling and tracking 11.6
Contents of a project plan 11.7 Difficulties and risks in project management 12:
Review 12.1 Theme 1: Understanding the customer and user 12.2 Theme 2:
Basing development on solid principles and reusable technology 12.3 Theme 3:
Object orientation 12.4 Theme 4: Visual modeling using UML 12.5 Theme 5:
Evaluation of alternatives in requirements and design 12.6 Theme 6: Incorporating
quantitative and logical thinking 12.7 Theme 7: Iterative and agile development
12.8 Theme 8: Communicating effectively using documentation 12.9 Rich
management in all software engineering activities 12.10 What next? APPENDIX
A: Summary of the ULM notation used in this book / APPENDIX B: Summary
of the documentation types recommended in this book / APPENDIX C: System
descriptions / Glossary / Index
CONTENTS
1: Software and software engineering 1.1 The nature of software1.2 What is
software engineering? 1.3 Software engineering as a branch of the engineering
profession 1.4 Stakeholders in software engineering 1.5 Software quality 1.6
Software engineering projects 1.7 Activities common to software projects 1.8 The
themes emphasized in this book 1.9 Difficulties and risks in software engineering as
a whole 2: Review of object orientation 2.1 What is object orientation? 2.2 Classes
and objects 2.3 Instance variables 2.4 Methods, operations and polymorphism
2.5 Organizing classes into inheritance hierarchies 2.6 The effects of inheritance
hierarchies on polymorphism and variable declarations 2.7 Concepts that define
object orientation 2.8 Detailed example: a program for manipulating postal codes
2.9 Detailed example: classes for representing geometric points 2.10 Measuring the
quality and complexity of a program 2.11 Difficulties and risks in programming
language choice and object-oriented programming 3: Basing software development
on reusable technology 3.1 Reuse: building on the work and experience of others
3.2 Incorporating reusability and reuse into software engineering 3.3 Frameworks:
reusable subsystems 3.4 The client-server architecture 3.5 Technology needed to
build client-server systems 3.6 The Object Client-Server Framework (OCSF) 3.7
Basic description of OCSF – client side 3.8 Basic description of OCSF – server side
3.9 An instant messaging application using the OCSF 3.10 Difficulties and risks
when considering reusable technology and client-server systems 4: Developing
Requirements 4.1 Domain analysis4.2 The starting point for software projects
4.3 Defining the problem and the scope 4.4 What is a requirement? 4.5 Types
of requirements 4.6 Use cases: describing how the user will use the system 4.7
Some techniques for gathering requirements 4.8 Types of requirements document
4.9 Reviewing requirements 4.10 Managing changing requirements 4.11 Detailed
example: GPS-based Automobile Navigation Assistant (GANA) 4.12 Detailed
example: requirements for a feature of the SimpleChat instant messaging program
4.13 Difficulties and risks in domain and requirement analysis 5: Modeling with
classes 5.1 What is UML? 5.2 Essentials of UML class diagrams 5.3 Associations
and multiplicity 5.4 Generalizations 5.5 Object diagrams 5.6 More advance
features of class diagrams 5.7 The basics of Object Constraint Language (OCL) 5.8
Detailed example: a class diagram for genealogy 5.9 The process of developing
class diagrams 5.10 Implementing class diagrams in Java 5.11 Difficulties and risks
when creating class diagrams 6: Using design patterns 6.1 Introduction to patterns
6.2 The Abstraction-Occurrence pattern 6.3 The General Hierarchy pattern 6.4
The Player-Role pattern 6.5 The Singleton pattern 6.6 The Observer pattern 6.7
The Delegation pattern 6.8 The Adapter pattern 6.9 The Façade pattern 6.10 The
Immutable pattern 6.11 The Read-Only Interface pattern 6.12 The Proxy pattern
6.13 The Factory pattern 6.14 Detailed example: Enhancing OCSF to employ
additional design patterns 6.15 Difficulties and risks when using design patterns
7: Focusing on users and their tasks 7.1 User-centered design 7.2 Characteristics of
users 7.3 Developing use case models of systems 7.4 The basics of user interface
design 7.5 Usability principles 7.6 Evaluating user interfaces 7.7 Implementing
a simple GUI in Java 7.8 Difficulties and risks in use case modeling and UI
Design 8: Modeling interactions and behaviors 8.1 Interaction diagrams 8.2 State
diagrams 8.3 Activity diagrams 8.4 Implementing classes based on interaction and
state diagrams 8.5 Difficulties and risks in modeling interactions and hehaviors
9: Architecting and designing software 9.1 The process of design 9.2 Principles
leading to good design 9.3 Techniques for making good design decisions 9.4
Model driven development 9.6 Architectural patterns 9.7 Wring a good design
document 9.8 Detailed example: design of a feature for the SimpleChat instant
messaging application 9.9 Difficulties and risks in design 10: Testing and inspecting
OBJECT-ORIENTED TECHNOLOGY
by Curtis HK Tsang, Clarence SW Lau and Ying K Leung
2004 / 456 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124046-8 / MHID: 0-07-124046-2
(An Asian Publication)
http://www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg/olc/tsang
This book is written for students and developers who wish to
master the essential skills and techniques in applying the UML
for software development. The reader will learn object-oriented
analysis, design and implementation using appropriate UML
models, process, techniques and tool. Accompanying the
book is the Community Edition of Visual Pradigm for UML
(VP-UML), an award-winning CASE tool, which allows the
reader to put the theories learned into practice immediately.
The authors propose a novel framework for modeling and
analysis called the View Alignment Techniques (VAT) that
helps software developers create development methods. The
Activity Analysis Approach (A3), which is particularly suited for
the development of interaction-intensive systems, is described.
These concepts have been well proven, as they were followed
closely in the development of the VP-UML CASE tool. Three
chapters in this book describe structural, use case and dynamic
modeling and analysis techniques, together with practical
tricks and tips that have been gained by the authors from many
years of experience. Each of these three chapters includes a
mini-case study which illustrates the unique “from diagram to
code” concept in software development. In the final chapter,
a major case study is included to help the reader reinforce
the theories learned in previous chapters using VP-UML. The
key areas in object-oriented technology covered in the book
include:
• Requirements modeling using cases: Identifying, capturing and
elaborating requirements.
• Domain analysis for object identification: Building structural
models for objects and their attributes and relationships.
• Dynamic analysis and design: Building dynamic models, refining
structural models and making design decisions.
• Implementation: Translating UML models into codes and
implementations.
• Method creation and the framework of View Alignment
Techniques: Choosing the right UML models and customizing the
analysis and design process.
• A case study: Showing how the Activity Analysis Approach is put
into practice, using VP-UML.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction. Chapter 2 Structural Modeling and Analysis. Chapter 3 Use
Case Modeling and Analysis. Chapter 4 Dynamic Modeling and Analysis. Chapter
5 Implementing UML Specification. Chapter 6 View Alignment Techniques and
Method Customization. Chapter 7 A Case Study: Applying the Activity Analysis
56
11/15/06 5:05:35 PM
Computer Science
Approach. Appendix A Getting Started with VP-UML. Appendix B Basic UML
Concepts. Appendix C Implementation of the Lift Control System in Chapter 5.
References. Index
PRACTICAL OBJECT-ORIENTED DESIGN WITH UML
Second Edition
by Mark Priestley, University of Westminster
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710393-4 / MHID: 0-07-710393-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123923-3 / MHID: 0-07-123923-5 [IE]
www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/priestley
The new second edition of Practical Object Oriented Design
with UML provides a concise introduction to the design of
object-oriented programs using UML. The book focuses on
the application of UML in the development of software, and
also offers a detailed tutorial introduction to the UML notation
and its application. The book provides the ideal introduction
to UML for undergraduates taking modules in object-oriented
techniques as part of a Computer Science or Software
Engineering degree programme. the exercises will be available
to students.
CONTENTS
Part 1: Introduction to object-oriented design: 1 Introduction to UML. 2 Modelling
with objects. 3 Software development processes. Part 2: Case study: Restaurant
Booking System: 4 Restaurant system: use case model. 5 Restaurant system:
analysis. 6 Restaurant system: design. 7 Restaurant system: implementation.
Part 3: UML Tutorial: 8 Class and object diagrams. 9 Interaction diagrams. 10
Statecharts and activity diagrams. 11 Constraints and OCL. 12 Implementation
models. Part 4: Object-oriented design in practice: 13 Code generation and reverse
engineering. 14 Principles and patterns. Appendices: Reference material. A: UML
notation reference. B: OCL reference. C: A use case template. References and
Further Reading. Index
UML
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF GUIDE TO UML
Second Edition
by Simon Bennett, John Skelton and Ken Lunn
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710741-3 / MHID: 0-07-710741-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124771-9 / MHID: 0-07-124771-8 [IE]
Schaum Publication
This book provides a step-by-step guide to the notation and use
of UML, one of the most widely used, object-oriented notation
systems/programming languages in existence. The outline
demonstrates the use of the techniques and notation of UML
through case studies in systems analysis, showing the student
clearly how UML is used in all kinds of practical situations.
This revised edition will discuss the new infrastructure of
the latest UML Version 2.0, and will include new examples,
review questions, and notations.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
FEATURES
• Many solved examples and exercises
Software Project Management
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Fourth Edition
By Bob Hughes, and Mike Cotterell
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-710989-9 / MHID: 0-07-710989-9
OLC (Browse http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/hughes)
From its first appearance in 1995, this book has been
consistently well received by tutors and students alike. Now in
its fourth edition, this textbook is highly regarded for providing
a complete introduction to Software Project Management
for both undergraduate and postgraduate students. The new
edition retains its clear, accessible style and comprehensive
coverage, plus the many examples and exercises throughout
the chapters that illustrate the practical application of software
project management principles. Reflecting new developments
in software project management, the fourth edition has been
developed to ensure that the coverage is up-to-date and
contemporary. This includes new and expanded coverage of
topics such as virtual teams and agile methods.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Advances in electronic communication used to support projects
and project teams that are geographically dispersed, including
consideration of the practice of outsourcing software development to
developing countries.
• New and expanded consideration of international standards which
assess the quality of software products and the processes that create
them, including ISO 9126, ISO 14598, and ISO 15504.
• Reflecting the growing interest in agile methods, particularly
extreme programming (XP), the text examines the need for increased
responsiveness to client needs and the improved speed of delivery
that XP can offer.
• In response to reviewer comments and suggestions, material has
been added in Chapter 7 on Goldratt’s critical chain management
technique.
• Coverage of risk has also been extensively revised, taking in
recent research in this area, such as the use of causal mapping.
• Standards such as ISO/IEC 12207 and programme management,
have now been made part of the main text, integrating their coverage
into the chapters where relevant.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1. Introduction to software project management Chapter 2. “Step Wise”
An overview of project planning Chapter 3. Programme management and project
evaluation Chapter 4. Selection of an appropriate project approach Chapter 5.
Software effort estimation Chapter 6. Activity planning Chapter 7. Risk management
Chapter 8. Resource allocation Chapter 9. Monitoring and control Chapter 10.
Managing contracts Chapter 11. Managing people and organizing teams. Chapter
12. Software quality Chapter 13. Small projects Appendix A: Prince 2 Appendix
B: BS6079: 1996. Appendix C: Answer Pointers Further Reading Index
• Complete explanation of UML modelling technique from source
material to diagram notations
• Thorough discussion of new UML 2.0 infrastructure
• 2 extended case studies place UML in its proper context
• Explained answers for all case study problems
57
11/15/06 5:05:36 PM
Computer Science
Internet Literacy
INTERNET LITERACY
Fourth Edition
By Fred T. Hofstetter, University Of Delaware
2006
ISBN-13: 978-0-0-07-321454-2 / MHID: 0-07-321454-X
(with Student CD)
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/dolphin4e
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Dreamweaver coverage in addition to FrontPage and Nvu
• Illustrated timelines detailing the history of the Internet
• Learn how to conduct and correctly document scholarly searches
following APA, MLA and CMS guidelines
FEATURES
• Increased coverage of Internet security to help protect from a wide
range of computer attacks
• Latest information on copyright issues, equity, wireless
technologies, PDAs and media hubs
• Windows and Macintosh compatible textbook with coverage of
iTunes for both
CONTENTS
Introduction. Part One: Understanding The Internet. Chapter 1. Definitions.
Chapter 2. How The Internet Is Changing The World. Part Two: Getting On The
Internet. Chapter 3. Getting Connected. Chapter 4. Surfing The Net. Part Three:
Communicating Over The Internet. Chapter 5. Internet Etiquette (Netiquette).
Chapter. Electronic Mail. Chapter 7. Listserv Mailing Lists. Chapter 8. Usenet
Newsgroups,Web-Based Forums, And Rss Blogs. Chapter 9. Communicating In
Real Time. Chapter 10. Streaming Media And Synchronized Multimedia. Part
Four: Finding Things On The Internet. Chapter 11. Searching For Information.
Chapter 12. Commonly Found Internet File Types. Chapter 13. Downloading From
The Internet. Chapter 14. Bibliographic Style For Citing Internet Resources. Part
Five: Creating Web Pages. Chapter 15. Web Page Creation Strategies. Chapter
16. Web Page Design. Chapter 17. How Html Works. Chapter 18. Creating Your
Web Page Resume. Chapter 19. Putting Images On Web Pages. Chapter 20.
Using Tables And Css For Web Page Layout. Chapter 21. Making A Local Web
Site And A Home Page. Chapter 22. Publishing Files On The World Wide Web.
Part Six: Using Multimedia On The Internet. Chapter 23. How Web Browsers
Do Multimedia. Chapter 24. Audio Recording And Embedding. Part Seven:
Planning For The Future Of The Internet. Chapter 25. Societal Issues. Chapter 26.
Emerging Technology. Chapter 27. How To Keep Up And Stay Secure. Appendix
A: Internet Toolkit For Windows And Macintosh. Appendix B: Progressive Case
Projects. Appendix C: Basic Windows And Macintosh Tutorials.
Multimedia
MULTIMEDIA: MAKING IT WORK
Seventh Edition
by Tay Vaughan
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226451-7 / MHID: 0-07-226451-9
(Osborne Media Title)
Professional Book
Thoroughly updated for new breakthroughs in multimedia
The internationally bestselling Multimedia: Making it Work
has been fully revised and expanded to cover the latest
technological advances in multimedia. You will learn to plan
and manage multimedia projects, from dynamic CD-ROMs and
DVDs to professional websites. Each chapter includes step-bystep instructions, full-color illustrations and screenshots, selfquizzes, and hands-on projects.
CONTENTS
1 What is Multimedia? 2 Introduction to Making Multimedia. 3 Multimedia
Skills. 4 Text. 5 Sound. 6 Images. 7 Animation. 8 Video. 9 Hardware. 10 Basic
Software Tools. 11 Multimedia Authoring Tools. 12 The Internet and How It
Works. 13 Tools for the World Wide Web. 14 Designing for the World Wide
Web. 15 Planning and Costing. 16 Designing and Producing. 17 Content and
Talent. 18 Delivering.
DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT OF INTERACTIVE
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS
by Mohammad Dastbaz, South Bank University
2002 / 350 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-709863-6 / MHID: 0-07-709863-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123003-2 / MHID: 0-07-123003-3 [IE]
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION: CHAPTER 1 What is Multimedia. CHAPTER 2 Multimedia
Hardware. CHAPTER 3 Media Integration and Production Issues. CHAPTER 4
Designing for Usability - Human Factors in the Design of Interactive Multimedia
Systems. CHAPTER 5 Issues in Design & Developments of Interactive Multimedia
Systems (IMS). CHAPTER 6 Evaluation of Interactive Multimedia Systems.
CHAPTER 7 The WWW as a Hypermedia Environment.a PC vendor. CHAPTER
8 Multimedia as a developing Technology. The final chapter that will give a brief
insight into the development of the Multimedia technology, including Mobile
multimedia.
PRINCIPLES OF INTERACTIVE MULTIMEDIA
by Elsom-Cook
2001 / 350 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-709610-6 / MHID: 0-07-709610-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120219-0 / MHID: 0-07-120219-6 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: What is interactive multimedia? Chapter 2: Communicative interaction.
Chapter 3: Knowledge. Chapter 4: Understanding users. Chapter 5: Interaction
and HCI. Chapter 6: Semiotics. Chapter 7: Text as a medium. Chapter 8: Sound.
Chapter 9: Still pictures. Chapter 10: Moving images. Chapter 11: Stakeholders
and teamworking. Chapter 12: Product design processes. Chapter 13: Project
design and management. Chapter 14: Future trends.
58
11/15/06 5:05:36 PM
Computer Science
MULTIMEDIA LITERACY
Third Edition
by Fred T Hofstetter, University of Delaware
2001 / 576 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125087-0 / MHID: 0-07-125087-5
[IE with CD-ROM)
http://www.mhhe.com/cit/hofstetter/multi3e
CONTENTS
1. Understanding Multimedia. 2. Survey of Multimedia Applications. 3. Selecting
Multimedia Hardware. 4. Looking into the Future of Multimedia. 5. Multimedia
Tools and Techniques. 6. Creating a Simple Multimedia Application. 7. More
Multimedia Tools and Techniques. 8. Creating Advanced Multimedia Applications.
9. Distributing Multimedia Applications.
Coding and Information Theory
Professional References
E-COMMERCE: The Cutting Edge of Business
Second Edition
by KK Bajaj and Debjani Nag
2005 / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-058556-0 / MHID: 0-07-058556-3
Professional Book
E-Commerce has unleashed a new revolution, totally
transforming traditional commerce and trade. As E-Commerce
refers to the paperless exchange of business information using
Electronic Data Interchange (EDI), electronic funds transfer
and other network-based technologies, companies have to
look at integrating their backend and front office processes and
activities. This book, written by experts, is a first-of-its-kind.
It presents the technology and non-technology aspects of ecommerce and takes it to a level that gives a clear understanding
of the basic building blocks for its implementation. The book
is extensively illustrated and contains data and documents
of importance, the UN/EDIFACT message directory, UN EDI
Interchange Agreement and the IT Action Plan which seeks
to promote the use of electronic commerce in India in a big
way.
INFORMATION THEORY, CODING AND
CRYPTOGRAPHY
by Ranjan Bose, Indian Institute of Technology, Delhi
2002 / 288 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-048297-5 / MHID: 0-07-048297-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123133-6 / MHID: 0-07-123133-1 [IE]
http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/digital_solutions/bose/
CONTENTS
Part I: Information Theory and Source Coding: 1. Source Coding. 2. Channel
Capacity andCoding. Part II : Error Control Coding (Channel Coding): 3.
Linear Block Codes for Error Correction. 4. Cyclic Codes. 5. Bose-Chaudhuri
Hocquenghem (BCH) Codes. 6. Convolutional Codes. 7. Trellis Coded Modulation
(TCM). Part III : Coding for Secure Communications: 8. Cryptography. Index
WIRELESS SECURITY
Models, Threats, and Solutions
by Randall Nichols, President, COMSEC Solutions, and Panos Lekkas
2002 / 657 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-138038-6 / MHID: 0-07-138038-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120707-2 / MHID: 0-07-120707-4 [IE]
Professional Book
CONTENTS
Chapter1 Why is Wireless Different? Chapter 2 Wireless Information Warfare.
Chapter 3 Telephone System Vulnerabilities. Chapter 4 Satellite Communications.
Chapter 5 Cryptographic Security. Chapter 6 Speech Cryptology. Chapter 7 The
Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). Chapter 8 Wireless Application Protocol
(WAP). Chapter 9 Wireless Transport Layer Security (WTLS). Chapter 10 Bluetooth.
Chapter 11 Voice Over Internet Protocol. Chapter 12 Hardware Perspectives
for End-to-End Security (E2E) in Wireless Applications. Chapter 13 Optimizing
Wireless Security with FPGAs and ASICs. Bibliography. Index
59
11/15/06 5:05:37 PM
Computer Science
ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS
Second Edition
by Daniel Tabak, George Madison University
1995 / 529 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113715-7 / MHID: 0-07-113715-7 [IE]
Professional Book
CONTENTS
Introduction. General Structure of Micro-processor. Microprocessor Architecture.
Memory Hierarchy. Pipelining. Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC) Principles.
The Intelx86 Family. The Pentium. The i486 and the i386 Microprocessors. The
Motorola M68000 Family. The MC680x0 Architecture. The MC68060 and
MC68040. Earlier MC68000 Family Processors. Advanced RISC Micro-processor.
The Power PC Family. The Sun SPARC Family. The MIPS Rx000 Family. The
Intel i860 Family. The Motorola M88000 Family. The HP Precision Architecture
(PA) Family. System Development. System Comparison. Concluding Comments
Operating Systems
SURVEY OF OPERATING SYSTEMS
Second Edition
by Charles Holcombe and Jane Holcombe
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225773-1 / MHID: 0-07-225773-3
Professional Book
This book will teach the basic functions of an operating system,
such as the graphical user interface, memory management,
device management, and file management. It also explains
how to install, configure, and troubleshoot each of the major
microcomputer operating systems, including DOS, Windows,
Macintosh, UNIX, and, Linux, as well as explain the purpose
of operating systems in different hardware environments, such
as microcomputers and networks.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Surveys the major operating systems, including DOS, Windows
NT/2000/XP, Mac OS9/OSX, and Linux. Teaches students how to
install, configure, and troubleshoot operating systems.
• Covers objectives of A+ Operating Systems Technologies exam.
• More DOS: Expanded coverage of DOS commands.
• Networking: Expanded coverage of networking and network
operating systems including coverage of Windows Server 2003.
• Mac & Linux: Updated for new versions of Macintosh and Linux.
• A richly illustrated, four-color instructional design includes case
studies and step-by-step tutorials put concepts in real-world context.
End of the Chapter lab exercises, questions, and review sections
reinforce key concepts.
• Student CD: Book comes with latest version of Red Hat Linux.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction to Desktop Operating Systems Chapter 2: Disk Operating
system (DOS) Chapter 3: Windows NT 4.0 Workstation Chapter 4: Windows 2000
Professional Chapter 5: Windows XP Professional Chapter 6: The MS Windows
Desktop Chapter 7: Managing Local Security in Windows Chapter 8: Windows
Under the Hood Chapter 9: Network Server Operating Systems Chapter 10:
The Client Side of Networking Chapter 11: Linux on the Desktop Chapter 12:
Macintosh OS X Appendix: Answers to the Cross Check Exercises. Glossary Bonus
Chapter available in the Instructor’s Resource Kit: Windows 98
COMPLIMENTARY
COPIES
60
11/15/06 5:05:38 PM
2007-2008 NEW CIT-Application Software Titles
Contents
Word Brief...................................................................... 66
Word Complete .............................................................. 67
Word Intro...................................................................... 66
Access Brief .................................................................... 70
Access Complete ............................................................ 70
Access Intro .................................................................... 70
Excel Brief ...................................................................... 67
Excel Complete .............................................................. 68
Excel Intro ...................................................................... 68
Multimedia ..................................................................... 76
CERTIFICATION:
Oracle - Database ........................................................... 84
Oracle - SQL .................................................................. 83
Office Complete ............................................................. 64
Office Intro ..................................................................... 63
Other Databases ............................................................. 71
Contents
61-86_CIT-Appication.indd 61
61
11/15/06 5:08:34 PM
2007-2008 NEW CIT-Application Software Titles
2007 New Titles

2008 New Titles
BATES
Principles of Voice & Data Communications...........79

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225732-8 / MHID: 0-07-225732-6

BRADLEY
Basic.Net, 3e ...........................................................73
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351718-6 / MHID: 0-07-351718-6

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351717-9 / MHID: 0-07-351717-8

GILSTER
Fundamentals of Wireless Networking ....................80
SCHOU
COULTHARD
Advantage Series: Microsoft Office 2007 ................64
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351922-7 / MHID: 0-07-351922-7

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225668-0 / MHID: 0-07-225668-0

BRADLEY
Programming in Visual C# 2005, 2e ........................72
GRAVES
Microsoft Powerpoint 2007: A Professional
Approach.................................................................72
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351918-0 / MHID: 0-07-351918-9

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225524-9 / MHID: 0-07-225524-2
HINKLE
Microsoft Word 2007: A Professional Approach .....67
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351919-7 / MHID: 0-07-351919-7

JUAREZ
Microsoft Access 2007: A Professional Approach.....70
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351920-3 / MHID: 0-07-351920-0

O'LEARY
O'Leary Series: Microsoft Office 2007 ....................64
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351916-6 / MHID: 0-07-351916-2

O'LEARY
O'Leary Series: Microsoft Office Access 2007
Brief ........................................................................70
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329454-4 / MHID: 0-07-329454-3

O'LEARY
Brief ........................................................................67
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329451-3 / MHID: 0-07-329451-9

O'LEARY
Introduction ............................................................68
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329452-0 / MHID: 0-07-329452-7

O'LEARY
Brief ........................................................................66
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329449-0 / MHID: 0-07-329449-7

O'LEARY
Introductory ............................................................66
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329450-6 / MHID: 0-07-329450-0

STEWART
Microsoft Excel 2007: A Professional Approach ......68
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351921-0 / MHID: 0-07-351921-9
62
62
2006-2007 New Titles
11/15/06 5:08:35 PM
CIT-Application
Software
2007-2008 NEW CIT-Application
Software Titles
Office Intro
I-SERIES: MICROSOFT OFFICE XP, VOL 1
ENHANCED
by Stephen Haag, University of Denver
2003
ISBN-13:978-0-07-292396-4 / MHID: 0-07-292396-2
(with Student CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113030-1 / MHID: 0-07-113030-6 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/i-series
CONTENTS
Computing Concepts: The Basics. Windows Basics. Common MS Office XP
Features. Internet Essentials:
Word:
Chapter 1: Working with a Document. Session 1.1 Starting Word. Session 1.2
Working with Text and Creating a Document. Session 1.3 Filing Documents.
Session 1.4 Working with an Existing Document. Chapter 2: Formatting and Editing
a Document. Session 2.1 Formatting Text. Session 2.2 Editing a Document. Session
2.3 Formatting a Document. Chapter 3: Formatting Longer Documents. Session
3.1 Formatting Text. Session 3.2 Formatting a Document. Session 3.3 Applying
Columns to Existing Text. Chapter 4: Using Tables and Graphics. Session 4.1
Tables. Session 4.2 Using Graphics.
Excel:
Chapter 1: Creating Worksheets for Decision Makers. Session 1.1 Getting Started.
Session 1.2 Entering Data, Saving Workbooks, and Printing Worksheets. Chapter
2: Planning and Creating a Worksheet. Session 2.1 Writing Formulas, Using
Functions and Copying and Moving Cell Contents. Session 2.2 Formatting Cells,
Print Setup, and Printing. Chapter 3 Formatting a Worksheet. Session 3.1 Aligning
Data and Applying Character Formats. Session 3.2 Advanced Formatting. Chapter
4: Creating Charts. Session 4.1 Creating an Excel Chart. Session 4.2 Modifying
and Improving a Chart.
Access:
Chapter 1: Understanding Relational Databases. Session 1.1 Introducing Relational
Databases. Session 1.2 Introducing Microsoft Access. Chapter 2: Maintaining
Your Database. Chapter Case. Session 2.1 Maintaining Access Data. Session 2.2
Designing and Building a Database. Chapter 3: Introducing Queries, Filters, Forms,
and Reports. Session 3.1 Selecting and Organizing Data. Session 3.2 Selecting
and Calculating with Queries. Session 3.3 Building Simple Forms and Reports.
Chapter 4: Compound Queries and Database Utilities. Session 4.1 Using Queries
to Analyze Data. Session 4.2 Modifying Table Definitions. Session 4.2 Repairing,
Backing Up, and Converting a Database.
Powerpoint:
Chapter 1: Pre sen ta tion Basics. Session 1.1 In tro duc tion to Presentation
Graphics. Session 1.2 Creating a New Presentation. Chapter 2: Organizing
Your Presentation. Session 2.1 Printing. Session 2.2 Outlining Ideas. Chapter 3:
Refining Your Presentation. Session 3.1 Adding and Modifying Objects. Session
3.2 Standardizing Presentations. Chapter 4: Enhancing Your Presentation with
Graphics. Chapter Case. Session 4.1 Effectively Using Art. Session 4.2 Adding
Other Graphic Elements
ADVANTAGE SERIES:
OFFICE XP VOL 1
by Sarah Hutchinson-Clifford and Glen Coulthard
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-288228-5 / MHID: 0-07-288228-X
(with Student Data File CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112217-7 / MHID: 0-07-112217-6 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/cit/advantage2002
CONTENTS
Word 2002: Creating a Document. Modifying a Document. Enhancing a
Document’s Appearance. Printing and Web Publishing. Excel 2002: Creating
a Worksheet. Modifying a Worksheet. Formatting and Printing. Analyzing Your
Data. Access 2002: Working with Access. Creating a Database. Organizing and
Retrieving Data. Presenting and Managing Data. PowerPoint 2002: Creating a
Presentation. Modifying and Running a Presentation. Adding Graphics. Integrating
and Extending Microsoft Office XP. Integrating Word and Excel. Performing More
Integration Tasks. Extending MS Office to the Web
ADVANTAGE SERIES:
OFFICE XP, VOLUME II
2002 / 988 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247263-9 / MHID: 0-07-247263-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112212-2 / MHID: 0-07-112212-5 [IE]
CONTENTS
Word 2002: Chapter 5: Working with Tables and Columns. Chapter 6: Adding
Graphics. Chapter 7: Preparing Mailings. Chapter 8: Working with Other Users
and Programs. PowerPoint 2002: Chapter 4: Adding Tables, Animation, and
More. Chapter 5: Preparing Presentations for Delivery. Chapter 6: Working with
Other Users and Programs. Excel 2002: Chapter 5: Presenting Your Data. Chapter
6: Performing Calculations. Chapter 7: Managing Worksheets and Workbooks.
Chapter 8: Managing Lists. Access 2002: Chapter 5: Working with Tables. Chapter
6: Creating Select Queries. Chapter 7: Creating Advanced Queries. Chapter 8:
Creating Forms, Reports, and Pages
INTERACTIVE COMPUTING SERIES:
OFFICE XP VOLUME I
by Kenneth Laudon, New York University
2002 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247261-5 / MHID: 0-07-247261-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113077-6 / MHID: 0-07-113077-2 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/interactive
CONTENTS
Word 2002: Introduction to Word / Editing Documents / Advanced Editing /
Tables and Charts Excel 2002: Introduction to Spreadsheet Software / Manipulating
Data in a Worksheet / Formatting Worksheet Elements / Inserting Objects and
Charts Access 2002: Introduction to Databases / Creating Tables and Queries /
Creating Forms / Creating Reports PowerPoint 2002: Introduction to PowerPoint
/ Designing Your Presentation / Developing Your Presentation / Strenghthening
Your Presentation
63
11/15/06 5:08:35 PM
CIT-Application Software
Office Complete
NEW
ADVANTAGE SERIES:
MICROSOFT OFFICE 2007
by Glen Coulthard
2008 (April 2007) / Spiral Bound/Comb / 1056 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351922-7 / MHID: 0-07-351922-7
(Details not available at press time)
NEW
O’LEARY SERIES:
By Linda I. O'Leary, Independent
2008 (June 2007) / Spiral Bound/Comb / 1312 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351916-6 / MHID: 0-07-351916-2
ADVANTAGE SERIES:
by Glen Coulthard; Sarah Hutchinson-Clifford; Ann Miller, Columbus
State University; and Pat Graves, Eastern Illinois University
2005 / 1,040 pages / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283444-4 / MHID: 0-07-283444-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121599-2 / MHID: 0-07-121599-9 [IE]
The Advantage Series presents the Feature-Method-Practice
approach to computer software applications to today’s
technology and business students. This series implements an
efficient and effective learning model, which enhances critical
thinking skills and provides students and faculty with complete
application coverage.
FEATURES
• SimNet for Office 2003 Incorporate SimNet for Office 2003 into
your classes! This simulated learning and assessment tool consists of
a Learning Component as well as an Assessment Component, both of
which are based on the MOS (Microsoft Office Specialist) Objectives.
The Learning Component teaches key concepts using a variety of
methods and allows students to practice new skills. The Assessment
Component consists of two pools of questions (one for pre-tests and
one for exams) and also allows instructors to create their own exams.
Go to www.mhhe.com/it/simnetxp for more information about what
makes SimNet for Office 2003 a cutting-edge tool for learning and
assessment.
• Self-Check questions help students test their understanding on an
ongoing basis.
• Modularity: Each chapter section is modular so you can teach
skills in the order you prefer without having to worry about skipping
critical, prerequisite knowledge. Chapter Prerequisites in the
Chapter Overview provide detailed explanation of skills needed to
successfully complete the chapter.
• Business case-based Hands-on Projects with level of difficulty
icons so students can measure their level of comprehension and
work at a pace they are comfortable with.
• Sessions begin with a business case study that introduces an
immediate problem/opportunity. Throughout the session, students
obtain the knowledge and skills necessary to meet the challenges
presented in the case study and the case study problems/exercises at
the end of the session are directly related to the case study.
• In Addition Boxes briefly expose students to advanced topics.
• Advantage Series has double the number of screenshots from
previous editions, which enhances the visual appeal and helps
students successfully complete the hands-on steps
• Advantage Series Website now contains product specific Online
Learning Center with 50% More End Of Chapter content
• MOS (Microsoft Office Specialist) Certified:
• Every Introductory text is MOS Certified at Level 1 (Core Level)
• Every Complete text is MOS Certified at Expert Level Certification.
• Command Summary Table provides a review of chapter content
and helps students to prepare for the MOS exams and to complete
the end-of chapter questions.
• Feature, Method, and Practice Boxes prepare students for each
session exercise within the chapter (indicates that a student is about
to practice a task). “Feature” describes the command, “Method”
shows how to perform the command, and “Practice” asks the student
to try their hand at it.
CONTENTS
MICROSOFT OFFICE WORD 2003:
Chapter 1: Creating a Document. Chapter 2: Modifying a Document. Chapter 3:
Enhancing a Document’s Appearance. Chapter 4: Printing and Web Publishing.
MICROSOFT OFFICE POWERPOINT 2003:
Chapter 1: Creating a Pre sen ta tion. Chapter 2: Modifying and Running
Presentations. Chapter 3: Adding and Editing Graphic Images. Chapter 4: Creating
Tables, Charts and Diagrams.
MICROSOFT OFFICE EXCEL 2003:
Chapter 1: Creating a Worksheet. Chapter 2: Modifying a Worksheet. Chapter 3:
Formatting and Printing. Chapter 4: Analyzing your Data.
MICROSOFT OFFICE ACCESS 2003:
Chapter 1: Working with Access. Chapter 2: Creating a Database. Chapter 3:
Organizing and Retrieving Data. Chapter 4: Presenting and Managing Data.
INTEGRATING & EXTENDING MICRO-SOFT OFFICE 2003:
Chapter 1: Integrating Word and Excel. Chapter 2: Performing More Integration
Tasks. Chapter 3: Extending Microsoft Office to the Web.
I-SERIES:
MICROSOFT OFFICE 2003, VOLUME I
by Stephen Haag, University of Denver; James T Perry, University
of San Diego; Merrill Wells, University of Denver; Amy Phillips,
University of Denver and Paige Baltzan, University of Denver
2005 / 1, 096 pages / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283048-4 / MHID: 0-07-283048-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121610-4 / MHID: 0-07-121610-3 [IE]
FEATURES
• www.mhhe.com/i-series features Inform-ation Center: Sample
Chapter, Table of Contents, About the Authors, Ask the Author,
Feature Summary, Instructor’s Resources, MOS Guide, links to
PageOut, Primis, Supersite, Course Management Tools, & Digital
Solutions Site. Student Center: Did You Know, Life-Long Learning,
Data Files, The Buzz in IT, Purchasing, Cool Web Sites, I-Witness,
Ask the Author. Instructor Center/Downloads: Instructor’s Manual,
PowerPoint, Text Figures, Crossword.
CONTENTS
Word 2003:
Chapter 1: Working With Word 2004: Session 1.1: All About Word. Session
1.2: Creating and Working with Documents. Session 1.3: Saving Documents
and Exiting Word. Chapter 2: Editing and Formatting Documents: Session 2.1:
Editing Your Documents. Session 2.2: Formatting Documents and Text. Session
2.3: Formatting Paragraphs. Chapter 3: Advanced Formatting Options: Session
3.1: Advanced Formatting Tips and Techniques. Session 3.2: Using Templates.
Session 3.3: Creating Reports. Chapter 4: Graphics and Tables: Session 4.1:
64
11/15/06 5:08:36 PM
Working With Graphics. Session 4.2: Creating Tables in Your Document. Session
4.3: Advanced Table Features.
Excel 2003:
Chapter 1 Creating Worksheets for Decision Makers: Session 1.2 Getting
Started. Session 1.2 Entering Data, Saving Workbooks, and Printing Worksheets.
Chapter 2 Planning and Creating a Worksheet: Session 2.1 Writing Formulas,
Using Functions, and Copying and Moving Cell Contents. Session 2.2 Printing
and Documenting a Worksheet. Chapter 3 Formatting a Worksheet: Session 3.1
Aligning Data and Applying Character Formats. Session 3.2 Advanced Formatting.
Chapter 4 Creating Charts: Session 4.1 Creating an Excel Chart. Session 4.2
Modifying and Improving a Chart.
Access 2003:
Chapter 1: Understanding Relational Data-bases: Session 1.1 Introducing
Relational Databases. Session 1.2 Introducing Microsoft Access. Chapter 2:
Maintaining Your Database: Session 2.1 Maintaining Access Data. Session 2.2
Designing and Building a Database. Chapter 3: Introducing Queries, Filters,
Forms, and Reports: Session 3.1 Selecting and Organizing Data. Session 3.2
Calculating with Queries and Building Simple Forms and Reports. Chapter 4:
Compound Queries and Database Utilities: Session 4.1 Using Queries to Analyze
Data. Session 4.2 Modifying Table Definitions.
PowerPoint 2003:
Chapter 1: Presentation Basics: Session 1.1 Introduction to Presentation
Graphics. Session 1.2 Creating a New Presentation. Chapter 2: Organizing
Your Presentation: Session 2.1 Printing. Session 2.2 Outlining Ideas. Chapter 3:
Refining Your Presentation: Session 3.1 Adding and Modifying Objects. Session
3.2 Standardizing Presentations with PowerPoint Templates. Chapter 4: Enhancing
Your Presentation with Graphics: Session 4.1 Effectively Using Art. Session 4.2
Adding Other Graphic Elements
I-SERIES:
MICROSOFT OFFICE 2003, VOLUME II
by Stephen Haag, University of Denver; James T Perry, University
of San Diego; Merrill Wells, University of Denver; Amy Phillips,
University of Denver and Paige Baltzan, University of Denver
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283051-4 / MHID: 0-07-283051-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121607-4 / MHID: 0-07-121607-3 [IE]
The I-Series leads the student through clear, error-free, and
unambiguous steps to accomplish tasks that produce a finished
document, work sheet or database table. The approach is not
simply results-oriented; teaching how to accomplish a task is
not enough for complete understanding and mastery. Prior
to introducing steps, the authors discuss why each step is
important and what roll all the steps play in the overall plan
for creating a document, workbook or database. The I-Series
Applications textbooks strongly emphasize that students learn
and master applications skills by being actively engaged by
doing.
FEATURES
• Another Way
• Another Word
• Help Yourself
• End-of-Chapter Level 1
• Task References
• Task Reference Summary
• Making the Grade
• MOS Certification
• Chapter Opening Case
• www.mhhe.com/i-series features Inform-ation Center: Sample
Chapter, Table of Contents, About the Authors, Ask the Author,
Feature Summary, Instructor’s Resources, MOS Guide, links to
PageOut, Primis, Supersite, Course Management Tools, & Digital
Solutions Site. Student Center: Did You Know, Life-Long Learning,
Data Files, The Buzz in IT, Purchasing, Cool Web Sites, I-Witness,
Ask the Author. Instructor Center/Downloads: Instructor’s Manual,
PowerPoint, Text Figures, Crossword.
CONTENTS
Word 2003:
Chapter 5: Desktop Publishing: Session 5.1: Desktop Publishing Creating a
Newsletter. Session 5.2: Working with Columns. Session 5.3: Creating the
Newsletter Layout. Chapter 6: Merging Documents and Object Linking and
Embedding: Session 6.1: Merging Documents. Session 6.2: Merging Other Types
of Data. Session 6.3: Object Linking and Embedding. Chapter 7: Creating Your
Web Page: Session 7.1: Creating Your Web Page. Session 7.2: Formatting Your
Web Page. Session 7.3: Adding Hyperlinks and Saving Your Web Page. Chapter
8: Advanced Report Formatting Techniques: Session 8.1: Creating a Master
Document and Subdocuments. Session 8.2: Working with Master Documents and
Subdocuments. Session 8.3: Numbering Pages, Creating Indexes, and Creating
a Table of Contents.
Excel 2003:
Chapter 5 Exploring Excel’s List Features: Session 5.1 Creating and Using Lists.
Session 5.2 Creating Filters and Subtotals. Session 5.3 Pivot Tables. Chapter 6
Employing Functions: Session 6.1 Using Data Validation, Names and IF and Index
Functions Session 6.2 Using Financial and Date Functions. Chapter 7 Developing
Multiple Worksheet and Workbook Applications: Session 7.1 Working with
Multiple Worksheets. Session 7.2 Working with Multiple Workbooks. Chapter 8
Auditing, Sharing, Protecting, and Publishing Workbooks: Session 8.1 Auditing
a Workbook. Session 8.2 Sharing a Workbook and Tracking Changes. Session
8.3 Protecting and Publishing Workbooks.
Access 2003:
Chapter 5: Customizing Forms and Reports: Session 5.1 Maintaining Data
with Forms. Session 5.2 Creating Complex Reports. Chapter 6: Defining Table
Relationships: Session 6.1 Relating Tables. Session 6.2 Creating Output with
Related Tables. Chapter 7: Validating and Securing Database Data: Session
7.1 Refining Table Design. Session 7.2 Access Database Tools. Chapter 8:
Integrating with Other Applications: Session 8.1 Office Integration. Session 8.2
Web Publication.
PowerPoint 2003:
Chapter 5: Creating a Multimedia Presenta-tion: Session 5.1 Using Animations.
Session 5.2 Using Other Multimedia Components. Chapter 6: Color Schemes
and Drawing: Session 6.1 Choosing a Color Scheme. Session 6.2 Creating
Custom Art. Chapter 7: Internet/Intranet Presentations: Session 7.1 Interactive
Presentations. Session 7.2 Using PowerPoint to Publish Web Pages. Chapter 8:
PowerPoint Power Features: Session 8.1 PowerPoint User Features. Session 8.2
Sharing Presentations
I-SERIES:
MICROSOFT OFFICE XP, VOLUME II
by Stephen Haag, University of Denver and James T Perry, University
of San Diego
2002 / 928 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113031-8 / MHID: 0-07-113031-4 [IE]
CONTENTS
Word. Chapter 5: Advanced Formatting and Techniques. Chapter Case. Session
5.1 Document Format Changes. Session 5.2 Browsing through Your Document.
Session 5.3 Index and Table Of Contents. Chapter 6: Styles and Templates.
Chapter Case. Session 6.1 Styles. Session 6.2 Creating and Modifying Styles.
Chapter 7: Merging Documents. Chapter Case. Session 7.1 Merging Letters.
Session 7.2 Data Options. Chapter 8: Integrating Word. Chapter Case. Session
8.1 Working with Multiple Documents. Session 8.2 Outlining and PowerPoint.
Session 8.3 Formatting and Viewing a Web Page. Excel. Chapter 5 Exploring
Excel’s List Features. Case: Acme Company Employee Data. Session 5.1 Creating
and Sorting a Data List. Session 5.2 Creating Filters and Subtotals. Session 5.3
Pivot Tables. Chapter 6 Common Worksheet Functions. Case: Managing Accounts
Receivable Lists. Session 6.1 Using Popular Statistical Functions. Session 6.2
Using Data Functions and Paste Special. Session 6.3 Using Financial Functions
and Index Functions. Chapter 7 Integrating Excel, Office Objects, and the Web.
Case: TBA. Session 7.1 Linking. Session 7.2 Embedding. Session 7.3 Mining the
Web. Chapter 8 Developing Multiple Worksheet and Workbook Applications.
Case: TBA. Session 8.1 Working with Multiple Worksheets. Session 8.2 Working
with Multiple Workbooks. Access. Chapter 5: Customizing Forms and Reports.
65
11/15/06 5:08:37 PM
Chapter Case. Session 5.1 Maintaining Data with forms. Session 5.2 Complex
Reports. Chapter 6: Defining Table Relationships. Chapter Case. Session 6.1
Relating Tables. Session 6.2 Creating Output with Related Tables. Chapter
7: Maintaining Databases. Chapter Case. Session 7.1 Refining Table Design.
Session 7.2 Access Database Utilities. Session 7.3 Securing an Access Database.
Chapter 8: Integrating with Other Applications. Chapter Case. Session 8.1 Office
Integration. Session 8.2 Web Publication. Powerpoint. Chapter 5: Creating a
Multimedia Presentation. Chapter Case. Session 5.1 Using Animations. Session 5.2
Using Other Multimedia Components. Session 5.3 Identifying Sources for Media.
Chapter 6: Color Schemes and Drawing. Chapter Case. Session 6.1 Choosing
a Color Scheme. Session 6.2 Creating Custom Art. Chapter 7: Internet/Intranet
Presentations. Chapter Case. Session 7.1 Interactive Presentations. Session 7.2
Using PowerPoint to Publish Web Pages. Chapter 8: PowerPoint Power Features.
Chapter Case. Session 8.1 Sharing Presentations. Session 8.2 Customizing and
Expanding PowerPoint Functionality
O’LEARY SERIES:
WORD 2002, BRIEF
by Timothy J O’Leary, Arizona State University and Linda I O’Leary
2002 / 320 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247233-2 / MHID: 0-07-247233-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112098-2 / MHID: 0-07-112098-X [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/oleary
CONTENTS
MICROSOFT WORD 2002: Overview To Word 2002. Tutorial 1: Creating And
Editing A Document. Tutorial 2: Revising And Refining A Document. Tutorial 3:
Creating Reports And Tables. Working Together: Word And Your Web Browser
Word Intro
INTERACTIVE COMPUTING SERIES:
OFFICE XP VOLUME II
2002 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247187-8 / MHID: 0-07-247187-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113072-1 / MHID: 0-07-113072-1 [IE]
CONTENTS
Word: Advanced Formatting. Using Character Styles and AutoFormat. Merging
Documents. Creating Web Pages and Graphics. Excel: Using Macros. Exploring
Formulas and Functions. Managing Your Workbooks. Working with Data Lists.
Powerpoint: Creating a Custom Presentation. Working with Visual Elements and
Effects. Working with External Objects. Using Advanced Output Options. Access:
Refining Tables and Queries. Advanced Form Design. Advanced Reports and
Integrating with the Web. Using Access Tools
Word Brief
NEW
O’LEARY SERIES:
MICROSOFT OFFICE WORD 2007 BRIEF
by Linda I. O'Leary
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329449-0 / MHID: 0-07-329449-7
NEW
O’LEARY SERIES:
MICROSOFT OFFICE WORD 2007 INTRODUCTORY
by Linda I. O'Leary
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329450-6 / MHID: 0-07-329450-0
I-SERIES:
MICROSOFT WORD 2002, INTRODUCTORY
of San Diego
2002 / 416 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247091-8 / MHID: 0-07-247091-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113033-2 / MHID: 0-07-113033-0 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Working with a Document. Chapter Case. Session 1.1 Starting Word.
Session 1.2 Working with Text and Creating a Document. Session 1.3 Working
with an Existing Document. Chapter 2: Formatting and Editing a Document.
Chapter Case. Session 2.1 Formatting Text. Session 2.2 Editing a Document.
Session 2.3 Formatting a Document. Chapter 3: Formatting Longer Documents.
Chapter Case. Session 3.1 Formatting Text. Session 3.2 Formatting a Document.
Session 3.3 Applying Columns to Existing Text. Chapter 4: Using Tables and
Graphics. Chapter Case. Session 4.1 Tables. Session 4.2 Using Graphics. Chapter
5: Advanced Formatting and Techniques. Chapter Case. Session 5.1 Document
Format Changes. Session 5.2 Browsing through Your Document. Session 5.3
Index and Table Of Contents. Chapter 6: Styles and Templates. Chapter Case.
Session 6.1 Styles. Session 6.2 Creating and Modifying Styles. Chapter 7: Merging
Documents. Chapter Case. Session 7.1 Merging Letters. Session 7.2 Data Options.
Chapter 8: Integrating Word. Chapter Case. Session 8.1 Working with Multiple
Documents. Session 8.2 Outlining and PowerPoint. Session 8.3 Formatting and
Viewing a Web Page
66
11/15/06 5:08:38 PM
ADVANTAGE SERIES:
WORD 2002, INTRODUCTORY
2002 / 408 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247102-1 / MHID: 0-07-247102-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112208-5 / MHID: 0-07-112208-7 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 5: Working with Tables and Columns. Chapter 6: Adding Graphics.
Chapter 7: Preparing Mailings. Chapter 8: Working with Other Users and
Programs
ADVANTAGE SERIES: WORD 2002, COMPLETE
2002 / 624 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247041-3 / MHID: 0-07-247041-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112216-0 / MHID: 0-07-112216-8 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 5: Working with Tables and Columns. Chapter 6: Adding Graphics.
Chapter 7: Preparing Mailings. Chapter 8: Working with Other Users and Programs.
Chapter 9: Preparing Multipage Reports. Chapter 10: Working Smarter. Chapter
11: Developing Applications in Word. Chapter 12: Working with Visual Basic
for Applications
O'LEARY SERIES:
WORD 2002, INTRODUCTORY
O'LEARY SERIES: WORD 2002, COMPLETE
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
2002 / 512 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247234-9 / MHID: 0-07-247234-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112099-9 / MHID: 0-07-112099-8 [IE]
Tutorial 1: Creating And Editing A Document. Tutorial 2: Revising And Refining
A Document. Tutorial 3: Creating Reports And Tables. Working Together: Word
And Your Web Browser. Tutorial 4: Using Advanced Formatting and Desktop
Publishing Features. Tutorial 5: Using Advanced Table Features, Mail Merge, Label
and Envelope Features. Tutorial 6: Using Word 2000’s HTML Editor. Working
Together: Document Collaboration
by Timothy J O’Leary, Arizona State University, Linda I O’Leary,
Independent and Kathryn M Lee, Delaware Valley College
2003 / 848 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112097-5 / MHID: 0-07-112097-1 [IE]
Tutorial 1: Creating And Editing A Document. Tutorial 2: Revising And Refining
A Document. Tutorial 3: Creating Reports And Tables. Working Together: Word
And Your Web Browser. Tutorial 4: Creating a Newsletter. Tutorial 5: Creating
Complex Tables and Merging Documents. Tutorial 6: Creating a Web Site.
Working Together: Linking and Document Collaboration. Tutorial 7: Working
With Long Documents. Tutorial 8: Printed and Interactive Forms. Tutorial 9:
Customizing Word. Working Together: Multilingual Document Collaboration
and NetMeeting
Word Complete
NEW
MICROSOFT WORD 2007: A PROFESSIONAL
APPROACH
By Deborah Hinkle
2008 (June 2007) / Softcover / 1088 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351919-7 / MHID: 0-07-351919-7
Excel Brief
NEW
O'LEARY SERIES:
MICROSOFT OFFICE EXCEL 2007 BRIEF
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329451-3 / MHID: 0-07-329451-9
67
11/15/06 5:08:38 PM
O’LEARY SERIES: EXCEL 2002, BRIEF
by Timothy J O’Leary, Arizona State University- Tempe and Linda I
O’Leary
2002 / 328 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247235-6 / MHID: 0-07-247235-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112356-3 / MHID: 0-07-112356-3 [IE]
CONTENTS
Overview To Excel 2002. Tutorial 1: Creating And Editing A Worksheet. Tutorial
2: Charting Worksheet Data. Tutorial 3: Managing and Analyzing A Workbook.
Working Together: Linking Excel And Word
Excel Intro
ADVANTAGE SERIES: MICROSOFT EXCEL 2002,
INTRODUCTORY EDITION
2002 / 532 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247094-9 / MHID: 0-07-247094-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112362-4 / MHID: 0-07-112362-8 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Creating a Worksheet. Chapter 2: Modifying a Worksheet. Chapter 3:
Formatting and Printing. Chapter 4: Analyzing Your Data. Chapter 5: Presenting
Your Data. Chapter 6: Performing Calculations. Chapter 7: Managing Worksheets
and Workbooks. Chapter 8: Managing Lists
O’LEARY SERIES: EXCEL 2002, INTRODUCTORY
NEW
O’LEARY SERIES:
MICROSOFT OFFICE EXCEL 2007 INTRODUCTION
2008 (April 2007) / Softcover / 576 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329452-0 / MHID: 0-07-329452-7
2002 / 544 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247241-7 / MHID: 0-07-247241-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112358-7 / MHID: 0-07-112358-X [IE]
CONTENTS
Tutorial 1: Creating And Editing A Worksheet. Tutorial 2: Charting Worksheet
Data. Tutorial 3: Managing and Analyzing A Workbook. Working Together:
Linking, Embedding and E-mailing. Tutorial 4: Working with Multiple Workbooks,
Using Solver and Scenarios. Tutorial 5: Creating an On-Screen Form. Tutorial
6: Create and Use a List. Working Together: Sharing Data Between Apps:
Embedding
Excel Complete
I-SERIES: MICROSOFT EXCEL 2002, INTRODUCTORY
by Stephen Haag, University of Denver and James T. Perry,
University of San Diego
2002 / 368 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247032-1 / MHID: 0-07-247032-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113029-5 / MHID: 0-07-113029-2 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Decision-Making with Worksheets. Case: Rugby Fundraising with Scrip.
Session 1.1 Introduction to Excel. Session 1.2 Essentials. Chapter 2 Planning and
Creating a Worksheet. Case: Loan Analysis. Session 2.1 Writing Formulas and
Copying Cell Contents. Session 2.2 Formatting Cells, Print Setup, and Printing.
Chapter 3 Formatting a Worksheet. Case: TBA. Session 3.1 Editing Cells, Adding
and Deleting Rows and Columns. Session 3.2 Formatting Cells. Chapter 4 Creating
Charts. Case: Tracking Real Estate Sales. Session 4.1Creating a Chart. Session
4.2 Enhancing a Chart. Chapter 5 Exploring Excel's List Features. Case: Acme
Company Employee Data. Session 5.1 Creating and Sorting a Data List. Session
5.2 Creating Filters and Subtotals. Session 5.3 Pivot Tables. Chapter 6 Common
Worksheet Functions. Case: Managing Accounts Receivable Lists. Session 6.1
Using Popular Statistical Functions. Session 6.2 Using Data Functions and Paste
Special. Session 6.3 Using Financial Functions and Index Functions. Chapter 7
Integrating Excel, Office Objects, and the Web. Case: TBA. Session 7.1 Linking.
Session 7.2 Embedding. Session 7.3 Mining the Web. Chapter 8 Developing
Multiple Worksheet and Workbook Applications. Case: TBA. Session 8.1 Working
with Multiple Worksheets. Session 8.2 Working with Multiple Workbooks
NEW
MICROSOFT EXCEL 2007: A PROFESSIONAL
APPROACH
By Kathleen Stewart
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351921-0 / MHID: 0-07-351921-9
68
11/15/06 5:08:39 PM
I-SERIES: MICROSOFT EXCEL 2002, COMPLETE
2002 / 528 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-245906-7 / MHID: 0-07-245906-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112345-7 / MHID: 0-07-112345-8 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Decision-Making with Worksheets. Case: Rugby Fundraising with Scrip.
Session 1.1 Introduction to Excel. Session 1.2 Essentials. Chapter 2 Planning and
Creating a Worksheet. Case: Loan Analysis. Session 2.1 Writing Formulas and
Copying Cell Contents. Session 2.2 Formatting Cells, Print Setup, and Printing.
Chapter 3 Formatting a Worksheet. Case: TBA. Session 3.1 Editing Cells, Adding
and Deleting Rows and Columns. Session 3.2 Formatting Cells. Chapter 4 Creating
Charts. Case: Tracking Real Estate Sales. Session 4.1Creating a Chart. Session
4.2 Enhancing a Chart. Chapter 5 Exploring Excel's List Features. Case: Acme
Company Employee Data. Session 5.1 Creating and Sorting a Data List. Session
5.2 Creating Filters and Subtotals. Session 5.3 Pivot Tables. Chapter 6 Common
Worksheet Functions. Case: Managing Accounts Receivable Lists. Session 6.1
Using Popular Statistical Functions. Session 6.2 Using Data Functions and Paste
Special. Session 6.3 Using Financial Functions and Index Functions. Chapter 7
Integrating Excel, Office Objects, and the Web. Case: TBA. Session 7.1 Linking.
Session 7.2 Embedding. Session 7.3 Mining the Web. Chapter 8 Developing
Multiple Worksheet and Workbook Applications. Case: TBA. Session 8.1 Working
with Multiple Worksheets. Session 8.2 Working with Multiple Workbooks. Chapter
9 Using Data Tables and Scenarios. Case: TBA. Session 9.1 Data Tables. Session 9.2
Scenarios. Chapter 10 Using the Solver. Case: TBA. Session 10.1 Solving Problems.
Session 10.2 Solving More Complex Problems. Chapter 11 Importing Data. Case:
TBA. Session 11.1 Importing Text and Database Files. Session 11.2 Using Queries
to Import Data from External Sources. Session 11.3 Querying the Web. Chapter
12 Automating Applications with Visual Basic. Case: TBA. Session 12.1 Building
Data Management Macro Instructions. Session 12.2 Custom Functions. Session
12.3 Introducing Visual Basic
Other Spreadsheets
QUICKEN 2007: THE OFFICIAL GUIDE
by Maria Langer
2007 (August 2006) / Softcover / 496 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226380-0 / MHID: 0-07-226380-6
Professional Book
The only official guide to Quicken--the #1 personal finance
software on the market. Fully endorsed and reviewed by Inuit,
makers of Quicken, Quicken 2007:The Official Guide offers
the time- and money-saving techniques you need to organize
and manage your personal finances and master all of the new
and improved features of the software. You will discover proven
tips for managing money and investments--including spending,
savings, budgets, banking, and more. The book explains how
to track income and expenses, automate bill-pay, reconcile
checking, savings, and credit card accounts, create reports,
simplify filing systems--and even save on taxes. Financial
calculators, capital gains snapshots, investment tracker tools,
and online resources are also covered. The chapters closely
follow the software to help you find information quickly and
easily.
CONTENTS
PART I: Quicken Setup and Basics. Ch. 1: Getting to Know Quicken. Ch. 2: Setting
Up Quicken for the First Time. Ch. 3: Setting Up Accounts and Categories. Ch.
4: Going Online with Quicken and Quicken.com. PART II: Managing Your Bank
and Credit Card Accounts. Ch. 5: Recording Bank and Credit Card Transactions.
Ch. 6: Online Banking and Billing. PART III: Tracking Your Investments. Ch.
7: Investment Tracking Basics. Ch. 8: Tracking Investments Online. Ch. 9:
Maximizing Investment Returns. PART IV: Managing Your Property and Loans.
Ch. 10: Monitoring Assets and Loans. Ch. 11: Minimizing Home, Car, and
Insurance Expenses. PART V: Working with Quicken Data. Ch. 12: Automating
Quicken Transactions and Tasks. Ch. 13: Reconciling Accounts. Ch. 14: Creating
Reports and Graphs. PART VI: Saving Money and Achieving Your Goals. Ch. 15:
Minimizing Your Taxes with Quicken. Ch. 16: Using Quicken to Plan for the
Future . Ch. 17: Saving Money with Quicken. PART VII. Appendixes. Appendix
A: Managing Quicken Files. Appendix B: Customizing Quicken. Appendix C:
Using the Quicken Premier Investment Tools.
O’LEARY SERIES: EXCEL 2002, COMPLETE
by Timothy J O’Leary, Arizona State University - Tempe and Linda I
O’Leary
2003 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247166-3 / MHID: 0-07-247166-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112357-0 / MHID: 0-07-112357-1 [IE]
CONTENTS
Tutorial 1: Creating And Editing A Worksheet. Tutorial 2: Charting Worksheet Data.
Tutorial 3: Managing and Analyzing A Workbook. Working Together: Linking,
Embedding and E-mailing. Tutorial 4: Working with Multiple Workbooks, Using
Solver and Scenarios. Tutorial 5: Creating an On-Screen Form. Tutorial 6: Create
and Use a List. Working Together: Sharing Data Between Apps: Embedding.
Remaining Chapters TBA
QUICKEN 2007 QUICKSTEPS
by Marty Matthews, and Bobbi Sandberg
2007 (October 2006) / Softcover / 240 pgs
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226388-6 / MHID: 0-07-226388-1
Professional Book
QuickSteps on Quicken-a full-color, step-by-step guide to the
number-one-selling personal finance software program
With Quicken 2007 QuickSteps, you will find it easy to
manage personal and family finances. Nearly every page of
this user-friendly guide features screenshots with numbered
callouts that show and explain how to use all the new and
improved features available in Quicken 2007. You will learn
to balance checkbooks, pay bills, master online banking, track
investments, handle budgeting, manage taxes, create reports,
and much more. Each chapter's "how to" list and color-coded
tabs make it easy for you to flip straight to specific tasks and get
to the information you need right away. Plus, helpful sidebars
throughout provide alternative ways of doing things and further
explanations.
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION. Part I: Handle Cash Flow with Quicken. Chapter 1: Stepping
into Quicken. Chapter 2: Working with the Register. Chapter 3: Using Online
Features. Chapter 4: Using Reports and Analysis. Part II: Extending the Use of
Quicken. Chapter 5: Working with Portfolios. Chapter 6: Tracking Investments
Chapter 7: Planning. Chapter 8: Budgeting, Forecasting, Property and Debt.
Chapter 9: Handling Taxes. Chatper 10: Working with Files
69
11/15/06 5:08:40 PM
Access Brief
O'LEARY SERIES: ACCESS 2002, INTRODUCTORY
NEW
O'LEARY SERIES:
MICROSOFT OFFICE ACCESS 2007 BRIEF
2008 (May 2007) / Softcover / 384 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329454-4 / MHID: 0-07-329454-3
by Timothy J O’Leary, Arizona State University- Tempe and Linda I
O’Leary
2002 / 520 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247244-8 / MHID: 0-07-247244-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112355-6 / MHID: 0-07-112355-5 [IE]
CONTENTS
Tutorial 1: Creating A Database. Tutorial 2: Modifying A Table And Creating A
Form. Tutorial 3: Analyzing Tables And Creating Reports. Working Together:
Linking Access And Word. Tutorial 4: Enhancing Tables, Using Advanced Queries
and Creating a Custom Form. Tutorial 5: Creating Custom Reports and Mailing
Labels, Tutorial 6: Access 2000 and the Web. Working Together: Importing,
Exporting and Mail Merge
Access Complete
O’LEARY SERIES: ACCESS 2002, BRIEF
by Timothy J O’Leary, Arizona State University, Tempe and Linda I
O’Leary, Independent
2002 / 296 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247243-1 / MHID: 0-07-247243-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112354-9 / MHID: 0-07-112354-7 [IE]
CONTENTS
Overview To Access 2002. Tutorial 1: Creating A Database. Tutorial 2: Modifying
A Table And Creating A Form. Tutorial 3: Analyzing Tables And Creating Reports.
Working Together: Linking Access And Word
NEW
MICROSOFT ACCESS 2007: A PROFESSIONAL
APPROACH
By Jon Juarez and John Carter
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351920-3 / MHID: 0-07-351920-0
Access Intro
I-SERIES: MICROSOFT ACCESS 2002, COMPLETE
ADVANTAGE SERIES: ACCESS 2002,
INTRODUCTORY
2002 / 416 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247092-5 / MHID: 0-07-247092-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112361-7 / MHID: 0-07-112361-X [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 5: Working with Tables. Chapter 6: Creating Select Queries. Chapter 7:
Creating Advanced Queries. Chapter 8: Creating Forms, Reports, and Pages
2003 / 576 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-245904-3 / MHID: 0-07-245904-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113038-7 / MHID: 0-07-113038-1 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Understanding Relational Databases. Chapter Case. Session 1.1
Introducing Relational Databases. Session 1.2 Introducing Microsoft Access.
Chapter 2: Maintaining Your Database. Chapter Case. Session 2.1 Maintaining
Access Data. Session 2.2 Designing and Building Your Database. Session 2.3
Modifying Table Definitions. Chapter 3: Introducing Access Output. Chapter
Case. Session 3.1 Selecting and Organizing Data. Session 3.2 Building Simple
Forms and Reports. Chapter 4: Compound Queries and Database Utilities.
Chapter Case. Session 4.1 Using Queries to Analyze Data. Session 4.2 Repairing
and Backing Up a Database. Chapter 5: Customizing Forms and Reports.
Chapter Case. Session 5.1 Maintaining Data with forms. Session 5.2 Complex
Reports. Chapter 6: Defining Table Relationships. Chapter Case. Session 6.1
Relating Tables. Session 6.2 Creating Output with Related Tables. Chapter
7: Maintaining Databases. Chapter Case. Session 7.1 Refining Table Design.
Session 7.2 Access Database Utilities. Session 7.3 Securing an Access Database.
Chapter 8: Integrating with Other Applications. Chapter Case. Session 8.1 Office
Integration. Session 8.2 Web Publication. Chapter 9: More on Queries, Tables,
and Forms. Chapter Case. Session 9.1 Designing Advanced Queries. Session 9.2
Implementing Advanced Table Features. Session 9.3 Employing Advanced Form
Features. Chapter 10: Automating Database Tasks. Chapter Case. Session 10.1
Using Macros to Store Keystrokes. Session 10.2 Creating a User Interface with
Switchboards. Chapter 11: Using Visual Basic for Applications. Chapter Case.
70
11/15/06 5:08:40 PM
Session 11.1 Understanding VBA Procedures. Session 11.2 Understanding VBA
Functions. Chapter 12: Coordinating with XML and SQL Server . Chapter Case.
Session 12.1 XML. Session 12.2 SQL Server
MICROSOFT SQL SERVER 2005 REPORTING
SERVICES 2005
Second Edition
By Brian Larson
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226239-1 / MHID: 0-07-226239-7
ADVANTAGE SERIES: ACCESS 2002, COMPLETE
2002 / 816 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247039-0 / MHID: 0-07-247039-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112210-8 / MHID: 0-07-112210-9 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 5: Working with Tables. Chapter 6: Creating Select Queries. Chapter
7: Creating Advanced Queries. Chapter 8: Creating Forms, Reports, and Pages.
Chapter 9: Designing Complex Forms, Reports, and Pages. Chapter 10: Automating
and Extending Access. Chapter 11: Introducing Visual Basic for Applications.
Chapter 12: Developing Applications Using Access
Other Databases
SAP R/3 HANDBOOK
Third Edition
by Jose Antonio Hernandez, Franklin Martinez, and James Keogh
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225716-8 / MHID: 0-07-225716-4
Professional Book
Take full advantage of the power, flexibility, and adaptability of
SAP -- the premier solution for service-based, enterprise-scale
business processes. SAP R/3 Handbook, Third Edition offers
complete coverage of installation, implementation, operation,
and support. You'll get full details on all the components,
including SAP Web Application Server, SAP NetWeaver, the
ABAP workbench, and more. Administration, security, and
integration with other systems is also covered.
ESSENTIAL SKILLS FOR SAP TECHNICAL CONSULTANTS
• Get an overview of SAP business, integration, and collaboration
solutions
• Understand SAP Web Application Server architecture
• Get details on the SAP NetWeaver platform
• Access SAP systems through the SAP presentation interface
• Use the ABAP workbench development environment
• Handle system administration and implement security
• Manage system-wide changes with the Transport Management
System (TMS)
• Analyze performance and troubleshoot SAP solutions
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: SAP: From SAP R/3 to SAP NetWeaver. Chapter 2: The Architecture
of the SAP Web Application Server. Chapter 3: SAP NetWeaver: An Overview.
Chapter 4: Using SAP Systems. Chapter 5: Upgrading to SAP R/3 Enterprise: The
First Step into SAP NetWeaver. Chapter 6: The Change and Transport System.
Chapter 7: Development Options with SAP Solutions: ABAP Engine. Chapter 8:
User Management and Security in SAP Environments. Chapter 9: Web Application
Server System Management. Chapter 10: Performance and Troubleshooting with
SAP Solutions. Chapter 11: SAP for IT Managers: Implementation, Planning,
Operation, and Support of SAP Systems. INDEX.
Professional Book
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Foreword by Brian Welcker, Group Program Manager for
Reporting Services, Microsoft Corporation.
• Technically reviewed by members of the Microsoft Reporting
Services group.
• Includes 60+ practical, re-usable report and code samples to put
to work immediately.
• Covers SQL Server Reporting Services administration and
implementation and the new Report Builder with 25% more
advanced coverage than in the last edition.
CONTENTS
Part I: Overview. Chapter 1: Introduction. Chapter 2: Installing Reporting Services.
Part II: Report Creation. Chapter 4: Report Wizard. Chapter 5: Building Basic
Reports in Visual Studio. Chapter 6: Adding Graphics. Chapter 7: Intermediate
Reporting. Chapter 8: Advanced Reporting. Chapter 9: Rendering. Chapter 10:
The Report Manager. Chapter 11: Report Delivery. Chapter 12: Customizing and
Extending Reporting Services. Part IV: References. Report Object. Reference. Web
Service Interface Reference. Report Definition Language Reference
Powerpoint Intro
I-SERIES: MICROSOFT POWERPOINT 2002,
INTRODUCTORY
of San Diego
2002 / 416 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247036-9 / MHID: 0-07-247036-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113041-7 / MHID: 0-07-113041-1 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Presentation Basics. Chapter Case. Session 1.1 Introduction to
Presentation Graphics. Session 1.2 Creating a New Presentation. Chapter 2:
Organizing Your Presentation. Chapter Case. Session 2.1 Printing. Session 2.2
Outlining Ideas. Chapter 3: Refining Your Presentation. Chapter Case. Session
3.1 Presentation Design considerations. Session 3.2 Adding and Modifying Text.
Session 3.3 Standardizing Presentations with PowerPoint Templates. Session 3.4
Using the Meeting Minder. Chapter 4: Enhancing Your Presentation with Graphics.
Chapter Case. Session 4.1 Effectively Using Art. Session 4.2 Adding Other Graphic
Elements. Chapter 5: Creating a Multimedia Presentation. Chapter Case. Session
5.1 Using Animations. Session 5.2 Using Other Multimedia Components. Session
5.3 Identifying Sources for Media. Chapter 6: Color Schemes and Drawing. Chapter
Case. Session 6.1 Choosing a Color Scheme. Session 6.2 Creating Custom Art.
Chapter 7: Internet/Intranet Presentations. Chapter Case. Session 7.1 Interactive
Presentations. Session 7.2 Using PowerPoint to Publish Web Pages. Chapter 8:
PowerPoint Power Features. Chapter Case. Session 8.1 Sharing Presentations.
Session 8.2 Customizing and Expanding PowerPoint Functionality
71
11/15/06 5:08:41 PM
Powerpoint Complete
ADVANTAGE SERIES: POWERPOINT 2002,
INTRODUCTORY
2002 / 288 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247050-5 / MHID: 0-07-247050-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112213-9 / MHID: 0-07-112213-3 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Creating a Presentation, Chapter 2: Modifying and Running a
Presentation. Chapter 3: Adding Graphics. Chapter 4: Adding Tables, Animation,
and More. Chapter 5: Preparing Presentations for Delivery. Chapter 6: Working
with Other Users and Programs
INTERACTIVE COMPUTING SERIES: POWERPOINT
2002, INTRODUCTORY
2002 / 288 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247184-7 / MHID: 0-07-247184-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113068-4 / MHID: 0-07-113068-3 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/interactive
CONTENTS
Introduction to PowerPoint. Designing Your Presentation. Developing Your
Presentation. Strenghthening Your Presentation. Creating a Custom Presentation.
Working with Visual Elements and Effect. Working with External Objects. Using
Advanced Output Options
O'LEARY SERIES: POWERPOINT 2002,
INTRODUCTORY
2002 / 424 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247246-2 / MHID: 0-07-247246-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112095-1 / MHID: 0-07-112095-5 [IE]
CONTENTS
Tutorial 1: Creating A Presentation. Tutorial 2: Modifying And Refining A
Presentation. Working Together: Copying And Linking Between Word, Excel, And
PowerPoint. Tutorial 3: Customizing, Editing and Additional Features. Tutorial
4: Creating a Presentation for a Kiosk and the Web. Working Together: Using
PowerPoint 2000 and Word 2000 Together
NEW
MICROSOFT POWERPOINT 2007: A PROFESSIONAL
APPROACH
By Pat R. Graves; Eastern Illinois University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351918-0 / MHID: 0-07-351918-9
Training & Assessment
SIMNET FOR OFFICE 2003 RELEASE 2
STANDARD EDITION
By Triad Interactive
2006
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351641-7 / MHID: 0-07-351641-4
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/cit/simnet
CONTENTS
Access 2003. Computer Concepts. Excel 2003. Office 2003 Integration. Outlook
2003. PowerPoint 2000. Windows 2000. Windows XP Professional. Word 2003.
HTML & Dreamweaver MX 2004.
Programming - Visual Basic
NEW
PROGRAMMING IN VISUAL C# 2005
Second Edition
By Julia Case Bradley, Anita C. Millspaugh; Mt San Antonio College
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351718-6 / MHID: 0-07-351718-6
72
11/15/06 5:08:42 PM
CONTENTS
NEW
ADVANCED PROGRAMMING USING VISUAL
BASIC.NET
Third Edition
by Julia Case Bradley, Mt San Antonio College, and Anita C.
Millspaugh, Mt San Antonio College
2007 (May 2006) / Softcover / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351717-9 / MHID: 0-07-351717-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110295-7 / MHID: 0-07-110295-7 [IE]
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330444-1 / MHID: 0-07-330444-1
(with 180-day trial software)
Chapter 1. Visual Studio .NET. Chapter 2. Building Multitier Applications with
Classes. Chapter 3. Windows Database Applications using ADO.NET. Chapter
4. Windows Database using Related Tables. Chapter 5. Windows Database
Updates. Chapter 6. Web Services. Chapter 7. Web Applications using ASP.NET.
Chapter 8. Web Database Applications. Chapter 9. Database Reports Using Crystal
Reports. Chapter 10. Using Collections and Generics. Chapter 11. Creating User
Controls. Chapter 12. Creating Help Files. Chapter 13. Looking Ahead. Appendix
A. Answers to Feedback Questions. Appendix B. Review of Visual Basic .NET
Concepts. Appendix C. SQL Server Express. Appendix D. SQL Primer. Appendix
E. Tips and Shortcuts for Mastering the Environment.
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/bradleyadv3e
Advanced Programming Using Visual Basic .NET, by bestselling authors Bradley & Millspaugh, maintains the strong
pedagogy that has helped thousands of students learn to
program in Visual Basic. Because it teaches Visual Basic while
incorporating basic concepts of programming, problem solving,
and programming logic, the book has become a favorite of
students and instructors alike. Advanced Programming in
Visual Basic .NET follows the conventions, standards, and
logic introduced in the authors' beginning Visual Basic text.
The third edition incorporates new features in the language
such as generics and Web master pages, while two new icons
in the margins indicate security issues and major language
changes.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The third edition incorporates Visual Basic's all-new components
for database access. Coverage includes stored procedures, the
new Data Sources window, new techniques for connecting to data
sources, and new controls for data binding.
• Services-oriented architecture is presented earlier and used
consistently in subsequent chapters.
• The singleton design pattern is introduced in Chapter 1; other
design patterns are discussed as appropriate, including creating
collections using generics.
• New IDE features are presented, including class diagrams; a
Data Sources window that simplifies setting up the data source for
an application; Smart Tags, which provide quick access to the most
commonly used properties of controls and components; an Exception
Assistant for debugging exceptions; and new Snap Lines in the Form
Designer, which help with the alignment and spacing of controls.
• The new built-in Web server eliminates the need to use IIS for
Web development, greatly simplifying the building of portable Web
applications and allowing database access from Web apps.
FEATURES
PROGRAMMING IN VISUAL BASIC.NET 2005
EDITION
Sixth Edition
by Julia Case Bradley, Mt San Antonio College, and Anita C.
Millspaugh, Mt San Antonio College
2006 / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321588-4 / MHID: 0-07-321588-0
(with Student CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125689-6 / MHID: 0-07-125689-X
( [IE], with Student CD)
NEW TO THIS EDITION
*
*
*
*
*
*
Learning Objectives
Feedback Questions
Case Studies
Tips
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction to Visual Basic .NET. Chapter 2: User Interface Design
Chapter 3: Variables, Constants, and Calculations. Chapter 4: Decisions and
Conditions. Chapter 5: Menus, Common Dialog Boxes, Sub Procedures, and
Function Procedures. Chapter 6: Multiform Projects. Chapter 7: Lists, Loops,
and Printing. Chapter 8: Arrays. Chapter 9: Programming with Visual Web
Developer. Chapter 10: Accessing Database Files. Chapter 11: Saving Data in Files.
Appendix D: .NET Security Glossary Index.
• Each chapter includes a complete hands-on project, from opening
problem statement through design and solution.
• Hands-On Programming Examples help students understand the
process of planning, writing, and executing Visual Basic programs.
After an important concept has been explained, a Hands-On
Programming Exercise implements the newly learned skill in a way
that will ensure students understand the skill every time.
• Ongoing case studies provide exercises that can reinforce topics
throughout the text.
• Feedback Questions within the chapter give students the
opportunity to reflect on the current topic and to evaluate their
understanding of the details.
• Tips and Shortcuts for Mastering the VB Environment is an
appendix that brings together the many helpful in-chapter tips to
serve as a reference for the student.
• End-of-chapter material includes Summary, Key Terms, Review
Questions, and Programming Exercises to help reinforce the chapter
content.
73
11/15/06 5:08:43 PM
Programming - Java
SWING: A BEGINNER'S GUIDE
by Herbert Schildt
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226314-5 / MHID: 0-07-226314-8
JAVA: A BEGINNER'S GUIDE
Fourth Edition
Professional Book
Professional Book
Using the practical pedagogy that has made his other Beginner’s
Guides so successful, Herb Schildt provides new Swing
programmers with a completely integrated learning package.
Perfect for the classroom or self-study, Swing: A Beginner’s
Guide delivers the appropriate mix of theory and practical
coding. You will be programming as early as Chapter 1.
CONTENTS
by Herbert Schildt
2007 (November 2006) / Softcover / 500 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226384-8 / MHID: 0-07-226384-9
Java programming made easy--fully updated for Java SE 6
From Herbert Schildt, the world's leading programming author,
comes this fully revised and updated introductory Java guide.
You will get all the information you need to get up and running
with the latest version of Java, the popular Web programming
language. Hands-on projects, self-assessments, and ‘ask the
expert' sections make it easy to learn the essential skills.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1. Java Fundamentals. Chapter 2. Introducing Data Types and Operators.
Chapter 3. Program Control Statements. Chapter 4. Introducing Classes, Objects,
and Methods. Chapter 5. More Data Types and Operators. Chapter 6. A Closer
Look at Methods and Classes. Chapter 7. Inheritance. Chapter 8. Packages and
Interfaces. Chapter 9. Exception Handling. Chapter 10. Using I/O. Chapter
11. Multithreaded Programming. Chapter 12. Enumerations, Autoboxing, and
metadata. Chapter 13. Generics. Chapter 14. Applets, Events, and Miscellaneous
Topics.
Module 1: Swing Fundamentals. Module 2: Labels, Buttons, and Borders. Module
3: Scroll Bars, Sliders, and Progress Bars. Module 4: Managing Components
with Panels, Panes, and Tooltips. Module 5: Lists. Module 6: Text Components
Module 7: Working with Menus. Module 8: Tables and Trees. Module 9: Dialogs.
Module 10: Threading, Applets, Painting, and Layouts
SCJP SUN CERTIFIED PROGRAMMER FOR JAVA 5
STUDY GUIDE (EXAM 310-055)
by Katherine Sierra, and Bert Bates
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225360-3 / MHID: 0-07-225360-6 (with CDRom)
Professional Book
JAVA SE 6: THE COMPLETE REFERENCE
Sixth Edition
by Herbert Schildt
2007 (November 2006) / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226385-5 / MHID: 0-07-226385-7
Professional Book
Author's Web Site (Browse http://www.herbschildt.com)
The world's leading programming author offers comprehensive
coverage of the new Java release. The definitive guide to Java
has been fully expanded to cover every aspect of Java SE 6, the
latest version of the world's most popular Web programming
language. This comprehensive resource contains everything
you need to develop, compile, debug, and run Java applications
and applets.
CONTENTS
Get the book that shows you not only what to study, but how
to study. The only classroom-based integrated study system for
professional certification gives you complete coverage of all
objectives for the Sun Certified Programmer for Java 5 exam,
hundreds of practice exam questions, and hands-on exercises.
The CD-ROM features full practice exam software plus an
adaptive test engine.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Declarations and Access Control. Chapter 2: Object Orientation.
Chapter 3: Assignments. Chapter 4: Operators. Chapter 5: Flow Control,
Exceptions, and Assertions. Chapter 6: Strings, I/O, Formatting, and Parsing.
Chapter 7: Generics and Collections. Chapter 8: Inner Classes. Chapter 9: Threads.
Chapter 10: Development. Appendix: About The CD. Index
Chapter 1. History & Evolution of Java. Chapter 2. Overview of Java. Chapter
3. Data Types, Variables, and Arrays. Chapter 4. Operators. Chapter 5. Control
Statements. Chapter 6. Introducing Classes. Chapter 7. A Closer Look at Methods
and Classes. Chapter 8. Inheritance. Chapter 9. Packages and Interfaces. Chapter
10. Exception Handling. Chapter 11. Multithreaded Programming. Chapter 12.
Enumerations, Autoboxing, and metadata. Chapter 13. I/O, Applets, and Other
Topics. Chapter 14. Generics. Chapter 15. String Handling. Chapter 16. Exploring
java.lang. Chapter 17. java.util Part 1: Collections Framework. Chapter 18. java.util
Part 2: More Utility Classes. Chapter 19. Input/Output: Exploring java.io. Chapter
20. Networking. Chapter 21. Applet class. Chapter 22. Event Handling. Chapter
23. Introducing the AWT. Chapter 24. Using AWT Controls, Layout Managers,
and Menus. Chapter 25. Introducing Swing. Chapter 26. More Swing Components.
Chapter 27. Using Swing. Chapter 28. Images. Chapter 29. The Concurrency
Utilities. Chatper 30. NIO, Regular Expressions, and Other Packages. Chapter
31. Java Beans. Chapter 32. Servlets. Chapter 33. Financial Applets and Servlets
Chapter 34. Creating a Download manager
74
11/15/06 5:08:43 PM
Other Programming
CRYSTAL REPORTS XI: THE COMPLETE REFERENCE
By George Peck
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226246-9 / MHID: 0-07-226246-X
Professional Book
FEATURES
• Material in Crystal Reports XI: The Complete Reference will be
updated and enhanced as follows:
All new user interface elements will be covered; New Dynamic/
Cascading Parameter Fields will be covered in depth; Crystal
Reports use with Business Objects Universes will be covered;
The Web Reporting section will be updated to include the new
updated of Business Objects Enterprise XI, as well as any updated
Report Application Server features; The previous on-line appendix
documenting the Formula Language will be printed in the book; Most
illustrations and figures will be updated as the overall look and feel
of XI has changed; All updated examples and sample reports, as well
as additional appendices, will be placed online.
• The book addresses the entire spectrum of user knowledge; from
advice to newbies on how to develop, design and build a simple
report to in-depth information on more complex features like Crystal
Server Pages and integrating Crystal Reports into Visual Basic.NET
programs as well as taking advantage of extended Java support.
• Understand how to build professional, complex, and effective
presentation-ready reports.
• Uncover vital advice and tips from expert author on how to best
utilize Crystal Reports features to analyze data
CONTENTS
Part I--Designing Reports. Chapter 1: Getting the Feel of Crystal Reports XI.
Chapter 2: Enhancing Appearance with Text Objects. Chapter 3: Sorting and
Grouping. Chapter 4: Creating Geographic Maps. Chapter 5: Using Formulas.
Chapter 6: Creating Custom Functions. Chapter 7: The Repository. Chapter 8:
Analyzing with Advanced Selection Criteria. Chapter 9: Making Your Reports
Visually Appealing. Chapter 10: Using Sections and Areas. Chapter 11: Analyzing
with Cross Tabs. Chapter 12: Creating Charts. Chapter 13: Using Subreports.
Chapter 14: Viewer Interaction with Parameter Fields. Chapter 15: Exporting
Reports. Chapter 16: Reporting from SQL Databases. Chapter 17: Creating and
Using Business Views. Chapter 18: Accommodating Database Changes and Field
Mapping. Chapter 19: Reporting from OLAP Cubes. Chapter 20: Reporting from
Proprietary Data Types. Part II--Crystal Reports XI on the Web. Chapter 21: Crystal
Reports Web Alternatives. Chapter 22: Crystal Reports with ASP and ASP.NET.
Chapter 23: Crystal Reports with Java. Chapter 24: Introduction to Business Objects
Enterprise. Chapter 25: Using the Launchpad and Web Desktop. Chapter 26:
Administering Business Objects Enterprise. Part III--Developing Custom Window
Applications. Chapter 27: Integrating Crystal Reports with Visual Basic. Chapter
28: Crystal Reports with Visual Studio .NET. Part IV—Appendixes. Appendix A:
Formula Language Reference
Internet/World Wide Web
INTERNET LITERACY
Fourth Edition
By Fred T. Hofstetter, University Of Delaware
2006
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321454-2 / MHID: 0-07-321454-X
(with Student CD)
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/dolphin4e
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Dreamweaver coverage in addition to FrontPage and Nvu
• Illustrated timelines detailing the history of the Internet
• Learn how to conduct and correctly document scholarly searches
following APA, MLA and CMS guidelines
Features
• Increased coverage of Internet security to help protect from a wide
range of computer attacks
• Latest information on copyright issues, equity, wireless
technologies, PDAs and media hubs
• Windows and Macintosh compatible textbook with coverage of
iTunes for both
CONTENTS
Introduction. Part One: Understanding The Internet. Chapter 1. Definitions.
Chapter 2. How The Internet Is Changing The World. Part Two: Getting On The
Internet. Chapter 3. Getting Connected. Chapter 4. Surfing The Net. Part Three:
Communicating Over The Internet. Chapter 5. Internet Etiquette (Netiquette).
Chapter. Electronic Mail. Chapter 7. Listserv Mailing Lists. Chapter 8. Usenet
Newsgroups,Web-Based Forums, And Rss Blogs. Chapter 9. Communicating In
Real Time. Chapter 10. Streaming Media And Synchronized Multimedia. Part
Four: Finding Things On The Internet. Chapter 11. Searching For Information.
Chapter 12. Commonly Found Internet File Types. Chapter 13. Downloading From
The Internet. Chapter 14. Bibliographic Style For Citing Internet Resources. Part
Five: Creating Web Pages. Chapter 15. Web Page Creation Strategies. Chapter
16. Web Page Design. Chapter 17. How Html Works. Chapter 18. Creating Your
Web Page Resume. Chapter 19. Putting Images On Web Pages. Chapter 20.
Using Tables And Css For Web Page Layout. Chapter 21. Making A Local Web
Site And A Home Page. Chapter 22. Publishing Files On The World Wide Web.
Part Six: Using Multimedia On The Internet. Chapter 23. How Web Browsers
Do Multimedia. Chapter 24. Audio Recording And Embedding. Part Seven:
Planning For The Future Of The Internet. Chapter 25. Societal Issues. Chapter 26.
Emerging Technology. Chapter 27. How To Keep Up And Stay Secure. Appendix
A: Internet Toolkit For Windows And Macintosh. Appendix B: Progressive Case
Projects. Appendix C: Basic Windows And Macintosh Tutorials.
HOW TO DO EVERYTHING WITH YOUR EBAY
BUSINESS
Second Edition
By Greg Holden
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226164-6 / MHID: 0-07-226164-1
Professional Book
This user-friendly book shows you how to turn the satisfaction
and excitement of eBay sales into a lucrative small business-and possibly even a full-time job! Find out how to establish
a seller’s account, post attention-getting auction listings,
and build confidence among bidders. Author Greg Holden
explains how to apply the secrets of successful brick and
mortar businesses to the online world. After learning the ropes,
you’ll find out how to boost sales with techniques such as noreserve selling and “buy it now” pricing. Plus--tips for locating
inventory, implementing marketing plans, and getting free
advertising are revealed.
75
11/15/06 5:08:44 PM
Multimedia
MULTIMEDIA: MAKING IT WORK
Seventh Edition
by Tay Vaughan
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226451-7 / MHID: 0-07-226451-9
Professional Book
Thoroughly updated for new breakthroughs in multimedia
The internationally bestselling Multimedia: Making it Work
has been fully revised and expanded to cover the latest
technological advances in multimedia. You will learn to plan
and manage multimedia projects, from dynamic CD-ROMs and
DVDs to professional websites. Each chapter includes step-bystep instructions, full-color illustrations and screenshots, selfquizzes, and hands-on projects.
CONTENTS
1 What is Multimedia? 2 Introduction to Making Multimedia. 3 Multimedia
Skills. 4 Text. 5 Sound. 6 Images. 7 Animation. 8 Video. 9 Hardware. 10 Basic
Software Tools. 11 Multimedia Authoring Tools. 12 The Internet and How It
Works. 13 Tools for the World Wide Web. 14 Designing for the World Wide
Web. 15 Planning and Costing. 16 Designing and Producing. 17 Content and
Talent. 18 Delivering.
COMPTia Certification A+
A+ CERTIFICATION ALL-IN-ONE EXAM GUIDE
Sixth Edition
by Michael Meyers
2007 (June 2006) / 1,184 pages / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226311-4 / MHID: 0-07-226311-3
[with CD-Rom]
Professional Book
Written by the foremost authority on A+ certification training
and reviewed and approved by CompTIA--creators of the
exams--this authoritative volume covers everything you need
to know to pass both the Core Hardware and Operating System
Technologies exams. A+ Certification All-in-One Exam Guide,
Sixth Edition, features helpful exam tips throughout the book,
end-of-chapter practice questions, detailed coverage of the
exam format, and hundreds of photographs and illustrations.
This comprehensive guide not only helps you pass the A+
certification exams but also teaches you how to be an expert
hardware technician. Mike Meyers’ “down in the trenches”
voice and his ability to provide clear explanations of core
concepts have made this book the bestselling A+ self-study
guide available.
The all-new CD-ROM includes:
*
Six complete practice exams
*
A video presentation from Mike Meyers
*
A new collection of Meyers’ favorite PC tools and utilities
that are available as shareware and freeware
MIKE MEYERS’ A+ CERTIFICATION PASSPORT
Third Edition
by Michael Meyers and Martin Acuna
2007 (June 2006) / 528 pages / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226308-4 / MHID: 0-07-226308-3
Professional Book
This affordable, portable study tool will get you “on the road”
to becoming A+ certified. Completely updated for the new
exams, Mike Meyers’ A+ Certification Passport,Third Edition,
focuses on only what you need to know to pass the tests, and
the unique travel theme helps them remember key concepts.
The all-new CD-ROM includes four complete practice exams,
a new collection of Mike’s favorite shareware and freeware PC
tools and utilities, and an electronic book.
MIKE MEYERS' A+ GUIDE TO PC HARDWARE
Second Edition
by Michael Meyers
2007 (February 2007) / Softcover with CDROM / 608 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226352-0 / MHID: 0-07-226352-0
Professional Book
Completely updated for the 2006 CompTIA A+ exam
objectives, Mike Meyers' A+ Guide to PC Hardware, Second
Edition is designed to teach A+ IT technician skills in an easyto-understand way that will prepare you for an IT career. The
book offers helpful tips throughout, end-of-chapter practice
questions, and hundreds of photographs and illustrations.
This comprehensive guide will help you achieve your A+
certification as well as become an expert hardware technician.
The CD-ROM features hundreds of mock exam questions,
Mike Meyers' favorite tools and utilities for PC technicians,
and one hour of video training featuring Mike Meyers teaching
key A+ topics.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: The Visible PC. Chapter 2: Microprocessors. Chapter 3: RAM. Chapter
4: BIOS and CMOS. Chapter 5: Expansion Bus. Chapter 6: Motherboards. Chapter
7: Power Supplies. Chapter 8: Floppy Drives. Chapter 9: Hard Drive Technologies.
Chapter 10: CD and DVD Media. Chapter 11: Video. Chapter 12: SCSI. Chapter
13: Sound. Chapter 14: Portable PCs. Chapter 15: Printers.
MIKE MEYERS' A+ GUIDE TO MANAGING AND
TROUBLESHOOTING PCS
Second Edition
by Michael Meyers
2007 (December 2006) / Softcover with CDROM / 992 pags
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226355-8 / MHID: 0-07-226355-5
Professional Book
objectives, Mike Meyers' A+ Guide to Managing and
Troubleshooting PCs, Second Edition is designed to teach
A+ IT technician skills in an easy-to-understand way that
will prepare you for an IT career. The book offers helpful tips
throughout, end-of-chapter practice questions, and hundreds
of photographs and illustrations. This comprehensive guide
will help you achieve your A+ certification as well as become
an expert hardware and operating system technician. The
CD-ROM features hundreds of mock exam questions, Mike
Meyers' favorite tools and utilities for PC technicians, and one
hour of video training featuring Mike Meyers teaching key A+
topics.
76
11/15/06 5:08:45 PM
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction. Chapter 2: The Visible PC. Chapter 3: Microprocessors.
Chapter 4: RAM. Chapter 5: BIOS and CMOS. Chapter 6: Expansion Bus. Chapter
7: Motherboards. Chapter 8: Power Supplies. Chapter 9: Floppy Drives. Chapter
10: Hard Drive Technologies. Chapter 11: Implementing Hard Drives. Chapter 12:
Understanding Windows. Chapter 13: Working with the Command Line Interface.
Chapter 14: Installing and Upgrading Windows. Chapter 15: Maintaining,
Optimizing, and Troubleshooting Windows 9x and Windows Me. Chapter 16:
Maintaining, Optimizing, and Troubleshooting Windows NT, 2000, and XP
Chapter 17: CD and DVD Media. Chapter 18: Video. Chapter 19: SCSI. Chapter 20:
Sound. Chapter 21: Portable PCs. Chapter 22: Printers2. Chapter 23: Networking.
Chapter 24: The Internet
MIKE MEYERS' A+ GUIDE TO OPERATING SYSTEMS
Second Edition
by Michael Meyers
2007 (March 2007) / Softcover with CDROM / 504 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226358-9 / MHID: 0-07-226358-X
Professional Book
objectives, Mike Meyers' A+ Guide to Operating Systems,
Second Edition is designed to teach A+ IT technician skills
in an easy-to-understand way that will prepare you for an
IT career. The book offers helpful tips throughout, end-ofchapter practice questions, and hundreds of photographs
and illustrations. This comprehensive guide will help you
achieve your A+ certification as well as become an expert
A+ technician. The CD-ROM features hundreds of mock
exam questions, Mike Meyers' favorite tools and utilities for
PC technicians, and one hour of video training featuring Mike
Meyers teaching key A+ topics.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Personal Computer. Chapter 2: Introduction to
Windows. Chapter 3: Features and Characteristics of Windows. Chapter 4:
Working with the Command Line Interface. Chapter 5: Implementing Hard
Drives. Chapter 6: Installing and Upgrading Windows. Chapter 7: Maintaining,
Optimizing, and Troubleshooting Windows 9x and Windows Me. Chapter 8:
Maintaining, Optimizing, and Troubleshooting Windows NT, 2000, and XP
Chapter 9: Networking. Chapter 10: The Internet
MIKE MEYERS' A+ GUIDE TO PC HARDWARE LAB
MANUAL
Second Edition
by Michael Meyers
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226361-9 / MHID: 0-07-226361-X
Professional Book
MIKE MEYERS' A+ GUIDE TO MANAGING AND
TROUBLESHOOTING PCS LAB MANUAL
Second Edition
by Michael Meyers
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226362-6 / MHID: 0-07-226362-8
Professional Book
Mike Meyers A+ Guide to Managing and Troubleshooting
PCs Lab Manual, Second Edition features 40-plus lab exercises
that challenge you to solve problems based on realistic case
studies and step-by-step scenarios that require critical thinking.
You'll also get post-lab observation questions that measure
your understanding of lab results and key term quizzes that
help build vocabulary.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction. Chapter 2: The Visible PC. Chapter 3: CPUs. Chapter
4: RAM. Chapter 5: BIOS. Chapter 6: Expansion Bus. Chapter 7: Motherboards.
Chapter 8: Power Supplies. Chapter 9: Floppy Drives. Chapter 10: Hard Drive
Technologies. Chapter 11: Implementing Hard Drives. Chapter 12: Understanding
Windows. Chapter 13: Using the Command Line. Chapter 14: Installing and
Upgrading Windows. Chapter 15: Maintaining, Optimizing, and Troubleshooting.
Chapter 16: Maintaining, Optimizing, and Troubleshooting. Chapter 17: CD and
DVD Media. Chapter 18: Video. Chapter 19: SCSI. Chapter 20: Sound. Chapter
21: Notebook Computers. Chapter 22: Printers. Chapter 23: Internet.
MIKE MEYERS' A+ GUIDE TO OPERATING SYSTEMS
LAB MANUAL
Second Edition
by Michael Meyers
ISBN-978-0-07-226363-3 / MHID: 0-07-226363-6
Professional Book
Mike Meyers A+ Guide to Operating Systems Lab Manual,
Second Edition features 40-plus lab exercises that challenge
you to solve problems based on realistic case studies and
step-by-step scenarios that require critical thinking. You'll
also get post-lab observation questions that measure your
understanding of lab results and key term quizzes that help
build vocabulary.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Personal Computer. Chapter 2: Introducing
Microsoft Windows. Chapter 3: Features and Characteristics of Windows. Chapter
4: Using the Command Line. Chapter 5: Implementing Hard Drives. Chapter 6:
Installing and Upgrading Windows. Chapter 7: Maintaining, Optimizing, and
Troubleshooting Windows 9X/Me. Chapter 8: Maintaining, Optimizing, and
Troubleshooting Windows NT, 2000, and XP. Chapter 9: Networking. Chapter
10: Internet
Mike Meyers A+ Guide to PC Hardware Lab Manual, Second
Edition features 40-plus lab exercises that challenge you to
solve problems based on realistic case studies and step-by-step
scenarios that require critical thinking. You'll also get post-lab
observation questions that measure your understanding of lab
results and key term quizzes that help build vocabulary.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: The Visible PC. Chapter 2: Microprocessors. Chapter 3: RAM. Chapter
4: BIOS and CMOS. Chapter 5: Expansion Bus. Chapter 6: Motherboards. Chapter
7: Power Supplies. Chapter 8: Floppy Drives. Chapter 9: Hard Drive Technologies.
Chapter 10: CD and DVD Media. Chapter 11: Video. Chapter 12: SCSI. Chapter 13:
Sound. Chapter 14: Portable PCs. Chapter 15: Printers. Chapter 16: Networking
77
11/15/06 5:08:45 PM
Certification - CISSP
CISSP ALL-IN-ONE EXAM GUIDE
Third Edition
By Shon Harris
2006 / 1,032 pages / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225712-0 / MHID: 0-07-225712-1
Professional Book
The third edition of this proven All-in-One exam guide is
essentially two books in one, providing total coverage of the
CISSP and the ISSEP credential. Learn security operations in
the areas of telecommunications, cryptography, management
practices, and more. Plan for continuity and disaster recovery.
Update your knowledge of laws, investigations, and ethics.
Plus, run the CD-ROM and practice more than 250 simulated
exam questions. Let security consultant and author Shon Harris
lead you to successful completion of the CISSP and the ISSEP.
CONTENTS
Part I: Chapter 1: Reasons to Become a CISSP. Chapter 2: Security Trends.
Chapter 3: Operation Security. Chapter 4: Access Control Methods. Chapter 5:
Telecommunications and Network Security. Chapter 6: Cryptography. Chapter 7:
Applications and Systems Development Security. Chapter 8: Business Continuity
Planning and Disaster Recovery. Chapter 9: Physical Security Chapter 10: Laws,
Investigations, and Ethics. Chapter 11: Security Management Practices. Chapter
12: Security Architecture and Models. Part II: Chapter 13: Reasons to Become an
ISSEP Chapter 14: Security Trends. Chapter 15: Operation Security. Chapter 16:
Security Management Practices
Certification - MCDBA
MCTS SQL SERVER 2005 IMPLEMENTATION &
MAINTENANCE STUDY GUIDE (EXAM 70-431)
Third Edition
by Tom Carpenter
2007 (March 2007) / Softcover with CDROM / 812 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226321-3 / MHID: 0-07-226321-0
Professional Book
An integrated study system based on proven instructional
methodology, this book and CD package shows you not only
what--but how--to study for the new MCDBA SQL Server
2005 Technology Specialist exam. The book offers complete
coverage of all official exam objectives, 250-plus practice
exam questions, step-by-step exercises, and more. The CDROM contains a complete practice exam and an e-book.
Certification CISCO
CISCO: A BEGINNER'S GUIDE
Fourth Edition
by Toby Velte, Velte Systems Inc; and Anthony Velte
2007 (November 2006) / Softcover / 768 pgs
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226383-1 / MHID: 0-07-226383-0
Certification - CWAP
CCA CITRIX METAFRAME PRESENTATION SERVER
3.0 STUDY GUIDE (EXAM 223)
by Christopher Huffman, Vector ESP, and Jeff Richards, Vector ESP
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225875-2 / MHID: 0-07-225875-6
Professional Book
Use the integrated study system based on proven instructional
methodology (step-by-step exercises, Exam Watch, On-the-Job
notes and Scenario and Solution table quick references).
CONTENTS
Introduction. Pretest – 20 Questions. How to Prepare for the Exam. PART I:
Introduction to MetaFrame Presentation Server 3.0. Ch. 1:MetaFrame Presentation
Server 3.0. Ch. 2:Citrix Technologies. Ch. 3:Windows Server 2003 Setup &
Optimization. Ch. 4:MetaFrame Presentation Server 3.0 Installation. Ch. 5: Farm
& Datastore Design. PART II: Citrix Client Software. Ch. 6:ICA Clients. Ch. 7:
Deploying ICA Clients. Ch. 8:Program Neighborhood. Ch. 9:Web Interface. Ch.
10:Program Neighborhood Agent. PART III: MetaFrame Administration. Ch. 11:
Citrix Management Console. Ch. 12:Additional Management Tools. Ch. 13:Load
Management. Ch. 14:Applications on MetaFrame Presentation Server 3.0. Ch. 15:
Printing. Appendices. Appendix 1: Command Line Reference.
Professional Book
Here is a newly updated edition of the bestselling introductory
guide to Cisco products and technologies. Cisco: A Beginner's
Guide, Fourth Edition provides you with a practical hands-on
resource for successfully implementing and managing a Cisco
network. The book covers IOS, voice and wireless security,
video-on-demand, new routers, switches, and wireless
products, and more.
CONTENTS
Part I: Cisco Overview. Ch. 1: Cisco and the Internet. Ch. 2: Network Primer.
Ch. 3: Cisco Certifications. Part II: Cisco Internetworking Tools. Ch. 4: Router
Overview. Ch. 5: Configuring Routers. Ch. 6: Switches. Ch. 7: Security Overview
Ch. 8: Security Building Blocks. Ch. 9: Cisco Wireless. Part III: Cisco Business
Solutions. Ch. 10: Cisco IP Contact Center. Ch. 11: Storage Tools; SANs; MDS
Switches. Ch. 12: Cisco Content Networking. Part IV: Designing Cisco Networks.
Ch. 13: Routing Protocols. Ch. 14: Network Management. Ch. 15:Network Design
Process. Ch. 16: Troubleshooting Cisco Networks.
78
11/15/06 5:08:46 PM
Certification - Career Skills/
Certification
RHCE RED HAT CERTIFIED ENGINEER LINUX
STUDY GUIDE (EXAM RH302)
Fifth Edition
by Michael Jang
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226454-8 / MHID: 0-07-226454-3
Professional Book
The only book that shows you what--and how--to study
The new edition of this bestselling study guide offers complete
coverage of the Red Hat Certified Engineer exam revision
based on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 and Fedora Core 5.
An integrated study system based on proven instructional
methodology, RHCE Red Hat Certified Engineer Linux Study
Guide, Fifth Edition, features 250 practice exam questions,
step-by-step exercises,self-tests, and two complete lab-based
practice exams.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1--RHCE Prerequisites. Chapter 2--Installation. Chapter 3--Basic
Configuration and Administration. Chapter 4--Advanced Installation. Chapter
5--Advanced User Administration. Chapter 6--X Window System. Chapter 7-Linux Sharing Services. Chapter 8 – Linux Network Services. Chapter 9--Network
Management. Chapter 10--System Administration and Security. Chapter 11
Operational Administration Recovery and Security. Glossary.
CISSP CERTIFICATION ALL-IN-ONE EXAM GUIDE
Third Edition
by Shon Harris
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225712-0 / MHID: 0-07-225712-1
Professional Book
The third edition of this proven All-in-One exam guide is
essentially two books in one, providing total coverage of the
CISSP and the ISSEP credential. Learn security operations in
the areas of telecommunications, cryptography, management
practices, and more. Plan for continuity and disaster recovery.
Update your knowledge of laws, investigations, and ethics.
Plus, run the CD-ROM and practice more than 250 simulated
exam questions. Let security consultant and author Shon Harris
lead you to successful completion of the CISSP and the ISSEP.
CONTENTS
Part I: Chapter 1: Reasons to Become a CISSP. Chapter 2: Security Trends.
Chapter 3: Operation Security. Chapter 4: Access Control Methods. Chapter 5:
Telecommunications and Network Security. Chapter 6: Cryptography. Chapter 7:
Applications and Systems Development Security. Chapter 8: Business Continuity
Planning and Disaster Recovery. Chapter 9: Physical Security. Chapter 10: Laws,
Investigations, and Ethics. Chapter 11: Security Management Practices. Chapter
12: Security Architecture and Models. Part II: Chapter 13: Reasons to Become
an ISSEP. Chapter 14: Security Trends. Chapter 15: Operation Security. Chapter
16: Security Management Practices
Networking - Essentials
NEW
PRINCIPLES OF VOICE & DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
by Regis "Bud" J. Bates, TC International Consulting, Inc. and
Marcus Bates
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225732-8 / MHID: 0-07-225732-6
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/bates1e and http://www.mhhe.com/
batesvdc
Principles of Voice and Data Communication is a technology
book for the non-technical student, a comprehensive overview
of the entire networking industry built on unrivaled real-world
experience. With its helpful pedagogy, teaching support,
and student-friendly tone, Principles of Voice and Data
Communication gives students the foundation they need to
enter, and succeed in, the technology and communications
fields.
FEATURES
• Author Regis “Bud” Bates has nearly 40 years' experience in
the communications industry, and his work as both a technology
manager and a successful consultant give him an insight into the field
that no competitor can match.
• The book maintains a powerful real-world focus, emphasizing
how communications topics and technologies are implemented in
the workplace. The authors address the reader as professionals, not
professors.
• “Working In This Field” boxes expand a topic by exploring it from
the perspective of real-world technology practitioners. Web links give
students the opportunity to go further and explore the topic in even
greater depth.
• The end-of-chapter material is loaded with pedagogical tools for
reinforcing the material, including summaries, review questions
(about 25 per chapter), and problems and exercises to work in class.
• A dozen cases allow students to explore communications topics in
detail and in a realistic setting.
• Brought to you by the author of the Voice and Data
Communications Handbook, the standard reference work on the
subject in the US and around the world.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Principles of Voice and Data Communications-An Introduction. Chapter
2 The Evolution of the Telephone Set. Chapter 3 Introduction of the Carriers and
Regulation in the Industry. Chapter 4 Signaling System 7, Intelligent Networks and
Number Portability. Chapter 5 Analog versus Digital Communications. Chapter
6 Integrated Services Digital Network and SONET. Chapter 7 Data standards in
Use. Chapter 8 Data Communications. Chapter 9 The Internet. Chapter 10 Local
Area Networks (LANs). Chapter 11 Packets, Frames and Cell Switching Concepts.
Chapter 12 xDSL. Chapter 13 Cable Modem Systems and Technology. Chapter
14 Overview of Cellular communications. Chapter 15 Security and Virtual Private
Networks (VPN
79
11/15/06 5:08:47 PM
Networking - Wireless
Networking
NEW
FUNDAMENTALS OF WIRELESS NETWORKING
By Ron Gilster
2007 (January 2006) / 528 pages / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225668-0 / MHID: 0-07-225668-0
This textbook provides a fundamental introduction to network
technologies, including local area network topologies,
protocols, software, and hardware. Key wireless topics, such as
radio frequency communications, wireless hardware devices,
and IEE standards are explained in a straightforward, easyto-read style. Learn step-by-step how to build wireless LANs
and personal networks. Security, WANs, and other advanced
topics also covered.
FEATURES
• Fundamental introduction to network technologies, including
local area network topologies, protocols, software, and hardware.
• Covers key wireless networking topics: Radio frequency
communications, wireless hardware devices, and IEE standards.
• Security, WANs, and other advanced topics also covered.
• Covers all objectives of Certified Wireless Network Administrator
(CWNA) Exam PWO-100.
• Step-by-step approach to building wireless LANs and personal
networks.
Web Programming/Design HTML
HTML: A BEGINNER'S GUIDE
Third Edition
by Wendy Willard
2007 (November 2006) / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226378-7 / MHID: 0-07-226378-4
Professional Book
HTML made easy--fully updated for the latest version
The new edition of this bestselling beginner's guide brings the
book up to date with the latest changes in HTML, including
XHTML 2.0. In dedicated modules that act as stand-alone
lessons, you will learn how to structure a page, place images,
size text, create links, generate Web-safe colors, work with
multimedia, and more. Hands-on projects, self-assessments,
and ‘ask the expert' sections make it easy to learn the essential
skills.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1. Getting Started. Chapter 2. Basic Page Structure. Chapter 3. Color.
Chapter 4. Working with Text. Chapter 5. Working with Links. Chapter 6. Working
with Images. Chapter 7. Working with Multimedia. Chapter 8. Creating Lists.
Chapter 9. Using Tables. Chapter 10. Developing Frames. Chapter 11. Employing
Forms. Chapter 12. Positioning Page Elements. Chatper 13. Creating Your Own
Web Graphics. Chapter 14. Web Content. Chapter 15. Dynamic Content. Chapter
16. Making Pages Available to Others.
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Wireless Networks. 2 Wireless Network Architectures. 3 Wireless
Network Devices. 4 RF Communications. 5 Wireless LAN Standards. 6 Infrared
Devices. 7 Bluetooth. 8 Wireless LAN Planning and Design. 9 Wireless LAN
Configuration and Installation Planning. 10 Antennas and Cables. 11 Wireless
LAN Security. 12 SOHO and Enterprise WLANs. 13 Troubleshooting Wireless
Devices. 14 Wireless WANs. Appendix A Wireless Certification. Appendix B
TCP/IP Review. Appendix C Network Addressing Basics. Appendix D Answers
to the Line Check Exercises. Glossary.
Web Programming/Design-Java
JAVA: A BEGINNER'S GUIDE
Fourth Edition
by Herbert Schildt
2007 (November 2006) / Softcover / 500 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226384-8 / MHID: 0-07-226384-9
CWNA CERTIFIED WIRELESS NETWORK
ADMINISTRATOR OFFICIAL STUDY GUIDE
Third Edition
By Planet3 Wireless
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225538-6 / MHID: 0-07-225538-2
Professional Book
Written by the company that created the Certified Wireless
Network Administrator program, this official study guide
provides all the information you’ll need to help you pass
the exam. Get an introduction to wireless LANs and radio
frequency technology. Learn about wireless LAN infrastructure
devices, antennas, the 802.11 network architecture, MAC and
physical layers, and much more. Be prepared to troubleshoot
installations and implement security measures. This is the only
official CWNA book on the market!
CONTENTS
Professional Book
Java programming made easy--fully updated for Java SE 6
From Herbert Schildt, the world's leading programming author,
comes this fully revised and updated introductory Java guide.
You will get all the information you need to get up and running
with the latest version of Java, the popular Web programming
language. Hands-on projects, self-assessments, and ‘ask the
expert' sections make it easy to learn the essential skills.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1. Java Fundamentals. Chapter 2. Introducing Data Types and Operators.
Chapter 3. Program Control Statements. Chapter 4. Introducing Classes, Objects,
and Methods. Chapter 5. More Data Types and Operators. Chapter 6. A Closer
Look at Methods and Classes. Chapter 7. Inheritance. Chapter 8. Packages and
Interfaces. Chapter 9. Exception Handling. Chapter 10. Using I/O. Chapter
11. Multithreaded Programming. Chapter 12. Enumerations, Autoboxing, and
metadata. Chapter 13. Generics. Chapter 14. Applets, Events, and Miscellaneous
Topics
1. Introduction to Wireless LANs. 2. Radio Frequency (RF) Fundamentals. 3. Spread
Spectrum Technology. 4. Wireless LAN Infrastructure Devices. 5. Antennas and
Accessories. 6. Wireless LAN Organizations and Standards. 7. 802.11 Network
Architecture. 8. MAC and Physical Layers. 9. Troubleshooting Wireless LAN
Installations. 10. Wireless LAN Security. 11. Site Survey Fundamentals. 12. RF
in Perspective
80
11/15/06 5:08:47 PM
Security - Information Security
NEW
Catch a Phish. Chapter 2: Owning the Pharm. Chapter 3: Big Bait, Big Phish.
Chapter 4: Shooting Phish in a Barrel. Chapter 5: Too Few Secrets. Chapter 6:
Upgraded or "Owned?" Chapter 7: Pale Blue Glow. Chapter 8: Crossing the Line.
Chapter 9: The Root of the Problem. Chapter 10: Firewall Insights. Chapter 11:
Peter LemonJello's "A Series of Unfortunate Events" Chapter 12: Share and Share
Alike. Chapter 13: The Holy Grail. Chapter 14: Open Source. Chapter 15: Cup
of Chai. Chapter 16: Love Plus One. Chapter 17: Bullet in the Blue Sky. Chapter
18: The Insider III. Chapter 19: Jumping Someone Else's Train. Chapter 20: The
Not-So-Usual Suspects. INDEX.
INFORMATION ASSURANCE FOR THE ENTERPRISE:
A ROADMAP TO INFORMATION SECURITY
by Corey Schou, Idaho State University and Daniel Paul Shoemaker,
University of Detroit Mercy
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225524-9 / MHID: 0-07-225524-2
Security - Network Security
FEATURES
• Written by the most authoritative voice on information security in
both academia and industry.
• Introduces the concepts of information security, the security
assessment and the implementation of security via minimal technical
terminology and acronyms to appeal to a broader audience
• Real world examples and case studies for illustrations.
• End-of-chapter review includes summaries, key terms list,
vocabulary quiz, multiple-choice test, true/false questions, and
perhaps research projects as hands-on projects.
• Instructor support includes instructor manual, test bank software
with hundreds of questions, PowerPoint® slides.
CONTENTS
Part I: The Organizational/Policy Domain: Ch. 1: Organizational Security Policy
and Planning. Ch. 2: Defined and Documented Infrastructure. Ch. 3: Education
and Awareness. Ch. 4: Asset Management. Ch. 5: Business Continuity. Ch. 6:
Legal and Regulatory Compliance. Part II: The Managerial/Administrative Domain:
Ch. 7: Building Security Functions Into Development. Ch. 8: Personnel Security.
Ch. 9: Physical Security. Part III: The Operational/Technical Domain: Ch. 10:
Access Control. Ch. 11: Operations Security. Ch. 12: Network Security. Ch. 13:
Application and System Software Security. Ch. 14: Operational Risk Assessment
and Audit. Part IV: The Community/Contextual Domain: Ch. 15: Ethics. Ch. 16:
A Standard Implementation Model. Glossary. Index.
HACKER'S CHALLENGE 3
Third Edition
by David Pollino, Bill Pennington, Tony Bradley, and Himanshu
Dwivedi
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226304-6 / MHID: 0-07-226304-0
Professional Book
CWSP CERTIFIED WIRELESS SECURITY
PROFESSIONAL OFFICIAL STUDY GUIDE (EXAM
PW0-200)
Second Edition
by Tom Carpenter, Grant Moerschel, and Richard Dreger,
Waveguard, Inc.
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226320-6 / MHID: 0-07-226320-2
Professional Book
The ONLY official study guide for the industry-standard
wireless security certification exam
Cowritten by the creators of the exam and leading experts
in wireless security, CWSP Certified Wireless Security
Professional Official Study Guide, Second Edition, offers
complete coverage of all the objectives for the vendor-neutral
wireless network certification that focuses on the technologies
behind the brands. The fully integrated study system includes
notes that reinforce and teach practical skills, step-by-step
exercises, chapter self-tests, and more than 150 practice exam
questions.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Wireless LAN Auditing Tools. Chapter 2: Gathering Information.
Chapter 3: Unauthorized Access. Chapter 4: Denial of Service. Chapter 5:
Legislation. Chapter 6: General Policy. Chapter 7: Functional Policy: Guidelines
& Baselines. Chapter 8: Functional Policy: Design & Implementation. Chapter 9:
Functional Policy: Monitoring & Response. Chapter 10: Securing the Enterprise
Chapter 11: Authentication. Chapter 12: Authentication Framework Components.
Chapter 13: Encryption. Chapter 14: WEP/WPA. Chapter 15: 802.11i. Chapter 16:
Network and Application Layer VPN Technology. Chapter 17: Wireless Monitoring
and Protection. Chapter 18: Wireless LAN Switches.
Every day, hackers are devising new ways to break into your
network. Do you have what it takes to stop them? Find out in
Hacker’s Challenge 3. Inside, top-tier security experts offer 20
brand-new, real-world network security incidents to test your
computer forensics and response skills. All the latest hot-button
topics are covered, including phishing and pharming scams,
internal corporate hacking, Cisco IOS, wireless, iSCSI storage,
VoIP, Windows, Mac OS X, and UNIX/Linux hacks, and much
more. Each challenge includes a detailed explanation of the
incident--how the break-in was detected, evidence and clues,
technical background such as log files and network maps, and
a series of questions for you to solve. In Part II, you’ll get a
detailed analysis of how the experts solved each incident.
CONTENTS
Part I: Challenges. Chapter 1: To Catch a Phish. Chapter 2: Owning the Pharm.
Chapter 3: Big Bait, Big Phish. Chapter 4: Shooting Phish in a Barrel. Chapter 5:
Too Few Secrets. Chapter 6: Upgraded or "Owned?" Chapter 7: Pale Blue Glow.
Chapter 8: Crossing the Line. Chapter 9: The Root of the Problem. Chapter 10:
Firewall Insights. Chapter 11: Peter LemonJello's "A Series of Unfortunate Events"
Chapter 12: Share and Share Alike. Chapter 13: The Holy Grail. Chapter 14: Open
Source. Chapter 15: Cup of Chai. Chapter 16: Love Plus One. Chapter 17: Bullet
in the Blue Sky. Chapter 18: The Insider III. Chapter 19: Jumping Someone Else's
Train. Chapter 20: The Not-So-Usual Suspects. Part II: Solutions. Chapter 1: To
81
11/15/06 5:08:48 PM
HACKING EXPOSED WEB APPLICATION
Second Edition
by Joel Scambray, Mike Shema, and Caleb Sima
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226299-5 / MHID: 0-07-226299-0
Professional Book
Defend against the latest Web-based attacks by looking
at your Web applications through the eyes of a malicious
intruder. Fully revised and updated to cover the latest Web
exploitation techniques, Hacking Exposed Web Applications,
Second Edition shows you, step-by-step, how cyber-criminals
target vulnerable sites, gain access, steal critical data, and
execute devastating attacks. All of the cutting-edge threats and
vulnerabilities are covered in full detail alongside real-world
examples, case studies, and battle-tested countermeasures from
the authors' experiences as gray hat security professionals.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Hacking Web Apps 101. Chapter 2: Profiling. Chapter 3: Hacking Web
Platforms. Chapter 4: Attacking Web Authentication. Chapter 5: Attacking Web
Authorization. Chapter 6: Input Validation Attacks. Chapter 7: Attacking Web
Datastores. Chapter 8: Attacking XML Web Services. Chapter 9: Attacking Web
Application Management. Chapter 10: Hacking Web Clients. Chapter 11: Denialof-Service (DoS) Attacks. Chapter 12: Full-Knowledge Analysis. Chapter 13: Web
Application Security Scanners. Appendix A: Web Application Security Checklist.
Appendix B: Web Hacking Tools And Techniques Cribsheet. Appendix C: Urlscan
And Modsecurity. Appendix D: About The Companion Web Site. Index
HACKING EXPOSED
Fifth Edition
By Stuart McClure, Joel Scambray, and George Kurtz
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226081-6 / MHID: 0-07-226081-5
Professional Book
Here is the latest edition of international best-seller, Hacking
Exposed. Using real-world case studies, renowned security
experts Stuart McClure, Joel Scambray, and George Kurtz
show IT professionals how to protect computers and networks
against the most recent security vulnerabilities. You’ll find
detailed examples of the latest devious break-ins and will learn
how to think like a hacker in order to thwart attacks. Coverage
includes:
*
Code hacking methods and countermeasures
*
New exploits for Windows 2003 Server, UNIX/Linux,
Cisco, Apache, and Web and wireless applications
*
Latest DDoS techniques--zombies, Blaster, MyDoom
*
All new class of vulnerabilities–HTTP Response Splitting
*
and much more
New to this edition
*
Proven, cohesive, coherent methodology showing how a
hacker thinks, to better educate those securing all parts of a network
*
This edition continues the tradition of a one-stop security
information resource with dozens of professionally-vetted references
and tips
*
New Web application hacking tools and techniques, as
well as new Internet client attacks, and more
*
New case studies based on Fortune 500 security practices
*
Companion web site will be available with the most up-todate security information
COMPUTER SECURITY LAB MANUAL
by Vincent J Nestler, Wm. Arthur Conklin, University of Texas at San
Antonio and Gregory B White, Center for Infrastructure Assurance
and Security, University of Texas San Antonio
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225508-9 / MHID: 0-07-225508-0
This lab manual provides a host of hands-on exercises that are
the perfect supplement to your computer security textbook.
Over 40 lab projects build from basic networking skills to
identification of vulnerabilities, hardening of computer systems,
and detection and incident response. This book reinforces
Security+ certification objectives and prepares students to
work in the real world by applying networking concepts to
solve real business problems. This lab manual is suitable to
accompany any security textbook, but an appendix maps the
labs specifically for easy use with McGraw-Hill textbooks,
Principles of Computer Security: Security+ and Beyond and
Fundamentals of Network Security.
CONTENTS
Introduction: How to Use This Manual. Setting Up Lab Computers. Mozilla
Links—Building a Web Page of Resources. Part 1: Network Basics Ping, Ipconfig,
ARP: Viewing Network Traffic with Ethereal. Default Gateway, Routing/Netstat.
Telnet, 3-way Handshake. Sharing Folders. Net Command. FTP/Web/Netstat.
SMTP Command Line. Setting Up Outlook Express. Project: Bring a Computer
Up on the Network. Part 2: Vulnerability Assessment - Penetration Testing:
Enumeration. Nmap. Superscan. Penetration Testing and Attacks. Sniffing Telnet.
Sniffing and Spoofing Mail. Dsniff. Steganography. Keylogger (Scout). Password
Cracking—John the Ripper. Denial of Service Attack. SubSeven. Vulnerability
Assessment. NeWT. Project: Find and Attack a Computer. Part 3: Prevention - Host
Hardening and Secure Communications: Host Hardening. CIS Scanner. Patch
Management—Service Packs and Hotfixes. Security Templates. Bios Hardening.
Turning Off Unneeded Services. Anti-Virus—AVG. Personal Firewall—Zone
Alarm. Adaware. Configuring Internet Explorer. IIS Lockdown Wizard. Secure
Communicatons. Certificate Server 1. Certificate Server 2. FTP Configuration. SSH.
MD5. SCP. PGP 1. VPN. Policy Writing. Training Plan. Project: Build and Defend
Against an Attack. Part 4: Detection and Response: Intrusion Detection—Snort.
Logs-1: Windows. Logs-2: Linux. Password Recovery. Live Forensics Analysis.
Disk Duplication. Mail Logs. Backup and Restore. Fire CD. Project: Investigation.
Part 5: Appendixes. Port Listing. Virtual PC Tuning
ANTI-HACKER TOOL KIT
Third Edition
by Mike Shema
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226287-2 / MHID: 0-07-226287-7
Professional Book
Organized by category, Anti-Hacker Tool Kit, Third Edition
provides complete details on the latest and most critical
security tools, explains their function, and demonstrates how
to configure them to get the best results.
*
Completely revised to include the latest security tools,
including wireless tools
*
New tips on how to configure the recent tools on Linux,
Windows, and Mac OSX
*
New on the CD-ROM--Gnoppix, a complete Linux system,
ClamAV anti-virus, Cain, a multi-function hacking tool, Bluetooth
tools, protocol scanners, forensic tools, and more
*
New case studies in each chapter
CONTENTS
Part I: Casing the Establishment. Chapter 1: Footprinting Chapter 2: Scanning
Chapter 3: Enumeration. Part II: System Hacking. Chapter 4: Hacking Windows
Chapter 5: Hacking UNIX Chapter 6: Remote Connectivity and VoIP Hacking.
Part III: Network Hacking. Chapter7: Network Devices Chapter 8: Wireless
Hacking Chapter 9: Firewalls Chapter 10: Denial of Service Attacks. Part IV:
Software Hacking. Chapter 11: Hacking Code Chapter 12: Web Hacking Chapter
13: Hacking the Internet User. Part V: Appendices. A: Ports. B: Top 14 Security
Vulnerabilities. Index
82
11/15/06 5:08:49 PM
PRINCIPLES OF COMPUTER SECURITY: SECURITY+
AND BEYOND
by Wm. Arthur Conklin, University of Texas at San Antonio; Gregory
B White, Center for Infrastructure Assurance and Security, University
of Texas San Antonio; Chuck Cothren, University of Texas at San
Antonio; Dwayne Williams, University of Texas at San Antonio and
Roger L. Davis
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225509-6 / MHID: 0-07-225509-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124500-5 / MHID: 0-07-124500-6 [IE]
http://mhteched.com/security/conklin
Learn the essentials of computer and network security while
getting complete coverage of all the objectives for CompTIA’s
Security+ certification exam, plus coverage of the (ISC)2
SSCP certification, which focuses on best practices, roles, and
responsibilities of security experts. Written and edited by leaders
in the IT security field, this text explains the fundamentals of
communication, infrastructure, and operational security. You’ll
also get details on methods to defend your computer systems
and networks and how to prevent attacks.
FEATURES
• 100% coverage of all exam objectives for the Security+
Certification.
• NWCET Reviewed: The National Workforce Center for Emerging
Technologies (NWCET) will review the book, create a crosswalk to
the NWCET IT Skills Standards, and provide additional exercises that
will help teachers and students meet those standards.
• Well illustrated
• Informative sidebars that help students check their knowledge,
reinforce key concepts
• Exam Tip, Caution, and Note icons highlight key topics, end of
chapter quizzes test retention and exam readiness, and Exam Tips
guide the reader through tough technical topics.
• Chapter Review section includes bulleted chapter summary
organized by exam objective, key term list, vocabulary building
exercises, multiple-choice questions, case-study questions, and lab
projects.
• Student CD-ROM will include self-assessment engine with
practice exams and 1-hour of LearnKey online video training.
CONTENTS
1: Introduction and Security Trends. 2: General Security Concepts. 3: Operational/
Organizational Security. 4: The Role of People in Security. 5: Cryptography. 6:
Public Key Infrastructure. 7: Standards and Protocols. 8: The Impact of Physical
Security on Network Security. 9: Network Fundamentals. 10: Infrastructure
Security. 11: Remote Access. 12: Wireless and Instant Messaging. 13: Intrusion
Detection Systems. 14: Security Baselines. 15: Attacks and Malware. 16: E-mail.
17: Web Components. 18: Software Development. 19: Disaster Recovery, Business
Continuity, and Organizational Policies. 20: Risk Management. 21: Change
Management. 22: Privilege Management. 23: Computer Forensics. 24: Security
and Law. A: About the CD-ROM. B: About the Security+ Exam
Sun Microsystem Certification
SCJP SUN® CERTIFIED PROGRAMMER FOR JAVA™ 2
PLATFORM 5 STUDY GUIDE
By Katherine Sierra, and Bert Bates
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225360-3 / MHID: 0-07-225360-6 (with CD)
Professional Book
Get the book that shows you not only what to study, but how
to study. The only classroom-based integrated study system for
professional certification gives you complete coverage of all
objectives for the Sun Certified Programmer and Developer for
Java exam, hundreds of practice exam questions, and hands-on
exercises. The CD-ROM features full practice exam software
with interactive tutorials and lab simulations, plus an adaptive
test engine.
CONTENTS
Part I: The Programmer’s Exam. Ch. 1 Language Fundamentals. Ch. 2 Declarations
and Access Control. Ch. 3 Operators and Assignments. Ch. 4 Flow Control,
Exceptions, Assertions. Ch. 5 Overloading, Overriding, and OO. Ch. 6 java.lang.
Ch. 7 Objects and Collection. Ch. 8 Inner Classes. Ch. 9 Threads. Part II: The
Developer’s Exam. Ch. 10 Introduction to the Developer’s Exam. Ch. 11 Coding
and Development Practices. Ch. 12 Clarity and Maintainability. Ch. 13 GUI.
Ch. 14 Networking Issues. Ch. 15 DB Server. Ch. 16 Exam DocumentationCh.
17 Final Submission and Essay.
Oracle - SQL
HANDS-ON SQL SERVER™ 2005 INTEGRATION
SERVICES
by Ashwani Nanda
2007 (August 2006) / Softcover / 592 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226319-0 / MHID: 0-07-226319-9
Professional Book
In-depth coverage of Microsoft’s powerful new data
integration tool. Learn to maximize the features of SQL Server
2005 Integration Services from this essential guide. HandsOn Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Integration Services makes
learning SSIS easy through the use of extensive real-world
exercises structured around every component within the tool.
You will learn to collect corporate data from various sources
and transform that data for analysis, mining, and reporting
83
11/15/06 5:08:49 PM
Oracle - Database
ORACLE DATABASE 10G EXPRESS EDITION PHP
WEB PROGRAMMING
by Michael McLaughlin
2007 (September 2006) / Softcover with CDROM / 704 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226325-1 / MHID: 0-07-226325-3
Professional Book
Part III: Optimizing PL/SQL Solutions. Chapter 7: Threading PL/SQL Execution
Chapter 8: High Performance PL/SQL. Part IV: Text Management Using PL/SQL
Chapter 9: Introduction to Information Retrieval. Chapter 10: Introduction to
Regular Expressions. Part V: PL/SQL Server Pages and Database Management.
Chapter 11: Leveraging the PL/SQL Toolkit. Chapter 12: Managing the Database.
Appendix A: Regular Expression Metacharacters And Functions. Appendix B:
Oracle Text Supplied Packages. Appendix C: PL/SQL Toolkit Packages. Appendix
D: Basic Primer On Java And Java Database Connectivity (JDBC). Index
This book and CD-ROM package contains everything you
need to get started programming on Oracle Database 10g
Express Edition. Learn, hands-on, how to develop enterprise
applications in PHP which run on Oracle Database 10g
Express Edition. The CD-ROM includes a full version of Oracle
Database 10g Express Edition with all of the code and solutions
from the book.
CONTENTS
ORACLE DATABASE 10G OCP CERTIFICATION ALLIN-ONE EXAM GUIDE
Part I. PHP Language Fundamentals. Chapter 1. Introduction to Zend Core
– Oracle, PHP and Zend . Chapter 2. Installing and Configuring Zend Core and
Oracle Express. Chapter 3. Touring the Zend Core Development Environment
Chapter 4. PHP Basics. Part II. PHP Programming. Chapter 5. PHP Arrays. Chapter
6. PHP Functions. Chapter 7. PHP Objects. Chapter 8. PHP Events and Predefined
Variables. Chatper 9. PHP Error Management and Exception Handling. Part III. PHP
Application Development. Chapter 10. PHP Applied. Chapter 11. PHP File IO
Chatper 12. PHP Forms, Cookies, and Sessions. Part IV. Database Access using
PHP. Chapter 13. Building a Database Connection to Oracle. Chapter 14.
Managing Query Result Sets. Chapter 15. Managing PL/SQL Libraries. Chapter
16. Managing Java Libraries. Chatper 17. Database File Upload and Download
with PHP. Chatper 18. Securing PHP Web Communications. Chapter 19. Zend
Core Java and PHP Extensions. Appendix A. Configuring Oracle 10g HTTP Server
for PHP. Appendix B. Configuring Oracle 10g App Server for PHP. Appendix C.
Configuring & Troubleshooting the Apache Server. Appendix D. Configuring &
Troubleshooting the PHP Environment. Appendix E. PHP Predefined Functions.
Four for the price of one! Oracle Database 10g OCP Certification
All-in-One Exam Guide is the only book that offers thorough
exam prep and a great on-the-job reference for both the latest
OCA and OCP exams. Also includes the Boson’s Oracle selfassessment engine to get experience taking the test in the
environment it will be given
CONTENTS
EXPERT ORACLE PL/SQL
by Ron Hardman, and Michael McLaughlin
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226194-3 / MHID: 0-07-226194-3
Professional Book
Experienced PL/SQL programmers and Oracle developers
will learn to master Oracle's procedural extension to industrystandard SQL. Using this authoritative resource, readers will
become experts at developing robust, high-performance
enterprise applications with PL/SQL. Detailed examples
describe the practical aspect of each feature, and provide ideas
to the reader of how they can best exploit the functionality.
FEATURES
• Expert Oracle PL/SQL picks up where Oracle Database 10g PL/
SQL Programming leaves off, discussing topics related to PL/SQL that
take the reader from advanced to expert. The book does not cover
beginning or intermediate topics.
• Practical examples that can be used immediately will make this
book a favorite of programmers. Example data will be light hearted
and will help to engage the reader. Topic discussions include
illustrations and explanations of the internals of each feature.
• Each chapter includes a section titled Why Would I Use this?. This
section shows the practical aspect of the feature, and provides ideas
to the reader of how they can best exploit the functionality.
• Each feature highlighted also includes a How Does This Work?
section to discuss the internals of the feature.
• All code examples from the book will be made available online.
CONTENTS
Part I: PL/SQL Advanced Concepts, Internals, and Debugging. Chapter 1:
Introduction to Advanced Concepts, Patterns, and Techniques. Chapter 2: PL/SQL
Internals. Chapter 3: Debugging PL/SQL Applications. Part II: Invoker Rights, Java
Libraries, and Object Patterns. Chapter 4: Invoker's-Rights Architecture. Chapter 5:
Extending PL/SQL with Java Libraries. Chapter 6: Implementing PL/SQL Objects
by Damir Bersinic, Bradley Systems Incorporated and Stephen Giles
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225790-8 / MHID: 0-07-225790-3
Professional Book
Outline subject to change based on release of actual exam objectives PART I:
Oracle Database 10g Administrative Workshop I Exam Ch. 1: Oracle Concepts
and Architecture Ch. 2: Installing Oracle Database 10g Ch. 3: Creating an
Oracle Database Ch. 4: Programming and Interfacing with the Oracle Database
Ch. 5: Managing Oracle Processes Ch. 6: Managing Oracle Storage Structures
Ch. 7: Administering Database Users Ch. 8: Managing Database Objects Ch. 9:
Manipulating Database Data Ch. 10: Programming Oracle with PL/SQL Ch. 11:
Securing the Oracle Database Ch. 12: Configuring Oracle Networking Ch. 13:
Managing Oracle Shared Server Ch. 14: Managing Database Performance Ch.
15: Monitoring Oracle Ch. 16: Managing Undo Ch. 17: Dealing with Locking
Ch. 18: Configuring Oracle Database for Backup and Recovery Ch. 19: Backing
up Oracle Databases Ch. 20: Recovering Oracle Databases PART II: Oracle
Database 10g Administrative Workshop II Exam Ch. 21: Managing Globalization
in Oracle Database Ch. 22: Configuring Security for the Listener Ch. 23: Managing
Distributed Transactions Ch. 24: Getting Started with Oracle Recovery Manager
(RMAN) Ch. 25: Using RMAN to Backup Databases Ch. 26: Complete Database
Recovery Ch. 27: Incomplete Database Recovery Ch. 28: Using Oracle Flashback
Database Ch. 29: Recovering from User Errors Ch. 30: Detecting and Recovering
from Database Corruption Ch. 31: Tools for Oracle Database 10g Tuning Ch. 32:
Implementing Materialized Views Ch. 33: Managing Oracle Database Resources
Ch. 34: Automating Administrative Tasks Ch. 35: Advanced Programming and
Administrative Tools and Techniques/ Appendix A: About the CD-ROM
ORACLE HTML DB HANDBOOK
by Brad Brown and Jeff Bernknopf
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225768-7 / MHID: 0-07-225768-7
Professional Book
CONTENTS
Part I: Introduction: Ch 1: Introducing HTML DB. Ch 2: Installing HTML DB.
Ch 3: Using the SQL and Data Workshops. Part II: Creating Applications: Ch 4:
Using the Application Builder. Ch 5. Working with Templates. Ch 6: Using the
Application Utilities. Ch 7: Creating Applications from Different Sources. Part III:
Building Web Pages and Components: Ch 8: Building Web Pages. Ch 9: Creating
Reports. Ch 10: Defining and Processing Forms. Ch 11: Navigating between Pages.
Ch 12: Building Other Components. Ch 13: Adding Computations, Processes
and Validations. Part IV: Web Site and Application Examples: Ch 14: Building a
Customer Order Application. Ch 15: Creating a Questionnaire Application.Part
V: Security and Administration: Ch 16: Defining Security for Your Application.
Ch 17: The Administration Functions. Part VI: Advanced Topics: Ch 18: Tips
and Techniques. Ch 19: HTML DB Best Practices. Appendixes: Appendix A: The
HTML DB APIs. Appendix B: The PL/SQL Web Toolkit and Packages
84
11/15/06 5:08:50 PM
ORACLE DATABASE 10G LINUX ADMINISTRATION
by Wim Coekaerts and Edward Whalen
2006 (October 2005) / Softcover / 560 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-223053-6 / MHID: 0-07-223053-3
Professional Book
Oracle’s “Mr. Linux” details everything from installing the
OS (Red Hat and United Linux) to installing the database to
debugging and troubleshooting to performance, availability,
and scalability. Wim is the Director of Linux Engineering at
Oracle.
CONTENTS
Part I: Oracle on Linux Overview: Ch 1. Introduction to Oracle on Linux. Ch
2. Linux Architecture. Ch 3. Oracle Architecture. Part II: Deploying Oracle
Database 10g on Linux: Ch 4. Sizing Oracle Database 10g on Linux systems. Ch
5. Configuring the Linux system for Oracle. Ch 6. Installing Oracle on Linux. Part
III: Oracle RAC on Linux: Ch 7. RAC Concepts. Ch 8. Deploying RAC on Linux
using OCFS. Ch 9. Deploying RAC on Linux using RAW Devices. Ch 10. RAC on
SAN, NAS and Shared SCSI. Ch 11. Tuning RAC on Linux. Ch 12. Administering
Oracle RAC on Linux. Part IV: Administering Oracle Database 10g on Linux: Ch
13. Administering the Linux System. Ch 14. Administering Oracle on Linux. Ch
15. Backup. Ch 16. Recovery. Ch 17. High Availability Options. Ch 18. Oracle
Standby Database on Linux. Ch 19. Oracle Replication on Linux. Part V: Oracle
Database 10g on Linux: Ch 20. Tuning the Oracle Instance on Linux. Ch 21.
Hardware Tuning and Troubleshooting. Ch 22. Tuning SQL. Ch 23. Indexes,
Partitioning and other Oracle Performance Features
Operating Systems - Windows
XP
And Middleware (Revised). Chatper 26. Databases (New). Chapter 27. Developing
Web Applications And Running A Website (New). VII – Appendices. Appendix A.
How To Find Out More (Revised). Appendix B. Command Summaries(Revised)
WINDOWS VISTA: THE COMPLETE REFERENCE
by Margaret Levine Young, and John Levine
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226376-3 / MHID: 0-07-226376-8
Professional Book
Here is the ultimate one-stop desk reference for Windows
Vista users. Windows Vista: The Complete Reference provides
comprehensive coverage of the newest features of the
operating system. From setting up for optimum performance
and understanding the OS internals to finding files and keeping
computer systems secure and free from spyware, this volume
covers it all. It's the ideal resource for anyone who wants to
truly master Windows Vista.
CONTENTS
PART I: Windows XP Basics. PART II: Keeping Track of Your Files. PART III:
Configuring Windows for Your Computer. PART IV: Working with Text, Numbers,
Pictures, Sound, and Video. Part V: Windows Vista on the Internet. Part VI:
Home and Office Networking with Windows Vista. Part VII: Windows and Disk
Housekeeping. Part VIII: Behind the Scenes: Windows Vista Internals. Part IX:
Appendixes. Appendix A. Differences between Windows Vista versions. Appendix
B: Installing or Upgrading to Windows Vista.
SURVEY OF OPERATING SYSTEMS
Second Edition
by Charles Holcombe, and Jane Holcombe
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225773-1 / MHID: 0-07-225773-3
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/holcombe2e
UNIX: THE COMPLETE REFERENCE
Second Edition
by Kenneth H. Rose, AT&T Laboratories, Douglas A. Host, Rachel
Klee, and Richard R. Rosinski
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226336-7 / MHID: 0-07-226336-9
Professional Book
This expansive resource covers every aspect of UNIX--the fastgrowing, open-source operating system. All existing chapters
have been revised to provide the most cutting-edge coverage
of the latest versions of UNIX. UNIX:The Complete Reference,
Second Edition provides step-by-step instructions on how to
install and configure UNIX on a PC or Mac and use all the
powerful tools and utilities. The book includes up-to-date
examples, new features, and advanced options.
CONTENTS
Part I – Basics For Linux/unix (Revised). Chapter 1. Background (Revised). Chapter
2. Getting Started (Revised). Chapter 3. Working With Files And Directories
(Revised). Chapter 4. Working With Shells And Enhanced Shells (Revised).
Chapter 5. Text Editing (Revised). Chapter 6. The Desktop: Gnome (New).
Chapter 7. Cde And Other Desktops (New). Part II – User Networking. Chapter
8. Electronic Mail (Revised). Chapter 9. Tcp/ip And Other Basic Networking
Protocols (Revised). Chapter 10. Using The Internet (Revised). Part III – System
Administration. Chapter 11. Processes And Scheduling (Revised). Chapter 12.
Security And Authentication (Revised). Chapter 13. Basic System Administration
(Revised). Chapter 14. Advanced System Administration (Revised). Part IV
– Network Administration. Chapter 15. Clients And Servers (Revised). Chapter
16. Administering The Network (Revised). Chapter 17. Using Unix And Windows
Together: Samba And Other Integration Tools (Revised). Part V--tools. Chapter 18.
Filters And Utilities (Revised). Chapter 19. Shell Programming (Revised). Chapter
20. Awk And Sed (Revised). Chapter 21. Perl (Revised). Chapter 22. Python And
Php (New). Chapter 23. Developing Applications (Revised). Chapter 24. Overview
Of Java (Revised). Part VI – Enterprise Solutions. Chatper 25. Unix Applications
This textbook offers a survey of all the major microcomputer
operating systems through real-world case studies, annotated
illustrations, and step-by-step tutorials and projects. It is
designed for IT students who want to learn how to install,
configure, and troubleshoot operating systems. This book
will teach the basic functions of an operating system, such
as the graphical user interface, memory management, device
management, and file management. It also explains how
to install, configure, and troubleshoot each of the major
microcomputer operating systems, including DOS, Windows,
Macintosh, UNIX, and, Linux, as well as explain the purpose
of operating systems in different hardware environments, such
as microcomputers and networks.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Covers objectives of A+ Operating Systems Technologies exam.
• More coverage of DOS with expanded coverage of DOS
commands.
• Expanded coverage of networking and network operating systems
including coverage of Windows Server 2003.
• Mac & Linux: Updated for new versions of Macintosh and Linux.
FEATURES
• Surveys the major operating systems, including DOS, Windows
NT/2000/XP, Mac OS9/OSX, and Linux. Teaches students how to
install, configure, and troubleshoot operating systems.
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Operating Systems. 2 Disk Operating system (DOS). 3 Windows
NT 4.0 Workstation. 4 Windows 2000 Professional. 5 Windows XP Professional. 6
Making the Windows GUI Work for you. 7 Managing Local Security in Windows.
8 A Look under the Hood. 9 Introduction to Network Server Operating Systems
10 The Client Side of Networking. 11 Linux on the Desktop. 12 Macintosh OS
X. Appendix. Glossary
85
11/15/06 5:08:51 PM
Operating Systems - MAC OS X
HOW TO DO EVERYTHING WITH MAC OS X TIGER
Second Edition
by Kirk McElhearn
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226158-5 / MHID: 0-07-226158-7
Professional Book
Experience the excitement of Apple’s revolutionary new release
with help from this hands-on guide. How to Do Everything
with Mac OS X Tiger explains all the features. Learn to use the
Finder to easily navigate files, folders, and applications, set up
and manage user accounts, access the Internet, and print and
fax documents. Digital entertainment features such as iPhoto,
iMovie, and iTunes are also covered, as are easy methods for
networking and security. A special two-color section called
“Writers and Their Macs” profiles famous writers such as Arthur
Golden (Memoirs of a Geisha) and screenwriter Mike Rich
(Finding Forrester) who discuss how their Macs are integral to
their creativity.
contact your local
[email protected]
COMPLIMENTARY
COPIES
86
11/15/06 5:08:52 PM
2007-2008 NEW CIT - Computer Concepts Titles
2007 New Titles
Contents

WILLIAMS
Using Information Technology, 7e ..........................88
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226071-7 / MHID: 0-07-226071-8
Brief Computer Concepts................................88
Comprehensive Computer Concepts...............90
2008 New Titles
Software .........................................................91

O'LEARY
Computing Essentials 2008 Complete, 19e ..............90
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110153-0 / MHID: 0-07-110153-5

O'LEARY
Computing Essentials 2008 Introductory, 19e .........88
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329468-1 / MHID: 0-07-329468-3
87
87-92_CIT-Comp.indd 87
11/15/06 5:20:48 PM
CIT - Computer Concepts
Brief Computer Concepts
NEW
COMPUTING ESSENTIALS 2008 INTRODUCTORY
EDITION
Nineteenth Edition
By Timothy J. O'Leary; Arizona State University, Linda I. O'Leary;
Independent
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329468-1 / MHID: 0-07-329468-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128640-4 / MHID: 0-07-128640-3 [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/ce2008
The O'Leary Series is one of the most trusted and effective
resources for teaching and learning software applications and
computer concepts. Computing Essentials 2008 is written
by Tim O'Leary who teaches the course every year ensuring
accurate up-to-date content for students , combining current
topics and technology into a highly illustrated design geared to
catch students' interest and motivate them. Students are given
a streamlined, concise, attractive approach to the fundamental
issues surrounding the personal computing environment.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Careers in IT – Each chapter includes a job description for a
different career in Information Technology. These descriptions
provide students with education requirements, as well as salary
ranges.
• End of chapter material – The end of chapter material has been
revised and redefined, making it easy for instructors and students to
exercise different skill sets.
• Applying Technology: Making correlations between chapter
material and real life.
• Expanding Your Knowledge: Citing sources other than the
textbook to learn more about a specific topic, which encourages
students to dig deeper to obtain a more technical understanding.
• Writing about Technology: Sharpening critical thinking, analysis,
and writing skills by responding to technology-related issues such as
privacy, security and ethics.
• New Application-Based Material – Features updated coverage of
new Windows and Mac operating systems, expanded coverage of
e-commerce and new material in the following thought-provoking
sections: Look to the Future. Making IT Work for You. On the Web
Explorations.
• Online Learning Center (OLC) is a website that follows the text
chapter-by-chapter. OLC content is ancillary and supplementary
germane to the textbook, as students read the book, they can
go online to take self-grading quizzes, review material, or work
through interactive exercises. OLCs can be delivered multiple ways
– professors and students can access them directly through the
textbook website, through PageOut, or within a course management
system (i.e. WebCT, Blackboard, TopClass, or eCollege.)
FEATURES
Strong Concept Reinforcement: Concept Checks, Crossword Puzzles,
Multiple-Choice, and Matching Exercises offer students the chance to
become concept experts.
Relevant Research Motivation: Marginal notes embedded in each
chapter ask students to research a topic in the chapter on the internet.
Students also are offered advice regarding common technologyrelated problems through Tips boxes.
Visually Appealing Chapter Openers and Closers: Summaries for
each chapter make it easy for students to review important concepts.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Information Technology, the Internet, and You. Chapter 2 The Internet,
the Web, and Electronic Commerce. Chapter 3 Basic Application Software. Chapter
4 Specialized Application Software. Chapter 5 System Software. Chapter 6 The
System Unit. Chapter 7 Input and Output. Chapter 8 Secondary Storage. Chapter 9
Communication and Networks. Chapter 10 Privacy and Security. Chapter 11 Your
Future and Information Technology. Appendices. The Evolution of the Computer
Age. The Buyer’s Guide: How to Buy Your Own Microcomputer System. The
Upgrade’s Guide: How to Upgrade Your Microcomputer System.
NEW
USING INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
Seventh Edition
By Brian Williams, Deakin University, and Stacey Sawyer
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226071-7 / MHID: 0-07-226071-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110768-6 / MHID: 0-07-110768-1 [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/uit7e
Using Information Technology, 7e covers the fundamental
computing concepts that are part of the digital age, including
software, hardware, data, people, and procedures along with
expanded coverage on Security and ethics. The text centers
on educating today’s technology consumer, using themes of
ethics, the Internet, and communications to demonstrate how
the changing world of technology influences our lives and the
decisions we make.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Emphasis on CUTTING-EDGE CURRENCY: Users and reviewers
have applauded the fifth edition for being more up to date than other
texts. The Complete Version, for example, ends many chapters with
a forward-looking section that offers a preview of technologies to
come.
• New material on cyborgs, E-911, 3G wireless, Intel P4 chip,
touch-screen voting, WiFi, etc.
• “Click-along” feature carries currency to a new level by offering
updates to material throughout the life of the book.
FEATURES
• Expanded coverage of Security: New Security icon in the margins
indicates discussions of computer and communications security.
• Expanded coverage of Ethics: Ethics Iconin the margins highlight
important ethical matters throughout the book.
• More Info!” These internet related margin items ask students
questions about content in the current sectionof the text book that
suggest where students can go on the internet to find answers. These
items teach students search skills and provide more information
about specific topics. Web Excersizes at the end of the chapter
extend this activity.
• Why It’s Important” end of chapter summaries provide not only
definitions of all the key terms, but also a concise explanation of why
each term is important and relevant for the student.
• New and different Internet Exercises: Additional Stage 3 learning
activities have been created as interesting Internet activities.
• Emphasis on PRACTICALITY: Practical advice, of the sort found in
newspaper technology sections, is expressed in the following ways:
• In-Text: Early discussion of Internet in Chap. 2, explanation of PC
ad in hardware chapters, and discussion of “e-concepts” throughout)
• End-of-chapter Experience Boxes: Example- “Should You Upgrade
to Windows XP or Mac OS X?”
• In-chapter Practical Action boxes: Example- “Tips for Managing
Your E-Mail”
• New to this edition: Survival Tips in page margins: Example“When Your PC Freezes Up”
• Integration of Ethics: Throughout the text, not just in a final
chapter or boxes
• Emphasis on READABILITY & LEARNING REINFORCEMENT: The
text offers several features for motivating and helping unmotivated
students:
• Interesting (i.e., people-oriented) writing
• Student Guide preceding Chap. 1 with tips on how to succeed
with the text and the course
• Material in bite-size portions
• Key terms AND definitions all in boldface
• Key questions (instead of learning objectives) to help students read
with purpose
• Concept Checks throughout text so readers can check their
retention
88
11/15/06 5:20:49 PM
• Photos showing unusual and interesting computer uses
• Pedagogically helpful artwork
• Innovative end-of-chapter summaries that describe why a concept
or term is important
• Chapter Review with 3 levels of review questions
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction to Information Technology: Your Digital World. Chapter
2 The Internet & the World Wide Web: Exploring Cyberspace. Chapter 3
Application Software For Your Productivity and Creativity. Chapter 4 System
Software: The Power Behind the Power. Chapter 5 Hardware: The CPU &
Storage: How to Buy a Multimedia Computer System. Chapter 6 Hardware: Input
& Output. Taking Charge of Computing & Communications. Chapter 7 Networks
& Communications, The “New Story” in Computing. Chapter 8 Files, Databases,
& E-Commerce: Digital Engines for the New Economy. Chapter 9 The Challenges
of the Digital Age: Society &Information Technology Today. Chapter 10 The
Promises of the Digital Age Society &Information Technology Tomorrow
PETER NORTON’S COMPUTING FUNDAMENTALS
Sixth Edition
by Peter Norton
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297847-6 / MHID: 0-07-297847-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111715-9 / MHID: 0-07-111715-6 [IE]
Peter Norton is an acclaimed computer software entrepreneur
who is active in civic and philanthropic affairs. He serves on
the boards of several scholastic and cultural institutions and
currently devotes much of his time to philanthropy. Mr. Norton
made his mark in the computer industry as a programmer
and businessman. Norton Utilities™, Norton Antivirus™, and
other utility programs are installed on millions of computer
worldwide. He is also the best selling author of computer
books. Mr. Norton sold his PC-software business to Symantec
Corporation in 1990 but continues to write and speak on
computers, helping millions of people better understand
information technology.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Revised and Updated: Completely revised and updated to cover
new technologies and adapt to our quickly changing world.
• Improved Design: Improved four-color designed sporting a
cleaner, more open look with vivid photographs and illustrations.
• Sensible organization: Each book consists of units, each divided
into 2 sections that enable instructors to more flexibly adapt the book
to their course and visa versa.
• New “At Issue” Features: All new articles written by Business
Week IT columnists, spotlighting trends in information technology.
These new articles will offer compelling looks at how technology is
used in to help people do their work or make their lives better.
• New “Computer Career” Articles: Interviews with real IT
professionals will put a human face to the many exciting career IT
career opportunities available.
• Unit and Section Review Activities: Each Section will include
a key term list, key term quiz, multiple choice questions, essay
questions, and lab projects. Each Unit will include additional lab
projects, discussion questions, research report, and ethical issue
questions.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introducing Computer Systems. Chapter 2: Presenting the Internet.
Computing Keynotes #1: Creating Your Own Web Page. Chapter 3: Interacting
with Your Computer. Chapter 4: Seeing, Hearing, and Printing Data. Computing
Keynotes #2: Buying Your First Computer. Chapter 5: Processing Data. Chapter
6: Storing Data. Chapter 7: Using Operating Systems. Chapter 8: Working with
Application Software. Chapter 9: Networks. Chapter 10: Working in the Online
World. Computing Keynotes #3: Professional Certification Programs. Chapter
11: Development of Information Systems. Chapter 12: Protecting Your Privacy,
Your Computer, and Your Data. Computing Keynotes#4: Viruses. Appendix A:
The History of Microcomputers. Appendix B: Answers to Self-Checks. Glossary.
Index
PETER NORTON’S ESSENTIAL CONCEPTS,
STUDENT EDITION
Sixth Edition
by Peter Norton
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297849-0 / MHID: 0-07-297849-X
NEW TO THIS EDITION
new technologies and adapt to our quickly changing world.
into 2 sections that enable instructors to more flexibly adapt the book
• New “At Issue” Features: All new articles written by Business
Week IT columnists, spotlighting trends in information technology.
These new articles will offer compelling looks at how technology is
used in to help people do their work or make their lives better.
questions.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introducing Computer Systems: Lesson 1A: Exploring Computers and
Their Uses. Lesson 1B: Interacting with Your Computer. Chapter 2: Presenting the
Internet: Lesson 2A: The Internet and the World Wide Web. Lesson 2B: E-Mail
and Other Internet Services. Computing Keynotes #1: Creating Your Own Web
Page. Chapter 3: Computing Alone and in Groups: Lesson 3A: Transforming
Data into Information. Lesson 3B: Networking Basics. Chapter 4: Introduction to
Software: Lesson 4A: Operating System Basics. Lesson 4B: Productivity Software.
Computing Keynotes #2: Viruses. Chapter 5: Living in the Online World: Lesson
5A: Doing Business in the Online World. Lesson 5B: Staying Safe in the Online
World. Appendix A: The History of Microcomputers. Appendix B: Answers to
Self-Checks. Glossary. Index
COMPUTERS, COMMUNICATIONS, AND
INFORMATION CORE WITH POWERWEB AND
INTERACTIVE COMPANION 3.0
Seventh Edition
by Sarah Hutchinson-Clifford and Brian Sawyer
2000 / 384 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-250812-3 / MHID: 0-07-250812-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116960-8 / MHID: 0-07-116960-1 [IE, text only]
http://www.mhhe.com/cit/concepts/cci7e/main.mhtml
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Overview: The Foundation for Your Future. Chapter 2 Processing
Hardware: Turning Data into Something You Can Use. Chapter 3 Input/Output
Hardware: Interfaces Between You and the Computer. Chapter 4 Storage
Hardware: Preserving Data and Information. Chapter 5 System Software:
The Director. Chapter 6 Applications Software: The User’s Tools. Chapter 7
Communications Technology: Starting Along the Information Superhighway.
Chapter 8 The Internet and the World Wide Web: Working Online
89
11/15/06 5:20:50 PM
Comprehensive Computer
Concepts
NEW
COMPUTING ESSENTIALS 2008,
COMPLETE EDITION
Nineteenth Edition
by Timothy J. O'Leary; Arizona State University-Tempe, and Linda I.
O'Leary; Independent
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110153-0 / MHID: 0-07-110153-5 [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/ce2008
The O’Leary Series is one of the most trusted and effective
resources for teaching and learning software applications and
computer concepts. Computing Essentials 2008 is written
by Tim O’Leary who teaches the course every year ensuring
accurate up-to-date content for students, combining current
topics and technology into a highly illustrated design geared to
catch students’ interest and motivate them. Students are given
a streamlined, concise, attractive approach to the fundamental
issues surrounding the personal computing environment.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Careers in IT – Each chapter includes a job description for a
different career in Information Technology. These descriptions
provide students with education requirements, as well as salary
ranges.
• End of chapter material – The end of chapter material has been
revised and redefined, making it easy for instructors and students to
exercise different skill sets.
• Applying Technology: Making correlations between chapter
material and real life.
• Expanding Your Knowledge: Citing sources other than the
textbook to learn more about a specific topic, which encourages
students to dig deeper to obtain a more technical understanding.
• Writing about Technology:
Sharpening critical thinking, analysis, and writing skills by
responding to technology-related issues such as privacy, security and
ethics.
• New Application-Based Material – Features updated coverage of
new Windows and Mac operating systems, expanded coverage of
e-commerce and new material in the following thought-provoking
sections:
• Look to the Future
• Making IT Work for You
• On the Web Explorations
• Online Learning Center (OLC) is a website that follows the text
chapter-by-chapter. OLC content is ancillary and supplementary
germane to the textbook, as students read the book, they can
go online to take self-grading quizzes, review material, or work
through interactive exercises. OLCs can be delivered multiple ways
– professors and students can access them directly through the
textbook website, through PageOut, or within a course management
system (i.e. WebCT, Blackboard, TopClass, or eCollege.)
FEATURES
• Strong Concept Reinforcement: Concept Checks, Crossword
Puzzles, Multiple-Choice, and Matching Exercises offer students the
chance to become concept experts.
• Relevant Research Motivation: Marginal notes embedded in each
chapter ask students to research a topic in the chapter on the internet.
Students also are offered advice regarding common technologyrelated problems through Tips boxes.
• Visually Appealing Chapter Openers and Closers: Summaries for
each chapter make it easy for students to review important concepts.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Information Technology, the Internet, and You. Chapter 2 The Internet,
the Web, and Electronic Commerce. Chapter 3 Basic Application Software. Chapter
4 Specialized Application Software. Chapter 5 System Software. Chapter 6 The
System Unit. Chapter 7 Input and Output. Chapter 8 Secondary Storage. Chapter
9 Communication and Networks. Chapter 10 Privacy and Security. Chapter 11
Information Systems. Chapter 12 Databases. Chapter 13 Systems Analysis and
Design. Chapter 14 Programming and Languages. Chapter 15 Your Future and
Information Technology. Appendices. The Evolution of the Computer Age. The
Buyer’s Guide: How to Buy Your Own Microcomputer System. The Upgrade’s
Guide: How to Upgrade Your Microcomputer System.
PETER NORTON’S INTRODUCTION TO
COMPUTERS
Sixth Edition
by Peter Norton
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297890-2 / MHID: 0-07-297890-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111716-6 / MHID: 0-07-111716-4 [IE]
NEW TO THIS EDITION
new technologies and adapt to our quickly changing world. Internet
applications are covered earlier in the text while new and updated
coverage is provided about the architecture of the Internet.
• New!: Chapter devoted to information security that helps student
understand how best to protect themselves and their computer
systems.
• Updated!: Chapter on database management includes new
coverage of enterprise systems and Web databases, such as Oracle
and MySQL.
• New “At Issue” Features: All new articles spotlight trends in
information technology. These new articles will offer compelling
looks at how technology is used in to help people do their work or
make their lives better.
questions.
into 2 lessons that enable instructors to more flexibly adapt the book
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introducing Computer Systems. Chapter 2: Presenting the Internet.
Computing Keynotes #1: Creating Your Own Web Page. Chapter 3: Interacting
with Your Computer. Chapter 4: Seeing, Hearing, and Printing Data. Computing
Keynotes #2: Buying Your First Computer. Chapter 5: Processing Data. Chapter
6: Storing Data. Chapter 7: Using Operating Systems. Chapter 8: Working with
Application Software. Chapter 9: Networks. Chapter 10: Working in the Online
World. Computing Keynotes #3: Professional Certification Programs. Chapter
11: Database Management. Chapter 12: Development of Information Systems.
Chapter 13: Software Programming and Development. Chapter 14: Protecting
Your Privacy, Your Computer, and Your Data. Computing Keynotes#4: Viruses.
Appendix A: The History of Microcomputers. Appendix B: Answers to Self-Checks.
Glossary. Index
90
11/15/06 5:20:51 PM
COMPUTING ESSENTIALS 2006,
COMPLETE EDITION
Seventeenth Edition
by Timothy J O’Leary, Arizona State University - Tempe and Linda I
O’Leary, Independent
2006 (January 2005) / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226156-1 / MHID: 0-07-226156-0
(with Student CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124967-6 / MHID: 0-07-124967-2 [IE]
Computing Essentials 2005 offers a unique, visual orientation
that gives students a basic understanding of computing
concepts. Computing Essentials 2005 is one of the few books
on the market that is written by a professor who still teaches
the course every semester and loves it. While combining
current topics and technology into a highly illustrated design
geared to catch students’ interest and motivate them, this text
provides an accurate snapshot of computing today. When
bundled with software application lab manuals, students are
given a complete representation of the fundamental issues
surrounding the personal computing environment.
CONTENTS
You See Them Coming? 12 Systems Development: Why Is Packaged Software
Sometimes Not Enough? 13 Computer Programming: How Can You Create Your
Own Software? 14 Organizational Information Systems: Why Are Computers the
Heavy Artillery in Business? 15 Computer Brainpower: How Can You Use Your
Computer to Help You Think?
Software
INTERACTIVE COMPANION CD-ROM VERSION 3.0
by McGraw-Hill
2000
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-250195-7 / MHID: 0-07-250195-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123455-9 / MHID: 0-07-123455-1 [IE, CD-ROM]
Chapter 1 Information Technology, the Internet, and You Chapter 2 The Internet,
the Web, and Electronic Commerce Chapter 3 Basic Application Software Chapter
4 Specialized Application Software Chapter 5 System Software Chapter 6 The
System Unit Chapter 7 Input and Output Chapter 8 Secondary Storage Chapter
9 Communications and Networks Chapter 10 Privacy and Security Chapter 11
Information Systems Chapter 12 Databases Chapter 13 Systems Analysis and
Design Chapter 14 Programming and Languages Chapter 15 Your Future and
Information Technology/ The Evolution of the Computer Age / The Buyer’s Guide:
How to Buy Your Own Microcomputer System / The Upgrader’s Guide: How to
Upgrade Your Microcomputer System / Glossary / Credits / Index
I-SERIES: COMPUTING CONCEPTS,
COMPLETE EDITION
Second Edition
by Stephen Haag, University of Denver, Maeve Cummings,
Pittsburg State University,and Alan Rea, Western Michan University,
Kalamazoo
2004 / 576 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283411-6 / MHID: 0-07-283411-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121467-4 / MHID: 0-07-121467-4 [IE]
Overview: This exciting and innovating concepts text
emphasizes all that is current, cutting-edge, and interesting
to students in the introductory course. Focusing specifically
on users, consumers and purchasers of technology, this text
provides a no-nonsense coverage of the absolute essentials
for using technology in today’s wired (and wireless!) world.
The I-Series offers excellent coverage of the basics, as well as
extensive information on building a Web site, E-Commerce,
implications of technological advances, buying your first PC,
maintaining a computer system, and more. Each chapter also
contains coverage of ethics, security, and privacy.
CONTENTS
1 Computers In Your Life Today: Are You Ready To Become Wired? 2 The World
Wide Web And The Internet: How Vast Is Your Virtual Imagination? 3 Application
Software and Digital Media: What Can Your Computer Do For You? 4 System
Software, Virus Protection and File Management: What Software Runs Your
Hardware? 5 Input, Output and Storage: What Kind of Peripheral Devices Would
Suit Your Needs? 6 Computer Architecture: How Does a Computer Work? 7 The
Nuts and Bolts of Networks: How Can You Use Networks to Your Advantage?
8 E-Commerce and Web Site Development: How Do You Harness the Power
of the Web? 9 Ethics, Security, and Privacy: What’s Right, What’s Wrong, and
How Can You Protect Yourself? 10 Databases and Data Warehouses: How Do
You Organize Large Amounts of Information? 11 Emerging Technologies: Can
contact your local
[email protected]
91
11/15/06 5:20:52 PM
92
11/15/06 5:20:52 PM
2007-2008 NEW Management Information Systems Titles
Systems ~ Contents
Advanced MIS .............................................................. 106
Office Systems ............................................................ 103
Data Mining ................................................................. 109
93
93-110_MIS.indd 93
11/15/06 5:27:12 PM
2007-2008 NEW Management Information Systems Titles
2007 New Titles
2008 New Titles


APPLEGATE
Corporate Information Strategy and
Management: Text and Cases, 7e ............................106
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294775-5 / MHID: 0-07-294775-6


BATES
Principles of Voice and Data
Communications .....................................................103
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225732-8 / MHID: 0-07-225732-6

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312368-4 / MHID: 0-07-312368-4

HAAG
Information Systems Essentials, 2e ..........................95
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351152-8 / MHID: 0-07-351152-8
AVISON
Information Systems Development, 4e ....................101
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711417-6 / MHID: 0-07-711417-5
[MH UK Title]
HAAG
Business Driven Technology, 2e ..............................95

O’BRIEN
Management Information Systems, 8e.....................96
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351154-2 / MHID: 0-07-351154-4

WHITTEN
Introduction to Systems Analysis and Design ..........100
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340294-9 / MHID: 0-07-340294-X
CARR
Data Communications and Network
Security ...................................................................103
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297604-5 / MHID: 0-07-297604-7

DePALMA
Annual Editions: Computers in Society
06/07, 13e ...............................................................107
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352832-8 / MHID: 0-07-352832-3

HAAG
Management Information Systems for the
Information Age with CD and MiSource, 6e ........... 97
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323062-7 / MHID: 0-07-323062-6

HAYEN
SAP R/3 Enterprise Software ....................................108
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299067-6 / MHID: 0-07-299067-8

MANNINO
Database Design, Application Development,
and Administration, 3e ............................................ 99
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294220-0 / MHID: 0-07-294220-7

O’BRIEN
Introduction to Information Systems, 13e ...............96
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110710-5 / MHID: 0-07-110710-X

OLSON
Introduction to Business Data Mining .....................109
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-295971-0 / MHID: 0-07-295971-1

WHITTEN
Systems Analysis and Design Methods, 7e ...............100
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110766-2 / MHID: 0-07-110766-5
94
93-110_MIS.indd 94
11/15/06 5:27:12 PM
Management Information Systems
Introduction to Information
Systems
CD and OLC only) T5: Designing Database Applications (Student CD and OLC
only) T6: Basic Skills Using Access T7: Problem Solving Using Access (Student
CD and OLC only) T8: Creating Forms and Reports Using Access (Student CD
and OLC only) T9: Designing Web Pages (Student CD and OLC only) T10: Basic
Skills Using FrontPage (Student CD and OLC only)
NEW
BUSINESS DRIVEN TECHNOLOGY
Second Edition
By Stephen Haag, Paige Baltzan and Amy Phillips of University of
Denver
2008 (November 2006) / 600 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312368- 4 / MHID: 0-07-312368-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332306-0 / MHID: 0-07-332306-3 (with CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110318-7 / MHID: 0-07-110318-1 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bdt2e
BDT takes a business-first approach, starting each chapter by
explaining the value of a business initiative and then detailing
the technology that enables the initiative. This revolutionary
approach instantly demonstrates the ‘why’ to business students
without boring them with the ‘how’. The adaptive chapter/
plug-in organization allows the instructor to adjust content
according to their business or technical preferences.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Number of Business Plug-Ins increased from 10 to 15. Includes
new Plug-Ins on business processes (B2), enterprise architectures (B4),
networks and telecommunications (B5), and e-business (B11).
• Number of Technology Plug-Ins increased from 7 to 10. New PlugIns include discussions on Access, FrontPage, and web design and
expanded discussions of Excel.
• Number of case studies increased from 55 to 64.
• Apply Your Knowledge appendix has been updated and expanded. It
contains 50 projects that focus on student application of core concepts
and tools. All productivity tool projects come with Captivate solution
file that walks students step-by-step through the solution, which saves
instructors valuable time.
FEATURES
• Business-first perspective: Allows instructors to easily convey the
purpose of technology and systems to support business needs and take
advantage of opportunities.
• Adaptive organization: 19 core chapters, 15 business plug-ins and
10 technology plug-ins allows the instructor to use the core chapters
as a framework and select plug-ins that support their specific course
objectives.
NEW
INFORMATION SYSTEMS ESSENTIALS
Second Edition
By Stephen Haag, University of Denver and Maeve Cummings,
Pittsburg State University
2008 (November 2006)
ISBN-13: 9780-07-351152-8 / MHID: 0-07-351152-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332308-4 MHID: 0-07-332308-X
(with MISource 2007)
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cit/haag/
9 chapters plus 3 appendices cover the traditional core material
of MIS. A comprehensive set of group projects and e-commerce
projects support an applied component to the course.
Consistent with Haag’s best-selling MIS for the Information
Age, IS Essentials 2/e conveys the impact of IS on the individual
with contemporary writing and lively examples.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• New prologue quickly conveys the value of this course to the
non-MIS major.
• HUGE appendix of projects
• Concept Reinforcement sidebars in every chapter break up the
reading with short, hands-on activities.
FEATURES
• Haag’s Style of writing and story telling.
MIS and your career, was the prologue in the 1st edition, now appears
as an appendix.
CONTENTS
Prologue / Chapter 1: The Information Age in which You Live Chapter 2: Major
Business Initiatives Chapter 3: Databases and Data Warehouses Chapter 4:
Decision Support and Artificial Intelligence Chapter 5: Electronic Commerce
Chapter 6: Systems Development Chapter 7: Enterprise Infrastructure and
Integration Chapter 8: Protecting People and Information Chapter 9: Emerging
Trends and Technologies Appendix A: Hardware and Software Appendix B:
Network Basics Appendix C: MIS and Your Career Appendix D: Projects
CONTENTS
Unit 1 Chapter 1: Business Driven Technology Chapter 2: Identifying Competitive
Advantages Chapter 3: Strategic Initiatives for Implementing Competitive
Advantages Chapter 4: Measuring the Success of Strategic Initiatives Chapter
5: Organizational Structures that Support Strategic Initiatives Unit 2 Chapter 6:
Valuing Organizational Information Chapter 7: Storing Organizational Information
– Databases Chapter 8: Accessing Organizational Information – Data Warehouse
Unit 3 Chapter 9: Enabling the Organization – Decision Making Chapter 10:
Extending the Organization – Supply Chain Management Chapter 11: Building a
Customer-Centric Organization –CRM Chapter 12: Integrating the Organization
from End-to-End – ERP Unit 4 Chapter 13: Creating Innovative Organizations
Chapter 14: E-Business Chapter 15: Creating Collaborative Partnerships Chapter
16: Integrating Wireless Technology in Business Unit 5 Chapter 17: Building
Software to Support an Agile Organization Chapter 18: Outsourcing in the 21st
Century Chapter 19: Developing a 21st Century Organization / Business Plugins: B1: Business Basics B2: Business Process B3: Hardware and Software B4:
Enterprise Architactures B5: Networks and Telecommunications B6: Information
Security B7: Ethics B8: Supply Chain Management B9: Customer Relationship
Management B10: Enterprise Resource Planning B11: E-Business B12: Emerging
Trends and Technologies B13: Strategic Outsourcing B14: Systems Development
B15: Project Management / Technical Plug-ins: T1: Personal Productivity Using
IT (Student CD and OLC only) T2: Basic Skills Using Excel T3: Problem Solving
Using Excel (Student CD and OLC only) T4: Decision Making Using Excel (Student
95
93-110_MIS.indd 95
11/15/06 5:27:13 PM
Systems
NEW
INTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION SYSTEMS
Thirteenth Edition
By James A. O’Brien, Northern Arizona University, and George
Marakas, University of Kansas–Lawrence
2007 (January 2006) / 544 pages / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110710-5 / MHID: 0-07-110710-X [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/obrien
O’Brien’s Introduction to Information Systems 13e continues
to reflect the movement toward enterprise-wide business
applications. George Marakas from the University of Kansas
joins as a co-author on this new edition. New real world case
studies correspond with this curriculum shift. The text’s focus
is on teaching the general business manager how to use and
manage the most current IT technologies such as the Internet,
Intranets, and Extranets for enterprise collaboration, and how IT
contributes to competitive advantage, reengineering business
processes, problem solving, and decision-making.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
* Chapter 2: Expanded coverage of Competitive Advantage.
* Chapter 4: Complete and expanded coverage of XML, Java, and
Open Source code.
* Chapter 6: New coverage of Bluetooth and VoIP (Voice Over IP).
* Chapter 7: Expanded coverage of Enterprise Business Systems.
* Chapter 12: New coverage of Global IT and Outsourcing, including
Off-shoring.
CONTENTS
Module I Foundation Concepts. 1 Foundations of Information Systems in Business.
SECTION I: Foundation Concepts: Information Systems in Business. SECTION II:
Foundation Concepts: The Components of Information Systems. 2 Competing
with Information Technology. SECTION I: Fundamentals of Strategic Advantage.
SECTION II: Using Information Technology for Strategic Advantage. Module
II Information Technologies. 3 Computer Hardware. SECTION I: Computer
Systems: End User and Enterprise Computing. SECTION II: Computer Peripherals:
Input, Output, and Storage Technologies. 4 Computer Software. SECTION I:
Application Software: End User Applications. SECTION II: System Software:
Computer System Management. 5 Data Resource Management. SECTION I:
Technical Foundations of Database Management. SECTION II: Managing Data
Resources. 6 Telecommunications and Networks. SECTION I: The Networked
Enterprise. SECTION II: Telecommunications Network Alternatives. Module III
Business Applications. 7 Electronic Business Systems. SECTION I: Enterprise
Business Systems. SECTION II: Functional Business Systems. 8 Electronic
Commerce Systems. SECTION I: Electronic Commerce Fundamentals. SECTION
II: e-Commerce Applications and Issues. 9 Decision Support Systems. SECTION
I: Decision Support in Business. SECTION II: Artificial Intelligence Technologies
in Business. Module IV Development Processes. 10 Developing Business/IT
Solutions. SECTION I: Developing Business Systems. SECTION II: Implementing
Business Systems. Module V Management Challenges. 11 Security and Ethical
Challenges. SECTION I: Security, Ethical, and Societal Challenges of IT. SECTION
II: Security Management of Information Technology. 12 Enterprise and Global
Management of Information Technology. SECTION I: Managing Information
Technology. SECTION II: Managing Global IT. Review Quiz Answers. Selected
References Glossary for Business Professionals. Name Index. Company Index.
Subject Index.
NEW
MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS
Eighth Edition
By James O’Brien, Northern Arizona University and George Marakas,
University of Kansas-Lawrence
2008 (November 2006)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351154-2 / MHID: 0-07-351154-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-332309-1 / MHID: 0-07-332309-8
(with MiSource 2007)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110140-0 / MHID: 0-07-110140-3 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/obrien
The benchmark text for the syllabus organized by technology
(a week on databases, a week on networks, a week on systems
development, etc.) taught from a managerial perspective.
O’Brien defines technology and then explains how companies
use the technology to improve performance. Real world cases
finalize the explanation.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Bigger Real World Cases: A new 2-page format delivers more
detail and depth. Additional discussion questions and activities for
each case allow for a variety of apply the cases to class. Thirty-eight
new Real World Cases have been added for the 8th edition.
• Completely revised Analysis Exercises at the end of each chapter
provide really interesting experiences applying the chapter concepts.
• New Material, Same Organization – the list of updates to each
chapter of each edition are simply too lengthy to list; it’s MIS after all.
• Modular Chapter Organization breaks each chapter into two
units, allowing instructors to skip units without lost continuity.
FEATURES
• Managerial Perspective: O’Brien continues to present the business
impact of information systems as the company leaders would view it.
Table of Contents, proven effective over several editions, are
essentially the same.
•
CONTENTS
MODULE I Foundation Concepts 1. Foundations of Information Systems in
Business Section I Foundation Concepts: Information Systems in Business Section
II Foundation Concepts: The Components of Information Systems 2. Competing
with Information Technology Section I Fundamentals of Strategic Advantage
Section II Using Information for Strategic Advantage MODULE II Information
Technologies 3. Computer Hardware Section I Computer Systems: End User and
Enterprise Computing Section II Computer Peripherals: Input, Output, and Storage
Technologies 4. Computer Software Section I Application Software: End User
Applications Section II System Software: Computer System Management 5. Data
Resource Management Section I Managing Data Resources Section II Technical
Foundations of Database Management 6. Telecommunications and Networks
Section I The Networked Enterprise Section II Telecommunications Network
Alternatives MODULE III Business Applications 7. Electronic Business Systems
Section I Enterprise Business Systems Section II Functional Business Systems 8.
Enterprise Business Systems Section I Customer Relationship Management: The
Business Focus Section II Enterprise Resource Planning: The Business Backbone
Section III Supply Chain Management: The Business Network 9. Electronic
Commerce Systems Section I Electronic Commerce Fundamentals Section II
e-Commerce Applications and Issues 10. Decision Support Systems Section
I Decision Support in Business Section II Artificial Intelligence Technologies
in Business MODULE IV Development Processes 11. Developing Business/IT
Strategies Section I Planning Fundamentals Section II Implementation Challenges
12. Developing Business/IT Solutions Section I Developing Business Systems
Section II Implementing Business Systems MODULE V Management Challenges
13. Security and Ethical Challenges Section I Security, Ethical, and Societal
Challenges of IT Section II Security Management of Information Technology
14. Enterprise and Global Management of Information Technology Section I
Managing Information Technology Section II Managing Global IT
96
93-110_MIS.indd 96
11/15/06 5:27:14 PM
NEW
MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS FOR THE
INFORMATION AGE WITH CD AND MISOURCE
Sixth Edition
By Stephen Haag, University Of Denver, Maeve Cummings, Pittsburg
State University, and Amy Phillips, University of Denver
2007 (December 2005)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-323062-7 / MHID: 0-07-323062-6
(with MISource and CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110777-8 / MHID: 0-07-110777-0 [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/haag
Chapters cover what instructors want students to know about
MIS while Extended Learning Modules (XLMs) show students
what they can do with MIS. A contemporary writing style
and a wealth of examples engage students like no other MIS
text. Arranged with chapter opening cases that highlight
how an organization has successfully implemented many of
the chapter’s concepts and chapter closing cases that help
students apply what they just learned gives students the handson knowledge that is applicable in both their personal and
professional experiences.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Haag 6e features new Extended Learning Module L on using
FrontPage to build websites and new Extended Learning Module M
on programming in Excel with Visual Basic.
• New or updated case studies on industry and global perspectives
that highlight with current trends.
• New Student CD-ROM allows users to review additional XLMs
which focus on practical, hands-on knowledge applicable in a variety
of workplace scenarios.
• Updated or expanded coverage of numerous topics including all
forms of outsourcing
• Nearly 85 “Team Work” and “On Your Own” Projects
CONTENTS
Chapter One: The Information Age in Which you Live: Changing the Face of
Business. Extended Learning Module A: Computer Hardware and Software.
Chapter Two: Major Business Initiatives: Gaining Competitive Advantage with IT.
Extended Learning Module B: The World Wide Web and the Internet. Chapter
Three: Database and Data Warehouses: Building Business Intelligence. Extended
Learning Module C: Designing Databases and Entity-Relationship Diagramming.
Chapter Four: Decision Support and Artificial Intelligence: Brainpower for Your
Business. Extended Learning Module D: Decision Analysis with Spreadsheet
Software. Chapter Five: Electronic Commerce: Strategies for the New Economy.
Extended Learning Module E: Network Basics (on CD). Chapter Six: Systems
Development: Phases, Tools, and Techniques. Extended Learning Module F:
Building a Web Page with HTML (on CD). Chapter Seven: Enterprise Infrastructure
and Integration: Building the Dynamic Enterprise. Extended Learning Module G:
Object-Oriented Technologies (on CD). Chapter Eight: Protecting People and
Information: Threats and Safeguards. Extended Learning Module H: Computer
Crime and Forensics. Chapter Nine: Emerging Trends and Technologies: Business,
People, and Technology Tomorrow. Extended Learning Module I: Building
an E-Portfolio. Extended Learning Module J: Implementing a Database with
Microsoft Access (on CD). Extended Learning Module K: Careers in Business
(on CD). Extended Learning Module L: Building Web Sites with FrontPage (on
CD). Extended Learning Module M: Programming in Excel with VBA (on CD).
Group Projects. Glossary. Notes. Photo Credits. Index
INFORMATION SYSTEMS SOLUTIONS
A Project Approach
By Richard Van Horn, Albert Schwarzkopf, and R. Leon Price, all of
University Of Oklahoma-Norman
ISBN-13: 9780-07-352436-8 / MHID: 0-07-352436-0
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/vanhorn
The development, implementation and maintenance of
computer-based information system solutions require
innovative thinking, research and communication skills,
extensive documentation, and the ability to effectively apply
proposed solutions. Information System Solutions: A Project
Approach integrates basic information systems knowledge with
these requirements, culminating in their combined application
in a project-based real-world scenario. Three different project
models, an SDLC-based chapter organization and an emphasis
on teamwork make this text easily adaptable to your teaching
needs. Successfully tested in the classroom and approved
by thousands of students, Information System Solutions: A
Project Approach prepares your students to be active, effective
contributors to the professional field of information systems.
The text includes:
• Attention to various areas of interest, including general IS concepts
and environmental, client-specific factors (strategy, marketing, and
organizational behavior).
• A chapter organization that follows the System Development Life
Cycle (SDLC).
• Coverage of three project models–case, passive live, and active
live–for classroom use that enrich and enliven students’ learning
experience through “Learning by Doing.
CONTENTS
PART 1 Project and Team Organization. CHAPTER 1 Introduction to the Project
Approach. CHAPTER 2 Organizing and Working in a Project Team. CHAPTER
3 Project Management. CHAPTER 4 Data Modeling. CHAPTER 5 Process and
Object Modeling. PART 2 Project Definition. CHAPTER 6 Understanding the
Client’s Problem and Organization. CHAPTER 7 Learning from the Current
Situation. PART 3 Proposed System. CHAPTER 8 Proposed System Specifications.
CHAPTER 9 Alternatives, Evaluation, and Recommendation. PART 4 System
Delivery. CHAPTER 10 Outsourcing. CHAPTER 11 System Design. CHAPTER
12 Proof of Concept. CHAPTER 13 Project Completion. APPENDIX A GB Video
Final Report
MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS
Fourth Edition
by Gerald V Post, Univ of the Pacific and David L Anderson, DePaul
U/McGowan Center
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294779-3 / MHID: 0-07-294779-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125732-9 / MHID: 0-07-125732-2 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/postmis4e
Post opens every chapter with a business problem and uses
the chapter to explain the processes and technology that can
solve the problem. This greater emphasis on problem-solving
enables the instructor to quickly show “why” this material
matters.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction Part One: Information Technology Infrastructure
Chapter 2: Information Technology Foundations Chapter 3: Networks and
Telecommunications Chapter 4: Database Management Part Two: Operations
Chapter 5: Computer Security Chapter 6: Transactions and Operations Chapter
7: Enterprise Integration Chapter 8: Electronic Business Part Three: Tactics
and Strategies Chapter 9: Teamwork Chapter 10: Business Decisions Chapter
11: Strategic Analysis Part Four: Organizing Businesses and Systems Chapter
12: Systems Development Chapter 13: Organizing MIS Resources Chapter 14:
Information Management and Society / Glossary / Organization Index/ Subject
Index
97
93-110_MIS.indd 97
11/15/06 5:27:14 PM
APPLICATION CASES IN MANAGEMENT
INFORMATION SYSTEMS
Fifth Edition
by James N Morgan, Northern Arizona University
2005 / 192 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123836-6 / MHID: 0-07-123836-0 [IE]
Morgan’s Application Cases in Management Information
Systems is an introductory level MIS business casebook, which
requires the use of spreadsheet and database software and the
Internet to solve managerial problems. It may be used as a
standalone casebook or packaged with any of our introductory
Management Information Systems textbooks. The book was
developed to give students additional projects or exercises to
apply the concepts of what they have learned in their course.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Business Applications and the Internet. Chapter 2: Internet Cases.
Chapter 3: Developing Spreadsheet Applications. Chapter 4: Spreadsheet Cases.
Chapter 5: Developing Database Applications. Chapter 6: Database Cases
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY AND
MANAGEMENT
Second Edition
by Ronald L Thompson, Wake Forest University and William CatsBaril, University of Vermont
2003 / 704 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293661-2 / MHID: 0-07-293661-4
(with SIMNET MIS)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111063-1 / MHID: 0-07-111063-1
[IE with SIMNET MIS]
http://www.mhhe.com/Thompson-Cats-Baril
CONTENTS
Module I: Application of Information Technology. Chapter 1: Introduction
to Information Tech nol o gy and Man age ment. Chapter 2: Hardware and
Software. Chapter 3: Data Management. Chapter 4: Tele com munica tions
and Networking. Chapter 5: Internet and E-Business. Module II: Information
Systems and Management. Chapter 6: Organizational Use of IS. Chapter 7: IS
and Organizational Responsiveness. Chapter 8: IS to Support Decision Making.
Chapter 9: IS and Organizational Competition. Module III: Development and
Management of IS. Chapter 10: IS and Business Process Management. Chapter
11: IS Development. Chapter 12: IS Sourcing and Application Service Providers.
Chapter 13: IS Management. Chapter 14: IT and Society. Glossary. Index
FOUNDATIONS OF INFORMATION SYSTEMS
by Vladimir Zwass, Fairleigh Dickinson University
1998 / 800 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115638-7 / MHID: 0-07-115638-0 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Information Systems & Their Capabilities. 2 Fundamental Concepts
of Information Systems. 3 Competing with Information Systems. 4 Information
Systems Hardware. 5 Information Systems Software. 6 Database Management.
7 Telecommunications, the Internet, & Information Systems Architecture. 8
Support of Individual & Group Knowledge Work. 9 Transaction Processing &
Management Reporting Systems. 10 Decision Support & Executive Information
Systems. 11 Expert Systems & Applied Artificial Intelligence. 12 Information
Systems for Business Functions. 13 Business Reengineering, Information Systems
Planning & Acquisition. 14 Managing & Controlling Information Systems. 15
Development Life Cycle & Systems Analysis. 16 From Design to Maintenance of
Information Systems. 17 Ethical, Societal, & Global Issues in Information Systems.
18 Innovating with Information Systems for Global Reach.
Information & Society
INFORMATION AND KNOWLEDGE SOCIETY
by Suliman Al-Hawamdeh, Division of Information Studies, Nanyang
Technological University and Thomas L Hart, School of Information
Studies, Florida State University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120238-1 / MHID: 0-07-120238-2
An Asian Publication
CONTENTS
Preface. Acknowledgement. Chapter 1: Information Society: Global
Perspective. Chapter 2: Information Infrastructure. Chapter 3:
Communication and Information Transfer. Chapter 4: Electronic
Publishing in the Digital Era. Chapter 5: Knowledge Management and
the Economy of Ideas. Chapter 6: Intellectual Property and Copyright
in the Digital Era. Chapter 7: Education in the Digital Age. Chapter 8:
Privacy in the Information Age. Chapter 9: Information Security and
Ethics. Chapter 10: Information Standards. Bibliography. Index
98
93-110_MIS.indd 98
11/15/06 5:27:15 PM
Database Management
NEW
DATABASE DESIGN, APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT,
AND ADMINISTRATION
Third Edition
By Michael V. Mannino, University Of Colorado-Denver
2007 (December 2005) / 768 pages / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294220-0 / MHID: 0-07-294220-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110701-3 / MHID: 0-07-110701-0 [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/mannino
Mannino’s Database Management provides the information
you need to learn relational databases. The book teaches
students how to apply relational databases in solving basic
and advanced database problems and cases. The fundamental
database technologies of each processing environment are
presented; as well as relating these technologies to the advances
of e-commerce and enterprise computing. This book provides
the foundation for the advanced study of individual database
management systems, electronic commerce applications, and
enterprise computing.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
* Extended coverage of Oracle 10g and SQL 2003, the latest database
applications.
* Expanded coverage of data modeling and system requirements.
* Expanded and updated coverage of the ‘normalization of data’.
* Special focus on optimizing the physical database.
* New coverage on data warehousing, and the latest trends in data
mining.
* Expanded coverage of distributed computing.
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
Designing and Building Business Applications
Third Edition
by Gerald Post, University of the Pacific
2005 / 512 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111181-2 / MHID: 0-07-111181-6
[IE with Student CD]
http://www.mhhe.com/postdbms3e
Gerald Post’s Database Management Systems takes an
introductory approach to developing database applications;
teaching students to evaluate a business situation and then
build and design a database application. From systems design
to distribution and integration of the system and everything in
between, students will gain knowledge by getting a hands-on
experience. The third edition has been revised to offer a more
flexible way to deliver database management application.
Post continues to have a textbook that covers the core
theories and ideas of database management. Now, it offers
two different workbooks depending on the software that the
instructor utilizes. One workbook covers Oracle and the other
workbook covers Access; thus allowing the instructor to pick
the workbook that will be employed in the course and to go
more ‘in-depth’ with either tool. The book can also be used as
a standalone; thus having the professor chose what software
will be utilized in teaching this course.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction Systems Design 2. Database Design 3. Data Normalization Queries
4. Data Queries 5. Advanced Queries and Subqueries Applications 6. Forms,
Reports & Applications 7. Data Integrity and Transactions 8. Data Warehouses
& Data Mining Database Administration 9. Data Administration 10. Distributed
Databases and the Internet
CONTENTS
Part 1: Introduction to Database Environments. Chapter 1: Introduction to
Database Management. Chapter 2: Introduction to Database Development.
Part 2: Understanding Relational Databases. Chapter 3: The Relational Data
Model. Chapter 4: Query formulation with SQL. Part 3: Data Modeling. Chapter
5: Understanding Entity Relationship Diagrams. Chapter 6: Developing Data
Models for Business Databases. Part 4: Relational Database Design. Chapter 7:
Normalization of Relational Tables. Chapter 8: Physical Database Design. Chapter
9: Advanced Query Formulation with SQL. Part 5: Application Development with
Relational Databases. Chapter 10: Application Development with Views. Chapter
11: Stored Procedures and Triggers. Part 6: Advanced Database Development.
Chapter 12: View Design and Integration. Chapter 13: Database Development
for Student Loan Limited. Part 7: Managing Database Environments. Chapter 14:
Data and Database Administration. Chapter 15: Transaction Management. Chapter
16: Data Warehouse Technology and Management. Chapter 17: Client-server
Processing and Distributed Databases. Chapter 18: Object Database Management
Systems. Glossary of Terms. Bibliography. Index
ORACLE SQL AND INTRODUCTORY PL/SQL
by Linda Preece
2004 / 264 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124158- 8 / MHID: 0-07-124158-2 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/preece
Two market issues provide momentum for this class and this
text. First, there is a movement for MIS majors to obtain at least
one professional certification before they graduate. Since there
is no licensing body for Software Engineers or Systems Analysts
(as there is for accountants or engineers) more technical
programs are offering certification programs from leading
software developers such as Microsoft, Oracle, and Cisco.
This book prepares students for the first Oracle certification
exam and more importantly, it is an ideal replacement to
Oracle Corporation’s Student Guides for introductory SQL
and PL/SQL. Second, most Oracle SQL books are written for
professional programmers and developers- they read like trade
books. This text is written for students with all the pedagogy
one would find in our successful textbooks and moves at a
pace more suitable for students. Advanced technical topics are
covered in thorough detail and not treated in encyclopedic
form as if this were a reference book.
CONTENTS
Preface. 1. Basic Select Statements. 2. Functions Applied to Single Values. 3.
Advanced Select Statements. 4. Report Formatting. 5. Making Changes to Table
Contents. 6. Table Structures and Constraints. 7. Additional Objects. 8. User
Privileges. 9. Introductory PL/SQL. 10. Advanced PL/SQL Concepts. Appendix
A: General Syntax. Appendix B: The Two Databases
99
93-110_MIS.indd 99
11/15/06 5:27:16 PM
DATABASES: DESIGN, DEVELOPMENT AND
DEPLOYMENT USING MICROSOFT ACCESS
Second Edition
by Peter Rob and Elie Semaan both of Middle Tennessee State
University
2004
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-288630-6 / MHID: 0-07-288630-7
(with Student CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121805-4 / MHID: 0-07-121805-X [IE]
Development Chapter 3: Project Management Part Two: Systems Analysis
Methods Chapter 4: Systems Analysis Chapter 5: Fact-Finding Techniques for
Requirements Discovery Chapter 6: Modeling System Requirements with Use
Cases Chapter 7: Data Modeling and Analysis Chapter 8: Process Modeling
Chapter 9: Object-Oriented Analysis and Modeling Using the UML Chapter 10:
Feasibility Analysis and the System Proposal Part Three: Systems Design Methods
Chapter 11: Systems Design Chapter 12: Application Architecture and Modeling
Chapter 13: Database Design Chapter 14: Output Design and Prototyping Chapter
15: Input Design and Prototyping Chapter 16: User Interface Design Chapter 17:
Object-Oriented Design and Modeling Using the UML Part Four: Beyond Systems
Analysis and Design Chapter 18: Systems Construction and Implementation
http://www.mhhe.com/it/rob
Rob’s Databases: Design, Development & Deployment Using
Microsoft Access is a book that teaches the more advanced
topics of database-design through the use of Microsoft
Access. The 2nd edition has been completely updated to
give students the most up-to-date information. By using
Microsoft’s Access 2002, students will learn the intricacies of
developing a database. Also with the ever- growing area of web
programming, students will have a chapter tying database and
web programming together and another chapter specifically on
VB Script. Lastly, a revamped chapter on security will address
the ever-changing and important issues.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Database Vocabulary, Concepts, and Design Tools. Chapter 2
Normalizing the Database table Structures. Chapter 3 The POS Database Design
Process. Chapter 4 Implementing the Database Design. Chapter 5 Queries.
Chapter 6 Form Development. Chapter 7 Reports and Labels. Chapter 8 Macros
and Macro Groups. Chapter 9 Access and the Internet. Chapter 10 Implementing
the POS Database Applications. Chapter 11 The Database in the Web. Chapter
12 Database Security
System Analysis & Design
NEW
SYSTEMS ANALYSIS AND DESIGN METHODS
Seventh Edition
By Jeffrey L. Whitten, Purdue University–West Lafayette, and Lonnie
D. Bentley, Purdue University–West Lafayette
2007 (December 2005) / 768 pp / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110766-2 / MHID: 0-07-110766-5 [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/whitten
Today’s students want to practice the application of concepts.
As with the previous editions of this book, the authors write
to balance the coverage of concepts, tools, techniques, and
their applications, and to provide the most examples of system
analysis and design deliverables available in any book. The
textbook also serves the reader as a professional reference for
best current practices.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Chapter 10: Enhanced and expanded coverage of the ObjectOriented approach.
• Chapters 7, 10, 18: New material on the UML 2.0 updates.
• Expanded discussion on feasibility, including environmental and
political considerations.
• Chapter 5: Expanded coverage of Context diagrams.
• New updated coverage VB.NET and C-Sharp throughout the
book.
NEW
INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMS ANALYSIS AND
DESIGN
By Jeffrey L Whitten and Lonnie D Bentley of Purdue University-West
Lafayette
2008 (December 2006) / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340294-9 / MHID: 0-07-340294-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128581-0 / MHID: 0-07-128581-4 [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/whitten
A complete, but less complex approach to SA&D. Introduction
to Systems Analysis & Design is organized like Whitten’s
best-selling Systems Analysis & Design Methods, but without
the information systems architecture framework theme that
overwhelms some students. Each chapter covers the same
topics, but stops short of advanced details that are unnecessary
to the typical first course.
FEATURES
• No Systems Architecture Framework While this method is still
• Recent reference to the Oracle acquisition of PeopleSoft.
CONTENTS
Preface / Part One The Context of Systems Development Projects / 1 The Context
of Systems Analysis and Design Methods 2 Information System Building Blocks
3 Information Systems Development 4 Project Management / Part Two Systems
Analysis Methods / 5 Systems Analysis 6 Fact-Finding Techniques for Requirements
Discovery 7 Modeling System Requirements with Use Cases 8 Data Modeling and
Analysis 9 Process Modeling 10 Object-Oriented Analysis and Modeling Using
the UML 11 Feasibility Analysis and the System Proposal / Part Three Systems
Design Methods / 12 Systems Design 13 Application Architecture and Modeling
14 Database Design 15 Output Design and Prototyping 16 Input Design and
Prototyping 17 User Interface Design 18 Object-Oriented Design and Modeling
Using the UML / Part Four Beyond Systems Analysis and Design / 19 Systems
Construction and Implementation 20 Systems Operations and Support / Photo
Credits / Glossary/Index
important to many and a big reason for the success of Whitten’s SA&D
Methods, removing it makes the subject more accessible to many
students.
• Streamlined Chapter Content The last layer of depth has been
removed from each subject, allowing instructors to cover more ground
with fewer distractions.
CONTENTS
Part One: The Context of Systems Development Projects Chapter 1: The
Context of Systems Analysis and Design Methods Chapter 2: Information Systems
100
93-110_MIS.indd 100
11/15/06 5:27:16 PM
NEW
INFORMATION SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT
Fourth Edition
By David Avison, University of Southampton and ESSEC and Guy
Fitzgerald, Brunei University
2006 (March 2006) / 656 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711417-6 / MHID: 0-07-711417-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125315-4 / MHID: 0-07-125315-7 [IE]
Information Systems Development has been adopted as the key
text for many information systems, business and management,
and computer science courses. The book has seven parts
which relate to the Information Systems Development
Context, the Systems Development Lifecycle, Themes of
Systems Development, Techniques, Methodologies, Tools
and Toolsets and finally Issues and Frameworks. This structure
enables flexible use, either sequentially or by selecting sections
or chapters to fit the specific needs of particular courses and
favoured approaches. Offering comprehensive coverage
from traditional approaches through to the most recent agile
methods, the book’s unique strength lies in its combination
of descriptions and insight into methodologies, techniques
and tools with the analysis of context, issues and real-world
problems associated with information systems development.
Retaining these existing strengths, the fourth edition has been
thoroughly updated and revised to reflect progress in this fastpaced discipline and to include the authors’ recent experience
of teaching with the text, as well as feedback from reviewers,
colleagues and students.
CONTENTS
Preface / Part 1: Introduction / 1. Context 2. Information systems development /
Part 2: The life cycle approach / 3. Information systems development life cycle /
Part 3: Themes in information systems development / 4. Organisational themes
5. People themes 6. Modelling themes 7. Rapid and evolutionary development
8. Engineering themes 9. External development / Part 4: Techniques / 10. Holistic
techniques 11. Data techniques 12. Process techniques 13. Object-oriented
techniques 14. Project management techniques 15. Organizational techniques
16. People techniques 17. Techniques in context / Part 5: Tools and Toolsets / 18.
Tools 19. Toolsets / Part 6: Methodologies / 20. Process-oriented methodologies
21. Blended 22. Object-oriented methodologies 23. Rapid development
methodologies 24. People-oriented methodologies 25. Organisational-oriented
methodologies 26. Frameworks / Part 7: Methodology issues and comparisons /
27. Issues 28. Methodology comparisons / Bibliography / Index
SYSTEMS ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
An Active Approach
by George Marakas, University of Kansas--Lawrence
2006 (December 2004) / 464 pages / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297607-6 / MHID: 0-07-297607-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111619-0 / MHID: 0-07-111619-2 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/marakas
This new book provides a concise text that teaches students first
how to identify the problem, before analyzing and designing a
solution. Marakas applies the structure method of SA&D with
some coverage of object-oriented methods as an alternative.
This text is accompanied by a web-based case simulation
option that provides a realistic experience for students while
automating administration for the instructor.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 The Systems Development Environment Chapter 2 So What is the
Problem? Chapter 3 Identification and Slelction of Development Projects Chapter 4
Systems Requirements Determination Chapter 5 Modeling the Processes and Logic
Chapter 6 Modeling the Data: Conceptual and Logical Data Modeling Chapter
7 Case Tools and Joint and Rapid Application Development Chapter 8 Moving
from Analysis to Design Chapter 9 Designing Systems for Diverse Environments
Chapter 10 Designing the Files and Databases Chapter 11 Designing the System
Output Chapter 12 Designing the Inputs and User Interface Chapter 13 Designing
the Systems Internals Chapter 14 Implementing and Maintaining the System
Appendix A Project Management: Process, Techniques, and Tools Appendix B
Object-Oriented Analysis and Design.
BASIC INFORMATION SYSTEMS ANALYSIS AND
DESIGN
by Myrvin Chester, University of Wolverhampton and Avtar Athwall,
University of Wolverhampton
2002 / 250 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-709784-4 / MHID: 0-07-709784-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122921-0 / MHID: 0-07-122921-3 [IE]
CONTENTS
Readers’ Guide, General. Chapter 1 is a general introduction to the subject of the
book, and discusses the important terms to be used. Chapter 2 deals with the way
systems analysis and design fit into the software life cycle of an information system,
together with a discussion of the role of the systems analyst. Chapter 3 looks in
more detail at the several ways in which the requirements of a new information
system may be discovered, and their incorporation into the requirements catalogue.
Chapter 4 covers the techniques of soft systems analysis; its use in the discovery
of the requirements of an information system and possible organisational and
social implications. Chapter 5 discusses the important topics of report writing and
presentations. Chapters 6 and 7 are the parts of book dealing with the way the
relationship between data in a system can be modelled using entity relationship
diagrams. Chapters 8 and 9 look at the techniques for modelling the processes of
a system and the way information flows into, out of, and between those processes;
as well as where information may be stored. This chapter uses the modelling
technique of data flow diagrams. Chapter 9 concerns three ways in which processes
in information systems may be described more formally than by using ordinary
English. It covers decision tables, decision trees and structured English. Chapter
10 describes the procedure of logicalisation, which follows from the diagrams of
the current information system and leads to the design of a new system. Chapter
11 onwards will be systems design
101
93-110_MIS.indd 101
11/15/06 5:27:17 PM
SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT CASE STUDIES
by M Gordon Hunter
1998 / 264 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115984-5 / MHID: 0-07-115984-3 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Initial Investigation. 2 Requirements Analysis. 3 System Specification and Design.
4 Construction. 5 Installation. 6 Operation/Maintenance. 7 Review.
Object-Oriented System Analysis
& Design
OBJECT-ORIENTED SYSTEMS ANALYSIS AND
DESIGN USING UML
Third Edition
by Simon Bennett, Celesio AG, Steve McRobb, De Montfort
University, and Ray Farmer, Coventry University
2006 (August 2005) / 624 pages / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-711000-0 / MHID: 0-07-711000-5
Browse http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/bennett
The book provides a clear, practical framework for development
that uses all the major techniques from UML 2.0. It follows
an iterative and incremental approach based on the industrystandard Unified Process. It places systems analysis and design
in the context of the whole systems lifecycle, and includes
generic analysis and design issues. Two realistic case studies
are used throughout the book--one for illustrative examples
and the other for practical exercises for the reader. The book
is structured in four parts, which can be flexibly combined
to meet the needs of the syllabus. The first part provides the
background to information systems analysis and design and
to object-orientation. The second begins with two case study
chapters, and focuses on the activities of requirements gathering
and systems analysis, and the basic notation of the Unified
Modelling Language (UML). The third part covers the activities
of system design and UML notation for object design. The
final part examines the later stages of the systems development
lifecycle, reuse and software development methodologies.
CONTENTS
1. Information Systems: What Are They? 2. Problems in Information Systems
Development. 3. Avoiding the Problems. 4. What is Object-Orientation? Agate
Limited Case Study (1) Food Co Limited Case Study 5. Modelling Concepts 6.
Requirements Capture. Agate Limited Case Study (2). 7. Requirements Modelling.
Agate Limited Case Study (3). 8. Refining the Requirements Model. 9. Object
Interaction. 10. Specifying Operations. 11. Specifying Control. Agate Limited
Case Study (4). 12. System Architecture. 13. Systems Design. 14. Detailed
Design. 15. Design Patterns. 16. Human-Computer Interaction. 17. Designing
Boundary Classes. 18. Data management design. Agate Limited Case Study (5). 19.
Implementation. 20. Reusable components. 21. Software Development Process.
Appendix A: Notation summaries. Appendix B: Selected Solutions and Answer
Pointers. Glossary. Bibliography. Index.
INTRODUCTION TO OBJECT-ORIENTED ANALYSIS
AND DESIGN
by Stephen R Schach, Vanderbilt University - Nashville
2004 / 544 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121878- 8 / MHID: 0-07-121878-5 [IE with CD]
http://www.mhhe.com/schachooad
This text will be the first to present an object-oriented
methodology from the outset for beginning Systems Analysis
and Design students. It is the first book to introduce objectoriented methods without relying on classical methods to
introduce key concepts or without requiring students to know
Java or C++. It will presume no knowledge whatsoever about
process modeling or data modeling. The widely used UML
notation (unified modeling language) will be used throughout
the book for all diagrams and model renderings. The key
benefit to this approach is that it makes the course easier
to teach and learn since many students come to this course
with limited backgrounds having only taken one introductory
MIS course. Also, this approach is appealing because objectoriented methodology is widely used in industry.
CONTENTS
Part One: Introduction to UML and the Unified Process: Chapter 1. Introduction
to Information Systems. Chapter 2. How Information Systems are Developed.
Chapter 3. The Object-Oriented Paradigm, UML, and the Unified Process. Part
Two: UML and the Unified Process: Chapter 4. The Requirements Workflow
I. Chapter 5. The Requirements Workflow II. Chapter 6. The Object-Oriented
Analysis Workflow. I. Chapter 7. The Object-Oriented Analysis Workflow. II.
Chapter 8. The Object-Oriented Design Workflow. Chapter 9. The Workflows and
Phases of the Unified Process. Chapter 10. More on UML. Part Three: Major Topics
in Systems Analysis and Design: Chapter 11. CASE. Chapter 12. Teams. Chapter
13. Testing. Chapter 14. Management Issues. Chapter 15. Planning and Estimating.
Chapter 16. Maintenance. Chapter 17. User-Interface Design. Chapter 18. WebBased Information Systems. Chapter 19. Introduction to Database Management
Systems. Chapter 20 Technical Topics. Appendix A. Term Project: Chocoholics
Anonymous. Appendix B. Object-Oriented Design: Osbert Oglesby Case Study.
Appendix C. Object-Oriented Design: MSG Foundation Case Study. Appendix D
Implementation: Osbert Oglesby Case Study. Appendix E. Java Implementation:
MSG Foundation Case Study
OBJECT ORIENTED SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT
by Ali Bahrami, Rhode Island College
1999 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-256-25348-1 / MHID: 0-256-25348-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116090-2 / MHID: 0-07-116090-6 [IE]
CONTENTS
PART I: Introduction Chapter 1 Overview of Object-Ori ent ed Systems
Development Chapter 2 Object Basics Chapter 3 Systems Development Life
Cycle: Unified Approach PART II: Methodology and Modeling Chapter 4 ObjectOriented Methodology Chapter 5 Unified Modeling Language PART III: ObjectOriented Analysis Chapter 6 Object-Oriented Analysis: The Use Case Driven
Process Chapter 7 Object Analysis: Classification Chapter 8 Object Relationship
Analysis PART IV: Object-Oriented Design Chapter 9 Object-Oriented Design
Process and Benchmarking Chapter 10 Designing Classes: Defining Attributes and
Methods Chapter 11 Object Storage and Access Layer Chapter 12 Designing the
View Layer: Toward Object-Oriented User Interface (OOUI) PART V: Software
Quality Chapter 13 Measuring User Satisfaction and Systems Usability Chapter
14 Software Quality Assurance Appendix A Document Template Appendix B
Windows Basics Glossary Index
102
93-110_MIS.indd 102
11/15/06 5:27:18 PM
Data Communications/
Telecommunications/Office
Systems
NEW
PRINCIPLES OF VOICE AND DATA
COMMUNICATIONS
By Regis Bates, TC International Consulting Inc and Marcus Bates
2007 (April 2006) / 816 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-225732-8 / MHID: 0-07-225732-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125767-1 / MHID: 0-07-125767-5 [IE]
Website: http//www.mhhe.com/bates1e and http://www.mhhe.com/
batesvdc
Principles of Voice and Data Communication is a technology
book for the non-technical student, a comprehensive overview
of the entire networking industry built on unrivaled real-world
experience. With its helpful pedagogy, teaching support,
and student-friendly tone, Principles of Voice and Data
Communication gives students the foundation they need to
enter, and succeed in, the technology and communications
fields.
FEATURES
• Author Regis “Bud” Bates has nearly 40 years’ experience in the
communications industry, and his work as both a technology manager
and a successful consultant give him an insight into the field that no
competitor can match.
• The book maintains a powerful real-world focus, emphasizing
how communications topics and technologies are implemented in
the workplace. The authors address the reader as professionals, not
professors.
• “Working In This Field” boxes expand a topic by exploring it from
the perspective of real-world technology practitioners. Web links give
students the opportunity to go further and explore the topic in even
greater depth.
• The end-of-chapter material is loaded with pedagogical tools for
reinforcing the material, including summaries, review questions (about
25 per chapter), and problems and exercises to work in class.
A dozen cases allow students to explore communications topics in
detail and in a realistic setting.
• Brought to you by the author of the Voice and Data Communications
Handbook, the standard reference work on the subject in the US and
around the world.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Principles of Voice and Data Communications-An Introduction Chapter
2 The Evolution of the Telephone Set Chapter 3 Introduction of the Carriers and
Regulation in the Industry Chapter 4 Signaling System 7, Intelligent Networks and
Number Portability Chapter 5 Analog versus Digital Communications Chapter
6 Integrated Services Digital Network and SONET Chapter 7 Data standards in
Use Chapter 8 Data Communications Chapter 9 The Internet Chapter 10 Local
Area Networks (LANs) Chapter 11 Packets, Frames and Cell Switching Concepts
Chapter 12 xDSL Chapter 13 Cable Modem Systems and Technology Chapter 14
Overview of Cellular communications Chapter 15 Security and Virtual Private
Networks (VPN
NEW
DATA COMMUNICATIONS AND NETWORK
SECURITY
by Houston H Carr, Auburn University, and Charles Snyder, Auburn
University
2007 (July 2006) / 512 pages / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 9780-07-297604-5 / MHID: 0-07-297604-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110297-1 / MHID: 0-07-110297-3 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/carr2007
Written for students and managers who do not have a technical
background, Data Communications and Network Security
comprehensively introduces students to the technology and
management of data communications. This includes both wired
and wireless technology as well as comprehensive coverage
of network security, helping both the organization and the
individual create and maintain a data-safe environment. The
book’s unique organization allows the material to be presented
in a variety of ways, making the book a strong match to any
teaching approach.
FEATURES
• Business Impact: Carr/Snyder present technology from the
perspective of how it effects a business.
• Written for business students.
• Running case study
CONTENTS
Part I: The Basics of Communications 1. Basics of Communications Technology
2. Media and Their Applications 3. Architecture, Models, and Standards Part
II: Network Basics 4. Building a Network: Topology and Protocols 5. Network
Form and Function Part III: Wide-Area Networks: The Internet 6. From LANs
to WANs: Broadband Technology 7. The Internet, Intranets, and Extranets 8.
Internet Applications Part IV: Wireless Networks 9. Wireless Networks: The Basics
10. Wireless Networks: Issues and Management Part V: Security 11. Network
Security 12. Wireless Network Security Part VI: Network Management and
Control 13. Monitoring and Control of Network Activity 14. Network and Project
Management Appendix A: Analog Voice Capabilities Appendix B: Epilogue:
Emerging Technologies, Innovation, and Risks
DATA COMMUNICATIONS AND NETWORKS
by David Miller, Rochester Institute Technology
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296404-2 / MHID: 0-07-296404-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111624-4 / MHID: 0-07-111624-9 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/miller1e
A friendlier voice in an area crowded with technical, formal
textbooks, Miller’s style reaches the students quickly and
effectively. The abundance of chapter projects and the audio/
visual support of concepts enables instructors to keep students
engaged.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Data Communications—An Introduction Chapter 2: Local Area
Networks—An Introduction Chapter 3: Local Area Networks—Topologies and
Architectures Chapter 4: Local Area Networks—Connectivity Chapter 5: Network
Operating Systems Chapter 6: Data Storage and Storage Networks Chapter 7:
Voice Networks Chapter 8: Wide Area Networks Chapter 9: Network Security
Chapter 10: The Internet Appendix A: A Brief History of Data Communications
and Computer Networks
103
93-110_MIS.indd 103
11/15/06 5:27:19 PM
THE MANAGEMENT OF TELECOMMUNICATIONS:
Business Solutions to Business Problems
Second Edition
Decision Support Systems
by Houston H Carr, Auburn University - Auburn and Charles Snyder,
Auburn University - Auburn
2003 / 736 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-291893-9 / MHID: 0-07-291893-4
(with NETVIZ CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119928-5 / MHID: 0-07-119928-4 [IE]
DECISION SUPPORT AND DATA WAREHOUSE
SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Part I Communication Basics. Chapter 1 What is Technology? What is
Telecommunications? Chapter 2 Where did the Telephone come from and
how does it Work? Chapter 3 What Media do we use for Telecommunications?
Part II Networks. Chapter 4 Data Communications: What is it? Chapter 5
Data Communications: Conversion, Modulation, and Multiplexing. Chapter 6
Telecommunications Models. Chapter 7 Networks by Topology: Protocols. Chapter
8 Networks by Geography: Network Equipment. Part III Uses of Networks. Chapter
9 The Internet – The Ultimate WAN. Chapter 10 Using Telecommunications for
Accommodation. Chapter 11 Business Applications of Telecommunications. Part
IV Legislation and Global Issues. Chapter 12 How do Legislation and Regulation
affect Telecommunications? Part V Managing Telecommunications. Chapter 13
How do you Manage Telecommunications in Organizations? Chapter 14 How
do you Manage Telecommunications Projects? Part VI The Need for Bandwidth.
Chapter 15 How much Bandwidth do you need? Chapter 16 Lower reaches of
Broadband Technologies. Chapter 17 Competing Broadband Technologies. Part
VII The Future. Chapter 18 The End . . . The Beginning
Preface Chapter 1: Introduction to Decision Support Systems Chapter 2: Human
Decision Making Processes Chapter 3: Systems, Information Quality, and Models
Chapter 4: Types of Decision Support Systems Chapter 5: DSS Architecture,
Hardware and Operating System Platforms Chapter 6: DSS Software Tools Chapter
7: Building and Implementing Decision Support System Tools Chapter 8: Models
in Decision Support Systems Chapter 9: Mathematical Models and Optimization
Chapter 10: Group Decision Support Systems Chapter 11: Expert Systems Chapter
12: Data Warehousing and Executive Information System Fundamentals Chapter
13: The Data Warehouse Database Chapter 14: Analyzing the Contents of the
Data Warehouse Chapter 15: Constructing a Data Warehouse System Chapter
16: Putting it all Together: Systems Integration and the Future of DSS Appendix:
Selected Case Studies
by Efrem G Mallach, University Massachusetts Lowell
2000 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116356-9 / MHID: 0-07-116356-5 [IE]
Project Management
BUSINESS DATA COMMUNICATIONS
2003 / 736 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123018-6 / MHID: 0-07-123018-1 [IE with OLC]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction. Chapter 2 Basics. Chapter 3 Data Communication
Models. Chapter 4 Data Transmission. Chapter 5 Transmission Media and
Channels. Chapter 6 Data Link Control. Chapter 7 Traditional LANs. Chapter 8
High-Speed LANs. Chapter 9 Wireless LANs. Chapter 10 Switching. Chapter 11
Traditional WANs. Chapter 12 High-Speed WANs. Chapter 13 Networking and
Internetworking Devices. Chapter 14 TCP/IP Protocol Suite. Chapter 15 Internet
Applications
GLOBAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS REVOLUTION
The Business Perspective
THE AMA HANDBOOK OF PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Second Edition
By Paul Dinsmore and Jeannette Cabanis-Brewin
2006 (January 2006) / 512 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-8144-7271-2 / MHID: 0-8144-7271-0
McGraw-Hill UK Title
A Professional References
The second edition of The AMA Handbook of Project
Management is a vital resource containing all the critical
concepts and theories project managers must master. The
book includes definitive models, advice and in-depth solutions
to specific project management dilemmas and illustrates key
ideas with illuminating case studies. Thoroughly revised and
completely up-to-date, it is a a comprehensive reference that
should have a place on every project manager’s bookshelf.
Includes the latest techniques on how to:
• establish project goals
• implement planning on both the strategic and operational levels
design dependable, but flexible, organisational structures
• manage the project life cycle and meet objectives
budget the project
• handle the transition from project idea to project reality
by Tom Housel and Eric Skopec
2001 / 312 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118137-2 / MHID: 0-07-118137-7 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter One: Perspectives on Business Tele com mu ni ca tions Chapter
Two: Telecommuni-cations Applications in Busi ness Chapter Three: The
Telecommunications Business Chapter Four: Government Regulation of
Telecommunications Chapter Five: Network Fundamentals Chapter Six: The
Public Switched Telephone Network Chapter Seven: Local Area Networks
Chapter Eight: Wireless Networks Chapter Nine: The Information Superhighway
and Electronic Commerce Chapter Ten: Emerging Business Applications Chapter
Eleven: Capitalizing on New Realities in Telecommunications Chapter Twelve:
Reshaping Our World
104
93-110_MIS.indd 104
11/15/06 5:27:19 PM
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Fourth Edition
By Bob Hughes, and Mike Cotterell, both of University of Brighton
2006 (November 2005)/ 384 pages
ISBn-13: 978-0-07-710989-9 / MHID: 0-07-710989-9
(Browse http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/hughes)
From its first appearance in 1995, this book has been
consistently well received by tutors and students alike. Now in
its fourth edition, this textbook is highly regarded for providing
a complete introduction to Software Project Management
for both undergraduate and postgraduate students. The new
edition retains its clear, accessible style and comprehensive
coverage, plus the many examples and exercises throughout
the chapters that illustrate the practical application of software
project management principles. Reflecting new developments
in software project management, the fourth edition has been
developed to ensure that the coverage is up-to-date and
contemporary. This includes new and expanded coverage of
topics such as virtual teams and agile methods.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1. Introduction to software project management. Chapter 2. “Step
Wise” An overview of project planning. Chapter 3. Programme management
and project evaluation. Chapter 4. Selection of an appropriate project approach.
Chapter 5. Software effort estimation. Chapter 6. Activity planning. Chapter 7.
Risk management. Chapter 8. Resource allocation. Chapter 9. Monitoring and
control. Chapter 10. Managing contracts. Chapter 11. Managing people and
organizing teams. Chapter 12. Software quality. Chapter 13. Small projects.
Appendix A: Prince 2. Appendix B: BS6079: 1996. Appendix C: Answer Pointers.
Further Reading. Index.
INTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION SYSTEMS
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Second Edition
by David Olson, University of Nebraska, Lincoln
2004 / 360 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123261-6 / MHID: 0-07-123261-3 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/olson2e
Olson’s Introduction to Project Management, 2/e is a project
management text that focuses on “systems” issues. The primary
focus is to examine the many issues facing MIS project managers.
The revision also now incorporates the Project Management
Institute’s Body of Knowledge (PMBOK), better preparing users
for the PMI certification exam. Olson focuses on traditional
project management topics such as project adoption, planning,
scheduling, and implementation while encouraging students
to view the projects holistically and analytically. Utilizing
the most current software and project management tools, he
provides students with the most effective strategies for today’s
IT project managers.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Project Management. 2. Human Aspects of Information Systems
Project Management. 3. Project Organization. 4. Project Selection and Approval.
5. Requirements Definition. 6. System Development. 7. Estimation. 8. Quantitative
Project Scheduling Methods. 9. Probabilistic Scheduling Models. 10. Project
Implementation. 11. Project Control and Assessment. Appendix (Microsoft Project).
PMBOK Cross References
PROJECT PLANNING, SCHEDULING AND
CONTROL
Fourth Edition
By James Lewis, The Lewis Institute
2006 (December 2005) / 550 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-146037-8 / MHID: 0-07-146037-3
A Professional References
The classic project manager’s handbook, with new chapters
and insights that demystify the new PM tools and the PMP®
exam. Project Planning, Scheduling, and Control has been the
standard guidebook for project managers for more than 15
years. Addressing the key issues you face every day, Jim Lewis’s
benchmark book brings the subject alive with accessible,
nontechnical questions, step-by-step guidelines, and realworld examples and applications. This revised, updated, and
expanded fourth edition provides an applications-oriented
understanding of the issues you must confront and important
tips for passing the Project Management Professional (PMP®)
exam.
105
93-110_MIS.indd 105
11/15/06 5:27:20 PM
Advanced MIS
NEW
CORPORATE INFORMATION STRATEGY AND
MANAGEMENT: TEXT AND CASES
Seventh Edition
By Lynda M. Applegate, Robert D. Austin, and F. Warren McFarlan,
all of Harvard Business School
2007 (October 2005) / 736 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294775-5 / MHID: 0-07-294775-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124419-0 / MHID: 0-07-124419-0 [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/applegate7e
Corporate Information Strategy and Management: Text and
Cases 7/e by Applegate, Austin and McFarlan is written for
students and managers who desire an overview of contemporary
information systems technology management. It explains
the relevant issues of effective management of information
services activities and highlights the areas of greatest
potential application of the technology. No assumptions are
made concerning the reader’s experience with IT, though it
is presumed that the reader has some course work or work
experience in administration and/or management. This text
is comprised of an extensive collection of Harvard Business
cases devoted to Information Technology.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• New Harvard cases: Bring into the classroom the recent findings
and observations of some of the brightest minds in IS as they analyze
some of the most prominent global companies.
• Additional coverage on systems integration: Important to the
whole system is the discussion of the challenges of installing and
integrating new technology.
• Contemporary view of IT opportunity, and how to take advantage
of IT in business.
• Strategic IT audits now covered in Chapter One.
• Impact of IT on the ‘organizational design’ covered exclusively in
Chapter Two.
• Impact of IT on the ‘extended enterprise’ covered exclusively in
Chapter Three.
• Outsourcing, including off-shoring, updated in Module 3.
FEATURES
• Harvard Case Approach: Enables you to teach using the same
method and content used at Harvard.
CREATING BUSINESS ADVANTAGE IN THE
INFORMATION AGE
by Lynda M Applegate, Harvard Business School
2002 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252367-6 / MHID: 0-07-252367-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122658-5 / MHID: 0-07-122658-3 [IE]
CONTENTS
Cases: 1. Charles Schwab (A). 2. Charles Schwab (B). Module One: The Challenges
of Managing in an Information Age. Cases: 1. H.E. Butt Grocery Company:
The New Digital Strategy. 2. Admart. 3. Li & Fung. Module Two: Building
Information Age Businesses. Cases: 1. QuickenInsurance: The Race to Click and
Close (Condensed). 2. Amazon.com 2000. 3. Amazon.com Valuation Exercise.
4. American Express Interactive. Module Three: Information Age Operations.
Cases: 1. Arepa. 2. Selecting a Hosting Provider. 3. Web and IT Hosting Facilities.
4. Trilogy (A). 5. The iPremier Company: Denial of Service Attack (A). Module
Four: Managing Information Age Projects and Programs. Cases: 1. Tektronix, Inc.:
Global ERP Implementation. 2. BAE Automated Systems: Denver International
Airport Baggage-Handling System (A). 3. Cisco Systems Architecture: ERP and
Web-Enabled IT. 4. General Dynamics and Computer Sciences Corporation:
Outsourcing the IS Function (A). Concluding Thoughts. Case: 1. Merrill Lynch:
Integrated Choice (Condensed)
Knowledge Management
MEASURING AND MANAGING KNOWLEDGE
by Tom Housel and Arthur Bell
2001 / 176 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118119-8 / MHID: 0-07-118119-9 [IE]
CONTENTS
1. The Parameters of Knowledge Management. 2. The Knowledge-based Economy.
3. Paradigms for Knowledge Management. 4. Knowledge Manage-ment Principles.
5. Knowledge Management at Work in Organizations. 6. Perspectives on
Measuring Knowledge. 7. Measuring Return on Knowledge. 8. Electronic Tools
for Managing Knowledge. 9. Implementing Knowledge Management. 10. The
Future of Knowledge Management.
CONTENTS
Introduction: The Challenges of Managing in a Network Economy. Case #I-1 Li and
Fung Internet Issues (A) (HBS #301-009). Module 1: Business Impacts. Chapter
1: IT and Strategy Chapter 2: IT and Organization. Chapter 3. Extending the
Enterprise. Chapter 4. Making the Case for IT. Case #1-1 Charles Schwab in 2002
(HBS #803-070). Case #1-2 Learning from Leapfrog (HBS #804-062). Case #1-3
Wyndham International: Fostering High-Touch with High Tech (HBS #803-092).
Case #1-4 Global Healthcare Exchange (HBS #804-002). Article #1-5 IT Doesn’t
Matter with Letters to the Editor (HBR #3566). Module 2: Managing Networked
Infrastructure and Operations. Chapter 5. Understanding Internetworking
Infrastructure. Chapter 6. Assuring Reliable and Secure IT Services. Chapter 7.
Managing Diverse IT Infrastructures. Case #2-1 CareGroup (HBS #303-097). Case
#2-2 The iPremier Company: Denial of Service Attack (A) (HBS #601-114). Case
#2-3 Ford Motor Company: Supply Chain Strategy ((HBS #699-198) Article #2-4
The Power of Virtual Integration: An Interview with Dell Computer’s Michael Dell
(HBR #98208). Case #2-5 Postgirot Bank and Provment AB: Managing the Cost of
IT Operations (HBS #302-061). Module 3: Managing and Leading a Networked
IT Organization. Chapter 8. Organizing and Leading the IT Function. Chapter 9.
Managing IT Outsourcing. Chapter 10. A Portfolio Approach to IT Projects. Case
#3-1 Cathay Pacific: Doing More with Less (HBS #303-106). Case #3-2 Royal
Caribbean Cruises, Ltd. (HBS #304-019). Case #3-3 Rakuten (HBS #305-050).
Case #3-4 Telecomunicacoes de São Paulo S.A. (Telesp) (HBS #804-149). Case
#3-5 Outsourcing IT: The Global Landscape in 2004 (HBS #304-104). Conclusion:
The Challenges of Managing in a Network Economy Revisited. Case #C-1 UCB
(HBS #304-096). Case #C-2 Enabling Business Strategy with IT at the World Bank
(HBS #304-055). Annotated Bibliography. Index
KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT
by Ganesh Natarajan, President & CEO, APTECH Mumbai and
Sandhya Shekhar, Principal Consultant, APTECH, Mumbai
2000 / 375 pages
ISBN-13; 978-0-07-118820-3 / MHID: 0-07-118820-7 [IE]
Professional Book
CONTENTS
1. Introduction. 2. Demystifying Knowledge Manage-ment. 3. KM The Business
Perspective. 4. KM The Technology Perspective. 5. KM The Process Per-spective.
6. KM The Learning Systems Perspective. 7. K M The Market Perspective. 8.
Building the Knowledge Corporation. 9. KM in Other Segments. 10. KM Your
Perspective. 11. KM The Future
106
93-110_MIS.indd 106
11/15/06 5:27:21 PM
Computers In Society /Computer
Ethics
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: COMPUTERS IN SOCIETY
06/07
Thirteenth Edition
By Paul DePalma, Gonzaga University
2007 (March 2006) / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352832-8 / MHID: 0-07-352832-3
Browse: http://www.dushkin.com/text-data/catalog/0073528323.mhtml
From McGraw-Hill Contemporary Learning Series (formerly
known as McGraw-Hill/Dushkin), this Thirteen Edition of
ANNUAL EDITIONS: COMPUTERS IN SOCIETY 06/07
provides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles
selected from the best of the public press. Organizational
features include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide
Web sites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide;
a general introduction; brief overviews for each section; a
topical index; and an instructor’s resource guide with testing
materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM
is offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL
EDITIONS titles are supported by our student website, www.
mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Introduction 1. Five Things We Need to Know About Technological
Change 2. Whom to Protect and How? New! 3. On the Nature of Computing
UNIT 2. The Economy 4. The Productivity Paradox New! 5. The Big Band Era
New! 6. The New Gatekeepers New! 7. The Software Wars UNIT 3. Work
and the Workplace 8. Brain Circulation: How High-Skill Immigration Makes
Everyone Better Off 9. Software 10. Letter from Silicon Valley New! 11. When
Long Hours at a Video Game Stop Being Fun New! 12. The Computer Evolution
New! 13. Making Yourself Understood UNIT 4. Computers, People, and Social
Participation New! 14. Back-to-School Blogging New! 15. Structure and Evolution
of Blogspace New! 16. New Technologies and Our Feelings: Romance on the
Internet 17. From Virtual Communities to Smart Mobs 18. Making Meaning: As
Google Goes, So Goes the Nation New! 19. Conquered by Google: A Legendary
Literature Quiz UNIT 5. Societal Institutions: Law, Politics, Education, and the
Military 20. The Copyright Paradox 21. You Bought It. Who Controls It? New!
22. Electronic Voting Systems: the Good, the Bad, and the Stupid New! 23. Small
Vote Manipulations Can Swing Elections New! 24. To Size Up Colleges, Students
Now Shop Online New! 25. Facing Down the E-Maelstrom 26. Point, Click…Fire
27. The Doctrine of Digital War UNIT 6. Risk New! 28. Why Spyware Poses
Multiple Threats to Security New! 29. Terror’s Server 30. Homeland Insecurity
31. The Virus Underground New! 32. The Fading Memory of the State New! 33.
False Reporting on the Internet and the Spread of Rumors: Three Case Studies 34.
The Level of Discourse Continues to Slide UNIT 7. International Perspectives
and Issues New! 35. China’s Computer Wasteland New! 36. The New Face of
the Silicon Age New! 37. Restoring the Popularity of Computer Science 38. Dot
Com for Dictators New! 39. Weaving the Authoritarian Web 40. Kabul’s Cyber
Cafe Culture 41. Japan’s Generation of Computer Refuseniks UNIT 8. The Frontier
of Computing 42. Minding Your Business 43. Why Listening Will Never Be the
Same New! 44. The Intelligent Internet New! 45. Sparking the Fire of Invention
New! 46. Mind Control
ETHICAL DECISION MAKING AND INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY
Second Edition
by James Grillo and Ernest Kallman, both of Bentley College
1996 / 152 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-034090-9 / MHID: 0-07-034090-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124065-9 / MHID: 0-07-124065-9 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/it
CONTENTS
PART 1: APPROACHES TO ETHICAL DECISION MAKING. CHAPTER 1: Ethics
and Ethical Decision Making. Why We Should Care About Ethics. Computer
Ethics and Regular Ethics. Competing Factors that Affect Our Behavior. Value
Judgments. The Types of Ethical Choices. Making Defensible Decisions. Summary.
Annotated References. CHAPTER 2: Ethics and Information Technology. New
Technologies, New Problems. Why is Ethical Computer Use a Special Challenge?
What is Unethical Computer Use? Summary. Annotated References. CHAPTER 3:
Solving Ethical Dilemmas: A Sample Case Exercise. A Four-step Analysis Process.
Sample Case: Too Much of a Good Thing. Discovering the Four-step Process.
Summary. PART 2: THE CASES. Case 1: Levity or Libel - An E-mail Effort. Case 2:
Credit Woes - Credit Bureau Decisions. Case 3: Something for Everyone - Data
Recombination. Case 3A: Something for Everyone - Role-playing. Case 4: Abort,
Retry, Ignore: Data Recovery. Case 5: Messages from All Over - Who Controls
E-mail. Case 6: A Job on the Side - Part-time Consulting. Case 7: The New Job
- Offensive Graphics. Case 7A: The New Job - Role-playing Version. Case 8: The
Buyout - Inappropriately Acquired Data. Case 9: Charades - Stolen Password.
Case 10: Laccaria and Eagle - Restrictive Trade Practices. Case 11: Taking Bad
with Good - Bad Software. Case 12: The Engineer and the Teacher - Copyright
Ethics. Case 13: Test Data - Confidential or Dummy Data. Case 14: The Brain Pick
- Knowledge-based System. Case 15: Trouble in Sardonia - Overseas Copyright
Ethics. Case 16: Bad Medicine - Well-intentioned software. Case 17: Code Blue
- Patient Data. Case 18: Virtual Success - Games Invade the Real World. Case 19:
His Private Lab - Student Computer Use . APPENDIX A: Ethics Codes and Policies.
APPENDIX B: Worksheets for Four-step Analysis. Index
107
93-110_MIS.indd 107
11/15/06 5:27:21 PM
Enterprise Resource Planning
MANAGERIAL ISSUES OF ENTERPRISE RESOURCE
PLANNING SYSTEMS
NEW
SAP R/3 ENTERPRISE SOFTWARE
An Introduction
By Roger Hayen, Central Michigan University
2007 (May 2006) / 192 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299067-6 / MHID: 0-07-299067-8
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/hayen
This text is written by Dr. Roger Hayen, a SAP R/3 instructor
at Central Michigan University, one of three universities in
the U.S. to offer SAP R/3 certification for students in an SAP
University Alliance program, called “Process Integration
Certification Academy”. Hayen’s extensive familiarity with the
subject provides a useful introduction to the essential concepts
of the SAP R/3 System, with the opportunity for hands-on
implementation of those concepts. The text’s succinct, yet
thorough coverage makes it versatile, so that it is appropriate
for both student instruction and professional training and
reference.
FEATURES
• The core text is organized into three distinct main parts—
Understanding Enterprise Software, Displaying SAP R/3 Information,
and Processing SAP R/3—for easy readability and enhanced
functionality.
• Includes helpful “Quick Checks” for student review of concepts
after each chapter.
• Class-tested at Central Michigan University by undergraduate
students; also used by SAP R/3 for its own training programs.
• Hands-on, up-to-date exercises using SAP’s IDES training data,
SAP R/3’s own help files, and the 4.6 R/3 release—critical to the
understanding and application of the software. Frees instructors’
time, as they would otherwise have to create the data for students’
exercises themselves. Also ensures students will be market-ready for
SAP R/3 user companies.
• Flexibility of the hands-on exercises. Provided in two formats:
local, ‘read-only’ ones and web-based activities with a ‘live client’
simulating a ‘real world’ SAP/R3 implementation.
• Can be purchased, at a discounted price, with other McGraw-Hill/
Irwin texts in Operations Management.
• Heavily illustrated with graphics and annotated screen shots.
CONTENTS
Preface / Part 1 Understanding Enterprise Software Chapter 1 Overview Chapter
2 Navigation and Systems Operation Chapter 3 Application Modules Chapter 4
Businesses Processes Chapter 5 Web Application Server Chapter 6 Internet Enabled
Solutions Chapter 7 Configuration Chapter 8 Implementation Framework Chapter
9 Organization Structure Chapter 10 Customizing Tools Part 2 Displaying SAP
R/3 Information Chapter 11 Exploring System Capabilities Part 3 Processing SAP
R/3 Transactions Chapter 12 Customer Order to Cash Cycle Processes / Summary
/ Appendix Quick Check Answers
by David L Olson, University of Nebraska - Lincoln
2004 / 336 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286112-9 / MHID: 0-07-286112-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123628-7 / MHID: 0-07-123628-7 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/olsonerp
The primary purpose of this text will be to lay out the scope of
ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) Systems implementation,
explain the competitive advantages of using ERP Systems and
support general concepts with short case studies. This text covers
the fundamental issues important in ERP implementation and
management, starting from an information systems/information
technology project management perspective. Each chapter
will include a review of real cases of ERP implementations
related to that particular chapter content. The text is meant to
be software product independent, in order to allow schools to
select their own ERP Systems software tools and use them as
time permits. The benefit to this approach is that in addition to
learning key concepts related to ERP Systems operations and
implementation, adopters want to see lots of illustrations and
examples, especially case studies.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Enterprise Resource Planning Systems. Chapter 2: ERP Modules
and Historical Development. Chapter 3: ERP System Options and Selection
Methods. Chapter 4: Business Process. eEngineering and Best Practices. Chapter
5: ERP System Installation. Chapter 6: ERP Project Management. Chapter 7: ERP
Implementation and Maintenance. Chapter 8: Business Intelligence Systems and
ERP. Chapter 9: ERP and Supply Chains. Chapter 10: Advanced Technology and
ERP Security. Chapter 11: Trends in ERP
WHY ERP?
A Primer on SAP Implementation
by F Robert Jacobs, Indiana University - Bloomington and David Clay
Whybark, University of North Carolina - Chapel Hill
2000 / 144 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-240089-2 / MHID: 0-07-240089-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118943-9 / MHID: 0-07-118943-2 [IE]
www.jacobs.indiana.edu/erp
CONTENTS
Chapter 1- Introduction to ERP Chapter 2- The SAP School Chapter 3- Back at the
Plant Chapter 4- A Different Business
108
93-110_MIS.indd 108
11/15/06 5:27:22 PM
Data Mining
NEW
INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS DATA MINING
by David L Olson, University of Nebraska - Lincoln, and Yong Shi,
University of Nebraska-Omaha
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-295971-0 / MHID: 0-07-295971-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124470-1 / MHID: 0-07-124470-0 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/olson1e
Introduction to Business Data Mining was developed to
introduce students, as opposed to professional practitioners
or engineering students, to the fundamental concepts of data
mining. Most importantly, this text shows readers how to
gather and analyze large sets of data to gain useful business
understanding. A four part organization introduces the
material (Part I), describes and demonstrated basic data mining
algorithms (Part II), focuses on the business applications of data
mining (Part III), and presents an overview of the developing
areas in this field, including web mining, text mining, and the
ethical aspects of data mining. (Part IV). The author team has had
extensive experience with the quantitative analysis of business
as well as with data mining analysis. They have both taught this
material and used their own graduate students to prepare the
text’s data mining reports. Using real-world vignettes and their
extensive knowledge of this new subject, David Olson and
Yong Shi have created a text that demonstrates data mining
processes and techniques needed for business applications.
FEATURES
• Coverage of business applications: This text focuses on the value
Database Management
(Professional References)
SQL SERVER 2005: THE COMPLETE REFERENCE
Second Edition
by Jeffrey Shapiro and Steen Bowman
2006 (March 2006)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-226152-3 / MHID: 0-07-226152-8
An Osborne Media Title
Professional Book
• Enterprise data management capabilities, including security
and clustering
• Powerful developer tools -- T-SQL, .NET, CLR, XML, ADO.
NET 2.0
• Business Intelligence features, such as Integration Services,
data warehousing, and reports
of data analyses to business decision making while also exploring
concepts such as lift, customer relationship management, market
segmentation, and more.
• Straightforward explanation of methods, demonstrated with
examples: Short vignettes are used throughout showing how specific
concepts have been applied in actual business situations. References
to data mining software and websites are also featured.
• Major software addressed: The text’s appendices show how major
software projects support various aspects of data mining. Also, the
text reviews popular data mining software to help students become
familiar with the software options available in data mining.
• Concepts of data mining introduced early: Concept overviews
precede the discussion of data mining algorithms, allowing readers
to understand the importance of techniques by seeing how they are
applied before they actually learn them.
CONTENTS
Part I: INTRODUCTION. Chapter 1: Initial Description of Data Mining in
Business. Chapter 2: Data Mining Processes and Knowledge Discovery. Chapter
3: Database Support to Data Mining. Part II: DATA MINING METHODS AS
TOOLS. Chapter 4: Overview of Data Mining Techniques. Chapter 4 Appendix:
Enterprise Miner Demonstration on Expenditure Data Set. Chapter 5: Cluster
Analysis. Chapter 5 Appendix: Clementine. Chapter 6: Regression Algorithms in
Data Mining. Chapter 7: Neural Networks in Data Mining. Chapter 8: Decision
Tree Algorithms. Appendix 8: Demonstration of See5 Decision Tree Analysis.
Chapter 9: Linear Programming-Based Methods. Chapter 9 Appendix: Data Mining
Linear Programming Formulations. Part III: BUSINESS APPLICATIONS. Chapter
10: Business Data Mining Applications Applications. Chapter 11: Market-Basket
Analysis. Chapter 11 Appendix: Market-Basket Procedure. Part IV: DEVELOPING
ISSUES. Chapter 12: Text and Web Mining. Chapter 12 Appendix: Semantic Text
Analysis. Chapter 13: Ethical Aspects of Data Mining
contact your local
[email protected]
109
93-110_MIS.indd 109
11/15/06 5:27:23 PM
110
93-110_MIS.indd 110
11/15/06 5:27:23 PM
2007-2008 NEW E-Commerce Titles
2007 New Titles

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352514-3 / MHID: 0-07-352514-6

BENTON
Purchasing and Supply Management .......................117
BOWERSOX
Supply Chain Logistics Management, 2e..................117
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294788-5 / MHID: 0-07-294788-8

SIMCHI-LEVI
Designing and Managing the Supply Chain, 3e........118
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298239-8 / MHID: 0-07-298239-X
Risk Management ......................................................... 115
Strategy ........................................................................ 115
111
111-120_E-Commerce.indd 111
11/15/06 5:30:31 PM
E-Commerce
Introduction to E-Commerce
INTRODUCTION TO E-COMMERCE
Second Edition
By Jeffrey F. Rayport and Bernard J. Jaworski of Monitor /
Marketspace Center and Breakaway Solutions Inc.
2004 / 512 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286525-7 / MHID: 0-07-286525-3
(with PowerWeb)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123266-1 / MHID: 0-07-123266-4
[IE with PowerWeb]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/rayport04
Introduction to E-Commerce, 2/e, by Rayport and Jaworksi,
can be used as the principles book for e-commerce. Much like
there is a “Principles of Marketing” that is intended to be the first
course in marketing, The text covers the entire landscape of ecommerce. The key message is that faculty who want to teach
an introductory class on e-commerce and focus on the strategy
parts of e-commerce first and technology second, should adopt
this book. Faculty who teach marketing, management, strategy
and entrepreneurship as the core discipline prefer this book
over technology-oriented e-commerce books. Introduction
to e-Commerce gives present and future practitioners of eCommerce a solid foundation in all aspects of conducting
business in the networked economy. The text focus is on
what a manager needs to know about Internet infrastructure,
strategy formulation and implementation, technology
concepts, public policy issues, and capital infrastructure in
order to make effective business decisions. This is presented
in a framework for the study and practice of e-Commerce with
business strategy at the core surrounded by four infrastructures;
the technology infrastructure that underlies the Internet, the
media infrastructure that provides the content for businesses,
public policy regulations that provide both opportunities
and constraints, and the capital infrastructure that provides
the money and capital to run the businesses. Within this
framework, the authors provide a deep exploration of core
concepts of online strategy and associated enablers enriched
by a wide variety of examples, case studies, and explanations
culled directly from practice.
CONTENTS
1 A Framework for E-Commerce Part I: The Basic Technology of the Internet and
the Web 2 Basic Technology of the Web and E-Commerce Businesses Part II:
Strategy Formulation for New Economy Firms 3 Framing Market Opportunity 4
Business Models 5 Customer Interface 6 Market Communications and Branding
7 Strategy Implementation 8 Metrics Part III: Technology Infrastructure 9 Website
Development Process 10 Website Architecture Part IV: Capital Infrastructure 11
Human and Financial Capital Part V: Media Infrastructure 12 Media Convergence
Part VI: Public Policy and Structure 13 Public Policy: Regulation
E-COMMERCE
Strategy, Technologies And Applications
By David Whiteley
2000 / 300 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-709552-9 / MHID: 0-07-709552-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118346-8 / MHID: 0-07-118346-9 [IE]
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124161-8 / MHID: 0-07-124161-2
[IE – POD Printing]
Website: www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/books/whiteley
CONTENTS
Acknowledgements / Preface / Part 1: Introduction to Electronic Commerce /
Chapter 1 Electronic Commerce / Part 2: Business Strategy in an Electronic Age
/ Chapter 2 The Value Chain / Chapter 3 Competitive Advantage / Chapter 4
Business Strategy / Chapter 5 Case Study—Electronic Commerce in Passenger
Air Transport / Part 3: Business to Business Electronic Commerce / Chapter 6
Inter-organisational Transactions / Chapter 7 Electronic Markets (EM) / Chapter 8
Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) / Chapter 9 EDI, the Nuts and Bolts / Chapter 10
EDI and Business / Chapter 11 Inter-organisational E-Commerce / Part 4: Business
to Consumer Electronic Commerce / Chapter 12 Consumer Trade Transactions
/ Chapter 13 The Internet / Chapter 14 A Page on the Web / Chapter 15 The
elements of E-Commerce / Chapter 16 E-Business / Part 5: Conclusions / Chapter
17 Electronic Commerce—May Many Flowers Bloom / Bibliography / Index
Technology/Infrastructure
ELECTRONIC COMMERCE
Second Edition
By Bharat Bhasker, Indian Institute of Management
2005 / 552 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-060095-9 / MHID: 0-07-060095-3
Tata McGraw-Hill Title
Following an integrated approach, this book provides a
thorough understanding of what electronic commerce is all
about -- advantages, caveats and business models, including
its complete framework and enabling technologies. With the
growing importance of mobile commerce (M-commerce), this
edition discusses in detail the technological and managerial
issues pertaining to M-commerce. Five comprehensive case
studies on - Online payment for railway tickets: SBI`s eRail
service - Electronic Data Interchange: Indian Customs &
Excise adopts EDI - E-Commerce Strategy, Business Models
and Internet Start-ups: A Business Case on Fabmart Pvt. Ltd
- E-Commerce in the Distribution System: The Case of HLL
RS Net - Deployment of Information Security Infrastructure:
The Experience of IIM Lucknow This book is indispensable
for the students of both management and technical courses on
electronic commerce. It will also prove to be a valuable source
of reference to students of computer science, managers and
information officers.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Electronic Commerce. 2. Electronic Commerce: Business
Models. 3. Electronic Data Interchange. 4. Electronic Commerce: Architectural
Framework. 5. Electronic Commerce: Network Infrastructure. 6. Electronic
Commerce: Information Distribution and Messaging. 7. Electronic Commerce:
Information Publishing Technology. 8. Electronic Commerce: Securing the
Business on Internet. 9. Electronic Commerce: Securing Network Transaction.
10. Electronic Payment Systems. 11. Electronic Commerce: Search Engines and
Directory Services. 12. Internet Advertising. 13. Mobile Commerce: Introduction,
Framework, and Models. 14. Agents in Electronic Commerce
112
11/15/06 5:30:32 PM
E-Commerce
Business Process &
Re-engineering
E-COMMERCE
Context, Concepts and Consequences
By N Bandyopadhyay, University of East London
2002 / 400 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-709857-5 / MHID: 0-07-709857-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123068-1 / MHID: 0-07-123068-8 [IE]
Website: www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/bandyo
CONTENTS
Context: 1. Introduction to Electronic Commerce. 2. The Internet and
the World-Wide-Web for E-commerce. 3. Information in Organizations.
4. The Intelligent Organization Concepts. 5. Communication
Infrastructure for E-commerce. 6. Information Management
Infrastructure for E-commerce. 7. Operational Infrastructure for Ecommerce Consequences. 8. Strategic Implementation of E-commerce.
9. Creating trust in E-Commerce. 10. E-commerce and Society in the
21st century.
E-BUSINESS AND E-COMMERCE INFRASTRUCTURE
Technologies Supporting E-Business Initiative
By Abhijit Chaudhury and Jean-Pierre Kuilboer
2002 / 448 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-247875-4 / MHID: 0-07-247875-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112313-6 / MHID: 0-07-112313-X [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 E-Commerce and E-Business Chapter 2 Networking
Fundamentals Multiplexing Chapter 3 Communication Protocols for
E-Business Chapter 4 Network Security and E-Commerce Chapter
5 Authentication, Encryption, Digital Payments, and Digital Money
Chapter 6 Server Platforms in E-Commerce Chapter 7 Language for
the Web: HTML, XML, and Beyond Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Software
Chapter 10 Multimedia and Web-casting on the Web
INTERNET BUSINESS MODELS AND STRATEGIES
Text and Cases
Second Edition
By Allan Afuah, University of Michigan-Ann Arbor and Christopher
Tucci, New York University
2003 / 496 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-251166-6 / MHID: 0-07-251166-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125248-5 / MHID: 0-07-125248-7 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/afuahtucci2e
CONTENTS
Part I: The Internet Chapter 1. Introduction and Overview Chapter 2. Overview
of Internet Technology and Value Network Chapter 3. Competitive LandscapeChanging Properties of the Internet Part II: Components, Linkages, Dynamics,
and Evaluation of Business Models Chapter 4. Components of a Business Model
Chapter 5. Dynamics of Business Models (rewritten new chapter) Chapter 6.
Taxonomy of Internet Business Models (new) Chapter 7. Value Configurations
and the Internet Chapter 8. Valuing and Financing an Internet Start-Up Chapter
9. Appraisals of Internet Business Models (expanded into new chapter) Part III:
The Role of Competitive and Macro Environments Chapter 10. Competitive
and Macro Environments Part IV: Applying the Concepts, Models, and Tools
Chapter 11. The General Manager and the Internet Chapter 12. Sample Analysis
of an Internet Business Model Case Part V : Cases Case 1. Broadcast.com Case
2. Webvan: Reinventing the Milkman Case 3. Reflect.com: Burn the Ship (new)
Case 4. VerticalNet Case 5. Live READS: Valuing an e-Book Startup (new) Case
6. Beyond Interactive Case 7. Hotmail: Free email for sale Case 8 GMBuyPower
Case 9 iVillage Case 10 eBay, Inc. Case 11 Microsoft: X-Box online (new) Case
12 Sun Microsystems Case 13 Oscar: The Open Source Car Project (new) Case
14 E*trade: A lust for being different (new) Case 15 RIM: Blackberry: Wireless
e-mail: the killer App? (new) Case 16 Sprint PCS: Winning the Wireless War?
(new) Case 17 Napster: The Giant Online Pirate Bazaar? (new)
INTERNET BUSINESS MODELS
Text and Cases
By Thomas Eisenmann, Havard Business School
2002 / 656 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112473-7 / MHID: 0-07-112473-X
[IE with Case CD]
CONTENTS
PREFACE / INTERNET ACCESS PROVIDERS 1. Tele-Communications, Inc.:
Accelerating Digital Deployment 2. Geocast Network Systems, Inc. 3. Teledesic
[CD ROM bound into volume] ONLINE PORTALS 4. Yahoo!: Business on Internet
Time 5. StarMedia: Launching a Latin American Revolution 6. Tellme Networks,
Inc. ONLINE CONTENT PROVIDERS 7. Boston.com 8. CNET 2000 9. BET.com
10. BMG Entertainment ONLINE RETAILERS 11. Staples.com 12. Petstore.com
13. Sendwine.com ONLINE BROKERS 14. DLJdirect: “Putting Our Reputation
Online” 15. Carpoint in 1999 16. Rosenbluth International and Biztravel.com
17. Wit Capital: Evolution of the Online Investment Bank (A) and (B) ONLINE
MARKET MAKERS 18. Priceline Webhouse Club 19. eBricks.com 20. Sothebys.
com NETWORKED UTILITY PROVIDERS 21. Adobe Systems Incorporated
APPLICATION SERVICE PROVIDERS 22. Everdream 23. DoubleTwist, Inc.
113
11/15/06 5:30:33 PM
E-Commerce
Internet Marketing
INTERNET MARKETING
Building Advantage in a Networked Economy
Second Edition
By Rafi Mohammed, Monitor, Marketspace Center, Robert J.
Fisher, University of Western Ontario, Bernard J. Jaworski, Monitor
Marketspace Center and Gordon Paddison, , New Line Cinema
2004 / 768 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07253842-7 / MHID: 0-07-253842-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286526-4 / MHID: 0-07-286526-1
(with PowerWeb for E-Commerce)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123259-3 / MHID: 0-07-123259-1
[IE with PowerWeb]
INTERNET MARKETING
Readings and Online Resources
By Paul S. Richardson, Loyola University—Chicago
2001 / 368 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118809-8 / MHID: 0-07-118809-6 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/richardson01
CONTENTS
1. Introduction To Internet Marketing. 2.Conceptual Foundations of Internet
Marketing. 3.Business-to-Consumer Internet Marketing. 4. Shopping Agents &
Consumer Behavior. 5. Internet Marketing Communications. 6. Interactivity &
Community. 7. Business-to-Business Internet Marketing. 8 . Internet Marketing
Research. 9. The Internet & International Marketing. 10. The Internet & Public
Policy. 11. The Internet & Information Economics.
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mohammed04
Internet Marketing: Building Advantage in a Networked
Economy, 2e presents a “road-tested” framework to help
students and practitioners understand how to think about and
implement effective Internet marketing programs. The focus is
on using marketing levers to vary the level of intensity that the
consumer has with a Website to build a relationship with the
customer through four stages: from Awareness, to Exploration/
Expansion, to Commitment, and possibly through Dissolution.
This four stage customer-centric framework shows readers how
to use the Internet to create intense and profitable relationships
with their customers. In addition to comprehensively discussing
the key levers that marketers can use to create relationships,
the authors focus on two primary forces that the Internet brings
to marketing: the Individual and Interactivity—detailing how
these forces influence key marketing levers and how these
forces can be leveraged to create intense relationships with
customers.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction to Internet Marketing Part I: Framing the Market Opportunity
Chapter 2: Framing the Market Opportunity Part II: Marketing Strategy Chapter
3: Marketing Strategy in Internet Marketing Part III: The Design of the Customer
Experience Chapter 4: Customer Experience Part IV: Building the Customer
Interface Chapter 5: Customer Interface Part V: The Design of the Marketing
Program Chapter 6: Customer Relationships Chapter 7: Product Chapter 8: Pricing
Chapter 9: Communication Chapter 10: Community Chapter 11: Distribution
Chapter 12: Branding Chapter 13: Designing the Marketspace Matrix Chapter
14: Designing the Marketing Program for Lord of the Rings Part VI: Leveraging
Customer Information Through Technology Chapter 15: Customer Information
Systems: Leveraging Customer Information Through Internet Technology Part VII:
Marketing Program Evaluation Chapter 16: Customer Metrics
E-MARKETING STRATEGY
By Chaston
2000
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-709753-0 / MHID: 0-07-709753-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118873-9 / MHID: 0-07-118873-8 [IE]
Website: http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/chaston
CONTENTS
1. Managing in an E-Commerce World / 2. E-Buyer Behavior / 3. Mapping the
E-Market System / 4. E-Commerce Competence / 5. E-Market Positioning and
Competitive Advantage / 6. Selecting E-Strategies and Constructing an E-Plan /
7. E-Commerce Innovation / 8. E-Promotion / 9. E-Pricing and Distribution / 10.
E-Management Systems / 11. E-Business and Institutional Markets / 12. E-Service
Markets
Cyberlaw and Ethics
LEGAL LANDMINES IN E-COMMERCE
By David R. Canton, Harrison Pensa LLP and John E. Millar, The
Attache Group, Inc.
2003 / 144 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121325-7 / MHID: 0-07-121325-2 [IE]
CONTENTS
Introduction Case 1: www.centralmba.com Case 2: Creating a Web Site for
Medisys Health Group Case 3: Enerline Restorations Inc.: Stay With an ASP? Case
4:Homegrocer.com Case 5:e Lance.com: Preventing Disintermediation
114
11/15/06 5:30:33 PM
E-Commerce
Strategy
CYBERLAW AND E-COMMERCE
By David Baumer and J Poindexter of North Carolina State University
2002 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112300-6 / 0-07-112300-8 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: The Legal Environment of Business in the Information Age. Chapter 2:
Basic Contract Law. Chapter 3: Current and Future Contract law for E-Commerce.
Chapter 4: Contracting and Licensing Software. Chapter 5: Torts: Wrongs and
Their Remedies. Chapter 6: Cybertorts, Privacy, and Government Regulation.
Chapter 7: Product Liability in Tort. Chapter 8: Intellectual Property I: Basic
Patent and Trade Secret Law. Chapter 9: Intellectual Property II: Basic Copyright
and Trademark Law. Chapter 10: Intellectual Property III: Creating, Using, and
Protecting Software. Chapter 11: Business Organization: Bricks and Mortar.
Chapter 12: Cyber Companies and Internet Agreements.
INTRODUCTION TO E-COMMERCE
Second Edition
By Jeffrey F. Rayport and Bernard J. Jaworski of Monitor /
Marketspace Center and Breakaway Solutions Inc.
2004 / 512 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-286525-7 / MHID: 0-07-286525-3
(with PowerWeb)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123266-1 / MHID: 0-07-123266-4
[IE with PowerWeb]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/rayport04
Cyberpreneurship
BUILDING AN E-BUSINESS
From the Ground Up
By Elizabeth Eisner Reding
2001 / 192 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115081-1 / MHID: 0-07-115081-1 (IE)
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/ebusiness
CONTENTS
CHAPTER ONE: Getting Started on the Web / CHAPTER TWO: Creating a
Business Plan / CHAPTER THREE: Developing a Marketing Plan / CHAPTER
FOUR: Designing a Web Page / CHAPTER FIVE: Creating a Web Site / CHAPTER
SIX: Enhancing Web Pages / CHAPTER SEVEN: Creating Advanced Web Pages /
CHAPTER EIGHT: Running an E-Business / Glossary
Risk Management
ELECTRONIC COMMERCE
Security, Risk Management, and Control
Second Edition
Introduction to E-Commerce, 2/e, by Rayport and Jaworksi,
can be used as the principles book for e-commerce. Much like
there is a “Principles of Marketing” that is intended to be the first
course in marketing, The text covers the entire landscape of ecommerce. The key message is that faculty who want to teach
an introductory class on e-commerce and focus on the strategy
parts of e-commerce first and technology second, should adopt
this book. Faculty who teach marketing, management, strategy
and entrepreneurship as the core discipline prefer this book
over technology-oriented e-commerce books. Introduction
to e-Commerce gives present and future practitioners of eCommerce a solid foundation in all aspects of conducting
business in the networked economy. The text focus is on
what a manager needs to know about Internet infrastructure,
strategy formulation and implementation, technology
concepts, public policy issues, and capital infrastructure in
order to make effective business decisions. This is presented
in a framework for the study and practice of e-Commerce with
business strategy at the core surrounded by four infrastructures;
the technology infrastructure that underlies the Internet, the
media infrastructure that provides the content for businesses,
public policy regulations that provide both opportunities
and constraints, and the capital infrastructure that provides
the money and capital to run the businesses. Within this
framework, the authors provide a deep exploration of core
concepts of online strategy and associated enablers enriched
by a wide variety of examples, case studies, and explanations
culled directly from practice.
CONTENTS
1 A Framework for E-Commerce Part I: The Basic Technology of the Internet and
the Web 2 Basic Technology of the Web and E-Commerce Businesses Part II:
Strategy Formulation for New Economy Firms 3 Framing Market Opportunity 4
Business Models 5 Customer Interface 6 Market Communications and Branding
7 Strategy Implementation 8 Metrics Part III: Technology Infrastructure 9 Website
Development Process 10 Website Architecture Part IV: Capital Infrastructure 11
Human and Financial Capital Part V: Media Infrastructure 12 Media Convergence
Part VI: Public Policy and Structure 13 Public Policy: Regulation
By Marilyn Greenstein, Arizona State University-West and Miklos
Vasarhelyi, Rutgers University, Newark
2002
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124064-2 / MHID: 0-07-124064-0
[IE with PowerWeb]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/business/accounting/greenstein2e
CONTENTS
1. Overview of Electronic Commerce. 2. The Electronization of Business. 3. B2B
Process and Strategies. 4. Electronic Commerce and the Role of Independent
Third-Parties. 5. The Regulatory Environment. 6. EDI, Electronic Commerce
and the Internet. 7. Risks of Insecure Systems. 8. Risk Management. 9. Internet
Security Standards. 10. Cryptography & Authentication. 11. Firewalls. 12.
Electronic Commerce Payment Mediums. 13. Intelligent Agents. 14. Web-Based
Marketing
115
11/15/06 5:30:34 PM
E-Commerce
Knowledge Management
E-COMMERCE
By Jeffrey Rayport and Bernard Jaworski of Monitor / Marketspace
Center
2001 / 456 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118945-3 / MHID: 0-07-118945-9 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/marketspace
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Overview of E-commerce Framework Chapter 2: Framing Market
Opportunity Chapter 3: Business Models Chapter 4: Customer Interface Chapter
5: Market Communications and Branding Chapter 6: Implementation Chapter
7: Metrics Chapter 8: Valuation Chapter 9: Network Infrastructure Chapter 10:
Media Convergence
INFORMATION AND KNOWLEDGE SOCIETY
By Al-Hawamdeh Suliman, Nanyang Technological University and L
Hart Thomas, Florida State University
2001 / 296 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120238-1 / MHID: 0-07-120238-2
CONTENTS
Chapter 1. Information Society: Global Perspective. Chapter 2. Information
Infrastructure. Chapter 3. Communication and Information Transfer. Chapter 4.
Electronic Publishing in the Digital Era. Chapter 5. Knowledge Management
and the Economy of Ideas. Chapter 6. Intellectual Property and Copyright in
the Digital Era. Chapter 7. Education in the Digital Age. Chapter 8. Privacy in
the Information Age. Chapter 9. Information Security and Ethics. Chapter 10.
Information Standards.
E-Commerce Cases Book
CASES IN ELECTRONIC COMMERCE
Second Edition
By Sid L Huff, Scott Schneberger, Michael Wade, Peter Newson and
Michael Parent
2002 / 488 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112352-5 / MHID: 0-07-112352-0 [IE]
CONTENTS
1.Introduction 2. E-Commerce Infrastructure 3. Sourcing of E-Commerce
Capabilities 4. Financial Systems and Choices 5. Business-to-Consumer ECommerce 6. Business-to-Business E-Commerce and E-Commerce Strategy 7.
Virtual Work 8. Virtual Communities 9. Social and Legal Issues
KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT
By Ganesh Natarajan, President of APTECH, a leading and training &
consultant organization and Sandhya Shekhar, Principal Consultant
of APTECH, Mumbai.
2000 / 375 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118820-3 / MHID: 0-07-118820-7 [IE]
A Professional Reference Title
CONTENTS
1. Introduction. 2. Demystifying Knowledge Management. 3. KM The Business
Perspective. 4. KM The Technology Perspective. 5. KM The Process Perspective.
6. KM The Learning Systems Perspective. 7. K M The Market Perspective. 8.
Building the Knowledge Corporation. 9. KM in Other Segments. 10. KM Your
Perspective. 11. KM The Future
CASES IN E-COMMERCE
By Jeffrey Rayport and Bernard Jaworski of Monitor / Marketspace
Center
2002 / 656 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-250095-0 / MHID: 0-07-250095-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112412-6 / MHID: 0-07-112412-8 [IE]
Website: www.Marketspaceu.com
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Overview of e-Commerce Framework. Chapter 2: Framing the Market
Opportunity. Chapter 3: Business Models. Chapter 4: Customer Interface. Chapter
5: Marketing Communications and Branding. Chapter 6: Implementation.
Chapter 7: Valuation. Chapter 8: Network Infrastructure. Chapter 9: Media
Convergence.
116
11/15/06 5:30:35 PM
E-Commerce
Supply Chain Management
NEW
PURCHASING AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT
By W C Benton
2007 (June 2006) / 800 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352514-3 / MHID: 0-07-352514-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110630-6 / MHID: 0-07-110630-8 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/benton07
Purchasing and Supply Management, 1/e, by W.C. Benton,
offers insights into the theory, practice, and implementation
of supply management issues. A step-by-step approach
helps students and professionals gain analytical purchasing
skills. Many actual case studies and exercises help students
transform purchasing theory into purchasing practice and
implementation. Some of the topics include purchasing
business processes, price cost analysis, professional services,
transportation purchasing, global purchasing, and healthcare
purchasing.
FEATURES
• Introduces innovative and recent concepts in purchasing
and supply chain management, such as supply chain power
and e-purchasing systems concepts.
• Includes coverage of pricing, price discrimination, and an
appendix on the Robinson-Putman act.
• Covers special topics of interest to majors: equipment and
leasing, healthcare purchasing, service procurement, and legal
issues in purchasing and supply management.
• Contains over 25 case studies, all original to this text.
CONTENTS
Preface. Part 1: Introduction to Purchasing and Supply Management. Chapter
1: Purchasing and Supply Management. Chapter 2: Purchasing Decisions
and Business Strategy. Chapter 3: The Legal Aspects of Purchasing. Part 2:
Materials Management. Chapter 4: Materials Management. Chapter 5: Inventory
Management. Chapter 6: Just-In-Time (Lean) Purchasing. Chapter 7: Purchasing
Procedures, E-Purchasing, and Systems Contracting. Part 3: Fundamentals of
Purchasing and Supply Management. Chapter 8: Supplier Selection and Evaluation.
Chapter 9: Global Sourcing. Chapter 10: Purchasing, Supply Partnerships,
and Supply Chain Power. Chapter 11: Total Quality Management (TQM) and
Purchasing. Part 4: Price/Cost Analysis and Negotiation Strategies. Chapter 12:
Price Determination. Chapter 13: Bargaining and Negotiations. Part 5: Special
Purchasing Application. Chapter 14: Purchasing Transportation Services. Chapter
15: Equipment Acquisition and Disposal. Chapter 16: Healthcare Purchasing
and Supply Management. Chapter 17: Procuring Professional Services. Cases.
Glossary. Index
NEW
SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT
Second Edition
By Donald Bowersox, David Closs and M. Bixby Cooper of Michigan
State University—East Lansing
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294788-5 / MHID: 0-07-294788-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125414-4 / MHID: 0-07-125414-5 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/bowersox2e
Supply Chain Logistics Management is exciting and promises to
bolster traditional logistics courses and invigorate supply chain
management courses, by examining traditional logistics issues
within the context of the supply chain. Supply Chain Logistics
Management integrates technology and provides a solid
foundation that clearly describes the role of logistics within the
supply chain, portraying a complete view of the subject and
going farther to show how all the pieces fit together. The most
current trends in process integration, relationship management,
supply chain security and sustainability, globalization, and
the impact of the new consumer economy on supply chain
management and design are featured in the Second Edition.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Important new topics on supply chain added: process
integration, relationship management, supply chain security
and sustainability, globalization, and the impact of the new
consumer economy on supply chain management and
design.
• New, integrated treatment of technology, including ERP
and advanced planning and scheduling systems.
• The book has been shortened and reorganized to
facilitate a better teaching and learning pace, and a leaner
presentation.
Features
• Technology—Vast coverage of the most current
technology in this industry such as Information Networks,
Enterprise Resource Planning and Decision Support Systems
are covered. .
• MSU Loga Simulation—This unique simulation stresses a
complete range of supply chain decisions..
• Authorship—The authors are well-known and respected.
Don Bowersox is a well-published author and researcher. He
is acknowledged as one of the leading authorities on logistics.
David Closs’ research in logistics is also well respected, he
also has extensive consulting experience and is a roundtable
officer of the Council of Logistics Management, Bixby
Cooper is the co-author of Marketing Channels along with
Bowersox and is very visible as a member of various logistics
professional organizations. Their talent will be very well
received within the industry.
• Unique Balanced Approach : The book offers a unique
blend of supply chain and logistics.
• Extensive integration of spreadsheet-based solution
methods in the text and problem material, for example:
Use of Excel Solver to solve linear programming problems
(Chapter 10) and reciprocal cost allocation problems (Chapter
14), Use of Excel regression to solve linear regression
problems, Use of spreadsheets to perform sensitivity analysis
in cost-volume-profit analysis and to prepare process cost
reports. Actual Excel screens are used to illustrate the use of
the methods to make it easier to replicate the examples and
problems, following the illustrated Excel commands
CONTENTS
PART ONE – SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT. Chapter 1 21st
Century Supply Chains. Chapter 2 Logistics. Chapter 3 Customer Accommodation.
Chapter 4 Procurement and Manufacturing. Chapter 5 Information Technology
Framework. PART TWO – SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS OPERATIONS. Chapter
6 Inventory. Chapter 7 Transportation Infrastructure. Chapter 8 Transportation
Operations. Chapter 9 Warehousing. Chapter 10 Packaging and Materials
Handling. Chapter 11 Operational Integration. PART THREE – SUPPLY CHAIN
117
11/15/06 5:30:36 PM
E-Commerce
LOGISTICS DESIGN. Chapter 12 Global Strategic Positioning. Chapter 13 Network
Integration. Chapter 14 Logistics Design and Operational Planning. PART FOUR
– SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS ADMINSTRATION. Chapter 15 Relationship
Development and Management. Chapter 16 Operational, Financial and Social
Performance. EPILOGUE
NEW
DESIGNING AND MANAGING THE SUPPY CHAIN
Third Edition
By David Simchi-Levi, Northwestern University, Philip Kaminsky,
University of California-Berkeley and Edith Simchi-Levi, Logic Tools,
Inc., Lexington
2007 (Feb 2006) / 460 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298239-8 / MHID: 0-07-298239-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124477-0 / MHID: 0-07-124477-8 [IE]
As the most up-to-date, cutting-edge supply chain management
book on the market, the Third Edition of Designing and
Managing the Supply Chain discusses the problems, models
and concepts derived from issues related to effective
supply chain management. While many core supply chain
management issues are interrelated, the authors have tried to
make each chapter as self-contained as possible so that the
reader can refer directly to chapters covering topics of interest.
Each chapter utilizes case studies and numerous examples.
Mathematical and technical sections can be skipped without
loss of continuity. Most textbooks do not include models and
decision support systems robust enough for industry, but that
is not true of this new edition. The accompanying CD-ROM
also features the return of two simulations, the Computerized
Beer Game and the Risk Pool Game and a computerized tool.
These simulations help users develop and execute supply
chain contracts while also illustrating many of the concepts
discussed in the text.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Improved and Integrated Coverage of Technology
– To reflect a more realistic approach to incorporating
technology in today’s companies, Chapter 8 (on “ Supply
Chain Design”) has again been updated, incorporating
new material on coordinating product and supply chain,
on modular processes and products; Chapter 9 (“Customer
Value”) expands and updates an Amazon.com example
and adds material on “Customer Relations Management”’;
Chapter 10 (“Information Technology”) has new material
on “the Internet” “events management” “collaboration” and
“exchanges”, “modeling” and “demand planning” (Chapter
11 “Decision Support Systems”).
• New or updated cases: Several new cases have been
added and remaining ones updated. When possible, a single
case has been replaced with multiple cases within a chapter,
in response to reviewer suggestions.
• More comprehensive and complete ancillary package.
Improved solutions, powerpoint, and teaching notes on the
instructor CD offer added flexibility and resources for the
instructor.
FEATURES
• Strong coverage of e commerce as it relates to
procurement and distribution. Reflecting the current trends in
e-commerce, one entire chapter is devoted to “Procurement
Strategies” (Chapter 12)another, to “Distribution Strategy”
(Chapter 5)and the impact of ecommerce.
• Expanded discussion of forecasting: Responding to the
recommendations of reviewers, the material on “Forecasting”
(Chapter 4, “The Value of Information”) has been enhanced.
• Broad Introduction to many critical issues pertinent to
Supply Chain Management: The topics discussed range
from a basic discussion of inventory management, logistics
network design, distribution systems, and customer value, to
more advanced discussions of strategic alliances, the value of
information in the supply chain, information technology and
decisions support systems, and international issues in supply
chain management.
• State-of-the-art models: Managing and Designing the
Supply Chain introduces state-of-the-art models, concepts,
and solution methods important in the design, control
operation, and management of supply chain systems.
• Innovative Software included on CD-ROM: The
Computerized Beer Game and the Risk Pool Game are
included on a CD-ROM, available free-of-charge and
packaged with each copy of the text.
• Case Studies: Each chapter contains at least one case
study.
• Authorship: The authors have taught a variety of students
and the book is written to appeal to many types of readers.
This book is appropriate for undergraduate and graduate
business students as well as for engineers and engineering
students. It will also have tremendous appeal to customers in
the professional market that are seeking a reference book on
supply chain management.
• New “Supply Contracts” Tool on CD-ROM: Besides the
computerized versions of “The Beer Game” and the “Risk
Pool Game,” there will be a newly developed electronic tool
dealing with supply contracts. Now students have even more
support to help them conceptualize strategic supply chain
management.
PURCHASING AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT
Thirteenth Edition
By Michiel Leenders, University of Western Ontario, Harold E.
Fearon, Center for Advanced Purchasing Studies, Emeritus, Anna
Flynn and P. Fraser Johnson, University of Western Ontario
2006 / 588 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287379-5 / MHID: 0-07-287379-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124966-9 / MHID: 0-07-124966-4 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/leenders13e
The Leenders’ text provides a comprehensive introduction to
the purchasing and supply chain management field, supported
by 50 case studies. Cases cover purchasing and supply chain
issues in a variety of settings, from process industries to high
tech manufacturing and services as well as public institutions.
Supply Management concepts, both strategic and tactical,
have been expanded throughout the text, particularly in
new chapters on Supply Law and Ethics, Public Supply, and
Supplier Relations. While all basic tenets of the purchasing
function and cost issues remain, the coverage of the field is
state of the art highlighting the supply chain approach.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 – Purchasing and Supply Management Chapter 2 – Supply Organization
Chapter 3 – Supply Processes Chapter 4 – Information Systems and Technology
Chapter 5 – Quality, Specification and Service Chapter 6 – Quantity and Inventory
Chapter 7 – Transportation and Delivery Chapter 8 – Price Chapter 9 – Cost
Management, Discounts, and Negotiation Chapter 10 – Supplier Selection
Chapter 11 – Investment Recovery Chapter12 – Supply Law and Ethics Chapter 13
– Research and Metrics Chapter 14 – Global Supply Chapter 15 – Public Supply
Management Chapter 16 – Capital Goods Chapter 17 – Services Chapter 18 – Make
or Buy, Insourcing, and Outsourcing Chapter 19 – Supplier Relations Chapter 20
– Strategy in Purchasing and Supply Management / Case Index / Subject Index
118
11/15/06 5:30:37 PM
E-Commerce
WORLD CLASS SUPPLY MANAGEMENT
The Key to Supply Chain Management with Student
CD (Cases)
Seventh Edition
By David N. Burt, University of San Diego and Donald W. Dobler,
Colorado State University, Emeritus
2003
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283156-6 / MHID: 0-07-283156-1
(with CD-ROM)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123627-0 / MHID: 0-07-123627-9
[IE with CD-ROM]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/burt7e
CONTENTS
I The Foundation: 1. World Class Supply Management / 2. Purchasing Becomes
Supply Management / 3. Supply Management: An Organization-Spanning Activity /
4. Supply Management: Implementor of Three of the Firm’s Social Responsibilities
/ II. Enabling Concepts: 5. Three Types of Buyer-Supplier Relationships / 6. CrossFunctional Teams / 7. Quality / 8. Total Cost of Ownership / 9. e-Procurement /
III. The Requirements Process: 10. New Product Development / 11. Specifications
and Standardization / 12. Equipment / 13. Services / IV. Strategic Sourcing: 14.
Make or Buy/Outsourcing / 15. Source Selection / 16. Global Supply Management
/ V. Strategic Cost Management: 17. Pricing / 18. Cost Analysis / 19. Types of
Compensation / 20. Negotiation / VI. Relationship Management: 21. Relationship
and Contract Management / 22. Supplier Development / 23. Alliance Development
/ 24. Ethics / 25. Legal / VII. Integrating the Supply Chain: 26. Demand Management
/ VIII. Institutional and Government Procurement: 27. Supply Management in
Institutions / 28. Government Procurement / IX. Supply Chain Management: 29.
World Class Supply Management (sm) : The Key to Supply Chain Management.
Customer Relations Management
CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT
Creating Competitive Advantage throught Win-Win
Relationship Strategies
By Kaj Storbacka, CEO of CRM Group Ltd and Jarmo L Lehtinen,
University of Tampere
2001 / 176 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120678-5 / MHID: 0-07-120678-7 (Softcover)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118861-6 / MHID: 0-07-118861-4 (Hardcover)
The aim of customer relationship management (CRM) is to build
relationship strategies that refine relationships, and in this way
increase their value. This book is the result of an extensive
research project that studied new ideas in marketing and how
these ideas are being applied in practice. Field trips to US and
European businesses to study their CRM processes, and the
participation of major Scandinavian companies provide a wide
range of practical examples. The authors also draw on their
experiences in consulting work to present in-depth examples
of successful implementations of these new ideas.
contact your local
[email protected]
119
11/15/06 5:30:37 PM
E-Commerce
Professional E-Commerce
EBAY THE SMART WAY
4th Edition
By Joseph T. Sinclair
2005
ISBN-13: 978-0-8144-7289-7 / MHID: 0-8144-7289-3
E-COMMERCE
Second Edition
By KK Bajaj and Debjani Nag
2005 / 616 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-058556-0 / MHID: 0-07-058556-3
A comprehensive coverage of technology and processes
behind e-commerce and e-governance At the time of the
publication of the first edition of this book, the Internet was
seen as a formidable force. It portended to disrupt and transform
almost all facets of life; the way we lived and worked, the way
commerce was conducted and the way governments would
provide services to their citizens. E-commerce was largely
seen as the vehicle to propel and accelerate these changes.
Most of these changes have occurred, despite the bursting of
the Internet bubble after a period of big hype in the year 2000.
E-Commerce has weathered many challenges and continues to
grow. Now businesses and economies accept that e-commerce
is here to stay. New business models are being tried and tested,
along with novel methods for exploiting the Internet to make
businesses survive and thrive in the highly competitive emarketplace. The revised edition of this highly successful book
captures the essence of the momentous changes that were
witnessed in the last six years. Content, which is no longer
relevant, has been deleted, while some of the chapters have
been rewritten in entirety. New chapters have been added to
address the major developments in e-governance, incidence
of cyber crimes and their mitigation and the legal framework
for enabling trust in the electronic environment. E-Commerce:
The Cutting Edge of Business presents the technology and
processes behind e-commerce and e-governance. It also
underscores the importance of security of transactions in the
electronic environment. With such an extensive coverage,
the book will be useful to people in trade and commerce and
to businesses which are trying to expand using Internet and
intranet commerce. Students and teachers of e-commerce will
find that the technology and processes that make e-commerce
click have been addressed in detail. The book will also be of
enormous value to government officials, financial institutions,
public sector and the private industry keen to learn about ‘The
Cutting Edge of Business’.
CONTENTS
Part I: Theme of the Book. 1. Information Technology and Business. 2. ECommerce. Part II: Electronic Communication. 3. PCs and Networking. 4. E-mail.
5. The Internet. 6. Intranets. Part III: Building Blocks for E-Commerce. 7. Electronic
Data Interchange. 8. The UN/EDIFACT Standard. 9. The Internet and Extranets.
10. Identification and Tracking Tools. Part IV: Reengineering for Change. 11.
Business Process Reengineering. 12. Management of Change. Part V: Concerns
for E-Commerce Growth. 13. Legal Issues. 14. Cyber Security. 15. Cyber Crimes.
Part VI: Creating Trust in the Electronic Environment. 16. Information Technology
Act, 2000. 17. Public Key Infrastructure. 18. Electronic Payment Systems and
Internet Banking. Part VII: Case Studies in India. 19. E-Commerce—Case Studies.
20. E-Governance—Case Studies. Part VIII: Appendices
Why would anyone buy a book for dummies when they can
eBay the Smart Way? The only thing easier than buying and
selling on eBay is getting lumped in with more than 125
million other eBayers. The savviest eBay users turn to eBay the
Smart Way, the definitive guide to smarter eBay tactics for both
buyers and sellers. Now in its fourth blockbuster edition, this
priceless tool has changed with the times to cover the latest
trends! With sales of over 125,000 copies, the eBay the Smart
Way series has helped countless eBayers—from occasional
buyers to full-time professional sellers—find the best deals
and maximize profits on everything from collectibles to
cars to real estate. eBay the Smart Way is the go-to resource
for first-time sellers and veterans alike, with step-by-step
instructions for listing products, creating attention-grabbing
photos and descriptions, offering top-notch customer service,
and maintaining high credibility. eBay buyers will also benefit
from powerful strategies for finding the best products, bidding
smarter, negotiating great deals, and more. For the most
indepth and accessible information on how to make the most
out of online auctions, “nothing explains it better than eBay
the Smart Way.” — The Internet Marketing Bookshelf
COMPLIMENTARY
COPIES
120
11/15/06 5:30:38 PM
2007-2008 NEW Electrical Engineering Titles
Electrical Engineering ~
Contents
Advanced Electronics .......................................... 134
Advanced Systems ............................................... 136
Analog Integrated Circuits.................................... 129
Analog OP Amps ................................................. 133
Circuits ................................................................ 123
Coding and Information Theory ........................... 149
Communications ................................................. 145
Communications IV: Advanced ........................... 148
Communications IV: Signals & Systems ............... 148
Computer Architecture/Microprocessors .............. 153
Computer Engineering: Advanced ....................... 154
Control Systems ................................................... 135
Digital Communications ...................................... 147
Digital Control..................................................... 135
Digital Integrated Circuits .................................... 130
Digital Logic Design ............................................ 150
Digital Signal Processing...................................... 143
Digital Signal Processing Laboratory .................... 144
Electricity & Electronics ....................................... 137
Electromagnetics.................................................. 140
Electromagnetics (Advanced) ............................... 141
Electronics I: Analog/Digital................................. 126
Electronics II: Solid-State ...................................... 130
Electronics III: Optics ........................................... 134
Electronics III: Solid-State (Advanced) .................. 134
High Voltage Engineering .................................... 140
EE Majors ........................................................ 123
Machinery ........................................................... 136
Microwaves & Antennas ...................................... 141
Neural Networks/Fuzzy Logic .............................. 152
Power Electronic ................................................. 139
Power Systems..................................................... 139
Probability & Random Processes.......................... 149
Professional References ....................................... 157
Robotics/Intelligent Systems................................. 153
Signals & Systems ................................................ 142
Systems/Controls (Robotics) ................................. 136
Telecommunications ........................................... 155
VLSI Digital ......................................................... 133
Contents
121-160_ELECTRICAL.indd 121
121
11/15/06 5:32:02 PM
2007-2008
NEW Electrical Engineering Titles
Electrical
Engineering
2007 New Titles
ALCIATORE
Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement
Systems, 3e ..............................................................130

2008 New Titles

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322279-0 / MHID: 0-07-322279-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296305-2 / MHID: 0-07-296305-0
ALEXANDER
Fundamentals of Electric Circuits, 3e ......................123


ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325643-6 / MHID: 0-07-325643-9

FOROUZAN

HAYT
Engineering Circuit Analysis, 7e ..............................124

MALVINO
Electronics Principles, 7e ........................................128
NEAMEN
Microelectronic Circuit Analysis and Design, 3e .....128

RIZZONI
Principles and Applications of Electrical
Engineering, 5e ........................................................123
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322033-8 / MHID: 0-07-322033-7

SCHULTZ
Basic Electronics, 10e ..............................................127
ROBERTS
Fundamentals Signals Systems .................................142
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330950-7 / MHID: 0-07-330950-8

ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328596-2 / MHID: 0-07-328596-X

MARCOVITZ
Introduction to Logic and Computer Design
with CD ...................................................................150
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331417-4 / MHID: 0-07-331417-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322277-6 / MHID: 0-07-322277-1

JAEGER
Microelectronic Circuit Design, 3e .........................127
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330948-4 / MHID: 0-07-330948-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326318-2 / MHID: 0-07-326318-4

FRENZEL
Principles of Electronic Communication
Systems, 3e ..............................................................145
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322278-3 / MHID: 0-07-322278-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325032-8 / MHID: 0-07-325032-5

FOWLER
Electricity: Principles and Applications, 7e..............137
SCHULER
Electronics: Principles and Applications, 7e ............126
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331651-2 / MHID: 0-07-331651-2

TOKHEIM
Digital Electronics: Principles and
Applications, 7e.......................................................126
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322275-2 / MHID: 0-07-322275-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322276-9 / MHID: 0-07-322276-3

TRONT
PSpice for Basic Circuit Analysis, 2e .......................124
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326319-9 / MHID: 0-07-326319-2

TRONT
PSpice for Basic Microelectronics ...........................125
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326320-5 / MHID: 0-07-326320-6
122
2006-2007 New Titles
11/15/06 5:32:03 PM
Electrical Engineering
Introduction To Electrical
Engineering For Non EE Majors
NEW
PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONS OF ELECTRICAL
ENGINEERING
Fifth Edition
by Giorgio Rizzoni, Ohio State University
2007
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322033-8 / MHID: 0-07-322033-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125444-1 / MHID: 0-07-125444-7 [IE]
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The Hallmark Feature of Rizzoni is:
Extensive use of practical, interesting applications from all areas of
engineering to illustrate principles
• Great Pedagogy to help the students retain knowledge
• What’s NEW-FEATURES
links, and more.
Also, a section called “Find it on the Web” has been added
throughout. These sections provide web links to global companies
that manufacture the devices mentioned in the text. Students will be
able to quickly look up manufacturer’s data sheets and other useful
information for use in design problems. This material will be revised
and updated.
• Rizzoni’s experience as an electrical engineer teaching in a
mechanical engineering department makes him the ideal author
for an EE book for non majors. Through the use of a wide variety
of applications and interesting problems, Rizzoni stimulates and
motivates the non-majors audience.
• A list of learning objectives is presented after each chapter’s
introductory section. Reminders are provided in the margin when a
key topic related to a learning objective is introduced.
• “Make the Connection” sidebars are used to present analogies
between electric circuits and hydraulic, thermal, and mechanical
systems. Examples that illustrate the analogies are included.
• “Focus on Methodology” boxes throughout the text enumerate and
highlight the steps involved in using various methods of analysis. This
feature reminds students to use the procedures for analysis properly,
and highlights the methods (through the use of a shaded box)for easy
reference.
• “Check Your Understanding” exercises.
Each and every example in the text is followed by a “Check your
Understanding” exercise. Answers are provided to these exercises so
students can confirm their mastery of the concept in the preceding
example.
• “Focus on Measurements” boxes.
The need for measurements is a common thread to all engineering
and scientific disciplines. To emphasize the great relevance of
electrical engineering to the science and practice of measurements,
a special set of examples has been created to focus on measurement
problems. These examples often relate to disciplines outside
electrical engineering (e.g., biomedical, mechanical, thermal, and
fluid system measurements).
• Operational Amplifier coverage has been moved earlier in the text.
Chapter 8 on Op Amps is the first chapter in the Electronics section,
reflecting the way OP AMPS are discussed in majors Electronics
courses.
This chapter is completely self-contained, however, so the instructor
may choose early OR later coverage of op amps.
• Chapter 6 includes complete coverage of Fourier series and Bode
plots.
• Chapters 10 (bipolar transistors) and 11 (field-effect transistors) can
be covered (or not covered) in either order.
• A wealth of homework problems offers students repeated
opportunities to apply the concepts they’re learning.
• Computer tools are introduced, and their use is encouraged in the
text’s examples and problems. Students are given the opportunity to
solve problems with a variety of computer tools such as MathCad,
MatLab, etc. Also, a new feature, “Focus on Computer-Aided Tools,”
is found in each chapter.
An Online Learning Center can be found at www.mhhe.com/rizzoni.
This site contains resources for students and instructors. It includes
such things as password-protected solutions for instructors, data
sheets, new instrumentation examples, sample syllabi, an additional
chapter on Communications for schools that cover this material, web
INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
Second Edition
by Clayton Paul, University of Kentucky; Syed Nasar, University of
Kentucky; Louis Unnewehr, Sullair Corp, Michigan City
1992 / 816 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112907-7 / MHID: 0-07-112907-3 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction/Part I•Linear Electric Circuits/2 Circuit Elements and Laws/3
Analysis Techniques for Resistive Circuits/4 The Energy Storage Elements/5
AC Circuits/6 Transients/Part II•Electronic Circuits/7 Diodes/8 Transistors
and Amplifiers/9 The Operational Amplifier/10 Digital Electronic Circuits/Part
III•Electric Power and Machines/11 Polyphase Circuits/12 Magnetic Circuits/13
Transformers/14 DC Machines/15 Synchronous Machines/16 Induction
Motors/17 Small AC Motors/18 Electric Power Systems/Part IV•Control and
Instrumentation/19 Feedback Control Systems/20 Electrical Instrumentation/Part
V•Digital Circuits and Systems/21 Digital Logic Circuits/22 Digital Systems/
Appendixes/A Unit Conversion/B Fourier Series/C LaPlace Transforms/Answers
to Problems/Index
Circuits
NEW
FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRIC CIRCUITS
Third Edition
by Charles Alexander, Cleveland State University and Matthew
Sadiku, Prairie View A&M University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325643-6 / MHID: 0-07-325643-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110903-1 / MHID: 0-07-110903-X
[IE with Bind-in Card]
http://www.mhhe.com/alexander
Alexander and Sadiku’s third edition of Fundamentals of
Electric Circuits continues in the spirit of its successful previous
editions, with the objective of presenting circuit analysis
in a manner that is clearer, more interesting, and easier to
understand than the competition. Students are introduced to
the sound, six-step problem solving methodology in chapter
one, and are consistently made to apply and practice these
steps in practice problems and homework problems throughout
the text and online using the KCIDE software.
A balance of theory, worked examples and extended examples,
practice problems, and real-world applications, combined
with over 300 new homework problems for the third edition
and robust media offerings, renders the third edition the most
comprehensive and student-friendly approach to linear circuit
analysis. Key: It’s all about Alexander’s Problem Solving
Approach--supported with unmatched quantity and quality of
problems--sets this text apart from the traditional texts
123
11/15/06 5:32:04 PM
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• C.O.S.M.O.S. Solutions Manual, provided to instructors on
CD, allows for assignment generation, tracking, and distribution.
Instructors also have the ability to edit homework problems.
• A new four color design program
• NEW!! Over 300 new homework problems have been added to
the new edition, with over 1800 total problems provided in the text.
• “Enhancing Your Skills” chapter openers in several chapters
• Knowledge Capturing Integrated Design Environment (KCIDE)
software provided on the Online Learning Center leads students
through end of chapter problems using the six-step problem solving
method, and keeps a record for how problems are solved so students
can share and check their work. An appendix on KCIDE has been
added to the text.
FEATURES
• The six-step problem solving methodology is introduced in
chapter one and carried throughout the text to promote sound
problem solving practices. A bookmark is included with each copy of
the book to remind students of the solution steps (and to mark their
place).
CONTENTS
Part 1 DC Circuits: 1 Basic Concepts. 2 Basic Laws. 3 Methods of Analysis. 4 Circuit
Theorems. 5 Operational Amplifiers. 6 Capacitors and Inductors. 7 First-Order
Circuits. 8 Second-Order Circuits. Part 2 AC Circuits: 9 Sinusoids and Phasors. 10
Sinusoidal Steady-State Analysis. 11 AC Power Analysis. 12 Three-Phase Circuits.
13 Magnetically Coupled Circuits. 14 Frequency Response. Part 3 Advanced
Circuit Analysis: 15 Introduction to the Laplace Transform. 16 Applications of
the Laplace Transform. 17 The Fourier Series. 18 Fourier Transform. 19 Two-Port
Networks. Appendix A Simultaneous Equations and Matrix Inversion, Appendix
B Complex Numbers, Appendix C Mathematical Formulas. Appendix D PSpice
for Windows. Appendix E MATLAB. Appendix F KCIDE. Appendix G Answers
to Odd-Numbered Problems
writing expressions in Probe, and also to show useful simulations that
tie in to the text material.
• Many new examples have been added, particularly in the transient
analysis chapters (7, 8, and 9), and closely related practice problems
are provided alongside examples.
• Many basic level, “confidence building” end-of-chapter exercises
have been added for the seventh edition, something specifically
requested by students around the world.
• Problem-solving techniques are introduced in Chapter One to
prepare students for developing a methodical approach to circuit
analysis. The step-by-step approach is used in each subsequent
chapter, with a carefully selected example in each chapter re-stating
the problem-solving methodology as a reminder to the students.
• A new full color design has been implemented throughout.
• Design-oriented questions appear at the ends of selected chapters
to help students grasp the complexities of the design process.
• The Online Learning Center offers students eProfessor Videos,
Algorithmic Problems, a Problem Solving Workbook, Network
Analysis Tutorials, FE Exam Review Material, a PSpice Manual, an
extra chapter on State-Variable Analysis, and text updates. And for
instructors the site provides Solutions and PowerPoint slides.
• COSMOS gives instructors the ability to edit all text homework
problems to create assignments, quizzes and tests.
CONTENTS
1 Circuit Analysis and Electrical Engineering. 2 Basic Components and Electric
Circuits. 3 Voltage and Laws. 4 Basic Nodal and Mesh Analysis. 5 Useful Circuit
Analysis Techniques. 6 The Operational Amplifier. 7 Capacitors and Inductors. 8
Basic RL and RC Circuits. 9 The RLC Circuit. 10 Sinusoidal Steady State Analysis.
11 AC Power Circuit Analysis. 12 Polyphase Circuits. 13 Magnetically Coupled
Circuits. 14 Complex Frequency and The Laplace Transform. 15 Circuit Analysis in
the s-Domain. 16 Frequency Response. 17 Two-Port Networks. 18 Fourier Circuit
Analysis. 19 State-Variable Analysis--*on Web Site Only. Appendixes Appendix
1 An Introduction to Network Topology. Appendix 2 Solution of Simultaneous
Equations. Appendix 3 A Proof of Thevenin’s Theorem. Appendix 4 A PSpice
Tutorial. Appendix 5 Complex Numbers. Appendix 6 A Brief MATLAB tutorial.
Appendix 7 Additional Laplace Transform Theorems. Appendix 8 Answers to
Odd-Numbered Problems
NEW
ENGINEERING CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
Seventh Edition
by William H. Hayt (deceased), Jack Kemmerly (deceased), and
Steven M. Durbin, University of Canterbury, New Zealand
2007 (January 2006) / Hardcover / 800 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326318-2 / MHID: 0-07-326318-4
(with Aris bind-in card)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110937-6 / MHID: 0-07-110937-4 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/hayt7e
The book website contains the solutions manual (instructors
only), tutorials, Virtual Professor, COSMOS and much more.
The hallmark feature of this classic text is its focus on the student
– it is written so that students may teach the science of circuit
analysis to themselves. Terms are clearly defined when they
are introduced, basic material appears toward the beginning
of each chapter and is explained carefully and in detail, and
numerical examples are used to introduce and suggest general
results. Simple practice problems appear throughout each
chapter, while problems that are more difficult appear at the
ends of chapters, following the order of presentation of text
material. This introduction and resulting repetition provide an
important boost to the learning process. Hayt’s rich pedagogy
supports and encourages the student throughout by offering
tips and warnings, using design to highlight key material, and
providing lots of opportunities for hands-on learning. The
thorough exposition of topics is delivered in an informal way
that underscores the authors’ conviction that circuit analysis
can and should be fun.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
NEW
PSPICE FOR BASIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
Second Edition
by Joseph G Tront, Virginia Polytech Institute & State University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326319-9 / MHID: 0-07-326319-2 (with CD)
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Examples will be based on the most current version of PSPice (a
copy of OrCAD PSpice will be packaged on a CD-ROM with this
book) but the principles are applicable to other versions of PSpice.
• The examples (with solutions) will be updated 20% for the new
edition.
Features
• Includes step-by-step instructions to support novice users as they
perform schematic capture and circuit simulation.
• Provides detailed explanations and examples of the use of PSpice
in typical problem solving situations.
• Explains some of the salient features of PSpice, including
information on Capture and Probe.
• Chapters are written in a modular format so the organization is
flexible.
• This manual will work well with either McGraw-Hill circuits’ text:
Alexander/Sadiku’s “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits, 2e” & Hayt/
Kemmerly/Durbin’s “Engineering Circuit Analysis, 6e.”
• Practical Applications boxes throughout the book connect material
to real-world situations and tie in concepts of design and problemsolving.
• PSpice examples are included in relevant chapters to introduce
students to practical features such as DC sweeps, transient analysis,
124
11/15/06 5:32:05 PM
NEW
PSPICE FOR BASIC MICROELECTRONICS
by Joseph G. Tront, Virginia Polytech Institute & State University
2007 (February 2006)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-326320-5 / MHID: 0-07-326320-6 (with CD)
The PSpice Manual will be sold as a stand-alone and, also, in
packages with Neamen, Electronic Circuit Analysis and Jaeger,
Microelectronic Circuit Design. Text introduces readers to
the fundamental uses of Pspice in support of Microelectronic
circuit analysis. This book goes beyond basic circuit analysis
to include analysis of more complex electronic problems.
Analysis of diodes, BJTs, JFETs, MOSFETs, and transformers
will be included–all key areas in the Electronics course.
KEY FEATURES
• Step-by-step instructions to support novice users as they perform
schematic capture and circuit simulation.
• Detailed explanations and examples of the use of PSpice in typical
problem-solving situations.
• Explains some of the salient features of PSpice, including
information on OrCAD Capture and Probe.
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BASIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
Second Edition
by John O’Malley, University of Florida
1992 / 484 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-047824-4 / MHID: 0-07-047824-4
CONTENTS
Introduction/1 Resistance/2 Series and Parallel DC Circuits/3 DC Circuit Analysis/4
DC Equivalent Circuits, Network Theorems, and Bridge Circuits/5 Operational
Amplifier Circuits/6 Spice DC Circuit Analysis/7 Capacitors and Capacitance/8
Inductors, Inductance, and PSpice Transient Analysis/9 Sinusoidal Alternating
Voltage and Current/10 Complex Algebra and Phasors/11 Basic AC Circuit
Analysis, Impedance, and Admittance/12 sh, Loop, Nodal, and PSpice Analyses of
AC Circuits/13 AC Equivalent Circuits, Network Theorems, and Bridge Circuits/14
Power in AC Circuits/15 Transformers/16 Three-Phase Circuits
SCHAUM’S SOLVED PROBLEMS IN ELECTRIC
CIRCUITS, BOOK 1
by Syed Nasar, University of Kentucky
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ELECTRIC CIRCUITS
Fourth Edition
1989
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-099190-3 / MHID: 0-07-099190-1 [IE]
by Mahmood Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, University of Akron
2003 / 400 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-139307-2 / MHID: 0-07-139307-2
CONTENTS
1. Introduction. 2. Circuit Concepts. 3. Circuit Laws. 4. Analysis Methods. 5.
Amplifiers and Operational Amplifier Circuits. 6. Waveforms and Signals. 7. FirstOrder Circuits. 8. Higher-Order Circuits and Complex Frequency. 9. Sinusoidal
Steady-State Circuit Analysis. 10. AC Power. 11. Polyphase Circuits. 12. Frequency
Response, Filters, and Resonance. 13. Two-Port Networks. 14. Mutual Inductance
and Transformers. 15. Circuit Analysis Using Spice and Pspice. 16. The LaPlace
Transform Method. 17. Fourier Method of Waveform Analysis. Appendix A
Complex Number System. Appendix B Matrices and Determinants
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BASIC ELECTRICITY
by Milton Gussow, Johns Hopkins University
1983 / 448 pages
ISBN-13" 978-0-07-025240-0 / MHID: 0-07-025240-8
BASIC CIRCUIT THEORY
by Desoer and Kuh
1969
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-085183-2 / MHID: 0-07-085183-2 [IE]
SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF ELECTRONIC DEVICES
AND CIRCUITS
Second Edition
by Jim Cathey, University of Kentucky—Lexington
2002 / 304 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-136270-2 / MHID: 0-07-136270-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122918-0 / MHID: 0-07-122918-3 [IE]
CONTENTS
Circuit Analysis: Port Point of View. Semiconductor Diodes. Characteristics of
Bipolar Junction Transistors. Characteristics of Field-Effect Transistors and Triodes.
Transistor Bias Considerations. Small-Signal Midfrequency BJT Amplifiers. SmallSignal Midfrequency FET Amplifiers. Frequency Effects in Amplifiers. Operational
Amplifiers. Switched Mode Power Supplies
125
11/15/06 5:32:05 PM
ELECTRONICS I: Analog/
Digital
NEW
ELECTRONICS: PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONS
Seventh Edition
by Charles A. Schuler
2008 (February 2007)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331651-2 / MHID: 0-07-331651-2
(with MultiSIM CD)
Electronics: Principles and Applications provides a concise,
practical introduction to analog devices, circuits and systems.
Like earlier editions, the Seventh Edition combines theory with
real-world applications in a well-paced sequence, introducing
students to such topics as semiconductors, op amps, linear
integrated circuits, switching power supplies, electronic
communications devices and DSP. The text prepares students
to effectively diagnose, repair, verify, and install electronic
circuits and systems, without overwhelming them with
excessive theory. MultiSim examples are included for optional
simulation activities, with MultiSim circuit files included on a
bound-in CD ROM. Prerequisites are a command of algebra
and an understanding of fundamental electrical concepts.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Bound-in CD ROM with MultiSIM version 7 circuit simulation
files, for circuits included in both the textbook and Experiments
Manual.
• CPS from eInstruction is available with Schuler 7/e; PowerPoint
and electronic testbank questions are provided that work directly
with CPS in the classroom.
• New OLC website is available, with new student and instructor
resources.
FEATURES
• Concise approach to electronics, with a practical approach
throughout. Just enough theory is presented to support the practical
applications students will need for their careers.
• Student learning is reinforced by Self-Tests included with each
chapter sub-section; and by Summaries, Related Formulas, Review
Questions & Problems and Critical Thinking Questions at the end of
each chapter.
• Popular features such as chapter objectives, highlighted key terms,
color-coded circuit components, and About Electronics have been
retained and updated.
• Modern topics like DSP (chapter 16) and Wireless Networks for
communications (section 12-5) are included.
• Experiments Manual for Electronics:Principles and Applications
contains labs linked to the text, to help students gain hands-on
experience to reinforce subject matter and develop troubleshooting
skills.
• Instructor Productivity Center CD ROM contains classroom
PowerPoint presentations for every chapter, Test Generator,
supplemental PowerPoint presentations, electronic Solutions Manual,
and more.
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 1-1 A Brief History. 1-2 Digital or Analog. 1-3 Analog Functions
1-5 Trends in Electronics. 2 Semiconductors. 2-1 Conductors & Insulators. 2-2
Semiconductors. 2-3 N-Type Semiconductors. 2-4 P-Type Semiconductors. 3
Diodes. 3-1 The PN Junction. 3-2 Characteristic Curves of Diodes. 3-3 Diode Lead
Identification. 3-4 Diode Types and Applications. 4 Power Supplies. 4-1 The PowerSupply System. 4-2 Rectification. 4-3 Full-Wave Rectification. 4-4 Conversion of
RMS Values to Average Values. 4-5 Filters. 4-6 Voltage Multipliers. 4-7 Ripple
and Regulation. 4-8 Zener Regulators. 4-9 More Karnaugh Maps. 5 Transistors.
5-1 Amplification. 5-2 Transistors. 5-3 Characteristic Curves. 5-4 Transistor Data.
5-5 Transistor Testing. 5-6 Other Transistor Types. 5-7 Transistors as Switches. 6
Introduction to Small-Signal Amplifiers. 6-1 Measuring Gain. 6-2 Common-Emitter
Amplifier. 6-3 Stabilizing the Amplifier. 6-4 Other Configurations. 6-5 Simulation
and Models. 7 More About Small-Signal Amplifiers. 7-1 Amplifier Coupling. 7-2
Voltage Gains in Coupled Stages. 7-3 Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Amplifiers.
7-4 Negative Feedback. 7-5 Frequency Response. 7-6 Triggering Flip-Flops. 7-7
Schmitt Triggered Devices. 7-8 IEEE Logic Symbols. 8 Large-Signal Amplifiers.
8-1 Amplifier Class. 8-2 Class A Power Amplifiers. 8-3 Class B Power Amplifiers.
8-4 Class AB Power Amplifiers. 8-5 Class C Power Amplifiers. 8-6 Switch-Mode
Amplifiers. 9 Operational Amplifiers. 9-1 The Differential Amplifier. 9-2 Differential
Amplifier Analysis. 9-3 Operational Amplifiers. 9-4 Setting Op-Amp Gain. 9-5
Frequency Effects in Op Amps. 9-6 Op-Amp Applications. 9-7 Comparators. 10
Troubleshooting. 10-1 Preliminary Checks. 10-2 No Output. 10-3 Reduced Output.
10-4 Distortion and Noise. 10-5 Intermittents. 10-6 Operational Amplifiers. 11
Oscillators. 11-1 Oscillator Characteristics. 11-2 RC Circuits. 11-3 LC Circuits. 11-4
Crystal Circuits. 11-5 Relaxation Oscillators. 11-6 Undesired Oscillations. 11-7
Oscillator Troubleshooting. 11-8 Direct Digital Synthesis. 12 Communications.
12-1 Modulation and Demodulation. 12-2 Simple Receivers.
12-3 Superheterodyne Receivers. 12-4 Frequency Modulation and Single Sideband.
12-5 Wireless Networks. 12-6 Troubleshooting. 13 Integrated Circuits. 13-1
Introduction. 13-2 Fabrication. 13-3 The 555 Timer. 13-4 Analog ICs. 13-5 Mixed
IC Signals. 13-6 Troubleshooting. 14 Electronic Control Devices and Circuits. 14-1
Introduction. 14-2 The Silicon-Controlled Rectifier. 14-3 Full-Wave Devices. 14-4
Feedback in Control Circuitry. 14-5 Troubleshooting Electronic Control Circuits.
15 Regulated Power Supplies. 15-1 Open-Loop Voltage Regulation. 15-2 ClosedLoop Voltage Regulation. 15-3 Current and Voltage Limiting. 15-4 Switch-Mode
Regulators. 15-5 Troubleshooting Regulated Power Supplies. 16 Digital Signal
Processing. 16-1 Overview of DSP Systems. 16-2 Moving-Average Filters. 16-3
Fourier Theory. 16-4 Digital Filter Theory. 16-5 Other DSP Applications. 16-6
Limitations of DSP. 16-7 DSP Troubleshooting. Appendix A Soldering. Appendix
B Thermionic Devices. Glossary. Index.
NEW
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS: PRINCIPLES AND
APPLICATIONS
Seventh Edition
by Roger L. Tokheim
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322275-2 / MHID: 0-07-322275-5
(Student Text with MultiSIM CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07110850-8 / MHID: 0-07-110850-5
[IE with MultiSIM CD]
Digital Electronics: Principles and Applications is a concise and
practical text that prepares students for entry-level electronics
jobs. Its level and approach are ideal for both electronics and
electricity programs looking for a relatively short, applied book.
The seventh edition has been updated, with new coverage of
microcontrollers, memory, and interfacing. Optional simulation
work with MultiSim is included in the text and accompanying
Experiments Manual, with circuit files included on a boundin CD ROM. Additional student and instructor resources are
included on a new Online Learning Center website.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Interfacing has been updated and expanded, especially in chapter
5 and chapter 14.
• Memory concepts and examples have been updated in chapter 11.
• MultiSIM v8 simulation files for the circuits included on the CD
ROM bound in with the text and Experiments Manual.
• CPS from eInstruction is available with the text, for in-class
quizzing and classroom management.
• Online Learning Center (OLC) website provides student quizees,
career information, links to key sites, chapter outlines and other
resources.
FEATURES
• Accessible writing style, reading level and math presentation are
used throughout the text.
• Gates, circuits and other digital components are presented as subsystems within larger digital system applications.
• Experiments Manual with MultiSim CD ROM helps students gain
practical, hands-on experience, troubleshooting skills, and exposure
to software simulation techniques.
• Instructor Productivity Center (IPC) CD ROM contains Power Point
126
11/15/06 5:32:06 PM
presentations for each chapter, EZTestelectronic test generator and
questions, and solutions to all textbook and Experiments Manual
questions and activities.
CONTENTS
1 Digital Electronics. 2 Numbers We Use in Digital Electronics. 3 Logic Gates. 4
Combining Logic Gates. 5 IC Specifications and Simple Interfacing. 6 Encoding,
Decoding, and Seven-Segment Displays. 7 Flip-Flops. 8 Counters. 9 Shift Registers.
10 Arithmetic circuits. 11 Memory and Storage. 12 Digital Systems. 13 Computer
Systems. 14 Connecting with Analog Devices
NEW
BASIC ELECTRONICS
Tenth Edition
by Mitchel E Schultz, Western Wisconsin Technical College
2007 (June 2006) / 1,056 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322276-9 / MHID: 0-07-322276-3
(with MultiSIM CD-ROM)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110848-5 / MHID: 0-07-110848-3 [IE]
(A Glencoe/McGraw-Hill Title)
http://www.mhe.com/grob10e
NEW
MICROELECTRONIC CIRCUIT DESIGN
Third Edition
by Richard C. Jaeger, Auburn Univ-Auburn, and Travis Blalock,
University Of VA-Charlottesville
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330948-4 / MHID: 0-07-330948-6
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/jaeger
Microelectronic Circuit Design is known for being a technically
excellent text. The new edition has been revised to make the
material more motivating and accessible to students while
retaining a student-friendly approach.
A pedagogical framework has been added that includes
chapter opening vignettes, chapter objectives, "Electronics in
Action" boxes, a problem solving methodology, and "design
note" boxes.
The number of examples, including new design examples,
has been increased, giving students more opportunity to
see problems worked out. Additionally, some of the less
fundamental mathematical material has been moved to the
website.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• At the request of users and reviewers, the authors have focused on
the fundamentals and given a briefer coverage of Electronics.
• A pedagogical framework has been added that includes chapter
opening vignettes, chapter objectives, "Electronics in Action" boxes,
a problem solving methodology, and "design note" boxes
FEATURES
• Emphasis on design through the use of "Design Examples" and
"Design Notes".
• "Electronics in Action" sections connect the student to the real
world of Electronics with the use of practical applications.
• Consistent problem solving methodology.
CONTENTS
Part I Solid State Electronic and Devices. 1 Introduction to Electronics. 2 Solid-State
Electronics. 3 Solid-State Diodes and Diode Circuits. 4 Field-Effect Transistors. 5
Bipolar Junction Transistors. Part II Digital Electronics. 6 Introduction to Digital
Electronics. 7 Complementary MOS (CMOS) Logic Design. 8 MOS Memory
and Storage Circuits. 9 Bipolar Logic Circuits. Part III Analog Circuit Design.
10 Analog Systems. 11 Operational Amplifiers. 12 Operational Amplifier
Applications. 13 Small-Signal Modeling and Linear Amplification. 14 SingleTransistor Amplifiers. 15 Multistage Amplifiers. 16 Analog Integrated Circuits.
17 Frequency Response. 18 Feedback, Stability, and Oscillators. Appendix A
Standard Discrete Component Values. Appendix B Solid-State Device Models
and SPICE Simulation Parameters
Grob’s Basic Electronics, Tenth Edition, is written for the
beginning student pursuing a technical degree in Electronics
Technology. In covering the fundamentals of electricity
and electronics, this text focuses on essential topics for the
technician, and the all-important development of testing and
troubleshooting skills. This highly practical approach combines
clear, carefully-laid-out explanations of key topics with
good, worked-out examples and problems to solve. Review
problems that follow each section reinforce the material just
completed, making this a very student-friendly text. It is a
thoroughly accessible introduction to basic DC and AC circuits
and electronic devices. This tenth edition of this longtime
best-selling text has been refined, updated and made more
student friendly. The focus on absolutely essential knowledge
for technicians, and focus on real-world applications of these
basic concepts makes it ideal for today’s technology students.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• A new beginning chapter, “The Powers of Ten,” initiates the
course with scientific notation, a math skill that every electronics
student must be able to use.
• New Streamlined Design: The new edition of Grob has a
contemporary, streamlined design that underscores the text’s tight
focus on essential topics. Marginal text features--Calculator Tips,
Pioneers in Electronics, and Good to Know--have been selected and
designed to reinforce basic skills and key concepts.
• Superior Examples and Problems: Examples, carefully laid out
in a step-by-step fashion, now include Practice Problems, which
provide the students with immediate feedback. On a similar note,
review problems have been reorganized to follow each sub-chapter
section, allowing an immediate link to the text material just covered.
In addition, selected examples can be used with Multisim files
(provided on the bound-in Multisim CD-ROM) to show students the
use of modern computer simulation techniques in circuit analysis and
troubleshooting.
• Well-Integrated Ancillary Materials for Students: Ancillary
materials flesh out all aspects of this well-considered text. The
Experiments Manual also includes a Multisim CD-ROM so students
can combine both hands-on and simulated lab work, and a Problems
Manual provides students with an alternative set of skill-building
problems and exercises. The Online Learning Center website
provides a complete overview of the basic math needed in DC/AC
electronics, along with other useful instructor and student resources.
• Instructor Ancillary Content: For the instructor, there is a printed
Instructor Solutions Manual with a bound-in Instructors Productivity
Center (IPC) CD-ROM; the IPC contains the Classroom Performance
System (CPS) for in-class quizzing and classroom management,
instructional PowerPoint slides, and electronic testbanks for all book
chapters.
FEATURES
• Extensive coverage of Troubleshooting
CONTENTS
Preface Introduction to Powers of 10. 1 Electricity. 2 Resistors. 3 Ohm’s Law. 4
Series Circuits. 5 Parallel Circuits. 6 Series-Parallel Circuits. 7 Voltage Dividers
and Current Dividers. 8 Direct-Current Meters. 9 Kirchhoff’s Laws. 10 Network
Theorems. 11 Conductors and Insulators. 12 Batteries. 13 Magnetism. 14
Electromagnetism. 15 Alternating Voltage and Current. 16 Capacitance. 17
Capacitive Reactance. 18 Capacitive Circuits. 19 Inductance. 20 Inductive
Reactance. 21 Inductive Circuits. 22 RC and L/R Time Constants. 23 Alternating
Current Circuits. 24 Complex Numbers for AC Circuits. 25 Resonance. 26
Filters. 27 Semiconductor Diodes: Theory and Applications. 28 Bipolar Junction
127
11/15/06 5:32:07 PM
Transistors. 29 Transistor Amplifiers. 30 Field Effect Transistors. 31 Power
Amplifiers. 32 Thyristors. 33 Operational Amplifiers.
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Semiconductors. 3 Diode Theory. 4 Diode Circuits. 5 SpecialPurpose Diodes. 6 Bipolar Junction Transistors. 7 Transistor Fundamentals. 8
Transistor Biasing. 9 AC Models. 10 Voltage Amplifiers. 11 CC and CB Amplifiers.
12 Power Amplifiers. 13 JFETs. 14 MOSFETs. 15 Thyristors. 16 Frequency Effects.
17 Differential Amplifiers. 18 Operational Amplifiers. 19 Negative Feedback. 20
Linear Op-Amp Circuits. 21 Active Filters. 22 Nonlinear Op-Amp Circuits. 23
Oscillators. 24 Regulated Power Supplies.
NEW
ELECTRONICS PRINCIPLES
Seventh Edition
by Albert Paul Malvino and David J Bates, Western Wisconsin
Technical College
2007 (April 2006) / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322277-6 / MHID: 0-07-322277-1
(with Simulation CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110846-1 / MHID: 0-07-110846-7
[IE with SIM CD)]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/malvino7e
This seventh edition of Malvino’s classic Electronic Principles
offers students a definitive overview of electronic circuits and
devices. Expert knowledge of electronic devices is presented
in a stimulating, clearly written, conversational style. The new,
streamlined book design is full-color throughout, with ample,
clear illustrations. Greater emphasis on modern integrated
circuit (IC) technology, and the revision of nearly one third of
the previous edition’s chapter problems and review questions
refresh this text while retaining its proven approach.
In addition to the text there is a wealth of supplementary
material included for both student and instructor. An upgraded
Experiments Manual, the optional use of MultiSIM software,
an instructor’s manual with an Instructor Productivity Center
CD-ROM, the updated Workbook, and the brand new Online
Learning Center website make this text a powerful learning
tool. Electronic Principles is written for electronics students
who have done course work in basic DC/AC circuit analysis,
along with algebra and trigonometry prerequisites. The book
gives clear, accessible coverage of basic electronics concepts
in the first half of the book, then applies these to the important
electronic circuits and devices most widely used in today’s
industry.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Greater emphasis on modern integrated circuits (IC) technology.
• Extensive Online Learning Center website with resources for
students and instructors.
• Added by co-author David Bates, Worked-Out examples now
contain embedded Practice Problems.
• The new “Good to Know” feature offers practical information
related to topics explained on that page of the text.
• Expanded MultiSIM usage. The optional use of this software provides
“pre-lab” simulations students can work on virtually.
• The upgraded Experiments Manual now includes more on the
testing of individual components along with circuits and systems in
many labs, with optional MultiSIM applications included. The updated
Workbook reflects integration of revised chapter problems and review
questions.
• The enhanced Instructor’s Manual with Productivity Center (IPC)
CD-ROM includes instructional PowerPoint presentations, availability
of the eInstruction Classroom Performance System in-class quizzing
and classroom management system, test banks created with EZTest
that can be used in conjunction with CPS to deliver in-class quizzes,
tests, or review.
FEATURES
• Malvino’s Electronic Principles combines proven expertise in
all aspects of electronics with a student-friendly, contemporary
appearance. It is written in a conversational style at a technician
level.
• Optical topics in modern electronics are covered, including fiber
optics and high intensity LEDs.
• Free, bound-in CD-ROM contains Multisim exercises and selected
circuits for simulation.
NEW
MICROELECTRONIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND
DESIGN
Third Edition
by Donald Neamen, University Of New Mexico-Albuquerque
2007 (February 2006) / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328596-2 / MHID: 0-07-328596-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125443-4 / MHID: 0-07-125443-9 [IE]
This junior level electronics text provides a foundation for
analyzing and designing analog and digital electronic circuits.
Numerous new pedagogical features continue the tradition of
providing an accessible approach to learning through clear
writing and real-world pedagogy. The third edition includes
numerous design examples, a new Design Application feature,
problem solving technique pointers, Test Your Understanding
questions at the end of every section, and chapter summary
checkpoints to reinforce learning. The author, Don Neamen,
has many years of experience as an Engineering Educator. His
experience shines through each chapter of the book, which
retains a design focus supported by rich, realistic examples and
practical rules of thumb. The Third Edition continues to offer
the same hallmark features that made the previous editions
such a success. Extensive Pedagogy: An Introduction at the
beginning of each chapter links the new chapter to the material
presented in previous chapters. The objectives of the chapter
are then presented in the Preview section and reinforced
at the beginning of each chapter subsection. Test Your
Understanding Exercise Problems with provided answers have
all been updated. New Design Applications are included at the
ends of chapters. These applications lead students through the
design and development of an electronic thermometer. Each
specific design ties into the objectives of the chapter. Specific
Design Problems and Examples are highlighted throughout the
book, along with design pointers which help students tackle
tricky design issues.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Preview Section Introductions and Objectives list begin each
chapter and are reinforced throughout the chapter.
• Design Application
• Frequency Response of Transistor Circuits, and Transistors
themselves, will remain a separate chapter
• Integration of PSpice. PSpice is integrated into the examples and
problems in the text where appropriate.
FEATURES
• Exercise Problems follows each example in the book
• For select electronic devices, industrial data sheets are included
in the text. This helps students to read and interpret the specs from a
data sheet and allows them to plug the specs into problems from the
book.
CONTENTS
Prologue I: Prologue to Electronics. Brief History. Passive and Active Devices.
Electronic Circuits. Discrete and Integrated Circuits. Analog and Digital Signals.
Notation. Summary. Part I: Semiconductor Devices and Basic Applications.
Chapter 1: Semiconductor Materials and Diodes. 1.0 Preview. 1.1 Semiconductor
Materials and Properties. 1.2 The pn Junction. 1.3 Diode Circuits: DC Analysis
and Models. 1.4 Diode Circuits: AC Equivalent Circuit. 1.5 Other Diode Types.
1.6 Design Application. 1.7 Summary. Problems. Chapter 2: Diode Circuits.
2.0 Preview. 2.1 Rectifier Circuits. 2.2 Zener Diode Circuits. 2.3 Clipper and
128
11/15/06 5:32:08 PM
Clamper Circuits. 2.4 Multiple Diode Circuits. 2.5 Photodiode and LED Circuits.
2.6 Summary. Problems. Chapter 3: The Field-Effect Transistor. 3.0 Preview. 3.1
Basic Bipolar Junction Transistor. 3.2 DC Analysis of Transistor Circuits. 3.3 Basic
Transistor Applications. 3.4 Bipolar Transistor Biasing. 3.5 Multistage Circuits. 3.6
Design Application. 3.7 Summary. Problems. Chapter 4: Basic FET Amplifiers.
4.0 Preview. 4.1 Analog Signals and Linear Amplifiers. 4.2 The Bipolar Linear
Amplifier. 4.3 Basic Transistor Amplifier Configurations. 4.4 Common-Emitter
Amplifiers. 4.5 AC Load Line Analysis. 4.6 Common-Collector (Emitter-Follower)
Amplifier. 4.7 Common-Base Amplifier. 4.8 The Three Basic Amplifiers: Summary
and Comparison. 4.9 Multistage Amplifiers. 4.10 Power Considerations. 4.11
Design Application. 4.12 Summary. Problems. Chapter 5: Bipolar Junction
Transistor. 5.0 Preview. 5.1 MOS Field-Effect Transistor. 5.2 MOSFET DC Circuit
Analysis. 5.3 Basic MOSFET Applications: Switch, Digital Logic Gate, and
Amplifier. 5.4 Constant Current Biasing. 5.5 Multistage MOSFET Circuits. 5.6
Junction Field-Effect Transistors. 5.7 Design Application. 5.8 Summary. Problems.
Chapter 6: Basic BJT Amplifiers. 6.0 Preview. 6.1 The MOSFET Amplifier. 6.2 Basic
Transistor Amplifier Configurations. 6.3 The Common-Source Amplifier. 6.4 The
Source-Follower Amplifier. 6.5 The Common-Gate Amplifier. 6.6 The Three Basic
Amplifier Configurations: Summary and Comparison. 6.7 Single-Stage Integrated
Circuit MOSFET Amplifiers. 6.8 Multistage Amplifiers. 6.9 Basic JFET Amplifiers.
6.10 Summary. Problems. Chapter 7: Frequency Response. 7.0 Preview. 7.1
Amplifier Frequency Response. 7.2 System Transfer Functions. 7.3 Frequency
Response: Transistor Amplifiers with Circuit Capacitors. 7.4 Frequency Response:
Bipolar Transistor. 7.5 Frequency Response: The FET. 7.6 High-Frequency
Response Transistor Circuits. 7.7 Summary. Problems. Chapter 8: Output Stages
and Power Amplifiers. 8.0 Preview. 8.1 Power Amplifiers. 8.2 Power Transistors.
8.3 Classes of Amplifiers. 8.4 Class-A Power Amplifier. 8.5 Class-AB Push-Pull
Complementary Output Stages. 8.6 Summary. Problems. Prologue II: Prologue
to Electronic Design. Preview. Design Approach. System Design. Electronic
Design. Conclusion. Part II: Analog Electronics. Chapter 9: Ideal Operational
Amplifiers and Op-Amp Circuits. 9.0 Preview. 9.1 The Operational Amplifier.
9.2 Inverting Amplifier. 9.3 Summing Amplifier. 9.4 Noninverting Amplifier. 9.5
Op-Amp Applications. 9.6 Operational Transconductance Amplifiers. 9.7 Op-Amp
Circuit Design. 9.8 Design Application. 9.9 Summary. Problems. Chapter 10:
Integrated Circuit Biasing and Active Loads. 10.0 Preview. 10.1 Bipolar Transistor
Current Sources. 10.2 FET Current Sources. 10.3 Circuits and Active Loads. 10.4
Small-Signal Analysis: Active Load Circuits. 10.5 Summary. Problems. Chapter
11: Differential and Multistage Amplifiers .11.0 Preview. 11.1 The Differential
Amplifier. 11.2 Basic BJT Differential Pair. 11.3 Basic FET Differential Pair. 11.4
Differential Amplifier with Active Load. 11.5 BiCMOS Circuits. 11.6 Gain Stage
and Simple Output Stage. 11.7 Simplified BJT Operational Amplifier Stage. 11.8
Diff-Amp Frequency Response. 11.9 Summary. Problems. Chapter 12: Feedback
and Stability. 12.0 Preview. 12.1 Introduction to Feedback. 12.2 Basic BJT
Differential Pair. 12.3 Basic FET Differential Pair. 12.4 Voltage (Series-Shunt)
Amplifier. 12.5 Current (Shunt-Series) Amplifier. 12.6 Transconductance (SeriesSeries) Amplifier. 12.7 Transresistance (Shunt-Shunt) Amplifier. 12.8 Loop Gain.
12.9 Stability of the Feedback Circuit. 12.10 Frequency Compensation. 12.11
Summary. Problems. Chapter 13: Operational Amplifier Circuits. 13.0 Preview.
13.1 General Op-Amp Design. 13.2 A Bipolar Operational Amplifier Circuit.
13.3 CMOS Operational Amplifier Circuits. 13.4 BiCMOS Operational Amplifier
Circuits. 13.5 JFET Operational Amplifier Circuits. 13.6 Summary. Problems.
Chapter 14: Nonideal Effects in Operational Amplifier Circuits. 14.0 Preview.
14.1 Practical Op-Amp Parameters. 14.2 Finite Open-Loop Gain. 14.3 Frequency
Response. 14.4 Offset Voltage. 14.5 Input Bias Current 14.6 Additional Nonideal
Effects. 14.7 Summary. Problems. hapter 15: Applications and Design of Integrated
Circuits. 15.0 Preview. 15.1 Active Filters. 15.2 Oscillators. 15.3 Schmitt Trigger
Circuits. 15.4 Nonsinusoidal Oscillators and Timing Circuits. 15.5 Integrated
Circuit Power Amplifiers. 15.6 Voltage Regulators. 15.7 Summary. Problems.
Prologue III: Prologue to Digital Electronics. Introduction. Logic Functions and
Logic Gates. Logic Levels. Noise Margin. Propagation Delay Times and Switching
Times. Summary. Part III: Digital Electronics. Chapter 16: MOSFET Digital Circuits.
16.0 Preview. 16.1 NMOS Inverters. 16.2 NMOS Logic Circuits. 16.3 CMOS
Inverter. 16.4 CMOS Logic Circuits. 16.5 Clocked CMOS Logic Circuits. 16.6
Transmission Gates. 16.7 Sequential Logic Circuits. 16.8 Memories: Classification
and Architectures. 16.9 RAM Memory Cells. 16.10 Read-Only Memory. 16.11
D/A Converters. 16.12 A/D Converters. 16.13 Summary. Problems. Chapter 17:
Bipolar Digital Circuits. 17.0 Preview. 17.1 Emitter-Coupled Logic (ECL). 17.2
Modified ECL Circuit Configurations. 17.3 Schottky Transistor-Transistor Logic.
17.4 BiCMOS Digital Circuits. 17.5 Summary. Problems. Appendices.
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ANALOG AND DIGITAL
COMMUNICATIONS
Second Edition
by Hwei Hsu, Fairleigh Dickinson University
2003 / 336 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-140228-6 / MHID: 0-07-140228-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122997-5 / MHID: 0-07-122997-3 [IE]
SCHAUM’S 2000 SOLVED PROBLEMS IN
ELECTRONICS
by J J Cathey, University of Kentucky
1991
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-100905-8 / MHID: 0-07-100905-1 [IE]
BASIC ELECTRONICS FOR SCIENTISTS
Fifth Edition
by James J Brophy, University of Utah
1990 / 462 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-100675-0 / MHID: 0-07-100675-3 [IE]
Analog - Integrated Circuits
DESIGN OF ANALOG CMOS INTEGRATED
CIRCUITS
by Behzad Razavi, University of California, Los Angeles
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-238032-3 / MHID: 0-07-238032-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118839-5 / MHID: 0-07-118839-8 [IE,
Hardcover]
http://www.mhhe.com/razavi
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Analog Design. 2 Basic MOS Device Physics. 3 Single-Stage
Amplifiers. 4 Differential Amplifiers. 5 Passive and Active Current Mirrors.
6 Frequency Response of Amplifiers. 7 Noise. 8 Feedback. 9 Operational
Amplifiers. 10 Stability and Frequency Compensation. 11 Bandgap References.
12 Introduction to Switched-Capacitor Circuits. 13 Nonlinearity and Mismatch. 14
Oscillators. 15 Phase-Locked Loops. 16 Short-Channel Effects and Device Models.
17 CMOS Processing Technology. 18 Layout and Packaging
129
11/15/06 5:32:09 PM
Digital Integrated Circuits
DIGITAL INTEGRATED ELECTRONICS
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF DIGITAL INTEGRATED
CIRCUITS
Third Edition
by David A. Hodges, University of California—Berkeley, Horace
G. Jackson, University of California, Berkeley and Resve Saleh,
University of British Columbia
2004 / 504 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07- 228365-5 / MHID: 0-07- 228365-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118164-8 / MHID: 0-07-118164-4 [IE]
The third edition of Hodges and Jackson’s Analysis and
Design of Digital Integrated Circuits has been thoroughly
revised and updated by a new co-author, Resve Saleh of the
University of British Columbia. The new edition combines the
approachability and concise nature of the Hodges and Jackson
classic with a complete overhaul to bring the book into the
21st century. The new edition has replaced the emphasis
on BiPolar with an emphasis on CMOS. The outdated MOS
transistor model used throughout the book will be replaced
with the now standard deep submicron model. The material
on memory has been expanded and updated. As well the book
now includes more on SPICE simulation and new problems
that reflect recent technologies. The emphasis of the book is
on design, but it does not neglect analysis and has as a goal
to provide enough information so that a student can carry
out analysis as well as be able to design a circuit. This book
provides an excellent and balanced introduction to digital
circuit design for both students and professionals.
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 MOS Devices. 3 Fabrication and Layout. 4 Basic Gates. 5 HighSpeed CMOS Design. 6 Interconnect Design. 7 Clocks and Flip-Flops. 8 Dynamic
Logic Circuits. 9 Memory Design (Part I). 10 Memory Design (Part II). 11 Bipolar
Digital Circuits. 12 GaAs Digital Cicuits
CMOS DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS ANALYSIS
AND DESIGN
Third Edition
by Sung-Mo (Steve) Kang, University of California—Santa Cruz and
Yusuf Leblebici, Swiss Federal Institute of Technology
2003 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246053-7 / MHID: 0-07-246053-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124342-1 / MHID: 0-07-124342-9 [IE]
The website includes the solutions manual, password-protected for
instructor use. It also includes PowerPoint slides and a CADENCE
software tutorial. Also included is a set of color graphics to illustrate
CMOS fabrication and mask-layout design. (Browse http://highered.
mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0072460539)
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Fabrication of MOSFETS. 3 MOS Transistor. 4 Modeling of
MOS Transistors Using SPICE. 5 MOS Inverters: Static Characteristics. 6 MOS
Inverters: Switching Characteristics and Interconnect Effects. 7 Combinational MOS
Logic Circuits. 8 Sequential MOS Logic Circuits. 9 Dynamic Logic Circuits. 10
Semiconductor Memories. 11 Low-Power CMOS Logic Circuits. 12 BiCMOS Logic
Circuits. 13 Chip Input and Output (I/O) Circuits. 14 Design for Manufacturability.
15 Design for Testability
by Herbert Taub, City College Of New York; Donald L. Schilling,
City College of New York
1977 / 608 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-085788-9 / MHID: 0-07-085788-1 [IE]
ELECTRONICS II: Solid-State
NEW
INTRODUCTION TO MECHATRONICS AND
MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS
Third Edition
by David G. Alciatore, Colorado State University, and Michael B.
Histand, Colorado State University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296305-2 / MHID: 0-07-296305-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125407-6 / MHID: 0-07-125407-2 [IE]
Author Web site containing general textbook information, video
presentations, class project assignments, microcontroller resources,
MATHCAD examples from the text, and more! (Browse http://www.engr.
colostate.edu/~dga/mechatronics/)
INTRODUCTION TO MECHATRONICS AND MEASUREMENT
SYSTEMS provides comprehensive and accessible coverage of
the evolving field of mechatronics for mechanical, electrical
and aerospace engineering majors. The authors present
a concise review of electrical circuits, solid-state devices,
digital circuits, and motors- all of which are fundamental to
understanding mechatronic systems.
Mechatronics design considerations are presented throughout
the text, and in "Design Example" features. The text's numerous
illustrations, examples, class discussion items, and chapter
questions & exercises provide an opportunity to understand and
apply mechatronics concepts to actual problems encountered
in engineering practice. This text has been tested over several
years to ensure accuracy.
A text web site is available at http://www.engr.colostate.edu/
~dga/mechatronics/ and contains numerous supplemental
resources.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• NEW--Expanded coverage of microcontroller programming and
interfacing, including new threaded design examples and a detailed
case study.
• NEW--Visual icons throughout the book highlight cross-references
to extensive online resources including video demonstrations,
MathCAD examples, laboratory exercises, and Internet links to useful
information.
• NEW--Expanded chapter on data acquisition with an introduction
to LabView.
• NEW--An introduction to control theory and its application in
mechatronic systems.
• Photographs and descriptions of real devices and mechatronics
systems (e.g. the Segway) have been added.
• Additional clipart has been added as a pedagogical feature.
• Additional system analysis and design examples have been added,
as well as an additional Case Study in the later chapters.
• Various types of voltage sources (power supplies, batteries, AC/DC
converters) have been added to chapter 2.
• An introduction to controls section has been added to chapter 11.
• Microcontroller hardware and software design examples have
been added to the text.
130
11/15/06 5:32:10 PM
• Information on PIC processors and how to select them is included.
Also explains how to use and communicate among multiple PICs in
a project.
FEATURES
• Integrates design examples and problems throughout the text.
• The text's focus on measurement systems, circuits and electronics,
interfacing, sensors, and acutators, along with analysis and synthesis
of mechatronic systems, provides a thorough cross-disciplinary and
real-world overview of Mechatronics.
• Content coverage of important subjects like MEMS, cutting edge
sensor technology, and micromachines.
• Provides an overview of measurement systems, circuits,
interfacing, sensors, actuators and design analysis and synthesis of
mechatronic systems.
• Supporting information is available including a typical course
outline and laboratory syllabus, MathCAD files for examples from the
book, Class Discussion Item hints, links to mechatronics resources,
and other supplemental material, is available on the Internet at http://
www.engr.colostate.edu/~dga/mechatronics/
• Helpful pedagogy includes Integrated Lab Exercises and Class
Discussion items, both of which link theory with practice and handson exploration of mechatronics.
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement Systems. 2 Electric Circuits and
Components. 3 Semiconductor Electronics. 4 System Response. 5 Analog Signal
Processing Using Operational Amplifiers
6 Digital Circuits and Systems. 7 Microcontroller Programming and Interfacing
8 Data Acquisition. 9 Sensors. 10 Actuators. 11 Mechatronic Systems-Control
Architectures and Case Studies. Appendixes. A Measurement Fundamentals. B
Physical Principles. C Mechanics of Materials
Reststrahlen absorption, optical properties of metals (free carrier
absorption). With these new sections and additional topics, the third
edition is one of the most comprehensive introductory textbooks on
electronic materials devices.
• Chapter 6 has been revised for a better coverage of heterostructure
LEDs and photovoltaics that includes practical examples and white
LEDs. The coverage is explained at the undergraduate level with clear
diagrams.
• Thorough coverage including up-to-date topics: This text
offers in-depth discussions of topics which are important to both
electrical engineering majors as well as materials science majors.
From fresh treatment of piezo- and pyro-electric phenomena and
dielectric devices, to coverage of relatively new materials, such
as the Buckminsterfullerene crystal, high Tc superconductors, the
complicated concepts are always stated in plain language for students
with different backgrounds.
• The third edition is almost unique amongst university textbooks
because it comes with extensive web-support through Web-Materials
which has now become one of the best known electronic materials
websites averaging around something like thirty users at any instant
from every corner of the world. Nearly all of this material is now
included on a FREE CDROM that accompanies the book. Both
students and instructors using the textbook can use the following
supplements from the CDROM or Web-Materials. Use of WebMaterials requires the book to be adopted or recommended as the
major text for the course.
• The following features are available on Web-Materials (http://
ElectronicMaterials.Usask.Ca): Selected Topics in Electronic Materials
and Devices, Selected Topics in Materials Science, Illustrated Color
Dictionary of Electronic Materials and Devices, Tables of Selected
Properties of Materials, Worked Examples and Solved Problem,
Professional Color Overhead Transparency Diagrams in the CDROM
and Extensive Solutions Manual in PDF for instructors.
FEATURES
PRINCIPLES OF ELECTRONIC MATERIALS AND
DEVICE
Third Edition
by S.O. Kasap, University of Saskatchewan
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310464-5 / MHID: 0-07-310464-7
(with CD-ROM)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124458-9 / MHID: 0-07-124458-1
[IE with CD]
The site includes: Selected Topics in Electronic Materials & Devices,
Selected Topics in Materials Science, Illustrated Color Dictionary,
Tables of Selected Properties of Materials, Worked Examples & Solved
Problems, and an extensive Solutions Manual for the instructor. (Browse
http://www.mhhe.com/kasap3)
Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices, Third Edition,
is a greatly enhanced version of the highly successful text
Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices, Second Edition.
It is designed for a first course on electronic materials given
in Materials Science and Engineering, Electrical Engineering,
and Physics and Engineering Physics Departments at the
undergraduate level. The third edition has numerous revisions
that include more beautiful illustrations and photographs,
additional sections, more solved problems, worked examples,
and end-of-chapter problems with direct engineering
applications. The revisions have improved the rigor without
sacrificing the original semiquantitative approach that both the
students and instructors liked and valued. Some of the new
end-of-chapter problems have been especially selected to
satisfy various professional engineering design requirements
for accreditation across international borders. Advanced topics
have been collected under Additional Topics, which are not
necessary in a short introductory treatment.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• While aimed primarily at the junior undergraduates, the text with
its advanced topics under Additional Topics, and Selected Topics
in the CD, it can easily be used at the senior undergraduate and
graduate courses.
• By selecting suitable topics Selected Topics in the CD (such as
mechanical properties, diffusion, thermal properties etc.) the text can
be also serve as a first course in Materials Science aimed at electrical
engineers, and engineering physics students. It is suitable for both
one- and two-semester courses. By focusing only on those topics
relevant to materials that make up electronic and optoelectronic
devices, the book offers students a deeper and more meaningful
discussion of this material than is offered in general materials science
textbooks. The coverage is up-to-date and the applications are of
special relevance to students of electronics, materials science and
engineering physics.
• Explanatory illustrations and comparative tables: The excellent
illustrations clearly depict the concepts, further assisting in the
learning process. Throughout the text, comparative tables of different
materials and their properties can be used as references in solving
problems. Such tables also give the student a “feel” for the concepts
and materials discussed.
• Interesting photographs of materials, devices and inventions,
including the inventors, that make the book enjoyable to read.
• Chapter flexibility: The chapters are designed such that they lend
themselves to allowing instructors to teach out of sequence or skip
topics as desired. Extensive explanatory section headings and limited
references to other chapters make this possible. The “Additional
Topics” sections also allow instructors to go into more detail when
detail is required.
• Many worked examples and application problems: A three-step
approach is used to show students how to apply concepts discussed.
Examples with solutions appear within most sections of every
chapter. These examples demonstrate both physical concepts and
mathematical foundations. Questions and Problems sections are
found at the end of every chapter. These offer in-depth questions
about concepts introduced, then follow up with problems, which
require the student to apply mathematical skills. Each question and
problem cites the main subject for reference. An asterisk is used next
to the question problem if more advanced mathematical skills are
required.
• New Sections such that cover x-ray diffraction and crystal
structures, conduction in thin films, interconnect technology,
amorphous semiconductors, piezoresistance, white LEDs,
131
11/15/06 5:32:10 PM
CONTENTS
1 Elementary Materials Science Concepts. 2 Electrical and Thermal Conduction
in Solids. 3 Elementary Quantum Physics. 4 Modern Theory of Solids. 5
Semiconductors. 6 Semiconductor Devices. 7 Dielectric Materials and Insulation.
8 Magnetic Properties and Superconductivity. 9 Optical Properties of Materials.
Appendix A: Major Symbols and Abbreviations. B Elements to Uranium C Constants
and Useful Information
AN INTRODUCTION TO SEMICONDUCTOR
DEVICES
by Donald Neamen, University of New Mexico - Albuquerque
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298756-0 / MHID: 0-07-298756-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111627-5 / MHID: 0-07-111627-3 [IE]
Site contains solutions for instructors and image set. (Browse http://www.
mhhe.com/neamen)
An Introduction to Semiconductor Devices by Donald Neamen
provides an understanding of the characteristics, operations
and limitations of semiconductor devices. In order to provide
this understanding, the book brings together the fundamental
physics of the semiconductor material and the semiconductor
device physics. This new text provides an accessible and
modern presentation of material. Quantum mechanic material
is minimal, and the most advanced material is designated with
an icon. This modern approach meands that coverage of the
MOS transistor preceeds the material on the bipolar transitor,
which reflects the dominance of MOS technology in today’s
world. Excellent pedagogy is present throughout the book in
the form of interesting chapters openers, worked examples, a
variety of exercises, key terms, and end of chapter problems.
FEATURES
• Book features up-to-date coverage. MOSFETs are covered before
the BiPolar Junction Transistor, reflecting the MOSFETs predominant
role in modern technology.
• Many worked examples are included throughout the text. Each
is followed by an exercise problem that tests mastery of what was
covered in the example.
• Accessible Coverage-does not use a lot of Quantum Mechanics.
More difficult material is marked off by an icon and can be included
or skipped.
• Chapter openers contain both “Historical Insight” and “Present-day
Insight” boxes. The historical boxes put the topics about to be learned
in historical perspective, and the present-day boxes show how what
will be learned is relevant in today’s world.
• Test Your Understanding Excercises are included at the end
of each major section, providing students with an opportunity to
practice what they’ve learned.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 The Crystal Structure of Solids. Chapter 2 Theory of Solids. Chapter
3 The Semiconductor in Equilibrium. Chapter 4 Carrier Transport Phenomena.
Chapter 5 The pn Junction. Chapter 6 Fundamentals of the MOS Transistor. Chapter
7 The MOSFET: Additional Concepts. Chapter 8 Non-equilibrium Excess Carriers
in Semiconductors. Chapter 9 The pn Junction Diode. Chapter 10 The Bipolar
Transistor. Chapter 11 Additional Semiconductor Devices and Device Concepts.
Chapter 12 Optical Devices. Appendix A Selected List of Symbols. Appendix
B System of Units, Conversion Factors, and General Constants. Appendix C
The Periodic Table. Appendix D “Derivation” of Schrodinger’s Wave Equation.
Appendix E Units of Energy-The Electron-Volt. Appendix F Derivation of Density
of States Function. Appendix G Derivation of Shockley-Read-Hall Recombination
Rates. Appendix H Answers to Selected Problems
FUNDAMENTALS OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
by Betty Lise Anderson, Ohio State University and Richard L
Anderson
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-236977-9 / MHID: 0-07-236977-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124152-6 / MHID: 0-07-124152-3 [IE]
Solutions Manual (Password Protected) for instructors only. (Browse
http://www.mhhe.com/andersonanderson)
Fundamentals of Semiconductor Devices provides a realistic
and practical treatment of modern semiconductor devices.
A solid understanding of the physical processes responsible
for the electronic properties of semiconductor materials
and devices is emphasized. With this emphasis, the reader
will appreciate the underlying physics behind the equations
derived and their range of applicability. The author’s clear
writing style, comprehensive coverage of the core material,
and attention to current topics are key strengths of this book.
FEATURES
• First 4 Parts of the book (5 Parts total) are followed by
“Supplements” which contain related material to enhance the
course. The content in these supplements is not required for the
understanding of the basic principles of device operation.
• Quantum mechanics is introduced in the chapters of Part 1.
For additional content, more extensive material can be found in
Supplement “A” to Part 1.
• Up-to-date mathematical formulations, which are appropriate for
modern devices.
• Extensive use of energy band diagrams to explain (qualitatively)
device operation.
• The differences in electron and hole mobilities (and diffusion
coefficients) for majority carriers and for minority carriers are
discussed. These differences are important to accurately predict the
behavior of minority carrier devices (BJTs) vs. majority carrier devices
(some FETs).
• Emphasis on heterojunctions due to their increased use in field
effect devices, bipolar devices, and optoelectronic devices.
• SPICE is introduced for the determination of device I-V
characteristics and for steady-state and transient analysis of simple
circuits.
• Detailed, easy-to-follow examples throughout. These examples
go beyond giving a feel for the numerical value for the quantities
involved but, also, provide an improved understanding of a physical
mechanism under consideration.
• Electrical parameters of MOSFETS and BJTS are compared in
order to solidify the “big picture” and to aid in making critical design
decisions.
• Solid pedagogy in the form of illustrations, summaries, review
questions, reading lists, and more.
CONTENTS
Part 1 Electronic Properties of Materials: 1 Electron Energy and States in
Semi con duc tors. 2 Homogeneous Semiconductors. 3 Current Flow in
Homogeneous Semiconductors. 4 Non-Homogeneous Semiconductors. Part 2
Diodes: 5 Prototype pn Homojunctions. 6 Additional Considerations for Diodes.
Part 3 Field Effect Transistors: 7 The MOSFET. 8 Additional Considerations for
FETs. Part 4 Bipolar Transistors: 9 Bipolar Junction Devices: Statics. 10 TimeDependent Analysis of BJTs. Part 5 Optoelectronic Devices: 11 Optoelectronic
Devices. Appendix A Physical Constants. Appendix B List of Symbols. Appendix
C Fabrication. Appendix D Density of States Function, Density of States Effective
Mass, Conductivity Effective Mass. Appendix E Useful Integrals. Appendix F Useful
Equations. Appendix G: List of Suggested Readings
132
11/15/06 5:32:11 PM
VLSI Digital
SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS AND DEVICES
Third Edition
by Donald Neamen, University of New Mexico—Albuquerque
2003 / 704 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-232107-4 / MHID: 0-07-232107-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123112-1 / MHID: 0-07-123112-9 [IE]
CONTENTS
1. The Crystal Structure of solids. 2. Introduction to Quantum Mechanics.
3. Introduction to the Quantum Theory of Solids. 4. The Semiconductor in
Equilibrium. 5. Carrier Transport Phenomena. 6. Nonequilibrium Excess Carriers
in Semiconductors. 7. The PN Junction. 8. The PN Junction Diode. 9. Metal
Semiconductor and Semiconductor Heterojunctions. 10. The Bipolar Transistor.
11. The Junction Field-Effect Transistor. 12. Fundamentals of the Metal-OxideSemiconductor Field- Effect Transistor
Analog OP AMPS
DESIGN WITH OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS AND
ANALOG INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Third Edition
by Sergio Franco, San Francisco State University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-232084-8 / MHID: 0-07-232084-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120703-4 / MHID: 0-07-120703-1 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/franco3
CONTENTS
1 Operational Amplifier Fundamentals. 2 Circuits with Resistive Feedback. 3 Active
Filters: Part I: 4 Active Filters: Part II: 5 Static Op Amp Limitations. 6 Dynamic Op
Amp Limitations. 7 Noise. 8 Stability. 9 Nonlinear Circuits. 10 Signal Generators.
11 Voltage References and Regulators. 12 D-A and A-D Converters. 13 Nonlinear
Amplifiers and Phase-Locked Loops
CMOS DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS ANALYSIS
AND DESIGN
Third Edition
by Sung-Mo (Steve) Kang, University of California—Santa Cruz and
Yusuf Leblebici, Swiss Federal Institute of Technology
2003 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246053-7 / MHID: 0-07-246053-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124342-1 / MHID: 0-07-124342-9 [IE]
The website includes the solutions manual, password-protected for
instructor use. It also includes PowerPoint slides and a CADENCE
software tutorial. Also included is a set of color graphics to illustrate
CMOS fabrication and mask-layout design. (Browse http://highered.
mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0072460539)
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Fabrication of MOSFETS. 3 MOS Transistor. 4 Modeling of
MOS Transistors Using SPICE. 5 MOS Inverters: Static Characteristics. 6 MOS
Inverters: Switching Characteristics and Interconnect Effects. 7 Combinational MOS
Logic Circuits. 8 Sequential MOS Logic Circuits. 9 Dynamic Logic Circuits. 10
Semiconductor Memories. 11 Low-Power CMOS Logic Circuits. 12 BiCMOS Logic
Circuits. 13 Chip Input and Output (I/O) Circuits. 14 Design for Manufacturability.
15 Design for Testability
ULSI TECHNOLOGY
by C.Y. Chang, National Chiao Tung University , Taiwan; S.M. Sze,
National Chiao Tung University, Taiwan
1996 / 726 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114105-5 / MHID: 0-07-114105-7 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Cleanroom Technology/2 Wafer-Cleaning Technology/3 Epitaxy/4 Conventional
and Rapid Thermal Processes/5 Dielectric and Polysilicon Film Deposition/6
Lithography/7 Etching/8 Metallization/9 Process Integration/10 Assembly and
Packaging/11 Wafer Fab Manufacturing Technology/12 Reliability/Appendix
INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL CIRCUITS
by Theodore F Bogart, Jr., University of Southern Mississippi
1992 / 819 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112555-0 / MHID: 0-07-112555-8 [IE]
133
11/15/06 5:32:12 PM
INTRODUCTION TO VLSI DESIGN
Electronics III: Solid-State
(Advanced)
CONTENTS
by Eugene Fabricius, California Polytechnic State University, San Luis
Obispo
1990 / 969 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-100727-6 / MHID: 0-07-100727-X [IE]
Chapter 1: Introduction to VLSI Layout. Chapter 2: The Physics of Field-Effect
Transistors. Chapter 3: Processing, Scaling and Reliability. Chapter 4: Design Rules
and Layouts. Chapter 5: MOS Inverters. Chapter 6: Superbuffers and Steering Logic.
Chapter 7: Dynamic CMOS and Clocking. Chapter 8: Special Circuit Layouts.
Chapter 9: Regular Arrays of Logic. Chapter 10: Advanced Programmable Logic
Techniques. Chapter 11: Multilevel Minimization and Physical Design. Chapter
12: Testability of VLSI. APPENDIX A: The P-N Junction. APPENDIX B: The Algebra
of Modern Boolean Logic
OPTOELECTRONICS: AN INTRODUCTION TO
MATERIALS AND DEVICES
by Jasprit Singh, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor
1996 / 537 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114727-9 / MHID: 0-07-114727-6 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Materials for Optoelectronics Structural Properties/2 Light Propagation in Media/3
Light Propagation in Waveguides/4 Electronic Properties of Semiconductors/5
Transport and Optical Properties of Semiconductors/6 Light Detection and
Imaging/7 The Light Emitting Diode/8 The Laser Diode/9 Modulation and Display
Devices/10 Optical Communication Systems Device Needs/11 Fabrication and
Processing of Devices/Appendixes/A List of Symbols/B Important Properties of
Semiconductors/C Density of States/D The P-N DiodeA Summary
VLSI DESIGN TECHNIQUES FOR ANALOG AND
DIGITAL CIRCUITS
by Randall Geiger, Iowa State University; Phillip Allen, Georgia
Institute of Technology; Noel Strader II, Chief Engineer of CAD
Program
1990 / 969 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-100728-3 / MHID: 0-07-100728-8 [IE]
Electronics III: Optics
VLSI TECHNOLOGY
Second Edition
by Simon Sze, Bell Laboratories
1988 / 676 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-100347-6 / MHID: 0-07-100347-9 [IE]
Advanced Electronics
MICROMACHINED TRANSDUCERS SOURCEBOOK
by Gregory T. Kovacs, Stanford University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-290722-3 / MHID: 0-07-290722-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116462-7 / MHID: 0-07-116462-6 [IE]
CONTENTS
Introduction and Overview/Micromachining Techniques/Mechanical Transducers/
Optical Trans-ducers/Ionizing Radiation Transducers/Thermal Transducers/
Magnetic Trans duc ers/Chemical and Biological Trans duc ers/Microfluidic
Devices
OPTICS
Third Edition
byAjoy Ghatak
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-058583-6 / MHID: 0-07-058583-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124706-1 / MHID: 0-07-124706-8 [IE]
This comprehensive and thoroughly revised new edition would
continue to meet the requirements of undergraduate students
of science and engineering. Researchers involved in general
areas of optics and laser would find this book immensely
useful.
CONTENTS
1. What is Light? PART ONE: GEOMETRICAL OPTICS. 2. Fermat’s Principle
and its Applications 3. Refraction and reflection by Spherical Surfaces 4. Matrix
Method in Paraxial Optics 5. Aberrations PART TWO: VIBRATIONS AND WAVES.
6. Simple Harmonic Motion 7. Forced Vibrations and Origin of Refractive Index
8. Fourier Series and Applications 9. Wave Propagation and the Wave Equation
10. Huygens’ Principle and its Applications. PART THREE: INTERFERENCE. 11.
Superposition of Waves 12. Two Beam Interference by Division of Wavefront
13. Interference by Division of Amplitude 14. Multiple Beam Interferometry 15.
Coherence. PART FOUR: DIFFRACTION. 16. Fraunhofer Diffraction 17. Fresnel
Diffraction 18. Holography. PART FIVE: ELECTROMAGNETIC CHARACTER OF
LIGHT. 19. Polarization and Double Refraction 20. Electromagnetic Waves 21.
Reflection and Refraction of Electromagnetic Waves. PART SIX: PTOTONS. 22.
The Particle Nature of Radiation PART SEVEN: SOURCES OF COHERENT LIGHT.
23. Lasers: An Elementary Account. PART EIGHT: SOME CONTEMPORARY
TOPICS. 24. Fibre Optics 25. Introduction to Speckle Metrology. INDEX.
134
11/15/06 5:32:13 PM
DESIGN OF INTEGRATED CIRCUITS FOR OPTICAL
COMMUNICATIONS
by Behzad Razavi, University of California—Los Angeles
2003 / 384 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282258-8 / MHID: 0-07-282258-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122972-2 / MHID: 0-07-122972-8 [IE]
The website for the book includes additional resources for the reader,
including a set of PowerPoint slides and web links. (Browse http://
highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0072842202)
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Optical Communications . 2 Basic Concepts. 3 Optical Devices.
4 Transimpedance Amplifiers. 5 Limiting Amplifiers and Output Buffers. 6
Oscillator Fundamentals. 7 LC Oscillators. 8 Phase-Locked Loops. 9 Clock and
Data Recovery. 10 Multiplexers and Laser Drivers.
OPTICAL FIBER COMMUNICATIONS
Third Edition
by Gerd Keiser, GTE Government Systems Corporation
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-236076-9 / MHID: 0-07-236076-3
(with CD-ROM)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116468-9 / MHID: 116468-5
[IE with CD-ROM]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Overview of Optical Fiber Communications. Chapter 2: Optical
Fibers: Structures, Waveguiding, and Fabrication. Chapter 3: Signal Degradation
in Optical Fibers. Chapter 4: Optical Sources. Chapter 5: Power Launching and
Coupling. Chapter 6: Photodetectors. Chapter 7: Optical Receiver Operation.
Chapter 8: Digital Transmission Systems. Chapter 9: Analog Systems. Chapter
10: WDM Concepts and Components. Chapter 11: Optical Amplifiers. Chapter
12: Optical Networks. Chapter 13: Measurements. Appendix A: International
System of Units. Appendix B: Useful Mathematical Relations. Appendix C: Bessel
Functions. Appendix D: Decibels. Appendix E: Topics from Communication
Theory. Appendix F: Factors Contributing to Dispersionerview.
Control Systems
CONTROL SYSTEMS: PRINCIPLES AND DESIGN
Second Edition
by M. Gopal, Indian Institute of Technology (IIT), Delhi
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-048289-0 / MHID: 0-07-048289-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123127-5 / MHID: 0-07-123127-7 [IE]
http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/digital_solutions/gopal/Controls/
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to the Control Problem. 2. Dynamic Models and Dynamic
Response. 3. Models of Industrial Control Devices and Systems. 4. Basic Principles
of Feedback Control. 5. Concepts of Stability and the Routh Stability Criterion.6.
The Performance of Feedback Systems. 7. Compensator Design Using Root
Locus Plots. 8. The Nyquist Stability Criterion and Stability Margins. 9. Feedback
System Performance Based on the Frequency Response. 10. Compensator Design
Using Bode Plots. 11. Hardware and Software Implementation of Common
Compensators. 12. Control System Analysis Using State Variable Methods.
Appendix A: Mathematical Background. Appendix B: MATLAB Environment.
Appendix C: Control Theory. Quiz. Index
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF FEEDBACK AND
CONTROL SYSTEMS
Second Edition
by Joseph DiStefano, University of California, Los Angeles; Allen
Stubberud, UCLA; Ivan William, TRW Space and Technology
1990 / 572 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-017052-0 / MHID: 0-07-017052-5
Digital Control
DIGITAL CONTROL AND STATE VARIABLE
METHODS
Second Edition
by Madan Gopal, Indian Institute of Technology, Delhi
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-048302-6 / MHID: 0-07-048302-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123725-3 / MHID: 0-07-123725-9 [IE]
http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/digital_solutions/gopal/controls
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Signal Processing in Digital Control. 3 Models of Digital Control
Devices and Systems. 4 Design of Digital Control Algorithms. 5 Control System
Analysis Using State Variable Methods. 6 State Variable Analysis of Digital Control
Systems. 7 Pole-Placement Design and State Observers. 8 Lyapunov Stability
Analysis. 9 Linear Quadratic Optimal Control. 10 Nonlinear Control Systems.
11 Neural Networks for Control. 12 Fuzzy Control. Appendix A : Mathematical
Background. Appendix B : MATLAB Aided Control System Design: Conventional.
Appendix C : MATLAB Aided Control System Design : Neural-Fuzzy. Index
135
11/15/06 5:32:13 PM
Systems/Controls (Robotics)
ROBOTICS: CONTROL, SENSING, VISION AND
INTELLIGENCE
by K. S. Fu, deceased, formerly of Purdue University; C.S.G. Lee,
Purdue University; Ralph Gonzalez, University of Tennessee
1987 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-100421-3 / MHID: 0-07-100421-1 [IE]
INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS: TECHNOLOGY,
PROGRAMMING AND APPLICATION
by Mikell Groover, Lehigh University; Mitchell Weiss, United States
Robots, Inc.; Roger Nagel, Lehigh University; and Nicholas Odrey,
Lehigh University
1986 / 480 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-100442-8 / MHID: 0-07-100442-4 [IE]
Advanced Systems
Machinery
ELECTRIC MACHINERY FUNDAMENTALS
Fourth Edition
by Stephen J Chapman, BAE Systems, Australia
2005 / 720 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246523-5 / MHID: 0-07-246523-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115155-9 / MHID: 0-07-115155-9 [IE]
Electric Machinery Fundamentals continues to be a best-selling
machinery text due to its accessible, student-friendly coverage
of the important topics in the field. Chapman’s clear writing
persists in being one of the top features of the book. Although
not a book on MATLAB, the use of MATLAB has been enhanced
in the fourth edition. Additionally, many new problems have
been added and remaining ones modified. Electric Machinery
Fundamentals is also accompanied by a website the provides
solutions for instructors, as well as source code, MATLAB
tools, and links to important sites for students.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Many new problems and examples are included in the fourth
edition.
FEATURES
• AC machine emphasis over DC machines (throughout the text).
• Flexible topic coverage allows either AC or DC material to be
covered first (AC-Chaps. 4-7; DC-Chaps. 8-9).
• MATLAB is incorporated in examples, sample problems, and
homework problems (throughout text, see torque-speed char. in
Chap. 7).
• Revised homework problems (throughout text)
• Comprehensive coverage of topics not found in other texts (Chap.
3-Solid State Power Electronics, Chap. 5-Synchronous generators, and
practical details of machinery use).
CONTENTS
THE FOURIER TRANSFORM AND ITS
APPLICATIONS
Third Edition
1 Introduction to Machinery Principles. 2 Transformers. 3 Introduction to Power
Electronics. 4 AC Machinery Fundamentals. 5 Synchronous Generators. 6
Synchronous Motors. 7 Induction Motors. 8 DC Machinery Fundamentals. 9 DC
Motors and Generators. 10 Single-Phase and Special-Purpose Motors. Appendix A
Review of Three-Phase Circuits. Appendix B Coil Pitch and Distributed Windings.
Appendix C Salient-Pole Theory of Synchronous Machines. Appendix D Tables
of Constants and Conversion Factors
by Ronald Bracewell, Stanford University
1999 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-303938-1 / MHID: 0-07-303938-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116043-8 / MHID: 0-07-116043-4 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Groundwork. 3 Convolution. 4 Notation for Some Useful
Functions. 5 The Impulse Symbol. 6 The Basic Theorems. 7 Obtaining Transforms.
8 The Two Domains. 9 Waveforms, Spectra, Filters and Linearity. 10 Sampling and
Series. 11 The Discrete Fourier Transform and the FFT. 12 The Hartley Transform.
13 Relatives of the Fourier Transform. 14 The Laplace Transform. 15 Antennas
and Optics. 16 Applications in Statistics. 17 Random Waveforms and Noise. 18
Heat Conduction and Diffusion. 19 Dynamic Power Spectra. 20 Tables of sinc x,
sinc2x and exp(-?x)2. 21 Solutions to Selected Problems. 22 Pictorial Dictionary
of Fourier Transforms. 23 The Life of Joseph Fourier
ELECTRIC MACHINERY
Sixth Edition
by A. E. Fitzgerald, deceased; Charles Kingsley, Massachusetts
Institute of Technology; Stephen Umans, Sc.D., Massachusetts
Institute of Technology
2003 / 608 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-366009-7 / MHID: 0-07-366009-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123010-0 / MHID: 0-07-123010-6 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/fitzgerald6e
CONTENTS
1. Magnetic Circuits and Magnetic Materials. 2. Transformers. 3. Multi-Winding
Transformers. 4. Introduction to Rotating Machines. 5. Synchronous Machines.
6. Polyphase Induction Machines. 7. DC Machines. 8. Variable-Reluctance
Machines and Stepping Motors. 9. Single- and Two-Phase Motors. 10. Introduction
to Power Electronics. 11. Speed and Torque Control. Appendix A. Three-phase
circuits. Appendix B. Voltages, Magnetic Fields and Inductances of Distributed
AC Windings. Appendix C. Engineering Aspects of Practical Electric-Machine
Performance and Operation. Appendix D. The dq0 Transformation. Appendix E.
Table of Constants and Conversion Factors for SI Units
136
11/15/06 5:32:14 PM
ELECTRIC MACHINERY AND POWER SYSTEMS
FUNDAMENTALS
by Stephen J. Chapman, BAE SYSTEMS Australia
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-229135-3 / MHID: 0-07-229135-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122620-2 / MHID: 0-07-122620-6 [IE]
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ELECTRICAL POWER
SYSTEMS
by Syed Nasar, University of Kentucky
1990 / 224 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-045917-5 / MHID: 0-07-045917-7
CONTENTS
Part 1 Introduction. 1 Mechanical and Electro-magnetic Fundamentals. 2
Three-Phase Circuits. Part 2 Power Systems Components. 3 Transformers. 4 AC
Machinery Fundamentals. 5 Synchronous Generators. 6 Synchronous Motors. 7
Induction Motors. 8 Transmission Lines. Part 3 Power Systems. 9 Power System
Representation and Equations. 10 Introduction to Power-Flow Studies. 11
Symmetrical Faults. 12 Asymmetrical Faults
Electricity & Electronics
ELECTRIC MACHINES
ANALYSIS AND DESIGN APPLYING MATLAB
by Jim Cathey, University of Kentucky—Lexington
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118970-5 / MHID: 0-07-118970-X [IE]
www.mhhe.com/cathey
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Sinusoidal Steady-State Circuits. 3 Magnetic Circuits and Energy
Conversion. 4 Transformers. 5 DC Machines. 6 Induction Motors. 7 Synchronous
Machines. Appendix A Winding Factors. Appendix B Conversion Factors.
Appendix C Magnetic Wire Tables
THEORY AND PROBLEM OF ELECTRIC MACHINES
Second Edition
by D P Kothari, Centre for Energy Studies, Indian Institute of
Technology, Delhi and I J Nagrath, Adjunct Professor, BITS Pilani
2001 / 416 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-463765-4 / MHID: 0-07-463765-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120256-5 / MHID: 0-07-120256-0 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to electric machines. 2 Magnetic circuits and induction. 3
Transformers. 4 Principles of electromechanical energy conversion. 5 Basic
concepts in rotating machines. 6 Armature windings. 7 DC machines. 8
Synchronous machines. 9 Induction machine. 10 Fractional-kilowatt motors. 11
Motor control by static power converters. Appendix I: Answers to objective-type
questions. Appendix II: Answers to supplementary problems. Appendix III: A quick
revision for answering vivas and interview. Appendix IV: Constructional features
of electric machines and transformers. Suggested further reading.
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ELECTRIC MACHINES AND
ELECTROMECHANICS
Second Edition
by Syed A. Nasar, University of Kentucky
1998 / 208 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-045994-6 / MHID: 0-07-045994-0
NEW
ELECTRICITY: PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONS
Seventh Edition
by Richard J. Fowler
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322279-0 / MHID: 0-07-322279-8
(with Simulation CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128593-3 / MHID: 0-07-128593-8
[IE with Simulation CD]
This widely-used text prepares students for entry-level jobs
in electronics, electrical trades and related fields. Its level
and approach are ideal for both electronics and electricity
programs looking for a relatively short, applied book covering
DC/AC circuits. Additional chapters on topics such as safety,
transformers, motors, instrumentation, and residential wiring
are also included. No prior knowledge of electricity is assumed;
the only prerequisites are arithmetic and basic algebra. Practical
skills are emphasized throughout the text, and supported in
the hands-on work provided in the companion Experiments
Manual. MultiSim circuit files are provided, on a bound-in CD
ROM, for those who want to bring software simulation work
into their classes and labs.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• OLC website with career information, test questions, Introduction
to MultiSim, equipment lists for labs and links to key sites. Instructors
are provided with PowerPoint, text problem solutions and lab followup on the site.
• Introduction to magnetism in Chapter 7 has been expanded, with
numerous new photos to convey a visual understanding of magnetic
fields.
• Modern coverage of voltage dividers and regulators now provided
in Chapter 5.
• Node voltages techniques have been added to Chapter 5,
Complex Circuits.
• Residential Wiring coverage in Chapter 16 now includes circuit
interrupters; and all material has been updated to reflect 2005 NEC
code.
• Brushless DC motor coverage added to Chapter 17.
• PowerPoint lessons have been revised and updated, with video
clips added in several places.
• CPS from eInstruction is available to adopters; it links directly to
the PowerPoint and electronic test questions provided with the text.
• Frequent Self-Test questions and worked examples provide
students with immediate feedback and step-by-step procedures for
learning key concepts and applications.
• Bound-in CD ROM includes MultiSim simulation files for the
circuits included in the text and the Experiments Manual, in MultiSim
7. New simulation examples have been added to the text, lab manual
and CD ROM.
FEATURES
• Practical, easy-to-understand explanation of DC and AC circuits;
students with limited math background will find the book readable
and accessible.
• Experiments Manual for Electricity: Principles and Applications
correlates with the text and helps students gain practical, hands-on
experience and troubleshooting skills. MultiSim files are available for
those who integrate simulation with their lab experiments.
137
11/15/06 5:32:15 PM
CONTENTS
1.) Basic Concepts. 1-1 Work and Energy. 1-2 Unit of Energy. 1-3 Energy
Conversion. 1-4 Efficiency. 1-5 Structure of Matter. 1-6 Electric Charge. 1-7 Valence
Electrons. 1-8 Free Electrons. 1-9 Ions. 1-10 Static Charge and Static Electricity.
1-11 Static Discharge. 1-12 Uses of Static Electricity. 2.) Electrical Quantities and
Units. 2-1 Charge. 2-2 Unit of Charge. 2-3 Current and Current Carriers. 2-4 Current
in Solids. 2-5 Current in Liquids and Gases. 2-6 Current in a Vacuum. 2-7 Unit of
Current—The Ampere. 2-8 Voltage. 2-9 Unit of Voltage—The Volt. 2-10 Polarity.
2-11 Sources of Voltage. 2-12 Resistance. 2-13 Conductors. 2-14 Insulators.
2-15 Semiconductors. 2-16 Unit of Resistance—The Ohm. 2-17 Temperature
Coefficient. 2-18 Resistivity. 2-19 Resistors. 2-20 Power and Energy. 2-21 Unit of
Power. 2-22 Efficiency. 2-23 Powers of 10. 2-24 Multiple and Submultiple Units.
2-25 Special Units and Conversions. 3.) Basic Circuits, Laws, and Measurements
>h4>3-1 Circuit Essentials. 3-2 Circuit Symbols and Diagrams . 3-3 Calculating
Electrical Quantities. 3-4 Measuring Electrical Quantities. 4.) Circuit Components.
4-1 Batteries and Cells. 4-2 Lead-Acid Cells. 4-3 Nickel-Cadmium Cells. 4-4
Carbon-Zinc and Zinc Chloride Cells. 4-5 Alkaline-Manganese Dioxide Cells.
4-6 Mercuric Oxide Cells. 4-7 Silver Oxide Cells. 4-8 Lithium Cells >h4>4-9
Miniature Lamps and LEDs. 4-10 Resistors. 4-11 Switches. 4-12 Wires and Cables.
4-13 Fuses and Circuit Breakers. 4-14 Other Components. 5.) Multiple-Load
Circuits. 5-1 Subscripts. 5-2 Power in Multiple-Load Circuits. 5-3 Series Circuits
5-4 Maximum Power Transfer. 5-5 Parallel Circuits. 5-6 Conductance. 5-7
Series-Parallel Circuits. 5-8 Voltage Dividers and Regulators. 6.) Complex-Circuit
Analysis. 6-1 Simultaneous Equations. 6-2 Loop-Equations Technique. 6-3
Node Voltage Technique. 6-4 Superposition Theorem. 6-5 Voltage Sources. 6-6
Thevenin’s Theorem. 6-7 Current Source. 6-8 Norton’s Theorem. 6-9 Comparison
of Techniques. 7.) Magnetism and Electromagnetism. 7-1 Magnetism and Magnets.
7-2 Magnetic Fields, Flux, and Poles. 7-3 Electromagnetism. 7-4 Magnetic
Materials. 7-5 Magnetizing Magnetic Materials. 7-6 Magnetomotive Force. 7-7
Saturation. 7-8 Demagnetizing. 7-9 Residual Magnetism. 7-10 Reluctance. 7-11
Magnetic Shields. 7-12 Induced Voltage. 7-13 Magnetic Quantities and Units.
7-14 Electromagnets. 7-15 DC Motors. 7-16 Solenoids. 7-17 Relays. 7-18 HallEffect Devices. 8.) Alternating Current and Voltage. 8-1 AC Terminology. 8-2
Waveforms. 8-3 Types of AC Waveforms. 8-4 Quantifying Alternating Current.
8-5 The Sine Wave. 8-6 AC Generator. 8-7 Advantages of Alternating Current.
8-8 Three-Phase Alternating Current. 9.) Power in AC Circuits. 9-1 Power in
Resistive AC Circuits . 9-2 Power in Out-Of-Phase Circuits. 9-3 True Power and
Apparent Power. 9-4 Power Factor. 10.) Capacitance. 10-1 Terminology. 10-2
Basic Capacitor Action
10-3 Voltage Rating. 10-4 Unit of Capacitance. 10-5 Determining Capacitance. 106 Types of Capacitors. 10-7 Schematic Symbols. 10-8 Capacitors in DC Circuits
10-9 Capacitors in AC Circuits. 10-10 Capacitors in Series. 10-11 Capacitors
in Parallel. 10-12 Detecting Faulty Capacitors. 10-13 Undesired, or Stray,
Capacitance. 10-14 Capacitor Specifications. 10-15 Uses of Capacitors. 11.)
Inductance. 11-1 Characteristics of Inductance. 11-2 Unit of Inductance—The
Henry. 11-3 Factors of Determining Inductance. 11-4 Types of Inductors. 11-5
Ratings of Inductors. 11-6 Inductors in DC Circuits. 11-7 Ideal Inductors in AC
Circuits. 11-8 Real Inductors in AC Circuits. 11-9 Inductors in Parallel. 11-10
Inductors in Series. 11-11 Time Constants for Inductors. 11-12 Preventing
Mutual Inductance. 11-13 Undesired Inductance. 12.) Transformers. 12-1
Transformer Fundamentals. 12-2 Efficiency of Transformers. 12-3 Loaded and
Unloaded Transformers. 12-4 Transformer Cores. 12-5 Types of Transformers.
12-6 Impedance Matching. 12-7 Transformer Ratings. 12-8 Series and Parallel
Windings. 12-9 Off-Center-Tapped Windings. 12-10 Three-Phase Transformers.
13.) R, C, and L Circuits. 13-1 Impedance. 13-2 Adding Phasors. 13-3 Solving RC
Circuits. 13-4 Solving RL Circuits. 13-5 Solving RCL Circuits. 13-6 Resonance.
13-7 Filters. 14.) Electric Motors. 14-1 Motor Classifications. 14-2 Motor Ratings.
14-3 Motor Enclosures. 14-4 Squirrel-Cage Induction Motors. 14-5 Synchronous
Motors. 14-6 Other Types of Motors. 15.) Instruments and Measurements. 15-1
Digital Multimeter. 15-2 Meter Movements. 15-3 Analog Ammeters 15-4 Analog
Voltmeters. 15-5 Meter Loading. 15-6 Analog Ohmmeters. 15-7 Insulation
Testers. 15-8 Wheatstone Bridge. 15-9 Wattmeters. 15-10 Frequency Meters.
15-11 Measuring Impedance. 15-12 Measuring Inductance and Capacitance. 16.)
Residential Wiring Concepts. 16-1 Electrical Codes. 16-2 Power Distribution. 16-3
Service Entrance. 16-4 Cables and Conductors. 16-5 240-V. Branch Circuits. 16-6
120-V Branch Circuits. 16-7 Switched-Receptacle Outlet. 16-8 Multiple Switching.
16-9 Lighted-Handle Switches. 16-10 Circuit Interrupters. 16-11 Feeder Circuits.
16-12 Low-Voltage Control Circuits. 16-13 Electronic Control Circuits. Glossary
of Terms and Symbols. Appendix A Common Tools. Appendix B Soldering and
the Soldering Process. Appendix C Formulas and Conversions. Appendix D
Cooper Wire Table. Appendix E Resistivity of Metals and Alloys. Appendix F
Temperature Coefficients of Resistance. Appendix G Trigonometric Functions.
Appendix H Capacitor Codes and Color Codes.Appendix I The Oscilloscope.
Appendix J Basics of Cramer’s Rule. Index
BASIC ELECTRICITY: A TEXT-LAB MANUAL
Seventh Edition
by by Paul B Zbar and Joseph Sloop, Gordon Rockmaker, Electronic
Industries Association
2000 / 460 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-821275-8 / 0-07-821275-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120284-8 / MHID: 0-07-120284-6 [IE]
CONTENTS
Introduction to Experiments. Resistor Color Code and Measurement of Resistance.
Measurement of Voltage. Conductors and Insulators. Switches and Switching
Circuits. Measurement of Direct Current. Ohm’s Law. Series Circuits. Designing
Series Circuit. Voltage-Divider Circuits unloaded). Current in a Parallel Circuit.
Resistance of a Parallel Circuit. Designing Parallel Circuits. Resistance of SeriesParallel Circuits. Direct-Current Meters (shunts and multipliers). Kirchhoff’s
Voltage Law (one source). Kirchhoff’s Current Law . Voltage-Divider Circuits
(loaded). Designing Voltage and Current-Divider Circuits. Troubleshooting
Electric Circuits using Voltage, Current, and Resistance Measurement. Maximum
Power Transfer. Solving Circuits using Mesh Currents. Balanced-Bridge Circuit.
Superposition Theorem. Thevenin’s Theorem. Norton’s Theorem. Millman’s
Theorem. Magnetic Field Associated with Current in a Wire. Inducing Voltage
in a Coil. Applications of the DC Relay. Oscilloscope Operation. Oscilloscope
Voltage and Frequency Measurement. Peak, RMS, and Average Values of AC.
Characteristics of Inductance. Transformers. Inductances in Series and Parallel.
RC Time Constants. Reactance of a Capacitor (XC). Capacitors in Series and
Parallel. The Capacitive Voltage Divider. Impedance of a Series RL Circuit. Voltage
Relationships in a Series RL Circuit Impedance of a Series RC Circuit. Voltage
Relationships in a Series RC Circuit. Power in AC Circuits. Frequency Response
of a Reactive Circuit. Impedance of a Series RLC Circuit. Effects of Changes in
Frequency on Impedance and Current in a Series RLC Circuit. Impedance of
Parallel RL and RC Circuits. Impedance of a Parralles RLC Circuit. Resonant
Frequency and Frequency Response of a Series RLC Circuit. Effect of Q on
Frequency Response and Bandwidth of a Series Resonant Circuit. Characteristics
of Parallel Resonant Circuits. Low-Pass and Hig h-Pass Filters. RC Bandpass and
Bandstop Filters. Nonlinear Resistors - Thermistors. Nonlinear Resistors - Varistors
(VDRS). Appendices. A: Wiring Methods B: Familiarization with Hand Tools Used
in Electronics C: Soldering Techniques.
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BASIC MATHEMATICS FOR
ELECTRICITY AND ELECTRONICS
Second Edition
by Aurthur Beiser, New York University
1993 / 224 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-004439-5 / MHID: 0-07-004439-2
138
11/15/06 5:32:16 PM
ELECTRICITY/ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS
A Text-Lab Manual
Fourth Edition
by by Paul B Zbar and Joseph Sloop, Gordon Rockmaker, Electronic
Industries Association
1993 / 384 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-02-800843-1 / MHID: 0-02-800843-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113780-5 / MHID: 0-07-113780-7 [IE]
Power Systems
MODERN POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS
Third Edition
by L. S. Kothari, University of Delhi, and I J Nagrath
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-049489-3 / MHID: 0-07-049489-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124111-3 / MHID: 0-07-124111-6 [IE]
POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS
by John Grainger, North Carolina State University; William
Stevenson, Jr., late professor, North Carolina State University
1994 / 784 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-061293-8 / MHID: 0-07-061293-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113338-8 / MHID: 0-07-113338-0 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Basic Concepts/2 Transformers/3 The Synchronous Machine/4 Series Impedance
of Transmission Lines/5 Capacitance of Transmission Lines/6 Current and
Voltage Relations on a Transmission Line/7 The Admittance Model and Network
Calculations/8 The Impedance Model and Network Calculations/9 Power Flow
Solutions/10 Symmetrical Faults/11 Symmetrical Components and Sequence
Networks/12 Unsymmetrical Faults/13 Economic Operation of Power Systems/14
Zbus Methods in Contingency Analysis/15 State Estimation of Power Systems/16
Power System Stability
ELEMENTS OF POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS
Fourth Edition
by William Stevenson, Jr., North Carolina State University
1982 / 436 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-066584-2 / MHID: 0-07-066584-2 [IE]
CONTENTS
1. Introduction. 2. Inductance and Resistance of Transmission Lines. 3. Capacitance
of Transmission Lines. 4. Representation of Power System Components. 5.
Characteristics and Performance of Power Transmission Lines. 6. Load Flow
Studies. 7. Optional System Operation. 8. Automatic Generation and Voltage
Control. 9. Symmetrical Fault Analysis. 10. Symmetrical Components. 11.
Unsymmetrical Fault Analysis. 12. Power System Stability. 13. Power System
Security. 14. An Introduction to State Estimation of Power Systems. 15.
Compensation in Power Systems. 16. Load Forecasting Technique. 17. Voltage
Stability. Appendix A : Introduction to Vector and Matrix Algebra. Appendix B
: General Circuit Constants. Appendix C : Triangular Factorization and Optimal
Ordering. Appendix D : Elements of Power System Jacobian Matrix. Appendix
E : Kuhn-Tucker Theorem. Appendix F : Real-Time Computer Control of Power
Systems. Appendix G : Introduction to MATLAB and SIMULINK. Answers to
Problems. Index.
Power Electronic
POWER ELECTRONICS
Second Edition
by M D Singh and K B Khanchandani
2006 (April 2006) / 800 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-058389-4 / MHID: 0-07-058389-7
(Details unavailable at press time)
POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS
Second Edition
by Hadi Saadat, Milwaukee School of Engineering
CONTENTS
1 The Power System: An Overview. 2 Basic Principles. 3 Generator - Transformer
Models and the Per Unit System. 4 Transmission Line Parameters. 5 Line Model
and Performance. 6 Power Flow Analysis. 7 Optimal Dispatch of Generation.
8 Synchronous Machine Transient Analysis. 9 Balanced Fault. 10 Symmetrical
Components and Imbalanced Fault. 11 Stability. 12 Power System Control.
Appendixes
POWER ELECTRONICS
Third Edition
by Cyril W Lander
1994 / 496 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-707714-3 / MHID: 0-07-707714-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113445-3 / MHID: 0-07-113445-X [IE]
CONTENTS
Rectifying Devices. Rectifying Circuits. Converter Operation. DC Line
Commutation. Frequency Conversion. Some Applications. Harmonics. DC
Machine Control. AC Machine Control. Protection. Glossary of Terms. References
and Bibliography.
139
11/15/06 5:32:16 PM
High Voltage Engineering
HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING
Third Edition
by M S Naidu, Indian Institute of Science Bangalore, V Kamaraju,
JNTU College of Engineering, Kakinada, Andhra Pradesh
2003 / 410 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-049464-0 / MHID: 0-07-049464-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123869-4 / MHID: 0-07-123869-7 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Conduction and breakdown in gases. 3 Conduction and
breakdown in liquid dielectrics. 4 Breakdown in solid dielectrics. 5 Applications of
insulating materials. 6 Generation of high voltages and currents. 7 Measurement of
high voltages and currents. 8 Over voltage phenomena and insulation coordination
in electric power systems. 9 Non-destructive testing of materials and electrical
apparatus. 10 High voltage testing of high voltage apparatus. 11 Design, Planning
and layout of high voltage laboratories.
Electromagnetics
ENGINEERING ELECTROMAGNETICS
Seventh Edition
by William Hayt, (deceased), and John Buck, Georgia Institute of
Technology
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310463-8 / MHID: 0-07-310463-9 (with CD)
The book website contains the solutions manual, image set and other
resources. (Browse http://www.mhhe.com/haytbuck7)
Engineering Electromagnetics is a “classic” book that has
been updated for electromagnetics in today’s world. It is
designed for introductory courses in electromagnetics or
electromagnetic field theory at the junior-level, but can also
be used as a professional reference. This widely respected
book stresses fundamentals and problem solving and discusses
the material in an understandable, readable way. Numerous
illustrations and analogies are provided to the aid the reader in
grasping difficult concepts. In addition, independent learning is
facilitated by the presence of many examples and problems.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• One of the most significant changes in the seventh edition is
the re-positioning of the transmission lines chapter ahead of the
plane waves chapter. The transmission lines chapter has also been
re-written and expanded so that it can be used at any point in the
course outline (including its use as the initial topic). To facilitate this,
the fields description of transmission line waves is now located in the
waveguides chapter. Also, the topic of transmission lines losses has
been added to the transmission lines chapter.
• The two plane waves chapters have been modified to
accommodate the new ordering. Although an instructor can still use
them ahead of transmission lines if they wish.
• Other additions to the 7e include a new section on optical fibers
in the waveguides chapter.
• Many new end-of-chapter problems have been included. The drill
problems have also been updated. In addition, new examples and
applications have been added.
• The book has an expanded Web site which includes the solutions
manual (for instructors only), downloadable JPEG files of the figures,
as well as other helpful student and instructor resources.
• COSMOS—contains the entire book problem set, enhanced to
include any referenced images or text, as well as the entire solution
set for the book. In addition, this application will help you organize,
distribute, and track problem sets from the text book as you assign
them to your students.
• The book comes packaged with an extensive multi-media CDROM. Key components of the CD include: illustrations, animations,
interactives, quizzes and searchable PowerPoint lectures with
additional learning material. These resources will be of great use to
both the student and the instructor.
FEATURES
• The book has been written with the goal of making it as easy as
possible for the student to learn independently. This has been done
by applying a carefully graduated scale of difficulty within each
chapter and among the chapters themselves, by providing numerical
examples, a large number of drill problems with answers, as well as
end-of-chapter problems.
• The material is more than adequate for a one-semester course.
Professors can omit portions of some of the chapters depending on
the instructional level. Also, the more difficult material has been
placed near the ends of chapters or at the end of the study of some
definite phase of the subject to help bring along varying levels of
students.
CONTENTS
1 Vector Analysis. 2 Coulomb’s Law and Electric Field Intensity. 3 Electric Flux
Density, Gauss’s Law, and Divergence. 4 Energy and Potential. 5 Currents and
Conductors. 6 Dielectrics and Capacitance. 7 Poisson’s and Laplace’s Equations.
8 The Steady Magnetic Field. 9 Magnetic Forces, Materials, and Inductance. 10
Time-Varying Fields and Maxwell’s Equations. 11 Transmission Lines. 12 The
Uniform Plane Wave. 13 Plane Waves at Boundaries and in Dispersive Media.
14 Electromagnetic Waves in Transmission Lines and Waveguides. Appendix A
Vector Analysis. Appendix B Units. Appendix C Material Constants. Appendix D
Orgins of the Complex Permittivity. Appendix E Answers to Selected Problems
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ELECTRIC CIRCUITS
Fourth Edition
by Mahmood Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, University of Akron
2003 / 400 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-139307-2 / MHID: 0-07-139307-2
CONTENTS
1. Introduction. 2. Circuit Concepts. 3. Circuit Laws. 4. Analysis Methods. 5.
Amplifiers and Operational Amplifier Circuits. 6. Waveforms and Signals. 7. FirstOrder Circuits. 8. Higher-Order Circuits and Complex Frequency. 9. Sinusoidal
Steady-State Circuit Analysis. 10. AC Power. 11. Polyphase Circuits. 12. Frequency
Response, Filters, and Resonance. 13. Two-Port Networks. 14. Mutual Inductance
and Transformers. 15. Circuit Analysis Using Spice and Pspice. 16. The LaPlace
Transform Method. 17. Fourier Method of Waveform Analysis. Appendix A
Complex Number System. Appendix B Matrices and Determinants.
ELECTROMAGNETICS
Fifth Edition
by John Kraus, Ohio State University (Emeritus) and Daniel A Fleisch,
Aeroflex-Lintele Corp, and Wittenburg University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116429-0 / MHID: 0-07-116429-4 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Electric and Magnetic Fields. 3 Transmission Lines. 4 Wave
Propagation, Attenuation, Polarization, Reflection, Refraction and Diffraction.5
Antennas, Radiation, Radar and Wireless. 6 Electrodynamics. 7 Dielectric
and Magnetic Materials. 8 Waveguides, Resonators and Fiber Optics. 9 BioElectromagnetics. 10 Electromagnetic Effects in High-Speed Digital Systems. 11
Numerical Techniques
140
11/15/06 5:32:17 PM
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ELECTRIC MACHINES AND
ELECTROMECHANICS
Second Edition
by Syed A. Nasar, University of Kentucky
1998 / 208 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-045994-6 / MHID: 0-07-045994-0
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ELECTROMAGNETICS
Second Edition
by Joseph Edminister Cornell University
1995
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-021234-3 / MHID: 0-07-021234-1
ELECTRIC CIRCUITS
Second Edition
by Theodore F Bogart, University of Southern Mississippi
1992 / 864 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112920-6 / MHID: 0-07-112920-0 [IE]
Electromagnetics (Advanced)
INTRODUCTION TO RADAR SYSTEMS
Third Edition
by Merrill I. Skolnik
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-288138-7 / MHID: 0-07-288138-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118189-1 / MHID: 0-07-288138-0 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 An Introduction to Radar. 2 The Radar Equation. 3 MTI and Pulse Doppler
Radar. 4 Tracking Radar. 5 Detection of Signals in Noise. 6 Information from Radar
Signals. 7 Radar Clutter. 8 Propogation of Radar Waves . 9 The Radar Antenna.
10 Radar Transmitters. 11 Radar Receiver
Microwaves & Antennas
ANTENNAS
Third Edition
by John Kraus, Professor Emeritus, Ohio State University and Ronald J
Marhefka, Ohio State University
2002 / 960 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-232103-6 / MHID: 0-07-232103-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123201-2 / MHID: 0-07-123201-X [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/kraus
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Antenna Basics. 3 The Antenna Family. 4 Point Sources. 5
Arrays of Point Sources. 6 The Electric Dipole and Thin Linear Antennas. 7 The
Loop Antenna. 8 End Fire Antennas: The Helical Beam Antenna and the Yagi-Uda
Array. 9 Slot, Patch and Horn Antennas. 9II Slot and Horn Antennas II. 10 Flat
Sheet, Corner and Parabolic Reflector Antennas. 11 Broadband and FrequencyIndependent Antennas. 12 Antenna Temperature, Remote Sensing and Radar
Cross-Section. 13 Self and Mutual Impedances. 14 The Cylindrical Antenna and
the Moment Method (MM). 15 The Fourier Transform Relation Between Aperture
Distribution and Far-Field Pattern. 16 Arrays of Dipoles and of Apertures. 17 Lens
Antennas. 18 Frequency-Selective Surfaces and Periodic Structures by Ben A.
Munk. 19 Practical Design Considerations of Large Aperture Antennas. 20 Some
Examples of Large or Unique Antennas. 21 Antennas for Special Applications. 22
Terahertz Antennas. 23 Baluns, etc. By Ben A. Munk. 24 Antenna Measurements.
By Arto Lehto and Pertti Vainikainen. Appendix A Tables for Reference. Appendix
B Books and Video Tapes. Appendix C Computer Programs (Codes). Appendix D
Absorbing Materials. Appendix E Measurement Error
MICROWAVE ENGINEERING
by A Das, Anna University and Sisir K Das, Head, EMC Division,
Sameer Center for Electromagnetics, India
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-463577-3 / MHID: 0-07-463577-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118884-5 / MHID: 0-07-118884-3 [IE]
CONTENTS
Introduction. Basic Transmission Line Theory. Propagation of Electromagnetic
Waves. Microwave Transmission Lines. Impedance Transformations For Matching.
Microwave Network Theory and Passive Devices. Microwave Resonators.
Microwave Filters. Microwave Vacuum Tube Devices. Microwave Solid State
Devices and Circuits. Applications of Microwaves. Microwave Radiation Hazards.
Microwave Measurements.
141
11/15/06 5:32:18 PM
Signals & Systems
NEW
FUNDAMENTALS SIGNALS SYSTEMS
by M.J. Roberts, University Of Tennessee-Knoxville
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-330950-7 / MHID: 0-07-330950-8
(with Bind-in card)
As in most areas of science and engineering, the most important
and useful theories are the ones that capture the essence, and
therefore the beauty, of physical phenomena. This is true
of signals and systems. Signals and Systems: Analysis Using
Transform Methods and MATLAB captures the mathematical
beauty of signals and systems and offers a student-centered,
pedagogically driven approach. The author has a clear
understanding of the issues students face in learning the
material and does a superior job of addressing these issues. The
book is intended to cover a one-semester sequence in Signals
and Systems for juniors in engineering. This text is created in
modular format, so instructors can select chapters within the
framework that they teach this course.
FEATURES
• The new brief version of Roberts is somewhat shorter than the
comprehensive version and, most importantly, has been modularized
to allow reduced topic coverage without loss of continuity.
• This version includes many exciting new examples with a
practical flavor.
• Roberts continues to offer alternating parallel coverage of
continuous-time and discrete-time signals and systems, something
most professors want.
• Roberts includes unified and consistent notation for all transform
methods to aid retention and understanding of relations among
transform methods.
• Since MATLAB is key to many Signals and Systems courses, a
large number of MATLAB examples and a comprehensive Appendix
on the important MATLAB operators and functions used in signal and
system analysis have been included.
• An ARIS site accompanies the book and features such things
as solutions and ppts for instructors, and concept simulators and
algorithmic problems for students.
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Mathematical Description of Continuous-Time Signals. 3
Mathematical Description of Discrete-Time Signals. 4 Properties of ContinuousTime Systems. 5 Properties of Discrete-Time Systems. 6 Time-Domain Analysis of
Continuous-Time Systems. 7 Time-Domain Analysis of Discrete-Time Systems
8 The Continuous-Time Fourier Series. 9 The Discrete-Time Fourier Series. 10 The
Continuous-Time Fourier Transform. 11 The Discrete-Time Fourier Transform
12 Continuous-Time Fourier Transform Analysis of Signals and Systems. 13
Discrete-Time Fourier Transform Analysis of Signals and Systems. 14 Sampling and
the Discrete Fourier Transform. 15 The Laplace Transform. 16 The z Transform
Appendix A: Useful Mathematical Relations. Appendix B: The Continuous-Time
Fourier Series Pairs. Appendix C: Discrete-Time Fourier Series Pairs. Appendix
D: Continuous-Time Fourier Transform Pairs. Appendix E: Discrete-Time Fourier
Transform Pairs. Appendix F: Laplace Transform Pairs. Appendix G: z Transform
Pairs.
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
Analysis of Signals Through Linear Systems
by M J Roberts, University of Tennessee—Knoxville
2004 / 832 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293044-3 / MHID: 0-07-293044-6
(with OLC Bind-In Card)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123268-5 / MHID: 0-07-123268-0 [IE]
The website will contain solutions, pdf files of figures, concept
simulations, and Frontiers in Signals and Systems featuring the author s
work on biological systems and other interesting applications in the field.
(Browse http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0072499427)
Signals and Systems by M.J. Roberts offers a student-centered,
pedagogically driven approach to teaching Signals and
Systems. The author has a clear understanding of the issues
students face in learning the material and does a superior job
of addressing these issues. The book is intended to cover a
two-semester sequence in Signals and Systems for Juniors in
engineering.
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Mathematical Description of Signals. 3 Description and Analysis
of Systems. 4 The Fourier Series. 5 The Fourier Transform. 6 Fourier Transform
Analysis of Signals and Systems. 7 Sampling and the Discrete Fourier Transform.
8 Correlation, Energy Spectral Density, and Power Spectral Density. 9 The Laplace
Transform. 10 Laplace Transform Analysis of Signals and Systems. 11 The z
Transform. 12 z-Transform Analysis of Signals and Systems. Appendix A: Useful
Mathematical Relations. Appendix B: Introduction to MATLAB. Appendix C: Least
Common Multiples. Appendix D: Convolution Properties. Appendix E: Table of
Fourier Pairs. Appendix F: Table of Laplace Transform Pairs
Appendix G: Table of z Transform Pairs. Appendix H: Complex Numbers and
Functions. Appendix I: Differential and Difference Equations. Appendix J: Vectors
and Matrices. Bibliography
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
by I J Nagrath, formerly Deputy Director, Birla Institute of
Technology and Science, Pilani and S N Sharan, R Ranjan and S
Kumar of BITS, Pilani
2001 / 512 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-463771-5 / MHID: 0-07-463771-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120271-8 / MHID: 0-07-120271-4 [IE]
http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/digital_solutions/nagrath/
CONTENTS
Introduction to Signals and Systems. Analysis of Continuous-time Systems - time
domain and Frequency Domain. Analysis of LTI Discrete-time Systems - time
domain and Frequency Domain. Discrete Fourier Transform and Fast Fourier
Transform. State Space Analysis. Stability Analysis of LTI Systems. Analog and
Digital Filter Design. Fundamentals of Random Processes. Matlab Tools for Design
and Analysis of Digital Filters.
142
11/15/06 5:32:18 PM
INTRODUCTION TO SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
by Douglas K Lindner, Virginia Polytechnic Institute
1999 / 984 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116489-4 / MHID: 0-07-116489-4 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Real Functions, Limits & Sequences. 3 Review of Complex
Variables. 4 Review of Matrix Theory. 5 Introduction to Signal Modeling. 6
Introduction to Systems. 7 Fourier Series and Fourier Transforms. 8 Spectral Content
of a Signal. 9 The Laplace Transform. 10 Transfer Functions, Block Diagrams &
State-Space. 11 Intro. to Realization Theory. 12 Convolution Representation &
Fourier Transfer Function. 13 Properties of Systems. 14 The Frequency Response
Theorem. 15 Sig/Sys Analysis in Frequency Domain. 16 Bode Plots. 17 Intro.
to Sampling, Coding & Quantization. 18 Z Transform & Discrete-Time Fourier
Transform. 19 Sampling. 20 Discrete Fourier Transform. 21Discrete-Time System
Representations. 22 Discrete-Time System Properties. 23 Frequency Domain Anal.
of Discrete-Time Systems. 24 Digital Filter Design.
Digital Signal Processing
• The expanded Web site for the book includes a downloadable
version of the solutions manual (available to instructors only) and
a link to the author’s FTP site for updated versions of the MATLAB
M-files.
• The main text includes a CD-ROM containing all MATLAB
programs, real-life signals that can be used by the reader for
processing, additional exercises, and review materials.
• The main text can be packaged with Digital Signal Processing
Laboratory Using MATLAB, which is intended for a computer-based
DSP laboratory course that supplements a lecture course on Digital
Signal Processing.
• The lab book includes 11 laboratory exercises, with each exercise
containing a number of projects to be carried out on a computer.
The book assumes that the reader has no background in MATLAB
and teaches the reader, through tested programs in the first half of
the book, the basics of this powerful language in solving important
problems in signal processing. In the second half of the book, the
student is asked to write the necessary MATLAB programs to carry
out the projects.
FEATURES
• A key feature of the book is the extensive use of MATLAB-based
examples that illustrate the program’s powerful capability to solve
signal processing problems. The book uses a three-state pedagogical
structure with MATLAB: each chapter begins by developing the
essential theory and algorithms, the material is then illustrated with
examples solved by hand calculation, and finally solutions are
derived using MATLAB. From the start, MATLAB codes are provided
with enough detail to allow the students to repeat the examples on
their computer.
CONTENTS
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
A Computer-Based Approach
Third Edition
by Sanjit K. Mitra, University of California at Santa Barbara
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304837-6 / MHID: 0-07-304837-2 (with CD)
The expanded Web site for the book includes a downloadable version
of the solutions manual (available to instructors only) and a link to the
authorʼs FTP site for updated versions of the MATLAB M-files. (Browse
http://www.mhhe.com/mitra3)
Digital Signal Processing: A Computer-Based Approach is
intended for a two-semester course on digital signal processing
for seniors or first-year graduate students. Based on user
feedback, a number of new topics have been added to the third
edition, while some excess topics from the second edition have
been removed. The author has taken great care to organize
the chapters more logically by reordering the sections within
chapters. More worked-out examples have also been included.
The book contains more than 500 problems and 150 MATLAB
exercises. New topics in the third edition include: short-time
characterization of discrete-time signals, expanded coverage of
discrete-time Fourier transform and discrete Fourier transform,
prime factor algorithm for DFT computation, sliding DFT,
zoom FFT, chirp Fourier transform, expanded coverage of ztransform, group delay equalization of IIR digital filters, design
of computationally efficient FIR digital filters, semi-symbolic
analysis of digital filter structures, spline interpolation, spectral
factorization, discrete wavelet transform.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
1 Signals and Signal Processing. 2 Discrete-Time Signals and Systems. 3 DiscreteTime Signals and Systems in the Frequency Domain. 4 Digital Processing of
Continuous-Time Signals. 5 Finite-Length Discrete Transforms. 6 Discrete-Time
Signals and Systems in the z-Domain. 7 LTI Discrete-Time Systems in the Transform
Domain. 8 Digital Filter Structures. 9 IIR Digital Filter Design. 10 FIR Digital Filter
Design. 11 DSP Algorithm Implementation Considerations. 12 Analysis of Finite
Wordlength Effects. 13 Multirate Digital Signal Processing Fundamentals. 14
Multirate Filter Banks and Wavelets. 15 Applications of Digital Signal Processing.
Appendix: Random Signals
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS: ARCHITECTURE,
PROGRAMMING AND APPLICATIONS
by B. Venkataramani, and M. Bhaskar, Regional Engineering College,
Tiruchirappalli, India
2002 / 424 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-047334-8 / MHID: 0-07-047334-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122897-8 / MHID: 0-07-122897-7 [IE]
CONTENTS
1. An Overview of Digital Signal Processing and its Applications. 2. Introduction
To Programmable DSPs. 3. Architecture of Tms320c5x. 4. Tms320c5x Assembly
language Instructions. 5. Instruction Pipelining in C5x. 6. Application Programs
in C5x. 7. Architecture of Tms320c3x. 8. Addressing Modes and Assembly
Language Instructions of C3x. 9. Application Programmes in C3x. 10. Tms320c54x
Overview. 11. Tms320c54x Assembly Language Instructions. 12. Application
Programs on C54x. 13. An Overview of Tms320c6x DSPS. 14. An Overview
of Motorola DSP563xx. 15. Recent Trends in DSP System Design. Answers to
Selected Questions. Bibliography. Index
• The original MATLAB programs of the second edition have been
updated to run on the newer versions of MATLAB and the Signal
Processing ToolBox. In addition, brand new MATLAB programs and
code fragments have been added to this edition.
• The text makes extensive use of examples to illustrate theory,
design and applications. The 353 simple, but practical examples
expose the reader to real-life signal processing problems throughout
the book. The book concludes with a chapter focused on several
important practical applications of DSP. These applications are easy
to follow and do not require knowledge of other advanced level
courses.
143
11/15/06 5:32:19 PM
by S Salivahanan, Mepco Schlenk Engineering College, Sivakasi, A
Vallavaraj, Caledonian College of Engineering, Sultanate of Oman,
and C Gnanapriya, Infosys Technologies Limited, Bangalore
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-463996-2 / MHID: 0-07-463996-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118982-8 / MHID: 0-07-118982-3 [IE]
http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/007463996x
CONTENTS
1 Classification of signals and systems. 2 Fourier analysis of periodic and aperiodic
continuous-time signals and systems. 3 Applications of laplace transform to
system analysis. 4 z-transform. 5 Linear time invariant systems. 6 Discrete and
fast fourier transforms. 7 Finite impulse response (fir) filters. 8 Infinite impulse
response (iit) filters. 9 Realisation of digital linear systems. 10 Effects of finite
word length in digital filters. 11 Multirate digital signal processing. 12 Spectral
estimation. 13 Adaptive filters. 14 Applications of digital signal processing. 15
MATLAB programs
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF DIGITAL SIGNAL
PROCESSING
by Monson Hayes, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, Ga
1999 / 352 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-027389-4 / MHID: 0-07-027389-8
Digital Signal Processing
Laboratory
by Charles A Schuler, and Mahesh Chugani
2005 / 352 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-829744-1 / MHID: 0-07-829744-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111331-1 / MHID: 0-07-111331-2 [IE]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/dsp
This new book is intended for two-year and four-year electronics
students, as well as industry practitioners who need to learn
about applied Digital Signal Processing. The text has a very
practical “hands-on” approach, appropriate for those students
who will apply and troubleshoot modern electronic systems.
The authors present critical ideas and then apply them to realworld technician work via software simulations and examples.
These activities will clearly illustrate core concepts to increase
understanding and aid retention. The CD-ROM included
with the text contains five programs that support the handson activities. Three of the programs were specially prepared
for beginners just learning DSP; two present demo versions of
professional software used by DSP designers.
FEATURES
• The approach used in this book presents critical ideas and then
immediately applies them via software simulations and examples.
• The text includes coverage of digital conversion, Fourier Analysis,
analog filters, infinite impulse response (IIR) filters and finite impulse
response (FIR) filters.
• The text includes practical lab applications, which will be
completed using the CD-ROM packaged with the text.
• Instructor’s manual and presentations are available on passwordprotected Instructor’s website.
• Student CD-ROM includes QEDesign 1000--Educational Version.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction to Digital Signal Processing. Chapter 2 Converting Analog
Signals to Digital Signals. Chapter 3 Correlation and Convolution. Chapter 4
Periodic Functions and Fourier Synthesis. Chapter 5 Discrete Fourier Transform.
Chapter 6 Windows. Chapter 7 Digital Filters. Chapter 8 Practical Implementation
of Filters. Chapter 9 Digital Signal Processing Systems. Chapter 10 Illustrated DSP
Dictionary. Index
contact your local
[email protected]
144
11/15/06 5:32:20 PM
Communications
NEW
PRINCIPLES OF ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION
SYSTEMS
Third Edition
by Louis E. Frenzel
2008 (January 2007) / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322278-3 / MHID: 0-07-322278-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110810-2 / MHID: 0-07-110810-6 [IE, with OLC]
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/frenzel3e
Principles of Electronic Communication Systems is designed
for an introductory course in communication electronics for
Electronics Technology and Electrical Engineering Technology
students who have a background in basic electronics,
algebra and trigonometry. The text covers current, state-ofthe-art technologies used in all forms of modern electronic
communications, using a systems approach to best reflect
current industry practice. This edition contains greatly expanded
and updated material on the Internet, cell phones and wireless
technologies. Practical skills like testing and troubleshooting
are included throughout the new edition. As before, Frenzel's
book is notable for its readability, which is augmented by
numerous four-color line drawings, photographs, examples
and learning features. A brand-new Laboratory & Activities
Manual provides both hands-on experiments and a variety of
other activities, reflecting the variety of skills now needed in
the electronic communications world. A new Online Learning
Center web site is available, with a wealth of learning resources
for students, and teaching materials for instructors.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• New streamlined book design used to highlight learning features,
four-color art figures and photographs.
• Updated coverage of cell phones and wireless technologies in
chapters 20 and 21.
• Systems approach to electronic communications is used, reflecting
current trends in the workplace.
• Internet technologies are covered in new chapter 15, which
includes a section on Internet Security.
• OLC website includes includes the follwing student resources:
self-tests, lab follow-up, links to sites of interest, chapter study
overviews, and career information. Instructors will find online
versions of the instructor's manual, PowerPoint and lab follow-up.
• An all-new Laboratory & Activities Manual is available, with
hands-on labs, simulation routines, and a wide range of activities.
• Television chapter, fully updated, is available on the OLC website,
for those who cover the topic.
• Tests & Measurements are covered in chapter 22, with coverage
of new technologies like JTAG.
• "Good to Know" margin features direct students to key points in
the text.
FEATURES
• Modern coverage of all major communications topics,
concentrating on the key areas students need to master.
• Instructor Productivity Center (IPC) offers complete PowerPoint
lessons and electronic test banks for each chapter, plus the
Instructor's Manual, with complete solutions to text questions and
problems, in electronic form. CPS from eInstruction is also available
for classroom management and testing.
CONTENTS
Preface. Chapter 1 Introduction to Electronic Communication. 1-1 The Significance
of Human Communications. 1-2 Communication Systems. 1-3 Types of Electronic
Communication. 1-4 Modulation and Multiplexing. 1-5 The Electromagnetic
Spectrum. 1-6 Bandwidth. 1-7 A Survey of Communication Applications. 18 Careers in the Communications Industry. Chapter 2 The Fundamentals of
Electronics: A Review. 2-1 Gain, Attenuation and Decibels. 2-2 Tuned Circuits.
2-3 Filters. 2-4 Fourier Theory. Chapter 3 Amplitude Modulation Fundamentals
3-1 AM Concepts. 3-2 Modulation Index and Percentage of Modulation. 3-3
Sidebands and The Frequency Domain. 3-4 AM Power. 3-5 Single-Sideband
Modulation. 3-6 Classification of Radio Emissions. Chapter 4 Amplitude Modulator
and Demodulator Circuits. 4-1 Basic Principles of Amplitude Modulation. 4-2
Amplitude Modulators. 4-3 Amplitude Demodulators. 4-4 Balanced Modulators
4-5 SSB Circuits. Chapter 5 Fundamentals of Frequency Modulation. 5-1 Basic
Principles of Frequency Modulation. 5-2 Principles of Phase Modulation 5-3
Modulation Index and Sidebands. 5-4 Noise Suppression Effects of FM. 5-5
Frequency Modulation versus Amplitude Modulation. Chapter 6 FM Circuits.
6-1 Frequency Modulators. 6-2 Phase Modulators. 6-3 Frequency Demodulators.
Chapter 7 Digital Communications Techniques. 7-1 Digital Transmission of
Data. 7-2 Data Converters. 7-3 Parallel and Serial Transmission. 7-4 Pulse Code
Modulation. 7-5 Pulse Modulation. 7-6 Digital Signal Processing. Chapter 8 Radio
Transmitters. 8-1 Transmitter Fundamentals. 8-2 Carrier Generators. 8-3 Power
Amplifiers. 8-4 Impedance Matching Networks. 8-5 Typical Transmitter Circuits
Chapter 9 Communications Receivers., 9-1 Basic Principles of Signal
Reproduction. 9-2 Superheterodyne Receivers. 9-3 Frequency Conversion. 9-4
Intermediate Frequency and Images. 9-5 Noise. 9-6 Typical Receiver Circuits.
9-7 Receivers and Transmitters. Chapter 10 Multiplexing and Demultiplexing.
10-1 Multiplexing Principles. 10-2 Frequency Division Multiplexing. 10-3 Time
Division Multiplexing. 10-3 Pulse Code Modulation. 10-4 Duplexing. Chapter
11 Data Transmission Techniques. 11-1 Digital Codes. 11-2 Principles of Digital
Transmission. 11-3 Transmission Efficiency. 11-4 Basic Modem Concepts. 11-5
Wideband Modulation. 11-6 Advanced Modem Technology. 11-7 Error Detection
and Correction. 11-8 Protocols. Chapter 12 Introduction to Networking and Local
Area Networks. 12-1 Network Fundamentals. 12-2 LAN Hardware. 12-3 Ethernet
LANs. 12-4 Token Ring LAN. Chapter 13 Transmission Lines. 13-1 Transmission
Line Basics. 13-2 Standing Waves. 13-3 Transmission Lines as Circuit Elements
13-4 The Smith Chart. Chapter 14 Antennas and Wave Propagation. 14-1 Antenna
Fundamentals. 14-2 Common Antenna Types. 14-3 Radio Wave Propagation.
Chapter 15 Internet Technologies. 15-1 Internet Applications. 15-2 Internet
Transmission Systems. 15-3 Storage Area Networks. 15-4 Internet Security. Chapter
16 Microwave Communications. 16-1 Microwave Concepts. 16-2 Microwave
Transistor Amplifiers. 16-3 Waveguides and Cavity Resonators. 16-4 Microwave
Semiconductor Diodes. 16-5 Microwave Tubes. 16-6 Microwave Antennas. 167 Microwave Applications. Chapter 17 Satellite Communications. 17-1 Satellite
Orbits. 17-2 Satellite Communications Systems. 17-3 Satellite Subsystems. 17-4
Ground Stations. 17-5 Satellite Applications. Chapter 18 Telecommunication
Systems. 18-1 Telephones. 18-2 The Telephone System. 18-3 Facsimile. 18-4
Paging Systems. 18-5 Integrated Services Digital Network. 18-6 Internet Telephony.
Chapter 19 Optical Communication. 19-1 Optical Principles. 19-2 Optical
Communication System. 19-3 Fiber Optic Cables. 19-4 Optical Transmitters and
Receivers. 19-5 Wavelength Division Multiplexing. 19-6 Passive Optical Networks.
Chapter 20 Cell Phone Technologies. 20-1 Cellular Telephone Systems. 20-2 The
Advanced Mobile Telephone System. 20-3 Digital Cell Phone Systems. Chapter
21 Wireless Technologies. 21-1 Wireless LANs. 21-2 PANs and Bluetooth. 21-3
ZigBee and Mesh Wireless Networks. 21-4 WiMAX and Wireless Metropolitan
Area Networks. 21-5 Infrared Wireless. 21-6 Radio Frequency Identification. 21-7
Ultra Wideband Wireless. Chapter 22 Communication Tests and Measurements.
22-1 Communications Test Equipment. 22-2 Common Communication Tests.
22-3 Troubleshooting Techniques. 22-4 Electromagnetic Interference Testing.
Appendix. Glossary. Index.
145
11/15/06 5:32:21 PM
NEW
DATA COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKING
Fourth Edition
2007 (February 2006) / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325032-8 / MHID: 0-07-325032-5
As one of the fastest growing technologies in our culture today,
data communications and networking presents a unique
challenge for instructors. As both the number and types of
students are increasing, it is essential to have a textbook that
provides coverage of the latest advances, while presenting
the material in a way that is accessible to students with little
or no background in the field. Using a bottom-up approach,
Data Communications and Networking presents this highly
technical subject matter without relying on complex formulas
by using a strong pedagogical approach supported by more
than 700 figures.
Now in its Fourth Edition, this textbook brings the beginning
student right to the forefront of the latest advances in the field,
while presenting the fundamentals in a clear, straightforward
manner. Students will find better coverage, improved figures
and better explanations on cutting-edge material. The
"bottom-up" approach allows instructors to cover the material
in one course, rather than having separate courses on data
communications and networking.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
includes numerous figures, highlighted points, examples and real
life applications, key terms, chapter summaries, practice sets and an
• Added coverage of TCP/IP and extensive new material on Security
• Text uses a bottom-up approach where students learn about data
communications before learning about networking. This approach
allows instructors to cover the material in one course, rather than
having separate courses on data communications and networking.
center include: PowerPoint Slides, Solutions, and Animated Figures
from the text and solutions of odd-numbered problems for students.
(even-numbered solutions for instructor are password protected)
FEATURES
• More than 700 figures provide complete, visual presentation of
the material.
Figures replace the need for students to rely on complex formulas.
• The practice set includes an extensive number of review
questions, multiple choice questions, and extended exercises.
COMMUNICATION NETWORK
Second Edition
by Alberto Leon-Garcia, University of Toronto and Indra Widjaja
2004 / 848 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246352-1 / MHID: 0-07-246352-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119848-6 / MHID: 0-07-119848-2 [IE]
This website will contain: Solutions Manual for selected problems,
Power Point Slides, figures & lecture notes. (Browse http://highered.
mcgraw-hill.com/sites/007246352X)
This book is designed for introductory one-semester or oneyear courses in communications networks in upper-level
undergraduate programs. The second half of the book can
be used in more advanced courses. As pre-requisites the
book assumes a general knowledge of computer systems
and programming, and elementary calculus. The second
edition expands on the success of the first edition by updating
on technological changes in networks and responding to
comprehensive market feedback.
CONTENTS
Preface. 1 Communication Networks and Services. 2 Application and Layered
Architectures. 3 Digital Transmission Fundamentals. 4 Transmission Systems and
Circuit Switching Networks. 5 ARQ and Flow Control. 6 Local Area Networks
and Medium Access Control. 7 Packet-Switching Networks. 8 TCP/IP. 9 ATM
Networks. 10 Advanced Network Architectures. 11 Network Security. 12 MultiMedia Information and Networking. Epilogue. Appendixes. A Delay and Loss
Performance. B Network Management
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF ANALOG AND DIGITAL
COMMUNICATIONS
Second Edition
2003 / 336 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-140228-6 / MHID: 0-07-140228-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122997-5 / MHID: 0-07-122997-3 [IE]
CONTENTS
Part 1 Overview of Data Communications and Networking. 1 Introduction. 2
Network Models. Part 2 Physical Layer and Media. 3 Data and Signals. 4 Digital
Transmission. 5 Analog Transmission. 6 Bandwidth Utilization: Multiplexing and
Spreading. 7 Transmission Media. 8 Switching. 9 Using Telephone and Cable
Networks for Data Transmission. Part 3 Data Link Layer. 10 Error Detection
and Correction. 11 Data Link Control. 12 Multiple Access. 13 Wired LANs:
Ethernet
14 Wireless LANs. 15 Connecting LANs, Backbone Networks, and Virtual LANs.
16 Wireless WANs: Cellular Telephone and Satellite Networks. 17 SONET/SDH.
18 Virtual Circuit Networks: Frame Relay and ATM. Part 4 Network Layer. 19
Network Layer: Logical Addressing. 20 Network Layer: Internet Protocol. 21
Network Layer: Address Mapping, Error Reporting, and Multicasting. 22 Network
Layer: Delivery Forwarding, and Routing. Part 5 Transport Layer. 23 Process-toProcess Delivery: UDP, TCP, and SCTP. 24 Congestion Control and Quality of
Service. Part 6 Application Layer. 25 Domain Name System. 26 Remote Logging,
Electronic Mail, and File Transfer. 27 WWW and HTTP. 28 Network Management:
SNMP. 29 Multimedia. Part 7 Security. 30 Cryptography. 31 Network Security.
32 Security in the Internet: IPSec, SSL/TLS, PGP, VPN, and Firewalls. Appendix
A Unicode. Appendix B Numbering Systems. Appendix C Mathematical Review.
Appendix D 8B/6T Code. Appendix E Telephone History. Appendix F Contact
Addresses. Appendix G RFCs. Appendix H UDP and TCP Ports.
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Fourth Edition
by A. Bruce Carlson, Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, Janet Rutledge
and Paul Crilly, University of Tennessee at Knoxville
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-011127-1 / MHID: 0-07-011127-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121028-7 / MHID: 0-07-121028-8 [IE]
www.mhhe.com/engcs/electrical/carlson
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Signals and Spectra. 3 Signal Transmission and Filtering. 4
Linear CW Modulation. 5 Exponential CW Modulation. 6 Sampling and Pulse
Modulation. 7 Analog Communication Systems. 8 Probability and Random
Variables. 9 Random Signals and Noise. 10 Noise in Analog Modulation
Systems. 11 Baseband Digital Transmission. 12 Digitization Techniques for
Analog Messages and Computer Networks. 13 Channel Coding and Encryption.
14 Bandpass Digital Transmission. 15 Spread Spectrum Systems. 16 Information
and Detection Theory. Appendix: Circuit and System Noise
146
11/15/06 5:32:21 PM
COMMUNICATION ELECTRONICS
Third Edition
by Louis E Frenzel, Jr.,
2000 / 448 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-02-804837-6 / MHID: 0-02-804837-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118304-8 / MHID: 0-07-118304-3 [IE]
Digital Communications
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
by Amitabha Bhattacharya, Assistant Professor in the Department of
Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering at the Indian School of
Mines, Dhanbad.
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-059117-2 / MHID: 0-07-059117-2
CONTENTS
Introduction to Communication. Amplitude Modulation and Single-Side
Band. Modulation. Amplitude Modulation Circuits. Frequency Modulation.
Frequency Modulation Circuits. Radio Transmitters. Communications Receivers.
Multiplexing. Antennas, Transmission Lines, and Radio Wave Propogation.
Microwave Techniques. Introduction to Satellite Communications. Data
Communication. Fiber-Optic Telecommunica-tions. Television. The Telephone
Systems and its Applications.
ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Fourth Edition
by George Kennedy and Bernard Davis
1992 / 786 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112672-4 / MHID: 0-07-112672-4 [IE]
Digital Communication is the study of transmission of information
that is encoded digitally (as for storage and processing by
computers). This book is an attempt to provide the students
with a simplified, focussed, and comprehensive text on Digital
Communication. The book is ideal for an undergraduate course
on the topic. Salient Features : Provides a systems approach
to Digital Communication right at the foundational level
(block diagrammatic approach to the various systems-Linear,
Non-Linear, Causal etc.); Lucidly written text. (Definition and
presentation of Sampling theorem, Signal space representation
of signal space concepts); Covers digital modulation based on
signal-space concepts. This will facilitate the students to design
the modern digital communication systems on their own;
Every system is judged in terms of its bandwidth efficiency and
power efficiency. All the necessary theory to derive these two
crucial parameters of a communication system is derived from
first principles; The depth and span of coverage (E.g., Depth
of coverage of Sampling Theorem and Quantization), and the
mathematical rigor makes it suitable for a one semester course
on Digital Communication at the UG level.
CONTENTS
Part I: Preview. 1. Introduction. 2. Signals and Systems : Fundamental Concepts.
Part II: Baseband Systems. 3. Baseband Transmission Techniques: Formatting. 4.
Baseband Transmission Techniques: Coding. 5. Baseband Reception Techniques.
Part III: Bandpass Systems. 6. Bandpass Signal Transmission. 7. Bandpass Signal
Reception. Appendix A: Q and error functions. Appendix B: Continuous Phase
Modulation (CPM). Appendix C: Decision-Directed Carrier Recovery.
ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION
Sixth Edition
by Robert L Shrader
1993 / 864 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-057157-0 / MHID: 0-07-057157-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113665-5 / MHID: 0-07-113665-7 [IE]
DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS
Fourth Edition
by John Proakis, Northeastern University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-232111-1 / MHID: 0-07-232111-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118183-9 / MHID: 0-07-118183-0 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Probability and Stochastic Processes. 3 Source Coding. 4
Characterization of Communication Signals and Systems. 5 Optimum Receivers
for the Additive White Gaussian Noise Channel. 6 Carrier and Symbol
Synchronization. 7 Channel Capacity and Coding. 8 Block and Convolutional
Channel Codes. 9 Signal Design for Band-Limited Channels. 10 Communication
through Band-Limited Linear Filter Channels. 11 Adaptive Equalization. 12
Multichannel and Multicarrier Systems. 13 Spread Spectrum Signals for Data
Communications. 14 Digital Communication through Fading Multipath Channels.
15 Multiuser Communications. Appendix A The Levinson-Durbin Algorithm.
Appendix B Error Probability for Multichannel Binary Signals. Appendix C Error
Probabilities for Adaptive Reception of M-phase Signals. Appendix D Square-Root
Factorization. References and Bibliography. Index
147
11/15/06 5:32:22 PM
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF INTRODUCTION TO
DIGITAL SYSTEMS
by James Palmer, Rochester Institute of Technology; David Perlman,
Rochester Institute of Technology
1993 / 400 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-048439-9 / MHID: 0-07-048439-2
CONTENTS
1 Numbers and the Binary System/2 Design of Combinational Logic I/3 Design
of Combinational Logic II-Manipulation/4 Hardware and the Mixed-Logic
Convention/5 MSI and LSI Elements/6 Timing Diagrams/7 The Flip-Flop/8
Combinations of Flip-Flops/9 Application Specific Devices/10 Design of Simple
State Machines/11 Electronically Programmable Functions/Appendixes/A: Basic
Boolean Theorems and Identities/B: Standard Logic Symbols/C: Some Comments
on Digital Logic Simulation
Communications IV: Signals &
Systems
SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
1995 / 352 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-030641-7 / MHID: 0-07-030641-9
Communications IV: Advanced
CRYPTOGRAPHY
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-048297-5 / MHID: 0-07-048297-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123133-6 / MHID: 0-07-123133-1 [IE]
CONTENTS
LOCAL AREA NETWORKS WITH CD-ROM
Second Edition
by Gerd Keiser, PhotonicsComm Solutions, Inc.
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122650-9 / MHID: 0-07-122650-8
[IE with CD-ROM]
www.mhhe.com/engcs/electrical/keiser2
CONTENTS
1 Overview of LANs. 2 Network Architectures and Protocols. 3 Data
Communication Concepts. 4 LAN Access Techniques. 5 Ethernet. 6 TokenPassing LANs. 7 ATM LANs. 8 Wireless LANs. 9 Fibre Channel and SANSs. 10
Internetworking. 11 Network Management. 12 Network Security
OPTICAL FIBER COMMUNICATION
Principles and Systems
by A. Selvarajan, IISc, Bangalore, Subrat Kar, IIT, Delhi and T.
Srinivas, IISc, Bangalore
2002 / 368 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-044556-7 / MHID: 0-07-044556-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122896-1 / MHID: 0-07-122896-9 [IE]
CONTENTS
1. Optical communication - An Overview. 2. Light Propagation in Optical Fibers.
3. Fiber Optics Technology. 4. Optical Sources and Transmitter Circuits. 5. Optical
Detectors and Receivers. 6. Integrated Optics and Photonic Circuits. 7. Wavelength
Division Multiplexing. 8. Coherent Optical Communication. 9. Optical Amplifiers.
10. Photonic Switching. 11. Fiber Optic Communication System Design. 12. Voice
Transmission. 13. Video Transmission. 14. Data Communication and LAN. 15.
Broadband Networks. 16. Soliton Com-munication Systems. Appendix. Index
OPTICAL FIBER COMMUNICATIONS
Third Edition
by Gerd Keiser, GTE Government Systems Corporation
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-236076-9 / MHID: 0-07-236076-3
(with CD-ROM)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116468-9 / MHID: 0-07-116468-5
[IE with CD-ROM]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Overview of Optical Fiber Communications. Chapter 2: Optical
Fibers: Structures, Waveguiding, and Fabrication. Chapter 3: Signal Degradation
in Optical Fibers. Chapter 4: Optical Sources. Chapter 5: Power Launching and
Coupling. Chapter 6: Photodetectors. Chapter 7: Optical Receiver Operation.
Chapter 8: Digital Transmission Systems. Chapter 9: Analog Systems. Chapter
10: WDM Concepts and Components. Chapter 11: Optical Amplifiers. Chapter
12: Optical Networks. Chapter 13: Measurements. Appendix A: International
System of Units. Appendix B: Useful Mathematical Relations. Appendix C: Bessel
Functions. Appendix D: Decibels. Appendix E: Topics from Communication
Theory. Appendix F: Factors Contributing to Dispersionerview.
148
11/15/06 5:32:23 PM
MODERN COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS
Second Edition
by Jack R. Smith, University of Florida
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-059283-4 / MHID: 0-07-059283-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115586-1 / MHID: 0-07-115586-4 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Radio Communication Systems/2 Small-Signal Amplifiers/3
Network Noise and Intermodulation Distortion/4 Frequency-Selective Networks
and Transformers/5 High-Frequency Amplifiers and Automatic Gain Control/6
Hybrid and Transmission-Line Transformers/7 Oscillators/8 Phase-Locked Loops/9
Phase-Locked Loop Analysis/10 Frequency Synthesizers/11 Power Amplifiers/12
Modulators and Demodulators
Coding and Information Theory
CRYPTOGRAPHY
2002 / 288 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-048297-5 / MHID: 0-07-048297-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123133-6 / MHID: 0-07-123133-1 [IE]
CONTENTS
AN INTRODUCTION TO FIBER OPTICS SYSTEMS
Second Edition
by John Powers, Naval Postgraduate School
1997 / 340 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116679-9 / MHID: 0-07-116679-3 [IE]
Contents
Probability & Random Processes
1 Introduction/2 The Optical Fiber/3 Fiber Properties/4 Splicers, Connectors, and
Couplers/5. Opticasl Sources/6 Optical Receivers/7 Optical Link Design/8 Fiber
Optic Networks/9 Wavelength-Division Multiplexing.
PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONS OF OPTICAL
COMMUNICATIONS
by M. K.Liu, University of Arizona
1996 / 728 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114989-1 / MHID: 0-07-114989-9 [IE]
CONTENTS
Part I•Overview/1 Introduction to Optical Communications/2 From Pointto-Point Links to Networking/Part II•Basic Point-to-Point Communication
Blocks/3 Light Sources/4 Optical Fibers/5 Photo Detectors/6 Noise in Optical
Communications/7 Incoherent Detection/Part III•Networking/8 Time Domain
Multiple Access (SONET, FDDI, B-ISDN, etc.)/9 Time Domain Multiple Access/10
Subcarrier Multiplexing/11 Photonic Switching/Part IV•Signal Processing/12
Direct Modulation/13 External Modulation/14 DFB Modulation/15 Coherent
Detection/16 Line Coding and Timing Recovery/17 Optical Amplification/18
Solition Transmission
PROBABILITY, RANDOM VARIABLES AND
STOCHASTIC PROCESSES WITH ERRATA SHEET
Fourth Edition
by Athansious Papoulis and S Unnikrishna Pillai, both of Polytechnic
University
2002 / 864 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-281725-6 / MHID: 0-07-281725-9
(with Errata Sheet)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122661-5 / MHID: 0-07-122661-3
[IE] (with Errata Sheet)
www.mhhe.com/engcs/electrical/papoulis
CONTENTS
Part 1 Probability and Random Variables. 1 The Meaning of Probability. 2 The
Axioms of Probability. 3 Repeated Trials. 4 The Concept of a Random Variable.
5 Functions of One Random Variable. 6 Two Random Variables. 7 Sequences of
Random Variables. 8 Statistics. Part 2 Stochastic Processes. 9 General Concepts.
10 Random Walk and Other Applications. 11 Spectral Representation. 12 Spectral
Estimation. 13 Mean Square Estimation. 14 Entropy. 15 Markov Chains. 16 Markov
Processes and Queueing Theory
149
11/15/06 5:32:24 PM
PROBABILITY, RANDOM VARIABLES AND
RANDOM SIGNAL PRINCIPLES
Fourth Edition
by Peyton Peebles, University of Florida, Gainesville
2001 / 480 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-366007-3 / MHID: 0-07-366007-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118181-5 / MHID: 0-07-118181-4 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/peebles
CONTENTS
1 Probability. 2 The Random Variable. 3 Operations on one Random Variable—
Expectation. 4 Multiple Random Variables. 5 Operations of Multiple Random
Variables. 6 Random Processes-Temporal Characteristics. 7 Random ProcessesSpectral Characteristics. 8 Linear Systems with Random Inputs. 9 Optimum Linear
Systems. 10 Some Practical Applications of the Theory. Appendix A Review of the
Impulse Function. Appendix B Gaussian Distribution Function. Appendix C Useful
Mathematical Quantities. Appendix D Review of Fourier Transforms. Appendix E
Table of Useful Fourier Transforms. Appendix F Some Probability Densities and
Distributions. Appendix G Some Mathematical Topics of Interest.
Digital Logic Design
NEW
INTRODUCTION TO LOGIC AND COMPUTER
DESIGN WITH CD
by Alan B. Marcovitz, Florida Atlantic University-Boca Raton
2008 (January 2007) / Hardcover with disk
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331417-4 / MHID: 0-07-331417-X
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/marcovitz
Introduction to Logic and Computer Design by Alan Marcovitz
takes the successful formula realized in the author’s previous
books and makes it even better. With the inclusion of several
chapters on computer design, Marcovitz now offers everything
a fundamentals-oriented logic design course might include.
Further, this new book is supported by an ARIS site and a host
of new media supplements to make both the instructor’s and
the student’s job easier. As with Marcovitz’s previous books,
the clear presentation of concepts and well-paced writing style
make Introduction to Logic and Computer Design the ideal
companion to any first course in digital logic. Users rave about
the book’s extensive set of examples—well integrated into
the body of the text and included at the end of each chapter
in sections of solved problems— that give students multiple
opportunities to understand the topics being presented.
FEATURES
• Includes coverage of computer design.
• Marcovitz is accompanied by an ARIS website: www.mhhe.
com/marcovitz. The site features a test bank for instructors (over
a semester’s worth of tests keyed to material in the text) as well as
online quizzing for students. It also includes solutions, PowerPoint
slides of most figures and key material, instructor notes, parallel
examples so the instructor can do a different example in class from
the one offered in the book, algorithmic problems to give students
unlimited practice, links, and more.
• "Test Yourself" sections, designed to help students measure their
comprehension of key material, are included at the end of chapters.
CONTENTS
Introduction to Logic and Computer Design. 1 Introduction. 2 Design Process
for Combinational Systems. 3 The Karnaugh Map. 4 Decoders, Encoders,
Multiplexers. 5 Analysis of Sequential Systems. 6 Design of Sequential Circuits.
7 Larger Sequential Problems. 8 Computer Organization. 9 Computer Design
Fundamentals. 10 The Design of a CPU. 11 Beyond the Central Processing
Unit
FUNDAMENTALS OF DIGITAL LOGIC WITH VHDL
DESIGN
Second Edition
by Stephen Brown and Zvonko Vranesic, University of Toronto
2005 / pages / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-249938-4 / MHID: 0-07-249938-9
(with CD-ROM)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124482-4 / MHID: 0-07-124482-4
[IE with CD]
This website contains: PowerPoint Slides, Solutions Manual, and
PageOut (Browse http://www.highered.mcgraw-hill.com/TBD)
Fundamentals of Digital Logic With VHDL Design teaches the
basic design techniques for logic circuits. It emphasizes the
synthesis of circuits and explains how circuits are implemented
in real chips. Fundamental concepts are illustrated by using
small examples, which are easy to understand. Then, a modular
approach is used to show how larger circuits are designed.
VHDL is used to demonstrate how the basic building blocks
and larger systems are defined in a hardware description
language, producing designs that can be implemented with
modern CAD tools. The book emphasizes the concepts that
should be covered in an introductory course on logic design,
focusing on:
• Logic functions, gates, and rules of Boolean algebra •
Circuit synthesis and optimization techniques • Number
representation and arithmetic circuits • Combinational-circuit
building blocks, such as multiplexers, decoders, encoders, and
code converters • Sequential-circuit building blocks, such as
flip-flops, registers, and counters • Design of synchronous
sequential circuits •
Use of the basic building blocks
in designing larger systems • It also includes chapters that deal
with important, but more advanced topics:
• Design of asynchronous sequential circuits
• Testing of logic circuits
For students who have had no exposure to basic electronics, but
are interested in learning a few key concepts, there is a chapter
that presents the most basic aspects of electronic implementation
of digital circuits. Major changes in the second edition of the book
include:
• new examples to clarify the presentation of fundamental concepts
• over 50 new examples of solved problems provided at the end of
chapters
• NAND and NOR gates now introduced in Chapter 2
• more complete discussion of techniques for minimization of logic
functions in Chapter 4 (including the tabular method)
• a new chapter explaining the CAD flow for synthesis of logic
circuits
• Altera’s Quartus II CAD software provided on a CD-ROM
• three appendices that give tutorials on the use of Quartus II
software
150
11/15/06 5:32:24 PM
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The book emphasizes CAD through the use of Altera’s Quartus
II CAD software, a state of the art digital circuit design package.
This software provides automatic mapping of designs written in
VHDL into Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs) and Complex
Programmable Logic Devices (CPLDs). The user will be able to enter
a design into the CAD system, compile the design into a selected
device, simulate the functionality and timing of the resulting circuit,
and implement the designs in actual devices (using the school’s
laboratory facilities).
• A chapter is included that illustrates the most basic aspects of
electronic implementation of digital circuits for students who have
had no exposure to basic electronics.
• New examples have been added to the second edition to help
clarify the presentation of fundamental concepts.
• Over 50 new examples of solved problems appear at the end of
chapters in the second edition.
• The second edition features a new chapter explaining CAD flow
for synthesis of logic circuits.
• Three new appendices give tutorials on the use of Quartus II
software.
FEATURES
• The book teaches the basic design techniques for logic circuits,
emphasizing the synthesis of circuits and explaining how circuits are
implemented in real chips.
• Small, easy-to-understand examples illustrate fundamental
concepts.
• A modular approach is used to show how larger circuits are
designed.
• VHDL is used to demonstrate how the basic building blocks
and larger systems are defined in a hardware description language,
producing designs that can be implemented with modern CAD tools.
CONTENTS
and Arithmetic Circuits. 6 Combinational-Circuit Building Blocks. 7 Flip-Flops,
Registers, Counters, and a Simple Processor. 8 Synchronous Sequential Circuits.
9 Asynchronous Sequential Circuits. 10 Digital System Design. 11 Testing of
Logic Circuits. 12 Computer Aided Design Tools. Appendix A VHDL Reference.
Appendix B Tutorial 1 - Using Quartus II CAD Software. Appendix C Tutorial
2 - Implementing Circuits in Altera Devices. Appendix D Tutorial 3 - Physical
Implementations in a PLD. Appendix D Commercial Devices
INTRODUCTION TO LOGIC DESIGN WITH CD
ROM
Second Edition
by Alan B Marcovitz, Florida Atlantic University—
Boca Raton
2005
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-295176-9 / MHID: 0-07-295176-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124249-3 / MHID: 0-07-124249-X [IE - 2 Color
Text]
involve improvements in organization and topic coverage.
The text integrates laboratory experiences, both hardware and
computer simulation, while not making them mandatory for
following the main flow of the chapters. Design is emphasized
throughout, and switching algebra is developed as a tool for
analyzing and implementing digital systems. The presentation
includes excellent coverage of minimization of combinational
circuits, including multiple output ones, using the Karnaugh
map and iterated consensus. There are a number of examples
of the design of larger systems, both combinational and
sequential, using medium scale integrated circuits and
programmable logic devices.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• A separate chapter on Iterated Consensus and Quine-McCluskey
has been added for the second edition.
• The second edition features two chapters on sequential systems.
The first chapter covers analysis of sequential systems and the second
covers design. Complete coverage of the analysis and design of
synchronous sequential systems adds to the comprehensive nature of
the text.
• “Test Yourself” sections, designed to help students measure their
comprehension of key material, have been added to the end of
chapters for the second edition.
FEATURES
• The text integrates practical circuits with theory by presenting
two types of laboratory experiments. Traditional hands-on hardware
experiments as well as simulation laboratory exercises using popular
software packages are tied closely to the text material to allow
students to implement the concepts they are learning.
• Use of the Karnaugh Map helps students understand the principles
of switching algebra.
• A thorough discussion of the minimization of switching functions
using Karnaugh maps, including 6-variable maps and multiple output
problems, gives students something to sink their teeth into and
doesn’t leave them wondering about the unusual or boundary case.
• Coupling of gate implementation with the algebra helps extend
the students’ range of understanding.
• Color is used as a pedagogical aid.
• The derivation of state tables from word problems further
emphasizes the practical implementation of the material being
presented.
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Switching Algebra and Logic Circuits. 3 The Karnaugh Map. 4
Function Minimization Algorithms. 5 Solving Larger CombinationalProblems. 6
Analysis of Sequential Systems. 7 Design of Sequential Systems. 8 Solving Larger
Sequential. 9 Simplification of Sequential Systems. Appendix A: Laboratory
Experiments. Appendix B: Answers to Selected Exercises. Appendix C: Answers
to Chapter Tests
www.mhhe.com/marcovitz — A robust web site complements the text
and assists the instructor by providing solutions, Powerpoint slides of
most figures and key material, sets of examinations from the course, and
alternate parallel examples, so that the instructor can do a different
example in class from the one given in the book. Browse http://www.
highered.mcgraw-hill.com
Introduction to Logic Design by Alan Marcovitz is intended
for the first course in logic design, taken by computer science,
computer engineering, and electrical engineering students.
As with the first edition, the new edition is distinguised by
a clear presentation of fundamentals and an exceptional
collection of examples, solved problems, and exercises.
Changes found in the new edition reflect reviewer feedback
from both users and nonusers of the first edition and primarily
151
11/15/06 5:32:25 PM
FUNDAMENTALS OF DIGITAL LOGIC WITH
VERILOG DESIGN WITH CD-ROM
by Stephen Brown, University of Toronto and Zvonko Vranesic,
University of Toronto, Canada
2003 / 844 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283878-7 / MHID: 0-07-283878-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124276-9 / MHID: 0-07-124276-7 [IE]
The website will contain: solutions manual for instructors only, web
links, and PowerPoint slides. (Browse http://highered.mcgraw-hill.
com/sites/0072823151)
CONTENTS
and Arithmetic Circuits. 6 Combinational Circuit Building Blocks. 7 Flip-Flops,
Registers, and Counters. 8 Synchronous Sequential Circuits. 9 Asynchronous
Sequential Circuits. 10 Digital System Design. 11 Testing of Logic Circuits.
A Verilog Reference. B Tutorial 1. C Tutorial 2. D Tutorial 3. E Commercial
Devices
DIGITAL PRINCIPLES AND DESIGN WITH CD-ROM
by Donald Givone, SUNY — Buffalo
2003 / 832 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-255132-7 / MHID: 0-07-255132-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123005-6 / MHID: 0-07-123005-X [IE]
www.mhhe.com/givone
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Number Systems, Arithmetic, and Codes. 3 Boolean Algebra
and Combinational Networks. 4 Simplification of Boolean Expressions. 5 Logic
Design with MSI Components and Programmable Logic Devices. 6 Flip-Flops and
Simple Flip-Flop Applications. 7 Synchronous Sequential Networks. 8 Algorithmic
State Machines. 9 Asnynchronous Sequential Networks. Appendix A: Digital
Circuits. Appendix B: TBD
Neural Networks/Fuzzy Logic
NEURAL NETWORKS: A CLASSROOM APPROACH
by Satish Kumar, Reader in Computer Science and Applications,
Dayalbagh Educational Institute, Agra
2004 / 768 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-048292-0 / MHID: 0-07-048292-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124672-9 / MHID: 0-07-124672-X [IE]
Neural Networks is an integral component of the ubiquitous soft
computing paradigm. An in-depth understanding of this field
requires some background of the principles of neuroscience,
mathematics and computer programming. Neural Networks: A
Classroom Approach, achieves a balanced blend of these areas
to weave an appropriate fabric for the exposition of the diversity
of neural network models. This book is unique, in the sense
that it stresses on an intuitive and geometric understanding of
the subject and on the heuristic explanation of the theoretical
results. This book is intended for a first course on Neural
Networks and can also serve as a supporting text for courses
on soft computing, artificial intelligence, machine learning
and neuron modeling.
CONTENTS
I. Traces of History and A Neuroscience Briefer: 1 Brain Style Computing: Origins
and Issues. 2 Lessons from Neuroscience. II. Feedforward Neural Networks and
Supervised Learning: 3 Artificial Neurons, Neural Networks and Architectures
4 Geometry of Binary Threshold Neurons and Their Networks. 5 Supervised
Learning I: Perceptrons and LMS. 6 Supervised Learning II: Backpropagation
and Beyond. 7 Neural Network: A Statistical Pattern Recognition Perspective. 8
Focussing on Generalization: Support Vector Machines and Radial Basis Function
Networks. III. Recurrent Neurodynamical Systems: 9 Dynamical Systems Review.
10 Attractor Neural Networks. 11 Adaptive Resonance Theory. 12 Towards the Self
Organizing Feature Map. IV. Contemporary Topics: 13 Pulsed Neuron Models:
The New Generation. 14 Fuzzy Sets, Fuzzy Systems and Applications. 15 Neural
Networks and the Soft Computing Paradigm
MODERN DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
Third Edition
by R P Jain, Director, Institute of Engineering and Technology,
Sonepat
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-049492-3 / MHID: 0-07-049492-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123670-6 / MHID: 0-07-123670-8 [IE]
http://www.tatamcgrawhill.com/digital_solutions/rpjain
PRINCIPLES OF NEUROCOMPUTING FOR SCIENCE
AND ENGINEERING
by Fredric M Ham, Florida Institute of Technolog, Melbourne and
Ivica Kostanic, Agilent Technologies, Inc.
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-025966-9 / MHID: 0-07-025966-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118161-7 / MHID: 0-07-118161-X [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/ham
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Neurocomputing. 2 Fundamental Neurocomputing Concepts.
3 Mapping Networks. 4 Self-Organizing Networks. 5 Recurrent Networks and
Temporal Feedforward Networks. 6 Neural Networks for Optimization Problems.
7 Solving Matrix Algebra Problems with Neural Networks. 8 Solution of Linear
Algebraic Equations Using Neural Networks. 9 Statistical Methods Using Neural
Networks. 10 Identification, Control, and Estimation Using Neural Networks.
Appendix Mathematical Foundation for Neurocomputing
1991 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112554-3 / MHID: 0-07-112554-X [IE]
152
11/15/06 5:32:26 PM
Robotics/Intelligent Systems
MACHINE VISION
by Ramesh C. Jain, University of California-San Diego; Rangacher
Kasturi, Penn State University; Brian G. Schunck, University of
Michigan
1995 / 549 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113407-1 / MHID: 0-07-113407-7 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction/2 Binary Image Processing/3 Regions/4 Image Filtering/5 Edge
Detection/6 Contours/7 Texture/8 Optics/9 Shading/10 Color/11 Depth/12
Calibration/13 Surfaces/14 Volumetric Repre-sentations/15 Motion/16 Object
Recognition Computer Engineering: Advanced
Computer Architecture/
Microprocessors
systems that incorporate advanced, high-performance processors.
Basic components, such as memory systems, input and output, and
virtual memory, and the ways in which they are interconnected are
described in relative detail to enable a better understanding of the
interaction between high-performance processors and the peripheral
devices they are connected to.
• Chapter 5 on superscalar techniques is the heart of the book—this
chapter presents issues related to superscalar processor organization
first, followed by presentation of specific techniques for enhancing
instruction flow, register data flow and memory data flow.
• Two case study chapters have been included to give the reader
real-life examples of the concepts being studied in previous chapters.
One of the case study chapters is written by the lead architects of the
Intel P6 microarchitecture. This historic micro-architecture provided
the foundation for numerous highly successful microprocessor
designs.
• As the text progresses, it provides both a historical perspective
on superscalar machines, as well as survey of existing machines. In
addition, the book highlights emerging techniques and technologies
in the last couple of chapters.
• New for the first edition: Chapter 9, Advanced Instruction Flow
Techniques. This chapter focuses on the problem of predicting
whether a conditional branch is taken or not-taken. There is brief
discussion of branch target prediction, and other issues related to
effective instruction delivery.
• Homework problems are included at the end of each chapter to
provide reinforcement of the concepts presented.
• An expanded book website includes a downloadable version
of the solutions manual, password-protected for instructors. It also
contains PowerPoint slides, sample homework assignments with
solutions and sample exams with answers.
CONTENTS
MODERN PROCESSOR DESIGN: FUNDAMENTALS
OF SUPERSCALAR PROCESSORS
by John P Shen, Carnegie Mellon University and Mikko Lipasti,
University of Wisconsin - Madison
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-057064-1 / MHID: 0-07-057064-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124487-9 / MHID: 0-07-124487-5 [IE]
Website includes a downloadable version of the solutions manual,
password-protected for instructors. There is also presentation material
for instructor use. (Browse http://www.mhhe.com/shen)
Modern Processor Design: Fundamentals of Superscalar
Processors is an exciting new first edition from John Shen
of Carnegie Mellon University & Intel and Mikko Lipasti of
the University of Wisconsin—Madison. This book brings
together the numerous microarchitectural techniques for
harvesting more instruction-level parallelism (ILP) to achieve
better processor performance that have been proposed and
implemented in real machines. Other advanced techniques
from recent research efforts that extend beyond ILP to exploit
thread-level parallelism (TLP) are also compiled in this book.
All of these techniques, as well as the foundational principles
behind them, are organized and presented within a clear
framework that allows for ease of comprehension. This text is
intended for an advanced computer architecture course or a
course in superscalar processor design. It is written at a level
appropriate for senior or first year graduate level students, and
can be used by professionals as well.
FEATURES
• The book clearly conveys key concepts and fundamental
principles by giving the necessary details and not just a mass of
information.
• The first several chapters cover key fundamental topics that lay
the foundation for the more modern topics. These fundamentals
include: the art of processor design, the instruction set architecture
as the specification of the processor, and microarchitecture as
the implementation of the processor; pipelining; and superscalar
organization.
• New for the First Edition: Chapter 3 on Memory and I/O
Systems. This chapter examines the larger context of computer
1 Processor Design. 2 Pipelined Processors. 3 Memory and I/O Systems. 4
Superscalar Organization. 5 Superscalar Techniques. 6 The PowerPC 620. 7
Intel’s P6 Microarchitecture. 8 Survey of Superscalar Processors. 9 Advanced
Instruction Flow Techniques. 10 Advanced Register Data Flow Techniques. 11
Executing Multiple Threads.
ARCHITECTURE
by Nick Carter, University of Illinois - Champaign
2002 / 304 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-136207-8 / MHID: 0-07-136207-X
COMPUTER ORGANIZATION
Fifth Edition
by V. Carl Hamacher, Queen’s University; Zvonko Vranesic,
University of Toronto; Safwat Zaky, University of Toronto
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-232086-2 / MHID: 0-07-232086-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122624-0 / MHID: 0-07-122624-9 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/hamacher
CONTENTS
1 Basic Structure of Computers. 2 Machine Instructions and Programs. 3 ARM,
Motorola, and Intel Instruction Sets. 4 Input/Output Organization. 5 The Memory
System. 6 Arithmetic. 7 Basic Processing Unit. 8 Pipelining. 9 Embedded Systems.
10 Computer Peripherals. 11 Processor Families. 12 Large Computer Systems.
Appendix A Logic Circuits. Appendix B ARM Instruction Set. Appendix C Motorola
68000Instruction Set. Appendix D Intel IA-32 Instruction Set. Appendix E Character
Codes and Number Conversion
153
11/15/06 5:32:26 PM
PRINCIPLES OF NEUROCOMPUTING FOR SCIENCE
AND ENGINEERING
by Fredric M Ham, Florida Institute of Technolog, Melbourne and
Ivica Kostanic, Agilent Technologies, Inc.
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-025966-9 / MHID: 0-07-025966-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118161-7 / MHID: 0-07-118161-X [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/ham
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Neurocomputing. 2 Fundamental Neurocomputing Concepts.
3 Mapping Networks. 4 Self-Organizing Networks. 5 Recurrent Networks and
Temporal Feedforward Networks. 6 Neural Networks for Optimization Problems.
7 Solving Matrix Algebra Problems with Neural Networks. 8 Solution of Linear
Algebraic Equations Using Neural Networks. 9 Statistical Methods Using Neural
Networks. 10 Identification, Control, and Estimation Using Neural Networks.
Appendix Mathematical Foundation for Neurocomputing
MICROPROCESSORS PRINCIPLES AND
APPLICATIONS
Second Edition
by Charles M Gilmore
1995 / 544 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113965-6 / MHID: 0-07-113965-6 [IE]
ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE
PARALLELISM, SCALABILITY, PROGRAMMABILITY
by Kai Hwang, University of Southern California
1993 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124713-9 / MHID: 0-07-124713-0 [IE]
ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS & PERIPHERALS:
ARCHITECTURE, PROGRAMMING AND
INTERFACING
by A K Ray and K M Bhurchandi
2000 / 684 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-463841-5 / MHID: 0-07-463841-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120169-8 / MHID: 0-07-120169-6 [IE]
CONTENTS
Part One•Theory of Parallelism/1 Parallel Computer Models/2 Pro gram
and Network Prop er ties/3 Principles of Per for mance and Scalability/Part
Two•Hardware Technologies/4 Processors and Memory Hierarchy/5 Bus/Cache
and Shared-Memory/6 Pipelining and Superscalar Techniques/Part Three•Parallel
and Scalable Architectures/7 Multiprocessors and Multi-computers/8 Multivector
and SIMD Supercomputers/9 Scalable, Multithreaded, and Dataflow Architectures/
Part Four•Software for Paralle Programming/10 Parallel Models, Languages and
Compilers/11 Development of Parallel Programs/12 Unix Extensions for Parallel
Computers/Bibliography
CONTENTS
1 The Processors 8086/8088, Architectures, Pin Diagrams and Timing Diagrams.
2 8086/8088 Instruction Set and Assembler Directives. 3 The Art of Assembly
Language Programming with 8086/8088. 4 Stack, Subroutines, Interrupt Structure,
Macros, Timing Delays and Related Programming. 5 Basic Peripherals and
Their Interfacing with 8086/8088. 6 Special Purpose Programmable Peripheral
Devices and Their Interfacing. 7 DMA, Floppy Disk and Crt Controllers. 8
Multimicroprocessor Systems. 9 80286-80287 A Microprocessor with Memory
Management and Protection. 10 The 32-BIT Processors 80386-80387 and 80486.
11 Recent Advances in Microprocessor Architecture: A Journey From Pentium
Onwards. 12 Introduction to Systems Software and Operating Systems. 13
Microprocessor Based Aluminium Smelter Control. 14 A Microprocessor Based
Pattern Scanner. 15 Design of An Electronics Weighing Bridge. 16 An Introduction
to Microcontrollers 8051 and 80196. Summary.
COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND ORGANIZATION
Third Edition
by John P. Hayes, University of Michigan
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115997-5 / MHID: 0-07-115997-5 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Computation and Computers/2 Design Methodology/3 Processor Design/4
Datapath Design/5 Control Design/6 Memory Organization/7 System
Organization
Computer Engineering: Advanced
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: ARCHITECTURE AND
PROGRAMMING
by Raj Kamal, Head, Institute of Computer Science & Electronics ,
Devi Ahilya University, Khandwa Road Campus
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-049470-1 / MHID: 0-07-049470-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123735-2 / MHID: 0-07-123735-6 [IE]
CONTENTS
1. Introduction To Embedded Systems. 2. Processor And Memory Organization.
3. Devices And Buses For Devices Network. 4. Device Drivers And Interrupts
Servicing Mechanism. 5. Programming Concepts And Embedded Programming
In C And C++. 6. Program Modelling Concepts In Single And Multiprocessor
Systems Software-Development Process. 7. Software Engineering Practices In
Embedded Software Development Process. 8. Inter Process Communication
And Synchronization Of Processes, Task And Threads. 9. Real Time Operating
Systems. 10. Real Time Operating System Programming Tools: Micro C/OS-II and
VxWorks. 11. Case Studies Of Programming With RTOS. 12. Hardware-Software
Co-Design in an Embedded System. Appendices. Index.
154
11/15/06 5:32:27 PM
SYNTHESIS AND OPTIMIZATION OF DIGITAL
CIRCUITS
by Giovanni De Micheli, Stanford University
1994 / 576 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113271-8 / MHID: 0-07-113271-6 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction. Chapter 2: Background. Chapter 3: Hardware Modeling.
Chapter 4: Architectural Synthesis. Chapter 5: Scheduling Algorithms. Chapter
6: Resource Sharing and Binding. Chapter 7: Two-Level Combinational Logic
Optimization. Chapter 8: Multiple-Level Combinational Logic Optimization.
Chapter 9: Sequential Logic Optimization. Chapter 10: Cell-library Binding.
Chapter 11: State-of-the-art and Future Trends
Telecommunications
SYSTEM ON PACKAGE
by Rao Tummala
2007 (March 2007) / Hardcover / 512 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145906-8 / MHID: 0-07-145906-5
Professional Book
System-on-Package (SOP) is an emerging microelectronic
technology that places an entire system on a single chip-size
package. Where “systems” used to be bulky boxes housing
hundreds of components, SOP saves interconnection time
and heat generation by keep a full system with computing,
communications, and consumer functions all in a single chip.
Written by the Georgia Tech developers of the technology,
this book explains the basic parameters, design functions,
and manufacturing issues, showing electronic designers how
this radical new packaging technology can be used to solve
pressing electronics design challenges.
WIRELESS AND CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS
Third Edition
by William C Y Lee, Chairman of Linkair, Inc.
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-143686-1 / MHID: 0-07-143686-3
Professional Book
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Complete on the ground engineering coverage of new systems:
3G, 4G, PHS
Engineering parameters for portable systems: WiFi, Bluetooth
Wireless Local Loop
WLAN specs and operation
Specifications for all major wireless systems, including cdmaOne
The field’s bestselling engineering reference completely updated
for a new era
•
•
•
•
•
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction to Wireless Communications. Chapter 2 Introduction to
Cellular Systems. Chapter 3 Specification of Analog Cellular Systems. Chapter 4
Specification of Digital Cellular Systems. Chapter 5 Specification of Newly Mobile
Systems. Chapter 6 Specification of WLL and WLAN Systems. Chapter 7 Cell
Coverage and Antennas. Chapter 8 Cochannel Interferences. Chapter 9 Types of
Non-Cochannel Interference. Chapter 10 Frequency Management and Channel
Assignment. Chapter 11 Handoffs and Dropped calls. Chapter 12 Operational
Technology and Techniques. Chapter 13 Switching and Traffic. Chapter 14 Data
Links and Microwaves. Chapter 15 System Evaluations. Chapter 16 Intelligent
Cell Concept. Chapter 17 Intelligent and All IP Network. Chapter 18 Mobile
Communications. Related Topics
DVD DEMYSTIFIED
Third Edition
by Jim Taylor
2006 / 700 pages / Softcover /DVD
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-142396-0 / MHID: 0-07-142396-6
Professional Book
CONTENTS
Introduction to DVD. The World Before DVD. DVD Technology Primer. DVD
Overview. Disc and Data Details. Application Details: DVD-Video and DVDAudio. What’s Wrong with DVD. DVD Comparisons to Other Formats. DVD at
Home. DVD in Business & Education. DVD on Computers. Essentials of DVD
Production. The Future of DVD. Appendix A: Quick Reference Data. Appendix
B: Standards Related to DVD. Appendix C: Reference and Information Sources.
Glossary. What’s on the DVD
CARRIER GRADE VOICE OVER IP
Second Edition
by Daniel Collins
2003 / 522 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-140634-5 / MHID: 0-07-140634-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123155-8 / MHID: 0-07-123155-2 [IE]
Professional Book
CONTENTS
Preface. Acknowledgments. Chapter 1: Wireless Basics. Chapter 2: Developing
GUIs: Software Control Basics. Chapter 3: Electromechanical Controls Interfacing.
Chapter 4: Electronic Switching Ciruits. Chapter 5: Sensor-Interfacing Basics.
Chapter 6: Using Procedural Languages for Mindstorms Robot Control. Chapter
7: Client-Server Controller for Minstrom Robots. Chapter 8: Simulator Controls
for Mindstroms Robots. Chapter 9: Remote-Control Techniques. Chapter 10:
Virtual Prototyping and Control Using ActiveX Controls. Chapter 11: Virtual Test
Box (VTB) Development: Math-Based Controllers for Mindstorm Robots. Chapter
12: VBA Prototypes: Developing Mindstorms Tools with Advanced Programming
Techniques. Index.
WIRELESS SECURITY
MODELS, THREATS, AND SOLUTIONS
by Randall Nichols, President, COMSEC Solutions and Panos Lekkas
2002 / 657 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-138038-6 / MHID: 0-07-138038-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120707-2 / MHID: 0-07-120707-4 [IE]
(Inter national Edition is not for sale in Japan.)
Professional Book
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Why is Wireless Different? Chapter 2 Wireless Information Warfare.
Chapter 3 Telephone System Vulnerabilities. Chapter 4 Satellite Communications.
Chapter 5 Cryptographic Security. Chapter 6 Speech Cryptology. Chapter 7 The
Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN). Chapter 8 Wireless Application Protocol
(WAP). Chapter 9 Wireless Transport Layer Security (WTLS). Chapter 10 Bluetooth.
Chapter 11 Voice Over Internet Protocol. Chapter 12 Hardware Perspectives
for End-to-End Security (E2E) in Wireless Applications. Chapter 13 Optimizing
Wireless Security with FPGAs and ASICs. Bibliography. Index
155
11/15/06 5:32:28 PM
COMPUTER TELEPHONY DEMYSTIFIED
by Michael Bayer
2001 / 704 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118915-6 / MHID: 0-07-118915-7 [IE with CDROM]
Part Four: Solutions and Applications. Chapter 43: The Optical Hierarchy of
Motivation. Chapter 44: Players in the Network Game. Chapter 45: Reinventing
the Network. Chapter 46: Toward a New Network Paradigm. Chapter 47: Why
the Evolution? Chapter 48: The Evolving IP Protocol Model. Chapter 49: IP’s
Promise. Chapter 50: Protocol Assemblies: Putting it Together. Chapter 51: One
More time: Putting it All Together. Chapter 52: The Future.
Professional Book
CONTENTS
What is Computer Telephony. CT Solutions and Benefits. Telephony Concepts.
Devices. Call Processing: Features and Services. CTI Concepts. Switching Fabric.
Media Services Concepts. CT Administration. Telephony CPE and Telephone
Company Services. System Configurations. CT Software Components. CT Solutions.
CD Info. Appendices
VIDEO COMPRESSION DEMYSTIFIED
by Peter Symes
2001 / 346 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118964-4 / MHID: 0-07-118964-5
[IE with CD-ROM]
Professional Book
LEE’S ESSENTIALS OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS
by William C Y Lee
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116536-5 / MHID: 0-07-116536-3 [IE]
CONTENTS
Introduction. What is Compression?. An Introduction to Images. Entropy Coding.
Predictive Coding. Transforms. Quantization. JPEG. Motion Compression. MPEG1. MPEG-2. MPEG-4. MPEG-7 and MPEG-21. Pro-MPEG and MPEG Operating
Ranges. DV Compression. Wavelets. JPEG2000. Audio Compression. Streaming
Media. Closing Thoughts.
Professional Book
CONTENTS
How Telephones, Wireline, and Wireless Were Born. Why Mobile Radio Systems
are Difficult to Develop. How to Evaluate a Spectrum - An Efficient System.
Important Factors of Choosing a New Digital System. Learn From the Past.
Application of CDMA. What Is Our Future? Internet and Wireless Future.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS ENGINEERING
Second Edition
by William C.Y. Lee
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115766-7 / MHID: 0-07-115766-2 [IE]
Professional Book
OPTICAL NETWORKING CRASH COURSE
by Steven Shepard
2001 / 269 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-120292-3 / MHID: 0-07-120292-7 [IE]
Professional Book
CONTENTS
Part One: The Optical Networking Market-place. Chapter 1: Toward a New
Network Model. Chapter 2: A Corollary: The Data Network. Chapter 3: The Local
Service Providers’ Response. Chapter 4: Service Regions of the Optical Network.
Chapter 5: The Optical Networking Applications Set. Chapter 6: A Brief History
of the Network. Chapter 7: The Traditional Digital Hierarchy. Chapter 8: The
Birth of Optical Networking: Sonet and SDH. Chapter 9: Switching and Routing.
Chapter 10: The Service Provider’s World: Back to Switching and Routing. Chapter
11: Ring Architectures in the Optical Domain. Chapter 12: Amplification and
Regeneration. Part Two: From Copper to Glass. Chapter 13: Overview of Optical
Technology. Chapter 14: Total Internal Reflection. Chapter 15: Later Developments
in Optical Networking. Chapter 16: Fundamentals of Optical Networking. Chapter
17: Optical Sources. Chapter 18: Optical Fiber. Chapter 19: Optical Fiber.
Chapter 20: Putting It All Together. Chapter 21: Fiber Nonlinearities. Chapter 22:
Intermodulation Effects. Chapter 23: Scattering Problems. Chapter 24: An Aside:
Optical Amplification. Chapter 25: Pulling it all Together. Chapter 26: Optical
Receivers. Chapter 27: Photodetector Types. Chapter 28: Optical Fiber. Chapter
29: Multimode Fiber. Chapter 30: Single-Mode Fiber. Chapter 31: Why Do We
Care? Part Three: Corollary Technologies. Chapter 32: Introduction. Chapter 33:
Optical Cable Assemblies. Chapter 34: Fiber Cable Architectures. Chapter 35: The
Special Case of Submarine Cables. Chapter 36: Fiber Installation Options. Chapter
37: Commercial Fiber Products. Chapter 38: An Aside: Freespace Optics. Chapter
39: Summary. Chapter 40: Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM).
Chapter 41: Optical Switching and Routing. Chapter 42: Network Management.
156
11/15/06 5:32:29 PM
LABVIEW GRAPHICAL PROGRAMMING
Fourth Edition
by Gary W Johnson, and Richard Jennings
2007 (July 2006) / 752 pages / Softcover
ISBN13: 978-0-07-145146-8 / MHID: 0-07-145146-3
Professional Book
LabVIEW is an award-winning programming language that
allows engineers to create “virtual” instruments on their
desktop. This new edition details the powerful features of the
most recent version of LabVIEW.Written in a highly accessible
and readable style, LabVIEW Graphical Programming illustrates
basic LabVIEW programming techniques, building up to
advanced programming concepts. The CD-ROM contains a
wealth of virtual instruments and software tools.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Completely updated for LabVIEW 8 (publishing June 2005)
Leading book in the field since 1994
New DAQ Drivers
New NI DAQ Cards--makes, models and speeds
Embedding LabVIEW for LINUX
LabVIEW FPGA
CD-ROM of Virtual Instruments and Tools
CONTENTS
Roots. Getting Started. Controlling Program Flow. LabVIEW Data Types.
Timing. Synchronization. Files. Gary’s Approach to Building an Application.
Documentation. Instrument Driver Basics. Instrument Driver Development
Techniques. Inputs and Outputs. Using the DAQ Library. Analog DAQ. Digital
DAQ. Writing a Data Acquisition Program. ?Process Control Applications. Physics
Applications. Data Visualization, Imaging and Sound. LabVIEW RT. LabVIEW
FPGA.Embedded LabVIEW.
SIGNALS & SYSTEMS DEMYSTIFIED
by David McMahon
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-147578-5 / MHID: 0-07-147578-8
Professional Book
The fast and easy way to learn signals and systems. This easy-touse guide will help students taking this difficult subject, as well
as professionals who want to brush up on their knowledge.
You will get straightforward information on signal processing,
linear systems, and discrete systems. Advanced topics covered
include Fourier analysis, filtering, spectral density, AM and FM
systems, and the z-Transform.
FEATURES
• An easy to understand overview of signal processing in the time
domain, where students see detailed examples that show how to
calculate energy, power and convolution
• A time-saving guide to linear time-invariant systems.
• An indispensable and eye-opening chapter on Fourier analysis
unlocks the secrets of signal analysis in the frequency domain.
• Instructive chapters on modulation and the z-transform give
students the tools they need to master communications.
• Other topics covered include filtering, spectral density and
correlation, and amplitude, frequency and phase modulation.
• Provides the fundamental tools necessary to understand radar, AM
and FM signal processing, image processing, and signal processing
associated with wireless communications, among other areas.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: An Introduction to Signals Continuous and Discrete Signals; Energy and
Power in Signals; Periodic Signals Computing Energy: Examples Even and Odd
functions. Chapter 2: Linear Time-Invariant Systems Memoryless systems; Causal
and non-causal systems; Linear Systems; Time-Invariance; Stability; Unit Impulse
and Unit Step Functions; Impulse Response Function Convolution. Chapter 3:
Discrete Time Signals; Energy and power in discrete signals; The Unit Impulse
and Unit Step sequences; Properties of Discrete Sequences; Convolution; Discrete
Linear Time-Invariant Systems. Chapter 4: Fourier Analysis; Fourier Series; Fourier
Transform; Inverse Fourier Transform; Properties of Fourier Transform; Spectrum
Plots. Chapter 5: Filtering; What is a filter?; Time and frequency response; Ideal
low pass filters; Band pass transmission; Distortion; Phase delay and group delay.
Chapter 6: Energy Spectral Density and Correlation; The correlation function;
Autocorrelation; Energy spectral density; Power spectral density. Chapter 7:
The Discrete Fourier Transform Definition; Examples; The Inverse Discrete
Fourier Transform. Chapter 8: Amplitude Modulation; Amplitude Modulation;
Double side-band modulation; Suppressed-Carrier Modulation; Single-side band
modulation; Vestigal sideband modulation. Chapter 9: Phase and Frequency
Modulation; Frequency modulation; Phase-Locked loop; FM Waves; Chapter 10:
The z-Transform; Common z-transforms; Properties of the z-transform; Inverse
z-transform; The System Function.
by Andreas Antoniou, University of Victoria, Canada
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145424-7 / MHID: 0-07-145424-1
Professional Book
Browse http://www.d-filter.ece.uvic.ca/
An up-to-the-minute textbook for junior/senior level signal
processing courses and senior/graduate level digital filter
design courses, this text is supported by a DSP software
package known as D-Filter which would enable students to
interactively learn the fundamentals of DSP and digital-filter
design. The book includes a free license to D-Filter which will
enable the owner of the book to download and install the most
recent version of the software as well as future updates.
FEATURES
• Focus on DSP applications
• Includes advanced digital filter design
• All examples and problems can be worked in MATLAB or DSP
Lab
• DSP Lab allows students to work problems without purchasing
MATLAB or going to the computer center
CONTENTS
Preface. Chapter 1: Introduction to Digital Signal Processing. Chapter 2: The Fourier
Series and Fourier Transfer. Chapter 3: The z Transform. Chapter 4: Discrete-Time
Systems. Chapter 5: Application of the z Transform. Chapter 6: The Sampling
Process. Chapter 7: The Discrete Fourier Transform. Chapter 8: Realization
of Digital Filters. Chapter 9: Design of Nonrecursive (FIR) Filters. Chapter 10:
Approximations for Analog Filters. Chapter 11: Design of Recursive (IIR) Filters.
Chapter 12: Recursive (IIR) Filters Satisfying Prescribed Specifications. Chapter
13: Random Signals. Chapter 14: Effects of Finite Word Length in Digital Filters.
Chapter 15: Design of Nonrecursive Filters Using Optimization Methods. Chapter
16: Design of Recursive Filters Using Optimization Methods. Chapter 17: Wave
Digital Filters. Chapter 18: Digital Signal Processing Applications. Appendix A:
Complex Analysis. Appendix B: Elliptic Functions. Index.
157
11/15/06 5:32:30 PM
CABLE COMMUNICATIONS TECHNIOLOGY
Third Edition
by Eugene R Bartlett
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145781-1 / MHID: 0-07-145781-X
Professional Book
Cable is now as much in the broadband business as it is
television. This book explains the fundamentals of coaxial
cable technology and the DSP that controls it, along with the
cable modem and voice over IP technology now drastically
changing the cable operators’ business. Aimed at working
engineers and technicians, it can also be used a textbook for
the a basic cable communications course in a 2 year tech
program.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
Coaxial cable basics
Cable modems
DSP for cable
Fiber optics
Voice over IP
Worked examples and problems at the end of each chapter
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction to Cable Communications Systems. Chapter 2: Coaxial
Cable Systems and Networks. Chapter 3: Headends and Signal Processing. Chapter
4: Fiber-Optic Technology in Cable Systems. Chapter 5: Digital Technology
and Cable System Applications. Chapter 6: Subscriber Installation and Terminal
Devices. Chapter 7: Cable Plant Testing and Maintenance Procedures. Chapter
8: Cable System Network Design Considerations.
ELECTRICAL SAFETY HANDBOOK
Third Edition
by John Cadick, Mary Capelli-Schellpfeffer, and Dennis K Neitzel
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145772-9 / MHID: 0-07-145772-0
Professional Book
This is an accident-avoiding prescription for electricians,
safety managers, and inspectors, and engineers dealing with
electricity any voltage level. Presenting crucial protective
safety strategies for industrial and commercial systems, the
Handbook references all major safety codes (OSHA, NEC,
NESC, and NFPA) where appropriate, creating a unique, onestop compliance manual for any company’s electrical safety
training and reference needs.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
•
•
•
•
•
New chapter on electrical maintenance
Complete coverage of the new IEEE 1584
NEC 2005
NFPA 70E 2004
NESC 2002
CONTENTS
Foreword. Preface. Chapter 1: Hazards of Electricity. Chapter 2: Electrical Safety
Equipment. Chapter 3: Safety Procedures and Methods. Chapter 4: Grounding
of Electrical Systems and Equipment. Chapter 5: Electrical Maintenance and Its
Relationship to Safety. Chapter 6: Regulatory and Legal Safety Requirements
and Standards. Chapter 7: Accident Prevention, Accident Investigation, Rescue,
and First Aid. Chapter 8: Medical Aspects of Electrical Trauma. Chapter 9: LowVoltage Safety Synopsis. Chapter 10: Medium- and High-Voltage Safety Synopsis.
Chapter 11: Human Factors in Electrical Safety. Chapter 12: Safety Management
and Organizational Structure. Chapter 13: Safety Training Methods and Systems.
ELECTRICITY DEMYSTIFIED
by Stan Gibilisco
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-143925-1 / MHID: 0-07-143925-0
Professional Book
FEATURES
• Solve electrical circuit problems
• Make power and energy determinations
• Calculate voltage, current and resistance issues
• Prepare for advanced courses in electricity
• Improve sales and management skills in the area of electricity
• Enhance knowledge of how electrical devices work
• Each section ends with a 50-question, multiple-choice test. The
book concludes with a 100-question final exam
CONTENTS
Part One: DC Electricity. 1. Atoms and Charge Carriers. 2. Current, Voltage,
and Resistance. 3. Power and Energy. 4. Series and Parallel Circuits. 5. Cells and
Batteries. Test: Part One--50 questions. Part Two: Ac Electricity. 6. Basics of AC.
7. Power Conversion. 8. Wire and Cable. 9. The Utility Grid. 10. Alternative
Electricity. Test: Part Two--50 questions. Part Three: Magnetism. 11. What is
Magnetism? 12. Types of Magnets. 13. Motors and Generators. 14. Electromagnetic
Waves. 15. Universal Magnetism. Test: Part Three--50 questions. Final Exam--100
questions. Answers to Quiz and Test Questions. Symbols Used in Circuit Diagrams.
Suggested Additional References.
TEACH YOURSELF ELECTRICITY AND ELECTRONICS
Fourth Edition
by Stan Gibilisco
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145933-4 / MHID: 0-07-145933-2
Professional Book
The best combination self-teaching guide, home reference, and
classroom text on electricity and electronics has been updated
to deliver the latest advances. Great for preparing for amateur
and commercial licensing exams, this guide has been prized
by thousands of students and professionals for its uniquely
thorough coverage ranging from DC and AC concepts to
semiconductors and integrated circuits.
• Written by Stan Gibilisco, an electronics legend and McGrawHill’s most popular TAB author
• Perfect for hobbyists, students, and those of you who want to get
ahead in tech-related careers
• Packed with everything needed to enhance learning: 600+
illustrations, practical examples, and hundreds of test questions
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Simple current-voltage-resistance determinators
• Power calculations
• Designing acoustical and audio systems
• Designing circuits and systems
• Contains several concise multiple-choice self-test questions
• Helps readers solve problems such as: Simple current-voltageresistance determinations; Power calculations; Preparing for amateur
or commercial license exams; Designing acoustical and audio
systems; Using radiolocation and radionavigation systems; Designing
circuits and systems; and Supplementing study in electricity and
electronics curricula
CONTENTS
PART ONE: DIRECT CURRENT. Chapter 1. Basic Physical Concepts. Chapter
2. Electrical Units. Chapter 3. Measuring Devices. Chapter 4. Basic DC Circuits.
Chapter 5. Direct-current Circuit Analysis. Chapter 6. Resistors. Chapter 7. Cells
and Batteries. Chapter 8. Magnetism. Test: Part One. PART TWO: ALTERNATING
CURRENT. Chapter 9. Alternating Current Basics. Chapter 10. Inductance. Chapter
11. Capacitance. Chapter 12. Phase. Chapter 13. Inductive Reactance. Chapter
14. Capacitive Reactance. Chapter 15. Impedance and Admittance. Chapter 16.
RLC Circuit Analysis. Chapter 17. Power and Resonance in AC Circuits. Chapter
18. Transformers and Impedance Matching. Test: Part Two. PART THREE:
BASIC ELECTRONICS. Chapter 19. Introduction to Semiconductors. Chapter
20. Some Uses of Diodes. Chapter 21. Power Supplies. Chapter 22. The Bipolar
Transistor. Chapter 23. The Field-effect Transistor. Chapter 24. Amplifiers and
Oscillators. Chapter 25. Data transmission and Reception. Chapter 26. Digital
Principles. Chapter 27. Measurement and Monitoring. Test: Part Three. PART
158
11/15/06 5:32:30 PM
FOUR: SPECIALIZED DEVICES AND SYSTEMS. Chapter 28. Electron Tubes.
Chapter 29. Integrated Circuits. Chapter 30. Transducers and Sensors. Chapter
31. Audio and High Fidelity. Chapter 32. Personal Communications. Chapter
33. Computers and the Internet. Chapter 34. Robotics and Artificial Intelligence.
Chapter 35. Location and Navigation. Test: Part Four FINAL EXAM. Appendix A.
Answers to Quiz, Test, and Exam Questions. Appendix B. Schematic Symbols.
Suggested Additional Reading and Reference.
SMART ANTENNAS FOR WIRELESS
COMMUNICATIONS
by Frank Gross
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-144789-8 / MHID: 0-07-144789-X
Professional Book
Smart antennas boost the power of a wireless network, saving
energy and money and greatly increasing the range of wireless
broadband. Smart Antennas is a rigorous textbook on smart
antenna design and deployment.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
Sidelobe cancellers
Beamsteering
Direction of arrival estimation
Channel characteristics
Numerous worked examples
Real world case studies
CONTENTS
1. Introduction. 2. Fundamentals of Electromagnetic Fields 3. Antenna
Fundamentals. 4. Array Fundamentals. 5. Principles of Random Variables and
Processes. 6. Propagation Channel Characteristics. 7. Angle-of-Arrival Estimation.
8. Smart Antennas.
MICROPROCESSOR DESIGN
by Grant McFarland
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-145951-8 / MHID: 0-07-145951-0
Professional Book
This unique step-by-step guide is a complete introduction
to modern microprocessor design, explained in simple
nontechnical language without complex mathematics. An ideal
primer for those working in or studying the semiconductor
industry, Microprocessor Design explains all the key concepts,
terms, and acronyms needed to understand the steps required
to design and manufacture a microprocessor. Developed from
a successful corporate training course, this hands-on learning
guide walks readers through every step of microprocessor
design. You'll follow a new processor product from initial
planning through design to production. In Microprocessor
Design, the author converts his real-world design and teaching
experience into an easy-to-follow reference employing an onthe-job-training approach to cover:
The evolution of microprocessors
• Microprocessor design planning
• Architecture and microarchitecture
• Logic design and circuit design
• Semiconductor manufacturing
• Processor packaging and test
This authoritative reference is an excellent introduction for
students or engineers new to processor design and can show
industry veterans how their specialty fits into the overall
design flow. This accessible and practical guide will provide
the reader with a broad working knowledge of the concepts
of microprocessor design, as well as an understanding of the
individual steps in the process and the jargon used by the
industry.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: The Evolution of the Microprocessor. Chapter 2: Computer Components.
Chapter 3: Design Planning. Chapter 4: Computer Architecture. Chapter 5:
Microarchitecture. Chapter 6: Logic Design. Chapter 7: Circuit Design. Chapter
8: Layout. Chapter 9: Semiconductor Manufacturing. Chapter 10: Microprocessor
Packaging. Chapter 11: Silicon Debug and Test. Glossary. Index
VERILOG DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN
Second Edition
by Zainalabedin Navabi, Northeastern University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-144564-1 / MHID: 0-07-144564-1
Professional Book
This rigorous text shows electronics designers and students
how to deploy Verilog in sophisticated digital systems design.
The Second Edition is completely updated--along with the
many worked examples--for Verilog 2001, new synthesis
standards and coverage of the new OVI verification library.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Uses Verilog 2001 throughout
• New chapters on test-bench development
• New OVL Verification Library
• New synthesis standards
• CD-ROM contains simulations and synthesis tools, including
Aldec’s complete verilog simulator
• Instructor’s Manua for academic use
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Design Automation with Verilog. Chapter 2: Design with Verilog.
Chapter 3: Combinational Circuits in Verilog. Chapter 4: Sequential Circuits in
Verilog. Chapter 5: Language Utilities. Chapter 6: Test Methodologies. Chapter
7: Verification. Chapter 8: CPU Design and Verification.
SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS
Fourth Edition
by Dennis Roddy, Lakehead University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-146298-3 / MHID: 0-07-146298-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125286-7 / MHID: 0-07-125286-X [IE]
Professional Book
Highly regarded for more than a decade as both a teaching
text and professional tutorial, this classic guide to satellite
communications has been revised, updated, and expanded
to cover global wireless applications, digital television, and
Internet access via satellite.
• In-depth, textbook-style coverage combined with an intuitive, lowmath approach makes this book particularly appealing to the wireless
and networking markets
• New to this edition: Global wireless services, including 3G;
Antenna Options, Error Coding
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Overview of Satellite Systems. Chapter 2: Orbits and Launching
Methods. Chapter 3: The Geostationary Orbit. Chapter 4: Radio Wave
Propagation. Chapter 5: Polarization. Chapter 6: Antennas. Chapter 7: The Space
Segment. Chapter 8: The Earth Segment. Chapter 9: Analog Signals. Chapter 10:
Digital Signals. Chapter 11: Error Control Coding. Chapter 12: The Space Link.
Chapter 13: Interference. Chapter 14: Satellite Access. Chapter 15: Satellites in
Networks. Chapter 16: Direct Broadcast Satellite (DBS) Television. Chapter 17:
Satellite Mobile and Specialized Services. Appendix A: Answers To Selected
Problems. Appendix B: Conic Sections. Appendix C: Nasa Two-line Orbital
Elements. Appendix D: Listings Of Artificial Satellites. Appendix E: Illustrating
Third-order Intermodulation Products. Appendix F: Acronyms. Appendix G:
Logarithmic Units. Index.
159
11/15/06 5:32:31 PM
ATM NETWORKS
Second Edition
by Sumit Kasera, Flextronics Software Systems
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-058353-5 / MHID: 0-07-058353-6
Professional Book
Networking technologies are playing a pivotal role in
‘networking’ our world. Among the networking technologies
that are relevant today, ATM is one of the most popular and
pervasive as it seamlessly integrates local area networks and
wide area networks. Further, as it provides a single platform
for voice, video and data, it facilitates convergence. ATM
Networks: Concepts and Protocols is a single-stop reference
on this technology. The revised edition of this book covers the
relevant concepts, the three layers of ATM protocol reference
model, core concepts of ATM networks (including signaling,
routing and traffic management), interworking aspects and
the application of ATM networks. Other notable changes
in the second edition include: 1. Four new chapters on the
application areas of ATM-ATM in MPLS Networks, Voice over
ATM, ATM in DSL Networks and ATM in 3G Networks. 2.
Three chapters on the core concepts of ATM-AAL2 Signalling,
ATM Security and ATM Network Architecture and Interfaces.
3. Glossary and Review Questions. Profusely illustrated, this
book provides fresh perspectives and makes comprehension of
a rather difficult subject very easy. With this coverage, it will
serve the needs of networking professionals and students.
CONTENTS
Part I: Background and Introduction. 1.Drivers of the Communication World.
2.Transfer Modes. 3.Overview of ATM. Part II: ATM Protocol Reference Model.
4.ATM Physical Layer. 5.ATM Layer. 6.ATM Adaptation Layer. Part III: Core
Concepts of ATM. 7.ATM Traffic and Service Parameterization. 8.ATM Traffic
Management. 9.ATM Switching. 10. ATM Addressing. 11.ATM Signalling.
12.ATM Routing. 13.AAL2 Signalling. 14.ATM Network Management. 15.ATM
Security. Part IV: Interworking with ATM. 16.ATM Network Interfaces and
Architecture. 17.ATM in LAN. 18.IP Over ATM. Part V: Application of ATM
Network. 19.ATM and MPLS Networks. 20.Voice Over ATM. 21.ATM and DSL
Networks. 22.ATM and 3G Networks.
CHIP SCALE PACKAGE
by John H Lau, Express Packaging Systems, Inc., Wataru Nakayama,
University of Maryland, John Prince, University of Arizona and C P
Wong, Institute of Technology
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-038304-3 / MHID: 0-07-038304-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116508-2 / MHID: 0-07-116508-8 [IE]
(International Edition is not for sale in Australia, Europe &
Japan.)
Professional Book
CONTENTS
Part I: Flip Chip and Wire Bond for CSP. Part II: Customized Leadframe Based
CSPs. Part III: CSPs with Flexible Substrate. Part IV: CSPs with Rigid Substrate.
Part V: Wafer-Level Redistribution CSPs.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS ENGINEERING
Second Edition
by William C.Y. Lee
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115766-7 / MHID: 0-07-115766-2 [IE]
Professional Book
VHDL: ANALYSIS AND MODELING OF DIGITAL
SYSTEMS
Second Edition
LOW COST FLIP CHIP TECHNOLOGIES FOR DCA,
WLCSP, AND PBGA ASSEMBLIES
by John Lau, Interconnection Technologies Scientist, Agilent
Technologies
2000 / 585 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-135141-6 / MHID: 0-07-135141-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118365-9 / MHID: 0-07-118365-5 [IE]
Professional Book
by Zainalabedin Navabi, Northeastern University
1998 / 656 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-046479-7 / MHID: 0-07-046479-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115525-0 / MHID: 0-07-115525-2 [IE]
Professional Book
CONTENTS
Hardware Design Environments. VHDL Background. Design Methodology Based
on VHDL. Basic Concepts in VHDL. Structural Specification of Hardware Design
Organization and Parametrization Utilities for High Level Descriptions. Dataflow
Descriptions in VHDL. Behavioral Descriptions of Hardware. CPU Modeling and
Design. Interface Modeling and Design. Special Application Modeling.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1. Integrated Circuit Packaging Trends. Chapter 2. Chip-Level
Interconnects: Wire Bonds and Solder Bumps. Chapter 3. Lead-Free Solders.
Chapter 4. High-Density PCB and Substrates. Chapter 5. Flip Chip on Board with
Solderless Materials. Chapter 6. Flip Chip on Board with Conventional Underfills.
Chapter 7. Flip Chip on Board with No-Flow Underfills. Chapter 8. Flip Chip on
Board with Imperfect Underfills. Chapter 9. Thermal Management of Flip Chip
on Board. Chapter 10. Wafer-Level Packaging. Chapter 11. Solder-Bumped Flip
Chip on Micro Via-in-Pad Substrates. Chapter 12. PCB Manufacturing, Testing,
and Assembly of RIMMs. Chapter 13. Wire Bonding Chip (Face-Up) in PBGA
Packages. Chapter 14. Wire Bonding Chip (Face-Down) in PBGA Packages.
Chapter 15. Solder-Bumped Flip Chip in PBGA Packages. Chapter 16. Failure
Analysis of Flip Chip on Low-Cost Substrates.
ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS
Second Edition
by Daniel Tabak, George Mason University
1995 / 523 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113715-7 / MHID: 0-07-113715-7 [IE]
Professional Book
160
11/15/06 5:32:32 PM
2007-2008 NEW General Engineering Titles
General Engineering ~ Contents
B.E.S.T .......................................................................... 172
2007 New Titles

GOTTFRIED
Spreadsheet Tools for Engineers Using Excel, 3e .....173
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297184-2 / MHID: 0-07-297184-3

SMITH
Teamwork and Project Management, 3e ............ 173,175
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310367-9 / MHID: 0-07-310367-5
2008 New Titles
Internet ......................................................................... 175

CHAPMAN
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319157-7 / MHID: 0-07-319157-4

CHAPRA
Applied Numerical Methods with Matlab for
Engineers and Scientists, 2e .....................................169
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313290-7 / MHID: 0-07-313290-X

DORF
Technology Ventures: From Idea to
Enterprise, 2e ..........................................................176
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329442-1 / MHID: 0-07-329442-X

EIDE
Engineering Fundamentals and Problem
Solving, 5e ...............................................................163
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319158-4 / MHID: 0-07-319158-2

FINKLESTEIN
Pocket Book of Technical Writing for Engineers
& Scientists, 3e ........................................................168
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319159-1 / MHID: 0-07-319159-0

FORD
Design for Electrical and Computer
Engineers .................................................................162
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338035-3 / MHID: 0-07-338035-0

HOLTZAPPLE
Concepts in Engineering, 2e ....................................163
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319162-1 / MHID: 0-07-319162-0

PRITCHARD
Mathcad: A Tool for Engineers and Scientists
(BEST Series), 2e ................................................. 165,172
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319185-0 / MHID: 0-07-319185-X
161
161-178_GENERAL ENGG.indd 161
11/15/06 5:33:50 PM
General Engineering
Engineering Design
THE MECHANICAL DESIGN PROCESS
Third Edition
NEW
DESIGN FOR ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER
ENGINEERS
by Ralph Ford, Penn State Erie Behrend College, and Chris Coulston,
Penn State Erie Behrend College
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338035-3 / MHID: 0-07-338035-0
FEATURES
• Strong guiding vision--that a solid understanding of the Design
Process, Design Tools, and the right mix of Professional Skills are
critical for project and career success
• Ford does a good job at providing comprehensive design
treatment for ECE.
• A text at the right level for senior design--based on reviewer
feedback we have heard that no books existed that were at the level
needed. Ford seems to now bridge that gap and will be the book of
choice.
I-DEAS STUDENT GUIDE
Second Edition
by Structural Dynamics Research Corporation
2004 / 480 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-252544-1 / MHID: 0-07-252544-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121632-6 / MHID: 0-07-121632-4 [IE]
SDRC’s I-DEAS Student Guide Revised Edition—created by
Mark Lawry—provides the “big picture” of I-DEAS, and shows
how it fits together as an integrated Mechanical Computer
Aided Engineering environment. It provides a quick technical
introduction to I-DEAS, including I-DEAS versions 9 and 10,
and is ideal for users who want to learn other capabilities
of the software. Numerous screen captures provide a visual
parallel to the explanations given in the text. The Student
Guide covers basic commands and procedures, in a format that
makes for convenient reference. The chapter-ending section
includes a series of Tutorials that demonstrate basic concepts
in a hands-on way. Workshop section follow the Tutorials,
and allow users to apply their knowledge in a design context.
The Appendix of the book includes an Icon Summary list, a
section on Advanced Features and Interfaces, and a practical
Troubleshooting Reference. The index is set up to further
increase the reference value of the Student Guide
CONTENTS
by David G. Ullman, Oregon State University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-237338-7 / MHID: 0-07-237338-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124059-8 / MHID: 0-07-124059-4 [IE]
CONTENTS
1. Why Study the Design Process? 2. Describing Mechanical Design Problems and
Processes. 3. Designers and Design Teams. 4. The Design Process. 5. Planning
for the Design Process. 6. Understanding the Problem and the Development of
Engineering Specifications. 7. Concept Generation. 8. Concept Evaluation. 9. The
Product Design Phase. 10. Product Generation. 11. Product Evaluation for Function
and Performance. 12. Product Evaluation for Cost, Manufacture, Assembly, and
Other Measures. 13. Launching and Supporting the Product.
INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING DESIGN AND
PROBLEM SOLVING
(B.E.S.T Series)
by David M Burghardt, Hofstra University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116100-8 / MHID: 0-07-116100-7 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Understanding the Human-Made World. 2 The Design Process. 3 Design
Documentation. 4 Engineering Analysis and Design. 5 Discussions with Engineers.
Appendix.
INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING DESIGN
by Arvid Eide, Roland Jenison, Lane Mashaw, and Larry Northup, all
of Iowa State University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115692-9 / MHID: 0-07-115692-5 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 The Engineering Profession/2 Engineering Solutions/3 Engineering Design - A
Process
Preface. How to Use This Guide. 1 Introduction to I-DEAS. 2 Part Modeling. 3
Modifying Parts. 4 Constraints and Constrait Networks. 5 Surfacing Techniques.
6 Assemblies and Mechanisms. 7 Annotation and Drafting. 8 Manufacturing. 9
Simulation. 10 Other I-DEAS Applications. Sheet Metal, Harness, Mold Design,
Test. 11 Best Practices. 12 Collaboration. Appendix: A. Icon Summary. B.
Advanced Features and Interfaces. C. Trouble-shooting Reference. Index
162
11/15/06 5:33:51 PM
General Engineering
Introduction/Problem Solving
NEW
ENGINEERING FUNDAMENTALS AND PROBLEM
SOLVING
Fifth Edition
by Arvid R. Eide. Iowa State University, Roland Jenison, Iowa State
University, Larry L. Northup, Iowa State University, and Steven
Mickelson, Iowa State University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319158-4 / MHID: 0-07-319158-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110190-5 / MHID: 0-07-110190-X
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/best
The fifth edition of Engineering Fundamentals & Problem
Solving is written to motivate engineering students during their
first year. Students will develop the skills in solving open-ended
problems, this text will provide students with experience in
solving problems in SI and customary units while presenting
solutions in a logical manner. Eide introduces students to
subject areas that are common to engineering disciplines that
require the application of fundamental engineering concepts.
For those instructors who desire a shorter text to complement
other application specific texts, McGraw-Hill offers cutomization
through our Primis-Build a Book, or the BEST version of this
text. Please see Eide's Introduction to Engineering Design and
Problem Solving, 2nd edition, from the BEST series. Getting
familiar to what engineering is and what you need to be a
successful engineer.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Shows engineering students what engineering is and what it's like
to become an engineer. Deals with problems that students would be
expecting to see within an engineering curriculmn.
• Updated to include coverage of bioengineering, nanotechnology,
and engineering materials.
• Focus on assessment.
• Updated to include a discussion of workplace competencies,
key actions, and self-assessment to help prepare students for the
workplace and to help develop learning portfolios.
NEW
CONCEPTS IN ENGINEERING
Second Edition
by Mark T. Holtzapple, Texas A & M University, and W. Dan Reece,
Texas A & M University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319162-1 / MHID: 0-07-319162-0
The second edition of Holtzapple and Reece’s widely popular
text, Concepts in Engineering, introduces fundamental
engineering concepts to freshman engineering students. Its
central focus is to positively motivate students for the rest of
their engineering education, as well as their future engineering.
Due to the book’s concise, yet comprehensive coverage, it can
be used in a wide variety of introductory courses. Text is for
students who are not sure if they want to be engineers and
the book almost acts as a "hook". Holtzapple's approach is
different than Eide's text which expects students to go into
engineering.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Addition of new chapter, Preparing to Be an Engineer.
• The text gives students a well-rounded approach to engineering in
addition to meeting ABET requirements for engineering students.
FEATURES
• Focuses on problem solving. A consistent method of problem
solving is integrated into the book.
• Emphasizes design by including a design project.
• Excites students about engineering through providing interesting
problems and focusing on the creative process of being an engineer.
• Focuses on the fundamentals and includes information that
students are unlikely to find elsewhere. This text focuses on basic
information- such as grammatical rules for the SI system and graphing
rules- that starts engineering students off with just the right amount of
"hard" content.
CONTENTS
1. Preparing to Be an Engineer. 2. The Engineer. 3. Engineering Ethics. 4. Problem
Solving. 5. Introduction to Design. 6. Engineering Communications. 7. Numbers.
8. Tables and Graphs. 9. SI System of Units. 10. Unit Conversions. Appendices.
Topic Index. Biographical Index
FEATURES
• Focus on open-ended problems.
• Focus on problem solving.
CONTENTS
1 The Engineering Profession. 2 Engineering Design--A Process. 3 Engineering
Solutions. 4 Representation of Technical Information. 5 Engineering Estimations
and Approximations. 6 Dimensions, Units, and Conversions. 7 Preparation for
Computer Solutions. 8 Statistics. 9 Mechanics. 10 Material Balance. 11 Electrical
Theory. 12 Energy. 13 Engineering Economics. Appendix A Selected Topics
from Algebra. Appendix B Trigonometry. Appendix C Graphics. Appendix D
General. Appendix E Plane Surfaces.
contact your local
[email protected]
163
11/15/06 5:33:52 PM
General Engineering
FOUNDATIONS OF ENGINEERING
Second Edition
by Mark T Holtzapple and W Dan Reece, both of Texas A&M
University, College station
2003 / 720 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-248082-5 / MHID: 0-07-248082-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119561-4 / MHID: 0-07-119561-0 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/holtzapple
This book gives freshman engineering students a solid
foundation for all their future coursework. It provides an
overview to the engineering profession and of the skills
they will need to develop, as well as an introduction to
fundamental engineering topics such as thermodynamics, rate
processes, and Newton’s laws. An important aspect of the
book’s approach is the method of Engineering Accounting,
which casts the basic conservation laws (e.g., of energy or
mass) as simple “accounting” procedures. This is a unifying
concept that facilitates problem-solving across all engineering
disciplines.
CONTENTS
Section I Introduction to Engineering: 1 The Engineer. 2 Engineering Ethics.
3 Problem Solving. 4 Understanding and Using Computers. 5 Introduction to
Design. 6 Engineering Communications. Section II Mathematics: 7 Numbers.
8 Tables and Graphs. 9 Statistics. Section III Engineering Fundamentals: 10
Newton’s Laws. 11 Introduction to Thermodynamics. 12 Introduction to Rate
Processes. 13 SI System of Units. 14 Unit Conversions. 15 Introduction to Statics
and Dynamics. 16 Introduction to Electricity. Section IV Engineering Accounting:
17 Accounting. 18 Accounting for Mass. 19 Accounting for Charge. 20 Accounting
for Linear Momentum. 21 Accounting for Angular Momentum. 22 Accounting for
Energy. 23 Accounting for Entropy. 24 Accounting for Money. Appendix A Unit
Conversion Factors. Appendix B NSPE Code of Ethics for Engineers. Appendix C
z Table. Appendix D Summary of Some Engineering Milestones
PROBLEM SOLVING
(B.E.S.T Series)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116100-8 / MHID: 0-07-116100-7 [IE]
CONTENTS
Appendix.
Engineering Graphics &
Drawing
INTRODUCTION TO GRAPHICS
COMMUNICATIONS FOR ENGINEERS
(B.E.S.T Series), Third Edition
by Gary R Bertoline, Purdue University, West Lafayette
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304836-9 / MHID: 0-07-304836-4
(with OLC)
http://www.mhhe.com/engcs/general/best
Introduction to Graphics Communication for Engineers is
a short introductory technical drawing text intended for use
in technical drawing or drafting courses at two and four year
schools or other technology programs. Powerful computers
and CAD software are of little use to engineers who do not
fully understand the fundamentals of graphics communication
principles and 3-D modeling strategies, or do not possess
a level of visualization ability. Because of this, Bertoline
concentrates on the concepts and skills necessary to sketch
and create 2-D drawings and 3-D CAD models in this text.
New to the third edition are “Design in Industry Boxes” that
cover an aspect of design as practiced in industry. Quotes and
interesting stories from practicing engineers make the boxes
motivating and informative for students. Also new are practice
sketching problems included throughout each chapter, which
allow students a chance to practice what they are learning.
This book is part of the B.E.S.T. (Basic Engineering Series
and Tools), which consists of modularized textbooks offering
virtually every topic and specialty likely to be of interest to
engineers.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• New “Design in Industry” boxes have been added to the fourth
edition. Each of these boxes cover some aspect of design as practiced
in industry. Students will learn how design is done in the real world
from these interesting stories presented by practicing engineers and
technologists.
• New to this edition are practice problems located throughout each
chapter. This new feature gives students drawing practice as they
learn new concepts. Through immediate hands-on practice, students
can more readily grasp chapter material.
• New end-of-chapter sketching problems have been added,
reinforcing what students have learned in the chapter.
FEATURES
• Pedagogically sound, this book provides a list of objectives at the
beginning of each chapter, step-by-step instructions on how to draw,
and a wide assortment of problems that can be assigned to reinforce
topics covered.
• Sketching worksheets are integrated into the end of each chapter.
These worksheets are excellent for sketching assignments, used to
augment CAD work.
• As part of the McGraw-Hill B.E.S.T. (Basic Engineering Series and
Tools), this book can be customized on-line and combined with
other BEST titles to be sold to students either in an eletronic form or
traditional book form.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction to Graphics Communication. Chapter 2 Sketching and
Text. Chapter 3 Section and Auxiliary Views. Chapter 4 Dimensioning and
Tolerancing Practices. Chapter 5 Reading and Constructing Working Drawings.
Chapter 6 Design and 3-D Modeling
164
11/15/06 5:33:58 PM
General Engineering
Computer/Programming
INTRODUCTION TO MATLAB 7 FOR ENGINEERS
NEW
MATHCAD: A TOOL FOR ENGINEERS AND
SCIENTISTS (B.E.S.T. SERIES)
Second Edition
by Philip J. Pritchard, Manhattan College
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319185-0 / MHID: 0-07-319185-X
Mathcad: A Tool for Engineering Problem Solving explains
how to use Mathcad 13(Student and Standard), >This book is
current with the latest release of mathcad, with the focus on the
fundamentals, is enriched with great motivating applications,
solid homework problems, appealing to both engineers and
scientists.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Examples updated to Mathcad 13, which is the most current
version.
• Examples and homework problems updated to account for a
broader range of engineering disciplines, in addition to mechanical
and electrical, to include: civil, chemical, and environmental
engineering.
• Pedagogy updated to be more student-friendly, including new
beginning sections at the start of each chapter that spell out specific
features to be covered, new end-of-chapter summaries, and the
addition of tables and boxes where appropriate that will reduce the
amount of math theory in the text.
• Examples and applications related to the sciences.
FEATURES
• Features of Mathcad are immediately followed by engineering
examples.
CONTENTS
1 What Is Mathcad and Why Use It? 2 The Basics of Mathcad. 3 How to Graph
Functions. 4 Symbolic and Numeric Calculus. 5 How to Solve Equations. 6
Vectors, Matrices, and More. 7 Solving Ordinary Differential Equations. 8
Doing Statistics with Mathcad. 9 Importing and Exporting, the Web, and Some
Advanced Concepts.
by William Palm, University of Rhode Island—Kingston
2005 / 752 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292242-4 / MHID: 0-07-292242-7
(with Bind-In Card)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123262-3 / MHID: 0-07-123262-1 [IE]
This site contains power point slides, Appendix E: Some Project
Suggestions, and complete solutions to all of the Test Your
Understanding exercises and all the chapter problems. (Browse http://
www.mhhe.com/palm)
This is a simple, concise book designed to be useful for
beginners and to be kept as a reference. MATLAB is presently
a globally available standard computational tool for engineers
and scientists. The terminology, syntax, and the use of the
programming language are well defined and the organization
of the material makes it easy to locate information and
navigate through the textbook. The text covers all the major
capabilities of MATLAB that are useful for beginning students.
An instructor’s manual and other web resources are available.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Expanded coverage of programming now includes structured
programming and logical variables.
• Function handles, anonymous functions, subfunctions, and nested
functions are now treated.
• Coverage of Simulink® has been expanded to a separate chapter in
light of its growing popularity.
• A new Appendix B contains an introduction to producing
animation and sound with MATLAB.
FEATURES
• The text is written for freshman engineering students and uses
mathematics appropriate for this level.
• Numerous examples and homework problems drawn from all the
fields of engineering.
• Students can use the text as a reference in later courses because it
contains many tables that summarize the MATLAB commands.
CONTENTS
1 An Overview of MATLAB. 2 Numeric, Cell, and Structure Arrays. 3 Functions and
Files. 4 Programming with MATLAB. 5 Advanced Plotting and Model Building. 6
Linear Algebraic Equations. 7 Probability, Statistics, and Interpolation. 8 Numerical
Calculus and Differential Equations. 9 Simulink. 10 Symbolic Processing with
MATLAB. Appendix A Guide to Commands and Functions in this Text. Appendix
B Animation and Sound in MATLAB. Appendix C Formatted Output in MATLAB.
Appendix D References. Appendix E Some Project Suggestions (Online). Answers
to Selected Problems
165
11/15/06 5:33:59 PM
General Engineering
FORTRAN 90/95 FOR SCIENTISTS AND ENGINEERS
Second Edition
by Stephen Chapman, BAE Systems, Australia
2004 / 700 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282575-6 / MHID: 0-07-282575-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123233-3 / MHID: 0-07-123233-8 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/engcs/general/best/
Chapman’s Fortran for Scientists and Engineers is intended for
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Computers and the Fortran Language. 2 Basic Elements of
Fortran. 3 Control Structures and Program Design. 4 Basic I/O Concepts. 5
Arrays. 6 Procedures and Structured Programming. 7 More About Character
Variables. 8 Additional Data Types. 9 Advanced Features of Procedures and
Morals. 10 Advanced I/O Concepts. 11 Pointers and Dynamic Data Structures. 12
Redundant, Obsolescent, and Deleted Fortran Features. Appendixes: A ASCII and
EBCDIC Coding Systems. B Fortran 95 Intrinsic Procedures. B1 Classes of Intrinsic
Procedures. B2 Alphabetical List of Intrinsic Procedures. B3 Mathematical and
Type Conversion Intrinsic Procedures. B4 Kind and Numeric Processor Intrinsic
Functions. B5 Date and Time Intrinsic Subroutines. B6 Bit Intrinsic Procedures.
B7 Character Intrinsic Functions. B8 Array and Pointer Intrinsic Functions. B9
Miscellaneous Inquiry Functions. C Order of Statements in a Fortran 95 Program.
D Towards Fortran 200x. D1 Objects and Object-oriented Programming. D2 Other
Features. E Glossary. F Answers to Quizzes
APPLIED C
An Introduction and More
by Alice Fischer and Stephen M Ross, University of New Haven
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-021748-5 / MHID: 0-07-021748-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118459-5 / MHID: 0-07-118459-7 [IE]
COMPUTER SCIENCE
(B.E.S.T Series)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-913678-7 / MHID: 0-07-913678-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116788-8 / MHID: 0-07-116788-9
CONTENTS
1 Computers and Computing Fundamentals/2 Getting Started with C/3 The Basics
of C/4 Beginning Decision Making and Looping/5 Functions/6 Arrays and Index
Variables/7 Character Arrays and Strings/8 Pointers, Addresses, and Special
Variable Types/9 Introduction to C++
A C++ PRIMER FOR ENGINEERS
An Object-Oriented Approach
by Kumaraswamy Ponnambalam, University of Waterloo; and Tivley
Algvindigve, Chief Software Engineer for Engsoft
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115807-7 / MHID: 0-07-115807-3
[IE with 3.5” disk]
CONTENTS
1 Problem Solving Using Computers/2 C++ Programming Basics/3 Selections
and Repetitions/4 Functions to Aid Modularity/5 Arrays for Grouping Data
of Same Type/6 Structures to Group Data/7 Encapsulation of Data and
Functions in Classes/8 Inheritance to Aid Reusability/9 Pointers to Aid Efficient
Implementation/10 Miscellaneous Topics/11 Java for C++ Programmers
LEARNING C++
by Neill Graham
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-100849-5 / MHID: 0-07-100849-7 [IE]
CONTENTS
I Introduction: Chapter 1: Computers and Systems. Chapter 2: Programs and
Programming. Chapter 3: Fundamental Concepts. II Computation: Chapter 4:
Objects, Types, and Expressions. Chapter 5: Using Functions and Libraries. Chapter
6: More Repetition and Decisions. III: Basic Data Types. Chapter 7: Using Numeric
Types. Chapter 8: The Trouble with Numbers. Chapter 9: Program Design. Chapter
10: An Introduction to Arrays. Chapter 11: Character Data and Enumerations .
Chapter 12: An Introduction to Pointers. IV: Structured Data Types . Chapter 13:
Strings. Chapter 14: Structured Types. Chapter 15: Streams and Files. Chapter
16: Simple Array Algorithms. Chapter 17: Two Dimensional Arrays . Chapter 18:
Calculating with Bits. V: Advanced Techniques. Chapter 19: Dynamic Arrays.
Chapter 20: Working With Pointers. Chapter 21: Recursion. Chapter 22: Making
Programs General. Chapter 23: Modular Organization. VI Appendix. Appendix
A The ASCII Code . Appendix B The Precedence of Operators in C. Appendix C
Keywords. Appendix D Advanced Aspects of C Operators. Appendix E Number
Representation and Conversion. Appendix F The Tools Library. Appendix G The
Standard C Libraries. Appendix H Interactive Input Validation. Glossary. Answers
to Self-Test Exercises. Index
166
11/15/06 5:33:59 PM
General Engineering
Environmental Engineering
CHEMISTRY FOR ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING
AND SCIENCE
Fifth Edition
by Clair N. Sawyer (deceased), Perry McCarty, Stanford University;
Gene F. Parkin, University of Iowa, Iowa City
2003 / 768 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-248066-5 / MHID: 0-07-248066-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-119888-2 / MHID: 0-07-119888-1 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/sawyer/
CONTENTS
I Fundamentals of Chemistry for Environmental Engineering and Science: 1
Introduction. 2 Basic Concepts from General Chemistry. 3 Basic Concepts from
Physical Chemistry. 4 Basic Concepts from Equilibrium Chemistry. 5 Basic
Concepts from Organic Chemistry. 6 Basic Concepts from Biochemistry. 7 Basic
Concepts from Colloid Chemistry. 8 Basic Concepts from Nuclear Chemistry.
II Water and Wastewater Analysis: 9 Introduction. 10 Statistical Analysis of
Analytical Data. 11 Basic Concepts from Quantitative Chemistry. 12 Instrumental
Methods of Analysis. 13 Turbidity. 14 Color. 15 Standard Solutions. 16 pH. 17
Acidity. 18 Alkalinity. 19 Hardness. 20 Residual Chlorine and Chlorine Demand.
21 Chloride. 22 Dissolved Oxygen. 23 Biochemical Oxygen Demand. 24
Chemical Oxygen Demand. 25 Nitrogen. 26 Solids. 27 Iron and Manganese. 28
Fluoride. 29 Sulfate. 30 Phosphorus and Phosphate. 31 Oil and Grease. 32 Volatile
Acids. 33 Gas Analysis. 34 Trace Contaminants. Appendix A: Thermodynamic
Properties (25 degrees C). Appendix B: Acronyms, Roman Symbols, and Greek
Symbols
INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING AND THE
ENVIRONMENT
by Edward S Rubin and Cliff Davidson, both of the Carnegie Mellon
University
2001 / 576 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-235467-6 / MHID: 0-07-235467-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118185-3 / MHID: 0-07-118185-7 [IE]
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL
ENGINEERING
Third Edition
by Mackenzie L. Davis, Michigan State University; and David A.
Corwell, Environmental Engineering and Technology, Inc.
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-238777-3 / MHID: 0-07-238777-7
(with Unit Conversion Booklet)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115234-1 / MHID: 0-07-115234-2 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Introduction/2 Hydrology/3 Water Treatment/4 Water Quality Management/5
Wastewater Treat ment/6 Air Pollution/7 Noise Pollution/8 Solid Waste
Management/9 Hazardous Waste/10 Ionizing Radiation/Appendixes/A Properties
of Air, Water, and Se lect ed Chemicals/B Noise Computation Tables and
Nomographs/C EPA Hazardous Waste Code Descriptions
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
Second Edition
by Larry Canter, University of Oklahoma
1996 / 480 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-009767-4 / MHID: 0-07-009767-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-114103-1 / MHID: 0-07-114103-0 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 National Environmental Policy Act and Its Implementation/2 Planning and
Management of Impact Studies/3 Simple Methods for Impact Identification
Matrices, Networks and Checklists/4 Description of Environmental Setting/5
Environmental Indices and Indicators for Describing the Affected Environment/6
Prediction and Assessment of Impacts on the Air Environment/7 Prediction and
Assessment of Impacts on the Surface Water Environment/8 Prediction and
Assessment of Impacts on the Soil and Ground Water Environment/9 Prediction
and Assessment of Impacts on the Noise Environment/10 Prediction and
Assessment of Impacts on the Biological Environment/11 Habitat Methods for
Biological Impact Prediction and Assessment/12 Prediction and Assessment of
Impacts on the Cultural (Historical/Archaeological) Environment/13 Prediction
and Assessment of Visual Impacts/14 Prediction and Assessment of Impacts
on the Socioeconomic Environment/15 Decision Methods for Evaluation of
Alternatives/16 Public Participation in Environmental Decision Making/17
Environmental Monitoring/Appendixes
I: Motivation and Framework. 1 Engineering and the Environment. 2 Overview
of Environmental Issues. II: Case Studies in Design for the Environment. 3
Automobiles and the Environment. 4 Batteries and the Environment . 5 Power
Plants and the Environment. 6 Refrigeration and the Environment. 7 Environmental
Life Cycle Assessments. III: Case Studies in Environmental Modeling. 8 Controlling
Urban Smog. 9 CFCs and the Ozone Layer. 10 Global Warming and Climate
Change. 11 Toxic Metals in the Environment. 12 PCBs in the Aquatic Environment.
IV: Topics in Engineering and Environmental Policy. 13 Economic Analysis. 14
Environmental Risk and Decision Analysis. Appendices
167
11/15/06 5:34:00 PM
General Engineering
Engineering Ethics
ETHICS IN ENGINEERING
Fourth Edition
by Mike Martin, Chapman College; and Roland Schinzinger,
University of California, Irvine
2005 / 350 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-283115-3 / MHID: 0-07-283115-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111293-2 / MHID: 0-07-111293-6 [IE]
The B.E.S.T. website includes links to additional discussion topics,
information on recent cases, links, and more. (Browse http://www.mhhe.
com/engineering/general/best)
Now in its fourth edition, Martin and Schinzinger’s Ethics
in Engineering provides an introduction to the key issues
in engineering ethics, taking account of both specific
organizational contexts and broader technological trends.
Current and thorough, it promotes critical thinking and
discussion about moral and ethical issues that engineers face.
The up-to-date content provides real world examples and
cases and, by offering a framework for understanding ethical
dilemmas within engineering, prepares readers for issues they
will confront in their careers.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Chapters 1-3, and 6-10 have either been extensively updated
or are entirely new. Fuller discussion is provided on moral
reasoning, codes of ethics, personal commitments in engineering,
environmental ethics, honesty and research ethics, as well as the
philosophy of technology.
• The book provides the important connections between the
choices made by individuals and corporations with broader social
concerns. This helps the reader get a better sense of the “big picture.”
• Each chapter ends with a list of “Key Concepts” to help
reinforce the preceding material. The appendix contains additional
pedagogical resources, as well as sample codes of ethics, to give
additional real-world perspective to the reader. In addition, ample
Study Questions are provided at the end of each section.
• Updated case studies are provided throughout the book to further
support the concepts presented.
FEATURES
• Most competing texts consist of readings only. This text contains
more textbook material, making the text relevant to both students and
professionals.
CONTENTS
Technical Writing
NEW
POCKET BOOK OF TECHNICAL WRITING FOR
ENGINEERS & SCIENTISTS
Third Edition
by Leo Finkelstein, Wright State University-Dayton
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319159-1 / MHID: 0-07-319159-0
The focus of this text is to teach engineering students the skill
of technical writing. The book is unique in that it gets to the
point, uses practical outlines throughout, and shows students
how to produce the most common technical documents stepby-step, in a manner that is fun and interesting to students.
With ABET increasing the emphasis on technical writing,
this affordable, straightforward, easy-to-understand text with
flexible coverage, would be a perfect fit for your technical
writing course. Each chapter has an end of chapter critique,
which allows students to implement what they have learned in
the chapter. This is new!
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• New chapter on Business Communications.
• Updated information in the Electronic Publishing chapter.
• Updated grammar chapter with new exercises; a new section on
punctuation errors, including a useful table on punctuation.
• Exercises that encourage students to apply what they've learned in
a chapter, along with the chapter's checklist, to critique an example
document.
• Added discussion of equations and formulas, including examples,
and added discussion of Gantt charts, including illustrations, in the
Visuals chapter.
• Updated examples of technical documents, touching on a broad
range of engineering disciples and interest.
• Updated Visuals chapter along with new exercises.
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Ethical Considerations. 3 Technical Definition. 4 Descriptions
of a Mechanism. 5 Descriptions of a Process. 6 Proposals. 7 Progress Reports. 8
Feasibility and Recommendation Reports. 9 Laboratory and Project Reports. 10
Instructions and Manuals. 11 Research Reports. 12 Abstracts and Summaries. 13
Grammar, Style, and Punctuation. 14 Documentation. 15 Visuals. 16 Electronic
Publishing. 17 Presentations and Briefings. 18 Business Communications. 19
Resumes, Cover Letters, and Interviews. 20 Team Writing. Index
1 Professionalism and Ethics. 2 Moral Reasoning. 3 Theories of Right Conduct.
4 Character. 5 Engineering as Social Experimentation. 6 Commitment to Safety.
7 Workplace Responsibilities and Rights. 8 Honesty. 9 Environmental Ethics. 10
Global Economy. 11 Engineers and Technological Change. Appendix A General
Resources on Engineering Ethics. Appendix B Codes of Ethics: NSPE, ABET, IEEE,
AICHE, ASCE, ASME
168
11/15/06 5:34:01 PM
General Engineering
Numerical Methods
NUMERICAL METHODS FOR ENGINEERS
Fifth Edition
NEW
APPLIED NUMERICAL METHODS WITH MATLAB
FOR ENGINEERS AND SCIENTISTS
Second Edition
by Steven C. Chapra, Tufts University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313290-7 / MHID: 0-07-313290-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125921-7 / MHID: 0-07-125921-X [IE]
The web site features student and instructor resources such as an image
bank, lecture slides, helpful web links, study objectives, and more!
(Browse http://www.mhhe.com/chapra)
Steven Chapra’s second edition, Applied Numerical Methods
with MATLAB for Engineers and Scientists, is written for
engineers and scientists who want to learn numerical problem
solving. This text focuses on problem-solving (applications)
rather than theory, using MATLAB, and is intended for
Numerical Methods users; hence theory is included only to
inform key concepts. The second edition feature new material
such as Numerical Differentiation and ODE's: Boundary-Value
Problems.
For those who require a more theoretical approach, see
Chapra's best-selling Numerical Methods for Engineers, 5/e
(2006), also by McGraw-Hill.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Based on response from users and reviewers, 4 New Chapters
have been added to the second edition to provide a more accessible
presentation, while maintaining its student-friendly flavor.
~Optimization
~Numerical Differentiation
~ODES: Boundary-Value Problems
~Fast Fourier Transform. This appendix chapter is presented in an
introductory fashion to illustrate the power of MATLAB and to let
students go away recognizing that although they have just scratched
the surface, they might want to pursue the topic in greater depth in
future courses.
• 50% new or revised chapter and homework problems
FEATURES
• Explanations are straight-forward and practically oriented. The
math level is considered, just to be at the right level--not too easy or
rigorous, just right.
• Extensive use of engineering examples, case studies, and
applications are given throughout the text.
• Each chapter is well integrated with MATLAB M-files. In addition,
relevant MATLAB functions are introduced in each chapter.
• MATLAB is used as the primary computing environment. All
algorithms are presented as m-files.
• A text Web site is available at http://www.mhhe.com/chapra
CONTENTS
Part One Modeling, Computers, and Error Analysis. 1. Mathematical Modeling
Numerical Methods and Problem Solving. 2. MATLAB Fundamentals. 3.
Programming with MATLAB. 4. Roundoff and Trunication Errors. Part Two Roots
and Optimization. 5. Roots: Bracketing Methods. 6. Roots: Open Methods. 7.
Optimization. Part Three Linear Systems. 8. Linear Algebraic Equations and
Matrices. 9. Gauss Elimination. 10. LU Factorization. 11. Matrix Inverse and
Condition. 12. Iterative Methods. Part Four Curve Fitting. 13. Linear Regression.
14. General Linear Least-Squares and Non-Linear Regression. 15. Polynomial
Interpolation. 16. Splines and Piecewise Interpolation. Part Five Integration and
Differentiation. 17. Numerical Integration Formulas. 18. Numerical Integration of
Functions. 19. Numerical Differentiation. Part Six Ordinary Differential Equations.
20. Initial-Value Problems. 21. Adaptive Methods and Stiff Systems. 22. BoundaryValue Problems Appendix A: Eigenvalues Appendix B: MATLAB Built-in Functions
Appendix C: MATLAB M-File Functions Bibliography Index
by Steven C. Chapra, Tufts University, Raymond Canale
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310156-9 / MHID: 0-07-310156-7
(with Engg Sub Card)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124429-9 / MHID: 0-07-124429-8 [IE]
The Online Learning Center will contain general textbook information,
helpful Web links, MATLAB resources, and more! (Browse http://www.
mhhe.com/chapra)
The fifth edition of Numerical Methods for Engineers with
Software and Programming Applications continues its
tradition of excellence. Instructors love this text because it is a
comprehensive text that is easy to teach from. Students love it
because it is written for them—with great pedagogy and clear
explanations and examples throughout. The text features a broad
array of applications, including all engineering disciplines.
The revision retains the successful pedagogy of the prior
editions. Chapra and Canale’s unique approach opens each
part of the text with sections called Motivation, Mathematical
Background, and Orientation, preparing the student for what
is to come in a motivating and engaging manner. Each part
closes with an Epilogue containing sections called Trade-Offs,
Important Relationships and Formulas, and Advanced Methods
and Additional References. Much more than a summary, the
Epilogue deepens understanding of what has been learned
and provides a peek into more advanced methods. Users will
find use of software packages, specifically MATLAB and Excel
with VBA. This includes material on developing MATLAB mfiles and VBA macros. Also, many, many more challenging
problems are included. The expanded breadth of engineering
disciplines covered is especially evident in the problems,
which now cover such areas as biotechnology and biomedical
engineering.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Approximately 150 new, challenging problems drawn from all
engineering disciplines.
• The higher level material has been streamlined and some has
been eliminated completely.
• Completely new sections on a number of topics including
multiple integrals and the modified false position method.
Features
• Challenging problems drawn from all engineering disciplines are
included in the text.
• Chapra is know for his clear explanations and elegantly rendered
examples.
• The text includes a helpful appendix chapter, Getting Started with
MATLAB.
CONTENTS
Part 1 Modeling, Computers, and Error Analysis: 1 Mathematical Modeling and
Engineering Problem Solving. 2 Programming and Software. 3 Approximations
and Round-Off Errors. 4 Truncation Errors and the Taylor Series. Part 2 Roots of
Equations: 5 Bracketing Methods. 6 Open Methods. 8 Engineering Applications:
Roots of Equations. Part 3 Linear Algebraic Equations: 9 Gauss Elimination. 10
LU Decomposition and Matrix Inversion. 11 Special Matrices and Gauss-Seidel.
12 Engineering Applications: Linear Algebraic Equations. Part 4 Optimization:
13 One-Dimensional Un con strained Optimization. 14 Multidimensional
Unconstrained Optimization. 15 Constrained Optimization. 16 Engineering
Applications: Optimization. Part 5 Curve Fitting: 17 Least-Squares Regression.
18 Interpolation. 19 Fourier Approximation. 20 Engineering Applications: Curve
Fitting. Part 6 Numerical Differentiation and Integration: 21 Newton-Cotes
Integration Formulas. 22 Integration of Equations. 23 Numerical Differentiation.
24 Engineering Applications: Numerical Integration and Differentiation. Part
7 Ordinary Differential Equations: 25 Runge-Kutta Methods. 26 Stiffness and
Multistep Methods. 27 Boundary-Value and Eigenvalue Problems. 28 Engineering
Applications: Ordinary Differential Equations. Part 8 Partial Dif ferential
Equations: 29 Finite Difference: Elliptic Equations. 30 Finite Difference: Parabolic
Equations. 31 Finite-Element Method. 32 Engineering Applications: Partial
Differential Equations. Appendix A The Fourier Series. Appendix B Getting Started
with Matlab. Bibliography. Index
169
11/15/06 5:34:02 PM
General Engineering
SCIENTIFIC COMPUTING
Second Edition
by Michael T Heath, University of Illinois, Computer Science
2002 / 576 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-239910-3 / MHID: 0-07-239910-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124489-3 / MHID: 0-07-124489-1 [IE]
http://www.mhhe.com/engcs/compsci/heath
CONTENTS
1 Scientific Computing. 2 Systems of Linear Equations. 3 Linear Least Squares. 4
Eigenvalues Problems. 5 Nonlinear Equations. 6 Optimization. 7 Interpolation.
8 Numerical Integration and Differentiation. 9 Initial Value Problems for ODEs.
10 Boundary Value Problems for ODEs. 11 Partial Differential Equations. 12 Fast
Fourier Transform. 13 Random Numbers and Simulation
variables, and principles of variable selection in multivariate models.
• Extensive coverage of the impact of outliers on various statistical
procedures.
• P-value approach to hypothesis is emphasized. While fixed-level
testing and power calculations are also covered, the text includes
extensive coverage of the P-value approach.
• Computer Software results emphasized over matrices. The chapter
on multiple regression emphasizes the use of computer software and
interpretation of results, rather than computational formulas involving
matrices.
• Multiple testing is discussed extensively.
CONTENTS
1 Sampling and Descriptive Statistics. 2 Probability. 3 Propagation of Error. 4
Commonly Used Distributions. 5 Confidence Intervals. 6 Hypothesis Testing.
7 Correlation and Simple Linear Regression. 8 Multiple Regression. 9 Factorial
Experiments. 10 Statistical Quality Control. Appendix A Tables. Appendix B Partial
Derivatives. Appendix C Bibliography
Engineering Math/Statistics
STATISTICS FOR ENGINEERS AND SCIENTISTS
by William C Navidi, Colorado School of Mines
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-255160-0 / MHID: 0-07-255160-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121492-6 / MHID: 0-07-121492-5 [IE]
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310767-7 / MHID: 0-07-310767-0
(with CD-Rom)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111723-4 / MHID: 0-07-111723-7
[IE with CD-Rom]
http://www.mhhe.com/navidi
Statistics for Engineers and Scientists stands out for its crystal
clear presentation of applied statistics. Suitable for a one or
two semester course, the book takes a practical approach to
methods of statistical modeling and data analysis that are most
often used in scientific work. The presentation is oriented
toward engineering and the natural sciences, but since the
basic methods and ideas of statistics are applicable to all
subjects, this book will benefit students in business and the
social sciences as well.
FEATURES
• Readable style explains difficult concepts clearly. While including
the mathematics necessary for clear understanding, the text makes
extensive use of examples to motivate fundamental concepts and to
develop intuition.
• Contemporary, real-world data sets.
• Extensive coverage of simulation methods. At a level appropriate
for introductory students, the text presents a solid introduction to
simulation methods, including the bootstrap and applications to
estimating Probabilities, estimating bias, computing confidence
intervals, and testing hypotheses.
• Extensive coverage of propagation of error. This topic, important
to engineers and scientists, is not covered in many other books in this
category.
• Computer output integrated in examples and problems. In
line with modern trends, the text includes numerous examples of
computer output and contains exercises suitable for solving with
computer software. The student edition of MINITAB, the widely used
statistics software package, is available bundled with the book.
• Flexible presentation of probability. The text allows instructors
wide latitude in choosing the depth and extent of their coverage of
this topic.
• Extensive coverage of linear model diagnostic procedures. This
coverage includes examination of residual plots, transformations of
INTRODUCTION TO PROBABILITY AND
STATISTICS
Principles and Applications for Engineering and The
Computing Sciences, Fourth Edition
by J. Susan Milton, Radford University and Jesse C. Arnold, Virginia
Polytechnic Institute
2003 / 816 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246836-6 / MHID: 0-07-246836-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124248-6 / MHID: 0-07-124248-1
[IE, 2 Color Text]
http://www.mhhe.com/miltonarnold
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Probability and Counting: Interpreting Probabilities. Sample
Spaces and Events. Permutations and Combinations. 2 Some Prob a bil i ty
Laws: Axioms of Probability. Conditional Probability. Independence and
the Multiplication Rule. Bayes’ Theorem. 3 Discrete Distributions: Random
Variables. Discrete Probablility Densities. Expectation and Dis tri bu tion
Parameters. Geometric Distribution and the Moment Generating Function.
Binomial Distribution. Negative Bi no mi al Distribution. Hy per geo met ric
Distribution. Poisson Distribution. 4 Continuous Distributions: Con-tinuous
Densities. Expectation and Distribution Parameters. Gamma Distribution. Normal
Distri-bution. Normal Probability Rule and Chebyshev’s Inequality. Normal
Approximation to the Binomial Distribution. Weibull Distribution and Reliability.
Transformation of Variables. Simulating a Continuous Distribution. 5 Joint
Distributions: Joint Densities and Independence. Expectation and Covariance.
Correlation. Conditional Densities and Regression. Transformation of Variables.
6 Descriptive Statistics: Random Sampling. Picturing the Distribution. Sample
Statistics. Boxplots. 7 Estimation: Point Estimation. The Method of Moments
and Maximum Likelihood. Functions of Random Variables—Distribution of X.
Interval Estimation and the Central Limit Theorem. 8 Inferences on the Mean
and Variance of a Distribution: Interval Estimation of Variability. Estimating the
Mean and the Student-t Distribution. Hypothesis Testing. Significance Testing.
Hypothesis and Significance Tests on the Mean. Hypothesis Tests. Alternative
Nonparametric Methods. 9 Inferences on Proportions: Estimating Proportions.
Testing Hypothesis on a Proportion. Comparing Two Proportions: Estimation.
Coparing Two Proportions: Hypothesis Testing. 10 Comparing Two Means and
Two Variances: Point Estimation. Comparing Variances: The F Distribution.
Comparing Means: Variances Equal (Pooled Test). Comparing Means: Variances
Unequal. Compairing Means: Paried Data. Alternative Nonparametric Methods.
A Note on Technology. 11 Sample Linear Regression and Correlation: Model
and Parameter Estimation. Properties of Least-Squares Estimators. Confidence
Interval Estimation and Hypothesis Testing. Repeated Measurements and Lack
of Fit. Residual Analysis. Correlation. 12 Multiple Linear Regression Models:
Least-Squares Procedures for Model Fitting. A Matrix Approach to Least Squares.
Properties of the Least-Squares Estimators. Interval Estimation. Testing Hypotheses
about Model Parameters. Use of Indicator or “Dummy” Variables. Criteria
for Variable Selection. Model Transformation and Concluding Remarks. 13
Analysis of Variance: One-Way Classification Fixed-Effects Model. Comparing
170
11/15/06 5:34:03 PM
General Engineering
Variances. Pairwise Comparison. Testing Contrasts. Randomized Complete Block
Design. Latin Squares. Random-Effects Models. Design Models in Matrix Form.
Alternative Nonparametric Methods. 14 Factorial Experiments: Two-Factor
Analysis of Variance. Extension to Three Factors. Random and Mixed Model
Factorial Experiments. 2^k Factorial Experiments. 2^k Factorial Experiments in
an Incomplete Block Design. Fractional Factorial Experiments. 15 Categorical
Data: Multinomial Distribution. Chi-Squared Goodness of Fit Tests. Testing
for Independence. Comparing Proportions. 16 Statistical Quality Control:
Properties of Control Charts. Shewart Control Charts for Measurements. Shewart
Control Charts for Attributes. Tolerance Limits. Acceptance Sampling. Two-Stage
Acceptance Sampling. Extensions in Quality Control. Appendix A Statistical Tables.
Appendix B Answers to Selected Problems. Appendix C Selected Derivations
INTRODUCTION TO PROBABILITY AND
STATISTICS FOR SCIENTISTS AND ENGINEERS
by Walter A. Rosenkrantz, University of Massachusetts at Amherst
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116897-7 / MHID: 0-07-116897-4 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Data Analysis/2 Probability Theory/3 Discrete Random Variables and their
Distribution Functions/4 Continuous Random Variables and their Distribution
Functions/5 Multivariate Probability Distributions/6 Sampling Distribution
Theory/7 Point and Interval Estimation/8 Inferences about Population Means/9
Inferences about Population Proportions/10 Linear Regression and Correlation/11
Multiple Linear Regression/12 Single Factor Experiments Analysis of Variance/13
Design and Analysis of Multifactor Experiments/14 Statistical Quality Control/
Appendix A Tables/Answers to Odd-Numbered Problems
Finite Element Methods
AN INTRODUCTION TO THE FINITE ELEMENT
METHOD
by Wahyu Kuntjoro
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124144-1 / MHID: 0-07-124144-2
(An Asian Publication)
An Introduction to the Finite Element Method is organized and
written in such a way that students should not find it difficult
to understand the concepts and applications discussed in the
book. Rigorous mathematical treatments and derivations are
kept to a minimum. A consistent approach of finite element
formulation and solution is used for every domain analysis
described in the book. Plenty of simple examples are given to
show students how to solve related problems. The exercises at
the end of some chapters are within students’ capability and
can be done without using a computer. Although this book is
intended primarily for undergraduate students, it is also suitable
for the early part of finite element courses in postgraduate
programme. The basic and conceptual approaches which are
used also make this book appropriate for practising engineers
who want to know and learn the finite element method.
CONTENTS
Preface. 1-- Introduction. 2--Linear Spring Elements and the Direct Equilibrium
Method. 3--Bar Element. 4--Truss Elements. 5--Beam and Frame Elements. 6-The Minimum Potential Energy Method. 7--Constant Strain Triangular Elements.
8--Higher-Order Elements and Isoparametric Formulation. 9-- Solid Elements
- Tetrahedral. 10--Analysis of Structural Dynamics. 11--Analysis of Heat Transfer.
12--Finite Element Applications and Computer Programming. Appendix A.
Appendix B. Index
AN INTRODUCTION TO THE FINITE ELEMENT
METHOD
Third Edition
by JN Reddy, Texas A&M University
2006 / 912 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-246685-0 / MHID: 0-07-246685-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124473-2 / MHID: 0-07-124473-5 [IE]
The Instructor and Student Resource Web site contains general
textbook information, solutions to end-of-chapter problems, executables
and supplementary chapters on the FEM1D and FEM2D computer
programs. (Browse http://www.mhhe.com/reddy3e)
J.N. Reddy’s, An Introduction to the Finite Element Method,
third edition is an update of one of the most popular FEM
textbooks available. The book retains its strong conceptual
approach, clearly examining the mathematical underpinnings
of FEM, and providing a general approach of engineering
application areas. Known for its detailed, carefully selected
example problems and extensive selection of homework
problems, the author has comprehensively covered a wide
range of engineering areas making the book approriate for
all engineering majors, and underscores the wide range of
use FEM has in the professional world. A supplementary text
Web site located at http://www.mhhe.com/reddy3e contains
password-protected solutions to end-of-chapter problems,
general textbook information, supplementary chapters on the
FEM1D and FEM2D computer programs, and more!
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Approximately 30% of the problems have been revised or are
new to this edition.
• The previous Chapter 3, Second-Order Boundary Value
Problems, has been split into two chapters for the third edition.
Chapter 3 is now Second-Order Differential Equations in OneDimension: Finite Element Models, and Chapter 4 is now SecondOrder Differential Equations in One-Dimension: Applications.
• A text Web site located at http://www.mhhe.com/reddy3e hosts
solutions to end-of-chapter problems, executables, supplementary
chapter on FEM1D and FEM2D computer programs and general
textbook information.
FEATURES
• Worked examples are said to be one of the best features of this
text. The examples are detailed, carefully selected and a number of
examples that show FEM applications are included in this text.
• Strong coverage of FEM’s mathematical foundations.
Comprehensive coverage of material from general field problems
as well heat transfer, fluid mechanics, and solid and structural
mechanics (bars, beams, frames, plane elasticity and plate bending).
• The author’s writing style is clear and his explanation plenty.
• The text includes a variety of problems including some for hand
calculation, some to be solved using the computer, and others of
the class project variety, which can be done with commercial FEM
packages if the professor so chooses. The problems are a major
feature of this text.
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 2 Mathematical Preliminaries, Integral Formulations, and
Variational Methods. 3 Second-order Differential Equations in One Dimension:
Finite Element Models. 4 Second-order Differential Equations in One Dimension:
Applications. 5 Beams and Frames. 6 Eigenvalue and Time-Dependent Problems.
7 Computer Implementation. 8 Single-Variable Problems in Two Dimensions. 9
Interpolation Functions, Numerical Integration, and Modeling Considerations.
10 Flows of Viscous Incompressible Fluids. 11 Plane Elasticity. 12 Bending of
Elastic Plates. 13 Computer Implementation of Two-Dimensional Problems. 14
Prelude to Advanced Topics
171
11/15/06 5:34:03 PM
General Engineering
• Good programming practice summaries and FORTRAN statement
summaries at the end of each chapter
FUNDAMENTALS OF FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS
by David Hutton, Washington State University, Pullman
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292236-3 / MHID: 0-07-292236-2 (with Bind-In
SubCard)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124160-1 / MHID: 0-07-124160-4 [IE]
This new text, intended for the senior undergraduate finite
element course in civil or mechanical engineering departments,
gives students a solid basis in the mechanical principles of the
finite element method and provides a theoretical foundation for
applying available software analysis packages and evaluating the
results obtained. Dr. Hutton discusses basic theory of the finite
element method while avoiding variational calculus, instead
focusing upon the engineering mechanics and mathematical
background that may be expected of a senior undergraduate
engineering student. The text relies upon basic equilibrium
principles, introduction of the principle of minimum potential
energy, and the Galerkin finite element method, which readily
allows application of the FEM to nonstructural problems.
CONTENTS
1 Basic Concepts of the Finite Element Method. 2 Stiffness Matrices, Spring and
Bar Elements. 3 Truss Structures: The Direct Stiffness Method. 4 Flexure Elements.
5 Method of Weighted Residuals. 6 Interpolation Functions for General Element
Formulation. 7 Applications in Heat Transfer. 8 Applications in Fluid Mechanics.
9 Applications in Solid Mechanics. 10 Structural Dynamics. Appendix A Matrix
Mathematics. Appendix B Equations of Elasticity. Appendix C Solution Techniques
for Linear Algebraic Equations. Appendix D The Finite Element Personal Computer
Program. Appendix E Problems for Computer Solution
CONTENTS
1 Introduction to Computers and the Fortran Language. 2 Basic Elements of Fortran.
3 Program Design and Branching Structures . 4 Loops and Character Manipulation.
5 Basic I/O Concepts. 6 Introduction to Arrays . 7 Introduction to Procedures. 8
Additional Features of Arrays. 9 Additional Features of Procedures. 10 More about
Character Variables. 11 Additional Intrinsic Data Types. 12 Derived Data Types
13 Advanced Features of Procedures and Modules. 14 Advanced I/O Concepts.
15 Pointers and Dynamic Data Structures. 16 Object-Oriented Programming in
Fortran. 17 Redundant, Obsolescent, and Deleted Fortran Features. Appendix
A ASCII and EBCDIC Coding Systems. Appendix B Fortran 95/2003 Intrinsic
Procedures. Appendix C Order of Statements in a Fortran 95/2003 Program.
Appendix D Glossary. Appendix E Answers to Quizzes
NEW
MATHCAD: A TOOL FOR ENGINEERS AND
SCIENTISTS (B.E.S.T. SERIES)
Second Edition
by Philip J. Pritchard, Manhattan College
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319185-0 / MHID: 0-07-319185-X
B.E.S.T
Mathcad: A Tool for Engineering Problem Solving explains
how to use Mathcad 13(Student and Standard), >This book is
current with the latest release of mathcad, with the focus on the
fundamentals, is enriched with great motivating applications,
solid homework problems, appealing to both engineers and
scientists.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
FORTRAN 95/2003 FOR SCIENTISTS & ENGINEERS
Third Edition
• Examples updated to Mathcad 13, which is the most current
version.
• Examples and homework problems updated to account for a
broader range of engineering disciplines, in addition to mechanical
and electrical, to include: civil, chemical, and environmental
engineering.
• Pedagogy updated to be more student-friendly, including new
beginning sections at the start of each chapter that spell out specific
features to be covered, new end-of-chapter summaries, and the
addition of tables and boxes where appropriate that will reduce the
amount of math theory in the text.
• Examples and applications related to the sciences.
Browse http://www.mhhe.com/chapman3e
FEATURES
NEW
by Stephen J. Chapman, BAE SYSTEMS Australia
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319157-7 / MHID: 0-07-319157-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128578-0 / MHID: 0-07-128578-4
Chapman's Fortran for Scientists and Engineers is intended for
We are the most current Fortran book in the market.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Features of Mathcad are immediately followed by engineering
examples.
CONTENTS
1 What Is Mathcad and Why Use It? 2 The Basics of Mathcad. 3 How to Graph
Functions. 4 Symbolic and Numeric Calculus. 5 How to Solve Equations. 6
Vectors, Matrices, and More. 7 Solving Ordinary Differential Equations. 8
Doing Statistics with Mathcad. 9 Importing and Exporting, the Web, and Some
Advanced Concepts.
• Text has been revised to include the latest updates in response to
the release of FORTRAN 2003.
• A new chapter, Object-Oriented Programming in Fortran has been
added.
FEATURES
• Clear explanations of FORTRAN syntax and programming
procedures
• Discusses changes that have been implemented since FORTRAN
77
• Top-Down design methodology and procedures
172
11/15/06 5:34:04 PM
General Engineering
NEW
SPREADSHEET TOOLS FOR ENGINEERS USING
EXCEL
Third Edition
by Byron S Gottfried, University of Pittsburgh-Pittsburgh
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297184-2 / MHID: 0-07-297184-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110663-4 / MHID: 0-07-110663-4 [IE]
This best-selling Spreadsheet book provides excellent coverage
of all versions of Excel including the latest version, Excel 2002.
It discusses how to use Excel to solve a variety of problems
in introductory engineering analysis, such as graphing data,
unit conversions, simple statistical analysis, sorting, searching
and analyzing data, curve fitting, interpolation, solving
algebraic equations, logical decisions, evaluating integrals,
comparing economic alternatives, and finding optimum
solutions. Numerous examples are included illustrating both
traditional and spreadsheet solutions to a variety of problems.
The underlying mathematical solution procedures are also
discussed, so that the reader is provided with an understanding
of what the spreadsheet does and how it does it.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
•
Material on select new features found in Excel 2003.
FEATURES
• Successfully combines an introduction to the fundamentals
of Excel with a clear presentation of Engineering problem solving
methodology.
• Abundant problems and examples.
• Chapters 2-14 cover the most common analytical techniques
used by engineers.
• Material on select new features found in Excel 2002 (included in
Office XP).
• New material including coverage of line graphs and pie charts,
a discussion of the problems associated with circular references
(particularly in regard to the solution of algebraic equations),
a discussion of convergence problems when solving algebraic
equations and new material on pivot tables.
• The author has rewritten the material on semi-log graphs, log-log
graphs, and curve fitting and has changed the order of the material in
response to reviewer feedback.
• Contains a wealth of technical analysis geared toward
introductory-level students and plenty of background information on
what the technical terms mean or are based upon.
NEW
TEAMWORK AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Third Edition
by Karl A Smith, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310367-9 / MHID: 0-07-310367-5
Smith has been convinced through personal experience
in the classroom that the potential for extraordinary work
from teams makes it worth the effort. The goals for the text
are: • understand the dynamics of team development and
interpersonal problem solving, • to identify strategies for
accelerating the development of true team effectiveness, •
to understand the critical dimensions of project scope, time,
and cost management • to understand critical technical
competencies in project management • to explore a variety
of “best practices” including anticipating, preventing, and
overcoming barriers to project success.
FEATURES
• This unique text will enhance a student’s understanding of critical
technical competencies in project management, the dynamics of
team development and interpersonal problem solving, and the
critical dimensions of project scope, time, and cost management.
• Cases and vignettes from actual student group projects and
problems provide a context for text material and provoke critical
thinking.
• This title is available as a customized title on the McGraw-Hill
Primis Database. Build the perfect book for your course via Primis.
INTRODUCTION TO GRAPHICS
COMMUNICATIONS FOR ENGINEERS
(B.E.S.T Series), Third Edition
by Gary R Bertoline, Purdue University, West Lafayette
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304836-9 / MHID: 0-07-304836-4
http://www.mhhe.com/engcs/general/best
Introduction to Graphics Communication for Engineers is
a short introductory technical drawing text intended for use
in technical drawing or drafting courses at two and four year
schools or other technology programs. Powerful computers
and CAD software are of little use to engineers who do not
fully understand the fundamentals of graphics communication
principles and 3-D modeling strategies, or do not possess
a level of visualization ability. Because of this, Bertoline
concentrates on the concepts and skills necessary to sketch
and create 2-D drawings and 3-D CAD models in this text.
New to the third edition are “Design in Industry Boxes” that
cover an aspect of design as practiced in industry. Quotes and
interesting stories from practicing engineers make the boxes
motivating and informative for students. Also new are practice
sketching problems included throughout each chapter, which
allow students a chance to practice what they are learning.
This book is part of the B.E.S.T. (Basic Engineering Series
and Tools), which consists of modularized textbooks offering
virtually every topic and specialty likely to be of interest to
engineers.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• New “Design in Industry” boxes have been added to the fourth
edition. Each of these boxes cover some aspect of design as practiced
in industry. Students will learn how design is done in the real world
from these interesting stories presented by practicing engineers and
technologists.
• New to this edition are practice problems located throughout each
chapter. This new feature gives students drawing practice as they
learn new concepts. Through immediate hands-on practice, students
can more readily grasp chapter material.
• New end-of-chapter sketching problems have been added,
reinforcing what students have learned in the chapter.
173
11/15/06 5:34:05 PM
General Engineering
FEATURES
• Pedagogically sound, this book provides a list of objectives at the
beginning of each chapter, step-by-step instructions on how to draw,
and a wide assortment of problems that can be assigned to reinforce
topics covered.
• Sketching worksheets are integrated into the end of each chapter.
These worksheets are excellent for sketching assignments, used to
augment CAD work.
• As part of the McGraw-Hill B.E.S.T. (Basic Engineering Series and
Tools), this book can be customized on-line and combined with
other BEST titles to be sold to students either in an eletronic form or
traditional book form.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction to Graphics Communication. Chapter 2 Sketching and
Text. Chapter 3 Section and Auxiliary Views. Chapter 4 Dimensioning and
Tolerancing Practices. Chapter 5 Reading and Constructing Working Drawings.
Chapter 6 Design and 3-D Modeling
POCKET BOOK OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR FOR
ENGINEERS AND SCIENTISTS
by Leo Finkelstein, Wright State University-Dayton
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352946-2 / MHID: 0-07-352946-X
Pocket Book of English Grammar for Engineers and Scientists
is geared specifically to the needs of engineering and science
practitioners and students, although it is also appropriate
for anyone doing technical or business writing. The book
is unique among grammar manuals not only because of its
straightforward, simplified organizational structure, but also
because of its use of innovative tools and examples.
FEATURES
• Sensible Organization. An overall structure organized around the
eight parts of speech–which is exactly how the English language is
organized.
• Focus on Fundamentals. A comprehensive treatment of the most
important fundamentals of English grammar in a condensed, usable
form–it has the quick answers that time-challenged people need.
• Engineering and Science Related Examples. A rich collection of
examples and illustrations that relate directly to engineering and
science topics.
• Innovative Learning Tools. Clear models and explanations keyed
to diagrams, tables, and flow charts, which provide a very effective,
visual approach.
• Accessible Format. Extensive indexing and cross-referencing
throughout the book to provide easy access to the information
required.
• Standalone Glossary. A comprehensive glossary with its own
dedicated examples and explanations apart from the rest of the book.
The glossary is the perfect starting point for those who are seeking
quick explanations for pressing grammar issues.
• For expanded coverage of technical writing, take a look at Leo
Finkelstein, Jr.’s other book, Pocket Book of Technical Writing for
Engineers and Scientists, 2e, ISBN 0-07-297683-7.
CONTENTS
1 Introduction. 1.1 Importance of grammar. 1.2 Parts of speech. 1.3 Grammar
and English as a second language. 1.4 Sentence structure. 2 Nouns. 2.1 Definition
and functions. 2.2 Number. 2.3 Type. 2.4 Case. 2.5 Gender. 2.6 Offensive nouns.
2.7 Appositives. 2.8 Noun clauses. 3 Pronouns. 3.1 Definition and functions.
3.2 Types of pronouns. 4 Adjectives. 4.1 Definition and functions. 4.2 Classes of
adjectives. 4.3 Articles and other determiners. 4.4 Adjectival clauses. 4.5 Levels
of comparison for adjectives. 5 Verbs. 5.1 Definition and function. 5.2 Tense.
5.3 Person and number. 5.4 Irregular verbs. 5.5 Form and voice. 5.6 Mood. 6
Adverbs. 6.1 Adverbials. 6.2 Levels of comparison for adverbs. 6.3 Compound and
absolute verbs. 6.4 Placement of adverbs. 6.5 Transitional phrases and adverbial
conjuctions. 7 Prepositions. 7.1 Uses of prepositional phrases. 7.2 Prepositions
as a part of two-word verbs. 8 Conjunctions. 8.1 Coordinating conjunctions.
8.2 Correlative conjunctions. 8.3 Subordinating conjunctions. 8.4 Adverbial
conjunctions. 9 Interjections. 10 Punctuation. 10.1 Apostrophe. 10.2 Brackets.
10.3 Colon. 10.4 Comma. 10.5 Dash. 10.6 Ellipsis. 10.7 Exclamation point. 10.8
Hyphen. 10.9 Parentheses. 10.10 Period. 10.11 Question mark. 10.12 Quotation
marks. 10.13 Semicolon. 10.14 Slash. 11 Final Thoughts. 12 Glossary
INTRODUCTION TO MATLAB 7 FOR ENGINEERS
by William Palm, University of Rhode Island—Kingston
2005 / 752 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292242-4 / MHID: 0-07-292242-7
(with Bind-In Card
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123262-3 / MHID: 0-07-123262-1 [IE]
This site contains power point slides, Appendix E: Some Project
Suggestions, and complete solutions to all of the Test Your
Understanding exercises and all the chapter problems. (Browse http://
www.mhhe.com/palm)
This is a simple, concise book designed to be useful for
beginners and to be kept as a reference. MATLAB is presently
a globally available standard computational tool for engineers
and scientists. The terminology, syntax, and the use of the
programming language are well defined and the organization
of the material makes it easy to locate information and
navigate through the textbook. The text covers all the major
capabilities of MATLAB that are useful for beginning students.
An instructor’s manual and other web resources are available.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Expanded coverage of programming now includes structured
programming and logical variables.
• Function handles, anonymous functions, subfunctions, and nested
functions are now treated.
• Coverage of Simulink® has been expanded to a separate chapter in
light of its growing popularity.
• A new Appendix B contains an introduction to producing
animation and sound with MATLAB.
FEATURES
• The text is written for freshman engineering students and uses
mathematics appropriate for this level.
• Numerous examples and homework problems drawn from all the
fields of engineering.
• Students can use the text as a reference in later courses because it
contains many tables that summarize the MATLAB commands.
CONTENTS
1 An Overview of MATLAB. 2 Numeric, Cell, and Structure Arrays. 3 Functions and
Files. 4 Programming with MATLAB. 5 Advanced Plotting and Model Building. 6
Linear Algebraic Equations. 7 Probability, Statistics, and Interpolation. 8 Numerical
Calculus and Differential Equations. 9 Simulink. 10 Symbolic Processing with
MATLAB. Appendix A Guide to Commands and Functions in this Text. Appendix
B Animation and Sound in MATLAB. Appendix C Formatted Output in MATLAB.
Appendix D References. Appendix E Some Project Suggestions (Online). Answers
to Selected Problems
PROBLEM SOLVING
(B.E.S.T Series)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116100-8 / MHID: 0-07-116100-7 [IE]
CONTENTS
Appendix.
174
11/15/06 5:34:06 PM
General Engineering
Project Management:
Engineering
COMPUTER SCIENCE
(B.E.S.T Series)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-913678-7 / MHID: 0-07-913678-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-116788-8 / MHID: 0-07-116788-9
CONTENTS
1 Computers and Computing Fundamentals/2 Getting Started with C/3 The Basics
of C/4 Beginning Decision Making and Looping/5 Functions/6 Arrays and Index
Variables/7 Character Arrays and Strings/8 Pointers, Addresses, and Special
Variable Types/9 Introduction to C++
Internet
INLINE/ONLINE
Fundamentals of the Internet and the World Wide
Web
Second Edition
by Raymond Greenlaw, Armstrong Atlantic State University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-251715-6 / MHID: 0-07-251715-8
(with Passcode Card)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113113-1 / MHID: 0-07-113113-2 [IE]
NEW
TEAMWORK AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Third Edition
by Karl A Smith, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310367-9 / MHID: 0-07-310367-5
Smith has been convinced through personal experience
in the classroom that the potential for extraordinary work
from teams makes it worth the effort. The goals for the text
are: • understand the dynamics of team development and
interpersonal problem solving, • to identify strategies for
accelerating the development of true team effectiveness, •
to understand the critical dimensions of project scope, time,
and cost management • to understand critical technical
competencies in project management • to explore a variety
of “best practices” including anticipating, preventing, and
overcoming barriers to project success.
FEATURES
• This unique text will enhance a student’s understanding of critical
technical competencies in project management, the dynamics of
team development and interpersonal problem solving, and the
critical dimensions of project scope, time, and cost management.
• Cases and vignettes from actual student group projects and
problems provide a context for text material and provoke critical
thinking.
• This title is available as a customized title on the McGraw-Hill
Primis Database. Build the perfect book for your course via Primis.
http://www.mhhe.com/greenlaw
CONTENTS
1 Fundamentals of Electronic Mail. 2 Jump Start: Browsing and Publishing. 3 The
Internet. 4 The World Wide Web. 5 Searching the World Wide Web. 6 Telnet
and FTP. 7 Basic HTML. 8 Web Graphics. 9 Advanced HTML. 10 Newsgroups
and Mailing Lists, Chat Rooms, and MUDs. 11 Electronic Publishing. 12 Web
Programming Material. 13 Multimedia . 14 Privacy and Security Topics. Appendix
A Internet Service Providers. Appendix B Text Editing. Appendix C Pine Mail
Program. Appendix D Basic UNIX. Appendix E HTML Tags. Appendix F Acronyms.
Appendix G My URLs
contact your local
[email protected]
175
11/15/06 5:34:07 PM
General Engineering
Entrepreneurship
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Third Edition
by Clifford F. Gray, and Erik W. Larson
2006 / Hardcover with CD-ROM
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312699-9 / MHID: 0-07-312699-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124446-6 / MHID: 0-07-124446-8
[IE with Student CD and MS Project CD]
http://www.mhhe.com/graylarson3e
This text approaches Project Management from a holistic,
balanced perspective. The text is developed around a
philosophy of a project-driven organization committed to
continuous improvement and organizational learning. The
text is holistic--it directs attention to the needed linkage
between projects and organizational strategy. Many project
management textbooks emphasize the technical aspects of the
subject, while providing scant attention to the human element
in projects. This text succeeds in redressing the balance by
treating both the technical and the behavioral aspects of
the subject in nearly equal parts. Such a balance is possible
because of the complementary backgrounds of the authors:
Gray, a specialist in project management systems with an
operations background, provides strong technical coverage of
project management. Larson, whose professional background
is in organizational behavior, brings a distinctive behavioral
perspective to the subject.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Many new and updated “Snapshots from Practice” and “Research
Highlights” boxes; many new charts and figures.
• Thoroughly revised chapters on strategy (Chapter 2) and
performance measurement and evaluation (Chapter 13). These new
chapters give students an understanding of how project management
needs to be tied to the fundamental bottom line concerns of business,
i.e., an organization’s overall mission and the strategies designed to
accomplish its goals, as well as the application of measurements for
assessing the accomplishment of those goals.
• Chapter 3 on structure and culture has been revised to incorporate
steps organizations are taking to work within current structures and
bureaucracies. This acknowledges the importance of structure and
culture and its challenges and shows how flexibility and introducing
change can have a positive effect on project work.
CONTENTS
Preface. 1. Modern Project Management. 2. Organization Strategies and Project
Selection. 3. Organization: Structure and Culture. 4. Defining the Project. 5.
Estimating Project Times and Costs. 6. Developing a Project Plan. 7. Managing Risk.
8. Scheduling Resources. 9. Reducing Project Duration. 10. Leadership: Being an
Effective Project Manager. 11. Managing Project Teams. 12. Partnering: Managing
Inter-organizational Relations. 13. Progresses and Performance Measurement and
Evaluation. 14. Project Audit and Closure. 15. International Projects. 16. The
Process of Project Management and the Future. Acronyms. Appendix Computer
Project Exercises. Glossary. Project Management Equations. Index.
NEW
TECHNOLOGY VENTURES: FROM IDEA TO
ENTERPRISE
Second Edition
by Richard C. Dorf, University Of California Davis, and Thomas H.
Byers, Stanford University
2008 (October 2006) / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-329442-1 / MHID: 0-07-329442-X
(with Student DVD)
Technology Ventures is the first textbook to thoroughly
examine a global phenomenon known as "technology
entrepreneurship". Now in its second edition, this book
integrates the most valuable entrepreneurship and technology
management theories from some of the world’s leading scholars
and educators with current examples of new technologies and
an extensive suite of media resources.
Dorf and Byers's comprehensive collection of action-oriented
concepts and applications provides both students and
professionals with the tools necessary for success in starting
and growing a technology enterprise. Technology Ventures
details the critical differences between scientific ideas and true
business opportunities.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Concise case studies and boxed examples throughout the book
have been updated and expanded to highlight the most current
technologies and include international ventures.
• A new chapter focused on the business plan includes a business
planning "roadmap" and is supplemented by numerous online
resources.
• A new student DVD is packaged with the text and features video
anecdotes from well-known technology entrepreneurs. "See DVD"
icons are marked in the text to allow for easy referencing between
print and virtual resources.
• An updated suite of web resources includes a book-specific
website featuring additional videos, case studies, and sample
syllabi as well as a password-protected instructor's site with lecture
powerpoints and a solutions manual
• An updated design and art program give the text a more engaging
look and feel.
FEATURES
• A running case study (on AGRAQUEST, a bio-technology firm) is
blended into all chapters of the text.
• The book focuses specifically on technology-based ventures (both
start-ups and initiatives within existing companies), and emphasizes
the role of the team in the entrepreneurial process.
CONTENTS
PART I 1 Capitalism and the Technology Entrepreneur. 2 Opportunity and the
Business Summary. 3 Building a Competitive Advantage. 4 Creating a Strategy
5 Innovation Strategies. PART II 6 Risk and Return. 7 Venture Creation and the
Business Plan. 8 Independent Versus Corporate Ventures. 9 Knowledge, Learning,
and Design. 10 Legal Formation and Intellectual Property. PART III 11 The
Marketing and Sales Plan. 12 The New Enterprise Organization. 13 Acquiring,
Organizing, and Managing Resources. 14 The Management of Operations. 15
Acquisitions, Mergers, and Global Business. PART IV 16 The Profit and Harvest
Plan. 17 The Financial Plan. 18 Sources of Capital. 19 Presenting the Plan
and Negotiating the Deal. 20 Leading a New Technology Venture to Success.
References. Appendix A Business Plans. Appendix B Cases. Information Sources
on the Internet. Glossary. Index
176
11/15/06 5:34:07 PM
General Engineering
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Fifth Edition
by David L. Cleland, University Of Pittsburgh-Pittsburgh, and Lewis
R. Ireland
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-147160-2 / MHID: 0-07-147160-X
Professional Book
CONTENTS
Preface. Acknowledgments. Introduction. Part 1: Introduction. Chapter 1: The
Evolution of Project Management. Chapter 2: Why Project Management? Chapter
3: The Project Management Process. Part 2: The Strategic Context of Projects.
Chapter 4: When to Use Project Management. Chapter 5: The Strategic Context of
Projects. Chapter 6: The Board of Directors and Major Projects. Chapter 7: Project
Stakeholder Management. Chapter 8: Strategic Issues in Project Management.
Part 3: Organizational Design for Project Management. Chapter 9: Organizing
for Project Management. Chapter 10: Project Portfolio Management. Chapter
11: Project Authority. Chapter 12: Project Management Maturity. Part 4: Project
Operations. Chapter 13: Project Planning. Chapter 14: Project Management
Information System. Chapter 15: Project Monitoring. Evaluation, and Control.
Chapter 16: The Project Earned Value Management System. Chapter 17: Project
Termination. Part 5: Interpersonal Dynamics in the Management of Projects.
Chapter 18: Project Leadership. Chapter 19: Project Communications. Chapter
20: Successful Project Teams. Part 6: The Cultural Elements. Chapter 21:
Continuous Improvement Through Projects. Chapter 22: Cultural Considerations
in Project Management. Part 7: New Prospects. Chapter 23: Alternative Project
Teams. INDEX
ENGINEERING STATISTICS DEMYSTIFIED
by Larry J. Stephens, University of Nebraska, Omaha
2007 (November 2006) / Softcover / 448 pgs
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-146272-3 / MHID: 0-07-146272-4
Professional Book
Clueless? Feel Like a Dummy? Get Demystified!
This versatile reference offers solid coverage of the basics
of traditional engineering statistics and also incorporates
examples from the most popular statistical software programs,
making it equally valuable to professionals.
CONTENTS
1. Treatment of data. 1.1 Pareto Diagrams, Dot Diagrams, Stem-and-Leaf Displays,
Histograms. 1.2 Descriptive measures. 1.3 Quartiles and other Percentiles. 1.4
The Calculation of . 2. Probability. 2.1 Sample Spaces and Events. 2.2 Counting
2.3 Probability. 2.4 The Axioms of Probability. 2.5 Some Elementary Theorems.
2.6 Conditional Probability. 2.7 Bayes’ Theorem. 2.8 Mathematical Expectation
and Decision Making. 3. Probability Distributions. 3.1 Random Variables. 3.2
The Binomial Distribution. 3.3 The Hypergeometric Distribution. 3.4 The Mean
and Variance of a Probability Distribution. 3.5 Chebyshev’s Theorem. 3.6 The
Geometric Distribution. 3.7 The Multinomial Distribution. 3.8 Simulation.
4. Probability Densities. 4.1 Continuous Random Variables. 4.2 The Normal
Distribution. 4.3 The Normal Approximation to the Binomial Distribution. 4.4
Other Probability Densities. 4.5 The Uniform Distribution. 4.6 The Log-Normal
Distribution. 4.7 The Gamma Distribution. 4.8 The Beta Distribution. 4.9 The
Weibull Distribution. 4.10 Joint Distributions – Discrete and Continuous. 4.11
Checking Data for Normality. 4.12 Transforming Observations to Near Normality.
4.13 Simulation. 5. Sampling Distribution. 5.1 Populations and Samples. 5.2 The
sampling Distribution of the Mean (s Known). 5.3 The sampling Distribution of
the Mean (s Unknown). 5.4 The sampling Distribution of the Proportion. 5.5
The sampling Distribution of the Variance. 6. Inferences Concerning Means.
6.1 Point Estimation. 6.2 Interval Estimation. 6.3 Tests of Hypotheses. 6.4 Null
Hypotheses and Tests of Hypotheses. 6.5 Hypotheses Concerning One Mean. 6.6
The Relation Between Tests and Confidence Intervals. 6.7 Operating Characteristic
Curves. 6.8 Inferences Concerning Two Means. 6.9 Randomization and Pairing. 7.
Inferences Concerning Variances. 7.1 The Estimation of Variances. 7.2 Hypotheses
Concerning One Variance. 7.3 Hypotheses Concerning Two Variances. 8.
Inferences Concerning Proportions. 8.1 Estimation of Proportions. 8.2 Hypotheses
Concerning One Proportion. 8.3 Hypotheses Concerning Two Proportions. 8.4
Hypotheses Concerning Several Proportions. 8.5 The Analysis of r x c Tables
8.6 Goodness of Fit.
GLOBAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT HANDBOOK
Planning, Organizing and Controlling International
Projects
Second Edition
by David L. Cleland, University Of Pittsburgh-Pittsburgh, and Roland
Gareis, University of Vienna
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-146045-3 / MHID: 0-07-146045-4
Professional Book
Learn and apply successful international project management
techniques. Contributors from 20+ nations reveal how
current project management concepts and techniques can
be successfully applied in different political, cultural, and
geographical settings. Learn how project management is
carried out in major countries such as Canada, China, Russia,
Germany, France, England--and how these techniques can be
applied globally.
• Case histories from around the world provide lessons on the
international application of project management
• 16 completely new chapters including ones on the rebuilding of
Iraq, project management in outsourcing initiatives, and developing
multinational teams
CONTENTS
Part 1: State of the Art Global Project Management. Chapter 1.The Evolution of
Project Management. Chapter 2. Project Management: A Business Process of
the Project-Oriented Company. Chapter 3. The Future of Project Management:
Mapping the Dynamics of Project Management Field in Action. Chapter 4. Total
Life-Cycle System Management. Chapter 5. Developing Multinational Project
Teams. Chapter 6. Risk Identification and Assessment for International Construction
Projects. Chapter 7. Program Management and Project Portfolio Management.
Part 2: Competency Factors in Project Management. Chapter 8. Competencies of
Project Managers. Chapter 9. Managing Risks and Uncertainty in Major Projects
in the New Global Environment. Chapter 10. Managing Human Energy in the
Project-Oriented Company. Chapter 11. Managing Project Management Personnel
and Their Competencies in the Project-Oriented Company. Chapter 12. Lessons
Learned: Rebuilding Iraq in 2004. Chapter 13. Project Critical Success Factors:
The Project-Implementation Profile. Part 3: Management of Global Programs and
Projects. Chapter 14. Project Management for Outsourcing Decisions. Chapter 15.
Project Quality Management in International Projects. Chapter 16. Success Factors
in Virtual Global Software Projects. Chapter 17. Managing Global Projects Over a
Collaborative Knowledge Framework. Part 4: Management of the Project-Oriented
Company. Chapter 18. Management of the Project-Oriented Company; Chapter
19. Project Portfolio Score Card. Chapter 20. Partnering in Projects. Chapter 21.
Business Process Management in the Project-Oriented Company. Part 5: National
Project Management. Chapter 22. Project Management in Austria: Analysis of the
Maturity of Austria as a Project-Oriented Nation. Chapter 23. A Brief Insight of
Project Management in the Mainland of China. Chapter 24. Project Management
in Australia. Chapter 25. Project Management in Romania. Chapter 26. Japanese
Project Management Practices on Global Projects.
177
11/15/06 5:34:08 PM
General Engineering
178
11/15/06 5:34:08 PM
Title Index
A
A+ Certification All-In-One Exam Guide, 6e, Meyers..............76
Advanced Computer Architecture, Hwang .......................42,154
Advanced Microprocessors, 2e, Tabak ...............................60,160
Advanced Microprocessors & Peripherals: Architecture,
Programming and Interfacing, Ray ..................................154
Advanced Programming Using Visual Basic.Net, 3e,
Bradley .........................................................................21,73
Advantage Series: Microsoft Excel 2002, Introductory,
Hutchinson-Clifford.........................................................68
Advantage Series: Microsoft Office 2007, Coulthard ...............64
Advantage Series: Microsoft Office 2003, Coulthard ...............64
Advantage Series: Office XP Vol I, Hutchinson-Clifford .........63
Advantage Series: Office XP Vol II, Hutchinson-Clifford ........63
Advantage Series: Access 2002, Complete,
Advantage Series: Access 2002, Introductory,
Advantage Series: Powerpoint 2002, Introductory,
Advantage Series: Word 2002, Complete,
Advantage Series: Word 2002, Introductory,
AMA Handbook of Project Management, The, 2e,
Dinsmore ........................................................................104
Analysis and Design of Digital Integrated Circuits, 3e,
Hodges ............................................................................130
Annual Editions: Computers in Society 06/07, 13e,
DePalma .........................................................................107
Antennas, 3e, Kraus ...............................................................141
Anti-Hacker Tool Kit, 3e, Shema .............................................82
Application Cases in Management Information Systems, 5e,
Morgan .............................................................................98
Applied C: An Introduction and More, Fischer ................18,166
Applied Numerical Methods with Matlab for Engineers and
Scientists, 2e, Chapra .................................................50,169
Artificial Intelligence, 2e, Rich .................................................49
Assembly Language Programming and Organization of the
IBM PC, Yu .......................................................................40
ATM Networks, 2e, Kasera....................................................160
B
Basic Circuit Theory, Desoer..................................................125
Basic Electricity: A Text-Lab Manual, 7e, Zbar ......................138
Basic Electronics, 10e, Schultz ...............................................127
Basic Electronics for Scientists, 5e, Brophy ............................129
Basic Information Systems Analysis and Design, Chester .......101
Building an E-Business, Reding .............................................115
Business Data Communications, Forouzan.......................44,104
Business Driven Technology, 2e, Haag .....................................95
C
C Programming for Engineering and Computer Science
(B.E.S.T. Series), Tan ...........................................18,166,175
C++ Primer for Engineers, A: An Object-Oriented Approach,
Kumaraswamy ...........................................................20,166
C++ Primer for Non C Programmers, Zamir ...........................20
C++ Program Design, 3e, Cohoon ...........................................19
Cable Communications Technology, 3e, Bartlett ...................158
Carrier Grade Voice Over IP, 2e, Collins................................155
Cases in E-Commerce, Rayport .............................................116
Cases in Electronic Commerce, 2e, Huff ................................116
CCA Citrix Metaframe Presentation Server 3.0 Study Guide
(Exam 223), Huffman .......................................................78
Chemistry for Environmental Engineering and Science, 5e,
Sawyer .............................................................................167
Chip Scale Package, Lau ........................................................160
Cisco: A Beginner’s Guide, 4e, Velte ........................................78
CISSP Certification All-In-One Exam Guide, 3e, Harris ....78,79
CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits Analysis and Design, 3e,
Kang.........................................................................130,133
Communication Electronics, 3e, Frenzel................................147
Communication Network, 2e, Leon-Garcia .....................45,146
Communication Systems, 4e, Carlson ...................................146
Comprehensive Cobol, Vol II: Advanced Cobol Programming,
4e, Philippakis ..................................................................24
Comprehensive Introduction to Object-Oriented Programming
with Java, A, Wu ................................................................24
Computer Architecture and Logic Design, Bartee ........38,41,152
Computer Architecture and Organization, 3e, Hayes ........41,154
Computer Graphics, 2e, Harrington .......................................49
Computer Organization, 5e, Hamacher ...........................41,153
Computer Science Tapestry, A, 2e, Astrachan ..........................20
Computer Security Lab Manual, Nestler..................................82
Computer Telephony Demystified, Bayer ..............................156
Computers, Communications, and Information Core with
Powerweb and Interactive Companion 3.0, 7e,
Computing Essentials 2006 Complete, 17e, O’Leary ..............91
Computing Essentials 2008 Complete, 19e, O’Leary ..............90
Computing Essentials 2008 Introductory, 19e, O’Leary ..........88
Concepts in Engineering, 2e, Holtzapple ..............................163
Control Systems: Principles and Design, 2e, Gopal ................135
Corporate Information Strategy and Management: Text and
Cases, 7e, Applegate ........................................................106
Creating Business Advantage in the Information Age,
Applegate ........................................................................106
Cryptography and Network Security, Kahate ...........................47
Crystal Reports XI: The Complete Reference, Peck ..................75
Customer Relationship Management, Storbacka ...................119
CWNA Certified Wireless Network Administration
Official Study Guide, 3e, Planet3 Wireless........................80
CWSP Certified Wireless Security Professional Official
Study Guide (Exam PW0-200), 2e, Carpenter ..................81
Cyberlaw and E-Commerce, Baumer.....................................115
179
Indexes.indd 179
11/15/06 3:05:33 PM
Title Index
D
Data Communications Networking, 4e, Forouzan ...........44,146
Data Communications and Network Security, Carr ...............103
Data Communications and Networking, Godbole...................45
Data Communications and Networks, Miller ........................103
Data Structures, Algorithms, and Applications in Java with
Compiler CD, Sahni ....................................................33,35
Data Structures, Algorithms and Object-Oriented
Programming, Heileman ...................................................33
Data Structures and the Java Collections Framework, 2e,
Collins...............................................................................32
Data Structures and the Standard Template Library, Collins ....33
Database Design, Application Development, and
Administration, 3e, Mannino ............................................99
Database Management Systems, 3e, Post .................................99
Database Management Systems, 3e, Ramakrishnan ................39
Database System Concepts, 5e, Silberschatz ............................39
Database Systems, Atzeni .........................................................40
Databases: Design, Development and Deployment Using
Microsoft Access, 2e, Rob ................................................100
Decision Support and Data Warehouse Systems, Mallach ......104
Design and Development of Interactive Multimedia
Systems, Dastbaz ...............................................................58
Design for Electrical and Computer Engineers, Ford .............162
Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits, Razavi ............129
Design of Integrated Circuits for Optical Communications,
Razavi .............................................................................135
Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog
Integrated Circuits, 3e, Franco ........................................133
Designing and Managing the Supply Chain, 3e, Simchi-Levi 118
Digital Communication, Bhattacharya .................................147
Digital Communications, 4e, Proakis ....................................147
Digital Control and State Variable Methods, 2e, Gopal .........135
Digital Electronics: Principles and Applications, 7e,
Tokheim ..........................................................................126
Digital Integrated Electronics, Taub .......................................130
Digital Principles and Design with CD-Rom, Givone .......38,152
Digital Signal Processing, Antoniou .......................................157
Digital Signal Processing, Salivahanan...................................144
Digital Signal Processing, Schuler ..........................................144
Digital Signal Processing: A Computer-Based Approach, 3e,
Mitra ...............................................................................143
Digital Signal Processors: Architecture, Programming and
Applications, Venkataramani ..........................................143
Discrete Mathematics and Its Applications, 6e, Rosen .............35
Discrete Mathematics by Example, Simpson............................36
Distributed Databases: Principles and Systems, Ceri ................40
Distributed Systems and Networks, Buchanan ........................44
DVD Demystified, 3e, Taylor ................................................155
E
E-Commerce, Rayport ..........................................................116
eBay The Smart Way, 4e, Sinclair...........................................120
E-Business and E-Commerce Infrastructure, Chaudhary .......113
E-Commerce: Context, Concepts and Consequences,
Bandyopadhyay ..............................................................113
E-Commerce: The Cutting Edge of Business, 2e, Bajaj .....59,120
E-Commerce: Strategy, Technologies and Applications,
Whiteley..........................................................................112
E-Marketing Strategy, Chaston ..............................................114
Electric Circuits, 2e, Bogart ...................................................141
Electric Machinery, 6e, Fitzgerald..........................................136
Electric Machinery Fundamentals, 4e, Chapman ...................136
Electric Machinery and Power Systems Fundamentals,
Chapman ........................................................................137
Electric Machines Analysis and Design Applying Matlab,
Cathey .............................................................................137
Electrical Safety Handbook, 3e, Cadick .................................158
Electricity Demystified, Gibilisco ..........................................158
Electricity/Electronics Fundamentals: A Text-Lab Manual,
4e, Zbar ...........................................................................139
Electricity: Principles and Applications, 7e, Fowler ................137
Electromagnetics, 5e, Kraus ...................................................140
Electronic Commerce, 2e, Bhasker ........................................112
Electronic Commerce: Security, Risk Management, and
Control, 2e, Greenstein ...................................................115
Electronic Communication, 6e, Shrader ................................147
Electronic Communication Systems, 4e, Kennedy .................147
Electronics Principles, 7e, Malvino ........................................128
Electronics: Principles and Applications, 7e, Schuler..............126
Elementary Numerical Analysis, 3e, Conte ..............................51
Elements of Power System Analysis, 4e, Stevenson.................139
Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and
Design, Kamal ............................................................41,154
Engineering Circuit Analysis, 7e, Hayt...................................124
Engineering Electromagnetics, 7e, Hayt .................................140
Engineering Fundamentals and Problem Solving, 5e, Eide .....163
Engineering Statistics Demystified, Stephens .........................177
Environmental Impact Assessment, 2e, Canter ......................167
Ethical Decision Making and Information Technology, 2e,
Grillo...............................................................................107
Ethics in Engineering, 4e, Martin ..........................................168
Expert Oracle PL/SQL, Hardman ...........................................84
Even More Excellent HTML with HTML Reference
Guide, 2e, Gottleber .........................................................29
F
Fortran 90/95 For Scientists and Engineers, 2e,
Chapman ...................................................................23,166
Fortran 95/2003 For Scientists & Engineers, 3e,
Chapman ...................................................................23,172
Foundations of Engineering, 2e, Holtzapple..........................164
Foundations of Information Systems, Zwass ............................98
Fourier Transform and its Applications, The, 3e, Bracewell....136
Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog Design with
CD-Rom, Brown........................................................38,152
Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Design with
CD-Rom, 2e, Brown ..................................................37,150
Fundamentals of Electric Circuits, 3e, Alexander ...................123
Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis, Hutton .................172
Fundamentals of Semiconductor Devices, Anderson..............132
Fundamentals of Wireless Networking, Gilster ........................80
Fundamentals Signals Systems, Roberts .................................142
G
Global Project Management Handbook, 2e, Cleland .............177
Global Telecommunications Revolution, Housel ...................104
180
Indexes.indd 180
11/15/06 3:05:34 PM
Title Index
H
Hacker’s Challenge 3, 3e, Pollino.............................................81
Hacking Exposed, 5e, McClure ...............................................82
Hacking Exposed Web Application, 2e, Scambray ...................82
Hands-On SQL Server 2005 Integration Services, Nanda ........83
High Voltage Engineering, 3e, Naidu .....................................140
How to Do Everything with MAC OS X Tiger, 2e, McElhean 86
How to Do Everything with Your eBay Business, 2e, Holden ..75
HTML: A Beginner’s Guide, 3e, Willard .................................80
Human Computer Interaction: Multi-Disciplinary Approach,
van der Veer ......................................................................50
I
I-DEAS Student Guide, 2e, Structural Dynamics Research
Corporation ....................................................................162
Industrial Robotics, Groover .............................................49,136
Information and Knowledge Society, Al-Hawamdeh ........98,116
Information Assurance for the Enterprise, Schou ................47,81
Information Systems Development, 4e, Avison ......................101
Information Systems Essentials, 2e Haag .................................95
Information Systems Solutions: A Project Approach,
Van Horn ..........................................................................97
Information Technology and Management, 2e, Thompson......98
Information Theory, Coding and Cryptography,
Bose.....................................................................59,148,149
Inline/Online: Fundamentals of the Internet and the World
Wide Web, 2e, Greenlaw ............................................29,175
I-Series: Computing Concepts, Complete, 2e, Haag ................91
I-Series: Microsoft Access 2002, Complete, Haag ....................70
I-Series: Microsoft Excel 2002, Complete, Haag ......................69
I-Series: Microsoft Excel 2002, Introductory, Haag ..................68
I-Series: Microsoft Office XP, Vol 1 Enhanced, Haag ...............63
I-Series: Microsoft Office XP, Vol II, Haag ...............................65
I-Series: Microsoft Office 2003, Volume 1, Haag .....................64
I-Series: Microsoft Office 2003, Volume II, Haag ....................65
I-Series: Microsoft Powerpoint 2002, Introductory, Haag ........71
I-Series: Microsoft Word 2002, Introductory, Haag .................66
Interactive Companion CD-Rom Version 3.0, McGraw-Hill ..91
Interactive Computing Series: Office XP Volume I, Laudon ....63
Interactive Computing Series: Office XP Volume II, Laudon ...66
Interactive Computing Series: Powerpoint 2002,
Introductory, Laudon ........................................................72
Internet Business Models and Strategies: Text and Cases,
2e, Afuah .........................................................................113
Internet Business Models: Text and Cases, Eisenmann...........113
Internet Literacy, 4e, Hofstetter ..........................................58,75
Internet Marketing: Building Advantage in a Networked
Economy, 2e, Mohammed ..............................................114
Internet Marketing: Readings and Online Resources,
Richardson......................................................................114
Introduction to Algorithms, Dasgupta.....................................34
Introduction to Business Data Mining, Olson .......................109
Introduction to Computer Graphics, Krishnamurthy .............48
Introduction to Computer Science Using Java, 2e, Kamin .......27
Introduction to Computing Systems: From Bits and Gates to
Programming & Beyond, 3e, Patt ......................................17
Introduction to Database Systems, Bressan ..............................39
Introduction to Digital Circuits, Bogart ................................133
Introduction to E-Commerce, 2e, Rayport .....................112,115
Introduction to Electrical Engineering, 2e, Paul .....................123
Introduction to Engineering and the Environment, Rubin ....167
Introduction to Engineering Design, Eide..............................162
Introduction to Engineering Design and Problem Solving,
Burghardt .........................................................162,164,174
Introduction to Environmental Engineering, 3e, Davis ..........167
Introduction to Fiber Optics Systems, An, 2e, Powers ...........149
Introduction to the Finite Element Method, Kuntjoro ..........171
Introduction to the Finite Element Method, An, 3e, Reddy ...171
Introduction to Graphics Communications for
Engineers, 3e, Bertoline ...........................................164,173
Introduction to Information Systems, 13e, O’Brien.................96
Introduction to Information Systems Project Management,
2e, Olson .........................................................................105
Introduction to Languages and the Theory of
Computation, 3e, Martin ..................................................37
Introduction to Logic and Computer Design with CD,
Marcovitz ........................................................................150
Introduction to Logic Design with CD-Rom, 2e,
Marcovitz ...................................................................38,151
Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithms, Lee ....35
Introduction to Fortran 90/95, Chapman................................23
Introduction to Mathlab 7 for Engineers, Palm...............165,174
Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement Systems, 3e,
Alciatore ..........................................................................130
Introduction to Object-Oriented Analysis and Design,
Schach .............................................................................102
Introduction to Object-Oriented Programming with Java, 4e,
An, Wu ..............................................................................26
Introduction to Probability and Statistics, 4e, Milton ............170
Introduction to Probability and Statistics for Scientists and
Engineers, Rosenkrantz ...................................................171
Introduction to Radar Systems, 3e, Skolnik ...........................141
Introduction to Semiconductor Devices, An, Neamen ...........132
Introduction to Signals and Systems, Lindner........................143
Introduction to Systems Analysis and Design, Whitten .........100
Introduction to Unix, Wrightson.............................................43
Introduction to VLSI Design, Fabricius ................................134
J
Java 1.5 Program Design, Cohoon ...........................................26
Java 5.0 Program Design, Cohoon ...........................................25
Java: A Beginner’s Guide, 4e, Schildt ..................................74,80
Java: An Object-Oriented Language, Smith .............................27
Java Elements: Principles of Programming in Java, Bailey ........27
Java in Two Semesters, 2e, Charatan ........................................25
Java SE 6: The Complete Reference, 6e, Schildt .......................74
Java Structures, 2e, Bailey ........................................................32
Just Enough Unix, 5e, Anderson.........................................28,42
K
Knowledge Management, Natarajan ...............................106,116
181
Indexes.indd 181
11/15/06 3:05:35 PM
Title Index
L
Labview Graphical Programming, 4e, Johnson ......................157
Learning C++, Graham .....................................................20,166
Learning Programming Using Visual Basic.Net, 4e, Burrows ...22
Lee’s Essentials of Wireless Communications, Lee ..................156
Legal Landmines in E-Commerce, Canton ............................114
Local Area Networks, Forouzan ...............................................46
Local Area Networks, 2e, Keiser .......................................46,148
Low Cost Flip Chip Technologies for DCA, WLCSP, and
PBGA Assemblies, Lau ....................................................160
M
Machine Learning, Mitchell ....................................................49
Machine Vision, Jain ........................................................50,153
Management Information Systems, 4e, Post.............................97
Management Information Systems, 8e, O’Brien ......................96
Management Information Systems for the Information Age
with CD and MISource, 6e, Haag .....................................97
Management of Telecommunications, The, 2e, Carr ..............104
Managerial Issues of Enterprise Resource Planning Systems,
Olson ..............................................................................108
Mathcad: A Tool for Engineers and Scientists, 2e,
Pritchard ..................................................................165,172
MCTS SQL Server 2005 Implementation & Maintenance
Study Guide (Exam 70-431), 3e, Carpenter ......................78
Measuring and Managing Knowledge, Housen ......................106
Mechanical Design Process, The, 3e, Ullman .........................162
Microelectronic Circuit Analysis and Design, 3e, Neamen .....128
Microelectronic Circuit Design, 3e, Jaeger.............................127
Micromachined Transducers Sourcebook, Kovacs ..................134
Microprocessor Design, McFarland .......................................159
Microprocessors Principles and Applications, 2e, Gilmore .....154
Microsoft Access 2007: A Professional Approach, Juarez ..........70
Microsoft Excel 2007: A Professional Approach, Stewart .........68
Microsoft Powerpoint 2007: A Professional Approach, Graves .72
Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Reporting Services, 2e, Larson .....71
Microsoft Word 2007: A Professional Approach, Hinkle .........67
Microwave Engineering, Das .................................................141
Mike Meyers’ A+ Certification Passport, 3e, Meyers.................76
Mike Meyers’ A+ Guide to Managing and Troubleshooting
PCs, 2e, Meyers .................................................................76
Mike Meyers’ A+ Guide to Managing and Troubleshooting
PCs Lab Manual, 2e, Meyers .............................................77
Mike Meyers’ A+ Guide to Operating Systems, 2e, Meyers ......77
Mike Meyers’ A+ Guide to Operating Systems Lab Manual,
2e, Meyers .........................................................................77
Mike Meyers’ A+ Guide to PC Hardware, 2e, Meyers ..............76
Mike Meyers’ A+ Guide to PC Hardware Lab Manual, 2e,
Meyers ...............................................................................77
Mobile Communications Engineering, 2e, Lee ...............156,160
Modern Communication Circuits, 2e, Smith.........................149
Modern Digital Electronics, 3e, Jain ......................................152
Modern Power System Analysis, 3e, Kothari ..........................139
Modern Processor Design, Shen ........................................41,153
Multimedia: Making It Work, 7e, Vaughan .............................76
Multimedia Literacy, 3e, Hofstetter .........................................59
N
Network Security, Forouzan ....................................................46
Neural Networks: A Classroom Approach, Kumar ............48,152
Numerical Methods for Engineers, 5e, Chapra .................51,169
O
Object-Oriented and Classical Software Engineering, 7e,
Schach ..........................................................................54,55
Object-Oriented Programming with C++, 3e, Balagurusamy ..19
Object-Oriented Software Engineering: Practical Software
Development Using UML and Java, 2e, Lethbridge ..........55
Object-Oriented Systems Analysis and Design Using UML,
3e, Bennett ......................................................................102
Object-Oriented Systems Development, Bahrami .................102
Object-Oriented Technology, Tsang .........................................56
Objects Have Class, Poplawski ................................................27
O’Leary Series: Access 2002, Brief, O’Leary.............................70
O’Leary Series: Access 2002, Introductory, O’Leary ................70
O’Leary Series: Excel 2002, Brief, O’Leary ..............................68
O’Leary Series: Excel 2002, Complete, O’Leary ......................69
O’Leary Series: Excel 2002, Introductory, O’Leary ..................68
O’Leary Series: Microsoft Office 2007, O’Leary ......................64
O’Leary Series: Microsoft Office Access 2007, Brief, O’Leary ..70
O’Leary Series: Microsoft Office Excel 2007, Brief, O’Leary....67
O’Leary Series: Microsoft Office Excel 2007, Introductory,
O’Leary .............................................................................68
O’Leary Series: Microsoft Office Word 2007, Brief, O’Leary ...66
O’Leary Series: Microsoft Office Word 2007 Introductory,
O’Leary .............................................................................66
O’Leary Series: Powerpoint 2002 Introductory, O’Leary .........72
O’Leary Series: Word 2002 Brief, O’Leary...............................66
O’Leary Series: Word 2002 Complete, O’Leary .......................67
O’Leary Series: Word 2002 Introductory, O’Leary ..................67
Operating Systems, Dhamdhere ..............................................43
Optical Fiber Communication: Principles and Systems,
Selvarajan........................................................................148
Optical Fiber Communications, 3e, Keiser .....................135,148
Optical Networking Crash Course, Shepard ..........................156
Optics, 3e, Ghatak.................................................................134
Optoelectronics: An Introduction to Materials and
Devices, Singh .................................................................134
Oracle Database 10G Express Edition PHP Web
Programming, McLaughlin ...............................................84
Oracle Database 10G Linux Administration, Coekaerts ..........85
Oracle Database 10G OCP Certification All-In-One
Exam Guide, Bersinic........................................................84
Oracle HTML DB Handbook, Brown ....................................84
Oracle SQL and Introductory PL/SQL, Preece ........................99
182
Indexes.indd 182
11/15/06 3:05:36 PM
Title Index
P
Parallel Programming in C with MPI and Open MP, Quinn....42
Peter Norton’s Computing Fundamentals, 6e, Norton .............89
Peter Norton’s Essential Concepts, Student Edition, 6e,
Norton ..............................................................................89
Peter Norton’s Introduction to Computers, 6e, Norton............90
Pocket Book of English Grammar for Engineers and
Scientists, Finklestein ......................................................174
Pocket Book of Technical Writing for Engineers and
Scientists, 3e, Finklestein ................................................168
Power Electronics, 3e, Lander ................................................139
Power Electronics, 2e, Singh ..................................................139
Power System Analysis, Grainger ...........................................139
Power System Analysis, 2e, Saadat .........................................139
Practical Object-Oriented Design with UML, 2e, Priestley .....57
Principles and Applications of Electrical Engineering, 5e,
Rizonni ...........................................................................123
Principles and Applications of Optical Communications,
Liu...................................................................................149
Principles of Computer Security, Conklin...........................47,83
Principles of Electronic Communication Systems, 3e,
Frenzel.............................................................................145
Principles of Electronic Materials and Device, 3e, Kasap .......131
Principles of Interactive Multimedia, Elsom-Cook ..................58
Principles of Neurocomputing for Science and
Engineering, Ham ....................................................152,154
Principles of Voice and Data Communications, Bates ..44,79,103
Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal
Principles, 4e, Peebles ......................................................150
Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic Processes with
Errata Sheet, 4e, Papoulis ................................................149
Programming in C++: Lessons and Applications, D’Orazio .....19
Programming in C#.Net, Bradley ............................................31
Programming in Visual Basic 6.0 Update Edition with CD,
Bradley ..............................................................................22
Programming in Visual Basic.Net, 2005 Edition, Bradley...21,73
Programming in Visual Basic.Net: Update Edition for VB.Net
2003 with 5-CD VB.Net 2003 Software Set, Bradley........22
Programming in Visual C# 2005, 2e, Bradley..........................72
Programming Languages, 2e, Tucker .......................................36
Programming the Web Using ASP.Net, Mercer ........................31
Programming the Web Using Visual Studio.Net, Mercer .........31
Programming the Web Using XHTML and Javascript,
Lagerstrom........................................................................30
Programming the Web Using XML, Pearlman ........................30
Programming with Java with CD-Rom, Bradley ......................27
Project Management, 5e, Cleland ..........................................177
Project Management, 3e, Gray ...............................................176
Project Planning, Scheduling and Control, 4e, Lewis .............105
Pspice for Basic Circuit Analysis, 2e, Tront ............................124
Pspice for Basic Microelectronics, Tront .................................125
Purchasing and Supply Management, Benton ........................117
Purchasing and Supply Management, 13e, Leenders..............118
Q
Quicken 2007: The Official Guide, Langer..............................69
Quicken 2007 Quicksteps, Matthews ......................................69
R
Real-Time Systems, Krishna ....................................................49
RHCE Red Hat Certified Engineer Linux Study Guide
(Exam RH 302), 5e, Jang ..................................................79
Robotics: Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence, Fu ....49,136
S
SAP/R3 Enterprise Software: An Introduction, Hayen ...........108
SAP R/3 Handbook. 3e, Hernandez ........................................71
Satellite Communications, 4e, Roddy ....................................159
Schaum’s 2000 Solved Problems in Electronics, Cathey .........129
Schaum’s Easy Outline HTML, Mercer ...................................29
Schaum’s Easy Outline of XML, Tittel .....................................30
Schaum’s Easy Outlines of Programming with C++, Hubbard .20
Schaum’s Outline of Analog and Digital Communications, 2e,
Hsu ..........................................................................129,146
Schaum’s Outline of Basic Circuit Analysis, 2e, O’Malley ......125
Schaum’s Outline of Basic Electricity, Gussow .......................125
Schaum’s Outline of Basic Mathematics for Electricity and
Electronics, 2e, Beiser ......................................................138
Schaum’s Outline of Computer Architecture, Carter.........41,153
Schaum’s Outline of Computer Graphics, 2e, Plastock ............49
Schaum’s Outline of Computer Networking, Tittel..................45
Schaum’s Outline of Data Structures with C++, Hubbard........33
Schaum’s Outline of Data Structures with Java, Hubbard ........32
Schaum’s Outline of Digital Signal Processing, Hayes ............144
Schaum’s Outline of Electric Circuits, 4e, Nahvi .............125,140
Schaum’s Outline of Electric Machines and Electromechanics,
2e, Nasar ..................................................................137,140
Schaum’s Outline of Electric Power Systems, Nasar................137
Schaum’s Outline of Electromagnetics, 2e, Edminister ..........141
Schaum’s Outline of Electronic Devices and Circuits, 2e,
Cathey .............................................................................125
Schaum’s Outline of Essential Computer Mathematics,
Lipschutz ..........................................................................36
Schaum’s Outline of Feedback and Control Systems, 2e,
DiStefano ........................................................................135
Schaum’s Outline of Fundamentals of Computing with C++,
Hubbard ...........................................................................20
Schaum’s Outline of Fundamentals of Relational
Databases, Mata-Toledo ....................................................40
Schaum’s Outline of Fundamentals of SQL Programming,
Mata-Toledo .....................................................................40
Schaum’s Outline of Guide to UML, 2e, Bennett ....................57
Schaum’s Outline of HTML, Mercer .......................................29
Schaum’s Outline of Introduction to Computer Science,
Toledo ...............................................................................18
Schaum’s Outline of Introduction to Digital Systems, Palmer 148
Schaum’s Outline of Mathematica, Don...................................32
Schaum’s Outline of Principles of Computer Science,
Tymann .............................................................................17
Schaum’s Outline of Programming with C, 2e, Gottfried ........19
Schaum’s Outline of Programming with C++, 2e,
Hubbard ......................................................................20,33
Schaum’s Outline of Programming with Fortran 77, Mayo ......23
Schaum’s Outline of Programming with Java, 2e, Hubbard .....26
Schaum’s Outline of Programming with Pascal, 2e, Gottfried ..24
Schaum’s Outline of Signals and Systems, Hsu .......................148
Schaum’s Outline of Visual Basic, Gottfried.............................22
Schaum’s Solved Problems in Electric Circuits, Book 1,
Nasar ...............................................................................125
Scientific Computing, 2e, Heath.......................................51,170
183
Indexes.indd 183
11/15/06 3:05:38 PM
Title Index
SCJP Sun Certified Programmer for Java 2 Platform 5
Study Guide, Sierra ...........................................................83
SCJP Sun Certified Programmer for Java 5 Study Guide,
(Exam 310-055), Sierra .....................................................74
Semiconductor Physics and Devices, 3e, Neamen ..................133
Signals and Systems, Nagrath.................................................142
Signals and Systems: Analysis of Signals Through Linear
Systems, Roberts .............................................................142
Signals and Systems Demystified, McMahon .........................157
Simnet for Office 2003 Release 2 Standard Edition,
Triad Interactive ...............................................................72
Simulation Modeling and Analysis, 4e, Law .............................52
Simulation Using Promodel, 2e, Harrell ..................................53
Simulation with Arena, 4e, Kelton ...........................................52
Simulation with Arena, 3e, Kelton ...........................................53
Smart Antennas for Wireless Communications, Gross ...........159
Software Engineering: A Practitioner’s Approach, 6e,
Pressman ...........................................................................54
Software Project Management, 4e, Hughes .......................57,105
Spreadsheet Tools for Engineers Using Excel, 3e, Gottfried....173
SQL Server 2005: The Complete Reference, 2e, Shapiro .......109
Statistics for Engineers and Scientists, Navidi.........................170
Structuring Data and Building Algorithms, Chai .....................34
Supply Chain Logistics Management, 2e, Bowersox ..............117
Survey of Operating Systems, 2e, Holcombe ......................60,85
Swing: A Beginner’s Guide, Schildt ..........................................74
Synthesis and Optimization of Digital Circuits, Micheli ........155
System on Package, Tummala ................................................155
Systems Analysis and Design: An Active Approach, Marakas .101
Systems Analysis and Design Methods, 7e, Whitten ..............100
Systems Development Case Studies, Hunter ..........................102
V
Verilog Digital System Design, 2e, Navabi .............................159
VHDL: Analysis and Modeling of Digital Systems, 2e,
Navabi .............................................................................160
Video Compression Demystified, Symes ................................156
VLSI Technology, 2e, Sze .......................................................134
W
Web Using Dreamweaver, Miller .............................................31
Why ERP? A Primer on SAP Implementation, Jacobs ...........108
Windows Vista: The Complete Reference, Young.....................85
Wireless and Cellular Communications, 3e, Lee ....................155
Wireless Security: Models, Threats, and Solutions,
Nichols .......................................................................59,155
World Class Supply Management, 7e, Burt............................119
World Wide Web Design with HTML, Xavier ........................30
Y
Your Unix: The Ultimate Guide, 2e, Das ............................28,43
T
TCP/IP Protocol Suite, 3e, Forouzan ......................................48
Teach Yourself Electricity and Electronics, 4e, Gibilisco.........158
Teamwork and Project Management, 3e, Smith ..............173,175
Technology Ventures: From Idea to Enterprise, 2e, Dorf ........176
Theory and Problem of Electric Machines, 2e, Kothari ..........137
U
ULSI Technology, Chang .......................................................133
Unix: The Complete Reference, 2e, Rose .................................85
Using Information Technology, 7e, Williams ...........................88
184
Indexes.indd 184
11/15/06 3:05:39 PM
Author Index
A
Afuah: Internet Business Models and Strategies:
Text and Cases, 2e ............................................................113
Alciatore: Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement
Systems, 3e.......................................................................130
Alexander: Fundamentals of Electric Circuits, 3e ...................123
Al-Hawamdeh: Information and Knowledge Society ........98,116
Anderson: Fundamentals of Semiconductor Devices..............132
Anderson: Just Enough Unix, 5e.........................................28,42
Antoniou: Digital Signal Processing .......................................157
Applegate: Corporate Information Strategy and
Management: Text and Cases, 7e......................................106
Applegate: Creating Business Advantage in the Information
Age ..................................................................................106
Astrachan: Computer Science Tapestry, A, 2e ..........................20
Atzeni: Database Systems .........................................................40
Avison: Information Systems Development, 4e ......................101
B
Bahrami: Object-Oriented Systems Development .................102
Bailey: Java Structures, 2e ........................................................32
Bailey: Java Elements: Principles of Programming in Java ........27
Bajaj: E-Commerce: The Cutting Edge of Business, 2e .....59,120
Balagurusamy: Object-Oriented Programming with C++, 3e ..19
Bandyopadhyay: E-Commerce: Context, Concepts and
Consequences ..................................................................113
Bartee: Computer Architecture and Logic Design ........38,41,152
Bartlett: Cable Communications Technology, 3e ...................158
Bates: Principles of Voice and Data Communications ..44,79,103
Baumer: Cyberlaw and E-Commerce.....................................115
Bayer: Computer Telephony Demystified ..............................156
Beiser: Schaum’s Outline of Basic Mathematics for
Electricity and Electronics, 2e ..........................................138
Bennett: Object-Oriented Systems Analysis and Design
Using UML, 3e ................................................................102
Bennett: Schaum’s Outline of Guide to UML, 2e ....................57
Benton: Purchasing and Supply Management ........................117
Bersinic: Oracle Database 10G OCP Certification
All-In-One Exam Guide.....................................................84
Bertoline: Introduction to Graphics Communications for
Engineers, 3e.............................................................164,173
Bhasker: Electronic Commerce, 2e ........................................112
Bhattacharya: Digital Communication .................................147
Bogart: Electric Circuits, 2e ...................................................141
Bogart: Introduction to Digital Circuits ................................133
Bose: Information Theory, Coding and Cryptography
............................................................................59,148,149
Bowersox: Supply Chain Logistics Management, 2e ..............117
Bracewell: Fourier Transform and its Applications, The, 3e....136
Bradley: Advanced Programming Using Visual Basic.Net,
3e ..................................................................................21,73
Bradley: Programming with Java with CD-Rom ......................27
Bradley: Programming in C#.Nety ..........................................31
Bradley: Programming in Visual Basic 6.0 Update Edition
with CD ............................................................................22
Bradley: Programming in Visual Basic.Net, 2005 Edition...21,73
Bradley: Programming in Visual Basic.Net: Update Edition
for VB.Net 2003 with 5-CD VB.Net 2003 Software Set ....22
Bradley: Programming in Visual C# 2005, 2e..........................72
Bressan: Introduction to Database Systems ..............................39
Brophy: Basic Electronics for Scientists, 5e ............................129
Brown: Fundamentals of Digital Logic with Verilog
Design with CD-Rom .................................................38,152
Brown: Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL
Design with CD-Rom, 2e ...........................................37,150
Brown: Oracle HTML DB Handbook ....................................84
Buchanan: Distributed Systems and Networks ........................44
Burghardt: Introduction to Engineering Design and
Problem Solving .................................................162,164,174
Burrows: Learning Programming Using Visual Basic.Net, 4e ...22
Burt: World Class Supply Management, 7e............................119
C
Cadick: Electrical Safety Handbook, 3e .................................158
Canter: Environmental Impact Assessment, 2e ......................167
Canton: Legal Landmines in E-Commerce ............................114
Carlson: Communication Systems, 4e ...................................146
Carpenter: CWSP Certified Wireless Security Professional Official
Study Guide (Exam PW0-200), 2e ....................................81
Carpenter: MCTS SQL Server 2005 Implementation &
Maintenance Study Guide (Exam 70-431), 3e ...................78
Carr: Data Communications and Network Security...............103
Carr: Management of Telecommunications, The, 2e ..............104
Carter: Schaum’s Outline of Computer Architecture.........41,153
Cathey: Electric Machines Analysis and Design Applying
Matlab .............................................................................137
Cathey: Schaum’s 2000 Solved Problems in Electronics .........129
Cathey: Schaum’s Outline of Electronic Devices and
Circuits, 2e ......................................................................125
Ceri: Distributed Databases: Principles and Systems ................40
Chai: Structuring Data and Building Algorithms .....................34
Chang: ULSI Technology ......................................................133
Chapman: Electric Machinery Fundamentals, 4e ...................136
Chapman: Electric Machinery and Power Systems
Fundamentals...................................................................137
Chapman: Fortran 90/95 For Scientists and
Engineers, 2e...............................................................23,166
Chapman: Fortran 95/2003 For Scientists &
Engineers, 3e...............................................................23,172
Chapman: Introduction to Fortran 90/95................................23
Chapra: Applied Numerical Methods with Matlab for
Engineers and Scientists, 2e.........................................50,169
Chapra: Numerical Methods for Engineers, 5e .................51,169
Charatan: Java in Two Semesters, 2e ........................................25
Chaston: E-Marketing Strategy ..............................................114
Chaudhary: E-Business and E-Commerce Infrastructure .......113
Chester: Basic Information Systems Analysis and Design .......101
Cleland: Global Project Management Handbook, 2e .............177
Cleland: Project Management, 5e ..........................................177
Coekaerts: Oracle Database 10G Linux Administration ..........85
Cohoon: C++ Program Design, 3e ...........................................19
Cohoon: Java 1.5 Program Design ...........................................26
Cohoon: Java 5.0 Program Design ...........................................25
Collins: Carrier Grade Voice Over IP, 2e................................155
Collins: Data Structures and the Java Collections
Framework, 2e ...................................................................32
Collins: Data Structures and the Standard Template Library ....33
Conklin: Principles of Computer Security ..........................47,83
Conte: Elementary Numerical Analysis, 3e ..............................51
Coulthard: Advantage Series: Microsoft Office 2007 ...............64
Coulthard: Advantage Series: Microsoft Office 2003 ...............64
185
Indexes.indd 185
11/15/06 3:05:40 PM
Author Index
D
Das: Microwave Engineering .................................................141
Das: Your Unix: The Ultimate Guide, 2e ............................28,43
Dasgupta: Introduction to Algorithms.....................................34
Dastbaz: Design and Development of Interactive
Multimedia Systems ...........................................................58
Davis: Introduction to Environmental Engineering, 3e ..........167
DePalma: Annual Editions: Computers in Society
06/07, 13e .......................................................................107
Desoer: Basic Circuit Theory .................................................125
Dhamdhere: Operating Systems ..............................................43
Dinsmore: AMA Handbook of Project Management,
The, 2e .............................................................................104
DiStefano: Schaum’s Outline of Feedback and Control
Systems, 2e.......................................................................135
Don: Schaum’s Outline of Mathematica...................................32
D’Orazio: Programming in C++: Lessons and Applications .....19
Dorf: Technology Ventures: From Idea to Enterprise, 2e ........176
E
Edminister: Schaum’s Outline of Electromagnetics, 2e ..........141
Eide: Engineering Fundamentals and Problem Solving, 5e .....163
Eide: Introduction to Engineering Design..............................162
Eisenmann: Internet Business Models: Text and Cases...........113
Elsom-Cook: Principles of Interactive Multimedia ..................58
F
Fabricius: Introduction to VLSI Design ................................134
Finklestein: Pocket Book of English Grammar for
Engineers and Scientists ...................................................174
Finklestein: Pocket Book of Technical Writing for
Engineers and Scientists, 3e..............................................168
Fischer: Applied C: An Introduction and More ................18,166
Fitzgerald: Electric Machinery, 6e..........................................136
Ford: Design for Electrical and Computer Engineers .............162
Forouzan: Business Data Communications.......................44,104
Forouzan: Data Communications Networking, 4e ...........44,146
Forouzan: Local Area Networks ...............................................46
Forouzan: Network Security ....................................................46
Forouzan: TCP/IP Protocol Suite, 3e ......................................48
Fowler: Electricity: Principles and Applications, 7e ................137
Franco: Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog
Integrated Circuits, 3e......................................................133
Frenzel: Communication Electronics, 3e................................147
Frenzel: Principles of Electronic Communication Systems,3e 145
Fu: Robotics: Control, Sensing, Vision and Intelligence ....49,136
G
Ghatak: Optics, 3e.................................................................134
Gibilisco: Electricity Demystified ..........................................158
Gibilisco: Teach Yourself Electricity and Electronics, 4e.........158
Gilmore: Microprocessors Principles and Applications, 2e .....154
Gilster: Fundamentals of Wireless Networking ........................80
Givone: Digital Principles and Design with CD-Rom .......38,152
Godbole: Data Communications and Networking...................45
Gopal: Control Systems: Principles and Design, 2e ................135
Gopal: Digital Control and State Variable Methods, 2e .........135
Gottfried: Schaum’s Outline of Programming with C, 2e ........19
Gottfried: Schaum’s Outline of Programming with Pascal, 2e ..24
Gottfried: Schaum’s Outline of Visual Basic.............................22
Gottfried: Spreadsheet Tools for Engineers Using Excel, 3e....173
Gottleber: Even More Excellent HTML with HTML Reference
Guide, 2e ...........................................................................29
Graham: Learning C++ .....................................................20,166
Grainger: Power System Analysis ...........................................139
Graves: Microsoft Powerpoint 2007: A Professional Approach .72
Gray: Project Management, 3e ...............................................176
Greenlaw: Inline/Online: Fundamentals of the Internet
and the World Wide Web, 2e ......................................29,175
Greenstein: Electronic Commerce: Security, Risk
Management, and Control, 2e .........................................115
Grillo: Ethical Decision Making and Information
Technology, 2e .................................................................107
Groover: Industrial Robotics .............................................49,136
Gross: Smart Antennas for Wireless Communications ...........159
Gussow: Schaum’s Outline of Basic Electricity .......................125
H
Haag: Business Driven Technology, 2e .....................................95
Haag: Information Systems Essentials, 2e ................................95
Haag: I-Series: Computing Concepts, Complete, 2e ................91
Haag: I-Series: Microsoft Access 2002, Complete ....................70
Haag: I-Series: Microsoft Excel 2002, Complete ......................69
Haag: I-Series: Microsoft Excel 2002, Introductory .................68
Haag: I-Series: Microsoft Office XP, Vol 1 Enhanced ...............63
Haag: I-Series: Microsoft Office XP, Vol II ...............................65
Haag: I-Series: Microsoft Office 2003, Volume 1 .....................64
Haag: I-Series: Microsoft Office 2003, Volume II ....................65
Haag: I-Series: Microsoft Powerpoint 2002, Introductory ........71
Haag: I-Series: Microsoft Word 2002, Introductory .................66
Haag: Management Information Systems for the Information Age
with CD and MISource, 6e ................................................97
Ham: Principles of Neurocomputing for Science and
Engineering...............................................................152,154
Hamacher: Computer Organization, 5e ...........................41,153
Hardman: Expert Oracle PL/SQL ...........................................84
Harrell: Simulation Using Promodel, 2e ..................................53
Harrington: Computer Graphics, 2e .......................................49
Harris: CISSP Certification All-In-One Exam Guide, 3e ....78,79
Hayen: SAP/R3 Enterprise Software: An Introduction ...........108
Hayes: Computer Architecture and Organization, 3e ........41,154
Hayes: Schaum’s Outline of Digital Signal Processing ............144
Hayt: Engineering Circuit Analysis, 7e...................................124
Hayt: Engineering Electromagnetics, 7e .................................140
Heath: Scientific Computing, 2e.......................................51,170
Heileman: Data Structures, Algorithms and Object-Oriented
Programming .....................................................................33
Hernandez: SAP R/3 Handbook. 3e ........................................71
Hunter: Systems Development Case Studies ..........................102
186
Indexes.indd 186
11/15/06 3:05:41 PM
Author Index
Hinkle: Microsoft Word 2007: A Professional Approach .........67
Hodges: Analysis and Design of Digital Integrated
Circuits, 3e ......................................................................130
Hofstetter: Multimedia Literacy, 3e .........................................59
Hofstetter: Internet Literacy, 4e ..........................................58,75
Holcombe: Survey of Operating Systems, 2e ......................60,85
Holden: How to Do Everything with Your eBay Business, 2e ..75
Holtzapple: Concepts in Engineering, 2e ..............................163
Holtzapple: Foundations of Engineering, 2e..........................164
Housel: Global Telecommunications Revolution ...................104
Housen: Measuring and Managing Knowledge ......................106
Hsu: Schaum’s Outline of Analog and Digital
Communications, 2e .................................................129,146
Hsu: Schaum’s Outline of Signals and Systems .......................148
Hubbard: Schaum’s Outline of Data Structures with C++........33
Hubbard: Schaum’s Outline of Data Structures with Java ........32
Hubbard: Schaum’s Outline of Fundamentals of Computing
with C++............................................................................20
Hubbard: Schaum’s Outline of Programming with
C++, 2e .........................................................................20,33
Hubbard: Schaum’s Outline of Programming with Java, 2e .....26
Hubbard: Schaum’s Easy Outlines of Programming with C++ .20
Huff: Cases in Electronic Commerce, 2e ................................116
Huffman: CCA Citrix Metaframe Presentation Server 3.0
Study Guide (Exam 223) ...................................................78
Hughes: Software Project Management, 4e .......................57,105
Hutchinson-Clifford: Advantage Series: Microsoft
Excel 2002, Introductory ...................................................68
Hutchinson-Clifford: Advantage Series: Office XP Vol I .........63
Hutchinson-Clifford: Advantage Series: Office XP Vol II ........63
Hutchinson-Clifford: Advantage Series: Access 2002,
Complete ...........................................................................71
Hutchinson-Clifford: Advantage Series: Access 2002,
Introductory ......................................................................70
Hutchinson-Clifford: Advantage Series: Powerpoint 2002,
Introductory ......................................................................72
Hutchinson-Clifford: Advantage Series: Word 2002,
Complete ...........................................................................67
Hutchinson-Clifford: Advantage Series: Word 2002,
Introductory ......................................................................67
Hutchinson-Clifford: Computers, Communications, and
Information Core with Powerweb and Interactive
Companion 3.0, 7e ............................................................89
Hutton: Fundamentals of Finite Element Analysis .................172
Hwang: Advanced Computer Architecture .......................42,154
J
Jacobs: Why ERP? A Primer on SAP Implementation ...........108
Jain: Machine Vision ........................................................50,153
Jain: Modern Digital Electronics, 3e ......................................152
Jang: RHCE Red Hat Certified Engineer Linux Study Guide
(Exam RH 302), 5e............................................................79
Jaeger: Microelectronic Circuit Design, 3e.............................127
Johnson: Labview Graphical Programming, 4e ......................157
Juarez: Microsoft Access 2007: A Professional Approach ..........70
K
Kahate: Cryptography and Network Security ..........................47
Kamal: Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming
and Design ..................................................................41,154
Kamin: Introduction to Computer Science Using Java, 2e .......27
Kang: CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits Analysis and
Design, 3e .................................................................130,133
Kasap: Principles of Electronic Materials and Device, 3e .......131
Kasera: ATM Networks, 2e....................................................160
Keiser: Local Area Networks, 2e .......................................46,148
Keiser: Optical Fiber Communications, 3e .....................135,148
Kelton: Simulation with Arena, 4e ...........................................52
Kelton: Simulation with Arena, 3e ...........................................53
Kennedy: Electronic Communication Systems, 4e .................147
Kothari: Modern Power System Analysis, 3e ..........................139
Kothari: Theory and Problem of Electric Machines, 2e ..........137
Kovacs: Micromachined Transducers Sourcebook ..................134
Kraus: Antennas, 3e ...............................................................141
Kraus: Electromagnetics, 5e ...................................................140
Krishna: Real-Time Systems ....................................................49
Krishnamurthy: Introduction to Computer Graphics .............48
Kumar: Neural Networks: A Classroom Approach ............48,152
Kumaraswamy: C++ Primer for Engineers, A: An
Object-Oriented Approach .........................................20,166
Kuntjoro: Introduction to the Finite Element Method ..........171
L
Lagerstrom: Programming the Web Using XHTML and
Javascript............................................................................30
Lander: Power Electronics, 3e ................................................139
Langer: Quicken 2007: The Official Guide..............................69
Larson: Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Reporting Services, 2e .....71
Lau: Chip Scale Package ........................................................160
Lau: Low Cost Flip Chip Technologies for DCA,
WLCSP, and PBGA Assemblies........................................160
Laudon: Interactive Computing Series: Office XP Volume I ....63
Laudon: Interactive Computing Series: Office XP Volume II ...66
Laudon: Interactive Computing Series: Powerpoint 2002,
Introductory ......................................................................72
Law: Simulation Modeling and Analysis, 4e .............................52
Lee: Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithms ....35
Lee: Lee’s Essentials of Wireless Communications ..................156
Lee: Mobile Communications Engineering, 2e ...............156,160
Lee: Wireless and Cellular Communications, 3e ....................155
Leenders: Purchasing and Supply Management, 13e..............118
Leon-Garcia: Communication Network, 2e .....................45,146
Lewis: Project Planning, Scheduling and Control, 4e .............105
Lethbridge: Object-Oriented Software Engineering: ......Practical
Software Development Using UML and Java, 2e................55
Lindner: Introduction to Signals and Systems........................143
Lipschutz: Schaum’s Outline of Essential Computer
Mathematics ......................................................................36
Liu: Principles and Applications of Optical
Communications .............................................................149
187
Indexes.indd 187
11/15/06 3:05:43 PM
Author Index
M
Mallach: Decision Support and Data Warehouse Systems ......104
Malvino: Electronics Principles, 7e ........................................128
Mannino: Database Design, Application Development, and
Administration, 3e .............................................................99
Marakas: Systems Analysis and Design: An Active Approach .101
Marcovitz: Introduction to Logic and Computer Design
with CD ..........................................................................150
Marcovitz: Introduction to Logic Design with
CD-Rom, 2e ...............................................................38,151
Martin: Ethics in Engineering, 4e ..........................................168
Martin: Introduction to Languages and the Theory of
Computation, 3e................................................................37
Mata-Toledo: Schaum’s Outline of Fundamentals of Relational
Databases ...........................................................................40
Mata-Toledo: Schaum’s Outline of Fundamentals of SQL
Programming .....................................................................40
Matthews: Quicken 2007 Quicksteps ......................................69
Mayo: Schaum’s Outline of Programming with Fortran 77 ......23
McClure: Hacking Exposed, 5e ...............................................82
McElhean: How to Do Everything with MAC OS X Tiger, 2e 86
McFarland: Microprocessor Design .......................................159
McGraw-Hill: Interactive Companion CD-Rom Version 3.0 ..91
McLaughlin: Oracle Database 10G Express Edition PHP
Web Programming .............................................................84
McMahon: Signals and Systems Demystified .........................157
Mercer: Programming the Web Using ASP.Net ........................31
Mercer: Programming the Web Using Visual Studio.Net .........31
Mercer: Schaum’s Easy Outline HTML ...................................29
Mercer: Schaum’s Outline of HTML .......................................29
Meyers: A+ Certification All-In-One Exam Guide, 6e..............76
Meyers: Mike Meyers’ A+ Certification Passport, 3e.................76
Meyers: Mike Meyers’ A+ Guide to Managing and
Troubleshooting PCs, 2e ....................................................76
Meyers: Mike Meyers’ A+ Guide to Managing and
Troubleshooting PCs Lab Manual, 2e ................................77
Meyers: Mike Meyers’ A+ Guide to Operating Systems, 2e ......77
Meyers: Mike Meyers’ A+ Guide to Operating Systems
Lab Manual, 2e ..................................................................77
Meyers: Mike Meyers’ A+ Guide to PC Hardware, 2e ..............76
Meyers: Mike Meyers’ A+ Guide to PC Hardware Lab
Manual, 2e .........................................................................77
Micheli: Synthesis and Optimization of Digital Circuits ........155
Miller: Data Communications and Networks ........................103
Miller: Web Using Dreamweaver .............................................31
Milton: Introduction to Probability and Statistics, 4e ............170
Mitchell: Machine Learning ....................................................49
Mitra: Digital Signal Processing: A Computer-Based
Approach, 3e ....................................................................143
Mohammed: Internet Marketing: Building Advantage
in a Networked Economy, 2e ...........................................114
Morgan: Application Cases in Management Information
Systems, 5e.........................................................................98
N
Nahvi: Schaum’s Outline of Electric Circuits, 4e .............125,140
Naidu: High Voltage Engineering, 3e .....................................140
Nanda: Hands-On SQL Server 2005 Integration Services ........83
Nasar: Schaum’s Outline of Electric Machines and
Electromechanics, 2e .................................................137,140
Nasar: Schaum’s Outline of Electric Power Systems................137
Nasar: Schaum’s Solved Problems in Electric Circuits,
Book 1 .............................................................................125
Natarajan: Knowledge Management ...............................106,116
Navabi: Verilog Digital System Design, 2e .............................159
Navabi: VHDL: Analysis and Modeling of Digital
Systems, 2e.......................................................................160
Navidi: Statistics for Engineers and Scientists.........................170
Neamen: Semiconductor Physics and Devices, 3e ..................133
Neamen: Signals and Systems ................................................142
Norton: Peter Norton’s Computing Fundamentals, 6e .............89
Norton: Peter Norton’s Essential Concepts,
Student Edition, 6e ............................................................89
Norton: Peter Norton’s Introduction to Computers, 6e............90
Nestler: Computer Security Lab Manual..................................82
Neamen: Microelectronic Circuit Analysis and Design, 3e .....128
Neamen: Introduction to Semiconductor Devices, An ...........132
Nichols: Wireless Security: Models, Threats, and
Solutions .....................................................................59,155
O
O’Brien: Introduction to Information Systems, 13e.................96
O’Brien: Management Information Systems, 8e ......................96
O’Leary: Computing Essentials 2006 Complete, 17e ..............91
O’Leary: Computing Essentials 2008 Complete, 19e ..............90
O’Leary: Computing Essentials 2008 Introductory, 19e ..........88
O’Leary: O’Leary Series: Access 2002, Brief ............................70
O’Leary: O’Leary Series: Access 2002, Introductory ................70
O’Leary: O’Leary Series: Excel 2002, Brief ..............................68
O’Leary: O’Leary Series: Excel 2002, Complete ......................69
O’Leary: O’Leary Series: Excel 2002, Introductory ..................68
O’Leary: O’Leary Series: Microsoft Office 2007 ......................64
O’Leary: O’Leary Series: Microsoft Office Access 2007, Brief ..70
O’Leary: O’Leary Series: Microsoft Office Excel 2007, Brief ...67
O’Leary: O’Leary Series: Microsoft Office Excel 2007,
Introductory ......................................................................68
O’Leary: O’Leary Series: Microsoft Office Word 2007, Brief ...66
O’Leary: O’Leary Series: Microsoft Office Word 2007
Introductory ......................................................................66
O’Leary: O’Leary Series: Powerpoint 2002 Introductory .........72
O’Leary: O’Leary Series: Word 2002 Brief...............................66
O’Leary: O’Leary Series: Word 2002 Complete .......................67
O’Leary: O’Leary Series: Word 2002 Introductory ..................67
Olson: Introduction to Information Systems Project
Management, 2e ..............................................................105
Olson: Introduction to Business Data Mining .......................109
Olson: Managerial Issues of Enterprise Resource Planning
Systems ............................................................................108
O’Malley: Schaum’s Outline of Basic Circuit Analysis, 2e ......125
188
Indexes.indd 188
11/15/06 3:05:44 PM
Author Index
P
Palm: Introduction to Mathlab 7 for Engineers...............165,174
Palmer: Schaum’s Outline of Introduction to Digital
Systems ............................................................................148
Papoulis: Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic
Processes with Errata Sheet, 4e .........................................149
Patt: Introduction to Computing Systems: From Bits and
Gates to Programming & Beyond, 3e.................................17
Paul: Introduction to Electrical Engineering, 2e .....................123
Pearlman: Programming the Web Using XML ........................30
Peck: Crystal Reports XI: The Complete Reference ..................75
Peebles: Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal
Principles, 4e ....................................................................150
Philippakis: Comprehensive Cobol, Vol II: Advanced
Cobol Programming, 4e .....................................................24
Planet3 Wireless: CWNA Certified Wireless Network
Administration Official Study Guide, 3e ............................80
Plastock: Schaum’s Outline of Computer Graphics, 2e ............49
Pollino: Hacker’s Challenge 3, 3e.............................................81
Poplawski: Objects Have Class ................................................27
Post: Database Management Systems, 3e .................................99
Post: Management Information Systems, 4e.............................97
Powers: Introduction to Fiber Optics Systems, An, 2e ...........149
Pressman: Software Engineering: A Practitioner’s
Approach, 6e ......................................................................54
Priestley: Practical Object-Oriented Design with UML, 2e .....57
Pritchard: Mathcad: A Tool for Engineers and
Scientists, 2e .............................................................165,172
Preece: Oracle SQL and Introductory PL/SQL ........................99
Proakis: Digital Communications, 4e ....................................147
Q
Quinn: Parallel Programming in C with MPI and Open MP ...42
R
Ramakrishnan: Database Management Systems, 3e ................39
Ray: Advanced Microprocessors & Peripherals: Architecture,
Programming and Interfacing ..........................................154
Rayport: Cases in E-Commerce .............................................116
Rayport: E-Commerce ..........................................................116
Rayport: Introduction to E-Commerce, 2e .....................112,115
Razavi: Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits ............129
Razavi: Design of Integrated Circuits for Optical
Communications .............................................................135
Reddy: Introduction to the Finite Element Method, An, 3e ...171
Reding: Building an E-Business .............................................115
Rich: Artificial Intelligence, 2e .................................................49
Richardson: Internet Marketing: Readings and
Online Resources .............................................................114
Rizonni: Principles and Applications of Electrical
Engineering, 5e ................................................................123
Rob: Databases: Design, Development and Deployment
Using Microsoft Access, 2e ...............................................100
Roberts: Fundamentals Signals Systems .................................142
Roberts: Signals and Systems: Analysis of Signals Through
Linear Systems .................................................................142
Roddy: Satellite Communications, 4e ....................................159
Rose: Unix: The Complete Reference, 2e .................................85
Rosen: Discrete Mathematics and Its Applications, 6e .............35
Rosenkrantz: Introduction to Probability and Statistics
for Scientists and Engineers ..............................................171
Rubin: Introduction to Engineering and the Environment ....167
S
Saadat: Power System Analysis, 2e .........................................139
Sahni: Data Structures, Algorithms, and Applications in
Java with Compiler CD ................................................33,35
Salivahanan: Digital Signal Processing...................................144
Sawyer: Chemistry for Environmental Engineering and
Science, 5e .......................................................................167
Scambray: Hacking Exposed Web Application, 2e ...................82
Schach: Introduction to Object-Oriented Analysis and
Design .......................................................................... 102
Schach: Object-Oriented and Classical Software
Engineering, 7e .............................................................54,55
Schildt: Java: A Beginner’s Guide, 4e ..................................74,80
Schildt: Java SE 6: The Complete Reference, 6e .......................74
Schildt: Swing: A Beginner’s Guide ..........................................74
Schou: Information Assurance for the Enterprise ................47,81
Schuler: Digital Signal Processing ..........................................144
Schuler: Electronics: Principles and Applications, 7e..............126
Schultz: Basic Electronics, 10e ...............................................127
Selvarajan: Optical Fiber Communication: Principles
and Systems .....................................................................148
Shapiro: SQL Server 2005: The Complete Reference, 2e .......109
Shema: Anti-Hacker Tool Kit, 3e .............................................82
Shen: Modern Processor Design ........................................41,153
Shepard: Optical Networking Crash Course ..........................156
Shrader: Electronic Communication, 6e ................................147
Sierra: SCJP Sun Certified Programmer for Java 2 Platform 5
Study Guide .......................................................................83
Sierra: SCJP Sun Certified Programmer for Java 5 Study Guide,
(Exam 310-055) .................................................................74
Silberschatz: Database System Concepts, 5e ............................39
Simchi-Levi: Designing and Managing the Supply Chain, 3e 118
Simpson: Discrete Mathematics by Example............................36
Sinclair: eBay The Smart Way, 4e...........................................120
Singh: Optoelectronics: An Introduction to Materials and
Devices ............................................................................134
Singh: Power Electronics, 2e ..................................................139
Skolnik: Introduction to Radar Systems, 3e ...........................141
Smith: Java: An Object-Oriented Language .............................27
Smith: Modern Communication Circuits, 2e.........................149
Smith: Teamwork and Project Management, 3e ..............173,175
Stephens: Engineering Statistics Demystified .........................177
Stevenson: Elements of Power System Analysis, 4e.................139
Stewart: Microsoft Excel 2007: A Professional Approach .........68
Storbacka: Customer Relationship Management ...................119
Structural Dynamics Research Corporation:
I-DEAS Student Guide, 2e ..............................................162
Symes: Video Compression Demystified ................................156
Sze: VLSI Technology, 2e .......................................................134
189
Indexes.indd 189
11/15/06 3:05:45 PM
Author Index
T
Tabak: Advanced Microprocessors, 2e ...............................60,160
Tan: C Programming for Engineering and Computer Science
(B.E.S.T. Series) ...................................................18,166,175
Taub: Digital Integrated Electronics .......................................130
Taylor: DVD Demystified, 3e ................................................155
Thompson: Information Technology and Management, 2e......98
Tittel: Schaum’s Easy Outline of XML .....................................30
Tittel: Schaum’s Outline of Computer Networking..................45
Tokheim: Digital Electronics: Principles and
Applications, 7e ...............................................................126
Toledo: Schaum’s Outline of Introduction to Computer
Science ...............................................................................18
Triad Interactive: Simnet for Office 2003 Release 2
Standard Edition ................................................................72
Tront: Pspice for Basic Circuit Analysis, 2e ............................124
Tront: Pspice for Basic Microelectronics .................................125
Tsang: Object-Oriented Technology ........................................56
Tucker: Programming Languages, 2e .......................................36
Tummala: System on Package ................................................155
Tymann: Schaum’s Outline of Principles of Computer
Science ...............................................................................17
U
Ullman: Mechanical Design Process, The, 3e .........................162
V
Van der Veer: Human Computer Interaction:
Multi-Disciplinary Approach .............................................50
Van Horn: Information Systems Solutions: A Project
Approach ...........................................................................97
Vaughan: Multimedia: Making It Work, 7e .............................76
Velte: Cisco: A Beginner’s Guide, 4e ........................................78
Venkataramani: Digital Signal Processors: Architecture,
Programming and Applications ........................................143
W
Whitten: Introduction to Systems Analysis and Design .........100
Whitten: Systems Analysis and Design Methods, 7e ..............100
Willard: HTML: A Beginner’s Guide, 3e .................................80
Williams: Using Information Technology, 7e ...........................88
Whiteley: E-Commerce: Strategy, Technologies and
Applications .....................................................................112
Wrightson: Introduction to Unix.............................................43
Wu: Comprehensive Introduction to Object-Oriented
Programming with Java, A .................................................24
Wu: Introduction to Object-Oriented Programming
with Java, 4e, An ................................................................26
X
Xavier: World Wide Web Design with HTML ........................30
Y
Young: Windows Vista: The Complete Reference.....................85
Yu: Assembly Language Programming and Organization of
the IBM PC .......................................................................40
Z
Zamir: C++ Primer for Non C Programmers ...........................20
Zbar: Basic Electricity: A Text-Lab Manual, 7e ......................138
Zbar: Electricity/Electronics Fundamentals: A Text-Lab
Manual, 4e .......................................................................139
Zwass: Foundations of Information Systems ............................98
190
Indexes.indd 190
11/15/06 3:05:46 PM

Computer Science - McGraw

Transcription

Similar documents

International Edition - McGraw

- McGraw

dark horse comics - Diamond Book Distributors

Management - McGraw

THE ILLOCUTIONARY ACTS FOUND IN THE LYRICS OF LINKIN

Lifetouch Yearbooks®. We`ll make it easy, you`ll make it great.

WRAP-IT-UP MEAL SOUTHERN-STyLE DRUMMERS MONSTER

Report #13-11-1441 - Halifax Regional School Board

l - The World Bank

Garden Arch

Untitled

real weddings - The Corinthian

REINWARDTIA_13_1_101209 + dftar isi+new